MIWP

About the Mechanical Integrity Work
Process
The Mechanical Integrity Work Process is focused on mitigating the risk of loss of
containment by implementing condition assessment activities. The Mechanical Integrity
Work Process consists of the steps that are outlined in the following table.
Step Description
Details
Collect or update
equipment and
location data.
Allows you to gather the data that is required to perform a

degradation mechanism review, calculate risk, and plan and
execute the appropriate activities.
Identify potential
degradation
mechanisms.
Allows you to identify and quantify the types and locations of

degradation that are occurring in your equipment and their
components. After doing so, the probability of failure can be
calculated so that you can plan effective activities.
Perform a risk
analysis.
Allows you to calculate risk for equipment and their

components so that you can optimize and prioritize the
condition monitoring activities that will help mitigate the risks.
Define a mitigation Allows you to use risk results and strategy rules to generate
strategy.
recommendations to mitigate risk.
Execute the strategy. Allows you to perform recommended inspection or test

activities so that you can mitigate the risk associated with each
potential degradation mechanisms.
Evaluate and
communicate
results.
Allows you to evaluate existing data to obtain better

information about a piece of equipment's or location's condition
so you can reduce uncertainty and risk.
The following image shows an illustration of how all the steps in the Mechanical
Integrity Work Process relate to one another. Each step in the work process is represented
by a red circle. In addition, you can see that the entire work process is built upon the
APM Foundation Work Process, whose components are represented by the blue boxes.
Within the Meridium APM product, each of the steps listed above can be accomplished
using one or more of the following modules:
Risk Based Inspection (RBI)

Inspection Management
Thickness Monitoring (TM)
NR13
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
Mechanical Integrity System

Requirements
Multiple licenses are required to take advantage of Mechanical Integrity modules. In
addition to the following licenses, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM
system architecture:
Risk Based Inspection (RBI)

Thickness Monitoring (TM)
NR13
After you have configured the basic system architecture and licensed these modules, you
will need to perform configuration steps for each module.
First-Time Deployment Workflow

Deploying and configuring the Mechanical Integrity Work Process for the first time
includes completing multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. All of the
steps are required to fully implement the Mechanical Integrity Work Process. These steps
provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure Mechanical Integrity
with the basic Meridium APM system architecture
Step Task
1
Configure the Risk Based Inspection

module.
Configure the Inspection Management

module.
Configure the Thickness Monitoring

module.
Upgrade Workflow
You can upgrade to V3.6.0.0.0 using the instructions that are provided in the Installation,
Upgrade, and Configuration documentation for each Mechanical Integrity module:
Risk Based Inspection

Thickness Monitoring
Mechanical Integrity User Instructions

With the exception of instructions on using the navigation bar that is displayed on various
pages in Mechanical Integrity modules, the user instructions for Mechanical Integrity
modules are provided in the documentation for the related module. Documentation for
the Mechanical Integrity dashboard is provided in the Mechanical Integrity Reference
Information documentation.
About Navigating Mechanical Integrity

Modules
In place of the site map, a navigation bar is provided on various pages throughout
Mechanical Integrity (MI) modules and allows you to:
Select the records that you want to work with on various pages throughout MI
modules.
Navigate to various pages and features within and across MI modules.
The navigation bar displays the following levels:
Record
Work Process
Hierarchy Level
The record level of the navigation bar displays options that correspond with the records
that you are working with on the current page. A red outline has been added to the
following image to highlight the record level of the navigation bar.
The record level is displayed only on certain pages throughout MI modules. The text that
is displayed for each option will vary, depending upon the record that you select for that
option. The documentation refers to these options and the lists that are displayed when
you click the
terms:
button that is displayed to the left of each option using the following
Unit: Displays a list of the Functional Location records in your database whose Is
a Unit? field is set to True and the value Undefined Unit. When you access a page
that displays the navigation bar for a record that is not linked to one of these
Functional Location records, the value Undefined Unit is selected in this list by
default. The Unit option and list are enabled only when the RBI license is active.
The image at the beginning of this topic shows the Functional Location record RBITUNIT-A specified for the Unit option, and the following image shows this same record
selected in the Unit list.
RBI System:
Displays a list of all RBI System records in your database that are linked
to the Functional Location record selected in the Unit list and to which one
or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
-or1.
o
Displays the text Undefined System if the value Undefined Unit is

selected in the Unit list or an RBI System record is not linked to the
Functional Location record that is selected in the Unit list.
When you select in the Unit list a Functional Location record that is linked to only one
RBI System record, the RBI System record is selected in the RBI System list
automatically. The RBI System option and list are enabled only when the RBI license is
active.
The image at the beginning of this topic shows the RBI System record RBISYS-880
specified for the RBI System option, and the following image shows this same record
selected in the RBI System list.
Equipment: Displays the following lists, depending upon whether or not the RBI
license is active:
When the RBI license is active, displays a list of all Equipment records in
your database that are linked:
o
To the RBI System record that is selected in the RBI System list.
-or1.
o
Directly to the Functional Location record selected in the Unit list

when an RBI System is not selected in the RBI System list.
When the RBI license is not active, displays a list of all Equipment records
in your database.
When a value is not selected in the Equipment list, the text (Select Asset) is displayed.
The image at the beginning of this topic shows the Equipment record HXST specified for
the Equipment option, and the following image shows this same record selected in the
Equipment list.
Throughout the documentation, the lists that are displayed for navigation bar options are
referred to using the name of the corresponding option. For example, the lists that are
displayed for the Unit, RBI System, and Equipment options are referred to as the Unit,
RBI System, and Equipment lists respectively.
For each list that displays more than ten records, a text box is displayed above the list that
you can use to search for records in the list. To the right of the text box, the
button is
displayed and clears any text that you have typed in the text box. The image of the Unit
list in this topic shows an example of this text box.
Work Process Level

The Work Process level of the navigation bar displays options that correspond with the
Mechanical Integrity Work Process. Specifically, this level displays options that
correspond with the step in the Mechanical Integrity Work Process that is associated with
the page that you are currently viewing. A red outline has been added to the following
image to highlight the Work Process-level of the navigation bar.
When the record level of the navigation bar is displayed, the Work Process level of the
navigation bar is displayed below the record level, as shown in the preceding image. The
text that is displayed for each option will vary, depending upon your selection for that
option. The documentation refers to these options and the submenus that are displayed
when you click the
following terms:
button that is displayed to the left of each option using the
Work Process: Displays the text Mechanical Integrity, which indicates that the
Mechanical Integrity Work Process is associated with this level of the navigation
bar. This option is always disabled.
Work Process Step: Displays text that corresponds with the step(s) in the
Mechanical Integrity Work Process that are associated with the page that you are
currently viewing, and displays a submenu of links, organized according to the
steps in the Mechanical Integrity Work Process.
The following image shows an example of the Work Process Step submenu that is
displayed when you are working on the RBI Asset View or RBI Unit View page.
The following text that corresponds with the following step(s) in the Mechanical Integrity
Work Process can be displayed for the Work Process Step option.
Text displayed for Work
Process Step option
Corresponding step(s) in the

Mechanical Integrity Work Process
Collect Asset Data
Collect or Update Asset Data

Identify Potential Degradation
Mechanisms
Define DMs and Perform

Risk Analysis
Perform Risk Analysis
Defined Mitigation
Strategy
Define Mitigation Strategy
Execute Strategy
Execute Strategy
Evaluate Results
Evaluate and Communicate Results
In image at the beginning of this topic, the Work Process step Define DMs and
Perform Risk Analysis is specified, (i.e., the text Define DMs and Perform Risk
Analysis is displayed for the Work Process Step option).
Task: Displays text that corresponds with the task that you are completing for the
specified step in the Work Process, and displays a submenu of links that
correspond with that step in the Work Process. The text that is displayed for the
Task option corresponds with the labels of each hyperlink that is displayed on the
Work Process Step submenu.
In the image at the beginning of this topic, the task RBI Analysis is specified, (i.e., the
text RBI Analysis is displayed for the Task option).
The following image shows an example of the Task submenu that is displayed when the
Work Process step RBI Analysis is specified.
Throughout the documentation, the submenus that are displayed for navigation bar
options are referred to using the name of the corresponding option. For example, the
submenus that are displayed for the Work Process Step and Task options are referred to as
the Work Process Step and Task submenus respectively.
Pages that Display the Navigation Bar

Various pages throughout Mechanical integrity modules display the navigation bar. The
record hierarchy level of the navigation bar is displayed only on some pages, but it is
displayed only after you have selected records that correspond with this level of the
navigation bar. Additionally, when you are working on pages that are not specific to the
records represented on the record level of the navigation bar, this level is disabled.
The following table lists the pages, organized by module, on which the navigation bar is
displayed, whether or not the record level is displayed after you have selected to work
with records that correspond with this level of the navigation bar, and whether or not the
record level is enabled when it is displayed.
Record level
displayed?
Record level
enabled?
RBI Asset View
Yes
Yes
RBI Component List
No
N/A
RBI Export and Import
Yes
No
RBI System List
No
N/A
RBI Unit View
Yes
Yes
Page
Inspection Finding Checklist
Yes
No
Inspection History Summary Query
Yes
Yes
Inspection Manage Documents
Yes
No
Inspection Manage Tasks
No
N/A
Inspection Profile
Yes
Yes
Manage Work Packs
Yes
No
Published Inspection Documents
Yes
Yes
Review and Approve Inspection

Documents
Yes
No
T-Min Calculations
Yes
Yes
TM Analysis
Yes
Yes
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry Yes
Yes
TM Measurement Data Entry
Yes
Yes
TM Quick View
Yes
Yes
TM TMLs/Measurements
Yes
Yes
About Navigation Bar Submenus

Navigation to various areas within and across Mechanical Integrity modules using the
Work Process Step and Task submenus are determined by license activation and security
permissions. As such, the links that appear on these submenus are conditionally enabled
according to the following criteria:
In order for any link to be enabled, the license for the module that corresponds
with that link must be active.
In order for certain links to be enabled, in addition to the license for the
corresponding module being active, the appropriate security permissions must be
associated with your Security User account.
The link that corresponds with the page that you are currently viewing will always
disabled.
The documentation assumes that all Mechanical Integrity users are assigned to the MI
Everyone Security Group at a minimum. The following table provides details on:
The links that appear on the Work Process Step and Task submenus, organized
according to the applicable step in the Mechanical Integrity Work Process.
The corresponding page or feature to which the links provide access.
The type of permissions that you must have to entity and relationship families,
(beyond what is provided via membership in the MI Everyone Security Group),
unless otherwise noted, in order to access the page or feature.
Whether or not the link is conditionally enabled based upon the security
permissions associated with your Security User account. When you click a link
that is associated with a page or feature to which you do not have the necessary
security permissions, an error message is displayed, indicating that you do not
have the necessary security permissions to access the page or feature.
Link
Page/feature
Entity family permissions

required
Conditionally
Relationship family enabled based
permissions required upon
security?
Collect Asset Data

View permissions to the
following families:
Export and
RBI Export and
Import RBI Data Import page
RBI Components
RBI System
View permissions to
the following
families:
Has RBI
Components
Has RBI
System
Yes
Defined DMs and Perform Risk Analysis

View permissions to
the following
families:
following families:
RBI Analysis
EquipmentTypes
Potential
Degradation
Mechanisms
RBI Asset View page
RBI Components
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Has
Degradation
Mechanisms
Has Potential
Degradation
Mechanisms
Has RBI
Components
Has RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Yes
Has
Recommendati
ons
View permissions to
the following
families:

following families:
Mass RBI
Analysis
RBI Review
Analyses page
RBI Components
RBI System
Has RBI
Components
Has RBI
System
Yes
Define Mitigation Strategy

You be a Meridium APM
Super User or a member of
the MI Thickness
T-Min Calculator T-Min Calculations
Monitoring Inspection
page
Group to access the T-Min
Calculations page.
You be a Meridium
APM Super User or a
member of the MI
Thickness Monitoring No
Inspection Group to
access the T-Min
Calculations page.
View permissions to
the following
families:
Manage Work
Packs
Manage Work Packs View permissions to the

page
Work Pack family
Has Tasks
Has Work
Pack
Is Executed
By
Is Planned By
No
Manage
Inspection Tasks
Task List page

Task family
N/A
No
Manage Profiles
Inspection Profile
page

Inspection Method family
View permissions to
the Has Inspection
Method family
No

following families:
Manage RBI
Recommendation
Recommendations Management page
RBI
Recommendation
View permissions to
the Has Consolidated
Yes
Recommendations
family
Task
following families:
Mass RBI
Recommendation
Recommendation
Management page
Management
Manage
Inspection
Documents
Execute Strategy
Inspection History
Summary Query
page
RBI
Recommendation
Task
N/A
View permissions to
the Has Consolidated
Yes
Recommendations
family
N/A
No

following families:
Datalogger
Select a Device and

Properties dialog
box
Device
Device Data
Presentation
Device Mapping
Device Mapping
Family
Device Mapping
Field
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Thickness
Measurement
View permissions to
the following
families:
Device Has
Send
Presentation
No
Device Has
Receive
Presentation
View permissions to
the following
families:
TMLs and
Measurements
TM
TMLs/Measurements Corrosion Analysis Settings
page
family
Has
Datapoints
The following permissions View permissions to
to the following families: the following
families:
View permissions to
Has Corrosion
the Corrosion
Analysis
Analysis Settings
Has Corrosion No
family
Analysis
Update, Insert, or
Settings
Delete permissions
Has
to the Thickness
Measurement family
Datapoints
Initial
TM Initial
Measurement Data Measurement Data
Entry
Entry page
Has Corrosion
Analysis
Has Corrosion No
Analysis
Settings
View permissions to
The following permissions the following
to the following families: families:
Measurement Data TM Measurement

Entry
Data Entry page
Bulk Analyze
Thickness
Monitoring - Bulk
Analyze window
Create Inspection
Event Builder
Document
View permissions to
the Corrosion
Analysis Settings
family
Update, Insert, or
Delete permissions
to the Thickness
Measurement family
Has Corrosion
Analysis
Has Corrosion No
Analysis
Settings
Has
Datapoints
You be a Meridium APM

Super User or a member of
the MI Thickness
Monitoring Inspection
Group to access the
Thickness Monitoring Bulk Analyze window.
You be a Meridium
APM Super User or a
member of the MI
No
Inspection Group to
access the Thickness
Monitoring - Bulk
Analyze window.
View, Update, and Insert,

permissions to the
Inspection family for which
you want to create a record.
View, Update, and

Insert permissions to
No
the Has Inspection
family
Evaluate Results
View permissions to
the following
families:
Corrosion
Analysis
Summary
Quick View
TM Analysis page

Corrosion Analysis Settings
family

TM Quick View page following families:
Thickness
Measurement
Has Corrosion
Analysis
No
Settings
Has Corrosion
Analyses
View permissions to
the Has Datapoints
family
No
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Review and
Approve
Inspections
Review and Approve

Inspection
N/A
Documents page
N/A
No
Published
Inspections
Published Inspection
N/A
Documents page
N/A
No
While the preceding table lists the minimum privileges necessary to access pages and
features via the navigation bar, some additional privileges are necessary to use
functionality that is provided on some pages. The following table lists these pages, the
necessary additional privileges, and the associated functionality.
Page
Entity family permissions required

View permissions to the following
families:
RBI Asset
View page
RBI Consequence Evaluation

RBI Degradation Mechanism
Evaluation
RepresentativeFluids
Risk Translation
Relationship family
permissions required
View privileges to the
following families:
Has
Consequence
Evaluation
Has RBI
Degradation
Mechanism
Evaluation
View privileges to the

Has Findings or
Checklist Has Findings
Update privileges to the General
Inspection
family, depending upon
Finding or Checklist Finding family,
History
which type of record
depending upon which of these
Summary
(General Finding or
records is linked to the Inspection
Query page
Checklist Finding) is
record that you want to view.
linked to the Inspection
record that you want to
view.
Associated
functionality
To view RBI
Criticality Analysis
records that are
linked to Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
records in the RBI
Explorer pane.
To use the Load

Inspection
hyperlink that
appears in the
Action column in
the grid on the
Inspection History
Summary Query
page to open the
Inspection record in
Record Manager.
View, Update, Insert, and Delete

privileges to the following families:
Inspection
Profile
page
Inspection Method
Inspection Profile
View, Update, Insert,

and Delete privileges to
the following families:
Has Inspection
Method
Has Inspection
Profile families.
To use the full

functionality of this
page.
About Using the Navigation Bar

Depending upon your security permissions and which MI module licenses are active, you
can use the navigation bar to:
Select the records that you want to work with on various pages throughout MI
modules.
Navigate to various pages and features within and across MI modules.
The documentation assumes that the following licenses are active, and that you have the
necessary security permissions to access all pages and features available via the
navigation bar:

Selecting Records That You Want to

Work With In MI Modules
You can use the record level of the navigation bar to select the records that you want to
work with on various pages throughout MI modules.
For example, suppose that you are working with the RBI Analysis that is associated with
the Equipment record 10006120 that is linked to the RBI System record RBISYS-880 on
the RBI Asset View page, as shown in the following image.
Now, suppose that you want to work with the RBI Analysis that is associated with the
Equipment record HXST 46 that is linked to the RBI System record RBISYS-880. Using
the record level of the navigation bar, you could select the Equipment record HXST 46 in
the Equipment list, and the RBI Asset View page will be refreshed to display information
for that Equipment record, as shown in the following image.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing a page that displays the
navigation bar.
To select records that you want to work with in MI modules:
On the record level of the navigation bar, in the lists displayed for the Unit, RBI
System, or Equipment options, select the records that you want to work with on
the current page.
The page is refreshed according to your selections.
Navigating Within and Across Modules

You can use the navigation bar to navigate to other pages and features within and across
Mechanical Integrity modules.
For example, suppose that you are working with the RBI Analysis that is associated with
the Equipment record 10006120 on the RBI Asset View page, as shown in the following
image.
Continuing with the example, suppose that you want to view data that you have recorded
in TM for this Equipment record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. When you click
the TMLs and Measurements link on the Task submenu, the TM TMLs/Measurements
page is displayed for the Equipment record 10006120, as shown in the following image.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing a page that displays the
navigation bar.
To navigate within and across modules:
On the Work Process level of the navigation bar, on the Work Process Step or
Task submenus, click the link that corresponds with the page to which you want to
navigate.
The page that corresponds with the link that you clicked is displayed.
Accessing the Mechanical Integrity

Dashboard
The Mechanical Integrity dashboard serves as an example of how you can configure a
dashboard to display information about pieces of equipment and locations that you
analyze in Mechanical Integrity modules.
To access the Mechanical Integrity dashboard:
On the Meridium APM Framework main menu, click Go To, point to Mechanical
Integrity, and then click Dashboard.
The Mechanical Integrity dashboard is displayed on the Dashboard page.
Aspects of the Mechanical Integrity

Dashboard
The Mechanical Integrity dashboard serves solely as an example of how you can
configure a dashboard to display information about equipment and locations that you
analyze in Mechanical Integrity modules. It is expected that all customers will configure
the Mechanical Integrity dashboard to suit their individual needs. The documentation
does not provide additional details on configuring the Mechanical Integrity dashboard,
however, details on working with dashboards in general, the type of sections that are
displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard, and the underlying queries that are used
to determine their content are provided. You can use this documentation as a starting
point for customizing the Mechanical Integrity dashboard, if desired.
Sections Displayed on the Baseline

Mechanical Integrity Dashboard
The following table lists the type of dashboard section that corresponds with each section
that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard.
Section type
Baseline Mechanical Integrity
dashboard section
Equipment Measures
Measures - Linked
Equipment Outside Risk Policy
List - Single Column
General Measures
Measures - General
Inspection Group Monitor
Measures - General
Pending RBI Recommendations
List - Summary
RBI Risk Matrix
RBI Risk Matrix
Note: This section is specific to the Mechanical

Integrity dashboard.
Inspection Strategy
Records in the Inspection Strategy family store information and guidelines for
performing various types of inspections on equipment and locations that you analyze
using the RBI and Inspection modules. Some Inspection Strategy values are used to
populate values in:
RBI Recommendation records that are generated automatically in the RBI

module.
Inspection records that are used in the Inspection module.
The following table provides a list and description of the fields that exist in the Inspection
Strategy family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of
these fields.
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Field
This field is populated with a list of
System Codes that are stored in the
INSPECTION CONFIDENCE
System Code table.
Inspection
Confidence
A value that indicates

how effective prior
inspections were at
Character identifying the
degradation mechanism
and the rate of
degradation.
The value in this field is populated in

the Inspection Confidence field in
Inspection records whose:
Type of Inspection value

corresponds with the value in
the Inspection Task Type field
in the Inspection Strategy
record.
Extent value corresponds with

the value in the Inspection
Extent field in the Inspection
Strategy record.
Inspection
Extent
The extent to which the

Character inspection was
performed.
This field is populated with a list of

MI_INSPECTION_EXTENT System
Code table.
Inspection
Strategy
Description
A description of the
Character
inspection.

the Recommendation Basis field in
RBI Recommendation records that are
generated automatically.
Inspection
Strategy ID
The Record ID of the

Character Inspection Strategy
record.
Inspection
Task Type
You must specify a unique value in

this field. This value is used to
identify the Inspection Strategy
record.
This field is populated with a list of all
Task Types records whose Reference
field contains the value Inspection
Strategy
(INSPECTION_STRATEGY).

The type of inspection
that corresponds with the the:
Character
Inspection Strategy
Task Type field in RBI
record.
Recommendation and
Inspection Task records.
Type of Inspection field in

Inspection records.
When the Use Calculated Data field is

set to False, the value in this field is
Recommended
The interval at which the
used to populate the Recommended
Inspection
Number inspection should be
Interval Scope field in RBI
Interval
performed.
Recommendation records that are
generated automatically.
Information related to the
scope of the inspection, The value in this field is populated in
Recommended Text
including:
Inspection
the Recommended Inspection Scope
Scope
field in RBI Recommendation records
A description of that are generated automatically.
tasks that the
inspector should
perform.
The minimum
information that
should be returned
by the inspection.
Credentials that
the inspector is
required to have.
This field is set to False by default.
When this field is set to:
True, the Recommended

Interval Scope field in the RBI
Recommendation record is
populated with the value in the
Estimated Half Life field in the
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval. record that is
linked to the associated RBI
Criticality Analysis record.
False, the value in the

Recommended Interval Scope
field is populated with the
value in the Recommended
Inspection Interval field.
Determines how the

Recommended Interval
Use Calculated
Scope field is populated
Logical
Data
in RBI Recommendation
records that are generated
automatically.
About the Mechanical Integrity Catalog

Folder Structure
The following topics contain information about the folders that are stored in the Catalog
location \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Mechanical Integrity, their content, and details on
how this content can be used by Mechanical Integrity (MI) users. This information is
intended to serve as a quick reference to details that are provided elsewhere in the MI
documentation.
Dashboard Folder
Queries Folder
Note: All of the Public folders exist by default. Any item in a Public folder is also
available in the corresponding Baseline folder. Throughout this documentation, we refer
to items in the Public folder.
Dashboard Folder
The dashboard listed in the following table is stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Mechanical Integrity\Dashboard. In this table, the value
listed in the Dashboard column refers to the dashboard name. The baseline dashboard
caption is the same as the dashboard name.
Dashboard
Behavior and Usage
Mechanical Integrity
Dashboard
Displays the baseline Mechanical Integrity dashboard on the

Dashboard page.
About the Queries Folder

The Queries folder that is stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Mechanical Integrity contains the following subfolders:
Navigation Bar Queries

Dashboard Queries
Navigation Bar Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Mechanical Integrity\ Queries\Navigation Bar Queries. In
this table, the values listed in the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline
query captions are the same as the query names.
Query
All Assets
Behavior and Usage

Returns all Equipment records in your database. The results of this query are
used to populate the Equipment list that is accessed via the navigation bar when
the Risk Based Inspection license is not active.
Returns the following items, depending upon the types of records that you have
created:
Functional Location, RBI System, and Equipment records that are

linked to one another.
-or-
Assets in
Hierarchy
Functional Location and Equipment records that are linked to one

another but are not linked to RBI System records.
-or-
Equipment records that are not linked to RBI System or Functional

Location records.
The results of this query are used to populate the Unit, RBI System, and
Equipment lists that are accessed via the navigation bar when the Risk Based
Inspection license is active.
Dashboard Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Mechanical Integrity\Queries\Dashboard Queries. In this
table, the values listed in the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query
captions are the same as the query names.
Query
Data Quality
Behavior and Usage

Used to return results that are displayed for the Data Quality measure
that is displayed in the General Measures section that is displayed on
the Mechanical Integrity dashboard. In the baseline database, this

query is configured to return Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records whose Component Type value is any value other than Heat
Exchanger-Bundle and when any of the following conditions related
to other Criticality Calculator RBI Components values are true:
Degradation Rates
Environmental
Consequence
Operating Pressure is null or is greater than Design Pressure.

Operating Temperature is null or is greater than Design
Temperature.
Diameter is null or 0 (zero).
Expected Internal Corrosion is null or 0 (zero).
Inventory is null.
Process Fluid is null.
Weld Joint Effy is null.
Nominal Thickness is null or 0 (zero).
Toxic Mixture is True.
Toxic Model is null.
Percent toxic is 0 (zero).
Used to return results that are displayed for the Degradation Rates
measure that is displayed in the General Measures section that is
displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard. In the baseline
database, this query is configured to return Equipment records that are
linked to Asset Corrosion Analysis records whose Average Corrosion
Rate value is greater than the BM Estimate Rate value in the
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. record associated with that
Equipment record.
Used to return results that are displayed for the Environmental
Consequence measure that is displayed in the Equipment Measures
section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard. In the
baseline database this query:
Is configured to return Equipment records that are associated

with RBI Criticality Analysis records whose Environ Crack
Prob Cat field contains a value other than N/A.
Contains a prompt on the Equipment Entity Key.
Equipment Outside
Risk Policy
Flammable
Consequence
Used to return results that are displayed in the Equipment Outside

Risk Policy section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity
dashboard. In the baseline database, this query is configured to return
Equipment records that are linked to RBI Criticality Analysis records
whose Risk Category value corresponds with the value High in the
Criticality Rating field.
Used to return results that are displayed for the Flammable
baseline database, this query:

with RBI Criticality Analysis records whose Flamm Conseq
Cat field contains a value other than N/A.
Inspections
Completed
Used to return results that are displayed for the Inspections Completed
in Last 30 Days measure that is displayed in the General Measures
baseline database, this query is configured to return Equipment
records that are linked to Inspection records whose Completion Date
field contains a value that corresponds with today's date or a date
within the last 30 days.
Inspections Due
Used to return results that are displayed for the Inspections Due in
Next 30 Days measure that is displayed in the General Measures
records that are linked to Inspection Task records whose Next Date
value corresponds with within the next 30 days.
Used to return results that are displayed for the Overdue Inspections
measure that is displayed in the General Measures section that is
Inspections Overdue
linked to Inspection Task records whose Next Date value corresponds
with today's date or a date before today's date.
Pending
Recommendations
Used to return results that are displayed in the Pending RBI

Recommendations section that is displayed on the Mechanical
Integrity dashboard. In the baseline database, this query is configured
to return Equipment records that are linked to RBI Recommendation
records that are in the Proposed state.
Used to return results that are displayed in the Inspection Group

Monitor section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity
dashboard. In the baseline database, this query is configured to return:
Percentage Change in
External DM for
Piping
The number of Criticality Calculator RBI Components records

in the database whose Component Type field contains any
value that includes the word Pipe.
-and-
The percentage of those Criticality Calculator RBI

Components records whose CUI Inspection Priority Change
field is set to True.
External DM for
Tanks

in the database whose Component Type field contains the
value Storage Tank.
-and-

Percentage Change in Monitor section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity
External DM for
Vessels
in the database whose Component Type field contains any of
the following values:
o Air Cooled Exchanger-Header
Column-Bottom
Column-Middle
Column-Top
Filter
Heat Exchanger-Channel
Heat-Exchanger-Shell
Pressure Vessel
Reactor
-andThe percentage of those Criticality Calculator RBI

Internal DM for
Piping

in the database whose Component Type field contains any
value that includes the word Pipe.
-and-

Components records whose Int. Corr. Inspection Priority
Change field is set to True.
Internal DM for
Tanks

in the database whose Component Type field contains the
value Storage Tank.
-and-

Percentage Change in Monitor section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity
Internal DM for
Vessels
in the database whose Component Type field contains any of
o Air Cooled Exchanger-Header
Column-Bottom
Column-Middle
Column-Top
Filter
Heat-Exchanger-Shell
Pressure Vessel
Reactor
-andThe percentage of those Criticality Calculator RBI

Used to return results that are displayed for the Production Loss
baseline database, this query:
Production Loss
Consequence

with RBI Criticality Analysis records whose Production Loss
Conseq Categ field contains a value other than N/A.
Recommendations
Without Tasks
Used to return results that are displayed for the Comparison of Tasks
to Recommendations measure that is displayed in the General
Measures section that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity
dashboard. In the baseline database, this query is configured to return
Equipment records that are not linked to at least one Inspection Task
record.
Risk Matrix
Used to return results that are displayed in the RBI Risk Matrix section
that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard. In the
records that are associated with an RBI Criticality Analysis record that
is in the Risk Completed state and whose Risk Category field contains
a value.
Used to return results that are displayed for the Analyses Requiring
Calculation measure that is displayed in the General Measures section
that is displayed on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard. In the
baseline database, this query is configured to return RBI Criticality
Analysis records that are:
Task Complete
Greater Than Risk
Assessment
-and
Toxic Consequence
In the Risk Completed State.
Linked to an Inspection record whose Completion Date value

corresponds with a date that is after the Date Criticality
Calculated value in the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
Used to return results that are displayed for the Toxic Consequence
measure that is displayed in the Equipment Measures section that is
associated with RBI Criticality Analysis records whose Toxic Conseq
Cat field contains a value other than N/A.
System Code Tables Used by MI

Modules
The following System Code tables are used by Mechanical Integrity modules:
Table ID
INSPECTION
CONFIDENCE
Table Description
Function
Used to populate the Inspection

Inspection Confidence Confidence list in Inspection Strategy
records.
MI_INSPECTION_EXTE Extent values for

NT
Inspection Strategies
Used to populate the Inspection Extent

list in Inspection Strategy records.
About NR13
NR13 is a Brazilian Regulatory Standard issued by the Department of Labor, applicable
only to sites in Brazil. Its general purpose is to ensure safety in all aspects of designing,
installing, operating, and maintaining certain types of equipment.
The NR13 module expands Meridium APM's baseline function to support the collecting
and storing of technical data that is required to create NR13-compliant inspection reports.
The module also adds two new inspection reports specifically for NR13 inspections.
The NR13 module is enabled by the NR13 license.
You can download the NR13 help documentation here (PDF).
Overview of Risk Based Inspection

Risk Based Inspection (RBI) allows you analyze the risk of a piece of equipment's
components failing due to specific degradation mechanisms. Using RBI, you can set up
RBI Systems to organize the components that you want to analyze. You will need to
group the components according to the degradation mechanisms that they share, where
each group of components is considered a separate RBI Component.
Within an RBI System, you can begin creating RBI Analyses for each of the RBI
Components that belong to the RBI System. Each analysis will yield values indicating the
overall risk of the RBI Component failing due to the degradation mechanisms that are
defined for it.
After you conduct an RBI Analysis, if the risk values are unacceptable, you can analyze
hypothetical scenarios using What If Analyses and Future Risk Analyses to see how
additional actions or factors might affect the risk. For example, you might create a What
If Analysis to see what the risk level would be if you changed the operating pressure. Or,
you might create a Future Risk Analysis to see what the risk level might be in five years.
Based on the analysis results, you can create RBI Recommendation records to capture
recommended actions that might lower the risk associated with an RBI Component. You
can then create Task records or SAP Notifications from those RBI Recommendation
records to track the work and make sure that the recommended actions are implemented.
After the recommended actions are implemented, you can conduct a new RBI Analysis to
determine if the new operating procedures or environment have actually reduced the risk.
D
RBI System Requirements

The Risk Based Inspection license is required to take advantage of RBI functionality. In
addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Hint: Details on the system requirements for the basic architecture and activating
licenses can be found in the Installation, Upgrade, and System Administration section of
the Meridium APM Help system.
After you have installed and configured the basic system architecture, you will need to
perform some configuration tasks specifically for the RBI feature.
Options for Using RBI

In the baseline RBI product, RBI and ASM are integrated, which allows you to transfer
RBI Analysis data to an Asset Strategy in ASM.
Note: In order for this integration to work correctly, the ASM module must be active.
Certain features in RBI are provided so that the ASM integration will work correctly. For
example, on the RBI Asset View page, the Component Tasks menu contains the Promote
to ASM link, which allows you to transfer RBI Analysis data to ASM.
If desired, using an RBI administrative option, you can disable the ASM integration with
RBI. Doing so will cause some RBI features and functionality to be disabled or
unavailable because they do not apply to your workflow. Throughout this documentation,
we note where features are available only if ASM integration is enabled.
If you accept the baseline configuration and keep the integration between RBI and ASM,
you will need to make some additional decisions about how you want RBI to work.
Depending upon your decisions, you will need to complete the appropriate administrative
tasks to support the desired functionality.
Whether or not you choose to integrate RBI with ASM is up to you and will depend upon
how you intend to use RBI. If, for example, you plan to create a custom calculator and
you are already using ASM, you will probably want to integrate your RBI data with
ASM. If, however, you plan to accept the Meridium APM system calculations and create
RBI Recommendation records to capture recommended actions, you might choose to
postpone integration with ASM.
Overview of the RBI Data Model

The Meridium APM Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module allows you to create RBI
Analyses that contain calculated data about RBI Components. RBI Criticality Analysis
records are linked to Criticality Calculator RBI Components records. When you create a
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, you will need to choose the main
Equipment record to which it will be linked. Doing so allows some values from the
Equipment record to be copied to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record upon
creation.
You can also link each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to an RBI System
record that represents the RBI System in which the corresponding RBI Components
participate.
For instance, consider a house (i.e., a unit) that contains an electrical system and a
plumbing system. As shown in the following image, a water heater (i.e., a piece of
equipment) is part of the electrical system and the plumbing system.
In this case, because the water heater participates in two systems, you would need to
divide the water heater into logical groups of components, where each of those groups of
components belongs to one of the two systems. Each group of components would
represent a single RBI Component, which would be defined by a single Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, and each of those Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records would be linked to the main Equipment record representing the
water heater. In addition, each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record can be
linked to the RBI System record that represents the RBI System to which the
corresponding RBI Components belong.
Click here to see an example of the records that your database might contain if you were
to conduct an RBI Analysis on the water heater that is used in the previous example.
Illustration of the Meridium APM RBI

Data Model
The following image provides a diagram of the entity families and relationship families
involved in the RBI workflow. In the image:
Black arrows and boxes represent entity families, relationship families, and
associated relationship definitions that are configured in the baseline database and
do not require customization for baseline functionality to work.
Red arrows and boxes represent entity families, relationship families, and
associated relationship definitions that require customization if you want to
implement the workflow that involves them. In some cases, you might need to
create the relationship family, relationship definition, or entity family from scratch
if you want to implement the associated functionality.
Red text within a box represents a term that is used throughout this documentation
to refer to a record belonging to the associated entity family and the concept that
this record represents within the RBI module.
While the data model illustration shows only one Criticality Calculator RBI Components
box, the Meridium APM RBI data model includes the following Criticality Calculator
RBI Components families:
Criticality Calculator PRD Components
Criticality PRD Component - Relief Valve (used for pressure relief devices
only)
Criticality PRD Component - Rupture Disk (used for pressure relief
devices only)
Criticality RBI Component - Cylindrical Shell
Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Bundle
Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Header
Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Tube
Criticality RBI Component - Piping
Criticality RBI Component - Tank Bottom
In addition, while the data model illustration shows only one Criticality Degradation
Mech Evaluation box, the Meridium APM RBI data model includes the following
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation families:
Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval.

Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval.
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval.
Criticality Leak Deg. Mech. Eval.
Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval.
Criticality Over Pressure Deg. Mech. Eval.
Note that in the image, the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation family is related to
the Inspection family (where the Inspection box represents all baseline Inspection
families). In the baseline database, however, the Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval.
family is not related to the Inspection families.
Additionally, the following Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation families are related
only to the PRD Pop Test Checklist family (a subfamily of the Inspection family):

Each RBI System record can be linked to multiple Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records. Each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record can be linked
to multiple RBI Criticality Analysis records. In addition, a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record can be linked to only one RBI System record.
Note: The following families are not included in the preceding image because they are
not related to any other families in the RBI data model: Strategy Logic Case, Strategy
Reference Table, Data Mapping Column-Field Pair, Data Mapping Group, Data Mapping
Query, RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration, and RBI Strategy Mapping Details. In
addition, although Meridium APM Reference Table families are used by RBI, they are
not included in the image.
RBI and Inspection Management

Integration
In addition to the families shown in the RBI data model, access to the following
Inspection Management entity and relationship families is provided when the RBI license
is active:
Has Inspection Scope

Has Time Based Inspection Interval
Time Based Inspection Interval
Time Based Inspection Setting
These families support the use of time-based inspection settings in RBI when populating
the Desired Interval field in Inspection Task records.
Additionally, members of RBI Security Groups are granted privileges to these families in
the baseline Meridium APM database.
About RBI Components

In RBI, you will divide equipment up into the components whose risk you want to
analyze using an RBI Analysis. You will want to divide a piece of equipment into
components based upon shared degradation mechanisms among the components. Each
group of components that share the same degradation mechanisms will belong to the
same group, or RBI Component. In other words, an RBI Component represents a group of
equipment components that share the same degradation mechanisms.
In Meridium APM, Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are used to store
identifying information about RBI Components. Each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record is linked to other records to further define that RBI Component. For
example, Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are linked to Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records, which define the ways in which the RBI Component
can fail. The following image illustrates the records to which Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records are linked.
You can manage RBI Components on the following pages:
RBI Unit View page

RBI Asset View page
When you are viewing an RBI Component on the RBI Unit View page, the records that
are outlined in red in the following image are displayed.
Note: In addition to the records outlined in red, the RBI Unit View page also displays the
Functional Location record to which the RBI System record is linked.
When you are viewing an RBI Component on the RBI Asset View page, the records that
are outlined in red in the following image are displayed:
Note: In addition to the records outlined in red, the RBI Asset View page also displays
additional records to which the RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked, such as RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records. These records are not included in the preceding image
because they are not directly linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
Example of RBI Components

Using RBI, you can analyze the ways in which equipment can fail. To do so, you will
need to create RBI Criticality Analysis records and link them to Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records, which represent groups of components that you want to
analyze, where the components belong to a single piece of equipment and share the same
degradation mechanisms.
Consider a water heater, which is a piece of equipment that contains the following
components:
An inner steel tank that holds the water.

Insulation that surrounds the steel tank.
Heating rods that heat the water.
A thermostat that determines the desired temperature of the water.
A pipe that lets cold water into the tank.
A pipe that lets hot water out of the tank.
The following image illustrates these components:
In RBI, to analyze the ways in which the water heater can fail, you would need to divide
the components into logical groups that represent common failure possibilities among
those components. Each group of components would be a separate RBI Component and
would be represented by a single Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. Keep in
mind that some of these groups are involved in the electrical system, and others are
involved in the plumbing system.
For example, you might group the equipment's components into the following RBI
Components:
Tank: Includes the inner steel tank and the insulation, which can fail by corroding.
The Tank is part of the plumbing system because the purpose of the steel tank and
the insulation is to hold water and prevent heat loss from the water.
Heating Elements: Includes the heating rods and the thermostat, which can fail by
producing too much or too little heat. The Heating Elements are part of the
electrical system because the heating rods and the thermostat operate using
electricity.
Pipes: Includes the two pipes that let cold water in and hot water out and can fail
by letting too much water out or by preventing water from being released at the
proper rate. The Pipes are also part of the plumbing system because the purpose of
the pipes is to control the water flow into and out of the tank.
If you were to create an RBI Analysis using this example, your database would contain
the following records:
House (Functional Location record)

Electrical System (RBI System record)
Plumbing System (RBI System record)
Water Heater (Equipment record)
Heating Elements (Criticality Calculator RBI Components record)
Pipes (Criticality Calculator RBI Components record)
Tank (Criticality Calculator RBI Components record)
Note: If you had already created Functional Location records to represent the Electrical
System and Plumbing System, you would need to create additional RBI System records
to represent these same systems. The existing Functional Location records would not
need to be linked to the RBI System records.
The records would be linked to one another as shown in the following image.
About Associating Degradation

Mechanisms with an RBI Component
After an RBI System record is linked to Potential Degradation Mechanisms records, as
you begin linking Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to the RBI System
record, those Criticality Calculator RBI Components records will be linked automatically
to all of the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI System
record. Each Potential Degradation Mechanism that is linked to a Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record represents a way in which that RBI Component can fail.
For each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, you can define the specific ways
in which the RBI Component that it represents can fail. If the RBI Component can fail in
all ways that are represented by the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to which
it was automatically linked, no action is needed.
It is more likely, however, that the RBI Component will fail in a subset of ways. In this
case, you can keep the links between the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
and the appropriate Potential Degradation Mechanisms records, remove any unnecessary
links, or link additional Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to each Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record.
For example, suppose your RBI System record represents an electrical system. You may
have determined that RBI Components in this RBI System can fail in the following ways:
Heating Failure. For example, the burners on the stove and the heating elements
in the water heater can produce too much or too little heat.
Electrical Failure. For example, the switches on the stove and the thermostat on
the water heater can produce too little electricity.
In this case, the RBI System record would be linked to two Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records to represent each type of degradation mechanism in the preceding
list. After the degradation mechanisms are associated with the RBI System as a whole
and you have determined which RBI Components are involved in that RBI System, you
will need to validate the degradation mechanisms for each RBI Component.
Assuming that the electrical system contains the water heater and the stove, the RBI
System record representing the electrical system record would be linked to the following
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records:
Burners (belong to the Stove)

Switches (belong to the Stove)
Heating Elements (belong to the Water Heater)
Each of these Criticality Calculator RBI Components records would be linked

automatically to all Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI
System record. You would need to determine, however, which degradation mechanisms
make sense for each RBI Component. To do so, you might decide that the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record should be linked to the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records as described in the following table.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components

Record
Potential Degradation Mechanisms Record
Burners
Heating Failure
Switches
Electrical Failure
Heating Elements
Heating Failure
So, while the RBI System record is linked to two Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records, each Criticality Calculator RBI Components records is linked to only one
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
About RBI Systems

An RBI System is a collection of RBI Components that are grouped together for the
purpose of conducting an RBI Analysis. In Meridium APM, RBI System records are used
to store identifying information about an RBI System. Each RBI System record is linked
to other records to further define the RBI System. For example, RBI System records are
linked to Potential Degradation Mechanisms records, which define the ways in which the
RBI Components that are involved in the RBI System can fail. The following image
illustrates the records to which RBI System records are linked.
You can manage RBI Systems on the RBI Unit View page.
Example of an RBI System

The following image illustrates the records and links that you might create if you wanted
to perform an RBI Analysis on the RBI Components that are involved in an electrical
system. Notice that the electrical system contains RBI Components that are part of
different pieces of equipment: stove and water heater.
Note: You can see from the image that the heating elements are part of the water heater
and belong to the electrical system. This water heater also has other RBI Components that
belongs to a different RBI System: plumbing system. In cases where the records or links
are not associated with the electrical system, the text and lines are gray.
From this image, you can see that only the following RBI Components are involved in
the electrical system:
Burners
Switches
Heating Elements
About Associating Degradation

Mechanisms with a System
Each RBI System record represents an RBI System that contains multiple RBI
Components. Each of those RBI Components can fail in multiple ways. To indicate the
ways in which any of those RBI Components can fail, you can link Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records to the RBI System record. Each Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record that is linked to the RBI System record represents a degradation mechanism, or a
way in which the RBI Components in that RBI System might fail.
When you associate degradation mechanisms with an RBI System, you have two options:
You can associate only the degradation mechanisms that are common across ALL
underlying RBI Components. If you choose this option, you will need to associate
additional degradation mechanisms with each RBI Component as needed.
You can associate all possible degradation mechanisms for all underlying RBI
Components, even if those degradation mechanisms apply only to one or a few of
the RBI Components. If you choose this option, you will need to disassociate
degradation mechanisms from each RBI Component as needed.
-or-
After an RBI System record is linked to Potential Degradation Mechanisms records, as

you begin linking Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to the RBI System
record, those Criticality Calculator RBI Components records will be linked automatically
to all of the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI System
record. Each Potential Degradation Mechanism that is linked to a Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record represents a way in which that RBI Component can fail.
For each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, you can define the specific ways
in which the RBI Component that it represents can fail.
About RBI Analyses

An RBI Analysis is a combination of an RBI Criticality Analysis record and the successor
records to which it is linked, where those records contain risk information about the RBI
Component for which the analysis was created. There are three types of RBI Analyses:
Main RBI Analysis: An RBI Analysis that represents current information about
the RBI Component and the operating environment. If desired, you can use the
information in a main RBI Analysis as the starting point for a child Future Risk
Analyses and What If Analyses.
Future Risk Analysis: A child analysis of a main RBI Analysis. Future Risk
Analyses allow you to calculate the risk that would be associated with an RBI
Component at some future date. For example, you might want to see what the risk
would be five years from now, assuming that all other risk factors remain the
same (e.g., operating pressure, operating temperature, and so on).
What If Analysis: A child analysis of a main RBI Analysis. What If Analyses
allow you to calculate the risk associated with an RBI Component under
hypothetical circumstances. For example, you might want to see what the risk
would be if you changed the operating pressure or if you replaced the RBI
Component. After you calculate a What If Analysis, if the risk improves with the
hypothetical data, you might decide that you want to implement that scenario. If
so, you can transfer the values from the What If Analysis to the main RBI
Analysis.
Note: While the RBI Criticality Analysis in a main RBI Analysis is linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record in any child Future Risk and What If Analyses (through the
Has RBI Criticality Analysis family), those child RBI Criticality Analysis records are not
considered part of the main RBI Analysis. Instead, they are considered part of their own
RBI Analysis.
The following image illustrates the records to which RBI Criticality Analysis record in a
main RBI Analysis and a Future Risk Analysis are linked.
Note: In a What If Analysis, the root RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked to all of
these records except for RBI Recommendation records.
You should create a main RBI Analysis for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record that is linked to an RBI System record. This means that if an RBI System record is
linked to three Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, you should create three
main RBI Analyses. After a main RBI Analysis exists, you can calculate it and
communicate recommendations based upon the calculated values. You can create RBI
Analyses on the RBI Asset View page.
Note that when you create a What If Analysis or Future Risk Analysis, Meridium APM
copies the values in the records in the main RBI Analysis to new records in the child
analysis. In other words, if the main RBI Analysis contains five RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records, a What If Analysis will contain five separate RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records, which will contain the same values as the records in the main RBI
Analysis.
Consider the following example that shows the records that you would see after creating
a What If Analysis from a main RBI Analysis. Yellow boxes represent records in the main
RBI Analysis, and orange boxes represent records in the What If Analysis. Note that the
two root RBI Criticality Analysis records are linked to each other.
Characteristics of a Future Risk

Analysis
By default, the following information is true for Future Risk Analyses:
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis of the
predecessor RBI Analysis through the Has RBI Criticality Analysis relationship.
When you create a Future Risk Analysis, Meridium APM copies the values in the
records in the main RBI Analysis to new records in the child analysis. In other
words, if the main RBI Analysis contains five RBI Degradation Mechanisms
records, a Future Risk Analysis will contain five separate RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records.
The Analysis ID matches the Analysis ID of the predecessor RBI Analysis.
The field values match the field values in the predecessor RBI Analysis, with the
following exceptions:
The values in the following fields are not transferred from the predecessor
RBI Criticality Analysis record:
RBI Criticality Analysis

Driving Risk
Consequence Category Rolled Up
Eff Date for Risk Analysis
Inspection Priority Rolled Up
Probability of Failure Rolled Up
Risk Category
Risk Completed
Risk Completed Date
1.
o
RBI Degradation Mechanisms records:
RBI Degradation Mechanisms

Combined Consequence
Inspection Priority
Probability of Failure
1.
o
Criticality Consequence Evaluation record:
Criticality Consequence Evaluation

Average Leak Rate
Cleanup Cost
Distance to End Effect
Deinventory Time
Estimated Leak Quantity
Estimated Release Rate
Final Phase
Flammable Affected Area
Initial Leak Rate
Leak Size
Pool Area
Probability of Ignition
Release Duration
Toxicity Area
Toxic Mix Release Rate
o
o
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records:
Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval

Adjusted Years Last Inspection
DF
Likelihood Category
Updated Potential
Years In Services
Years Last Inspection
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval

DF
Estimated
Estimated Half Life
Estimated Wall Loss
Fractional Wall Loss
Likelihood Category
Pressure at Minimum Thickness
Structural Minimum Thickness
Wall Ratio
Years in Services
Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval

Age
Area Humidity Factor
Calculated Corrosion Rate
Coated Factor
DF
Estimated Minimum Thickness
Estimated Wall Loss
Insulation Condition Factor
Insulation Type Factor
Likelihood Category
Wall Ratio
Years in Services
Characteristics of a What If Analysis

By default, the following information is true for What If Analyses:
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis of the
main RBI Analysis through the Has RBI Criticality Analysis relationship.
When you create a What If Analysis, Meridium APM copies the values in the
records in the main RBI Analysis to new records in the child analysis. In other
words, if the main RBI Analysis contains five RBI Degradation Mechanisms
records, a What If Analysis will contain five separate RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records.
The Analysis ID matches the Analysis ID of the main RBI Analysis.
The field values in the What If Analysis match the field values in the main RBI
Analysis, with the following exceptions:
The values in the following fields are not transferred from the RBI
Criticality Analysis record in the main RBI Analysis:

Consequence Category Rolled Up
Driving Risk
Eff Date for Risk Analysis
Inspection Priority Rolled Up
Probability of Failure Rolled up
Risk Category
Risk Completed
Risk Completed Date
1.
o
The values in the following fields are not transferred from the Criticality
Consequence Evaluation record in the main RBI Analysis:
Average Leak Rate

Cleanup Cost
Deinventory Time
Final Phase
Initial Leak Rate
Leak Size
Pool Area
Release Duration
Toxicity Area
1.
o
The values in the following fields are not transferred from the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records in the main RBI Analysis:

Inspection Priority
1.
o
The values in the following fields are not transferred from the Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation records in the main RBI Analysis:

DF
Likelihood Category
Updated Potential
Years in Service

DF
Estimated
Estimated Wall Loss
Likelihood Category
Wall Ratio
Years in Service

Age
Coating Factor
DF
Estimated Wall Loss
Likelihood Category
Wall Ratio
Years in Service
About RBI Recommendations

An RBI Recommendation record stores information about actions that should be
performed to help mitigate the risk associated with a degradation mechanism. Each RBI
Recommendation record is linked to:
An RBI Degradation Mechanism record, which defines the type of failure that the
recommended action can help mitigate.
An Equipment record, which defines the piece of equipment to which the
recommendation applies.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record.
Additionally, when you use Inspection Groups to facilitate inspection planning for your
equipment, RBI Recommendation records that are created as a part of that process (i.e.,
created from Inspection Groups) will be linked to the Asset Group records that are
associated with those Inspection Groups. These RBI Recommendation records are not
created in the same way as RBI Recommendation records that are created from RBI
Analyses, but they are treated similarly by the Meridium APM system and are managed
the same way in most cases.
The following image illustrates the records to which RBI Recommendation records are
linked. Note that the area in the image that is shaded pink represents the relationship
between Asset Group and RBI Recommendation records. This section is shaded to
highlight the concept that the other records illustrated in the image are related to the RBI
Recommendation family regardless of whether or not an Asset Group record is associated
with the Equipment record for which RBI Recommendation records exist. When a
relationship between an Asset Group record and RBI Recommendation record does exist,
however, the Asset Group record is also linked indirectly to all other records shown in
this image (by way of its link to the RBI Recommendation record).
If you are following the Mechanical Integrity Best Practice, you will create RBI
Recommendation records at the following two points in the RBI workflow:
After you calculate an RBI Analysis. You can create these RBI Recommendation
records manually or automatically via the RBI Asset View page.
When you implement an Inspection Group. These RBI Recommendation records

will be created automatically via the Inspection Group Details page.
After RBI Recommendation records exist, you can:
Access a list of RBI Recommendation records per Equipment record.
Create Task records or SAP Notifications via Recommendation Management to

ensure that the recommendation actions are implemented.
About Accessing Recommendation

Management from RBI
The way in which you access Recommendation Management from RBI will depend upon
the workflow that you are executing and the type of RBI Recommendation records that
you want to view. You can access RBI Recommendation records from the following
pages:
From the RBI Start Page.

From the RBI Asset View page.
From the Inspection Group Details page.
When you access RBI Recommendation records from any of these pages, the record will
be displayed on the Recommendation Management page, where you can view and
manage the RBI Recommendation records. When you access Recommendation
Management via RBI, certain features are available that do not appear when you access
Recommendation Management from the Go To menu.
Accessing RBI Recommendations from

the Start Page
You can use the following instructions to access RBI Recommendation records that are
linked to any Equipment record included in an RBI Analysis via the RBI Start Page. You
can also access RBI Recommendation records based on the RBI Analysis or Inspection
Group with which they are associated via the following pages:
The RBI Asset View page.
The Inspection Group Details page.
To access RBI Recommendation records from the RBI Start Page:

1. On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage RBI Recommendations link.
The Manage Recommendations page appears, displaying the results of the View All
Recommendations query.
In the query results, one row is displayed for each Equipment record that is linked to an
RBI Recommendation record.
2. In the row containing the Equipment record that is linked to the RBI
Recommendation records that you want to view, click the hyperlinked Equipment
ID.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the Recommendation
records that are linked to the selected Equipment record.
Aspects of the Recommendation

Management Page when Accessed from
RBI
When you access Recommendation Management from RBI, the Recommendation
Management page contains various features that are specific to RBI (i.e., the page
contains features that are not displayed when you access it in other ways). The following
image shows an example of the Recommendation Management page when accessed via
RBI.
When accessed from RBI, the Recommendation Management page contains the following
items:
A section containing a grid that displays the RBI Recommendation records that
are linked to the Equipment record(s) for which you accessed the
Recommendation Management page. The items that are displayed in the grid and
the label of this section will vary, depending upon how you access the
Recommendation Management page. If you access the Recommendation

Management page via:
o One of the following items, the grid will display the RBI Recommendation
records that are linked to the single Equipment record for which you
accessed the Recommendation Management page. The label of this section
will be RBI Recommendations for <Equipment Record ID>, where
<Equipment Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment record for
which you accessed the Recommendation Management page:
The Review Recommendations link on the Recommendation Tasks

menu on the RBI Asset View page.
The RBI Start Page.
Additionally, when you access the Recommendation Management page in one of these
ways, the RBI Recommendation records will be grouped by the Task ID of the Inspection
Task record to which they are linked. Any RBI Recommendation records that are not
linked to an Inspection Task record will be grouped under the heading Task ID:
(Count=n), where n is the number of RBI Recommendation records that are not linked to
an Inspection Task record. Note that the grid does not display:
RBI Recommendation records that are set to the Archived state.

RBI Recommendation records that are set to the Consolidated state
and linked to a master RBI Recommendation record that is set to
the Archived state.
The Mass Review Recommendations link on the Asset Tasks menu on the
RBI Asset View page, the grid will display the RBI Recommendation
records that are linked to all the Equipment records for which you
accessed the Recommendation Management page. The label of this section
will be Mass Review RBI Recommendations for Multiple Assets.
Throughout this documentation, this section is referred to as the RBI Recommendations

section.
A section containing a grid that displays the Inspection Task records that are
linked to the RBI Recommendation records associated with the Equipment
record(s) for which you accessed the Recommendation Management page. The
label of this section will vary, depending upon how you access the
Recommendation Management page. If you access the Recommendation

Management page via:
One of the following items, the label will be Task for Asset <Record ID>
section, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment record to
which the Inspection Task records and all displayed RBI Recommendation
records are linked.
The Review Recommendations link on the Recommendation Tasks

menu on the RBI Asset View page.
The RBI Start Page.
Mass Review Recommendations link on the Asset Tasks menu, the label
will be Task for Asset.
Throughout this documentation, this section is referred to as the Task for Asset section.
The content of this section is driven by the Task by Asset query, which is stored in the
Catalog in the folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Recommendation Manager\Queries.
Note that the selection in the grid in the RBI Recommendations section has no impact on
the selection in the Task for Asset section. The Task for Asset section simply displays a
list of Inspection Task records that are linked to the Equipment record(s) for which you
accessed the Recommendation Management page. In addition, your selection in the Task
for Asset section has no impact on the links that are enabled or disabled on the task
menus.
The following task menus:
Recommendation Tasks menu: Provides access to State Configuration

operations that are available for the selected RBI Recommendation
records. This menu works the same way as it does if you access
Recommendation Management from the Go To menu.
Asset Tasks menu: Provides options that let you:
o
Manage the links between RBI Recommendation records,

Inspection Task records, and SAP Notifications.
Create Inspection Task records.
Promote an Equipment or Functional Location record to ASM.
Common Tasks menuCommon Tasks menu: Provides standard

functionality. This menu works the same way as it does if you access
Recommendation Management from the Go To menu, except that the New
Recommendation link is labeled New RBI Recommendation and allows
you to create an RBI Recommendation record instead of a Meridium
General Recommendation record.
Note: The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will not use the New RBI
Recommendation link to create RBI Recommendation records. Instead, if you want to
create RBI Recommendation records manually, you should do so via the RBI Asset View
page.
Asset Tasks Menu

The Asset Tasks menu is available when you access Recommendation Management from
RBI.
The Asset Tasks menu on the Recommendation Management page contains the following
links:
Open Asset View: Displays the RBI Asset View page from which you accessed
Recommendation Management.
Hide Tasks: Hides the Task for Asset section. If you click this link, it will be
relabeled Show Tasks so that you can redisplay the Task for Asset section.
Link to Task: Displays the Select Task dialog box, where you can select the
Inspection Task record to which you want to link the selected RBI
Recommendation records.
This link is enabled only when all of the following conditions are met:
o
o
One or more Recommendation records are displayed in the grid.

One or more Inspection Task records are displayed in the Task for Asset
section.
You have Insert and Update privileges to the Inspection Task family.
You have Update privileges to the RBI Recommendation family.
ASM integration is disabled for RBI (i.e., the ASM Integration Enabled
check box is cleared on the Administrative Tasks page).
You accessed the Recommendation Management page via the Review

Recommendations link on the Asset Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View
page.
Unlink from Task: Unlinks the selected RBI Recommendation records from the
Inspection Task record to which they are linked.
This link is enabled only when ALL of the following conditions are met:
Create WMI: Displays the Work Management Item Builder, where you can choose
to create an Inspection Task record or an SAP Notification from the selected RBI
Recommendation record.
This link is enabled only when ALL of the following conditions are met:
One or more Recommendation records are displayed in the grid.
You accessed the Recommendation Management page via the Review

Recommendations link on the Asset Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View
page.
Promote to ASM: Promotes the Equipment record to ASM. This link is enabled
only when ALL of the following conditions are met:
ASM integration is enabled for RBI (i.e., the ASM Integration Enabled
check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks page).
All RBI Criticality Analysis records that are linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records to which the Equipment record is
linked are set to the Risk Completed state.
For details about promoting Equipment records to ASM, click here.
Generate Tasks: Generates Inspection Task records from the automatically

generated RBI Recommendation records that are selected in the grid on the
Recommendation Management page. This link is enabled only when:
o
o
ASM integration is not enabled.

Inspection Task records are not linked to the currently selected RBI
Hiding or Displaying the Task for Asset

Section
To hide the Task for Asset section:
1. Access the Recommendation Management page from RBI.
2. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Hide Tasks link.
The Task for Asset section is removed.
To display the Task for Asset section:
1. Access the Recommendation Management page from RBI.
2. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Show Tasks link.
The Task for Asset section is displayed.
About Archiving RBI Recommendation

Records
When an RBI Criticality Analysis record is set to the Archived state because another RBI
Analysis for the same RBI Component has been activated, if that RBI Criticality Analysis
record is linked to RBI Recommendation records that are in any of the following states,
those RBI Recommendation records will be set to the Archived state automatically:
Cancelled
Implemented
Not Required
Proposed
Rejected
Pending Approval
Accepted by ASM
Additionally, RBI Recommendation records that are linked to an Asset Group record will
be archived automatically when that Asset Group record is archived.
Note that RBI Recommendation records that are set to the Consolidated or Superseded
state will not be set to Archived automatically. Instead, the master Recommendation
record to which they are linked will be set to Archived.
You can also archive an RBI Recommendation record manually if ASM integration is
disabled for RBI. When ASM integration is enabled, however, you cannot archive an RBI
Recommendation record manually.
Note that when you access Recommendation Management from RBI, the grid does not
display RBI Recommendation records that are set to the Archived state.
Example of Recommendations for a

Single Component
Suppose that a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked to an RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is linked to four RBI Recommendation records. Two of
those RBI Recommendation records are in the Consolidated state and are the sources of a
master RBI Recommendation record, whose state is Proposed.
The following image illustrates this example.
If you were to link this Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to another RBI
Criticality Analysis and set its state to Risk Completed, the first RBI Criticality Analysis
would be set to the Archived state. In addition, all of its RBI Recommendation records
except for those in the Consolidated state would be set to Archived. You could then create
new RBI Recommendation records for the new RBI Analysis.
The following image illustrates this result, where the gray boxes indicate the items that
are set to Archived automatically.
Note: If you had promoted the Equipment record to ASM and any of the Archived
Recommendation records were used to create Action records, when you promote the
Equipment record to ASM again after its new RBI Analysis (Analysis 2) is set to Risk
Completed, those Action records would be marked for deletion or removed entirely,
depending upon the state of the Asset Strategy.
Example of Recommendations for

Multiple Components
Suppose that three Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are each linked to an
RBI Criticality Analysis record. Each of those RBI Criticality Analysis records is linked
to two RBI Recommendation records. In addition, two of the RBI Recommendation
records from different RBI Components are in the Consolidated state and are the sources
of a master RBI Recommendation record, whose state is Proposed.
The following image illustrates this example.
In this image, you can see that Recommendation A2 from Analysis A is consolidated with
Recommendation B2 from Analysis B.
If you were to link the Component 2 to another RBI Criticality Analysis and set its state
to Risk Completed, the following actions would occur automatically:
Analysis A and Analysis B would be set to Archived.

Recommendation A1 and Recommendation B1 would be set to Archived.
Recommendation A2 and Recommendation B2 would remain in the Consolidated

state.
Master Recommendation A2-B2 would be set to Archived.
Component 3, Analysis C, and all of the associated RBI Recommendation records

are untouched.
You could then create new RBI Recommendation records for the new RBI Analysis.
The following image illustrates this result, where the gray boxes indicate the items that
are set to Archived automatically.
Note: If you had promoted the Equipment record to ASM and any of the Archived
Recommendation records were used to create Action records, when you promote the
Equipment record to ASM again after its new RBI Analysis (Analysis B) is set to Risk
Completed, those Action records would be marked for deletion or removed entirely,
depending upon the state of the Asset Strategy.
About Strategy Indicators

An RBI Analysis is a dynamic tool that helps you refine your strategy for maintaining an
RBI Component. Remember that a single piece of equipment can have multiple RBI
Components, and each RBI Component can have only one active RBI Analysis, as
illustrated in the following image.
Together, all of the RBI Analyses that exist for all of the RBI Components that belong to
an equipment make up an overall strategy for that equipment.
As you complete certain actions in RBI, ASM, and ASI, the overall strategy for the
equipment that you are working with progresses through a cycle. Certain stages of that
cycle indicate the strategy's maturity level.
A strategy indicator is a value that indicates a strategy's current position in this cycle.
Note: Strategy indicators are used in RBI only if ASM integration is enabled, meaning
that the ASM Integration Enabled check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks
page.
The following table lists the strategy indicators that you will see as you perform various
actions in RBI, ASM, and ASI for a single piece of equipment.
Indicator
Icon
None
Indicator Label Description

NONE
No RBI Analyses are associated with the Equipment record.
Analysis
Created
The Equipment record is linked to at least one Criticality

Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to an RBI

If the Equipment record has not been promoted to ASM, this
indicates that for all Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records that are linked to the Equipment record, ALL of the
RBI Criticality Analysis records to which they are linked are
set to the Risk Completed state.
Analysis
Completed
-orIf the Equipment record HAS been promoted to ASM, this

indicates that for all Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records that are linked to the Equipment record, at least one of
the RBI Criticality Analysis records to which they are linked
is set to the Risk Completed state.
The Equipment record has been promoted to ASM, meaning

that an Asset Strategy record is linked to the Equipment
Strategy Draft record. All RBI Criticality Analysis records that are associated
with the Equipment record are set to the Accepted by ASM
state.
Strategy
Pending
Review
The Asset Strategy record that is linked to the Equipment

record is set to the Pending Review state. All RBI Criticality
Analysis records that are associated with the Equipment
record are set to the Accepted by ASM state.
Strategy
Active

record is set to the Active state. All RBI Criticality Analysis
records that are associated with the Equipment record are set
to the Accepted by ASM state.
Strategy
Implemented

record is also linked to an Implementation Package record
whose state is set to Implemented. All RBI Criticality
Strategy
Modified

record is set to the Modified state. All RBI Criticality
If ASM integration is enabled, the strategy indicator appears above the RBI Explorer
pane on the RBI Asset View page. If ASM integration is not enabled, the strategy
indicator does not appear.
For example, in the following image, you can see that the strategy indicator is Analysis
Completed. A red outline has been added to the image to highlight the strategy indicator.
Strategy Indicator Life Cycle

The following image illustrates the actions that cause the strategy indicator to be updated.
In the image, each circle represents a step. Note that each step is assumed to be in context
of a single piece of equipment. When a step results in a change to the strategy indicator,
the strategy indicator is included inside the circle and colored red.
For example, you can see in the first circle on the top left that when you create Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records and link them to an Equipment record, the strategy
indicator is set to NONE.
In the image, you will see two gray circles. These circles indicate optional steps that you
might perform after you have completed the primary workflow that is illustrated by the
blue circles.
About State Configurations in RBI

In RBI, State Configuration is used with the following records:
RBI Criticality Analysis records

RBI Recommendation records
Asset Group records and their related Grouping Element records (i.e., Inspection
Groups)
Note that the states and operations that exist in the baseline State Configuration for the
RBI Recommendation family are documented in the Recommendation Management
documentation. Specific instructions for using the Recommendation Tasks menu to
transition the state of an RBI Recommendation record are included in the
Recommendation Management documentation.
About RBI Criticality Analysis States

and Operations
The following diagram shows the states and operations that exist in the baseline State
Configuration for the RBI Criticality Analysis family.
Note: The states and operations described here apply only to RBI Criticality Analysis
records in main RBI Analyses and Future Risk Analyses. They do not apply to RBI
Criticality Analysis records in What If Analysis. The root RBI Criticality Analysis record
in a What If Analysis can have only one state: Reserved for What If.
Notice that a pink background surrounds several states in the diagram. When an RBI
Criticality Analysis record is set to any of these states, the analysis to which it belongs is
active. It is important to remember what qualifies as an active analysis because you can
filter the RBI Explorer pane on the RBI Asset View page to show only active analyses.
When you do so, you will need to understand which analyses were removed and why.
Additionally, in the diagram, you can see blue lines and black lines.
Blue lines represent operations that are performed automatically by Meridium

APM when another RBI Criticality Analysis record that is linked to the same
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is set to Risk Completed.
Black lines represent operations that you can perform manually.
Note: While the following image includes the Reject operation and the Rejected state,
this state and operation are not valid in the RBI workflow and are, therefore, colored gray
in the image. While they exist in the baseline State Configuration, if you try to reject an
RBI Criticality Analysis record, an error message will appear, indicating that this
operation is not valid.
Note: The Promote to ASM operation is used only when ASM integration is enabled.
Initial State
The Created state is the initial state of all new RBI Criticality Analysis records.
Datasheet Configuration
By default, states and operations will appear on the datasheet when you are viewing an
RBI Criticality Analysis record in RBI, the Record Manager, or the Bulk Data Form.
Reserved States and Operations

The following table lists the baseline states and operations and indicates which of these
states and operations are reserved. You cannot remove or modify reserved states or
operation. You can, however, add your own states and operations to the State
Configuration.
States
State
Is Reserved?
Approved
Yes
Accepted by ASM
Yes
Archived
Yes
Created
No
Implemented
Yes
Pending Approval
Yes
Re-Evaluating
Yes
Rejected
No
Reserved for What If
Yes
Risk Completed
Yes
Operations
Operation
Is Reserved?
Archive (all Archive

operations)
Yes
Implement
No
Finalize Risk
No
To What If
Yes
Reevaluate
No
Approve
No
Reject
No
Reimplement
No
Promote to ASM
Yes
Submit for Approval
No
State Configuration Roles

By default, no State Configuration Roles are assigned to any state in the RBI Criticality
Analysis State Configuration. If desired, you can assign State Configuration Roles to any
state. In addition, for each state, the Require a specific user to be assigned to a state
check box is selected.
Analysis Restrictions Based on State

The state of an RBI Criticality Analysis record determines the actions that you can
perform on the analysis, as outlined in the following table. Note that where an action is
restricted, the cell is shaded to help you interpret the table more easily.
Analysis
State
Calculation Analysis Analysis RBI

What If
Is
Can Be Fields Can Degradation and
RBI
Recommendations
Future
Mechanisms
Risk
Be
Can Be
Allowed? Deleted?
Analyses Can Be Created?
Modified? Added or
Can Be
Deleted?
Created?
Created
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Risk
Completed
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Pending
Approval
No
No
No
No
No
No
Approved
No
No
No
No
No
No
Implemented
No
No
No
No
No
No
Archived
No
No
No
No
No
No
Rejected
No
No
No
No
No
No
ReEvaluating
No
No
No
No
No
No
Accepted by
ASM
No
No
No
No
No
No
Reserved for
Yes
What If
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Note the following exceptions about the information contained in this table:
If an RBI Criticality Analysis record is set to Risk Completed, the value in the
Mitigated Risk field in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records to which it is
linked can be modified.
The Accepted by ASM state applies only when ASM integration is enabled. If
ASM integration is disabled, an RBI Criticality Analysis record will never be set
to this state.
About Active Analyses

An active analysis is an RBI Analysis whose RBI Criticality Analysis record is set to any
of the following states:
Risk Completed
Pending Approval
Approved
Implemented
Re-Evaluating
Accepted by ASM
Note: The Accepted by ASM state applies only if ASM integration is enabled. If ASM
integration is disabled, an RBI Criticality Analysis record will never be set to this state.
An RBI Analysis whose RBI Criticality Analysis record is set to any other state is
considered to be an inactive analysis. Main RBI Analyses and Future Risk Analyses can
be either active or inactive. What If Analyses will always be inactive because their RBI
Criticality Calculator record is always set to Reserved for What If.
In RBI, only ONE active analysis can exist for a given Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record. There is no limit to the number of inactive analyses that can exist for
a given Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. If a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record is linked to an RBI Criticality Analysis record that is set to any of the
states listed above, when you set another RBI Criticality Analysis record that is linked to
the same Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to Risk Completed, the new RBI
Criticality Analysis record will become part of the active analysis. The previous RBI
Criticality Analysis record will be set to Archived automatically, and its analysis will no
longer be active.
On the RBI Asset View page, you can choose to view all analyses or only the active
analysis for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is displayed in the
RBI Explorer pane. Note that active analyses and inactive analyses are conceptual ideas.
If you are viewing a combination of active and inactive analyses at the same time, unless
you evaluate the state of the RBI Criticality Analysis records themselves, you cannot
determine from the user interface which analyses are active and which analyses are
inactive. The RBI Asset View page does, however, provide a mechanism for filtering out
nodes representing RBI Criticality Analysis records whose states cause them to be belong
to an inactive analysis.
Hint: Because What If Analyses are always inactive, when you choose to display only
active analyses on the RBI Asset View page, all What If Analyses will be removed from
the RBI Explorer pane.
Inspection Group States and Operations

State Configuration is used to transition Asset Group records and their related Grouping
Element records (i.e., Inspection Groups) through the following states:
Proposed: The state to which new Inspection Groups are set by default. When an
Inspection Group is in the Proposed state, you can modify the components of the
Inspection Group.
Implemented: Indicates that RBI Recommendation records have been created for
the Equipment records that are associated with the Inspection Group. Changes
cannot be made to an Inspection Group that is in the Implemented state.
Not Implemented: Indicates that RBI Recommendation records will not be created
for the Equipment records that are associated with the Inspection Group. Changes
cannot be made to an Inspection Group that is in the Not Implemented state.
Archived: The state to which existing Inspection Groups are set by default when
an Inspection Group with the same Unit, Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, and
Risk Category is set to the Implemented or Not Implemented state.
The following diagram illustrates these concepts. Note the following details about this
diagram:
Blue boxes represent the baseline states mentioned above.

Black arrows and text represent operations that you can perform manually.
Blue arrows and text represent operations that are performed automatically by
Meridium APM when another Inspection Group with the same attributes (i.e.,
Unit, Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, and Risk Category) is set to the
Implemented or Not Implemented state.
Accessing Risk Based Inspection

To access Risk Based Inspection:
Integrity, and then click Risk Based Inspection.
The RBI Start Page appears.
Aspects of the RBI Start Page

The RBI Start Page serves as the starting point for the tasks that you can perform in
Meridium APM Risk Based Inspection. You can access each task via a link on the RBI
Start Page. Note that the links on this page do not suggest a recommended workflow but
allow you to access certain features that you will need to use as part of conducting an
RBI Analysis.
The following links are available on the RBI Start Page:
Manage RBI Systems by Unit: Displays the RBI System List page, where you can
open an existing RBI System record that is linked to a specific Functional
Location record or create a new RBI System record that is linked to a specific
Functional Location record.
Manage RBI Components by Asset: Displays the RBI Component List page, where
you can open an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is
linked to a specific Equipment record or create a new Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that is linked to a specific Equipment record.
Manage RBI Recommendations: Displays the Manage Recommendations page,
where you can view Equipment records that are linked to RBI Recommendation
records.
Manage Potential Degradation Mechanisms: Displays the Search page, where

you can perform a Simple search to find Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records.
Note: This link is enabled only if you are a member of the MI RBI Analyst or MI RBI
Administrator Security Group.
Manage Inspection Strategies: Displays the Search page, where you can perform
a Simple search to find Inspection Strategy records.
Manage Data Mappings: Displays the Search page, where you can perform a
Simple search to find records in any of the following families: Data Mapping
Column-Field Pair, Data Mapping Group, and Data Mapping Query.
Export and Import RBI Data: Displays the RBI Export and Import page, where
you can select Equipment records for which to export RBI data to a Microsoft
Excel file. After you have made updates in the Microsoft Excel file, you can use
this page to perform the import procedure to create new records and/or update
existing records.
Manage Inspection Groups: Displays the Find Inspection Groups page, which
you can use to create and manage Inspection Groups.
Administrative Settings: Displays the Administrative Tasks page, where you can
specify:
Which workflow you will use when using RBI.
Which steps in that workflow will be available to you.
Whether or not half-life will be considered when determining an interval

for certain Inspection Tasks.
The Inspection Priority Ranges that will be used when you create
Inspection Groups.

Deploying and configuring RBI for the first time includes completing multiple steps,
which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the documentation
provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure RBI on top of the basic
Meridium APM system architecture.
Whether a step is required or optional is indicated in the Required/Optional cell. Steps are
marked as Required if you must perform the step to take advantage of RBI functionality.
The person responsible for completing each task may vary within your organization. We
recommend, however, that the steps be performed in relatively the same order in which
they are listed in the table.
Step Task
Required/Optional Notes
Review the RBI data model to determine which

relationship definitions you will need to modify
to include your custom equipment and location
Optional
families. Modify any relationship definitions as
needed via the Configuration Manager
application.
This task is necessary only if

you store equipment and
location information in
families other than the
baseline Equipment and
Functional Location families.
Assign Security Users to one or more of the

RBI Security Groups via the Configuration
Required
Manager application.
Add the following types of RBI users to at least
one TM Security Group:
Users will need permissions

to the RBI families in order to
use the RBI functionality.
Users who are responsible for

completing the steps necessary to use
TM Analysis values to calculate RBI
corrosion rates.
Optional
Users who should be able to navigate to
TM via RBI.
This step is necessary only if

you are using the integration
between the RBI and TM
modules.
You can accomplish this task using the

Configuration Manager application.
4
Limit the Potential Degradation Mechanisms

records that can be linked to Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records. You can
accomplish this task using the Configuration
Optional

you want to limit the list of
Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records that are
displayed in the search results
on the Link Existing Potential

Degradation Mechanisms to
<Criticality Calculator RBI
Components Record ID>
window.
If you plan to create your own Potential

Degradation Mechanisms records, modify the
MI_DEGRADATION_MECHANISM_TYPES
System Code Table by adding the desired
System Code values.
Optional
None
You can accomplish this task using the

Modify the Recommendation Creation Enabled

setting on the Administrative Tasks page via the Optional
Meridium APM Framework application.
This setting is enabled by

default. This task is necessary
only if you want to disable
this setting because you use
the Asset Strategy
Management (ASM) module
to recommend actions and
manage mitigated risk.
Modify the Enable Recommendations to be

Generated at Created State setting on the
Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium
APM Framework application.
Optional
This setting is disabled by

only if you want to create RBI
Recommendation records
while RBI Criticality Analysis
records are in the Created
state.
Modify the Risk Assessment Enabled setting on

the Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium Optional

only if you want to enable this
setting because you use a
custom calculator.
Modify the Allow Override of Calculated

Unmitigated Risk Values setting on the
Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium

only if you want to want to
enable this setting because
you use a custom calculator.
Optional
Modify the ASM Integration Enabled setting on

the Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium Optional
If the Asset Strategy

Management license is active,
this setting is enabled by
only if you want to disable
this setting because you do
not want to transfer RBI
Analyses to ASM. The
Meridium APM RBI Best
Practice assumes that this
setting is disabled, and that
you do not transfer RBI
Analyses to ASM.
11
Modify the Consider Half-Life when

Determining Inspection Task Interval setting on
Optional
the Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium

default. If you are following
the Meridium APM RBI Best
Practice, you should enable
this setting so that additional
values will be considered
when determining the Desired
Interval value in certain
Inspection Task records.
12
Select the Is a Unit? check box in Functional

Location records that represent units in your
Required
facility. You can accomplish this task using the
This field is used throughout

RBI to distinguish these
Functional Location records
from those that represent
other levels in the location
hierarchy.
13
Using the Belongs to a Unit relationship, link

Equipment records to Functional Location
records representing units to which that
equipment belongs (i.e., the field Is a Unit?
Required
contains the value True.) You can accomplish
this task using the Meridium APM Framework
application.
None
14
Configure the Meridium APM system to

generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically. You can accomplish this task
using the Meridium APM Framework
application.
You can complete this task

only if certain conditions
exist.
10
Optional
15
16
Modify the Generate Recommendations using

Policy Manager setting on the Administrative
Optional
Tasks page via the Meridium APM Framework
application.

default. If you have
configured the Meridium
APM system to generate RBI
Recommendation records
automatically, you should
enable this setting.
Create Potential Degradation Mechanisms

records via the Meridium APM Framework
application.
Optional

you want to use additional
Mechanism records that are
not provided in the baseline
Meridium APM database.
Optional

you want the Probability
Category field in certain
Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation records to be
populated automatically based
upon this ranking.
Optional
You can create your own PV

Stress records if you do not
import the PV Stress records
that Meridium, Inc. provides.
17
Assign a ranking to all Qualitative Potential

Degradation Mechanisms records via the
18
Import PV Stress records using the

19
Import Tank Stress records using the

20
Import Policy records using the Configuration

Optional
Optional
You can create your own Tank

Stress records if you do not
import the Tank Stress records
that Meridium, Inc. provides.
you follow the Meridium
APM RBI Best Practice and
the following settings are
enabled:
Recommendation
Creation Enabled
Generate
Recommendations
using Policy
Manager
Define the ranges for Inspection Priorities that

will be used for Inspection Groups using the
Optional
21

you use Inspection Group
functionality and you want to
modify the ranges that are
defined by default.
Upgrade Workflow
You can upgrade to V3.6.0.0.0 using the instructions that are provided in this section of
the documentation. To access these instructions, click the starting version from which you
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading RBI from V3.5.1 to

V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure RBI for
V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for upgrading the basic
Step Task
Requi
Import Policy records that Meridium, Inc. modified in order to fix issues in the associated policy
diagrams. This includes the following Policy records:
1
Requi
Appendix_B
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Appendix_G
Appendix_H
Appendix_I
PRD_Strategies
Import the Inspection Strategy records that Meridium, Inc. modified in order to fix issues in
existing Inspection Strategy records. To do so:
1. Using the Import/Export Metadata window, navigate to the following location on the
Meridium APM Application Server machine:
C:\Meridium\DbUpg\MI_DB_Master_3600000\3600000\20_IEU\50_Other\2_RecordsLi
Requi
nks.
2. Import the file MI_INSP_STRAT.xml from this location.
The file is imported, and the associated Inspection Strategy records are created, replacing
the previous ones.
Upgrading RBI from V3.5.0 SP1 LP to

V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task
Requi
1
Requi
Appendix_B
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Appendix_G
Appendix_H
Appendix_I
PRD_Strategies
Requi
nks.
the previous ones.
Import Policy records that are new to V3.5.1. The XML files that you will need to import are:
Int Corrosion Insp Grouping Policy.xml
CUI Insp Grouping Policy.xml
Option
In Functional Location records that represent units in your facility, select the Is a Unit? check
box.
Using the Belongs to a Unit relationship, link Equipment records to Functional Location records
representing units to which that equipment belongs (i.e., the field Is a Unit? contains the value
Requi
True.) You can accomplish this task using the Meridium APM Framework application.
Modify the Enable Recommendations to be Generated at Created State setting on the

Administrative Tasks page via the Meridium APM Framework application.
Requi
Option
Upgrading RBI from V3.5.0 to

V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task
Requi
Appendix_B
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Appendix_G
Appendix_H
Appendix_I
PRD_Strategies
Requi
Requi
nks.
the previous ones.
Import Policy records that were new to V3.5.1. The XML files that you will need to import are:
Int Corrosion Insp Grouping Policy.xml
CUI Insp Grouping Policy.xml
Option
box.
Requi

Requi
Option
Upgrading RBI From V3.4.5 to

V3.6.0.0.0
Step Task
Requi
Appendix_B
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Appendix_G
Appendix_H
Appendix_I
Requi
PRD_Strategies
Requi
nks.
the previous ones.
Import Policy records that will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records automatically. Option
If you plan to generate RBI Recommendation records using Inspection Strategy records and you Option
have previously created Task Types records with the reference value Inspection, in those records,
change the value in the Reference field to Inspection_Strategy.
box.
Requi

Requi
Option
Applying V3.6.0.2.0
The following table lists the step that is required to configure RBI for V3.6.0.2.0. This
step assumes that you have completed the steps for upgrading the components in the
basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Import Policy records that
Meridium, Inc. modified in this
release:
Appendix_B
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Appendix_G
Appendix_H
Appendix_I
PRD_Strategies
Required
This step is required only if

you use Policy records to
generate RBI
RBI Security Groups

The following Security Groups are provided for use with RBI:
MI RBI Administrator
MI RBI Analyst
These groups are intended to support the two main types of users who will use RBI. Each
of these groups has privileges assigned to it by default. Along with family-level privileges
that are associated with each Security Group, members of these Security Groups can see
the following links on the RBI Start Page in the Meridium APM Framework application:
Manage Potential Degradation Mechanisms

Manage Strategy Logic Cases
Manage Field Mappings
The baseline family-level privileges are summarized in the following table.
Family
MI RBI Administrator
MI RBI Analyst
Entity Families
Asset Group
View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Consequence Evaluation
Factors
Corrosion
None
View
Corrosion Analysis Settings
None
View
Criticality Consequence
Evaluation
Criticality Other Damage

Mech. Eval.
Criticality Env. Crack. Deg.

Mech. Eval.
Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg.

Mech. Eval.

Mech. Eval.
Criticality RBI Component View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Cylindrical Shell
Exchanger Bundle
Exchanger Header
Exchanger Tube
Piping
Tank Bottom
Data Mapping Column-Field
View, Update, Insert, Delete View
Pair
Data Mapping Group
Data Mapping Query
Degradation Mechanisms
Evaluation Factors
Equipment
Functional Location
Grouping Element
Inspection Task
Meridium General
Recommendation
View
Meridium Reference Tables
Policy
View
Mechanisms
RBI Degradation
View, Update, Insert, Delete
View
Mechanisms
RBI Recommendation
RBI Strategy Mapping

Configuration
RBI Strategy Mapping

Details
RBI System
Reference Document
Risk Assessment
Risk Rank
Risk Translation
SAP System
View
Strategy Logic Case
Strategy Reference Table
Task Type
Time Based Inspection

Interval

Setting
View
Relationship Families
Belongs to a Unit
Data Mapping has ColumnField Pair
Data Mapping has Query
Data Mapping has Subgroup View, Update, Insert, Delete View

Has Asset Group
Has Child RBI Criticality

Analysis
Has Consequence Evaluation View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Has Consolidated
Recommendations
None
Has Corrosion Analyses
View
View
Has Corrosion Analysis

Settings
None
View
Has Datapoints
None
View
Has Degradation Mechanisms View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Has Inspections
None
View
View
Has Potential Degradation

Mechanisms
Has RBI Components
Has RBI Criticality Analysis View, Update, Insert, Delete View, Update, Insert, Delete
Has RBI Degradation
Mechanism Evaluation
Has RBI Strategy Mapping

Configuration
Has RBI Systems
Has Recommendations
Has Reference Documents
Has Reference Values
None
View
Has SAP System
View
View
Has Superseded
Recommendations
None
Has Task Revision
None
Has Tasks
Has Time Based Inspection

Interval
Has Unmitigated Risk
Is Based on RBI Degradation

Mechanisms
Is Mitigated
Is Part of Group
Mapped to RBI Component
Represents Inspections
Note the following details about certain security privileges listed in this table:
Privileges to the following entity and relationship families support the Inspection
Grouping feature by which you can create and manage Inspection Groups for
equipment in your facility:
o Policy
o
SAP System
Has SAP System
These families are not used elsewhere in the RBI module.
Privileges to the following entity and relationship families support integration

with the Inspection Management module:
o Has Inspection Scope
Specifically, certain features of the Time-Based Inspection Settings functionality, which

you can use if the Inspection Management license is active, are facilitated by these
privileges.
Limiting Potential Degradation

Mechanisms that Can Be Linked to
RBI Components
When you link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records, the Link Existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms to
<Criticality Calculator RBI Components Record ID> window appears, where you can
select the desired Potential Degradation Mechanisms records. You can limit the records
that are displayed on this window based on the value in the Component Type field in the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
To do so, you will need to complete the following manual steps:
1. In the Configuration Manager, create System Codes within the baseline
MI_PDM_FILTER System Code Table. The IDs of these System Codes much
match the values that will be stored in the Component Type field in any Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that you want to link to a Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record.
2. In the Configuration Manager, add references to the System Codes that you
created in step 2. The references must come from the baseline
MI_DEGRADATION_MECHANISM_TYPES System Code Table. For each
System Code in the MI_PDM_FILTER System Code Table, you should add only
the references that represent the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that
you want to be able to link to Criticality Calculator RBI Components records with
the ID of that System Code.
For example, suppose you want to link Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
with the Component Type Heat Exchanger-Shell to Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records. Suppose that you want to limit the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to
only those records with the following values in the Degradation Mechanism Description
field: Carbonate Cracking, Brittle Fracture, or Amine Cracking (ASCC).
To accomplish this, you would need to complete the following tasks:
Add a System Code with the ID Heat Exchanger-Shell to the MI_PDM_FILTER

System Code Table.
-and
Add the following references to the System Code Heat Exchanger-Shell:
Carbonate Cracking
Brittle Fracture
Amine Cracking (ASCC)
The configuration would look like this:
If you were to configure the references this way, when users chose to link a Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with
the value Heat Exchanger-Shell in the Component Type field, the window shown in the
following image would appear.
In the Search Conditions text box, you can see that the values are limited to only those
that are associated with the selected references: Amine Cracking, Brittle Fracture, and
Carbonate Cracking.
About Importing Records Used in RBI

Certain functionality in the RBI module requires values to be stored in records in the
following families:
Policy
PV Stress
Tank Stress
Although baseline records are not provided in these families, you can create them
manually by importing them from the Meridium APM Application Server using the
Import/Export Metadata Tool.
Note: The records are deployed to the Meridium APM Application Server during the
Application Server installation process.
The records are provided in a set of XML files, some of which have corresponding
folders, that are stored in the subfolders listed in the following table, which are stored in
the following location that is available on the Meridium APM Application Server
machine: C:\Meridium\DbUpg\Versions\<database version>\_IEU_ManualImports,
where <database version> is the database version that is currently installed.
Records
_IEU_ManualImports
subfolder
XML files
Corresponding folders
Appendix_B.xml
Appendix_B Files
Appendix_D.xml
Appendix_D Files
Appendix_E.xml
Appendix_E Files
Appendix_F.xml
Appendix_F Files
Appendix_G.xml
Appendix_G Files
Appendix_H.xml
Policy
Policy Records
Appendix_H Files
Appendix_I.xml
Appendix_I Files
CUI Insp Grouping
Policy.xml
Int Corrosion Insp
Grouping Policy.xml
CUI Insp Grouping

Policy Files
Int Corrosion Insp
Grouping Policy Files
PRD_Strategies.xml
PRD_Strategies Files
PV Stress Stress Records
1_1998 ASME Stress

Data.xml
2_2010 ASM 100-500
Stress Data.xml
3_2010 ASM 550-1000
N/A
Stress Data.xml
4_2010 ASME 1050-1800
Stress Data.xml
Tank
Stress
Stress Records
2008 API 650 Tank Stress

Data.xml
N/A
You are not required to import any of the Policy, PV Stress, or Tank Stress records that
Meridium, Inc. provides. If you are upgrading from a previous version of Meridium APM
in which you created any of these records manually, you might choose not to import the
records that are distributed by Meridium, Inc. so that you can maintain your existing
records and their values.
About Importing PV Stress Records

The RBI module uses values in PV Stress records when you create RBI Criticality
Analysis records and calculate RBI Analyses. If you choose to import the PV Stress
records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and your database already contains PV Stress
records, the import procedure will update existing records if they contain the same values
as the Meridium APM records in the following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Material Specification
Material Grade
Metal Temperature
For example, suppose that your database contains a PV Stress record with the following
field values:
Design Code: Section VIII Div 1

Code Year: 1998
Material Specification: SA/CSA-G40
Material Grade: 38W
Metal Temperature: -20
Minimum Tensile Strength: 40
One of the XML files contains a PV Stress record with the following field values, where
the values in blue match those in your existing record:

Code Year: 1998
Material Grade: 38W
In this case, although the value in the Minimum Tensile Strength field in your PV Stress
record does not match the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record, this record
would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated PV Stress record would contain the value 45 instead of 40 in the
Minimum Tensile Strength field.
If any of your existing PV Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing RBI Criticality Analysis records will not be updated. If needed, you can update
them manually.
If you have existing PV Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM PV
Stress records should be made only after you have carefully evaluated your existing
records. The Meridium APM documentation does not provide a list of the values that will
exist in the PV Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Meridium, Inc. representative to make an informed decision.
Note: The values in the Meridium APM PV Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks), ASME Section II Part D tables 1A and 1B
(pressure vessels), and the ASME B31.3 (piping circuits) specifications.
About Importing Tank Stress Records

The RBI module uses values in Tank Stress records when you create RBI Criticality
Analysis records and calculate RBI Analyses. If you choose to import the Tank Stress
records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and your database already contains Tank
Stress records, the import procedure will update existing records if they contain the same
values as the Meridium APM records in the following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Allowable Stress
Minimum Tensile Strength
Minimum Yield Strength
For example, suppose that your database contains a Tank Stress record with the following
field values:
Material Grade: C
Material Specification: A10
Design Code: API 650
Code Year: 2008
Allowable Stress: 23600
Minimum Yield Strength: 30000
The XML file contains a Tank Stress record with the following field values, where the
values in blue match those in your existing record:
Material Grade: None. This value is not populated in the imported Tank Stress
records.
Code Year: 2008
In this case, although the value in the Material Grade field in your Tank Stress record is
different than the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record (which is null), this
record would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated Tank Stress record would not contain a value in the Material Grade
field.
If any of your existing Tank Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing RBI Criticality Analysis records will not be updated. If needed, you can update
them manually.
If you have existing Tank Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM Tank
exist in the Tank Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Note: The values in the Meridium APM Tank Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks) specifications.
About Importing Policy Records

If you specify that RBI Recommendation records should be generated automatically, you
must import the Policy records that Meridium, Inc. provides. Policy records are used to
determine the Inspection Strategy records whose values will be used to populate values in
RBI Recommendation records that are generated automatically.
The Meridium APM RBI best practice assumes that you will generate RBI
Recommendation records automatically and import the Policy records that Meridium,
Inc. provides.
Viewing Imported Policy Records

After you have imported the Policy records that Meridium, Inc. provides, if the Policy
Manager license is:
Active, you can view and modify the Policy records using the Policy Manager
module.
Not active, you can view the imported Policy records using a read-only format of
the Policy Manager module.
The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will not modify the Policy
records that Meridium, Inc. provides. The following instructions provide details on
viewing the imported Policy records when the Policy Manager license is not active.
To view the imported Policy records:
1. Perform a search for the Policy record that you want to view, and open the Policy
record.
The Policy record is displayed in Record Manager.
In the following image, the Policy record Appendix_B is displayed in Record Manager.
2. Click the hyperlink that appears above the Policy datasheet.

The Policy record is displayed in a read-only format on the Policy page.
You can view the details of the Policy record via the Policy page.
Performing the Import Procedure
The following instructions explain how to import Policy, PV Stress, or Tank Stress
records that are used in RBI. These instructions assume that you have already installed
the Meridium APM Application Server software.
To import records that are used in RBI:
1. Using the Import/Export Metadata window, navigate to the following location on
the Meridium APM Application Server machine:
C:\Meridium\DbUpg\Versions\<database version>\_IEU_ManualImports, where
<database version> is the database version that is currently installed.
Within the _IEU_ManualImports folder, you will see the following subfolders that
identify the types of records that they contain:
Policy Records: Contains Policy records.
Stress Records: Contains PV Stress and Tank Stress records.
2. Import the XML files, one at a time. You can import the files in any order.
The files are imported, and the appropriate Policy, PV Stress, or Tank Stress records are
created.
Configuring Meridium APM to

Generate RBI Recommendations
Automatically
When the following conditions are met, Meridium APM will generate RBI
Recommendation records automatically using Inspection Strategy records:
The Recommendation Creation Enabled setting on the Administrative Tasks page

is enabled.
The Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager setting is enabled on the
Administrative Tasks page.
The Policy records provided by Meridium, Inc. have been imported.
RBI Recommendation records may be generated automatically in the following

scenarios:
When you click the Generate Recommendations link on the RBI Asset View page.
When you archive an Inspection Group.
The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will generate RBI
Recommendation records using Inspection Strategy records. As such, the documentation
does not provide additional details on generating RBI Recommendation records using
Strategy Logic Case records.
About Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records
Potential Degradation Mechanisms records are used to represent ways in which a
subcomponent might fail (e.g., mechanical fatigue). After you link Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records to an RBI System record, you can link Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records to those Criticality Calculator RBI Components records. Each
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record represents one way in which that subcomponent can fail.
Meridium APM provides several baseline Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to
represent common failure mechanisms, but you can create your own Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records if subcomponents in your facility can fail in additional
ways.
Note that each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that Meridium APM provides is
categorized as either Qualitative or Quantitative (using the value in the Methodology
Type field).
Opening a Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Record
To view a list of Potential Degradation Mechanism records:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, on the RBI Start Page, click the Manage
Potential Degradation Mechanisms link.
The Search page appears, displaying the Simple Search workspace. The value in the
Search In list is set by default to Potential Degradation Mechanisms. You cannot select
another value.
2. If desired, add criteria to the search.

3. Click the Find Now button.
The search results are displayed below the search criteria. Each row represents a Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record that meets the search criteria.
4. From the search results, open the desired record.

The selected Potential Degradation Mechanisms record appears.
Creating a Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Record
Before you can create a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record, the
MI_DEGRADATION_MECHANISM_TYPES System Code Table must contain a
System Code value that does not yet appear in the Degradation Mechanism field of an
existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
To create a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, on the toolbar, click the New button.
The Select Family dialog box appears.
2. In the list, select Potential Degradation Mechanisms, and then click OK.
A new Potential Degradation Mechanisms record appears in the Record Manager.
3. In the Datasheet list, select Potential Degradation Mechanism.

The Potential Degradation Mechanism datasheet appears.
4. Complete the fields as desired.

5. When you are finished completing the fields, on the Common Tasks menu, click
the Save link.
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms record is saved.
About Baseline Potential Degradation

Mechanisms
Meridium APM provides several Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are
classified in one of two ways, according to the value in the Methodology Type field:
Qualitative
Quantitative
All of the Qualitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms records apply to RBI

Components. The Quantitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms records apply to either
RBI Components or pressure relief devices.
Qualitative Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records
Meridium APM provides the following Qualitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records, where the values in the list are the Record IDs of the baseline records:
885 Embrittlement
Brittle Fracture
Carburization
Creep
Erosion
Graphitization
Hot Hydrogen Attack
Hydrogen Embrittlement
Hydrogen Induced Cracking
Liquid Metal Embrittlement
Mechanical Fatigue
Phase Change Embrittlement
Refractory Failure
Temper Embrittlement
Thermal Fatigue
Wet H2S Damage
Quantitative Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records (RBI
Components)
Meridium APM provides the following Quantitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records that should be used for RBI Components, where the values in the list are the
Record IDs of the baseline records:
Amine Cracking (ASCC)

Carbonate Cracking
Caustic Cracking
Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking (CI SCC)
Criticality Calculator External Corrosion
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion
Ext Chloride SCC
Hydrogen Stress Cracking (HSC)- Hydrofluoric Acid
Polythionic Acid SCC (PTA)
Stress Corrosion Cracking
Sulfide Stress Cracking (SSC)
Wet H2S (Blistering, SOHIC, HIC, SSC)
Quantitative Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records (Pressure Relief
Devices)
Meridium APM provides the following Quantitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records that should be used for pressure relief devices, where the values in the list are the
Record IDs of the baseline records:
Blocked Discharge
Blocked Discharge - Admin Control
Control Valve Failure (Fail Opposite)
Control Valve Failure (Fail Safe)
Electrical Power Failure
Exchanger Tube Rupture
Fire
Liquid Overfill
Liquid Overfill - Admin Control
Loss of Cooling
Runaway Reaction
Thermal Relief
Thermal Relief - Admin Control
Tower Pump Failures
Leak
About Degradation Mechanisms

Evaluation Factors Records
For each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that belongs to an RBI Analysis, a
corresponding Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record also belongs to that RBI
Analysis. In each Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record that is associated with
a qualitative degradation mechanism (i.e., the corresponding RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record was created from a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with
the value Qualitative in the Methodology Type field), you can specify the probability that
the corresponding RBI Component will fail due to that degradation mechanism.
For example, if an RBI Analysis contains an Erosion RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record, it will also contain a corresponding Erosion Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record. In this Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record, you can
specify a value in the Probability Category field to indicate the probability that the RBI
Component will fail due to erosion.
After you select a value in the Probability Category field and calculate the RBI Analysis,
the Probability Category Description field will be populated automatically based upon the
values in an existing Degradation Mechanisms Evaluation Factors record.
For instance, suppose a Degradation Mechanisms Evaluation Factors record contains the
following values in the following fields:
Degradation Mechanism: Erosion

Ranking: 1
Ranking Description: Erosion - Impact Resistant Material. Good Inspection

History with no evidence of Damage.
If an RBI Analysis is linked to an Erosion Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation

record and you select 1 in the Probability Category field, the value in the Probability
Category Description field will be populated with the value in the Ranking Description
field in the Degradation Mechanisms Evaluation Factors record containing the values
Erosion and 1. In this example, the Probability Category Description field would be
populated with the value Erosion - Impact Resistant Material. Good Inspection History
with no evidence of Damage, as shown in the following image.
Note: The baseline Meridium APM database does not contain any Degradation
Mechanisms Evaluation Factors records. This documentation, however, assumes that
your database has been modified to include a Degradation Mechanisms Evaluation
Factors record for each qualitative Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
About Inspection Strategy Records

Inspection Strategy records store information and guidelines for performing various types
of inspections on equipment and locations. Some Inspection Strategy values are used to
populate values in:
RBI Recommendation records that you generate in RBI when the Generate
Recommendations using Policy Manager setting is enabled and you have
imported the Policy records that Meridium, Inc.
Inspection records that are used in the Inspection Management module.
Meridium APM provides a set of Inspection Strategy records in the baseline database.
Accessing the Administrative Tasks Page

To access the Administrative Tasks page:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the RBI Start Page.
2. Click the Administrative Settings link.
The Administrative Tasks page appears.
Aspects of the Administrative Tasks

Page
The Administrative Tasks page contains the Preferences for Risk Based Inspection
workspace, which contains options that control:
Which workflow you will use when using RBI.

Which steps in that workflow will be available to you.
Whether or not half-life will be considered when determining an interval for

certain Inspection Tasks.
Inspection Priority Ranges, which will be used when you create Inspection
Groups.
The following image shows the settings as they are configured in the baseline RBI
product.
The Preferences for Risk Based Inspection workspace contains items that correspond with
the following settings:
Recommendation Creation Enabled: When this setting is enabled, you can create
RBI Recommendation records in RBI. This setting is enabled by default.
o If ASM integration is disabled and you want to recommend actions and
manage mitigated risk for degradation mechanisms in RBI, you should
accept the baseline configuration.
o
If you want to recommend actions and manage mitigated risk in ASM, you
should modify the baseline configuration by clearing this check box.
When this setting is enabled, the Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager
setting should also be enabled.
Enable Recommendations to be Generated at Created State: When this setting is

enabled:
o You can create RBI Recommendation records for RBI Analyses whose
associated RBI Criticality Analysis record is in the Created state.
o
You cannot create RBI Recommendation records for RBI Analyses whose
associated RBI Criticality Analysis record has been transitioned to the
Risk Completed state.
When you copy a main RBI Analysis, you have the option to specify that
the RBI Recommendation records that are linked to the associated RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records that will be linked to the new RBI
Criticality Analysis records should also be linked to the new RBI
Criticality Analysis records. Specifically, the Copy Recommendations for
Degradation Mechanisms check box is enabled on the Select Degradation
Mechanisms window that is displayed when you perform the copy
procedure. When this setting is disabled, the Copy Recommendations for
Degradation Mechanisms check box is disabled on the Select
Degradation Mechanisms window.
This setting is disabled by default and can only be enabled if the Recommendation
Creation Enabled setting is enabled also. The RBI Best Practice assumes that you will
create RBI Recommendation records only for calculated RBI Analyses whose associated
RBI Criticality Analysis record has been transitioned to the Risk Completed state. This
documentation, therefore, assumes that you will not enable this setting.
Risk Assessment Enabled: When this setting is enabled, you can calculate
unmitigated risk using a custom calculator and display the values on the Risk
Matrix. This setting is disabled by default.
o If you want to accept the Meridium APM system calculations for
unmitigated risk, which are displayed on the Degradation Mechanism
datasheet, you should accept the default selection.
o
Allow Override of Calculated Unmitigated Risk Values: When this setting is

enabled, you can use the Risk Matrix to change the calculated unmitigated risk
values manually. This setting is disabled by default. This check box is enabled
only when the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is selected.
If you are using a custom calculator to calculate unmitigated risk and

display it on the Risk Matrix, you should enable this setting by selecting
this check box.
If ASM integration is enabled and you want to accept the Meridium APM
system calculations for unmitigated risk, which calculates the unmitigated
risk and displays the values on the Degradation Mechanism datasheet, you
should accept the default selection.
If ASM integration is enabled, you are using a custom calculator to
calculate unmitigated risk and display it on the Risk Matrix, and you want
users to be able to modify the calculated unmitigated risk, you should
enable this setting by selecting this check box.
ASM Integration Enabled: When this setting is enabled, you can transfer RBI
Analyses to Asset Strategy Management (ASM) as Asset Strategies. If the ASM
license is active, this setting is enabled by default. If the ASM license is not
active, this check box is disabled.
o
If you want RBI and ASM to be integrated, you should accept the default
selection.
If you do not want RBI and ASM to be integrated, you should disable this
setting by clearing this check box.
The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that this setting is disabled, and that you
do not transfer RBI Analyses to ASM.
Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval: This setting plays
a role in determining how the Desired Interval field in certain Inspection Task
records is populated. This setting is disabled by default. If the Thickness
Monitoring license is active, and you have TM Analyses for the Equipment that
you analyze in RBI, you should enable this setting so that additional values will
be considered when determining the value that is populated in the Desired Interval
field in Inspection Task records that are created from or linked to an RBI
Recommendation record whose Damage Mechanism field contains the value
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion.
Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager: When this setting is enabled,
Inspection Strategy records are used to generate RBI Recommendation records,
based upon the logic in Policy records. This setting is disabled by default. If you
want to:
Use Inspection Strategy records to generate RBI Recommendation

records, you should enable this setting by selecting this check box.
Use Strategy Logic Case records to generate RBI Recommendation
records, you should accept the default selection (i.e., disabled).
Inspection Priority Ranges for Risk Categories: The grid displayed for this setting
can be used to view and define the high and low limits for Risk Categories for the
purposes of creating Inspection Groups.
The Administrative Tasks page also contains the following task menus:
Administrative Tasks
Common Tasks
IMPORTANT: With the exception of modifying your administrative settings to use new
functionality, you should not modify the administrative settings after you have configured
them and users have started creating RBI Analyses using those settings.
Administrative Tasks
The Administrative Tasks menu on the Administrative Tasks page contains the following
link:
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the page. This link is enabled
only when you have made one or more changes.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Administrative Tasks page contains the following links:
Send To: Displays a submenu with options that let you provide a link to the
current page on your desktop (create shortcut), in an email message, or on a Home
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Administrative Tasks page.
Disabling ASM Integration

By default, ASM and RBI are integrated, which allows you to transfer RBI Analyses to
ASM as Asset Strategies. If desired, you can disable ASM integration.
To disable ASM integration:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Administrative Tasks page.
2. Clear the ASM Integration Enabled check box.
ASM integration is disabled. The following image shows the cleared ASM Integration
Enabled check box on the Administrative Tasks page. A red outline has been added to the
image to highlight the check box.
Defining How RBI Will Work if ASM

Integration is Enabled
If you accept the baseline RBI configuration and keep the integration between RBI and
ASM, you will need to make some additional decisions about how you want RBI to
work. Depending upon your decisions, you will need to complete the appropriate
administrative tasks to support the desired functionality.
The following table lists the questions you will need to ask, the possible answers, the
action that you will need to complete based upon your answer, and notes to consider
about the results of completing those actions.
The cells shaded gray indicate that no action is required because the baseline
administrative setting supports the functionality.
Question
How will risk
values be
calculated for
degradation
mechanisms?
Answer
Action
Result for RBI Users
By the Meridium
APM system.
Accept the baseline

disabled setting for
the Risk
Assessment
Enabled option.
The calculated risk values

will be displayed on the
Degradation Mechanism
datasheet.
The calculated risk values
will be displayed on the:
By my own custom
calculator.
Note: This
documentation does
Select the Risk
not explain how you
Assessment
can create a custom
Enabled check box.
calculator or how you
can configure the
Meridium APM
system to use it.
Will users be able

to override risk
Yes
Select the Allow

Override of
Calculated
Risk Matrix, which

can be accessed
from the RBI Asset
View page.
Degradation
Mechanism with
Risk Mitigation
datasheet.
Degradation
Mechanism without
Risk Mitigation
datasheet.
Users can use the Risk

Matrix to select different
Unmitigated Risk
Values check box.
values that were

calculated by my
own custom
calculator?
unmitigated risk values.
Note: If risk values

are calculated by
the Meridium APM
No
system, users
cannot override the
risk values
Accept the baseline

disabled setting for
Users cannot select
the Allow Override
different unmitigated risk
of Calculated
values.
Unmitigated Risk
Values option.
How will I manage I will create RBI

recommendations Recommendations in
for future action? RBI and transfer
them to ASM as
Action records.
Users can create RBI

Accept the baseline Recommendation records
enabled setting for using the Recommendation
the
Tasks menu in RBI or the
Recommendation Common Tasks menu in
Creation Enabled Recommendation
option.
Management (when
accessed from RBI).
I will not create RBI

Recommendations in
Clear the
RBI but will instead
Recommendation
create Action records
Creation Enabled
in ASM for Risk
check box.
records that were
transferred from RBI.
Users cannot create RBI

Recommendation records in
RBI. They will need to
promote Equipment records
to ASM and then create
Action records in ASM for
any Risk record that
originated in RBI.
Enabling the Consider Half-Life When

Determining Inspection Task Interval
Setting
The Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval setting plays a role in
determining the value that is populated in the Desired Interval field in Inspection Task
records that are linked to RBI Recommendation records. By default, this setting is
disabled. If the Thickness Monitoring license is active, and TM Analyses exist for the
Equipment records that you analyze in RBI, you should enable this setting so that
additional values are considered when populating the Desired Interval field in Inspection
Task records whose Task Type field contains the value Internal Visual or RBI - INT COR.
To enable the Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval setting:
1. On the Administrative Tasks page, select the Consider Half-Life when
Determining Inspection Task Interval check box.
In the following image, the Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task
Interval check box is selected.
2. On the Administrative Tasks menu, click the Save link.

Your selections are saved. Additional values are considered when populating the Desired
Interval field in Inspection Task records whose Task Type field contains the value
Internal Visual or RBI - INT COR.
Defining Inspection Priority Ranges

The Inspection Priority Ranges for Risk Categories setting is used to determine the Risk
Category of an RBI Component for the purposes of creating Inspection Groups. The
following image shows the grid that is displayed for this setting on the Administrative
Tasks page and the ranges that are defined by default.
The values that are displayed in the Highest Inspection Priority and Lowest Inspection
Priority columns in the grid represent the high and low limits for each Risk Category
with respect to the value that is stored in the Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) field
in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is associated with the Criticality
For example, if you use the Inspection Priority Ranges that are defined by default (i.e.,
the ranges that are displayed in preceding image), and the Inspection Priority
(Unmitigated Risk) field in an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record contains the value
15, when an RBI Component that is associated with that RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record is included in an Inspection Group, the Grouping Element record for that RBI
Component will be assigned a Risk Category of Medium.
You can modify the following values in the Lowest Inspection Priority column in the
grid:
High
Medium High
Medium
You cannot modify the values in the row Low or in the Highest Inspection Priority
column. Instead, these values are updated automatically when you modify values in the
Lowest Inspection Priority column.
Selecting the Is a Unit? Check Box

The field Is a Unit? is defined for the Functional Location family in the Meridium APM
baseline database. While all other fields in Functional Location records are populated
automatically by the Meridium APM system, the field Is a Unit? must be set manually in
order to execute certain workflows in RBI. You should select the Is a Unit? check box in
any Functional Location record that represents a unit in your organization.
To select the Is a Unit? check box:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework application, locate the Functional Location
record that represents a unit in your organization, and open the record in the
Record Manager.
2. On the Functional Location datasheet, select the Is a Unit? check box.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save link.
Your changes are saved, and the Functional Location record represents a unit for the
purposes of executing RBI workflows in which this field is used to distinguish a unit
from other Functional Location records (e.g., running the Manage RBI System query).
Linking Equipment Records to

Functional Location Records
Representing Units
When a Functional Location record represents a unit in your facility (i.e., the value in the
field Is a Unit? is set to True), you will need to link that Functional Location record to the
Equipment records that belong to the unit. These links must be created in order for the
Navigation Bar to function as expected.
To link Equipment records to Functional Location records representing units:
1. Open in the Record Manager the Functional Location record representing a unit
and to which you want to link an Equipment record.
2. Using the Record Explorer pane, create a link between the Functional Location
record and the appropriate Equipment record. Make sure to select the Belongs to a
Unit check box on the Select Link Family dialog box.
The Equipment record is linked to the Functional Location record through the Belongs to
a Unit relationship.
Overview of the RBI Workflow

Depending upon your role within the organization and your membership in RBI Security
Groups, the workflow that you follow in RBI will vary. Additionally, the workflow that
you follow will depend upon whether or not the Thickness Monitoring and Asset Strategy
Management licenses are active. The Meridium APM Mechanical Integrity Best Practice
assumes that when the Risk Based Inspection license is active:
The Thickness Monitoring license is also active.

The Asset Strategy Management (ASM) license is not active, or if it is active,
integration with ASM is disabled (the ASM Integration Enabled check box on the
Administrative Tasks page is cleared.
You will import the Policy records that Meridium, Inc. provides.
You will enable the Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager setting to
specify that Inspection Strategy records are used to generate RBI
Recommendations.
This documentation, with the exception of the section on configuring RBI, assumes that
you are following the Meridium APM Mechanical Integrity Best Practice. As such, you
will need to perform the following tasks in RBI:
1. Set up RBI Systems to organize the components that you want to analyze.
2. Assign degradation mechanisms to each component that you want to analyze.
3. Create RBI Analyses for each of the RBI Components that belong to the RBI
System.
4. If the risk values are unacceptable, analyze hypothetical scenarios using a What If
or Future Risk Analyses to determine how additional actions or factors might
affect the risk.
5. Create RBI Recommendation records to capture the recommended actions that
would lower the risk associated with each RBI Component.
6. Create Inspection Groups.
7. Implement Inspection Groups and create RBI Recommendation records to capture
the recommended actions that would lower the risk associated with the RBI
Components that make up each Inspection Group.
8. Evaluate all of your RBI Recommendation records.
9. Create Inspection Task or SAP Notification records from the appropriate RBI
Recommendation records to track the work and make sure that the recommended
actions are implemented.
About RBI and ASM Integration

On the Administrative Tasks page, if the ASM Integration Enabled check box is selected,
you can transfer values in RBI Analyses to Asset Strategies in ASM. When this check box
is selected, at a minimum, you will be able to transfer unmitigated and mitigated risk
values from RBI Degradation Mechanisms records to Risk records in ASM.
Note: The way in which you manage the unmitigated and mitigated risk values depends
upon how other administrative settings are configured.
After an administrative user has decided to allow RBI data to be transferred to ASM, the
administrative user can also decide how you will be able to track recommended actions
based on risk information in RBI Degradation Mechanisms records. They can choose
either of the following options:
You will create RBI Recommendation records to record recommended actions and
mitigated risk values and transfer them to ASM as Action records.
You will not create RBI Recommendation records. Instead, you will recommend
future action and manage mitigated risk values using Action records in ASM.
-or-
To transfer RBI Analyses to Asset Strategies in ASM, you will need to promote the
corresponding Equipment record to ASM. Remember that a single equipment can have
multiple RBI Components, and each RBI Component can have only one RBI Analysis, as
illustrated in the following image.
Note: You can promote an Equipment record to ASM only if the associated RBI
Criticality Analysis record is linked to at least one RBI Degradation Mechanisms record.
Using RBI, you can promote an Equipment record to ASM after you have completed the
following steps:
1. Link Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to an Equipment record.
2. Link each of those Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to an RBI
3. Manage the unmitigated and mitigated risk of the associated RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis records.
4. Set all of the RBI Criticality Analysis records to Risk Completed.
Note that after an Equipment record has been promoted to ASM, if you create a new RBI
Analysis for any Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to that
Equipment record, you can promote the Equipment record to ASM again after setting that
RBI Criticality Analysis record to Risk Completed.
About the Workflow When ASM

Integration is Enabled
When ASM integration is enabled, you will need to complete steps to analyze the risk
associated with RBI Components, recommend future action based on the risks, and
transfer RBI Analyses to ASM. The workflow that you will need to complete depends
upon how you want to recommend future action based on the risk associated with RBI
Components. You can recommend future action in one of two ways:
Using RBI Recommendation records in RBI. In this workflow, you will identify
the mitigated risk of degradation mechanisms in RBI.
Using Action records in ASM. In this workflow, you will identify the mitigated
risk of degradation mechanisms in ASM.
Note: Both workflows assume that the ASM Integration Enabled administrative check
box is selected. Within each workflow, other steps are allowed only if the corresponding
administrative check box is selected.
In most cases, you will complete the steps in either workflow on a regular basis as you
refine the operating conditions and environment. RBI Analyses are dynamic tools that
help you refine your strategy for maintaining RBI Components.
Creating Analyses and Recommending

Future Action Using RBI
The following table describes the RBI workflow if ASM integration is enabled and you
want to recommend future action using RBI Recommendation records. Note that the rows
colored light blue show steps that differ between this workflow and that for
recommending future action using ASM.
Note: The instructions in the table assume that you or someone else has already set up
your RBI Systems appropriately.
Step Description
For each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that is linked to the
RBI System record, create an RBI
Analysis. Doing so will cause the
Meridium APM system to create a link
automatically between each RBI
Criticality Analysis record and the
following records:

Evaluation

Evaluation
None
For each RBI Degradation Mechanisms

record, the calculated risk values will be
displayed on the Degradation
Mechanism datasheet. If, however, a
custom calculator has been configured,
Calculate all RBI Analyses that you
created in step 1. Doing so will cause the the calculated values might also appear
on the Risk Matrix, which you can
Meridium APM system to calculate
access via the RBI Asset View page.
unmitigated risk values for each RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record that was
created automatically as a result of
Note that this documentation does not
performing step 1.
explain how to create a custom
calculator or how a custom calculator is
used to display values on the Risk
Matrix.
Manage unmitigated risk for each RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record. You can
You can use option B only if the
complete this step in one of two ways,
following check boxes on the
depending on how the administrative
Administrative Tasks page are selected:
options are configured:
Notes
Option A: Accept the calculated

unmitigated values.
Option B: Override the calculated
mitigated values by selecting
different values using the Risk
Matrix.
Set the RBI Criticality Analysis records
Risk Assessment Enabled

-and-
None
Allow Override of Calculated

Unmitigated Risk Values
for the calculated RBI Analyses to Risk

Completed.
As appropriate, create RBI

You can do this only if the
Recommendation records for each RBI
Recommendation Creation Enabled
Degradation Mechanisms record that was
check box on the Administrative Tasks
page is selected.
performing step 1.
Identify the mitigated risk associated with
each RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record. You can complete this step in one
of two ways, depending on how the
administrative options are configured:
Option A: Enter mitigated risks

for each RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record using the
datasheet.
You can use option B only if the Risk

Assessment Enabled check box on the
Administrative Tasks page is selected.
Option B: Enter mitigated risks

for each RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record using the Risk
Matrix.

Components record that you created in
step 1, promote the associated Equipment
record to ASM. An Asset Strategy is
created automatically, and values are
mapped from the RBI Analysis to the
Asset Strategy.
Using ASM, manage the Asset Strategy

that was created automatically as a result None
of performing step 7.
If desired, create an Implementation

Package from the Asset Strategy.

record, a Risk record is created in ASM.
For each RBI Recommendation record
that is not set to the Consolidated or
Superseded state, an Action record is
created in ASM.
None
The following image illustrates steps 1 through 7 in the table.
Creating Analyses and Recommending

Future Action Using ASM
The following table describes the RBI workflow if ASM integration is enabled and you
want to recommend future action using Action records in ASM. You can use this
workflow only if the Recommendation Creation Enabled check box is cleared on the
Note that the row colored light blue show steps that differ between this workflow and that
for recommending future action using RBI.
Note: The instructions in the table assume that you or someone else has already set up
your RBI Systems appropriately.
Step Description
Components record that is linked to the
RBI System record, create an RBI
Analysis. Doing so will cause the
Meridium APM system to create a link
automatically between each RBI
Criticality Analysis record and the
following records:

Evaluation

Evaluation
Notes
None

record, the calculated risk values will be
Calculate all RBI Analyses that you
created in step 1. Doing so will cause the displayed on the Degradation
Mechanism datasheet. If, however, a
Meridium APM system to calculate
custom calculator has been configured,
unmitigated risk values for each RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record that was the calculated values might also appear
on the Risk Matrix, which you can
performing step 1.
access via the RBI Asset View page.

Note that this documentation does not
explain how to create a custom
calculator or how a custom calculator is
used to display values on the Risk
Matrix.
Manage unmitigated risk for each RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record. You can
You can use option B only if the
complete this step in one of two ways,
following check boxes are selected on
depending on how the administrative
the Administrative Tasks page:
options are configured:
3
Option A: Accept the calculated

unmitigated values.
Option B: Override the calculated
mitigated values by selecting
different values using the Risk
Matrix.
Risk Assessment Enabled

-and-
Allow Override of Calculated

Unmitigated Risk Values
Set the RBI Criticality Analysis records

for the calculated RBI Analyses to Risk
Completed.
None

Components record that you created in
step 1, promote the associated Equipment
record to ASM. An Asset Strategy is
created automatically, and values are
mapped from the RBI Analysis to the
Asset Strategy.

record, a Risk record is created in ASM.
No Action records are created
automatically because no RBI
Recommendation records exist.
In ASM, create Acton records for each

Risk record that was created from an RBI None
Using ASM, manage the Asset Strategy

that was created automatically as a result None
of performing step 5.
If desired, create an Implementation

Package from the Asset Strategy.
None
The following image illustrates steps 1 through 6 in the table.
Creating and Managing RBI Analyses

If ASM integration is disabled, you will need to complete the following steps to analyze
the risk associated with RBI Components. In most cases, you will complete these steps on
a regular basis as you refine the operating conditions and environment. RBI Analyses are
dynamic tools that help you refine your strategy for maintaining RBI Components.
The following instructions assume that your or someone else has set up your RBI
Systems as appropriate.
To create and manage RBI Analyses and Recommendations:
1. Create an RBI Analysis record for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record that is linked to the RBI System record. Doing so will cause the Meridium
APM system to create a link automatically between each RBI Criticality Analysis
record and the following records:
1.
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
2. Calculate the RBI Analysis.

3. Set the RBI Criticality Analysis record to Risk Completed.
4. Submit the RBI Analysis for approval.
5. Create, review, and manage RBI Recommendation records until they are
implemented. To do so, you will need to:
1.
a. Create RBI Recommendation records to capture recommendations based
on the calculated values in the RBI analysis. You can create RBI
Recommendation records manually or let Meridium APM create them
automatically using Inspection Strategy or Strategy Logic Case records.
b. Review RBI Recommendation records, reconcile them if needed, and
prepare them for implementation (determine how and when they should be
implemented).
c. Submit the RBI Recommendation records for approval.
d. Approve the RBI Recommendation records.
e. Implement the RBI Recommendation records by building an SAP
Notification or a Meridium APM Task record.
6. Approve the RBI Analysis.
7. Implement the RBI Analysis.
About RBI and TM Integration

If the Thickness Monitoring license is active and TM Analyses exist for the Equipment
records that you analyze in RBI, you can specify that TM Analysis values be:
Used to calculate corrosion rate values that are used in RBI.

Considered when determining the Desired Interval value that is populated
Inspection Task records that are created from certain RBI Recommendation
records.
About Navigating RBI

Meridium APM provides two main pages to help you complete all steps in the RBI
workflow:
RBI Unit View - <Functional Location Record ID>, where <Functional Location
Record ID> is the Record ID of the selected Functional Location record.
Throughout this documentation, unless it is necessary to include <Functional
Location Record ID> in the page title for clarity, we refer to this page as the RBI
Unit View page.
RBI Asset View - <Equipment Record ID>, where <Equipment Record ID> is the
Record ID of the selected Equipment record. Throughout this documentation,
unless it is necessary to include <Equipment Record ID> in the page title for
clarity, we refer to this page as the RBI Asset View page.
These pages are described in detail in this section of the documentation. The remaining
RBI documentation is organized according to main features in RBI (RBI Systems, RBI
Components, and RBI Analyses) rather than according to the page on which you can
manage each feature.
Accessing the RBI Unit View Page

To access the RBI Unit View page:
1. On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage RBI Systems by Unit link.
The RBI System List page appears, displaying the Manage RBI System query.
2. Create a new RBI System record or open an existing RBI System record.
The RBI Unit View page appears. By default, the Functional Location node is selected in
Aspects of the RBI Unit View Page

The RBI Unit View page is divided into the following areas:
RBI Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent Functional
Location, RBI System, and Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
Datasheet area: Displays the datasheet for the record that is represented by the
node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Potential Degradation Mechanisms section: Contains a grid, which displays the

Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the record that is
represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Task menus: Menus that provide access to specific functionality. The following
task menus are available: System Tasks, Component Tasks, Common Tasks, and
Associated Pages.
RBI Explorer Pane

The RBI Explorer pane on the RBI Unit View page displays nodes in a tree, where each
node represents one of the following records:
Functional Location: Displayed at the first level of the tree. Note that the tree can
contain multiple Functional Location nodes.
RBI System: Displayed below the Functional Location level. Note that the tree can
contain multiple RBI System nodes below each Functional Location node.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components: Displayed below the RBI System level.
Note that the tree can contain multiple Criticality Calculator RBI Components
nodes below each RBI System node.
Note: Throughout this documentation, we refer to the nodes by the records that they
represent. For example, the node representing the Functional Location record is referred
to as the Functional Location node.
The selected node dictates the options that are available on the task menus, the datasheet
that appears in the datasheet area, and the records that are displayed in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms section below the datasheet area.
In the following image, the RBI Explorer pane is highlighted in red.
You can see that the following nodes are displayed:

Functional Location
RBI-UNIT-A ~ UNIT-LEVEL
RBI System
RBISYS-837
Heat Exchanger-Shell RBICOMP-PV-1093 AMINE REGENERATOR-CS-838
Datasheet Area
The datasheet area on the RBI Unit View page displays the datasheet of the record that is
represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane. For example, if an RBI
System node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane, the current datasheet for the RBI
System record that is represented by that RBI System node will be displayed in the
datasheet area.
In the following image, the datasheet area is outlined in red.
At the top of the datasheet, a toolbar appears to give you access to functions that are
associated with the selected record. The toolbar contains the buttons described in the
following table.
Button Function
Saves the current record, including any modifications that you have made.
Displays the Preview window, from which you can print the information
associated with the current record.
Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can view, edit, and create
reference documents for the current record.
To collapse the datasheet area, you can click the button to the right of the datasheet
toolbar. To expand the datasheet area, you can click the button.
V3.5.0 SP1 LP - Copyright 1993-2012 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
Potential Degradation Mechanisms

Section
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms section on the RBI Unit View page contains a
grid, which displays a row for each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is
linked to the record that is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer
pane.
For example, if an RBI System node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane, the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms section displays the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records
that are linked to the RBI System record that is represented by that RBI System node.
In the following image, the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section is outlined in red.
At the top of the section, a toolbar appears to give you access to functions that are
associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records. The toolbar contains the
buttons described in the following table.
Button Function
Displays the Link Existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms to <RBI System
Record ID> window, where <RBI System Record ID> is the Record ID of the RBI
System record that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane. You can use this window
to select existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to link to the RBI
System record.
After asking for confirmation, unlinks the selected Potential Degradation

Mechanisms record from the RBI System record that is represented by the node
that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
reference documents for the current Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
You can click any hyperlink in the Degradation Mechanism column to display the
datasheet for the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
You can also right-click any cell in the grid to see the captions that are defined for the
URLs that have been associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms family via
the URL Manager. You can click any caption in the list to launch the underlying URL.
System Tasks
The System Tasks menu on the RBI Unit View page contains the following links. Note that
unless otherwise noted, all links are enabled only when an RBI System node is selected in
Create System: Creates a new RBI System record that is linked to the Functional
Location record that is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI
Explorer pane.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select a Functional Location node in the RBI
Explorer pane.
Unlink System from Unit: Unlinks the selected RBI System record from the
Functional Location record to which it is linked.
Delete System: After asking for confirmation, deletes the RBI System record that
is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Open Components in Asset View: Displays the RBI Asset View page. Note that this
link is enabled when either the Functional Location node or an RBI System node
is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
If you click this link while the Functional Location node is selected, the
RBI Asset View page displays ALL Equipment records (and ALL of their
linked Criticality Calculator RBI Components records) that are linked to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are associated with
the Functional Location record that is represented by that node.
Note: If the selected Functional Location node represents a Functional Location record
that is linked to RBI System records that are not linked to any Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records, when you click this link, a message appears, indicating that no RBI
Components were found.
If you click this link while an RBI System node is selected, the RBI Asset
View page displays the Equipment record (and ALL of its linked Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records) that is linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to the RBI System
record that is represented by the selected node.
Note: If the RBI System record that is represented by the selected RBI System node is not
linked to any Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, when you click this link, a
message appears, indicating that no RBI Components were found.
Component Tasks
The Component Tasks menu on the RBI Unit View page contains the following links.
Note that unless otherwise noted, all links are enabled only when a node representing a
Criticality Calculator RBI Components node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Create RBI Component: Displays the Create Component window, where you can
specify the type of component that you want to create and the Equipment record
to which it should be linked.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select an RBI System node in the RBI Explorer
pane.
Link Existing RBI Component: Displays the Find Existing RBI Components
window, where you can select an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record to link to the RBI System record that is represented by the RBI System
Note: This link is enabled only if you select an RBI System node in the RBI Explorer
pane.
Unlink RBI Component from System: Unlinks the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record from the RBI System record to which it is linked.
Delete RBI Component: After asking for confirmation, deletes the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by the selected node.
Open in Asset View: Displays the RBI Asset View - <Equipment Record ID>
page, where <Equipment Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment record
that is linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is
represented by the selected node. Note that on the RBI Asset View page, nodes
are displayed for ALL Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are
linked to that Equipment record (not just the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records that are represented by the nodes that you selected on the
RBI Unit View page).
Copy Selected Components: Displays the Find Asset window, where you can
select the Equipment record to which you want to link a new Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record. The new record will be created using the
values in the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by
the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
node in the RBI Explorer pane.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI Unit View page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the datasheet
that appears in the datasheet area will be printed. From the Preview window, you
can select print options and print the record.
Page. This link is enabled only when you are viewing a saved analysis.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI Unit View page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the RBI Unit View page displays Associated Pages that
are configured for the family of the record that is represented by the node that is selected
in the RBI Explorer pane.
Accessing the RBI Asset View Page

To access the RBI Asset View page:
1. On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage RBI Components by Asset link.
The RBI Component List page appears.
2. Open an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.

The RBI Asset View page appears.
Aspects of the RBI Asset View Page

The RBI Asset View page contains the following items:
TM Status label: Displays a value that indicates the Thickness Monitoring status
for the selected Equipment record.
RBI Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent Equipment,
Criticality Calculator RBI Components, and RBI Criticality Analysis records.
Datasheet area: Displays the datasheet for the record that is represented by the
Potential Degradation Mechanisms tab: Contains a grid, which displays the

Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by the node that is selected
Consequence Evaluations tab: Contains a grid, which displays the Criticality

Consequence Evaluation records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis
record that is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Degradation Mechanism Evaluations tab: Contains a grid, which displays the

Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records that are linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is represented by the node that is selected in the
RBI Explorer pane.
Degradation Mechanisms tab: Contains a grid, which displays the RBI

Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis
Task menus: Menus that provide specific functionality. The following task menus
are available: Component Tasks, Analysis Tasks, Recommendation Tasks,
Common Tasks, and Associated Pages.
TM Status Label
To the right of the TM Status label on the RBI Asset View page, one of the following
values is displayed:
Data Available: Indicates that records that form a TM Analysis are linked to the
Equipment record for which the RBI Asset View page was accessed. This value
appears as a hyperlink. If you click this hyperlink, the TM TMLs/Measurements
page (in the Thickness Monitoring module) for the Equipment record will be
displayed.
Insufficient Privileges: Indicates that you are not a member of any Thickness
Monitoring Security Group, and therefore cannot access the TM
TMLs/Measurements page (in the Thickness Monitoring module) to view the TM
data that exists for the Equipment record for which the RBI Asset View page was
accessed.
Not Analyzed: Indicates that a TM Analysis does not exist for the piece of
equipment for which the RBI Asset View page was accessed.
Not Licensed: Indicates that the Thickness Monitoring license is not active.
In the following image, the TM Status label is outlined in red.
RBI Explorer
The RBI Explorer pane on the RBI Asset View page displays nodes in a tree, where each
node represents one of the following records:
Equipment: Displayed at the first level of the tree. Note that the tree can contain
multiple Equipment nodes.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components: Displayed below the Equipment level.

Note that the tree can contain multiple Criticality Calculator RBI Components
nodes below each Equipment node.
RBI Criticality Analysis: Displayed below the Criticality Calculator RBI

Components level. Note that the tree can contain multiple RBI Criticality Analysis
nodes below each Criticality Calculator RBI Components node.
Note: Throughout this documentation, we refer to the nodes by the records that they
represent. For example, the node representing the Equipment record is referred to as the
Equipment node.
The selected node dictates the options that are available on the task menus, the datasheet
that appears in the datasheet area, and the records that are displayed on the tabs below the
datasheet area.
If ASM integration is enabled, above the RBI Explorer pane is the text Strategy Indicator,
appended with an icon and the strategy indicator for the current Equipment record.
In the following image, the RBI Explorer pane is highlighted in red. This image assumes
that ASM integration is disabled, and therefore does not show the strategy indicator.
Datasheet Area
The datasheet area on the RBI Asset View page displays the datasheet of the record that is
represented by the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
For example, if an Criticality Calculator RBI Components node is selected in the RBI
Explorer pane, the current datasheet for the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record that is represented by that node will be displayed in the datasheet area.
In the following image, the datasheet area is outlined in red.
At the top of the datasheet, a toolbar appears to give you access to functions that are
associated with the selected record. The toolbar contains the buttons described in the
following table.
Item
Function
Saves the current record, including any modifications that you have
made.
Displays the Preview window, from which you can print the
information associated with the current record.
Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can view, edit,
and create reference documents for the current record.
Displays the State Assignments dialog box, where you can assign
Security Users to states. This icon appears only if:
State Configuration has been defined for the family via the
Configuration Manager.
You are viewing the datasheet for an RBI Criticality Analysis

record.
Indicates the current state of the record. This icon is displayed only if
you are viewing the datasheet for an RBI Criticality Analysis record.
Note that the state in this table is Risk Completed. The state that you see
may be different.
Displays a list of the available operations for the current record. From
this list, you can select an operation, which will cause the record's state
to change. This icon is displayed only if you are viewing an RBI
To collapse the datasheet area, you can click the
button to the right of the datasheet
toolbar. To expand the datasheet area, you can click the
button.
Potential Degradation Mechanisms Tab
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms tab on the RBI Asset View page contains a grid,
which displays a row for each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by the node that is
selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
In the following image, the Potential Degradation Mechanisms tab is outlined in red.
At the top of the section, a toolbar appears to give you access to functions that are
associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records. The toolbar contains the
Button Function
Displays the Link Existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms to <Criticality
Calculator RBI Components Record ID> window, where <Criticality Calculator
RBI Components Record ID> is the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane. You can use this
window to select existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to link to the
After asking for confirmation, unlinks the selected Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is
reference documents for the current Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
You can click any hyperlink in the Degradation Mechanism column to display the
datasheet for the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
You can also right-click any cell in the grid to see the captions of the URLs that have
been associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms family via the URL
Manager. You can click any item in the list to launch the underlying URL.
Consequence Evaluations Tab
The Consequence Evaluations tab on the RBI Asset View page contains a grid, which
displays a row for the Criticality Consequence Evaluation record that is linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI
Explorer pane.
You can click any hyperlink in the Consequence column to display the datasheet for the
Criticality Consequence Evaluation record.
In the following image, the Consequence Evaluations tab is outlined in red.
Degradation Mechanism Evaluations

Tab
The Degradation Mechanism Evaluations tab on the RBI Asset View page contains a grid,
which displays a row for each Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record that is
linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is represented by the node that is
You can click any hyperlink in the Damage Mechanism column to display the datasheet
for the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record. In the following image, the
Degradation Mechanism Evaluations tab is outlined in red.
Above the grid, you will see the

button, which you can click to access the Define
Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window, where you can assign inspections to
the associated degradation mechanism.
Degradation Mechanisms Tab
The Degradation Mechanisms tab on the RBI Asset View page contains a grid, which
displays a row for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is represented by the node that is selected in the RBI
Explorer pane. If an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record is linked to any RBI
Recommendation records, those RBI Recommendations records are displayed in a grid
that appears below the appropriate RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. You can
collapse or re-expand this grid using the plus or minus sign that appears to the left of the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms hyperlink.
Hint: Within a grid that displays RBI Recommendation records, you cannot add
additional columns to the grid. To manage the RBI Recommendation records in that grid,
you can open the records in Recommendation Management.
You can click any hyperlink in the Degradation Mechanisms column to display the
datasheet for the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record.
In the following image, the Degradation Mechanisms tab is outlined in red.
At the top of the section, a toolbar is displayed that provides access to functions that are
associated with the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records. The toolbar contains the
Button Function
Displays the Create new Degradation Mechanisms record window, where you can
search for an existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that will be used
to create a new RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that will be linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record.
Displays the Unmitigated Risk Assessment window, where you can override the
calculated unmitigated risk of an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. This
button is enabled only when you calculate unmitigated risk using a custom
calculator.
Note that this documentation does not explain how to create a custom calculator or
how to configure the Meridium APM system to use it.
Displays the Risk Mitigation Assessment window, where you can use the Risk
Matrix to enter mitigated risk values for an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record.
This button is enabled only when you calculate unmitigated risk using a custom
calculator.
Note that this documentation does not explain how to create a custom calculator or
how to configure the Meridium APM system to use it.
Asset Tasks
The Asset Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View page contains the following links:
Review Analyses: Displays the RBI - Review Analyses page, where you can view
all the RBI Analyses for Equipment records that are not in the Archived state, and
change the states of those RBI Analyses.
Mass Review Recommendations: Displays the Recommendation Management
page, where you can view ALL the RBI Recommendation records that are linked
to ALL the Equipment records that are represented on the RBI Asset View page.
This link is enabled only when more than one Equipment node appears on the
RBI Asset View page and the option to create RBI Recommendation records is
enabled.
Mass Risk Analyses: Displays the Mass Risk Analyses window, which you can use
to create child RBI Analyses for the main RBI Analyses in an RBI Analysis.
Component Tasks
The Component Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View page contains the following links.
Note that unless otherwise noted, all links are enabled only when a Criticality Calculator
RBI Components node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
specify the type of component that you want to create.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select an Equipment node in the RBI Explorer pane.
Open in Unit View: Displays the RBI Unit View page, which displays the
Functional Location record that is represented by the node that is selected in the
RBI Explorer pane.
Note: The Open in Unit View link is always enabled.
Delete RBI Component: After asking for confirmation, deletes the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by the node that is
currently selected. Note that you cannot delete a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record if it is linked to a successor record.
Add RBI Component: Displays the Find Existing RBI Components window, where
you can search for the Equipment record that is linked to the additional Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records that you want to represent in the RBI
Explorer pane. The selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components records and
the Equipment records to which they are linked will be represented in the RBI
Explorer pane.
Copy Asset Components: Displays the Find Asset window, where you can select
the Equipment records to which you want to link new Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records. The new records will be created using the values in the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to the Equipment
Copy Selected Components: Displays the Find Asset window, where you can
select the Equipment record to which you want to link a new Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record. The new record will be created using the
values in the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by
the node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
Promote to ASM: Promotes to ASM the Equipment record that is represented by

the selected Equipment node.
Open ASM: Displays the ASM - Asset Strategy Risks - <Strategy ID> page
appears, where <Strategy ID> is the ID of the Asset Strategy for the Equipment
record that is represented by the selected node.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select an Equipment node in the RBI Explorer pane
and the Equipment record that it represents has been promoted to ASM.
Inactivate Component: Displays a confirmation message, and inactivates the

selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. This link is enabled only
when a node representing an Active Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Link to TML Groups: Displays the Link to TML Groups dialog box, where you
can select TML Group records whose associated TML Corrosion Analysis values
you want to use to determine corrosion rate values in RBI. This link is enabled
only when the following criteria are met:
The Thickness Monitoring license is active.
-and
Records that form a TM Analysis exist for the Equipment record that you
are analyzing in RBI.
-and
o
A node representing a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record

whose Source of Calculated Corrosion Rates field contains the value
Component is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Add Protected Equipment: Displays one of the following items:
Add Protected Equipment dialog box: This dialog box appears if you have
not yet identifying equipment or RBI Components that are protected by
the pressure relief device. From this dialog box, you can choose to identify
either protected equipment or RBI Components.
Select Protected Equipment window: This window appears if you have

already identified protected equipment. From this window, you can select
additional pieces of equipment that are protected by the pressure relief
device.
Select Protected Equipment window: This window appears if you have

already identified protected RBI Components. From this window, you can
select additional RBI Components that are protected by the pressure relief
device.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select a Criticality Calculator PRD Components
Remove Protected Equipment: Unlinks the Equipment record or Criticality

Calculator RBI Components record from the Criticality Calculator PRD
Components record to which it is linked.
Note: This link is enabled only if you select in the RBI Explorer pane an Equipment node
or Criticality Calculator RBI Components node representing a record that is linked to a
Criticality Calculator PRD Components record.
Analysis Tasks
The Analysis Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View page contains the following links. Note
that unless otherwise noted, all links are enabled only when an RBI Criticality Analysis
node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Create Analysis: Creates a new RBI Criticality Analysis record that is linked to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is represented by the
selected node.
Note: The Create Analysis link is enabled only when a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Calculate Analysis: Calculates the RBI Analysis that is represented by the

selected node.
Calculate All Analyses: Calculates all active RBI Analyses that are represented in
the RBI Explorer pane and all inactive RBI Analyses, which are not represented in
Note: The Calculate All Analyses link is always enabled.
Create What If Analysis: Creates a new What If Analysis and displays a new node
for it in the RBI Explorer pane.
Create Future Risk Analysis: After displaying the Create Future Risk dialog box,
where you can type the desired value, creates a new Future Risk Analysis and
displays a new node for it in the RBI Explorer pane.
Update Analysis: Updates the main RBI Analysis with values in the What If
Analysis that is represented by the selected node.
Note: The Update Analysis link is enabled only when a node representing a What If
Analysis is selected in the RBI Explorer pane and when the predecessor RBI Criticality
Analysis record is set to the Created state.
View Active Analyses: Displays only nodes representing active RBI Analyses in
Note: The View Active Analyses link is always enabled.
View All Analyses: Displays nodes representing active and inactive RBI Analyses
and all What If and Future Risk Analyses in the RBI Explorer pane.
Note: The View All Analyses link is always enabled.
Delete Analysis: Deletes the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is represented by
the selected node.
Note: Before you can delete an RBI Criticality Analysis record, you must delete or unlink
any successor records to which it is linked.
Copy Analysis: Displays the Find Component window, where you can select the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which you want to link a new
RBI Criticality Analysis record. The input values in the source RBI Criticality
Analysis record will be copied to the new RBI Criticality Analysis record.
Note: The Copy Analysis link is enabled only when a main RBI Analysis node is selected
Recommendation Tasks
The Recommendation Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View page contains the following
links. Note that these links are enabled only if the Recommendation Creation Enabled
check box on the Administrative Tasks page is selected. Otherwise, the links are always
disabled.
Generate Recommendations: Causes Meridium APM to generate RBI

Recommendation records automatically based on the Strategy Logic Case records
that exist in the database.
Note: This link is enabled only if you are viewing an RBI Criticality Analysis record that
Create Recommendation: Displays the Create Recommendation Wizard, where

you can create a new RBI Recommendation record that is linked to the RBI
Criticality Analysis record that you are currently viewing.
Note: This link is enabled only if you are viewing an RBI Criticality Analysis record that
Review Recommendations: Displays the Recommendation Management page,

where you can manage the RBI Recommendation and Inspection Task records
that are linked to the Equipment record that is associated with the record that is
represented by the currently selected node. Specifically:
If an Equipment node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane, the Review

Recommendations link displays Recommendation and Task records that
are linked to the Equipment record that is represented by that node.
If a Criticality Calculator RBI Components node is selected in the RBI

Explorer pane, the Review Recommendations link displays
Recommendation and Task records that are linked to the Equipment record
that is linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that is
represented by that node.
If an RBI Criticality Analysis node is selected in the RBI Explorer pane,

the Review Recommendations link displays Recommendation and Task
records that are linked to the Equipment record that is linked to the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which that RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is represented by that node is linked.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI Asset View page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the datasheet
that appears in the datasheet area will be printed. From the Preview window, you
can select print options and print the record.
Page. This link is enabled only when you are viewing a saved analysis.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI Asset View page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the RBI Asset View page displays Associated Pages that
have been configured for the family of the record that is represented by the node that is
Accessing the RBI - Review Analyses

Page
You can use the RBI - Review Analyses page to view all the RBI Analyses for a given
Equipment or Functional Location record, where those analyses are not in an Archived
state, and change the states of these RBI Analyses.
To access the RBI - Review Analyses page:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment or Functional Location record
whose RBI Analyses you want to view or change the state of via the RBI - Review
Analyses page.
2. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Review Analyses link.
The RBI - Review Analyses page appears, displaying the RBI Analyses associated with
the Equipment or Functional Location record that you selected in step 1.
Aspects of the RBI - Review Analyses

Page
The RBI - Review Analyses page contains the following items:
RBI - Review Analyses section: Contains a grid, which displays one row for
each RBI Criticality Analysis record that is not in the Archived state that is linked
to the Equipment or Functional Location record for which you accessed the RBI Review Analyses page.
task menus are available: Analysis Tasks, Asset Tasks, and Common Tasks.
RBI - Review Analyses Section

The RBI - Review Analyses section of the RBI - Review Analyses page contains a grid that
displays information that is stored in the RBI Criticality Analysis record. One row is
displayed in the grid for each RBI Criticality Analysis record that is not in the Archived
state that is linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record for which you
accessed the RBI - Review Analyses page.
The grid displays the following columns of information:
Analysis ID: Displays the value that is stored in the Analysis ID field in the RBI
Criticality Analysis record. This value appears as a hyperlink, which you can click
to access the datasheet for the RBI Criticality Analysis record. When you access
the datasheet for the RBI Criticality Analysis record via this hyperlink, you can
save, print, link reference documents to, and manage state assignments for the
RBI Criticality Analysis record. All other options on the toolbar above the
datasheet are disabled.
Equipment ID: Displays the value that is stored in the Equipment ID field in the
RBI Criticality Analysis record.
RBI Component: Displays the value that is stored in the Component field in the
Analysis Type: Displays one of the following values:
F: Indicates that the RBI Criticality Analysis record represents a Future

Risk Analysis.
W: Indicates that the RBI Criticality Analysis record represents a What If
Analysis.
No value is displayed in the Analysis Type column for RBI Criticality Analysis records
that represent main RBI Analyses.
Analysis Calculation Date: Displays the value that is stored in the Date Criticality
Calculated field in the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
Inspection Priority: Displays the value that is stored in the Inspection PriorityRolled Up field in the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
One column in the grid, Current State, does not correspond with an RBI Criticality
Analysis field. The Current State column contains an icon and caption that indicates the
state of the RBI Criticality Analysis record in that row. The various states correspond
with the caption that is displayed. The following table lists each state and its
corresponding icon.
State and
caption
Accepted by
ASM
Approved
Archived
Created
Implemented
Pending
Approval
Re-Evaluating
Rejected
Reserved for
What If
Risk Completed
Corresponding icon
Analysis Tasks
The Analysis Tasks menu on the RBI - Review Analyses page contains links for various
actions that you can perform for the RBI Criticality Analysis records in the grid in the
RBI - Review Analyses section. The links that are displayed on the Analysis Tasks menu
will vary, depending upon the state of the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is selected
in the grid in the RBI - Review Analyses section. The preceding image is an example of
the Analysis Tasks menu when an RBI Criticality Analysis record that is in the Created
state is selected in the grid in the RBI - Review Analyses section.
The following table lists the links that are displayed on the Analysis Tasks menu, when
they are displayed, and the actions associated with each link.
Analysis
Tasks menu
link
Displayed when the

selected RBI
Criticality Analysis
record is in the
following state
Action associated with this link
Approve
Pending Approval
Transitioning an analysis from the

Pending Approval State to the
Approved state.
Finalize Risk
Created

Created state to the Risk Completed
state.
Approved

Approved state to the Implemented
state.
Reevaluate
Implemented

Implemented state to the ReEvaluating state.
Reimplement
Re-Evaluating
Implement
Re-Evaluating state to the

Implemented state.
Reject
Submit for
Approval
Pending Approval

Pending Approval state to the
Rejected State. You cannot perform
this action. RBI Criticality Analysis
records cannot be set to the
Rejected state.
Risk Completed

Risk Completed state to the Pending
Approval state.
The following link is always displayed:
Assign Analyses: This link is enabled only when more than one RBI Criticality
Analysis record is selected in the grid in the RBI - Review Analyses section. When
you click this link, the State Asignee window is displayed, which you can use to
manage the Security Users that are assigned to states for the selected RBI
Criticality Analysis records.
Asset Tasks
The Asset Tasks menu on the RBI - Review Analyses page contains the following link:
Open Asset View: Displays the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment or
Functional Location record for which you accessed the RBI - Review Analyses
page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI - Review Analyses page contains the following
links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the grid that
is displayed in the RBI Review Analyses section will be printed. From the
Preview window, you can select print options and print the grid.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI Review Analyses
page.
Accessing the RBI Export and Import

Page
You can access the RBI Export and Import page to complete the export or import process
for Equipment records that you analyze in RBI.
To access the RBI Export and Import page:
On the RBI Start Page, click the RBI Import and Export link.
The RBI Export and Import page appears. In the RBI Export and Import workspace, the
Export tab is selected by default.
Aspects of the RBI Export and Import

Page
The RBI Export and Import page contains the following items:
The RBI Export and Import workspace: Displays two tabs, Export and Import,
which are used to complete the export and import processes.
menus are available: Asset Tasks and Common Tasks.
Asset Tasks
The Asset Tasks menu on the RBI Export and Import page contains the following link:
Open Asset View: Displays the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment record that
is selected in the results grid on the Export tab of the RBI Export and Import
workspace. This link is enabled only when the Export tab is selected and the
results grid contains at least one row.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI Export and Import page contains the following
links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the contents
of the results grid on the Export tab in the RBI Export and Import workspace will
be printed. From the Preview window, you can select print options and print the
contents of the results grid.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI Export and Import
page.
RBI Export and Import Workspace

The RBI Export and Import workspace on the RBI Export and Import page contains the
following tabs:
Export: Contains the following items:
Select Asset ID list: Your selections in this list determine which

Equipment records will be returned by the Export RBI Components by
Asset query, which is run when you click the Run Query button.
Run Query button: Runs the Export RBI Components by Asset query and
populates the grid in the results section with the Equipment records
selected in the Select Asset ID list and any Active Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record that is linked to one of the selected Equipment
records.
File Name text box: The name of the Microsoft Excel file to which you
want to export the data for Equipment records displayed in the grid in the
results section, along with their RBI associated records. Each time you
perform the export process, you must specify a unique file name in this
text box.
When you click the

button to the right of the File Name text box, the Save As
window appears, which you can use to navigate to a location to save the Microsoft Excel
file. The
button is enabled only when one or more records are displayed in the grid
in the search results.
Export All button: Displays the Export Status window, and if there are no
errors, exports ALL the Equipment records displayed in the results grid
and their associated RBI records to the Microsoft Excel file that you
specified in the File Name text box. This button is enabled only when a
file name is specified in the File Name text box.
Results grid: After you click the Run Query button, the results grid is
displayed below the File Name text box. One row is displayed in the grid
for each Active Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is
linked to the Equipment records selected in the Select Asset ID list and
each Equipment record selected in the Select Asset ID list that is not
linked to at least one Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. The
grid contains the following columns of information:
Asset ID: The Record ID of the Equipment record.
Component: The value in the Component field in the Criticality

Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to the Equipment
record. If the Equipment record is not linked to at least one
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, this cell is empty.
Functional Location: The value in the Functional Location field in

the Criticality Calculator RBI Component record that is linked to
the Equipment record. If the Equipment record is not linked to at
least one Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, this cell is
empty.
The following image shows an example of what the Export tab looks like when you have
selected values in the Select Asset ID list, clicked the Run Query button, and specified a
file in the File Name text box.
Import: Contains the following items:
File Name text box: The name of the Microsoft Excel file containing the
Equipment and RBI data that you want to import to the Meridium APM
system to create new records and/or update existing records based upon
information that you have specified via the Microsoft Excel file.
Import button: Displays the Import Status window, and if there are no
errors, imports the data in the Microsoft Excel file specified in the File
Name text box. New records are created and/or existing records are
updated based upon the data that you specified in the Microsoft Excel file.
The following image shows an example of what the Import tab looks like when a file
name has been specified in the File Name text box.
About the <Export or Import> Status

Window
The <Export or Import> Status window is displayed when you perform the export or
import procedure. This window is labeled according to the procedure that you are
performing when it is displayed.
When you are performing the export procedure, the window is labeled Export
Status.
When you are performing the import procedure, the window is labeled Import
Status.
Throughout the documentation, the <Export or Import> Status window is referred to as

the Export Status window or the Import Status window.
Aspects of the Export Status Window

The Export Status window is displayed when you perform the export procedure, and the
window displays the status of the export procedure.
The Export Status window contains a status bar that displays the status of the export
procedure. When the export procedure is complete, the text Export completed
successfully is displayed.
Note: If the text above the status bar indicates that the export procedure was not
completed successfully, the Meridium APM Application Server machine could be down,
or you might not have the necessary Windows permissions to the folder containing the
file to which you are trying to export data. You should contact your organization's IT
department to resolve these issues.
The following buttons are displayed below the status bar:
Save Log: Displays the Save As window, where you can save a log of the export
to an external file.
Close: Closes the Export Status window.
Help: Displays the context sensitive help for the Export Status window.
Aspects of the Import Status Window

The Import Status window is displayed when you perform the import procedure, and the
window displays the status of the import procedure.
The Import Status window contains a status bar that displays the status of the import
procedure. When the import procedure is completed successfully, the text Import
completed successfully is displayed. When there are one or more errors associated with
the import procedure, the text Import complete with errors is displayed above the status
bar, and a grid displaying the errors is displayed below the status bar. The following
image shows an example of the Import Status window when there are errors associated
with the import procedure.
The following columns are displayed in the grid when there are one or more errors
associated with the import procedure:
Entry Date: Displays the date and time that the import procedure was performed.
Asset ID: Displays the Record ID of the Equipment record for whose associated
RBI record the import error occurred.
Component ID: Displays the value in the Component field in the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record for which the import error occurred or for
whose associated RBI record for which the import error occurred.
Message: Displays details about the specific import error that occurred.
About RBI System Records

Using Meridium APM, you can create RBI System records and link them to Functional
Location records, where the RBI System record is the successor record. You can also link
RBI System records to Criticality Calculator RBI Components records and Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records, where the RBI System record is the predecessor
record.
When an RBI System record is linked to a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record, that
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record will be linked automatically to any Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records (but not Criticality Calculator PRD Components
records) that you later link to the RBI System record manually.
You can create or open RBI System records from the RBI System List page. When you
do so, the RBI System record will appear on the RBI Unit View page, which displays a
tree structure containing nodes that represent the predecessor Functional Location record
and the successor Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the RBI
System record is linked.
From the RBI Unit View page, you can:
Create new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to link to an RBI

System record.
Link existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to an RBI System
record.
Link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to an RBI System record.
Unlink Potential Degradation Mechanisms records from an RBI System record.
Unlink an RBI System record from a Functional Location record.
Delete an RBI System record.
Setting Up RBI Systems

You will need to complete the following steps to set up your RBI Systems. In most cases,
you will complete these steps as an early configuration procedure. You will probably not
need to repeat these steps after the RBI Systems have been configured unless you add a
new RBI Component, remove an RBI Component, or need to set up an additional RBI
System.
To set up RBI Systems:
1. Identify the units whose RBI Systems you want to manage, and make sure that a
Functional Location record whose Is a Unit? field is set to True exists to represent
these units.
2.
Create RBI System records that are linked to the Functional Location records that
you identified in step 1.
3.
Link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to the RBI System records that
you created in step 2.
3.
Create new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records and link them to the
RBI System records that you created in step 2.
-orLink existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to the RBI System records
that you created in step 2.
5. Validate the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that were linked
automatically to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records. If needed,
you can:
5.
Unlink Potential Degradation Mechanisms records from the Criticality

Calculator RBI Components records.
Link additional Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to the

Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
Accessing the RBI System List Page

To access the RBI System List page:
On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage RBI Systems by Unit link.
The RBI System List page appears, displaying the Manage RBI System query, which is
stored in the Catalog in the folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based
Inspection\Queries.
Aspects of the RBI System List Page

The RBI System List page lets you run the Manage RBI System query to access a list of
existing RBI System records that meet your query criteria.
The Manage RBI System query is stored in the Meridium APM Catalog in the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries. The baseline Manage RBI
System query contains the Process Unit prompt, which appears at the top of the page as a
drop-down list that contains Functional Location records that meet the following criteria:
The Functional Location record is linked to a RBI System record.

The Functional Location record has been defined as a unit.
Each time that you access the RBI System List page, you will need to run the Manage RBI
System query. You can click any hyperlinked RBI System ID displayed in the query
results to open the RBI System record on the RBI Unit View - <Functional Location
Record ID> page, where <Functional Location Record ID> is the Record ID of the
To open multiple RBI System records, you can select the rows containing the desired RBI
System records and click the Open link on the System Tasks menu.
The RBI System List page also contains the following task menus: System Tasks and
Common Tasks.
System Tasks
The System Tasks menu on the RBI System List page contains the following links:
Create System: Displays the Find Existing Units window, where you can search
for a Functional Location record that you want to link to a new RBI System
record.
Open: Opens the selected RBI System records on the RBI Unit View - <Functional
Location Record ID> page, where <Functional Location Record ID> is the
Record ID of the Functional Location record that is linked to the first RBI System
record that you selected on the RBI System List page.
Note: This link is enabled only if at least one RBI System record is selected in the list of
query results.
Delete System: After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected RBI System
records. Note that you can delete an RBI System record only if it is not linked to
any successor records (e.g., Criticality Calculator RBI Components records).
query results.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI System List page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the list of
query results will be printed. From the Preview window, you can select print
options and print the record.
query results.
Page.
query results.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI System List page.
Running the Manage RBI System Query

You can run the RBI System query to view a list of RBI System records that are
associated with a unit.
To run the Manage RBI System Query:
1. On the RBI System List page, in the Process Unit list, select the desired
Functional Location records (i.e., units).
2. Click the Run Query button.
The query results appear in a grid below the Process Unit list.
Creating an RBI System Record

To create an RBI System record:
1. On the RBI System List page, on the System Tasks menu, click the Create System
link.
The Find Existing Units window appears.
The value in the Search In list is set by default to Functional Location.

3. When you are finished adding criteria to the search, click the Find Now button.
The search results appear, displaying all Functional Location records that meet the
specified criteria.
4. In the search results, select the row containing the Functional Location record to
which you want to link the new RBI System record, and click the Select button.
The RBI Unit View - <Functional Location Record ID> page appears, where <Functional
Location Record ID> is the Record ID of the Functional Location record that you
selected on the Find Existing Units window. By default, the node representing the
Functional Location record to which the new RBI System record is linked is selected by
default in the RBI Explorer pane.
5. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the new RBI System
record. This node is represented by the icon.
The RBI System datasheet for the new RBI System record appears in the datasheet area.
6. Enter the desired values on the RBI System datasheet.
7. When you are finished entering the desired values, on the datasheet toolbar, click
the button to save the record.
The RBI System record is saved to the database.
Opening an RBI System Record

To open an RBI System record:
1. On the RBI System List page, in the Process Unit list, select the Functional
Location records that are linked to the RBI System records that you want to open.

The query results appear in the grid below the Process Unit list. The grid contains a row
for each RBI System record that is linked to a Functional Location record that you
selected in the Process Unit list.
3. To open a single RBI System record, in the grid, in the row containing the RBI
System record that you want to open, click the hyperlink in the RBI System ID
cell.
-orTo open multiple RBI System records, in the grid, select the rows containing the RBI
System records that you want to open, and click the Open link on the System Tasks
menu.
The RBI Unit View - <Functional Location Record ID> page appears. The RBI Explorer
pane contains a node for each RBI System record that you selected on the RBI System
List page, grouped by nodes representing the Functional Location records to which the
RBI System records are linked. By default, the top Functional Location node is selected.
4. To view one of the RBI System records that you selected on the RBI System list
page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI System
record that you want to view.
The RBI System datasheet for the selected RBI System record appears in the datasheet
area.
Associating Potential Degradation

Mechanisms with a System
You can use the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section on the RBI Unit View page to
link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to an RBI System record. Note that no
Potential Degradation Mechanisms records are linked to an RBI System record by
default, but in order for the RBI Analysis to be calculated without errors, you must link at
least the following Potential Degradation Mechanism records to every RBI System
record:
To link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to an RBI System record:

1. Open the RBI System record to which you want to link Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records.
The RBI Unit View page appears. The RBI Explorer pane contains a node for the RBI
System record that you selected on the RBI System List page, grouped under the node
representing the Functional Location record to which the RBI System record is linked. By
default, the top Functional Location node is selected.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI System record to
which you want to link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records.
area.
3. In the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section, click the
button.
The Link Existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms to <RBI System Record ID>
window appears, where <RBI System Record ID> is the Record ID of the RBI System
record that was displayed in the datasheet area on the RBI Unit View page.
The value in the Search In list is set by default to Potential Degradation Mechanisms. You
cannot select another value.
The search results appear, displaying all Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that
meet the specified criteria and that are not already linked to the selected RBI System
record.
6. In the search results, select the rows containing the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records that you want to link to the RBI System record, and click the
Select button.
The selected records appear in the grid in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section.
In the following image, the new Potential Degradation Mechanism record is outlined in
red.
7. On the datasheet toolbar above the RBI System record, click the
button.
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms records are linked to the RBI System record.
Removing the Association Between

Potential Degradation Mechanisms and
Systems
To unlink a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record from an RBI System record:
1. Open the RBI System record from which you want to unlink a Potential
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI System record
from which you want to unlink Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
area.
3. In the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section, select the row containing the
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that you want to unlink from the RBI
System record, and click the
button.
A message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to unlink the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record from the RBI System record.
4. Click the Yes button.
The RBI System record is unlinked from the selected Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record.
Removing an RBI System from a Unit

To unlink an RBI System record from a Functional Location record:
1. Open the RBI System record that you want to unlink from a Functional Location
record.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI System record that
you want to unlink from a Functional Location record.
3. On the System Tasks menu, click the Unlink System from Unit link.
The RBI System record is unlinked from the Functional Location record.
Deleting an RBI System Record

Note: You can delete an RBI System record only if it is not linked to any successor
records (e.g., Potential Degradation Mechanisms records).
To delete an RBI System record:
1. Open the RBI System record that you want to delete.
you want to delete.
3. On the System Tasks menu, click the Delete System link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the RBI
System record.
The RBI System record is deleted.
About Managing Criticality Calculator

RBI Components Records
You can open existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components records from the RBI
Component List page. When you do so, the RBI Asset View page appears, displaying a
tree structure that contains a node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record, the predecessor Equipment record, and the successor RBI Criticality
Analysis records to which the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
From the RBI Asset View page, you can manage Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records by:
Creating new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to link to any

Equipment record that is represented in the RBI Explorer pane.
Deleting a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
Note that if you open an RBI System record from the RBI System List page, the RBI
System record and the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which it is
linked will be represented in the RBI Explorer pane on the RBI Unit View page. From this
page, you can manage Criticality Calculator RBI Components records by:
Creating new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to link to an RBI

System record.
Linking existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to an RBI
System record.
Linking Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to the Criticality Calculator

RBI Components record.
Unlinking Potential Degradation Mechanisms records from a Criticality

Accessing the RBI Component List Page

To access the RBI Component List page:
On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage RBI Components by Asset link.
The RBI Component List page appears.
Aspects of the RBI Component List

Page
You can use the RBI Component List page to run the Manage RBI Components query to
access a list of existing Criticality Calculator RBI Component records that meet your
query criteria.
The Manage RBI Components query is stored in the Meridium APM Catalog in the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries. The baseline Manage RBI
Components query contains the Select Asset ID prompt, which appears at the top of the
page as a drop-down list that contains various options.
Each time that you access the RBI Component List page, you will need to run the Manage
RBI Components query. You can select any row in the query results and click the Open
link on the Component Tasks menu to open the associated Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record on the RBI Asset View - <Equipment Record ID> page, where
<Equipment Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment record to which the selected
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
The RBI Component List page also contains the following task menus: Component Tasks
and Common Tasks.
Hint: If desired, you can customize the column display.
Component Tasks
The Component Tasks menu on the RBI Component List page contains the following
links:
specify the type of Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to
create and the Equipment record to which it should be linked.
Open: Opens the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components records on the
RBI Asset View - <Equipment Record ID> page, where <Equipment Record ID>
is the Record ID of the Equipment record that is linked to the first Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that you selected on the RBI Component List
page.
Note: This link is enabled only if at least one Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record is selected in the list of query results.
Delete RBI Component: After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records. Note that you can delete a
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record only if it is not linked to any
successor records (e.g., Potential Degradation Mechanisms records).
Copy Selected Component: Displays the Find Asset window, where you can select
the Equipment record to which you want to copy the selected Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record. After you select an Equipment record and
click OK, the RBI Asset View page appears, where the RBI Explorer pane displays
a node representing the selected Equipment record at the root level, followed by
the copied Criticality Calculator RBI Components record and any other Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to it.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the RBI Component List page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of how the list of
query results will be printed. From the Preview window, you can select print
options and print the record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the RBI Component List page.
Running the Manage RBI Components

Query
To run the Manage RBI Components Query:
1. On the RBI Component List page, in the Select Asset ID list, select the desired
Equipment records.
The query results appear in a grid below the Select Asset ID list.
About Creating Criticality Calculator

There are multiple ways in which you can create Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records, depending on the page that you are viewing and the node that is selected in the
RBI Explorer pane. The following table lists your options for creating Criticality
From this page:

RBI Asset View
...You have these options:
Create a Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components record from
scratch. The new record
will be linked to the
Equipment record that is
represented by the
selected node.
Create multiple
Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records
by copying ALL the
RBI Components records
that are linked to the
represented by the
selected node.
Create a single
RBI Components record
by copying the Criticality
Notes
You can access the RBI Asset
View page by opening a
Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
Calculator RBI
Components record that
is represented by the
selected node.
RBI Unit View
Calculator RBI
Components record from
scratch. The new record
will be linked to the RBI
System record that is
represented by the
selected node.
You can access the RBI Unit

View page by opening an RBI
Calculator RBI
System record.
Components record by
copying the Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components record that
selected node. The new
record will be linked to
the same RBI System
record as the record that
selected node.
Opening a Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Record
To open a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
1. On the RBI Component List page, in the Select Asset ID list, select the Equipment
records that are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that
you want to open.
The query results appear in the grid below the Select Asset ID list. The grid contains a
row for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to an
Equipment record that you selected in the Select Asset ID list.
3. To open a single Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, in the grid, in the
row containing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to
open, click the hyperlink in the Component cell.
-orTo open multiple Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, in the grid, select the
rows containing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that you want to
open, and click the Open link on the Component Tasks menu.
The RBI Asset View page appears. The RBI Explorer pane contains a node for each
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you selected on the RBI Component
List page, grouped by nodes representing the Equipment records to which the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records are linked. By default, the top Equipment node is
selected.
4. To view one of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that you
selected on the RBI Component List page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select the
node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you
want to view.
The datasheet for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components record appears in
the datasheet area.
Creating an RBI Component from

Scratch
To create a new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record from scratch and link it to
an RBI System record:
1. Open the RBI System record to which you want to link a new Criticality
On the RBI Unit View page, the RBI System datasheet for the selected RBI System
record appears in the datasheet area.
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Create RBI Component link.
The Create Component window appears.
3. To the right of the Asset box, click the Find Now button.
The Find Asset window appears.
4. In the Search In list, select Equipment.

The search results appear, displaying all Equipment records that meet the specified
criteria.
6. In the search results, select the row containing the Equipment record representing
the piece of equipment to which the component belongs, and click the Select
button.
The Create Component window returns to focus, and the Asset cell is populated with the
Record ID of the selected Equipment record.
7. In the Component Family list, select the family to which the new Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record should belong.
8. In the Component Type list, select the appropriate component type. The list
contains all values that exist in the CriticalityItemType field in the
EquipmentTypes records that exist in the database.
9. Click OK.
The RBI Unit View page returns to focus, and a node representing the new Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record appears in the RBI Explorer pane.
10. Complete the fields on the datasheet as desired.

11. When you are finished completing the fields, on the datasheet toolbar, click the
button to save the record.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is saved to the database.
Copying an Existing RBI Component

To create a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record by copying an existing one that
is linked to an RBI System record:
1. Access the RBI Unit View page.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, expand the node representing the RBI System record
that is linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want
to copy. In the following image, the RBI System RBISYS-837 is expanded.
3. In the RBI Explorer pane, below the RBI System node that you expanded, select
the node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you
want to copy to create a new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. In the
following image, the Criticality Calculator RBI Components node is selected.
4. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Copy Selected Component link.

criteria.
the equipment to which the new component belongs, and click the Select button.
A new node representing the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record appears
in the RBI Explorer pane. In the datasheet, you can see that the values from the source
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record were copied to the new record, with the
exception of the values in the following fields:
Asset Identifier
Component Description
Component Start Date
Functional Location
Source of Calculated Corrosion Rate
In addition, the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked to:
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the

source record.
The RBI System record that is linked to the source record.
The Equipment record that you selected on the Find Asset window.
Assigning Existing RBI Components to

an RBI System
To link an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to an RBI System
record:
you want to link to an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Component record. In
the following image, the RBI System RBISYS-837 is selected.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Link Existing RBI Component link.
The Find Existing RBI Components window appears, displaying the Select RBI
Components query.
4. In the Asset list, select the Equipment record that is linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that you want to link to the RBI System
record. The Asset list contains all records in the Equipment family. The first
record in that list is selected by default.
The query results appear below the Asset list, displaying all active Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records that are:
o
o
Linked to the selected Equipment record.
NOT linked to an RBI System record.
- and -
6. In the grid, select the rows containing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records that you want to link to the RBI System record, and click the Link button.
The RBI Unit View page returns to focus, and the selected Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records are linked to the RBI System record.
Removing an RBI Component from an

RBI System
To unlink a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record from an RBI System record:
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record that you want to unlink from the RBI System record.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Unlink RBI Component link.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is unlinked from the RBI System
record.
Creating an RBI Component from

Scratch
To create a new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record from scratch and link it to
an Equipment record:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment record to which you want to
link a new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Create RBI Component link.
The Create Component window appears. The Asset box is populated automatically with
the Record ID of the Equipment record that it represented by the node that is selected in
3. In the Component Family list, select the family to which the new Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record should belong.
The selected family appears in the Component Family list box.
4. In the Component Type list, select the desired component type.
The selected type appears in the Component Type list box.
5. Click OK.
The RBI Asset View page returns to focus, and a node representing the new Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record appears in the RBI Explorer pane below the node
representing the Equipment record to which it is linked. In the following image, the new
Criticality Calculator RBI Component is highlighted in the RBI Explorer pane.
Copying a Single RBI Component

To create a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record by copying an existing one that
is linked to an Equipment record:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment record that is linked to the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to copy to create a
new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
RBI Components record that you want to copy. In the following image, the
Equipment node has been expanded to show nodes representing the associated
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, and the Criticality RBI
Component E0014B Heat Exchanger-Shell 000000000001056830 node has been

selected.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Copy Selected Component link.
The value in the Search In list is set by default to Equipment.

criteria.
the piece of equipment to which the new component belongs, and click the Select
button.
The new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is created. A node representing
that record and the Equipment record that is linked to it appears in the RBI Explorer
pane. In the following image, the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components node is
selected.
On the datasheet, you can see that the values from the source Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record were copied to the new record, with the exception of the values in the
following fields:
1.
o
Asset Identifier
Functional Location
In addition, the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked to:
1.
o

source record.
Copying All RBI Components for an

Equipment Record
To create multiple Criticality Calculator RBI Components records by copying all the
existing ones that are linked to an Equipment record:
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that you want to copy to create
new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the Equipment record that
is linked to the Criticality RBI Component records you want to copy to create new
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records. In the following image, the node
representing Equipment record B0001-107 ~ 000000000001063222 HEATER THERMAL REACTOR - SULFUR PIT ~ Heater FIX HEA FIR is selected in the
RBI Explorer pane.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Copy Asset Components link.
The value in the Search In list is set by default to Equipment.

criteria.
5. In the search results, select the rows containing the Equipment records
representing the equipment to which the new components belong, and click the
Select button.
The new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are created. The RBI Explorer
pane is refreshed to contain nodes representing these new records and the Equipment
records that are linked to them.
On the datasheets, the values from the source Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records were copied to the new records, with the exception of the values in the following
fields:
Asset Identifier
Functional Location
In addition, each new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records is linked to:

source record.
Associating a Potential Degradation

Mechanism with an RBI Component
When you link a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to an RBI System record,
the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI System record
are linked automatically to that Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. If desired,
you can link additional Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record or unlink any of the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
Note that after you create an analysis that is linked to a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record, the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record will be used to create RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records that will be linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis.
To link a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record to a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record manually:
that is linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which you
want to link additional Potential Degradation Mechanisms records.
RBI Components record to which you want to link additional Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records.
In the following image, the node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record Cylindrical Shell ~ HXST 102 is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
4. In the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section, click the
button.
The Link Existing Potential Degradation Mechanisms to <Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Record ID> window appears, where <Criticality Calculator RBI
Components Record ID> is the Record ID that is associated with the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components node that is selected in the RBI Explorer pane. The value in
the Search In list is set by default to Potential Degradation Mechanisms. You cannot
select another value.
Note: If an administrative user has completed the appropriate configuration steps via the
Configuration Manager application, the list of Potential Degradation Mechanisms records
will be limited to only those that apply to the selected Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record (based on the value in the Component Type field).
5.
If desired, add criteria to the search.
5.
Click the Find Now button.
The search results appear, displaying all Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that
meet the specified criteria and that are not already linked to the selected Criticality
Mechanisms records that you want to link to the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record, and click the Select button.
The RBI Unit View page returns to focus, and the selected Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records are displayed in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section.
8. In the datasheet section, click the
button.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is saved, and the selected Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records are linked to it.
Removing the Association Between a

Potential Degradation Mechanism and
an RBI Component
To unlink a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record from a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record manually:
that is linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record from which
you want to unlink a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
RBI Components record from which you want to unlink a Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record.
In the following image, the node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record Cylindrical Shell ~ HXST 102 is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
4. In the Potential Degradation Mechanisms section, select the row containing the
record that you want to unlink from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record, and click the
button.
A message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to unlink the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The RBI Unit View page returns to focus, and the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record is unlinked from the selected Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
About Inactivating a Criticality

Calculator RBI Components Record
In some cases, you might determine that the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records
that are linked to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record are no longer valid. For
example, suppose the Equipment record Water Heater is linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record Tank, which is linked to the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record Internal Corrosion. The combination of these three records indicates
that the tank in the water heater can fail by corroding as a result of the water that it holds.
Now, suppose that you decide to replace your tank water heater with a tankless water
heater, which works by heating the incoming water on demand rather than constantly reheating the water that is stored in the tank in a traditional tank water heater. As a result of
switching to a tankless water heater, the water heater no longer runs the risk of corroding
because it does not hold water. You determine, therefore, that the Internal Corrosion
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record is invalid.
If you determine that all of the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked
to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record are invalid, you can inactivate that
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. When you do so:
The value in the Component Status field in that Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record is set to Inactive.
The state of the RBI Criticality Analysis record that belongs to the active RBI
Analysis for that Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is set to Archived.
The RBI Explorer pane is refreshed to show the icon for the node representing
the inactive Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
Note: If you navigate away from the RBI Asset View page and then return to it, the node
representing the inactive Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is hidden from
the RBI Explorer pane by default because the RBI Criticality Analysis record to which it
is linked is set to the Archived state, causing it to become part of an inactive RBI
Analysis. Remember that the RBI Explorer pane is configured to display only nodes
representing active RBI Analyses when you first access the page. To view nodes
representing inactive RBI Analyses and the inactive Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records to which they are linked, you can click the View All Analyses link
on the Analysis Tasks menu.
If the associated RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked to RBI

Recommendation records that are set to any of the following states, the state of
those RBI Recommendation records are set to Archived:
Cancelled
Implemented
Not Required
Proposed
Rejected
Pending Approval
Accepted by ASM
Note that RBI Recommendation records that are set to the Consolidated or Superseded
state will not be set to the Archived state automatically. Instead, the master
Recommendation record to which they are linked will be set to the Archived state. In
addition, the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is linked to that master
Recommendation record will be set to the Archived state.
If the Equipment record to which the inactive Criticality Calculator RBI

Components record is linked has been promoted to ASM:
The Risk records that were created from the associated RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records are either deleted or flagged for deletion, depending
upon the state of the Asset Strategy record. Specifically:
If the Asset Strategy record was set to the Active state when you
inactivated the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, the
Risk records are flagged for deletion, and the Asset Strategy state
is set to Modified.
If the Asset Strategy record had never been set to the Active state
before you inactivated the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record, the Risk records are deleted automatically, and the Asset
Strategy state is not changed.
The strategy indicator is set to None.
Note: You cannot inactivate a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record whose
associated Equipment record is linked to an Asset Strategy record that is set to the
Pending Review state.
Inactivating a Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Record
You can inactivate a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record via the RBI Asset
View page.
To inactivate a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to
inactivate.
On the RBI Asset View page, the datasheet for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record appears in the datasheet area.
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Inactivate Component link.

A message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to inactivate the record.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is inactivated, and the RBI Explorer
pane is updated to display the icon for the node representing the inactive Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record. For example, in the following image, you can see the
icon beside the highlighted node representing the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that has been inactivated.
Deleting a Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Record
Note: Before you can delete a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, you must
delete or unlink any successor records to which it is linked.
To delete a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to delete.
On the RBI Asset View page, the datasheet for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Delete RBI Component link.
A message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the record.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Component record is deleted from the database.
Options for Creating Main RBI

Analyses
To create a main RBI Analysis, you can:
Create the analysis from scratch.
Create the analysis as a copy of an existing analysis. When you create a main RBI
analysis as a copy of an existing analysis, most fields in the RBI Criticality
-or-
Analysis record are populated automatically with the corresponding values from
the source RBI Criticality Analysis record.
In most cases, you will want to copy the analysis to the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that is already associated with the analysis that you are copying (i.e.,
the current Criticality Calculator RBI Components record). In other words, you will want
to end up with multiple copies of a source RBI Criticality Analysis record for a single
RBI Component. This option allows you to change only certain values in each record and
then calculate the results based upon those changes.
If desired, you can copy an analysis to a different Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record. For example, if your database contains five Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records representing Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers, you might want to
create an RBI Criticality Analysis record for one of those records and then copy it to the
other four records.
Creating a Main RBI Analysis from

Scratch
To create a main RBI Analysis from scratch for a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you want to
create a new main RBI Analysis.
The RBI Asset View page appears.
RBI Components record for which you want to create an analysis.
In the following image, the Criticality Calculator RBI Components node F0001-097-CS2 ~ F001-097-CS is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Create Analysis link.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record is created, saved, and displayed as a node below the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components node in the RBI Explorer pane.
Note that the Analysis ID field on the Main tab of the RBI Analysis datasheet is
populated automatically. This value cannot be modified.
The following RBI Criticality Analysis fields are populated with the values in the
corresponding fields in the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
6.
o
Operating Pressure
Operating Temperature
Design Pressure
Design Temperature
Equipment ID
Note: The Equipment ID field in the RBI Criticality Analysis record is populated
with the value in the Equipment field in the corresponding Criticality Calculator
o
o
Material Spec
Material Grade
Joint Efficiency
Insulated
Insulation Type
The following records are linked automatically to the RBI Criticality Analysis record:
o
o
One Criticality Consequence Evaluation record.

One Multiple Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record for each
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to the associated
One RBI Degradation Mechanisms record for each Potential Degradation

Mechanisms record that is linked to the associated Criticality Calculator
What Happens When I Copy an

Analysis?
When you create an analysis as a copy of an RBI Criticality Analysis record, you must
specify:
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which you want to copy the
analysis (i.e., the target Criticality Calculator RBI Components record).
The RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that you want to copy to the new
analysis and whether or not their associated RBI Recommendation records should
be linked the new RBI Criticality Analysis record.
When you copy an analysis to a target Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
A new RBI Criticality Analysis record is created and linked to the target
The RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that you selected during the copy
procedure are created and linked to the new RBI Criticality Analysis record.
If you specified that they should be copied, the RBI Recommendation records
associated with the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that you selected
during the copy procedure are created and linked to the new RBI Criticality
Analysis record.
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records that correspond to the selected

RBI Degradation Mechanisms records are created and linked to the new RBI
Note: You cannot copy RBI PRD Analyses.
Copying an Analysis to the Current RBI

Component
To copy an existing main RBI Analysis to the current Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record whose main RBI Analysis you want to copy.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the main RBI Analysis that
you want to copy to create a new main RBI Analysis. The following image shows
an RBI Analysis node selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Copy Analysis link.

The Copy Analysis dialog box appears, which displays a message that asks if you want to
copy the existing analysis to the current Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The Select Degradation Mechanisms window appears, displaying a grid that contains one
row for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to the source RBI
Criticality Analysis record. By default, all rows are selected.
5. In the grid, in the rows containing the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that
you do not want to link to the new RBI Criticality Analysis records, clear the
Selected check box.
6. If you want the RBI Recommendation records that are associated with the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records that will be linked to the new RBI Criticality
Analysis records to also be linked to the new RBI Criticality Analysis records,
select the Copy Recommendations for Degradation Mechanisms check box. If
you do not want these RBI Recommendation records to be linked to the new RBI
Criticality Analysis records, proceed to step 7.
Note: The Copy Recommendations for Degradation Mechanisms check box is enabled
only when the Enable Recommendations to be Generated at Created State check box is
selected on the Administrative Tasks page and there is at least one RBI Recommendation
record that is associated with the selected RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that
appear in the grid on the Select Degradation Mechanisms window.
7. Click OK.
The Select Degradation Mechanisms window closes and the RBI Asset View page returns
to focus. A new node representing the new main RBI Analysis is displayed in the RBI
Explorer pane below the current RBI Criticality Calculator Components record.
Copying an Analysis to a Different RBI

Component
To copy an existing main RBI Analysis and apply it to a different Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record whose main RBI Analysis you want to copy.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the main RBI Analysis that
you want to copy to create a new main RBI Analysis. The following image shows
an RBI Analysis node selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Copy Analysis link.

The Copy Analysis dialog box appears, which displays a message that asks if you want to
copy the existing analysis to the current Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
4. Click the No button.
The Find Components window appears.
The family of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to the
selected RBI Criticality Analysis record is selected in the Search In list. You cannot select
another value.
5. If necessary, add criteria to your search, and click the Find Now button.
The search results appear, displaying a list of all Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records that belong to the family that is selected in the Search In list.
6. In the grid, select the rows containing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records to which you want to link the new RBI Criticality Analysis record. One
RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created for each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record that you select.
7. Click the Select button.
The Select Degradation Mechanisms window appears, displaying a grid that contains one
row for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to the source RBI
Criticality Analysis record. By default, all rows are selected.
8. In the grid, in the rows containing the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that
you do not want to link to the new RBI Criticality Analysis records, clear the
Selected check box.
9. If you want the RBI Recommendation records that are associated with the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records that will be linked to the new RBI Criticality
Analysis records to also be linked the new RBI Criticality Analysis records, select
the Copy Recommendations for Degradation Mechanisms check box. If you do
not want these RBI Recommendation records to be linked to the new RBI
Criticality Analysis records, proceed to step 10.
Note: The Copy Recommendations for Degradation Mechanisms check box is enabled
only when the Enable Recommendations to be Generated at Created State check box is
selected on the Administrative Tasks page and there is at least one RBI Recommendation
record that is associated with the selected RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that
appear in the grid on the Select Degradation Mechanisms window.
10. Click OK.
The Select Degradation Mechanisms window closes and the RBI Asset View page returns
to focus. A new node representing the new main RBI Analysis is shown in the RBI
Explorer pane below the RBI Criticality Calculator Components record that you selected
in the Find Components dialog box. The following image shows the new RBI Criticality
Analysis node selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
Analysis Fields That are Not Copied

When you create a new main RBI Analysis by copying an existing main RBI Analysis,
most values in the source RBI Analysis are copied to the corresponding fields in the new
RBI Analysis. This topic lists the field captions of the fields whose values are not copied.
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new RBI Criticality Analysis
record:
Sub ID
Equipment Driving Risk
Equipment Risk Completed
Equipment Risk Completed Date
Effective Date for Risk Analysis
Consequence Category-Rolled Up
Risk Category
Inspection Priority-Rolled Up
Probability of Failure-Rolled Up
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records:
COF
Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk)
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new Criticality Consequence
Evaluation records:
Final Phase
Leak Size
Release Duration
Deinventory Time
Dist to End Affect
Toxic Mixed Release Rate
Toxicity Area
Initial Leak Rate
Average Leak Rate
Cleanup Cost
Pool Area
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new Criticality Env. Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval. records:
Years in Service
Updated Potential
DF
Probability Category
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new Criticality Int. Corr. Deg.
Years in Service
Estimated
Estimated Wall Loss
Estimated Half Life
Wall Ratio
DF
The values in the following fields are not copied to the new Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg.
Years in Service
Age
Coating Factor
Estimated Wall Loss
Wall Ratio
DF
Opening an Existing RBI Analysis

To open an existing RBI Analysis:
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record whose RBI Criticality Analysis
record you want to view.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI Criticality
Analysis record that you want to view. The following image shows the RBI
Criticality Analysis node for the RBI Criticality Analysis record RBI-000328672
The RBI Analysis datasheet and the following tabs are displayed in the datasheet area on
the RBI Asset View page:
Consequence Evaluations
Manually Adding RBI Degradation

Mechanisms Records to an RBI
Analysis
If you follow the standard RBI workflow, Meridium APM will create RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records and link them to an RBI Criticality Analysis record automatically
after you create the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
In some cases, you might want to link additional RBI Degradation Mechanisms records
to the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
To link RBI Degradation Mechanisms records to an RBI Criticality Analysis record

manually:
1. Open the RBI Criticality Analysis record to which you want to link additional
RBI Degradation Mechanisms records.
2. On the Degradation Mechanisms tab, click the
button.
The Create new Degradation Mechanisms record window appears, displaying the Simple
Search form. The value in the Search In list is set by default to Potential Degradation
Mechanisms. You cannot select another value.

4. When you are finished adding criteria, click the Find Now button.
The Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that meet the criteria are displayed in a
grid below the search criteria.
Mechanisms records that you want to use to create a new RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record.
6. Click the Select button.
The Degradation Mechanism tab returns to focus, and the new RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record appears in the grid. In addition, a corresponding Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation record is also created and linked to the RBI Criticality
Analysis record. You can view this record on the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations
tab. In the following image, the Potential Degradation Mechanisms tab is outlined in red.
Deleting RBI Degradation Mechanisms

Records While Viewing an RBI
Analysis
If desired, you can delete an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record while viewing an RBI
Analysis. Doing so will cause Meridium APM to delete the associated Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation record.
To delete an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record while viewing an RBI Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Analysis that contains the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record
that you want to delete.
2. On the Degradation Mechanism tab, select the row that contains the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record that you want to delete.
3. Click the
button.
A message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the record.
The RBI Degradation Mechanisms record is deleted. In addition, the associated
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record is deleted.
About Managing Unmitigated Risk for

In the baseline RBI product, when you calculate an RBI Analysis, the unmitigated risk
and unmitigated financial risk for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record are
calculated automatically and stored in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. If you
have extended the baseline RBI product by creating a custom calculator and selected the
Risk Assessment Enabled check box on the Administrative Tasks page, unmitigated risk
will be calculated by your custom calculator and displayed on the:
Risk Matrix, which can be accessed from the RBI Asset View page.
Degradation Mechanism with Risk Mitigation datasheet.
Degradation Mechanism without Risk Mitigation datasheet.
For each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, after the unmitigated risk and unmitigated
financial risk is calculated, depending upon how the administrative settings are
configured, you have two options:
Accept the calculated unmitigated values.
Note: You are required to accept the calculated unmitigated values if the Risk Assessment
Enabled check box is cleared on the Administrative Tasks page. When this check box is
cleared, you can view the unmitigated risk values only on the Degradation Mechanism
datasheet. Because the fields that store the unmitigated risk values are disabled, you will
not be able to change the values.
Override the calculated unmitigated values.
Note: You can override the calculated unmitigated risk only if the Allow Override of
Calculated Unmitigated Risk Values check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks
page. While you can view the values on the Degradation Mechanism with Risk
Mitigation and Degradation Mechanism without Risk Mitigation datasheets, the fields are
disabled. Therefore, you will need to override the calculated values using the Risk
Matrix.
Overriding the Calculated Unmitigated

Risk of RBI Degradation Mechanisms
Records
Note: The following instructions assume that you calculate unmitigated risk using a
custom calculator. This documentation does not explain how to create a custom calculator
or how to configure the Meridium APM system to use it.
If you have extended the baseline RBI product by creating a custom calculator and
selected the Risk Assessment Enabled check box on the Administrative Tasks page,
unmitigated risk will be calculated by your custom calculator and displayed on the:
Risk Matrix, which can be accessed from the RBI Asset View page.
Degradation Mechanism with Risk Mitigation datasheet.
Degradation Mechanism without Risk Mitigation datasheet.
Note that if a piece of equipment is associated with a site that is also associated with a
Risk Matrix, when you override the unmitigated risk of an RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record that is associated with that equipment, rather than seeing the default Risk Matrix,
you will see the Risk Matrix that is associated with that site.
If desired, you can use these instructions to override the calculated unmitigated risk.
Note: You can override the calculated unmitigated risk only if the Allow Override of
Calculated Unmitigated Risk Values check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks
page.
To override the calculated unmitigated risk of an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record:
1. On the RBI Asset View page, on the Degradation Mechanisms tab, select the row
containing the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record whose unmitigated risk value
you want to override. In the following image, the selected row is outlined in red.
2. On the toolbar, click the
button.
The Unmitigated Risk Assessment window appears, displaying the default Risk Matrix.
Note that the Risk Of text box contains the value in the Degradation Mechanism field in
the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record.
3. Using the Risk Matrix provided, change the unmitigated risk associated with the
degradation mechanism, and click the Save button.
The unmitigated risk values are saved.
About Managing Mitigated Risk for

When you calculate an RBI Analysis, the unmitigated risk and unmitigated financial risk
for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record is calculated automatically and stored in
the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. By default, the mitigated risk values are set to
the same values as the unmitigated risk values. You can modify the mitigated risk values
manually to indicate how the risk could be lowered if certain actions were taken.
For each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, you can modify the mitigated risk values
in the following ways:
Enter the mitigated risk using the Degradation Mechanism datasheet.
Note: You will need to use this approach if the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is
cleared on the Administrative Tasks page.
-or
Enter the mitigated risk using the Risk Matrix.
Note: You will need to use this approach if the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is
selected on the Administrative Tasks page.
Entering Mitigated Risk Using the

Degradation Mechanisms Datasheet
On the Administrative Tasks page, if the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is cleared,
for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, you will need to use the Degradation
Mechanism datasheet to enter mitigated risk values (i.e., mitigated risk and mitigated
financial risk).
To enter mitigated risk values using the Degradation Mechanisms datasheet:
containing the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record whose mitigated risk values
you want to enter. In the following image, the RBI Degradations record is
outlined in red.
2. In the selected row, click the hyperlink in the Degradation Mechanism column.
The <Degradation Mechanism> (RBI Degradation Mechanisms) window appears, where
<Degradation Mechanism> is the value in the Degradation Mechanism field in the
selected record.
3. On the Degradation Mechanism datasheet, click the Risk Details tab.
4. In the RBI Risk column, in the Mitigated Risk cell, click the
button, and
select the desired mitigated risk value. By default, the value is set to the value in
the Unmitigated Risk cell in the same column. While the list contains values that
are higher and lower than the unmitigated risk value, you should select a value
that is higher than the unmitigated risk. Otherwise, an error will appear when you
navigate away from the cell.
Note: The Mitigated Risk cell is populated with the value stored in the Mitigated Risk
SHE field.
5. In the RBI Risk column, in the Mitigated Financial Risk cell, click the
button,
and select the desired mitigated financial risk value. By default, the value is set to
the value in the Unmitigated Financial Risk cell in the same column. While the
list contains values that are higher and lower than the unmitigated financial risk
value, you should select a value that is higher than the unmitigated financial risk.
Otherwise, an error will appear when you navigate away from the cell.
6. Click the Save button.

The mitigated risk values are saved.
Entering Mitigated Risk Using the Risk

Matrix
Note: The following instructions assume that you calculate unmitigated risk using a
custom calculator. This documentation does not explain how to create a custom calculator
or how to configure the Meridium APM system to use it.
On the Administrative Tasks page, if the Risk Assessment Enabled check box and the
Recommendation Creation Enabled check box are selected, for each RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record, you can use the Risk Matrix to enter mitigated risk values (i.e.,
mitigated risk and mitigated financial risk).
Note that if equipment is associated with a site that is also associated with a Risk
Matrix, when you enter the mitigated risk for an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record
that is associated with that equipment, rather than seeing the default Risk Matrix, you will
see the Risk Matrix that is associated with that site.
To enter mitigated risk values using the Risk Matrix:
containing the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record whose mitigated risk values
you want to enter. In the following image, the RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record is outlined in red.
2. On the toolbar, click the
button.
The Risk Mitigation Assessment window appears, displaying the default Risk Matrix.
Note that the Risk Of and Mitigated By text boxes contains the value in the Degradation
Mechanism field in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. The Unmitigated Risk
Rank text box displays the current unmitigated risk for the RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record.
3. Using the Risk Matrix provided, define the mitigated risk associated with the
degradation mechanism, and click the Save button.
The mitigated risk values are saved.
About Assigning Inspections to

You can use the Inspection Management module to record inspection results for a piece
of equipment in an Inspection record. In each Inspection record, you can specify the
degradation mechanism for which you were looking during the inspection.
In RBI, you use Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to divide a piece of
equipment into parts called RBI Components, then you define degradation mechanisms
for those RBI Components, and then you conduct analyses for each RBI Component.
If an RBI Component represents parts of a piece of equipment that you have inspected in
the past and for which you have recorded results in Inspection records, while viewing the
RBI Analysis, you can assign those inspections to the appropriate degradation
mechanisms for that RBI Component. By doing so, you identify the inspections that were
used to detect degradation mechanisms for that RBI Component.
The type of analysis with which you are working will determine what happens when you
assign an inspection to a degradation mechanism. When you are working with an RBI
Analysis (i.e., the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record is associated with an
RBI Criticality Analysis record), the Meridium APM system uses the values in the
Inspection Confidence field in the selected Inspection records to populate automatically
the following fields in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record representing
that degradation mechanism:
Inspection Confidence: Indicates how effective the last inspection was at

successfully detecting the degradation mechanism and identifying the rate of
degradation. For example, in a Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval. record
whose Degradation Mechanism field contains the value Amine Cracking (ASCC),
the value in the Inspection Confidence field indicates how effective the last
inspection of the associated RBI Component was at determining amine cracking
and identifying the rate at which it was occurring.
Equivalent Number of Inspections: Indicates the number of inspections that will
be used when calculating the analysis.
You can also assign inspections that are associated with pressure relief devices (PRDs)
when you are working with an RBI PRD Analysis (i.e., the Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record is associated with an RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record). When you
do so, the Inspection records that you select will belong to the PRD Pop Test Checklist
family (i.e., a subfamily of the Inspection family), and values that are stored in the PRD
Pop Test Checklist records that you select will be used as inputs to RBI PRD Analysis
calculations. Specifically, values in the following fields in the PRD Pop Test Checklist
records are used in RBI PRD Analysis calculations:
Completion Date
Inspection Confidence
Leak Test Results
Over Pressure Test Results
The Completion Date and Inspection Confidence fields in the PRD Pop Test Checklist
record must contain values in order to assign a PRD Pop Test Checklist record to a
degradation mechanism that is associated with an RBI PRD Analysis. The Leak Test
Results and Over Pressure Test Results fields, however, do not have to contain values in
order to assign an Inspection record of this type to a degradation mechanism. Instead, the
following default values will be used in the RBI PRD Analysis calculations in this case:
Leak: This value is used as an input by default when the Leak Test Results field
does not contain a value in the PRD Pop Test Checklist record that you assign to a
degradation mechanism.
Fail: This value is used as an input by default when the Over Pressure Test Results
field does not a value in the PRD Pop Test Checklist record that you assign to a
degradation mechanism.
When you are working with an RBI Analysis (i.e., not an RBI PRD Analysis), you can
choose to override the automatic Inspection Confidence and Equivalent Number of
Inspections if you want to specify manual values instead. In most cases, however, you
will want the Meridium APM system to populate the fields automatically to avoid
subjective interpretations of the values. For example, one inspector might feel that the
confidence is high, and another inspector performing the same inspection might feel that
the confidence is medium. If you allow the Meridium APM system to calculate the
confidence for you, it eliminates any differences of opinion.
If you want to specify the inspection confidence and number of inspections manually, on
the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation datasheet, you will need to:
1. Clear the Use Combined Confidence check box.
2. Select the appropriate confidence in the Inspection Confidence list.
3. Type the appropriate value in the Number of Inspections text box.
The remaining RBI documentation, however, assumes that you want the Meridium APM
system to populate the Inspection Confidence and Equivalent Number of Inspections
fields automatically. No further instructions are provided for populating them manually.
Unless otherwise noted, the information in this section of the documentation applies to
both RBI Analyses and RBI PRD Analyses. You can use the instructions to assign
inspections to degradation mechanisms regardless of the type of analysis with which you
are working.
You can assign inspections to a degradation mechanism using the Define Inspections for
<Degradation Mechanism> window.
Accessing the Define Inspections for

<Degradation Mechanism> Window
To access the Define Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis containing the
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record to which you want to assign an
inspection.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the RBI Analysis node, as shown in the following
image.
3. On the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations tab, select the row representing the
degradation mechanism to which you want to assign an inspection. In the
following image, the row representing the Amine Cracking (ASCC) degradation
mechanism is selected.
4. Above the grid, click the
button.
The Define Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window appears.
Note: When you access this window for a Criticality Leak Deg. Mech. Eval. or Criticality
Over Pressure Deg. Mech. Eval. record to assign an inspection belonging to the PRD Pop
Test Checklist family, the columns that appear in the grid will vary from those displayed
in the preceding image.
You can use this window to assign inspections to the degradation mechanism.
Aspects of the Define Inspections for

<Degradation Mechanism> Window
The Define Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window appears when you click
the
page.
button on the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations tab on the RBI Asset View
The window contains a grid, where each row represents an Inspection record that meets
the following criteria:
It contains a date in the Completion Date field, where that date meets either of the
following conditions if the Inspection Family column does not display the value
PRD Pop Test Checklist:
o
If the Date In Service field in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation

record for which you accessed the window is older than twenty years ago
(e.g., 21 years ago), the value in the Completion Date field in the
Inspection records must be within the last twenty years.
If the Date In Service field in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation

record for which you accessed the window is more recent than twenty
years ago (e.g., nineteen years ago), the value in the Completion Date field
in the Inspection records must be on or after the date in the Date In
Service field.
-or-
If the Inspection Family column does display the value PRD Pop Test Checklist, the 20
most recent inspections (based on the date that is stored in the Completion Date field in
the associated Inspection record) that have been executed since the date in the Date In
Service field will appear in the grid.
Note: Only PRD Pop Test Checklist records that contain a value in the Inspection
Confidence field will appear in the results grid on the Define Inspections window.
It is linked to the Equipment record that is associated with the Criticality

Degradation Mech Evaluation record for which you accessed the window.
Its Degradation Mechanism field contains the same value that is stored in the
Degradation Mechanism field in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
record for which you accessed the window (which is also displayed in the window
title). For example, in the image shown above, you can see that the window title
contains the value Amine Cracking (ASCC). You can assume, therefore, that the
value Amine Cracking (ASCC) is stored in the Degradation Mechanism field in
the:
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record for which the window

was accessed.
-and
All Inspection records that appear in the grid.
In each row, the first column contains a check box, which you can select to indicate that
you want to assign that inspection to the degradation mechanism represented by the
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record. When you assign an inspection that does
not belong to the family PRD Pop Test Checklist to a degradation mechanism, in the
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record, the Meridium APM system populates
several fields automatically, as described below.
Field
Automatically Populated Value
Use Combined
True (i.e., on the datasheet, the check box is selected)
Confidence
Equivalent
Number of
Inspections
A number 1-6, which is calculated automatically based on the number of

Inspection records you selected and the values in their Inspection
Confidence fields.
Inspection
Confidence
The highest inspection confidence value that is stored in the selected

Inspection records. For example, if you selected two Inspection records
with inspection confidence values of High and Low, the value in the
Inspection Confidence field in the Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record would be set automatically to High.
Note: When you assign an inspection that does belong to the PRD Pop Test Checklist
family to a degradation mechanism, the values in the Inspection record are used as direct
inputs to the RBI PRD Analysis calculations. These values are not used to populate
values in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record to which you assigned the
Inspection records.
Assigning Inspections to a Degradation

Mechanism
To assign inspections to a degradation mechanism:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis containing the
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record to which you want to assign an
inspection.
2. Access the Define Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window.
The Define Inspections for <Degradation Mechanism> window appears.
3. In the grid, in the rows containing the Inspection records representing the
inspections that you want to assign to the degradation mechanism, select the
check box.
Note: If you are working with an RBI Analysis (i.e., not an RBI PRD Analysis), you can
select the check box in a maximum of six rows.
4. Click OK.
The inspections are assigned to the degradation mechanism. Specifically, the Inspection
records are linked to the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record. Additionally,
for degradation mechanisms that are assigned inspections that are not in the PRD Pop
Test Checklist family:
o
In the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record, the value in the

Use Combined Confidence field is set to True (on the datasheet, the check
box is selected).
Inspection Confidence field is set automatically to the highest inspection
confidence value that is stored in the selected Inspection records. For

example, if you selected two Inspection records with confidence values of
High and Low, the value in the Inspection Confidence field in the
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record would be set
automatically to High.
o

Equivalent Number of Inspections field is calculated automatically.
About Calculating RBI Analyses

You can calculate a main RBI Analysis and Future Risk Analysis only if the RBI
Criticality Analysis record is in the Created state. What If Analyses will always be in the
Reserved for What If state, and you can calculate What If Analyses at any time.
You can calculate:
A single main RBI Analysis or child RBI Analysis.

All the main RBI Analyses and child RBI Analyses that exist for an Equipment or
Calculating a Single RBI Analysis

To calculate a single RBI Analysis:
1. On the RBI Asset View page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select the RBI Criticality
Analysis node representing the main RBI Analysis or child RBI Analysis that you
want to calculate. In the following image, the RBI Criticality Analysis node
representing the main RBI Analysis, E0011A-097-ET-1 ~Air Cooled ExchangerTbs ~2/17/2012 is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
2. Confirm that the RBI Analysis contains values in the fields in RBI families that
are required to calculate an RBI Analysis.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Calculate Analysis link.
The RBI Analysis is calculated, and the Calculate Analyses window appears, displaying
the analysis that you calculated and the results of the calculation.
4. If you want to save the results of the calculation to an external Text file, click the
Save Results button.
-orTo close the Calculate Analyses window, click the Close button.
The Calculate Analyses window closes. You can use the Analysis Results tab of the RBI
Analysis datasheet to view the following information:
Probability of Failure - Rolled Up
Consequence Category - Rolled Up
Inspection Priority - Rolled Up
Risk Category
Calculating Multiple Analyses

To calculate ALL the main and child RBI Analyses that exist for an Equipment or
Functional Location record:
1. On the RBI Asset View page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select any node the RBI
Explorer pane. In the following image, the RBI Criticality Analysis node
representing the main RBI Analysis, E0011A-097-ET-1 ~Air Cooled ExchangerTbs ~2/17/2012 is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
2. Confirm that the RBI Analyses contains values in the fields in RBI families that
are required to calculate an RBI Analysis.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Calculate All Analysis link.
All RBI Analyses that are linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record that can
be calculated (according to their states) are calculated, and the Calculate Analyses
window appears, displaying the results of the calculations.
4. If you want to save the results of the calculations to an external Text file, click the
Save Results button.
-orTo close the Calculate Analyses window, click the Close button.
The Calculate Analyses window closes. For each RBI Analysis that was calculated, you
can use the Analysis Results tab of the RBI Analysis datasheet to view the following
information:
Probability of Failure - Rolled Up
Consequence Category - Rolled Up
Inspection Priority - Rolled Up
Risk Category
Saving Calculation Results to a Text File

To save the results of a calculation to an external Text file:
1. Calculate the desired RBI Analysis.
The Calculate Analyses window appears.
2. On the Calculation Status dialog box, click the Save Log button.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the location to which you want to save the file.

4. In the File name text box, type a name for the file.
The calculation results are saved to the desired file and location.
Fields Required to Calculate RBI

Analyses
The following table lists the fields in RBI families that are required to calculate RBI
Analyses. If you try to calculate an RBI Analysis and any required fields do not contain
values, the analysis will not be calculated, and the Calculation Status dialog box will
appear, displaying a list of the required fields that do not contain values. Some fields are
conditionally required, and these conditions are described in the Notes column in the
table.
To make the table easier to consume, alternate shading is used to separate groups of rows
that contain the same value in the Family cell.
Field
Notes
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Consequence
Detection Time
Required only for RBI Criticality Analysis records

whose Criticality Item Type is not Heat ExchangerBundle.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Consequence
Isolation Time

whose Criticality Item Type is not Heat ExchangerBundle.
Family
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Corrosion Rate

whose Criticality Item Type is Heat ExchangerBundle.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Corrosion Rate
Shell Side

Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Fill Height

whose Criticality Item Type is Storage Tank.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Foundation Type

whose Criticality Item Type is Storage Tank.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Initial Fluid Phase N/A
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation

Initial State Shell whose Criticality Item Type is Heat ExchangerBundle.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation

that are linked to Criticality Consequence
Inspection Interval
Evaluation records whose Foundation Type is Sand,
Silt, Gravel, or Clay.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Inventory
N/A
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Leak Effect

Evaluation records whose Foundation Type is Sand,
Silt, Gravel, or Clay.
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation

Operating Pressure
whose Criticality Item Type is Heat ExchangerShell Side
Bundle.
Criticality
Consequence
Percent Toxic

Evaluation records whose Toxic Fluid field contains

a value.
Evaluation
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Rep Fluid Shell

Side

Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg. Mech. Date in Service
Eval.

that are linked to Criticality Env. Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval. records.
Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg. Mech. Initial Potential
Eval.

Criticality Env.
Inspection
Crack. Deg. Mech.
Confidence
Eval.
Number Of
Inspections

-ORCriticality Env.
Equivalent
Crack. Deg. Mech.
Number of
Eval.
Inspections

(whichever is
populated)
Criticality Ext.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Date In Service
Eval.

that are linked to Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech.
Eval. records.
Criticality Ext.
Expected
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Corrosion Rate
Eval.

Eval. records whose Selected Corrosion Rate is
Expected.
Criticality Ext.
Inspection
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Confidence
Eval.

Eval. records.
Criticality Ext.
Measured
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Corrosion Rate
Eval.

Measured.
Number Of
Inspections
-orCriticality Ext.
Equivalent
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Number of
Eval.
Inspections

Eval. records.
(whichever is
populated)
Criticality Ext.
Selected Corrosion
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Rate
Eval.
Eval. records.
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Date In Service
Eval.

that are linked to Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech.
Eval. records.
Criticality Int.
Inspection
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Confidence
Eval.

Eval. records.
Criticality Int.
Long Term Avg.
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Corr. Rate
Eval.

Long Term Avg.
Criticality Int.
Measured
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Corrosion Rate
Eval.

Expected or Average.
Number Of
Inspections
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Eval.
-OREquivalent
Number of

Eval. records.
Inspections
(whichever is
populated)
Criticality Int.
Selected Corrosion
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Rate
Eval.
Eval. records.
Criticality Int.
Short Term Avg.
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Corr. Rate
Eval.

Short Term Avg.
Required only for RBI Criticality Analysis records:
Whose Criticality Item Type is Storage Tank

-and-
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Whose Allowable Stress is null or 0 (zero)
Allowable Stress
-and
That are linked to Criticality Int. Corr. Deg.

Mech. Eval. records whose Estimated
Minimum Thickness Override? check box is
not selected.
Area Humidity

Eval. records.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Code Year

whose Allowable Stress Override check box is not
selected and whose Criticality Item Type is not
Storage Tank.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Criticality Item
Type
N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Diameter
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Whose Criticality Item Type is Storage Tank
-and
Whose Diameter is null or > 200 (Feet)

-and-
That are linked to Criticality Int. Corr. Deg.

Mech. Eval. records whose Estimated
Minimum Thickness Override? check box is
not selected.
RBI Criticality
Analysis

Construction Code whose Allowable Stress Override check box is not
selected.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Design Pressure

selected.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Design
Temperature

whose Allowable Stress check box is not selected.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Initial Wall Tck
N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Insulated

Eval. records.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Joint Efficiency
N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Material Grade

selected.
selected.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Material Spec
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Operating Pressure N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Operating
Temperature
N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Representative
Fluid
N/A
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Stress Lookup
Table

selected.
Whose Criticality Item Type is not Heat

Exchanger-Bundle
-and-
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Susceptible to CUI
Whose Insulated field is set to True

-and-
That are associated with a Criticality

Calculator External Corrosion record.
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Tube Init Wall

Thickness

RBI Criticality
Analysis
Tube Operating
Press Channel

Using the Calculate Analyses Window

The Calculate Analyses window is displayed when you calculate a single RBI Analysis or
ALL the RBI Analyses that are linked to a given Equipment or Functional Location
record. The Calculate Analyses window displays the calculation results for each analysis.
The Calculate Analyses window contains the following items:
Calculation status bar: Indicates the status of the calculations. When the
calculations are complete, the text Calculation Completed is displayed above the
Calculation status bar.
Analyses section: Contains a gird that displays information about the RBI
Criticality Analysis records that you calculated. One row is displayed for each
RBI Criticality Analysis record. The gird contains the following columns of
information:
Asset: Displays the Record of the ID of the Equipment record to which the
RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked.
Component: Displays the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI

Component record to which the RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked.
Analysis: Displays the Record ID of the RBI Criticality Analysis record

that is being calculated.
Message: Displays one of the following values, depending upon whether

or not the analysis was calculated successfully:
o
o
Calculation completed Successfully: Indicates that the calculation

was successful.
Calculation Failed: Indicates that the calculation failed. The

calculation of an analysis can fail if the Meridium APM
Application Server machine is down or if the installation of the
Meridium APM Framework was not performed properly. You
should contact your organization's IT department to resolve these
issues.
Validation Failed: Indicates that one or more fields required to

calculate an RBI Analysis does not contain a value.
Calculation Results section: Contains a text box that displays details related to the
calculation of the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is selected in the grid in the
Analyses section.
About Child RBI Analyses

There are two types of child RBI Analyses:
Future Risk Analysis: An RBI Analysis that allows you to analyze hypothetical
situations to determine the future risk associated with an RBI Component's
failure, where the future risk is determined based on a specified date in the future.
What If Analysis: An RBI Analysis that allows you to analyze hypothetical
situations to determine how operational and process changes that you could make
today would impact the risk associated with a subcomponent's failure. If desired,
after you create and calculate a What If Analysis, you can transfer the values in
the What If Analysis to the main RBI Analysis.
You can create a child RBI Analysis for one main RBI Analysis at a time, or you can
create child RBI Analyses for each main RBI Analysis that is linked to a given
Equipment record all at once.
You can create child RBI Analyses only for a main RBI Analysis that is in the Created
state.
Note: You cannot create child RBI Analyses from RBI PRD Analyses.
Creating a Future Risk Analysis

To create a Future Risk Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis for which you want to
create a Future Risk Analysis.
2. Select the RBI Analysis node in the RBI Explorer pane, as shown in the following
image.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Create Future Risk Analysis link.
The Create Future Risk dialog box appears.
4. In the Scenario ID text box, type the desired value, and then click OK.
5. In the Scenario Reference Date box, type or select the date on which to base the
analysis.
6. Click OK.
A Future Risk Analysis is created. To see the new analysis, in the RBI Explorer pane,
expand the RBI Criticality Analysis family node.
The ID of the Future Risk Analysis contains an F, followed by the analysis ID of the
main RBI Analysis, followed by a series of numbers that represents the order in which the
child analysis was created relative to other child analyses of the same main RBI Analysis.
For example, the number will end with 001 if it is the first child analysis created for the
main RBI Analysis, 002 if it is the second child analysis created for the main RBI
Analysis, and so on. In the following example, you can see that two What If Analyses and
one Future Risk Analysis are associated with the same main RBI Analysis.
7. Make any desired changes to the Future Risk Analysis.

8. When you are finished making changes, on the datasheet toolbar, click the
button.
The Future Risk Analysis is saved to the database.
Creating a What If Analysis

To create a What If Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis from which you want
to create a What If Analysis.
image.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Create What If Analysis link.
The Create What If Analysis dialog box appears.
4. In the Scenario ID cell, type the desired value, and click OK.
A new What If Analysis is created. To see the new What If Analysis, in the RBI Explorer,
expand the predecessor RBI Criticality Analysis node.
The ID of the What If Analysis contains a W, followed by the analysis ID of the main
RBI Analysis, followed by a series of numbers that represents the order in which the
What If Analysis was created relative to other child analyses of the same main RBI
Analysis.
For example, the number will end with 001 if it is the first child analysis created for the
main RBI Analysis, 002 if it is the second child analysis created for the main RBI
Analysis, and so on. In the following example, you can see that two What If Analyses are
associated with the same main RBI Analysis.
5. Make any desired changes to the What If Analysis.

6. When you are finished making changes, on the datasheet toolbar, click the
button.
The What If Analysis is saved to the database.
Creating Multiple Child RBI Analyses

You can create a child RBI Analysis for all the main RBI Analyses that are linked to a
given Equipment record using the Mass Risk Analysis window.
For example, suppose that in preparation for a planned shutdown this year, you want to
determine which of the eight components on a particular piece of equipment have
unacceptable risk and should be inspected during this year's planned shutdown. In order
to do this, for each main RBI Analysis associated with the eight components on the
particular piece of equipment, you would need to create one child RBI Analysis whose
Effective Risk Analysis Date is equal to this year's planned shutdown. When you are
finished, you would have eight child RBI Analyses, where each one belongs to a separate
main RBI Analysis.
In this case, instead of creating eight child RBI Analyses, one at a time, you would want
to use the Mass Risk Analyses window to create the eight child RBI Analyses at one time.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the RBI Asset View page for the
Equipment record that is linked to main RBI Analyses for which you want to create child
RBI Analyses.
To create multiple child RBI Analyses:
1. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Mass Risk Analyses link.
The Mass Risk Analyses window appears.
2. In the Risk Analysis Type section, select the desired child RBI Analysis type.
3. If you selected the Future Risk Analyses option, select a value in the Effective
Date for Risk Analysis list.
4. In the Analysis Input Fields section, select the desired inputs.
5. In the Degradation Mechanism Evaluation Input Fields section, select the desired
inputs.
6. In the Consequence Evaluation Input Fields section, select the desired inputs.
7. Click the Generate Risk Analyses button.
The Analyses tab on the Mass Risk Analyses window appears, and the Calculate Analyses
window appears in front of the Mass Risk Analyses window, displaying the calculation
results of the child RBI Analyses.
8. On the Calculate Analyses window, click the Close button.

Hint: If desired, you can click the Save Results button to save a log of the calculations.
The Analyses tab on the Mass Risk Analyses window returns to focus, displaying one row
in the Analyses grid for each child RBI Analysis that is created.
9. If desired, you can navigate back to the Options tab, repeat steps 2-7 to modify
any of the inputs that you specified, and generate additional child RBI Analyses.
10. On the Analyses tab, review the child RBI Analyses and select the rows
containing the analyses that you want to set to the Risk Completed state.
11. Click the Finalize Selected button.

The Finalizing Risks dialog box appears.
12. On the Finalizing Risks dialog box, click the Close button.
Hint: If desired, you can click the Save Log button to save a log of the child RBI
Analyses being promoted to the Risk Complete state.
13. On the Mass Risk Analyses window, click the Close button.
The Mass Risk Analyses window closes and the RBI Asset View page returns to focus.
Aspects of the Mass Risk Analyses

Window
You can use the Mass Risk Analyses window to create child RBI Analyses. The Mass
Risk Analyses window contains two tabs:
Options
Analyses
Note: The Analyses tab is not displayed until after you generate child RBI Analyses for
the main RBI Analyses that are linked to the Equipment record for which you accessed
the Mass Risk Analyses window.
The following buttons are displayed at the bottom of Mass Risk Analyses window:
Close: Closes the Mass Risk Analyses window.

Help: Displays the context-sensitive help for using the Mass Risk Analyses
window to create child RBI Analyses.
Aspects of the Options Tab

The Options tab of the Mass Risk Analyses window contains the following sections:
Risk Analysis Type

Analysis Input Fields
Degradation Mechanism Evaluation Input Fields
Consequence Evaluation Input Fields
The following button is displayed at the bottom of the Options tab:
Generate Risk Analyses: Displays the Analyses tab of the Mass Risk Analyses
window and the Calculation Status dialog box. When you click this button, child
RBI Analyses are created for all the main RBI Analysis that are linked to the
Equipment record for which you accessed the Mass Risk Analyses window,
according to your selections on the Options tab.
Note: After you generate child RBI Analyses, if you navigate back to the Options tab, the
Generate Risk Analyses button will be disabled, and it will remain disabled until you
modify at least one of the inputs on the Options tab.
Risk Analysis Type Section

The Risk Analysis Type section on the Options tab of the Mass Risk Analyses window
contains options for the type of child RBI Analyses that you want to create.
The Risk Analysis Type section contains the following options:
What-If Analyses
Future Risk Analyses
The Future Risk Analyses option is selected by default. When the Future Risk Analyses
option is selected, the Effective Date for Risk Analysis box is displayed. You can type or
select a date in the Effective Date for Risk Analysis. The value that you specify in the
Effective Date for Risk Analysis box should be the date that you want to be used to
calculate the Future Risk Analyses.
Analysis Input Fields Section

The Analysis Input Fields section on the Options tab of the Mass Risk Analyses window
contains input options for the child RBI Analyses that you want to create.
The Analysis Input Fields section contains the following fields:
Representative Fluid: Displays the list of fluids in the RepresentativeFluids

reference table and the value <Use Parent Data>. The value <Use Parent
Data> is selected by default. If you do not change this selection, the
Representative Fluid selection in the main RBI Analyses will be used in the
corresponding child RBI Analyses that are created.
Scenario ID: You should type a value in this text box that represents the child RBI
Analyses that will be created using the inputs that you specify in all of the
sections on the Options tab.
For example, if you are creating What If Analyses to determine the impact of not
conducting any additional inspections until the year 2020, you might type What If No
Inspections Until 2020 in the Scenario ID text box.
Note: After you generate child RBI Analyses, if you navigate back to the Options tab and
modify any of the inputs, you will be prompted to type a new Scenario ID that will
represent the child RBI Analyses that will created using the modified inputs.
Degradation Mechanism Evaluation

Input Fields Section
The Degradation Mechanism Evaluation Input Fields section on the Options tab of the
Mass Risk Analyses window contains input options for the child RBI Analyses that you
want to create.
The following image shows what the Degradation Mechanism Evaluation Input Fields
section looks like when the Mass Risk Analyses window is accessed for an Equipment
record that is linked to main RBI Analyses containing the following Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation records:

The Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list displays a list of the types of Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation records that are linked to the main RBI Analyses
associated with the given Equipment record.
The Inputs for <Degradation Mechanism Evaluations> subsection, where <Degradation
Mechanism Evaluations> is the type of Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record
that is selected in the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list, displays the following
fields, depending upon your selection in the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list:
Increase Inspections By: Displays a list of the numeric values 1-20 and the value
<Use Parent Data>. The selection in this list represents the number by which the
current inspections for the main RBI Analysis associated with the selected
Degradation Mechanism should be increased for the purposes of calculating the
child RBI Analyses. The value <Use Parent Data> is selected by default. If you do
not change this selection, the number of inspections that is used for the main RBI
Analysis associated with the selected Degradation Mechanism will be applied to
the corresponding child RBI Analysis. This list is displayed when ANY value is
selected in the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list.
Inspection Confidence: Displays a list of the System Codes that are stored in the
Inspection Confidence System Code Table and the value <Use Parent Data>. The
value <Use Parent Data> is selected by default. If you do not change this
selection, the Inspection Confidence of the main RBI Analysis associated with the
selected Degradation Mechanism will be applied to the corresponding child RBI
Analysis. This list is displayed when ANY value is selected in the Degradation
Mechanism Evaluations list.
Use Parent Inspection Date: A check box that indicates whether or not the
Inspection Date of the main RBI Analysis associated with the selected
Degradation Mechanism will be applied to the corresponding child RBI Analysis.
This check box is displayed only when the following values are selected in the
Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list:
This check box is selected by default. When this check box is selected, the Inspection
Date list is disabled.
Inspection Date: Allows you to type or select a date. The value that you specify in
this box should be the date of the last inspection for the main RBI Analysis
associated with the selected Degradation Mechanism. This box is displayed only
when the following values are selected in the Degradation Mechanism
Evaluations list:
This box is disabled when the Use Parent Inspection Date check box is selected.
Damaged At Last Inspection: Displays the following values: <Use Parent Data>,
Yes, and No. The value <Use Parent Data> is selected by default. The selection in
this list should reflect whether or not there was damage at the last inspection for
the main RBI Analysis associated with the selected Degradation Mechanism. This
list is displayed only when Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval. is selected in
the Degradation Mechanism Evaluations list.
Consequence Evaluation Input Fields

Section
The Consequence Evaluation Input Fields section on the Options tab of the Mass Risk
Analyses window contains input options for the child RBI Analyses that you want to
create.
The following image shows what the Consequence Evaluation Input Fields section looks
like when the Mass Risk Analyses window is accessed for an Equipment record that is
linked to main RBI Analyses records containing a Criticality Consequence Evaluation
record.
The Consequence Evaluations list displays a list of the types of RBI Consequence
Evaluation records that are linked to the main RBI Analyses for the given Equipment
record.
The Inputs for Criticality Consequence Evaluation subsection contains the following
fields:
Lost Production Category: Displays a hard-coded list of the letters A-E and the
value <Use Parent Data>. The letters represent the five levels of consequence
category ratings that are used by the baseline Criticality Calculator. The value
<Use Parent Data> is selected by default. If you do not modify this selection, the
Lost Production Category value for the main RBI Analysis associated with the
selected Consequence Evaluation will be applied to the corresponding child RBI
Analysis.
Toxic Fluid: Displays the list of fluids in the RepresentativeFluids reference table
and the value <Use Parent Data>. The value <Use Parent Data> is selected by
default. If you do not modify this selection, the Toxic Fluid value for the main
RBI Analysis associated with the selected Consequence Evaluation will be
applied to the corresponding child RBI Analysis.
Percent Toxic (Weight Percent): A text box where you should type the percentage,
by molecular weight, of the toxic fluid that you specified in the Toxic Fluid list
that is present in the process stream. This field is displayed only when a value
other than <Use Parent Data> is selected in the Toxic Fluid list. In the following
image, the Percent Toxic (Weight Percent) check box is displayed when a value
other than <Use Parent Data> is selected in the Toxic Fluid list.
The Analyses Tab

The Analyses tab of the Mass Risk Analyses window displays the Analyses grid and
buttons that allow you to delete or finalize the child RBI Analyses that you have created.
When you create child RBI Analyses, one RBI Criticality Analysis record is created for
each child RBI Analysis. Each row in the Analyses grid represents one RBI Criticality
Analysis record, and the records are grouped according to the Scenario ID that you
defined in the Analysis Input Fields section on the Options tab. The following table lists
the columns that are displayed in the Analyses grid and their corresponding field in the
Column in Analyses grid
RBI Criticality Analysis field
Child Analysis
ENTY_ID
Comb Consequence Cat
Comb Consequence Cat
Combined Probability Cat
Combined Probability Cat
Combined Prob Insp Priority
Combined Prob Insp Priority
Component
Component
Criticality Rating
Criticality Rating
Date Criticality Calculated
Date Criticality Calculated
Environ Crack Insp Priority
Environ Crack Insp Priority
Equipment Description
Equipment Description
Event Type
Event Type
Ext Corr Insp Priority
Ext Corr Insp Priority
Ext Wall Ratio
Ext Wall Ratio
Int Corr Insp Priority
Int Corr Insp Priority
Int Wall Ratio
Int Wall Ratio
Operating Pressure
Operating Pressure
Other Dmg Mechanism Insp Priority Other Dmg Mechanism Insp Priority
Unit
Unit
The following buttons are displayed below the Analyses grid:
Finalize Selected: Displays the Finalizing Risks window and sets the selected
child RBI Analyses to the Risk Completed state.
Note: If you are a member of the MI RBI Analyst Security Group and the MI RBI
Analyst role is assigned to the Risk Completed state, the State Assignee dialog box will
appear when you click the Finalize Risk button. You can use this dialog box to select the
Security User to assign to the successor state (i.e., Risk Completed). After you do this, the
selected child RBI Analyses will be set to the Risk Completed state.
Delete Selected: After displaying a confirmation message, displays the Deleting

Selected Analyses window and deletes the selected child RBI Analyses.
Note: Child RBI Analyses that have been set to the Risk Complete state cannot be
deleted.
Updating a Main RBI Analysis with

Values in a What If Analysis
If desired, you can update a main RBI Analysis with values in a What If Analysis if you
feel that the data in the What If Analysis is more realistic than the data in its main RBI
Analysis. When you do so, the main RBI Analysis is recalculated using the values in the
What If Analysis.
Note: You can update a main RBI Analysis with values in a What If Analysis only if the
RBI Criticality Analysis record in the main RBI Analysis is set to Created.
To update a main RBI Analysis with values from a What If Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis whose values you
want to update.
image.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Update Analysis link.

Note: If the What If Analysis has a different Criticality Item Type than its main analysis, a
message will appear warning of the difference. Click the Yes button on the message to
continue updating the main RBI Analysis.
A confirmation message appears, indicating that update was successful. The main RBI
Analysis is updated with the values from the What If Analysis, with some exceptions, and
the main RBI Analysis is also recalculated automatically. Note that the What If Analysis
remains a What If Analysis. There is no indication in the What If Analysis record that it
was used to update the main RBI Analysis, but you can compare the values between the
analyses to see that they are the same.
Values That are Not Transferred from a

What If Analysis to Its Main RBI
Analysis
When you update a main RBI Analysis with values from a What If Analysis, the
following field values are not transferred to the main RBI Analysis:
The values in the following fields in the RBI Criticality Analysis record:

Driving Risk
Event Type
Risk Completed
Risk Completed Date
Sub ID
The values in the following fields in the Criticality Consequence Evaluation

record:

Average Leak Rate
Cleanup Cost
Deinventory Time
Final Phase
Initial Leak Rate
Leak Size
Pool Size
Release Duration
Toxicity Area
The values in the following fields in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records:

Inspection Priority
The values in the following fields in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
records:

DF
Likelihood Category
Updated Potential
Years in Service

DF
Estimated
Estimated Half Life
Estimated Wall Loss
Likelihood Category
Wall Ratio
Years in Service

Age
Coating Factor
DF
Estimated Wall Loss

Likelihood Category
Wall Ratio
Years in Service
Setting an Analysis to Risk Completed

You can set an RBI Criticality Analysis record to Risk Completed if it is currently in the
Created state. Note that if an RBI Criticality Analysis record is set to any state that causes
it to belong to the active analysis, setting another RBI Criticality Analysis record that is
linked to the same Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to Risk Completed will
cause the original RBI Criticality Analysis record to be set to Archived, causing it to
become part of an inactive analysis.
When you set an RBI Criticality Analysis record to Risk Completed, all fields in all
Criticality Consequence Evaluation, RBI Degradation Mechanisms, and Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis
record will be disabled, with the exception of the Mitigated Risk field in RBI
To set an RBI Criticality Analysis record to Risk Completed:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis that you want to set to
Risk Completed.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Finalize Risk.
The state is changed to Risk Completed. A red outline has been added to the following
image to highlight the state.
4. On the datasheet toolbar, click the
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved. You can now submit the analysis for
approval.
Submitting an Analysis for Approval

If ASM integration is disabled, you can submit an RBI Analysis for approval if the RBI
Criticality Analysis record is currently in the Risk Completed state. When you submit an
analysis for approval, the Mitigated Risk Rank and Mitigated Financial Risk Rank fields
in RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis
record will be disabled.
Note: All other fields in all Criticality Consequence Evaluation, RBI Degradation
Mechanisms, and Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records that are linked to the
RBI Criticality Analysis record were already disabled when the analysis was set to Risk
Completed.
To submit an RBI Analysis for approval:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis that you want to
submit for approval.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Submit for
Approval.
The state is changed to Pending Approval. A red outline has been added to the following
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved. You can now approve the analysis.
Approving an Analysis
If ASM integration is disabled, you can approve an RBI Analysis if the RBI Criticality
Analysis record is currently in the Pending Approval state.
To approve an RBI Analysis:
approve.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Approve.
The state is changed to Approved. A red outline has been added to the following image to
highlight the state.
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved. You can now implement the analysis.
Implementing an Analysis
If ASM integration is disabled, you can implement an RBI Analysis if the RBI Criticality
Analysis record is currently in the Approved state.
To implement an RBI Analysis:
implement.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Implement.
The state is changed to Implemented. A red outline has been added to the following image
to highlight the state.
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved. If needed, you can re-evaluate the analysis.
Re-evaluating an Analysis
If ASM integration is disabled, you can re-evaluate an RBI Analysis if the RBI Criticality
Analysis record is currently in the Implemented state.
To reevaluate an RBI Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the main RBI Analysis that you want to reevaluate.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Re-evaluate.
The state is changed to Re-Evaluating. A red outline has been added to the following
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved. You can now re-implement the analysis.
Re-implementing an Analysis
If ASM integration is disabled, you can re-implement an RBI Analysis if the RBI
Criticality Analysis record is currently in the Re-Evaluating state.
To re-implement an RBI Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Asset View page for the analysis that you want to re-implement.
image.
3. On the datasheet toolbar, click the Operations link, and then click Re-implement.
The state is changed to Implemented. A red outline has been added to the following image
to highlight the state.
The RBI Criticality Analysis record is saved.
Changing the State of Multiple Analyses

You can change the state of multiple RBI Analyses using the RBI - Review Analyses page.
The RBI - Review Analyses page displays all the RBI Analyses that are not in the
Archived state that are linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record for which
you accessed the RBI - Review Analyses page.
The state to which you can set a particular RBI Analysis is dependent upon its current
state and whether or not ASM integration is enabled. The links displayed on the Analysis
Tasks menu will vary, depending upon these factors.
To change the state of multiple RBI Analyses using the RBI - Review Analyses page:
1. In the grid in the RBI - Review Analyses section, select the row containing the RBI
Criticality Analysis record whose state you want to change. In the following
image, the row containing RBI Criticality Analysis record with Record ID RBI0003222350 is selected.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the link that corresponds with the state to
which you want to set the RBI Analysis.
The state of the RBI Criticality Analysis is changed depending upon the Analysis Tasks
menu link that you clicked, and the icon and caption that are displayed in the Current
State cell for the selected row are updated to reflect your change. For example, suppose
that the row containing RBI Criticality Analysis record RBI-0003222350 was selected in
the grid, and you clicked the Approve link on the Analysis Tasks menu. The RBI
Criticality Analysis record would be set to the Approved state, and the icon and caption in
the Current State cell would be updated to reflect this change, as seen in the following
image.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the RBI Criticality Analysis records the grid in the
RBI - Review Analyses section whose states you want to change.
Viewing All Analyses in the RBI

Explorer Pane
When you first access the RBI Asset View page, only nodes representing active analyses
will be displayed in the RBI Explorer pane. If desired, you can choose to view nodes
representing ALL analyses in the RBI Explorer pane.
To view nodes representing ALL RBI Analyses in the RBI Explorer pane:
On the RBI Asset View page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the View All
Analyses link.
The RBI Explorer pane is refreshed to display nodes representing all RBI Analyses that
are associated with the subcomponents that appear in the tree.
Viewing Only Active Analyses in the

RBI Explorer Pane
When you choose to view only nodes representing active analyses in the RBI Explorer
pane, only RBI Analyses that contain RBI Criticality Analysis records that are set to the
following states will be displayed:
Risk Completed
Pending Approval
Approved
Implemented
Re-Evaluating
To view only nodes representing active analyses in the RBI Explorer pane:
On the RBI Asset View page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the View Active
Analyses link.
The RBI Explorer pane is refreshed to show only nodes representing active RBI
Analyses.
Refreshing an Analysis
If you calculate multiple RBI Analyses, to see the updated results on the current RBI
Analysis, you will need to refresh the analysis using the following instructions.
Note: Refreshing an analysis will cause you to lose any unsaved changes.
To refresh an analysis:
In the RBI Explorer pane, right-click the RBI Analysis node, and then click
Refresh.
The data in the RBI Criticality Analysis record is refreshed.
Deleting an RBI Analysis

Note that you can delete an RBI Analysis only if the RBI Criticality Analysis record is
not linked to any other RBI Criticality Analysis records or RBI Recommendation records.
To delete an RBI Analysis:
1. Open the RBI Analysis that you want to delete.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Delete Analysis link.
A message appears, asking if you really want to delete the RBI Analysis.
The RBI Analysis is deleted, including the RBI Criticality Analysis record and all records
to which it is linked.
About Promoting Equipment Records

and Associated Analyses to ASM
After an Equipment record is promoted to an Asset Strategy, all RBI Criticality Analysis
records that are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the
Equipment record is linked are set to the Accepted by ASM state.
For example, suppose Equipment A is linked to two Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records, Component 1 and Component 2, which are each linked to an RBI
Criticality Analysis, Analysis 1 and Analysis 2, respectively. If you promote Equipment A
to ASM, both Analysis 1 and Analysis 2 are set to the Accepted by ASM state.
The following image illustrates this example:
After an Equipment record is promoted to an Asset Strategy, any RBI Recommendation

records to which it is linked are also set to the Accepted by ASM state and cannot be
modified. In addition, the following fields are disabled in the RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records that are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis records that are set to
the Accepted by ASM state: Mitigated Risk and Mitigated Financial Risk.
If an Equipment record is promoted to an Asset Strategy that is set to the Rework state,
you will need to go back to RBI and create a new RBI Criticality Analysis record for that
Equipment record and Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. After you create
the new RBI Criticality Analysis record and additional RBI Recommendation records,
when you promote that Equipment record to an Asset Strategy again, the Actions that
were created from the first promotion are deleted, and new Actions are created to
represent the new RBI Recommendation records.
Note: You can promote an Equipment record to ASM only if the ASM Integration
Enabled check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks page.
Promoting Equipment Records and

Associated Analyses to ASM
Note: You can promote an Equipment record to ASM only if the ASM Integration
Enabled check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks page.
To promote an Equipment record to ASM:
1. On the RBI Asset View page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select the node
representing the Equipment record that you want to promote to ASM. The
following image displays an Equipment node selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Promote to ASM link.
If the Equipment record is already linked to an Asset Strategy record, the ASM - Asset
Strategy Risks - <Strategy ID> page appears, where <Strategy ID> is the ID of the Asset
Strategy. In this case, the promotion process is complete.
-orIf the Equipment record is not yet linked to an Asset Strategy record, a message appears,
indicating that the Equipment record will be linked to a new Asset Strategy record. In this
case, proceed to step 3 of these instructions to complete the promotion process.
If you click No, Meridium APM will stop linking the selected Equipment record to an
Asset Strategy record.
The ASM - Asset Strategy Risks - <Strategy ID> page appears, where <Strategy ID> is
the ID of the Asset Strategy.
Opening an Asset Strategy from RBI

After you have promoted an Equipment record to ASM, you can open the corresponding
Asset Strategy from the RBI Asset View page.
To open an Asset Strategy from RBI:
1. On the RBI Asset View page, in the RBI Explorer pane, select the node
representing the Equipment record whose Asset Strategy you want to open. The
following image displays an Equipment record displayed in the RBI Explorer
pane.
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Open ASM link.

The ASM - Asset Strategy Risks - <Strategy ID> page appears, where <Strategy ID> is
the ID of the Asset Strategy.
Note: In the Risks section, the Source column contains the hyperlinked text RBI Analysis
for any Risk record that was created from RBI. You can click any hyperlink to open the
RBI Asset View page, where the RBI Explorer pane will display a node representing the
Equipment record that was promoted to ASM to create that Asset Strategy.
Values Mapped to ASM

When you promote an Equipment record to ASM, several fields in the ASM records are
populated automatically. The following tables list the source RBI records whose field
values are mapped, the target ASM records to which the values are mapped, and the
datasheet captions of the fields that are populated automatically.
Note: The datasheet captions can be seen by opening the records in the Record Manager.
Values Mapped to the Asset Strategy Record

Datasheet
Source RBI
Caption of Asset
Datasheet Caption of Source RBI Field
Record
Strategy Field
Strategy ID
Asset Name
RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Component
Asset
This will vary. Rather than mapping the value in a specific

field in the source Equipment record, the Record ID of the
Equipment record is used as the default value in the Asset
Name field in the Asset Strategy record.
Values Mapped to the Active Strategy Record
Datasheet Caption of Active Strategy Field: Strategy ID

Source RBI Record: RBI Criticality Analysis
Datasheet Caption of Source RBI Field: Component
Values Mapped to the Proposed Strategy Record
Datasheet Caption of Active Strategy Field: Strategy ID

Source RBI Record: RBI Criticality Analysis
Datasheet Caption of Source RBI Field: Component
Values Mapped to Risk Records

Datasheet
Caption of Risk
Field
Source RBI
Record
Risk ID
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Component
None
Risk Rank
Financial Risk
Name
RBI Degradation On the datasheet, the source value appears at the

Mechanisms
intersection of the Unmitigated Risk row and the
Strategy Risk Rank column.
None
Mechanisms
intersection of the Unmitigated Financial Risk row
and the Strategy Risk Rank column.
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
-and-
-and-
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Criticality Item Description
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Description
-and-
-and-
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Criticality Item Description
Failure Mode
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Failure Cause
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Note the following details about the information provided in this table:
The value in the Risk ID field is set to <Component> - R00n, where

<Component> is the value in the Component field in the source RBI Criticality
Analysis record, and n is a three-digit numeric value indicating the number of
Risk records or Risk Assessment records that are linked to the Asset Strategy
record. If you are creating Risk record 1 through 9, the three-digit number begins
with 00. For example, the first Risk record's Risk ID would be <Component>R001. If you are creating Risk record 10 through 99, the three-digit number
begins with 0 (i.e., zero). For example, the 15th Risk record's Risk ID would be
<Component>-R015. Note that if you have promoted an Equipment to ASM
multiple times, causing a Risk or Risk Assessment record to be updated, n will be
incremented according to the number of updates that have occurred.
The Name and Description field in each Risk record is populated with a
concatenated value that is constructed using the following syntax: <Criticality
Item Description> - <Degradation Mechanism>, where <Criticality Item
Description> is the value in the Criticality Item Description field in the source
RBI Criticality Analysis record and <Degradation Mechanism> is the value in
the Degradation Mechanism field in the source RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record.
Values Mapped to Risk Assessment Records

Datasheet Caption of
Source RBI
Risk Assessment
Record
Field
None
Risk Rank
Financial Risk

Mechanisms
intersection of the Mitigated Risk row and the
Strategy Risk Rank column.
None
Mechanisms
intersection of the Mitigated Financial Risk row
and the Strategy Risk Rank column.
Values Mapped to Risk Rank Records

Field Caption
Source RBI
of Risk Rank
Record
Field

None
Risk
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
The source values that are mapped to the Risk field in

Risk Rank records come from the values that appear on
the Risk Matrix that is accessible from the RBI
This mapping is best understood through an example.
Suppose you access the Risk Matrix from the Brittle
Fracture RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, and the
unmitigated risk on the Safety tab is 10. In this case, if
you open the Risk Rank records that are linked to the Risk
Assessment record to which the Brittle Fracture Risk
record is linked, the Risk Rank record with the value
Safety in the Category field will contain the value 10 in
the Risk field.
Remember that you can use the Risk Matrix to assess
unmitigated risk only if the Risk Assessment Enabled
check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks page. In
addition, keep in mind that the unmitigated risk values are
calculated automatically. You can override them only if
the Allow Override of Calculated Unmitigated Risk
Values check box is selected on the Administrative Tasks
page.
None
The source values that are mapped to the Production Loss
field in Risk Rank records come from the values that
appear on the Risk Matrix that is accessible from the RBI
Production
Loss
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms

Production Loss on the Financial tab is 100. In this case,
if you query the Risk Rank records that are linked to the
Risk Assessment record to which the Brittle Fracture Risk
Financial in the Category field will contain the value 100
in the Production Loss field.
page.
None
Maintenance
Cost
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
The source values that are mapped to the Maintenance

Cost field in Risk Rank records come from the values that
appear on the Risk Matrix that is accessible from the RBI
Maintenance Cost on the Financial tab is 100. In this case,
if you query the Risk Rank records that are linked to the
Risk Assessment record to which the Brittle Fracture Risk
Financial in the Category field will contain the value 100
in the Maintenance Cost field.

page.
Values Mapped to Action Records

Datasheet Caption of Target
ASM Field
Source RBI Record
Datasheet Caption of Source

RBI Field
Action ID
RBI Criticality
Analysis
Component
Action Type
RBI Recommendation Action Type
Cost
RBI Recommendation Estimated Cost
Cost Basis
RBI Recommendation Estimated Cost Basis

Recommended Inspection Scope
RBI Recommendation
Description
-ANDRecommendation
-ANDRecommendation Basis
Interval
RBI Recommendation RBI Recommendation
Name
Nonrecurring
RBI Recommendation Task Type

NonRecurring?
RBI Recommendation
Shutdown Required
Shutdown Required
Shutdown Required
Target Completion Date
RBI Recommendation Target Completion Date
Note that the value in the Action ID field is set to <Component> - A00n, where
<Component> is the value in the Component field in the source RBI Criticality Analysis
record, and n is a three-digit numeric value indicating the number of Action records that
are linked to the Asset Strategy record. If you are creating Action record 1 through 9, the
three-digit number begins with 00. For example, the first Action record's Action ID would
be <Component>-A001. If you are creating Action record 10 through 99, the three-digit
number begins with 0. For example, the 15th Action record's Action ID would be
<Component>-A015. Note that if you have promoted an Equipment to ASM multiple
times, causing an Action record to be updated, n will be incremented according to the
number of updates that have occurred.
Hard-Coded Values
When you promote an Equipment record to ASM, some values in the ASM records are
hard-coded to be populated with a default value that is different from the standard default
value for these values. The fields and their default values are listed in the following table.
ASM Record
Datasheet Caption
Default Value
Asset Strategy
Description
This strategy was

automatically
generated from RBI
Active Strategy
Description
This strategy was

automatically
generated from RBI
Proposed Strategy
Description
This strategy was

automatically
generated from RBI
Risk
Risk Basis
Risk Based
Inspection
Risk
Source
RBI Analysis
Recommendation
Interval Units
Months
Recommendation
Action Basis
RBI Recommendation
In addition, if you promote an Equipment record that is associated with an RBI

Degradation Mechanisms record that is not linked to an RBI Recommendation record, for
the Risk record that is created from that RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, the
Strategy Mitigated Risk Rank in ASM will be set to the value in the Unmitigated Risk
Rank field in the Risk record.
Managing Asset Strategies that Were

Created from RBI
After an Asset Strategy has been created from RBI, you can manage the Asset Strategy
using ASM. Some restrictions will apply to the Asset Strategy, however, depending upon
how the administrative settings are configured. The following subsections indicate which
actions are always allowed, which are always restricted, and which are allowed only if
the appropriate administrative settings are configured.
Always Allowed
The following actions are always allowed for Asset Strategies that were created from
RBI:
Creating new Risks.

Assigning new Actions to Risks that did not originate in RBI.
Managing Asset Strategy states.
In the Risk Analysis, clearing the Selected Actions check box for any Action that
did not originate in RBI.
Assigning new Actions to any Risk that originated in RBI.
Assigning existing Actions that did not originate in RBI to any Risk that did
originate in RBI.
Assigning new Risks to any Action that originated in RBI.
Assigning existing Risks that did not originate in RBI to any Action that did
originate in RBI.
Always Restricted
The following actions are always restricted for Asset Strategies that were created from
RBI:
Risk Records
Undoing a Risk that was created from RBI.

Removing a Risk that was created from RBI.
Assigning Actions that originated in RBI to a Risk that originated in RBI.
For any Risk that was created from RBI, modifying values in the following fields
on the Risk datasheet (listed in the order in which they appear on the datasheet,
from top to bottom):
Name
Description
Risk Basis
Failure Mode
Maintainable Item
Failure Cause
Modifying the unmitigated risk rank or unmitigated financial risk rank for any
Risk that was created from RBI.
Action Records
Removing an Action that was created from RBI.

Assigning Risks that originated in RBI to an Action that originated in RBI.
For any Action that was created from RBI, modifying values in the following
fields on the Action datasheet (listed in the order in which they appear on the
datasheet, from top to bottom):
o
Action Basis
Name
Action Type
Interval
Interval Units
Nonrecurring
Cost
Shutdown Required
Cost Basis
Modifying the mitigated risk rank for any Action that was created from RBI.
In the Risk Analysis, clearing the Selected Actions check box for an Action that
was created from RBI.
General
Applying an Asset Strategy Template as a master template to the Asset Strategy
Allowed Depending Upon Administrative Settings

The following table describes actions that are allowed for Asset Strategies that were
created from RBI and the corresponding administrative setting that allows it.
Action
Opening the Risk Matrix to view the

unmitigated risk rank for any Risk that was
created from RBI.
Opening the Risk Matrix to view the

mitigated risk rank for any Action that was
created from RBI.
Corresponding Administrative Option

This action is allowed only if the Risk
Assessment Enabled check box is selected.
If the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is
cleared and you click the hyperlinked
unmitigated risk rank, a message appears,
indicating that you need to view the
unmitigated risk values in RBI (i.e., using the
Degradation Mechanism datasheet).
If the Risk Assessment Enabled check box is
cleared and you click the hyperlinked
mitigated risk rank, a message appears,
indicating that you need to view the

unmitigated risk values in RBI (i.e., using the
Degradation Mechanism datasheet).
Copying a Risk that was created from RBI.

Unlinking a driving RBI Recommendation

record from an Action.
This action is allowed if the Recommendation

Creation Enabled check box is cleared.
Linking a new Recommendation record to an This action is allowed if the Recommendation

Action that was created from RBI.
Clearing the Drives Action check box for an
This action is allowed if the Recommendation
RBI Recommendation record that was used to
create an Action.
About TM Analysis Values and RBI

Analyses
You can specify that TML Corrosion Analysis values in a TM Analysis be used to
calculate corrosion rate values that are populated in records that are created when you
create RBI Criticality Analysis records.
Note: This functionality is not available for RBI PRD Analyses.
The workflow for using TM Analysis values to calculate RBI corrosion rate values is as
follows:
1. In TM, create a TM Analysis for the Equipment record that you will also analyze
in RBI. The TM Analysis should contain enough data to allow for Long Term
Corrosion Rate and Short Term Corrosion Rate values to be calculated for the
piece of equipment and the TMLs on the piece of equipment.
For example, a TM Analysis has been created for the Equipment record D0003-097 ~
000000000001056788 VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~ Miscellaneous Vessel
FIX MIS VES. The following image shows the TM Explorer pane that is displayed in the
TM module for this Equipment record.
2. In RBI, create one or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records for the
Equipment record.
For example, the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records D0003-097-CS-2
D0003-097 ~ 000000000001056788 ~ VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~
Miscellaneous Vessel ~ FIX VES MIS and D0003-097-CS-1 D0003-097 ~
000000000001056788 ~ VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~ Miscellaneous Vessel ~
FIX VES MIS have been created for the Equipment record. The following image shows
the RBI Explorer pane that is displayed in the RBI module for this Equipment record.
3. In RBI, link a Potential Degradation Mechanism record that contains the value
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Degradation Mechanism field to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records for which you want to specify
that TM Analysis values be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
For example, a Potential Degradation Mechanism record that contains the value
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Degradation Mechanism field has been
linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record D0003-097-CS-2 D0003-097
~ 000000000001056788 ~ VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~ Miscellaneous Vessel
~ FIX VES MIS. In the following image, a red outline has been added to the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms tab of the RBI Asset View page to highlight this Potential
Degradation Mechanism record.
4. In RBI, specify for which Active Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
that TM Analysis values should be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values and
at what level the TM Analysis values should be used.
5. Create RBI Criticality Analysis records for the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records for which you specified that TM Analysis value should be
used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
Note: In addition to being a member of either the MI RBI Administrator or MI RBI
Analyst Security Group, the user who completes steps 2 through 5 must also be a member
of at least one Thickness Monitoring Security Group. These groups include the MI
Thickness Monitoring Administrator, MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector, and MI
Thickness Monitoring User Security Groups.
When you create an RBI Analysis for an RBI Component for which you specified that
TM Analysis values be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values (step 5), the following
things happen:
A Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval record is created automatically.
-and
Calculations are performed on the TML Corrosion Analysis values from the
corresponding TM Analysis to populate the following fields in the Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval record:
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate
These values are displayed on the Input Fields tab of the Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval.
datasheet. In the following image, these fields are outlined in red.
Determining the Level at Which TM

Analysis Values are Used to Calculate
RBI Corrosion Rates
You can specify that TML Corrosion Analysis values in TM Analyses be used to calculate
corrosion rate values that are used in RBI at the:
Equipment level.
TML Group level.
For example, suppose that the Equipment record that you are analyzing in TM and RBI
represents a shell and tube heat exchanger. The shell and tube heat exchanger has two
subcomponents, the shell side and the tube side, each with its own process flow. Since the
corrosion environments of these subcomponents will differ, you have created the
following TML Group records (in the TM module):
TML Group - Shell Side

TML Group - Tube Side
When you first begin analysis on the shell and tube heat exchanger, you are not sure what
the TM corrosion data will show, (i.e., whether TML Group - Shell Side or TML Group Tube Side will have more aggressive corrosion). As a result, you may want to specify in
RBI that TM Analysis values at the equipment level be used to calculate RBI corrosion
rate values.
Continuing with this example, as you analyze the shell and tube heat exchanger in TM,
you notice that a subset of the TMLs on the shell side near the nozzle have very high
corrosion rates. At this point, you create a third TML Group record, TML Group - Shell
Nozzle to represent this subcomponent, and you move the Thickness Measurement
Location records associated with this subcomponent from TML Group - Shell Side to
TML Group - Shell Nozzle. As a result, you may want to now specify in RBI that TM
Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rates.
Specifically, you want to specify that the TML Corrosion Analysis value associated with
TML Group - Shell Nozzle be used to calculate RBI corrosion rates.
Using TM Analysis Values at the

Equipment Level
When you specify that TM Analysis values at the equipment level be used to calculate
RBI corrosion rate values, the RBI corrosion rate values are determined based upon the
average of the Long Term Corrosion Rate and Short Term Corrosion Rate values in all
the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to the Equipment record in the TM Analysis.
Note: TMLs for which the Long Term Corrosion Rate or Short Term Corrosion rate has
not been calculated will be excluded from the calculations that determine RBI Corrosion
rate values.
For example, consider an Equipment record that is linked to five Thickness Measurement
Location records for which five TML Corrosion Analysis records exist with the following
Long Term Corrosion Rate and Short Term Corrosion Rate values.
TML Corrosion Analysis record Long Term Corrosion Rate Short Term Corrosion Rate
1.003 MILS/year
1
1.001 MILS/year
1.003 MILS/year
1.003 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
None
When you create an RBI Analysis for the RBI Component that corresponds with this
piece of equipment, if you specified that TM Analysis values at the equipment level be
used to determine RBI corrosion rate values, the value in the:
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate field in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval
record that is created automatically is calculated as follows:
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.001 + 1.003 + 1.001 + 1 + 1.001) / 5
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (5.006) / 5
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate = 1.0012
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate field in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval
record that is created automatically is calculated as follows:
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.003 + 1.003 + 1.001 + 1.001) / 4
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (4.008) / 4
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate = 1.002
Using TM Analysis Values at the TML

Group Level
Note: The following information assumes that you are using the RBI module to complete
this workflow. Alternatively, you can also use the Thickness Monitoring module to
identify the TML Group records whose TML Corrosion Analysis values you want to use
to calculate RBI corrosion rates.
When you specify that TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate
RBI corrosion rate values, the RBI corrosion rate values are determined based upon the
average of the Long Term Corrosion Rate and Short Term Corrosion Rate values in the
TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to one or more TML Group records that
are linked to the Equipment record that is being analyzed in TM and RBI. The TML
Group records whose TML Corrosion Analysis values are used are determined by your
selections on the Link to TML Groups dialog box.
While you can specify that RBI Corrosion Rate values be determined by one or more
TML Group records by linking the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to one
or more TML Group record, a TML Group record can be linked to only one Criticality
Note: TMLs for which the Long Term Corrosion Rate or Short Term Corrosion rate has
not been calculated will be excluded from the calculations that determine RBI Corrosion
rate values.
For example, consider an Equipment record that is linked to three TML Group records
whose Thickness Measurement Location records are each linked to five TML Corrosion
Analysis records with the following Long Term Corrosion Rate and Short Term
Corrosion Rate values:
TML Group 1
1.006 MILS/year
1
1.005 MILS/year
1.003 MILS/year
1.003 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
1.006 MILS/year
1 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
None
TML Group 2
1.004 MILS/year
1
1.004 MILS/year
1.008 MILS/year
1.008 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
None
1 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
1.006 MILS/year
TML Group 3
None
1
1.002 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
1.003 MILS/year
1.005 MILS/year
1.006 MILS/year
1 MILS/year
1.001 MILS/year
1.002 MILS/year
1.004 MILS/year
When you create an RBI Analysis for the RBI Component that corresponds with this
piece of equipment, if you specified that TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be
used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values, and you specified that the TML Corrosion
Analysis values associated with TML Group 1 be used, the value in the:
record that is created automatically would be calculated as follows:
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.005 + 1.003 + 1.005 + 1 + 1.005) / 5

Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.006 + 1.003 + 1.006 + 1.001) / 4
You can specify that TML Corrosion Analysis values from more than one TML Group be
used to calculate RBI corrosion rates. Continuing with the previous example, if you
specified that the TML Corrosion Analysis values associated with TML Group 1 and
TML Group 3 be used to determine RBI corrosion rate values, the value in the:
Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.005 + 1.003 + 1.005 + 1 + 1.005 + 1.002 + 1.003 +
1.005 + 1 + 1.002) / 10
Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate = (1.006 + 1.003 + 1.006 + 1.001 + 1.005 + 1.006 +
1.001 + 1.004) / 8
Specifying That TM Analysis Values Be

Used to Calculate RBI Corrosion Rates
If the TM module is active and you have TM Analyses for pieces of equipment that you
analyze using RBI, you can specify that TML Corrosion Analysis values in a TM
Analysis be used to calculate corrosion rate values that are used in RBI.
Specifically, you must specify for which RBI Components that TML Corrosion Analysis
values should be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values and at what level the values
should be used. You can specify that TML Corrosion Analysis values be used to calculate
RBI corrosion rates for Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are in the
Active state only. You cannot specify that values be used to calculate RBI corrosion rates
for Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are in the Inactive state.
The following instructions assume that you understand how TM Analysis values are used
to determine RBI corrosion rates values, and that you have completed the steps necessary
to use TM Analysis values to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
To specify for which Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that TM Analysis
values should be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values and at what level the TM
Analysis values should be used:
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you want to specify that
TM Analysis values be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
RBI Components record for which you want to specify that TM Analysis values
be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values. In the following image, the node
representing the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record D0003-097-CS-2
D0003-097 ~ 000000000001056788 ~ VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~
Miscellaneous Vessel ~ FIX VES MIS is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
3. In the datasheet area, select the Corrosion Data tab of the datasheet that is
displayed for the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. The following
image shows an example of the Corrosion Data tab of the RBI Comp - Cylindrical
Shell datasheet.
4. In the list in the Source of Calculated Corrosion Rates cell, select one of the
following values, depending upon the level at which you want TM Analysis
values to be used to calculate RBI corrosion rates:
o Asset: RBI corrosion rate values will be calculated based upon TM
Analysis values at the equipment level.
o
Manual Entry: RBI corrosion rate values will be entered manually. This
value is selected by default.
Component: RBI corrosion rate values will be calculated based upon TM

Analysis values at the TML Group level. If you select this value and your
TM Analysis does not contain TML Group records, an error message will
appear when you try to access the Link to TML Groups dialog box,
indicating that the TM Analysis does not contain subcomponent records.
5. Click the
button on the toolbar at the top of the datasheet area. If you
selected Component in the list in the Source of Calculated Corrosion Rates cell,
specify the TML Group records whose associated TML Corrosion Analysis values
you want to use to calculate RBI corrosion rate values. If you selected a value
other than Component in the list in the Source of Calculated Corrosion Rates cell,
proceed to step 6.
6. Specify any additional inputs to your RBI Analysis as desired, and create an RBI
Analysis for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The values in the Short Term Avg. Corr. Rate and Long Term Avg. Corr. Rate fields in the
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval record that is created automatically when you
create the RBI Analysis are calculated or not calculated, based upon your selection in the
list in the Source of Calculated Corrosion Rates cell. If you selected:
5.
o
Asset, the values are calculated based upon values at the equipment level
in the corresponding TM Analysis.
Manual Entry, the values are not calculated based upon values in the
corresponding TM Analysis. You must enter these values manually.
Component, the values are calculated based upon values at the TML
Group level in the corresponding TM Analysis. Specifically, the values
associated with the TML Group records that you selected on the Link to
TML Groups dialog box are used to calculate the values in these fields.
Specifying TML Group Records

When you specify that TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate
RBI corrosion rates, you must select the TML Group records whose associated TML
Corrosion Analysis values should be used. More than one TML Group record's TML
Corrosion Analysis values can be used The following instructions assume that you have
specified that TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI
corrosion rates.
To select the TML Group records whose associated TML Corrosion Analysis values
should be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values:
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you have specified that
TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion
rate values.
RBI Components record for which you want TML Corrosion Analysis values to
be used in calculating RBI corrosion rates.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Link to TML Groups link.
The Link to TML Groups dialog box is displayed.
4. In the grid, select the check box in the rows representing the TML Group records
whose associated TML Corrosion Analysis values you want to use to calculate
RBI corrosion rate values. In the following image, the TML Group record with
the Record ID TMLGRP-64252384987 - Tube is selected.
5. Click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the RBI Asset View page returns to focus.
The TML Group records that you selected are linked to the associated Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record through the Mapped to RBI Component relationship,
where the TML Group family is the predecessor.
When you create an RBI Analysis for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record, the values in the following fields in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval
record that is created automatically are calculated based upon the TML Corrosion
Analysis values associated with the TML Group records that you selected:
9.
About the Link to TML Groups Dialog

Box
The Link to TML Groups dialog box is used when you specify that TM Analysis values at
the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
The Link to TML Groups dialog box contains the Select TM Component to Link to RBI
Component <Record ID> grid, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record for which you accessed the dialog box. One row is
displayed in the grid for each TML Group record that is linked the Equipment record
associated with the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you accessed
the dialog box.
The grid displays the following columns of information:
TM Component ID: Displays the Record ID of the TML Group records that are
linked to the Equipment record that is associated with the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record for which you accessed the dialog box.
TM Component Description: Displays the value in the Description field in the
TML Group records that are linked to the Equipment record that is associated
with the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you accessed
the Link to TML Groups dialog box.
Linked to RBI Component: Displays the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record that is linked to the TML Group record represented by
that row. When you select a check box to the left of the TM Component ID
column for a row, the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator Components record
for which you accessed the dialog box is populated in the Linked to RBI
Component cell in that row.
The first column in the grid is unlabeled and contains check boxes that are used for
selecting rows in the grid that represent the TML Group records whose TML Corrosion
Analysis values you want to use to calculate RBI corrosion rate values.
The following buttons are displayed below the grid:
OK: Closes the dialog box and retains any selections that you made.
Cancel: Closes the dialog box and does not retain any selections that you made.
About Creating RBI Recommendations

from RBI Analyses
After you calculate an analysis, you might want to recommend that some action be taken
to reduce the calculated risk. These recommendations are stored in RBI Recommendation
records. RBI Recommendation records can be created:
Manually.
Automatically by the Meridium APM system using the Inspection Strategy or

Strategy Logic Case records that exist in the database. RBI Recommendation
records can be created automatically for one main RBI Analysis, or all the main
RBI Analyses that are linked to a given Equipment record.
-or-
Note that you can create these RBI Recommendation records only if the following
conditions are true:
The analysis is a main RBI Analysis.

You are viewing an RBI Criticality Analysis record that is set to Risk Completed
and that is linked to at least one RBI Degradation Mechanisms record.
The Recommendation Creation Enabled check box on the Administrative Tasks

page is selected.
In some cases, you might want to create RBI Recommendation records before you move
the associated RBI Criticality Analysis record to the Risk Completed state. For example,
suppose that your organization defines an RBI Analysis approval process during which
you must review the associated RBI Recommendation records and potentially make
changes to the RBI Analysis. In this case, making changes to the RBI Analysis during
that process, which you cannot do when the RBI Criticality Analysis record is in the Risk
Completed state, may be more desirable than recreating the RBI Analysis (and associated
RBI Recommendation records) at a later time in order to make those changes.
You can create RBI Recommendation records while an RBI Criticality Analysis record is
in the Created state only when the Enable Recommendations to be Generated at Created
State setting is enabled on the Administrative Tasks page. Additionally, when this option
is selected, you cannot generate RBI Recommendation records for an RBI Criticality
Analysis record in the Risk Completed state.
The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will not create RBI
Recommendation records while the associated RBI Criticality Analysis record is in the
Created state. As a result, this documentation assumes that you will only create RBI
Recommendation records for RBI Analyses whose associated RBI Criticality Analysis
record is in the Risk Completed state, and therefore, no additional details are provided
about the workflow for creating RBI Recommendations records for an RBI Criticality
Analysis record that is in the Created state.
Note: You can also create RBI Recommendation records from Inspection Groups.
Creating RBI Recommendations

Manually
Note: The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will create RBI
Recommendation records manually using the following instructions. If instead you
decide to create an RBI Recommendation record via the Recommendation Management
page, links will not be created between the RBI Recommendation record and the RBI
Criticality Analysis or RBI Degradation Mechanisms records.
You can create RBI Recommendation records manually only while viewing an RBI
Criticality Analysis record that is in the Risk Completed state.
To create an RBI Recommendation record manually:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the RBI Analysis for which you want to
create an RBI Recommendation record.
Select the desired RBI Analysis node in the RBI Explorer pane, as shown in the following
image.
2. On the Recommendation Tasks menu, click the Create Recommendation link.

The Recommendation Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.
3. Click the Next button.

The Select Degradation Mechanism screen appears.
4. In the Degradation Mechanism list, select the degradation mechanism that can be
prevented if this recommendation is implemented. The list contains the values that
are stored in the Degradation Mechanism field in all RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records that are linked to the selected RBI Criticality Analysis
record.
The Recommendation Datasheet screen appears.

7. Click the Finish button.
The RBI Recommendation record is created and displayed on the Degradation
Mechanisms tab below the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record to which it is linked. In
the following image, the new RBI Recommendation record is selected.
About Generating RBI

Recommendations Automatically
The Meridium APM database includes a set of baseline Inspection Strategy records that
are used to generate RBI Recommendation records. In other words, RBI
Recommendation records that you create are populated automatically with values that are
stored in the Inspection Strategy records. Before you can generate RBI Recommendations
using Inspection Strategy records, you must:
Import the Policy records provided by Meridium, Inc.
-and
Ensure that the following settings are enabled on the Administrative Tasks page:
Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager
After you have completed these steps, when RBI Recommendation records are generated
automatically from RBI Analyses, the Meridium APM system uses the following
components to select a Policy record and define the logic used by the Policy record to
select an Inspection Strategy record whose values will be used to populate the RBI
Recommendation record:
One RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration record: Identifies the degradation

mechanism (i.e., the value in the Degradation Mechanism field in the associated
RBI Degradation Mechanisms record) for which a particular Policy record will be
used to generate RBI Recommendation records.
Multiple RBI Strategy Mapping Details records: Identifies the fields in RBI
records that will be used as inputs to the Policy record that is defined in the RBI
Strategy Mapping Configuration record to which the RBI Strategy Mapping
Details record is linked.
One query that is stored in the Catalog location \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk
Based Inspection\Queries\Policy Queries: Identifies the criticality item types (i.e.,
the value in the Criticality Item Type field in the associated RBI Criticality
Analysis record) that will be used to select the Policy record that will be used to
select the Inspection Strategy record.
Throughout this documentation, the term RBI Strategy Mapping Group is used to refer to
these components that together define the Policy record logic that is used to generate an
RBI Recommendation record automatically from an RBI Analysis.
Note: The records and queries used in this process are provided by Meridium, Inc. and
delivered to the baseline Meridium APM database.
The families that are used by RBI Strategy Mapping Group functionality are illustrated in
the following image, where boxes represent the RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration and
RBI Strategy Mapping Details entity families, and the arrow represents the Has RBI
Strategy Configuration relationship family.
RBI Recommendation records can be generated automatically by the Meridium APM

system for:
One main RBI Analysis.

All main RBI Analyses that are associated with a single Equipment record.
All main RBI Analyses that are associated with ALL Equipment records that are
represented on the RBI Asset View page.
Additionally, you can generate RBI Recommendation records automatically based on

Inspection Group data. For more details about this functionality, consult the section of
documentation regarding Inspection Groups.
Generating RBI Recommendations

Automatically for a Single RBI Analysis
If the RBI Asset View page displays an Equipment node that is associated with only ONE
main RBI Analysis, you may want to generate RBI Recommendations automatically for
this main RBI Analysis. If, however, the Equipment node is associated with more than
one main RBI Analysis, you may want to generate RBI Recommendation records for
ALL the main RBI Analyses that are associated with that Equipment node. The following
instructions explain how to generate RBI Recommendation records for one main RBI
Analysis.
To generate an RBI Recommendation records automatically for one main RBI Analysis:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment record that is associated with
the RBI Analysis for which you want to generate RBI Recommendation records.
2. Select the RBI Analysis node in the RBI Explorer pane. In the following image,
the node representing the RBI Criticality Analysis record RBI-6425612676 is
3. On the Recommendation Tasks menu, click the Generate Recommendations link.

If the RBI Criticality Analysis record is already linked to one or more RBI
Recommendation records, a message appears, indicating that new RBI Recommendation
will be generated, which might cause the same information to be stored in multiple RBI
Recommendation records. The message asks if you want the Meridium APM system to
continue generating RBI Recommendation records.
If you click No, the Meridium APM system will not generate RBI Recommendation
records for the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
The RBI Recommendation records are generated automatically, and a confirmation
message appears, indicating the status of the automatic generation process. On the
Degradation Mechanisms tab, the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records are collapsed
automatically. To see the new RBI Recommendation records that were generated
automatically, you will need to expand the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records to
which they are linked. In the following image, two new RBI Recommendation records
that were generated automatically are outlined in red.

Automatically for Multiple RBI
Analyses Associated with a Single Piece
of Equipment
If the RBI Asset View page displays an Equipment node that is associated with more than
one main RBI Analysis, you may want to generate RBI Recommendations automatically
for ALL the main RBI Analyses that are associated with that Equipment node.
To generate RBI Recommendation records automatically for all the main RBI Analyses
that are associated with a single Equipment node:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment record that is associated with
the RBI Analyses for which you want to generate RBI Recommendation records.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the Equipment node. In the following image, the
node representing the Equipment record D0003-097 ~000000000001056788 ~
VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~ Miscellaneous Vessel ~ FIX VES MIS is
The Generate Recommendations dialog box appears, indicating that generating RBI
Recommendation records for the selected Equipment record may take a few minutes. The
message asks if you want the Meridium APM system to continue generating RBI
Recommendation records. Additionally, the Consolidate recommendations for each
Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box is selected by default.
4. If you:
o
Want to consolidate the RBI Recommendation records that will be

generated automatically, accept the default selection in the Consolidate
recommendations for each Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box.
Do not want to consolidate the RBI Recommendation records that will be

generated automatically, clear the Consolidate recommendations for each
Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box.
5. On the Generate Recommendations dialog box, click OK.

If any of the RBI Criticality Analysis records are already linked to one or more RBI
Recommendation records, the Create Recommendations dialog box appears, indicating
that new RBI Recommendation will be generated, which might cause the same
information to be stored in multiple RBI Recommendation records. The message asks if
you want the Meridium APM system to continue generating RBI Recommendation
records.
If you click No, the Meridium APM system will not generate RBI Recommendation
records for the RBI Criticality Analysis records.
The Recommendation Generation dialog box appears, displaying the status of the
automatic generation.
7. Click the Close button.

Hint: If you want to save the results of the generation to an external Text file, click the
Save Log button.
The RBI Recommendation records are generated. For each RBI Analysis that is
associated with the selected Equipment record, on the Degradation Mechanisms tab, the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms records are collapsed automatically. To see the new RBI
Recommendation records that were generated automatically, you will need to expand the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms record to which it is linked. Red outlines have been added
to the following image to highlight the RBI Recommendation records with the following
Recommendation IDs were generated automatically for the main RBI Analysis D0003097-CS-2 ~ Column-Top ~ 2/9/2011:
REC - 825
REC - 826
REC - 827

Automatically for Multiple RBI
Analyses Associated with Multiple
Equipment
If the RBI Asset View page displays more than one Equipment node, you can generate
RBI Recommendations automatically for ALL the main RBI Analyses that are associated
with ALL those nodes.
To generate RBI Recommendation records automatically for all the main RBI Analyses
that are associated with ALL Equipment records:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page for the Equipment records that are associated
with the RBI Analyses for which you want to generate RBI Recommendation
records.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select an Equipment node. In the following image, the
node representing the Equipment record A0002-117 ~ MIXER - TANK 709 ~
000000000001071110 is selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
The Generate Recommendations dialog box appears.
The Generate recommendations for all assets check box is not selected by default. The
Consolidate recommendations for each Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box IS
selected by default.
4. Select the Generate recommendations for all assets check box.
The message indicates that generating RBI Recommendation records for all the
Equipment records may take a few minutes and asks if you want the Meridium APM
system to continue generating RBI Recommendation records.
5. If you:
Want to consolidate the RBI Recommendation records that will be

generated automatically, accept the default selection in the Consolidate
recommendations for each Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box.
Do not want to consolidate the RBI Recommendation records that will be

generated automatically, clear the Consolidate recommendations for each
Damage Mechanism and Task Type check box.
6. On the Generate Recommendations dialog box, click OK.

If any of the RBI Criticality Analysis records are already linked to one or more RBI
Recommendation records, the Create Recommendations dialog box appears, indicating
that new RBI Recommendation will be generated, which might cause the same
information to be stored in multiple RBI Recommendation records. The message asks if
you want the Meridium APM system to continue generating RBI Recommendation
records.
If you click the No button, the Meridium APM system will not generate RBI
Recommendation records for the RBI Criticality Analysis records.
The Recommendation Generation dialog box appears, displaying the status of the
automatic generation.

Hint: If you want to save the results of the generation to an external Text file, click the
Save Log button.
The RBI Recommendation records are generated. For each RBI Analysis that is
associated with the selected Equipment node, on the Degradation Mechanisms tab, the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms records are collapsed automatically. To see the new RBI
Recommendation records that were generated automatically, you must expand the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record to which it is linked. A red outline has been added to the
following image to highlight the RBI Recommendation records with the following
Recommendation IDs that were generated automatically for the main RBI Analysis
EOO11A-097-ET1 ~Air Cooled Exchanger-Tbs ~2/9/2011.
Accessing Existing RBI

Recommendations for RBI Analyses
This topic provides instructions on how to access RBI Recommendation records that are
associated with RBI Analyses. For details about how to access RBI Recommendation
records that are associated with Inspection Groups, see that section of the documentation.
To access existing RBI Recommendation records that are associated with an RBI
Analysis:
1. Access the RBI Asset View page so that the RBI Explorer pane displays the node
representing the Equipment record whose RBI Recommendation records you
want to view. The following image shows the Equipment node ~UPPER OIL
COOLER FOR C-303 ~ HXST 109 selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
2. On the Recommendation Tasks menu, click the Review Recommendations link.

The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the Recommendation
records that are linked to the Equipment record that is associated with the item that was
displayed in the RBI Explorer pane.
From the Recommendation Management page, you can manage the states of the RBI
Recommendation records and create Task records or SAP Notifications.
About Inspection Groups

The American Petroleum Institute specifications state that you can group pieces of
equipment that require inspection based upon certain criteria and then perform
inspections for a subset of the equipment in the group rather than for every piece of
equipment in the group. The RBI module facilitates this workflow by allowing you to
create and manage Inspection Groups.
Keeping in mind that an RBI Component represents a group of components that share the
same degradation mechanisms and belong to the same equipment, an Inspection Group
represents a collection of RBI Components belonging to more than one piece of
equipment within the same unit that are similar in such a way that inspections performed
on the piece of equipment associated with one RBI Component will satisfy the inspection
requirements for the pieces of equipment associated with other RBI Components in the
same group.
In addition to sharing a unit, RBI Components that make up an Inspection Group must
also have the same:
Equipment Type
Corrosion Type
Risk Category
In the baseline Meridium APM database, an Inspection Group is represented by an Asset

Group record and its related Grouping Element records. Specifically, each Inspection
Group consists of the following records:
One Asset Group record that stores information about the attributes that are shared
by all RBI Components (e.g., Equipment Type) included in the Inspection Group.
Multiple Grouping Element records that store information about the RBI
Components included in the Inspection Group. Specifically, each Inspection
Group will consist of:
o
One or more Grouping Element records that store information about the
RBI Components whose associated equipment requires inspection.
Additionally, inspections on these pieces of equipment satisfy the
inspection requirements of other pieces of equipment in the same
Inspection Group. Throughout this documentation, we refer to these RBI
Components as Representative RBI Components.
One or more Grouping Element records that store information about the
RBI Components and associated equipment whose inspection
requirements are satisfied by the inspection of the piece of equipment that
is associated with a Representative RBI Component. Throughout this
documentation, we refer to these RBI Components as Represented RBI
Components.
When you create an Inspection Group, the Meridium APM system uses certain criteria to
determine which RBI Components will be included in the Inspection Group, and the
necessary Asset Group record and Grouping Element records are created automatically.
After the Inspection Group has been created, the Meridium APM system then classifies
each Grouping Element record as identifying a Representative or Represented RBI
Component.
This concept is illustrated in the following image, which shows a portion of the RBI data
model. In the following image, the boxes represent entity families, and the arrows
represent relationship families.
The following steps provide the general workflow for using Inspection Group
functionality:
1. Create Inspection Groups.
2. Manage Inspection Groups.
3. Generate RBI Recommendation records from Inspection Groups.
4. Generate Represented Inspections.
Consider the following details about creating and working with Inspection Groups:
Before you create an Inspection Group:

o An RBI Criticality Analysis record that is set to the Risk Completed state
must be linked to each RBI Component included in the Inspection Group.
o
You should review the Inspection Priority Ranges on the Administrative

Tasks page. You can modify these, as desired.
To perform step 4 in this workflow, the Inspection Management license must be

active.
You cannot create Inspection Groups for RBI Components that are linked to RBI
PRD Criticality Analysis records.
Representative vs. Represented RBI

Components
Grouping Element records store information about the RBI Components included in an
Inspection Group. Each Grouping Element record identifies one of the following types of
RBI Components:
Representative RBI Component: RBI Components for which you must perform an
inspection on the associated piece of equipment in order to meet the inspection
requirements that are defined by American Petroleum Institute specifications.
Grouping Element records that are classified as Representative RBI Components
meet the following criteria:
The Selected for Inspection field in the Grouping Element record contains
the value True.
The Grouping Element record is linked to at least one other Grouping

Element record and is the predecessor in the Represents Inspections
relationship definition.
Represented RBI Component: RBI Components whose inspection requirements

(defined by American Petroleum Institute specifications) will be satisfied by the
inspection of the piece of equipment that is associated with a Representative RBI
Component in the Inspection Group. Grouping Element records that are classified
as Represented RBI Components meet the following criteria:
the value False.
The Grouping Element record is linked to one other Grouping Element

record and is the successor in the Represents Inspections relationship
definition.
Additionally, an Inspection Group may contain Grouping Element records whose

Selected for Inspection field is set to True but for which there can be no Represented
Inspections, meaning that there is no relationship between these Grouping Element
records and other Grouping Element records. In this case, inspections are required on the
associated pieces of equipment, but those inspection cannot satisfy the inspection
requirements of other pieces of equipment in the Inspection Group.
How is Equipment Type Determined?

In addition to sharing a Corrosion Type, Risk Category, unit, and additional criteria, in
order for RBI Components to be in the same Inspection Group, they must also have the
same Equipment Type. The Equipment Type of an RBI Component identifies the type of
equipment that is associated with the RBI Component and corresponds with the value in
the Component Type field in the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record.
Not every Component Type value in Criticality Calculator RBI Components records is
associated with an Equipment Type for which an Inspection Group can be created. The
following table lists the Equipment Types for which you can create Inspection Groups
and the Component Type values that correspond to each Equipment Type.
Equipment
Type
Piping
Corresponding Component Type

values
Any value that includes the word
Pipe
Any of the following values:
1
Vessels
o
o
Air Cooled ExchangerHeader

Column-Bottom
Tanks
Column-Middle
Column-Top
Filter
Heat Exchanger-Shell
Pressure Vessel
Reactor
Storage Tank
1. The following Component Type values include the word Pipe: 1/2" Pipe, 3/4" Pipe,
1" Pipe, 1.25" Pipe, 1.5" Pipe, 2" Pipe, 2.5" Pipe, 3" Pipe, 4" Pipe, 5" Pipe, 6" Pipe, 8"
Pipe, 10" Pipe, 12" Pipe, 14" Pipe, 16" Pipe, 18" Pipe, 20" Pipe, 24" Pipe, 26" Pipe, 28"
Pipe, 60" Pipe, 90" Pipe, or102" Pipe.
The Equipment Type is stored in the Grouping Equipment Type field in the Asset Group
record that belongs to the Inspection Group.
How is Corrosion Type Determined?

In addition to sharing an Equipment Type, Risk Category, unit, and additional criteria, in
same Corrosion Type. The following table lists the Corrosion Types for which you can
create Inspection Groups and the RBI Degradation Mechanisms records and additional
criteria that corresponds to each Corrosion Type.
Corrosion Type
Corrosion Under
Insulation (CUI)
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record
Additional Criteria
The Insulated? field in the associated

Criticality Calculator Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
External Corrosion
contains the value True.

The Susceptible to CUI field in the associated
RBI Criticality Analysis record contains the
value Yes.
Internal Corrosion
(ICPC)
None
Internal Corrosion
The Corrosion Type that is associated with an Inspection Group is stored in the Corrosion
Type field in the Asset Group record that belongs to that Inspection Group.
How is Risk Category Determined?

In addition to sharing an Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, unit, and additional criteria, in
same Risk Category. The Risk Category for an RBI Component is determined using:
The value that is stored in the Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) field in the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to the associated Criticality
-and
The Inspection Priority Ranges that are defined on the Administrative Tasks
page.
RBI Components may be assigned one of the following Risk Categories:
High
Medium High
Medium
Low
The Risk Category that is associated with an Inspection Group is stored in the Risk
Category field in the Asset Group record that belongs to that Inspection Group.
Accessing the Find Inspection Groups

Page
You can use the Find Inspection Groups page to create a new Inspection Group or
identify the existing Inspection Group that you want to work with on the Inspection
Group Details page.
To access the Find Inspection Groups page:
On the RBI Start Page, click the Manage Inspection Groups link.
The Find Inspection Groups page appears.
At this point, you can create a new Inspection Group or run the Manage Inspection
Groups query to identify the existing Inspection Group that you want to work with on the
Inspection Group Details page.
Aspects of the Find Inspection Groups

Page
The Find Inspection Groups page contains the Find Inspection Groups workspace that
you can use to run the Manage Inspection Groups query to identify the Inspection Group
that you want to work with on the Inspection Group Details page. The following image
shows an example of the Find Inspection Groups page when the Manage Inspection
Groups query has been run.
The Find Inspection Groups workspace contains the following lists that correspond with
prompts in the Manage Inspection Groups query:
Unit: Contains all Functional Location records in your database that represent
units.
Corrosion Type: Contains the values Corrosion Under Insulation and Internal
Corrosion, which correspond with the Corrosion Types for which you can create
Inspection Groups.
Grouping Equipment Type: Contains the values Piping, Vessels, and Tanks and
Tank Bottoms, which correspond with the Equipment Types for which you can
create Inspection Groups.
Risk Category: Contains the values High, Medium High, High, and Low, which
correspond with the Risk Categories for which you can create Inspection Groups.
The following buttons appear to the right of the lists in the Find Inspection Groups
workspace:
Run Query: Runs the Manage Inspection Groups query based on the values that
you have specified in the query prompts described above.
Stop: Terminates the query process.
A grid appears below the lists in the Find Inspection Groups workspace that displays the
results of the Manage Inspection Groups query. One row is displayed in the grid for each
Asset Group record returned by the query. The following columns are displayed in the
grid, which correspond with fields in the Asset Group record that is associated with the
Inspection Group:
Name
Description
Unit
Corrosion Type
Grouping Equipment Type
Risk Category
Note that:
The Current State column does not correspond with a field in the Asset Group
record. Rather, this column is displayed to help you identify Inspection Groups by
their current state.
The values in the Name column appear as hyperlinks that you can click to access
the Inspection Group Details page for a particular Inspection Group.
The Find Inspection Groups page contains the following task menus: Inspection Group
and Common Tasks.
Running the Manage Inspection Groups

Query
You can run the Manage Inspection Groups query via the Find Inspection Groups page to
identify the Inspection Group that you want to work with on the Inspection Group
Details page. The following instructions assume that you have accessed the Find
Inspection Groups page.
To run the Manage Inspection Groups query:
1. In the Find Inspection Groups workspace, select values that correspond with
Inspection Group that you want to access in the following lists:
o
Unit
Corrosion Type
Risk Category
Note: The values contained in the Corrosion Type, Grouping Equipment Type, and Risk
Category lists are stored in System Code Tables used by RBI.
The Manage Inspection Groups query is run, and the results of the query are displayed in
the grid that appears below the lists in the Find Inspection Groups workspace. You can
click the hyperlink in the Name column for any Asset Group record that appears in the
results grid to access the associated Inspection Group on the Inspection Group Details
page.
Inspection Group
The Inspection Group menu on the Find Inspection Groups page contains the following
link:
Create: Displays the Create Inspection Group dialog box, which you can use to
create Inspection Groups via the Find Inspection Groups page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Find Inspection Groups page contains the following
links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows a preview of the query results
as they will appear on the printed page. From the Preview window, you can select
print options and print the query results. This link is enabled when at least one
Asset Group record appears in the query results grid.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Find Inspection Groups
page.
Accessing the Inspection Group Details

Page
You can access the Inspection Group Details page to view the details of the Inspection
Groups that exist for a given unit.
To access the Inspection Group Details page:
On the Find Inspection Groups page, in the Name column in the grid in the Find
Inspection Groups workspace, click the hyperlinked Record ID of the Asset
Group record that is associated with the Inspection Group whose details you want
to view on the Inspection Group Details page.
The Inspection Group Details page appears.
The Record ID of the Asset Group record that you selected on the Find Inspection
Groups page is selected in the Inspection Groups pane, and data that is stored in the
records that make up the Inspection Group appear on the Inspection Group Details tab.
Note: If the Asset Group record that you selected in the results grid on the Find
Inspection Groups page is excluded from the Inspection Groups pane based upon your
filtering criteria, a message will be displayed, indicating that the Inspection Group will
not appear on the Inspection Group Details page. In this case, the Record ID of the Asset
Group record that appears at the top of the Inspection Groups pane will be selected by
default.
Aspects of the Inspection Group Details

Page
The Inspection Group Details page displays information that is stored in the records that
make up existing Inspection Groups. The page contains the following items:
Inspection Groups pane: Displays the Record ID of each Asset Group record that
is associated with each Inspection Group for the unit for which you accessed the
Inspection Group Details page. At the bottom of this pane, the Filters link
appears, which can be used to access the Manage Filters window.
Inspection Group Details tab: Displays a grid that contains values in the
Grouping Element records that are linked to the Asset Group record whose
Record ID is selected in the Inspection Groups pane.
Inspection Group Definition tab: Displays the datasheet for the Asset Group
record whose Record ID is selected in the Inspection Groups pane.
The Inspection Group Details page contains the following task menus: Inspection Group
and Common Tasks.
About the Inspection Groups Pane

The Inspection Groups pane displays the Record IDs of all of the Asset Group records
that are:
Associated with the Inspection Groups for the unit for which you accessed the
-and
Not excluded by a filter.
Throughout this documentation, we refer to the Record IDs displayed in the Inspection
Groups pane as the Inspection Groups list. The following image shows an example of
the Inspection Groups pane that appears on the Inspection Group Details page.
The icon to the left of each item in the Inspection Groups list indicates the state of the
Asset Group record associated with the Inspection Group. By default, the items in the
Inspection Groups list are sorted in the following order:
Corrosion Type, where Inspection Groups with the Corrosion Type Corrosion
Under Insulation appear first, followed by Inspection Groups with the Corrosion
Type Internal Corrosion.
Equipment Type, where Inspection Groups are displayed in the following order
according to Equipment Type: Piping, Vessels, Tanks.
Risk Category, where Inspection Groups are displayed in the following order
according to Risk Category: High, Medium High, Medium, Low.
State, where Inspection Groups are displayed in the following order according to
their current state: Proposed, Not Implemented, Implemented, Archived.
Creation Date, where Inspection Groups are displayed, in descending order, based
upon the value in the Creation Date field in the associated Asset Group record.
At the top of the Inspection Groups pane, the

hide the Inspection Groups pane.
button appears, which can be used to
At the bottom of the Inspection Groups pane, the Filters link appears, which you can use
to hide Inspection Groups. When filters have been applied to the Inspection Groups pane,
additional items appear at the bottom of this pane, as shown in the following image. A red
outline has been added to this image to highlight these items.
The following additional items appear when filters are applied:
A box containing the filters that are currently applied.
The
The Clear All link, which clears all of the filters that are currently applied.
button, which clears only the filter to the right of this button.
Hiding the Inspection Groups Pane

To hide the Inspection Groups pane:
In the Inspection Groups pane, click the
button.
The Inspection Groups pane collapses, and a vertical tab, Inspection Groups, appears as
shown in the following image. A red outline has been added to the image to highlight this
tab.
After you have hidden the Inspection Groups pane, you can redisplay it.
Viewing the Inspection Groups Pane

When it is Hidden
While the Inspection Groups pane is hidden, if you need to select a different Record ID in
the pane, you can view the pane.
To view the Inspection Groups pane when it is hidden:
1. Point to and pause on the vertical Inspection Groups tab. This tab is outlined in
red in the following image.
The Inspection Groups list expands. If you move your pointer off the Inspection Groups
pane, the pane will collapse again.
2. To lock the pane back into the display position, in the upper, right corner of the
Inspection Groups pane, click the
button.
The Inspection Groups list is locked into the display position.
Accessing the Manage Filters Window

You can access the Manage Filters window to specify the filter that you want to apply to
the Inspection Groups pane.
To access the Manage Filters window:
At the bottom of the Inspection Groups pane, click the Filters link.
The Manage Filters window appears.
Aspects of the Manage Filters Window

You can use the Manage Filters window to create, modify, delete, apply, or clear filters.
The Manage Filters window contains the following grids:
Standard Filters: Displays one row for each filter that is delivered to the
baseline Meridium APM database that you can apply to the Inspection
Groups list.
Custom Filters: Displays one row for each custom filter that you create and apply
to the Inspection Groups pane.
Creating Custom Filters

You can create a custom filter and apply it to the Inspection Groups pane to determine the
Inspection Groups that will appear in the Inspection Groups pane.
To create a custom filter:
1. Access the Manage Filters window.
2. In the Custom Filters grid, in the first empty row, select the following values:
1. In the Field cell, click the
button, and select the field that applies to
the filter that you want to create. The list displays all fields in the Asset
Group family.
2. In the Operator cell, click the
button, and select the operator that you
want to apply to the selected field.
3. In the Value cell, type or select the value to which the selected operator
should be applied.
For example, to show only those Inspection Groups whose associated Asset Group record
contains the value Low in the Risk Category field, you would define the following
custom filter.
3. Click OK.
The Manage Filters window closes, the Inspection Group Details page returns to focus,
and the custom filter is applied automatically to the Inspection Groups pane.
Applying Filters to the Inspection

Groups Pane
You can apply filters to the Inspection Groups pane to define which items will appear in
the pane. For example, if you apply the filter Hide CUI Inspection Groups, the Inspection
Groups with the Corrosion Type Corrosion Under Insulation will be removed from the
Inspection Groups pane.
To apply one or more filters to the Inspection Groups pane:
1. Access the Manage Filters window.
The Manage Filters window appears.
2. In the Standard Filters grid or the Custom Filters grid, in the row containing the
filter that you want to apply to the Inspection Groups pane, select the Apply check
box. For example, in the preceding image, the Hide CUI Inspection Groups filter
is selected in the Standard Filters grid.
3. Click OK.
The Manage Filters window closes, and the Inspection Group Details page returns to
focus. The Inspection Groups pane is refreshed to display only the Inspection Groups that
meet the filter criteria. In addition:
o
The Inspection Group Details tab is updated to display information only

for the Inspection Groups that are displayed in the Inspection Groups
pane.
A box appears at the bottom of the Inspection Groups pane that lists the
filters that are currently applied.
A new link, Clear All, appears, which you can use to clear the filters that
are currently applied.
Clearing Filters
You can clear the filters that you have applied to the Inspection Groups pane one at a time
or all at once using the instructions in this topic. The following instructions assume that
you are viewing the Inspection Group Details page.
To clear a single filter:
At the bottom of the Inspection Groups pane, in the list of filters, click the
button that appears to the left of the filter that you want to clear.
The Inspection Groups pane is refreshed to display the Inspection Groups that were
previously hidden by the filter.
To clear all filters:
At the bottom of the Inspection Groups pane, click the Clear All link.
The Inspection Groups pane is refreshed to display the Inspection Groups that were
previously hidden by the filters.
Inspection Group Details Tab

The Inspection Group Details tab contains a grid that displays values in the Grouping
Element records that are associated with the Inspection Group item that is selected in the
Inspection Groups pane. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight
this tab.
The grid displays the following columns that display values in the Grouping Element
records:
Asset
Component
Inspection Priority
Selected for Inspection
Excluded from Group
The grid also contains the Representative Asset column, which displays the Record ID of
the Equipment record that is associated with the RBI Component defined as the
Representative RBI Component.
You can use this tab to modify proposed Inspection Groups.
Inspection Group Definition Tab

The Inspection Group Definition tab displays the datasheet for the Asset Group record
that is associated with the Inspection Group item that is selected in the Inspection Groups
pane. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight this tab.
All of the fields on the datasheet are read-only unless the selected Asset Group record is
in the Proposed state. When the selected Asset Group record is in the Proposed state, you
can modify the value in the Description cell on the datasheet.
Inspection Group
The Inspection Group menu on the Inspection Group Details page contains the following
links:
Create: Displays the Create Inspection Group dialog box, which you can use to
create Inspection Groups via the Inspection Group Details page.
Refresh: Prompts the Meridium APM system to reevaluate the RBI Components
that are included in the Inspection Group whose node is selected in the Inspection
Groups pane. If the system needs to make any changes to the Grouping Element
records associated with the Inspection Group based upon how you have modified
the Inspection Group, it will do so at this time. This link is enabled only when you
have made changes to the Inspection Group using the Inspection Group Details
tab.
Save: Saves your changes to the Inspection Group whose node is selected in the
Inspection Groups pane. This link is enabled only when you have made changes
to the Inspection Group using the Inspection Group Details tab.
Review Recommendations for Asset: Displays the Recommendation Management

page, where you can review RBI Recommendation records that are linked to the
Equipment record that is associated with the Inspection Group selected in the grid
on the Inspection Group Details tab.
View Report: Displays the Report Viewer page, where you can view and manage
the Inspection Group Report for the Inspection Group that is selected in the
Inspection Groups pane.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Group Details page contains the following
links:
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Group Details
page.
About Creating Inspection Groups

After certain criteria are met, you can create Inspection Groups using the Create
Inspection Group dialog box that can be accessed via the Find Inspection Groups page or
the Inspection Group Details page. The page from which you access the Create
Inspection Group dialog will depend on your workflow and whether or not Inspection
Groups already exist for the unit for which you want to create an Inspection Group. If one
or more existing Inspection Groups:
Are not associated with the unit, you must use the Find Inspection Groups page to
create Inspection Groups for the unit.
Are associated with the unit, you can use the Find Inspection Groups page or the
Inspection Group Details page to create additional Inspection Groups for the unit.
Note: When you create a new Inspection Group that has the same unit, Equipment Type,
Corrosion Type, and Risk Category as an existing proposed Inspection Group, the
existing Inspection Group will be deleted automatically.
Accessing the Create Inspection Group

Dialog Box
You can access the Create Inspection Group dialog box to create Inspection Groups via
the Find Inspection Groups page and the Inspection Group Details page.
To access the Create Inspection Group dialog box:
On the Find Inspection Groups or Inspection Group Details page, on the

Inspection Group menu, click the Create link.
The Create Inspection Group dialog box is displayed.

The following image shows an example of what the Create Inspection Group dialog box
looks like when you access it via the Find Inspection Groups page.
The following image shows an example of what the Create Inspection Group dialog box
looks like when you access it via the Inspection Group Details page.
Note that when you access the Create Inspection Group dialog box via the Inspection
Group Details page, the Unit text box contains the Record ID of the Functional Location
record representing the unit for which you accessed the Inspection Group Details page.
About the Create Inspection Group

Dialog Box
You can use the Create Inspection Group dialog box to:
Create new Inspection Groups via the Find Inspection Groups page.
Create additional Inspection Groups for a unit via the Inspection Group Details
page.
-or-
The following image shows an example of the Create Inspection Group dialog box when
it is accessed from the Find Inspection Groups page.
The Create Inspection Group dialog box displays the following items:
Unit box: Displays the Record ID of the unit for which you are creating a new
Inspection Group. To the right of this text box, the
button appears, which you
can click to access the Find Unit window. This button is enabled only when you
access the dialog box via the Find Inspection Groups page. This box is empty
when you access the dialog box via the Find Inspection Groups page until you
specify a unit via the Find Unit window.
Corrosion Type list: Displays the Corrosion Types for which you can create
Inspection Groups (i.e., Corrosion Under Insulation and Internal Corrosion). Both
Corrosion Types are selected by default.
Grouping Equipment Type: Displays the Equipment Types for which you can
create Inspection Groups (i.e., Piping, Vessels, and Tanks and Tank Bottoms). All
Equipment Types are selected by default.
The following buttons are displayed at the bottom of the Create Inspection Group dialog
box:
OK: Creates new Inspection Groups based upon the criteria that you have
specified.
Cancel: Closes the Create Inspection Group dialog box.
Help: Displays the context sensitive Help topic for the Create Inspection Group
dialog box.
Creating New Inspection Groups via the

Find Inspection Groups Page
The following instructions assume that you have accessed the Create Inspection Group
dialog box from the Find Inspection Groups page. You can also create additional
Inspection Groups for a unit if you have accessed this dialog box from the Inspection
Group Details page.
To create new Inspection Groups via the Find Inspection Groups page:
1. On the Create Inspection Group dialog box, in the Unit cell, click the
button.
The Find Unit window appears.
The results of the Select Unit for Grouping query are displayed in the Select a Unit grid
on the Find Unit window.
2. Select the row containing the unit for which you want to create new Inspection
Groups, and click the Select button.
The Find Unit window closes, and the Create Inspection Group dialog box returns to
focus.
3. In the Corrosion Type list, select the Corrosion Types for which you want to
create Inspection Groups.
In the following image, both Corrosion Types are selected in the list (i.e., the default
selection).
4. In the Grouping Equipment Type list, select the Corrosion Types for which you
want to create Inspection Groups.
In the following image, all Equipment Types are selected in the list (i.e., the default
selection).
5. Click OK.
One of the following dialog boxes appears:
o
Inspection Grouping Status: Appears when there are no existing

Inspection Groups whose Asset Group record is in a Proposed state and for
which the unit, Corrosion Type, Equipment Type, and Risk Category are
the same as one that you are trying to create. This dialog box indicates the
progress of the Inspection Group creation process.
Confirm Update: Appears when there is an existing Inspection Group

whose Asset Group record is in a Proposed state and for which the unit,
Corrosion Type, Equipment Type, and Risk Category are the same as one
that you are trying to create. The message on this dialog box asks if you
want to continue. Note that if you choose to continue, the existing
Inspection Groups that meet this criteria will be replaced automatically
with the Inspection Groups that you create.
When you click the Yes button on the Confirm Update dialog box, the Inspection
Grouping Status dialog box appears.
Assuming that your records meet the criteria for creating Inspection Groups, the
Inspection Grouping Status dialog box closes, and the Inspection Group Details page
appears, displaying the Inspection Groups that you created in the Inspection Groups pane.
One Asset Group record and multiple Grouping Element records are created
automatically for each Inspection Group that was created.
Creating Additional Inspection Groups

for a Unit
The following instructions assume that have accessed the Create Inspection Group dialog
box from the Inspection Group Details page and that you want to create additional
Inspection Groups for the unit whose Inspection Groups that you are working with on the
Inspection Group Details page. You can also create new Inspection Groups via the Find
Inspection Groups page if you have accessed this dialog box from that page.
To create additional Inspection Groups for a unit:
1. On the Create Inspection Group dialog box, in the Corrosion Type list, select the
Corrosion Types for which you want to create Inspection Groups.
In the following image, both Corrosion Types are selected in the list (i.e., the default
selection).
2. In the Grouping Equipment Type list, select the Equipment Type for which you
want to create Inspection Groups.
In the following image, all of the Equipment Types are selected in the list (i.e., the default
selection).
3. Click OK.
One of the following dialog boxes appears:
o
Inspection Grouping Status: Appears when there are no existing

Inspection Groups whose Asset Group record is in a Proposed state and for
which the unit, Corrosion Type, Equipment Type, and Risk Category are
the same as one that you are trying to create. This dialog box indicates the
progress of the Inspection Group creation process.
Confirm Update: Appears when there is an existing Inspection Group

whose Asset Group record is in a Proposed state and for which the Unit,
Corrosion Type, Equipment Type, and Risk Category are the same as one
that you are trying to create. The message on this dialog box asks if you
want to continue. Note that if you choose to continue, the existing
Inspection Groups that meet this criteria will be replaced automatically
with the Inspection Groups that you create.
When you click the Yes button on the Confirm Update dialog box, the Inspection
Grouping Status dialog box appears.
Assuming that your records meet the criteria for creating Inspection Groups, the
Inspection Grouping Status dialog box closes, and the Inspection Group Details page
returns to focus, displaying the Inspection Groups that you created in the Inspection
Groups pane. One Asset Group record and multiple Grouping Element records are
created automatically for each Inspection Group that was created.
About Managing Inspection Groups

You can perform the following functions via the Inspection Group Details page in the
following ways:
Modify existing Inspection Groups.

Refresh existing Inspection Groups.
Implement existing Inspection Groups.
Reevaluate Inspection Groups.
Run the Inspection Group Report.
About Modifying Existing Inspection

Groups
It might be necessary to make changes to Inspection Groups based upon knowledge that
is not captured in your Meridium APM database. For example, your organization might
have policies that dictate a certain inspection schedule for some pieces of equipment for
which unique circumstances exist. In this case, you might want to modify values in the
Grouping Element records in the Inspection Group to ensure that those policies remain
consistent with your inspection practices.
You can modify Inspection Groups by:
Excluding an RBI Component from an Inspection Group.

Specifying that additional RBI Components require inspection.
Excluding an RBI Component from an

Inspection Group
In some cases, it might be necessary to exclude an RBI Component from an Inspection
Group. For instance, if your organizational policy dictates that the piece of equipment
associated with a particular RBI Component must always be inspected, you would not
want to include it in an Inspection Group where its inspection requirements can be
satisfied by the inspection of another piece of equipment. Rather, you might want to
exclude this RBI Component from the Inspection Group so that RBI Recommendation
records would not be generated on its behalf.
Note that when you exclude an RBI Component from an Inspection Group that has been
classified as a Representative RBI Component, you will need to refresh the Inspection
Group. This allows the system to reevaluate the representative and Represented RBI
Component classifications in the Inspection Group to determine whether or not any
changes need to be made to the Inspection Group. This is necessary because the number
of Representative RBI Components that are selected for an Inspection Group is based on
a percentage of the total number of RBI Components that are included in an Inspection
Group. In other words, refreshing the Inspection Group ensures that the number of
Representative RBI Components remains consistent with the ratio between the number of
RBI Components and those selected for inspection by the Meridium APM system.
The following instructions assume that you have accessed the Inspection Group Details
page.
To exclude an RBI Component from an Inspection Group:
1. In the Inspection Groups pane, select the Inspection Group that is associated with
the RBI Component that you want to exclude from the Inspection Group.
2. In the grid on the Inspection Group Details tab, select the row containing the
Grouping Element record representing the RBI Component that you want to
exclude from the Inspection Group.
3. Select the Excluded from Group check box.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each Grouping Element record whose associated RBI
Component you want to exclude from the Inspection Group.
5. On the Inspection Group menu, click the Refresh link.
If necessary, the Meridium APM system makes changes to other Grouping Element
records in the group (e.g., defines new Representative RBI Components).
6. On the Inspection Group menu, click the Save link.
Your changes are saved to the database.
Specifying that Additional RBI

Components Require Inspection
When you evaluate the Representative and Represented RBI Components in an
Inspection Group, you might decide that certain RBI Components that the Meridium
APM system designated as a Represented RBI Component should instead be inspected.
For example, if your organization has decided to execute an inspection schedule that
requires that Equipment A be inspected, you would not want inspections performed on
Equipment B to satisfy the inspection requirements of Equipment A.
Note the following details about specifying that additional RBI Components require
inspection:
These RBI Components will not be considered Representative RBI Components

by the Meridium APM system. In other words, the associated pieces of equipment
will be inspected, but their inspections will not satisfy the inspection requirements
for any other pieces of equipment.
You cannot specify an additional RBI Component as requiring inspection in
either of the following circumstances:
o
-or-
When all of the following conditions are true:
The value in the Risk Category field in the associated Asset Group
record is High.
The value in the Corrosion Type field in the associated Asset

Group record is Internal Corrosion.
The value in the Grouping Element Type field in the associated

Asset Group record is Piping.
The value in the Thinning Type field in the RBI Degradation

Mechanism Evaluation record that is associated with the Asset
Group record is Localized or Pitting.
When both of the following conditions are true:

The value in the Risk Category field in the associated Asset Group
record is Low.
The value in the Corrosion Type field in the associated Asset

Group record is Corrosion Under Insulation.
These restrictions maintain the integrity of the criteria by which the Meridium APM
system groups RBI Components and selects certain RBI Components for inspection.
The following instructions assume that you have accessed the Inspection Group Details
page.
To specify additional RBI Components as requiring inspection:
1. In the Inspection Groups pane, select the Inspection Group whose Grouping
Element record is associated with the additional RBI Component for which you
want to require inspection.
2. On the Inspection Group Details tab, select the row containing the Grouping
Element record representing the additional RBI Component for which you want to
require inspection.
3. Select the Selected for Inspection check box.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each Grouping Element record whose RBI
Component you want to specify as requiring inspection.
Your changes are saved to the database.
Refreshing Inspection Groups

Every time you exclude one or more RBI Components from an Inspection Group or clear
the Selected for Inspection check box for any RBI Component displayed in the grid on
the Inspection Group Details tab you must refresh the Inspection Group in order for the
Meridium APM system to reevaluate the RBI Components that are included in the
Inspection Group. Specifically, when you refresh and save an Inspection Group, the RBI
Components are reclassified as either representative or Represented RBI Components
based upon the changes that you make to the RBI Components in the Inspection Group,
and the associated Grouping Element records are updated to reflect these changes.
Note that you can refresh an Inspection Group only when it is in the Proposed state and
you have made changes that require a reevaluation of the Representative and Represented
RBI Components (e.g., you exclude an RBI Component from the Inspection Group).
When the Inspection Group is in any state other than Proposed, changes cannot be made
to the Inspection Group, but you can regroup the Inspection Group.
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection Group Details
page.
To refresh an Inspection Group:
1. In the Inspection Groups pane, select the Inspection Group requiring refresh.
2. On the Inspection Group menu, click the Refresh link.
The Inspection Group is refreshed and any necessary updates are made to the associated
Grouping Element records.
About Implementing Inspection Groups

When you first create an Inspection Group, its associated Asset Group record is assigned
to the Proposed state by default. From this state, you can implement the Inspection Group
(i.e., transition the Asset Group record that is associated with the Inspection Group from
the Proposed state to the Implemented state) if you want to generate RBI
Recommendation records from the Inspection Group. When you implement an Inspection
Group, you are indicating that you have reviewed the Inspection Group, you are satisfied
with the representative and Represented RBI Component classifications for the
Inspection Group, and you want to generate RBI Recommendation records based upon
those classifications.
Alternatively, if you have reviewed the Inspection Group and you do not want to generate
RBI Recommendation records based upon the classifications of Represented and
Representative RBI Components for the Inspection Group, you might not implement the
Inspection Group. In this case, you would transition the Asset Group record that is
associated with the Inspection Group from the Proposed state to the Not Implemented
state.
Throughout this documentation, the term implemented Inspection Group is used to refer
to an Inspection Group whose associated Asset Group record is set to the Implemented
state. The term unimplemented Inspection Group is used to refer to an Inspection Group
whose associated Asset Group record is set to the Not Implemented state. Note that
implemented and unimplemented Inspection Groups cannot be modified in the same way
that proposed Inspection Groups can be modified. Additionally, when you set an Asset
Group record to either the Implemented or Not Implemented state, any existing
implemented or unimplemented Inspection Group with the same unit, Equipment Type,
Corrosion Type, and Risk Category will be archived automatically.
In order to implement an Inspection Group, the following conditions must be met:
The Recommendation Creation Enabled check box is selected on the

If you are implementing an Inspection Group whose Risk Category is Low, the
Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion. In other words, you cannot implement an
Inspection Group whose Risk Category is Low and Corrosion Type is Corrosion
Under Insulation.
The Policy and Inspection Strategy records necessary to create Recommendation
records for Inspection Groups exist in you database.
Implementing Inspection Groups

The following instructions assume that the Inspection Group that you want to implement
meets the criteria for setting an Asset Group record to the Implemented state.
Additionally, these instructions assume that this Inspection Group is selected in the
Inspection Groups pane on the Inspection Group Details page.
To implement an Inspection Group:
Above the tabs on the Inspection Group Details page, click the Operations link,
and then click the Implement option.
The Asset Group record associated with the Inspection Group is set to the Implemented
state, and the appropriate RBI Recommendation records are created automatically by the
Meridium APM system.
About Creating RBI Recommendations

from Inspection Groups
RBI Recommendation records are created automatically by Meridium APM when you
implement an Inspection Group. Note that these records are created at a different point in
the RBI workflow than the RBI Recommendation records that you create based upon the
results of an RBI Analysis. However, these two sets of RBI Recommendation records are
similar in several ways. For instance, in both cases:
Inspection Strategy and Strategy Logic Case records that are delivered to the
baseline Meridium APM database are used to create the RBI Recommendation
records automatically.
You can create Task records or SAP Notifications via Recommendation
Management after the RBI Recommendation records exist.
Certain values are mapped to the RBI Recommendation records.
Similar to the way other RBI Recommendation records are generated by the Meridium
APM system, values in the Asset Group and Grouping Element records that are
associated with the implemented Inspection Group determine which Policy record will be
used to generate the RBI Recommendation records. Based on the output of the Policy, the
Meridium APM system will select an Inspection Strategy record whose values will be
mapped to the RBI Recommendation record. For RBI Recommendation records that are
generated from Inspection Groups, however, certain Inspection Strategy records
containing certain values will indicate that no action should be taken on behalf of the RBI
Component that is associated with the RBI Recommendation record. You can think about
RBI Recommendation records generated from Inspection Groups as being divided into
the following two categories:
RBI Recommendation records for which you will perform an action: For these
RBI Recommendation records, you will execute some action related to the piece
of equipment that is associated with the RBI Recommendation record (e.g., create
an Inspection Task record). This type of RBI Recommendation record is generated
for an Equipment record that is associated with an RBI Component included in an
Inspection Group whose Grouping Element record contains the value True in the
Selected for Inspection field.
RBI Recommendation records for which you will not perform an action: For these
RBI Recommendation records, you will not execute any action related to the
piece of equipment that is associated with the RBI Recommendation record (e.g.,
you will not create an Inspection Task record). In this case, the RBI
Recommendation record is generated for an Equipment record that is associated

with an RBI Component included in an Inspection Group whose Grouping
Element record identifies a Represented RBI Component. In this case, the
assumption is that you will instead execute some action related to the piece of
equipment that is associated with the RBI Recommendation record that was
created for the Representative RBI Component.
RBI Recommendation records for which you will not perform an action are generated
when Inspection Strategy values listed in the following table are mapped to the RBI
When the Inspection ...This value is mapped from the

...to this field in the RBI
Group's Corrosion
Recommended Inspection Scope field
Recommendation record:
Type is:
in the Inspection Strategy record
Corrosion Under
Insulation
No CUI Inspection Required.
Recommended Inspection
Scope
Internal Corrosion
No Internal Corrosion Inspection

Required.
Recommended Inspection
Scope
Note: RBI Recommendation records will not be created for Inspection Groups whose
Risk Category is Low and Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation because these
Inspection Groups cannot be implemented.
Accessing Existing RBI

Recommendations for Inspection
Groups
This topic provides instructions on how to access RBI Recommendation records that are
created from Inspection Groups. For details about how to access RBI Recommendation
records that are created from RBI Analyses, see that section of the documentation.
To access existing RBI Recommendation records that are created from an Inspection
Group:
1. Access the Inspection Group Details page.

2. In the Inspection Groups pane, select the Inspection Group item that is associated
with the Equipment record whose RBI Recommendation records you want to
view. The following image shows the Inspection Group item RBIT-UNITB~ICPC~PIPING~HIGH selected in the Inspection Groups pane.
3. On the Inspection Group menu, click the Review Recommendations for Asset
link.
The Recommendation Management page appears, displaying the RBI Recommendation
records that are linked to the Equipment record that is associated with the Inspection
Group.
Archiving Inspection Groups

When an Inspection Group is archived, the Asset Group record that is associated with the
Inspection Group is set to the Archived state. This process is executed automatically by
the Meridium APM system for existing implemented or unimplemented Inspection
Groups when the Asset Group record associated with another Inspection Group with the
same unit, Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, and Risk Category is transitioned to
Implemented or Not Implemented. When an Inspection Group is archived, RBI
Recommendation records that are associated with the Inspection Group are set to the
Archived state automatically.
About Reevaluating Inspection Groups

Because the data that you monitor using RBI can fluctuate, and because Inspection
Groups are created based upon that data, you may need to reevaluate your Inspection
Groups periodically. The workflow for reevaluating Inspection Groups is the same as
creating new Inspection Groups. When you create new Inspection Groups, the Meridium
APM system will evaluate all of the RBI Components that meet the Inspection Group
criteria and create new Inspection Groups, if necessary, based upon the data in RBI
records in your database.
To understand this concept, consider that all RBI Components in an Inspection Group
must have the same:
Unit
Equipment Type
Corrosion Type
Risk Category
While the first three items in this list (i.e., Unit, Equipment Type, and Corrosion Type)
will likely stay the same for a given RBI Component, the Risk Category associated with
an RBI Component may change over time. For instance, if you create and calculate a new
RBI Analysis for the RBI Component, and the Inspection Priority associated with the new
RBI Analysis is different from the Inspection Priority that is associated with the existing
RBI Analysis, then the Risk Category that is associated with the RBI Component may
also change.
Keeping in mind that you can create Inspection Groups only for RBI Components whose
RBI Criticality Analysis record is in the Risk Completed state, when you set the new RBI
Criticality Analysis record to the Risk Completed state, the Inspection Group that
includes the associated RBI Component may need to be reevaluated in order to update the
Representative and Represented RBI Component classifications and ensure that the
pieces of equipment that are specified as selected for inspection are consistent with the
current risk that is associated with those pieces of equipment.
The Meridium APM system indicates that the Risk Category for an RBI Component has
changed using the following fields in the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
CUI Inspection Priority Changed: Indicates that the Risk Category has changed
for an RBI Component that is included in an Inspection Group whose Corrosion
Type is Corrosion Under Insulation. When the value in this field is set to True, the
RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is associated with the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record contains:
o The value Criticality Calculator External Corrosion in the Degradation
Mechanism field.
-ando
A value in the Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) field that is different

from the value in this same field in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record that is associated with the most recently calculated, existing RBI
Analysis.
Int. Corr. Inspection Priority Changed: Indicates that the Risk Category has
changed for an RBI Component that is included in an Inspection Group whose
Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion. When the value in this field is set to True,
the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is associated with the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record contains:
o
The value Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Degradation

Mechanism field.
A value in the Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) field that is different

from the value in this same field in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record that is associated with the most recently calculated, existing RBI
Analysis.
-and-
Additionally, these values are set to True only when the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record is associated with a unit for which implemented or unimplemented
Inspection Groups exist.
Information regarding the number of RBI Components for which the value in the field is
set to True is available in the Inspection Group Monitor section that is displayed on the
Mechanical Integrity dashboard. You can use the data displayed in this section to
determine when you should reevaluate your Inspection Groups.
Determining If Inspection Groups

Should be Reevaluated
You can use the data that is displayed in the Inspection Group Monitor section on the
Mechanical Integrity dashboard to determine if you should reevaluate your implemented
and unimplemented Inspection Groups. The following image shows an example of the
Inspection Group Monitor section as it appears on the Mechanical Integrity dashboard by
default.
This section displays the percentage of RBI Components whose CUI Inspection Priority
Changed or Int. Corr. Inspection Priority Changed value is set to True (i.e., the Inspection
Priority for that RBI Component has changed), based on:
The Equipment Type that is associated with the RBI Component.
-and
The Corrosion Type that is associated with RBI Component.
Remember that when the Inspection Priority for an RBI Component has changed, it
indicates that the Risk Category associated with that RBI Component might have
changed as well. While the Inspection Group Monitor section on the Mechanical Integrity
dashboard provides information that you may use to determine if Inspection Groups
should be reevaluated, Meridium, Inc. assumes that your organization will define the
actual thresholds at which you reevaluate Inspection Groups. For example, consider the
first measure that is displayed in the Inspection Group Monitor section.
This measure indicates that the Inspection Priority has changed for four percent of RBI
Components that meet the following criteria:
The Equipment Type of the RBI Component is Piping.

The Corrosion Type of the RBI Component is Corrosion Under Insulation.
If your organization's policy dictates that reevaluation must occur if the Inspection
Priority has changed for five percent of RBI Components, you will not reevaluate your
Inspection Groups at this time. If, however, your organization's policy dictates that
reevaluation must occur if the inspection Priority has changed for three percent of RBI
Components, you should reevaluate the Inspection Groups including the RBI
Components with this Equipment and Corrosion Type. To do so, you should create
Inspection Groups.
About Inspection Group Reports

Reports are delivered in the baseline Meridium APM database that can be used to view
information about your Inspection Groups. When you view an Inspection Group report,
you are viewing one main report, and in some cases, a subreport containing additional
information. These reports are stored in the Catalog folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Reports. In the baseline database, the
following reports are available:
Inspection Group Report: Contains the following sections:

Inspection Group Definition
Inspection Group Details
Inspection Group Excluded Sub Report: Contains the information that is

displayed in the Excluded from Inspection Group section in the Inspection Group
Report.
Inspection Group reports are based on supporting queries that return information that is
stored in the Asset Group and Grouping Element records that make up an Inspection
Group. These queries are stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk
Based Inspection\Report Queries.
Running the Inspection Group Report

You can run the Inspection Group Report to view information about the Inspection
Groups that you use in RBI. When you run the Inspection Group Report, the results of the
report are displayed on the Report Viewer page.
To run the Inspection Group Report:
1. On the Inspection Group Details page, in the Inspection Groups pane, select the
Inspection Group for which you want to run the Inspection Group Report.
2. On the Inspection Group menu, click the View Report link.
The Inspection Group Report appears on the Report Viewer page.
Inspection Group Definition Section

The Inspection Group Definition section of the Inspection Group Report displays
information that is stored in the Asset Group record that is associated with the Inspection
Group for which you ran the Inspection Group Report. The Inspection Group Definition
section is outlined in red in the following image.
The items that are displayed in the Inspection Group Definition section correspond with
fields in the Asset Group record. The Inspection Group Definition section also contains
the State item, which corresponds with the state of the Asset Group record.
Inspection Group Details Section

The Inspection Group Details section of the Inspection Group Report contains a grid that
displays information that is stored in the Grouping Element records that are associated
with the Inspection Group for which you ran the Inspection Group Report. The
Inspection Group Details section is outlined in red in the following image.
The grid contains the following columns that correspond with Grouping Element fields:
Asset
Component
Inspection Priority
Material Spec
Wall Ratio
The rows in the grid with bold text display values in the Grouping Element records that
identify the Representative RBI Components in the Inspection Group. Below these rows,
additional rows are displayed for the Grouping Element records identifying Represented
RBI Components that are related to the Representative RBI Component directly
preceding it in the grid.
Excluded from Inspection Group

Section
The Excluded from Inspection Group section of the Inspection Group Report displays
information that is stored in the Grouping Element records that meet the criteria to be
included in the Inspection Group for which you ran the report, but have been excluded
from the Inspection Group. This section is displayed only when the Inspection Group for
which you are viewing a report contains Grouping Element records that have been
excluded manually from the Inspection Group.
The details in this section are provided via the Inspection Group Excluded Sub Report.
About Managing Existing RBI

Recommendations
When you access Recommendation Management from RBI, in addition to performing
any standard Recommendation Management functionality, you can also:
Prepare recommendations for implementation.

View a list of Inspection Task records that are linked to the same Equipment or
Functional Location record to which the displayed RBI Recommendation records
are linked.
Link RBI Recommendation records to an existing Inspection Task record.
Create an Inspection Task record from a single RBI Recommendation record.
Create Inspection Task records from multiple RBI Recommendation records.
Create a Notification record from an RBI Recommendation record, which also

creates a Notification in the SAP database.
Unlink RBI Recommendation records from Inspection Task records.
Note: The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will not create new RBI
Recommendation records via the Recommendation Management page. If you create RBI
Recommendation records in this manner, links will not be created between the RBI
Recommendation record and the RBI Criticality Analysis or RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records.
Preparing RBI Recommendations for

Implementation
Before you use an RBI Recommendation record as the basis for creating an Inspection
Task record or an SAP Notification, you may want to specify how that recommendation
should be implemented. To do so, you can use the RBI Recommendation Pre-Planning
Fields datasheet, which contains fields that you can use to store implementation
information. The baseline datasheet is shown in the following image.
Note the behavior of the following fields:
Task Type: Contains a list of Task Types records, where the value in the list is the
Task Type ID of the Task Types records.
Proposed Task ID: Contains a list of Inspection Task records with the selected
Task Type that are also linked to the Equipment record to which the RBI
Recommendation record is linked. The value in the list is the Task ID of the Task
records. If you select an Inspection Task record in the Proposed Task ID list, the
RBI Recommendation record can be linked only to that Inspection Task record.
To access the RBI Recommendation Pre-Planning Fields datasheet:

1. In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Recommendation Management page, in
the Recommendation Management workspace, click any hyperlinked
Recommendation ID.
The <Record ID> (RBI Recommendation) window appears, where <Record ID> is the
Record ID of the RBI Recommendation record, displaying the datasheet that was last
accessed for an RBI Recommendation record. In the following image, the <Record ID>
(RBI Recommendation) window displays the Criticality Calculator datasheet for the RBI
Recommendation record with the Recommendation ID REC-804.
2. In the Datasheet list, select RBI Recommendation Pre-Planning Fields.

The RBI Recommendation Pre-Planning Fields datasheet is displayed on the <Record
ID> (RBI Recommendation) window.
Linking an RBI Recommendation

Record to an Existing Inspection Task
Record
Note: An RBI Recommendation can be linked to only one Inspection Task record at a
time. If an RBI Recommendation record is already linked to one Inspection Task record
and you link it to another Inspection Task record, the RBI Recommendation record will
unlinked from the original Inspection Task record automatically before it is linked to the
new Inspection Task record.
To link an RBI Recommendation record to an existing Task record:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Recommendation Management
page from RBI.
2. In the grid in the Recommendation Management workspace, select the rows
containing the RBI Recommendation records that you want to link to an existing
Inspection Task record.
3. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Link to Task link.
The Select Task dialog box appears.
4. In the Select a Task from the List list, select the Inspection Task record to which
you want to link the RBI Recommendation records.
5. Click OK.
The RBI Recommendation records are linked to the Inspection Task record, and a
confirmation message appears, indicating the number of RBI Recommendation records
that were linked to the selected Inspection Task record. If the value in the Desired
Interval field in the Inspection Task record was updated based upon the Estimated Half
Life calculated by RBI, the TM half-life, or time-based inspection settings an additional
confirmation message appears, indicating the source of this value.
Note: If you select an Inspection Task record whose Task ID is not stored in the Proposed
Task ID field in the RBI Recommendation record, a message appears, indicating that the
link cannot be created.
Unlinking an RBI Recommendation

Record from a Task Record
To remove the link between an RBI Recommendation record and an Inspection Task
record:
page from RBI.
2. In the grid in the Recommendation Management workspace, select the RBI
Recommendation records whose link to an Inspection Task record you want to
remove.
3. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Unlink from Task link.
The links between the RBI Recommendation records and Inspection Task records are
removed, and a confirmation message appears, indicating the number of links that were
removed. If this operation resulted in the value in the Desired Interval field in the
Inspection Task record being updated, an additional message appears, indicating that this
value was updated.
About Consolidating RBI

Recommendations
If two or more RBI Recommendation records that are associated with a single Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record contain similar information, you can consolidate
them into a single RBI Recommendation record. When you perform the consolidate
operation, a master RBI Recommendation record will be created to store the consolidated
information. The source RBI Recommendation records will be transitioned to the
Consolidated state, and they will be linked to the master RBI Recommendation record.
When you generate RBI Recommendation records for multiple main RBI Analyses that
are associated with a single Equipment record or for all the main RBI Analyses that are
associated with ALL the Equipment nodes that are displayed on the RBI Asset View
page, you can choose to consolidate the RBI Recommendation records that are associated
with a single Criticality Calculator RBI Components record if they contain the same
values in the following fields:
Damage Mechanism
Task Type
Keep in mind that these values come from the Inspection Strategy record or records that
are linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis record associated with the RBI
Recommendation.
When you choose to consolidate RBI Recommendations based upon this criteria, if more
than one RBI Recommendation record is created with the same combination of values in
the Damage Mechanism and Task Type fields, those RBI Recommendation records will
be set to the Consolidated state. As a result of the consolidation, a master RBI
Recommendation record will also be created from these source records and set to the
Proposed state.
The values in the Damage Mechanism and Task Type fields, in addition to any other
fields containing matching values, in the source RBI Recommendation records will be
used to populate the corresponding fields in the master RBI Recommendation record.
Additionally, the most conservative (i.e., lowest) value in the Recommended Interval
Scope field in the source RBI Recommendation records will match the value in the
Recommended Interval Scope field in the master RBI Recommendation record.
For example, suppose that you wanted to generate RBI Recommendation records for the
following RBI Criticality Analysis records:
RBI Criticality Analysis A that is linked to an RBI Degradation Mechanism record

whose Degradation Mechanism is Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion and
whose RBI Recommendation record will be created based upon the Inspection
Strategy record that contains the values listed in Table 1.
RBI Criticality Analysis B that is linked to an RBI Degradation Mechanism record
whose Degradation Mechanism is Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion and
RBI Criticality Analysis C that is linked to an RBI Degradation Mechanism record
whose Degradation Mechanism is Criticality Calculator External Corrosion and
Table 1
Inspection Task Type
Recommended Inspection Interval
RBI - MED - EXCH TUBES 90
Table 2
RBI - MED - EXCH TUBES 120
Table 3
RBI - EXTERNAL - VERY HIGH 180

In this case, four RBI Recommendation records would be created. Because RBI
Criticality Analysis A and RBI Criticality Analysis B are linked to an RBI Degradation
Mechanism record whose Degradation Mechanism value is Criticality Calculator
Internal Corrosion and the associated Inspection Strategy records contain the same
Inspection Task Type value, the RBI Recommendation records generated from these
records would be consolidated automatically into a single, master RBI Recommendation.
The state of the consolidated records would be set to Consolidated, and the state of the
master record would be set to Proposed.
The following table lists the four RBI Recommendation records that would exist in the
database as a result of the automatic RBI Recommendation generation process. Note that
the column labels in the preceding tables match the field names in Inspection Strategy
records, while the column labels in the following table match the field names in RBI
State
Damage Mechanism
Task Type
Recommended
Interval Scope
Consolidated
Internal Corrosion
RBI - MED - EXCH

TUBES
90
120
Consolidated
Internal Corrosion
RBI - MED - EXCH

TUBES
Proposed
Internal Corrosion
RBI - MED - EXCH

TUBES
90
Proposed
External Corrosion
RBI - EXTERNAL VERY HIGH
180
Notice that two RBI Recommendation records are set to Proposed. One of them is the
master RBI Recommendation record described in this topic, and the other is the RBI
Recommendation record that was created from the Inspection Strategy record that was
used for RBI Criticality Analysis C.
In the master RBI Recommendation record, the value in the Recommended Interval
Scope field is set to 90 because this is the most conservative (i.e., lowest) value that
exists in the Recommended Inspection Interval field in the source RBI Recommendation
records.
About Creating Records from RBI

Recommendation Records
On the Recommendation Management page, after an RBI Recommendation record exists,
you can use it as the basis for creating an Inspection Task record or an SAP Notification,
which also creates a corresponding Notification record. You can create:
One Inspection Task record or SAP Notification from one RBI Recommendation
record at a time using the Work Management Item Builder. You can create
Inspection Task records via the Work Management Item Builder from RBI
Recommendation records that have been generated automatically or manually.
Multiple Inspection Task records from multiple RBI Recommendation records at

once (one Inspection Task record will be created per RBI Recommendation
record) via the Generate Tasks link on the Asset Tasks menu. You can create
Inspection Task records via the Generate Tasks link only from RBI
Recommendation records that have been generated automatically.
You can create Inspection Task records from RBI Recommendation records only if they
are in the Approved state. You can create a Notification in SAP only if the SAP Interfaces
license is active.
Accessing the Work Management Item

Builder
To access the Work Management Item Builder:
page from RBI.
2. In the grid in the RBI Recommendations section, select the RBI Recommendation
record from which you want to create a new Task record or SAP Notification.
3. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Create WMI link.
The Work Management Item Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen. You can use
this builder to create an Inspection Task record or an SAP Notification (and
corresponding Notification record) from a single RBI Recommendation record that was
generated automatically or manually.
Creating an Inspection Task Record or

SAP Notification from a Single RBI
Recommendation Record
You can use the Work Management Item Builder to create an Inspection Task record or an
SAP Notification (and corresponding Notification record) from a single RBI
Recommendation record that was generated automatically or manually.
To use the WMI Builder to create an Inspection Task record or SAP Notification from a
single RBI Recommendation record:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Work Management Item Builder.
The Work Management Item Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.

The Work Management Item Type screen appears.
The Create a Task option is selected by default, and Inspection Task is selected in the list
by default.
3. To create:
An Inspection Task record, accept the default selections.
An SAP Notification, select the Create an SAP Notification option.
Note: The Create an SAP Notification option is available only if the SAP
Interfaces module is active.
If you selected the Create a Task option on the previous screen, the Task Datasheet screen
appears, displaying the Inspection Task datasheet.
-orIf you selected the Create an SAP Notification option on the previous screen, the SAP
Notification Datasheet screen appears, displaying the Notification datasheet. Note that
the Description field is populated automatically with values from the RBI
Recommendation record, as specified by the query Get Long Text for Notification, which
is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\SAP Integration
Interfaces\Queries.
5. Complete the fields, and click the Finish button.
The Inspection Task record or SAP Notification is created.
If an Inspection Task record was created, fields in the Inspection Task

record are populated with values from the source RBI Recommendation
record.
If an SAP Notification was created, a corresponding Notification record is
created, and a confirmation message appears, indicating that the
Notification was created in SAP.
If a Notification was created in SAP, on the datasheet of the source RBI

Recommendation record, the Meridium APM system:
Populates the Work Request Reference cell with the ID of the

corresponding Notification. Note that after the Work Request
Reference cell is populated, the Create SAP Notification check box
becomes disabled.
Populates the Work Request Equipment cell with the value in the
Equipment field in the SAP Notification.
Populates the Work Request Functional Location cell with the

value in the Functional Loc. field in the SAP Notification.
Creating Inspection Task Records From

Multiple RBI Recommendation
Records
When you access the Recommendation Management page from RBI, you can create
Inspection Task records from multiple RBI Recommendation records at once (one
Inspection Task record will be created per RBI Recommendation record) via the
Generate Tasks link on the Asset Tasks menu. You can create Inspection Task records via
the Generate Tasks link only from RBI Recommendation records that have been
generated automatically. The following instructions assume that you have accessed the
Recommendation Management page from RBI for the RBI Recommendation records
from which you want to create Inspection Task records.
To create Inspection Task records from multiple RBI Recommendation records:
1. On the Recommendation Management page, in the grid in the RBI
Recommendations section, select the rows containing the RBI Recommendation
records from which you want to create Inspection Task records.
2. On the Asset Tasks menu, click the Generate Tasks link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to generate Inspection Task records
for the selected RBI Recommendation records.

A confirmation message appears, indicating that new Inspection Task records were
created.
4. Click OK.
The Recommendation Management page returns to focus. Certain fields in the new
Inspection Task records are populated with values from the source RBI Recommendation
records, and new rows are displayed in the grid in the Task for Asset section for each
Inspection Task record that was created. A red outline has been added to the following
image to highlight the Inspection Task records that were created.
Values Mapped to Inspection Task

Records
When you create an Inspection Task record from an RBI Recommendation record, certain
fields in the Inspection Task record are populated with values from the source RBI
Recommendation record, and in some cases, other associated records. The following
table lists these Inspection Task fields, their corresponding RBI Recommendation fields,
and the cases in which values in other associated records are used to populate the
Inspection Task field.
Inspection
Task field
RBI
Notes
Recommendation
field
Asset ID
Asset ID
N/A
Asset Key
Entity Key
Desired
Interval
Recommended
Interval Scope
N/A
Additional values are considered for population in the
Desired Interval field when the:
Task Details
Recommended
Inspection Scope
Consider Half-Life when Determining

Inspection Task Interval setting on the
Administrative Tasks page is enabled.
Task Type value in the Inspection Task record is

associated with one or more time-based
inspection settings.
N/A
Task ID
Task Type
If the Inspection Task record was created from an RBI

Recommendation record via the Generate Tasks link on
the Asset Tasks menu on the Recommendation
Management page, the value in the Task ID field is
populated with a combination of the value in the Task
Type field in the source RBI Recommendation record
and a random number between 1,000 and 10,000. For
example, the value in the Task ID field might be RBILOW-EXCH TUBES 1001.
Task Type
Task Type
N/A
About Inspection Task Intervals

When an Inspection Task record is created from or linked to an RBI Recommendation
record, the Meridium APM system considers values that have been defined at other stages
in the Mechanical Integrity Work Process when determining the value to populate in the
Desired Interval field. The most conservative of these values (i.e., the lowest, non-zero
value) will be populated in the Desired Interval field. The following table provides the
values that are considered in this process, the fields and records in which they exist, the
module with which they are associated, and the conditions under which they will be
considered for population in the Desired Interval field. For values that are sourced from
modules other than RBI, it is assumed that the license for the associated module is active.
Field
Record
Associated
Module
Recommended RBI
RBI
Interval Scope Recommendation
Criteria for being

considered
Notes
The Inspection Task

record is created
from or linked to an
RBI
Recommendation
record.
A single Inspection
Task record may be
linked to more than
one RBI
Recommendation
record. The most
conservative
Recommended
Interval Scope value
(i.e., lowest, non-zero
value) that is
associated with the
Inspection Task record

will be considered for
population in the
Desired Interval field.
Interval
Time Based
Inspection
Interval
Time-based
inspection settings
have been created
via Inspection
Management where
Inspection an inspection
Management interval is defined
for a particular task
type that is
associated with the
Inspection Task
record.
The Consider HalfLife when
Determining
Inspection Task
Interval setting is
enabled.
A single task type may

be associated with
more than one Time
Based Inspection
Interval record. The
most conservative
Interval value (i.e.,
lowest, non-zero
value) will be
considered for
population in the
A single Equipment
record may be linked
to more than one
Criticality Int. Corr.
Deg. Mech. Eval
-andCriticality Int.
record. The most
Estimated Half
Corr. Deg. Mech. RBI
conservative
Life
The value in the
Eval
Estimated Half Life
Damage Mechanism
value (i.e., lowest,
field in the
non-zero value) will
associated RBI
be considered for
Recommendation
population in the
record is Criticality
Calculator Internal
Corrosion.
A TM Analysis
TM half-life N/A
Thickness exists for the
TM half-life is not
Monitoring Equipment record stored in a record in
that is associated
(TM)
the Meridium APM
with the Inspection database, but rather, it
Task record.
is calculated using
values that are stored
-andin a TM Analysis. The
calculated TM halfThe Consider Half- life is associated with
the Equipment record
Life when
Determining
Inspection Task
Interval setting is
enabled.
-and-
that is associated with

the Inspection Task
record to which the
The value in the
Damage Mechanism RBI Recommendation
record is linked.
field in the
associated RBI
Recommendation
record is Criticality
Calculator Internal
Corrosion.
Time-Based Inspection Settings and

Inspection Task Records
When the Inspection Management license is active in conjunction with RBI, and you
create time-based inspection settings in Inspection Management, the inspection intervals
that you define will also be considered by the Meridium APM system when populating
the value in the Desired Interval field in Inspection Task records that you create from or
link to an RBI Recommendation record. Specifically, if you define an inspection interval
for a type of inspection task that corresponds with the Task Type value in the Inspection
Task record, that value will be considered by the Meridium APM system when populating
the value in the Desired Interval field in the Inspection Task record.
For example, consider that the time-based inspection settings shown in the following
table exist.
Time-Based
Inspection Setting
1
Unit Component Family
Equipment
Task
Type
Default
Inspection
Interval
Criticality RBI
Unit
Component - Exchanger
A
Bundle
N/A
CUI
24
Unit
N/A
A
N/A
CUI
12
Now, consider that:
The Inspection Task record Task-1 is linked to an Equipment record that resides in
Unit A and is linked to records in the Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger
Bundle family.
The value in the Task Type field in the Inspection Task record Task-1 is CUI .
Task-1 was created from or linked to an RBI Recommendation record whose
Recommended Interval field contains the value of 120 (Months).
In this case, the Meridium APM system would consider the following values for
population in the Desired Interval field in the Inspection Task record:
12: The most conservative (i.e., lowest) inspection interval as defined by the timebased inspection settings that are associated with the Task Type CUI.
120: The value in the Recommended Interval field in the RBI Recommendation
record that is linked to Task-1.
The Meridium APM system would then populate the following values in the following
fields in the Inspection Task record:
Desired Interval: 12 (the most conservative of the values considered).

Desired Interval Basis: Time-Based Inspection Settings.
Note that if the Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval setting is
enabled on the Administrative Tasks page, additional values will be considered when
determining the Desired Interval value in the Inspection Task record.
About Considering Half-Life When

Determining an Inspection Task
Interval
When the Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval setting is
enabled, the following additional values are considered for population in the Desired
Interval field in Inspection Task records that are created from or linked to an RBI
Recommendation record whose Damage Mechanism field contains the value Criticality
Calculator Internal Corrosion:
The most conservative (i.e., the lowest) Estimated Half Life in all the Criticality
Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval records that are linked to the Equipment record that is
associated with the Inspection Task.
The TM half-life of the Equipment record that is associated with the Inspection
Task record.
The workflow for considering half-life when determining the value that is populated in
the Desired Interval field in certain Inspection Task records is as follows:
1. In TM, create a TM Analysis for the Equipment record that you will also analyze
in RBI. The TM Analysis should contain enough data to allow for TM half-life to
be determined.
For example, a TM Analysis has been created for the Equipment record DOOO3-097 ~
VESSEL - MAIN COLUMN TOWER ~000000000001056788. The following image
shows the TM Explorer pane that is displayed in the TM module for this Equipment
record.
2. In RBI, enable the Consider Half-Life when Determining Inspection Task Interval
setting on the Administrative Tasks page.
3. In RBI, create one or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records for the
Equipment record.
For example, the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records Column-Bottom
D0003-097-CS1 and Column-Top D0003-097-CS2 have been created for the Equipment
record. The following image shows the RBI Explorer pane that is displayed in the RBI
module for this Equipment record.
4. In RBI, link a Potential Degradation Mechanism record that contains the value
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Degradation Mechanism field to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
For example, a Potential Degradation Mechanism record that contains the value
Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Degradation Mechanism field has been
linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record Column-Bottom D0003-097CS1. In the following image, a red outline has been added to the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms tab of the RBI Asset View page to highlight this Potential Degradation
Mechanism record.
5. Create RBI Criticality Analysis records for these Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records.
Calculations are performed to determine the Estimated Half Life in the Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval records that are associated with the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records. This value is considered when populating the Desired Interval field
in the Inspection Task record that is created in step 7.
6. Generate RBI Recommendation records that contain the value Criticality
Calculator Internal Corrosion in the Damage Mechanism field.
7. From these RBI Recommendation records, create an Inspection Task record.
Calculations are performed to determine the TM half-life, and the result of this
calculation is considered when populating the Desired Interval field in the Inspection
Task record.
The Desired Interval field is displayed in the grid in the Task section of the
Recommendation Management page. A red outline has been added to the following
image to highlight the Desired Interval field.
About TM Half-Life
TM half-life refers to a value that is calculated using values that are stored in a TM
Analysis, but TM half-life is not stored in a record in the Meridium APM database. If you
have completed the necessary steps, TM half-life will be considered when populating the
Desired Interval field in Inspection Task records that are created from or linked to an RBI
Recommendation record whose Damage Mechanism field contains the value Criticality
Calculator Internal Corrosion.
TM half-life is calculated using the values in the following fields in the following records
that are linked to the Equipment record that you are analyzing in RBI and TM:
The Asset Controlling Remaining Life field in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record.
The Remaining Life Factor field in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record.
TM half-life is calculated using the following equation:

TM half-life = Asset Controlling Remaining Life x Remaining Life Factor
For example, consider an Equipment record that is linked to the following records with
the following values.
Record
Asset Corrosion Analysis
Field
Value
Asset Controlling Remaining Life 59 months
Corrosion Analysis Settings Remaining Life Factor
.5
The TM half-life associated with this Equipment record would be calculated this way:
TM half-life = Asset Controlling Remaining Life x Remaining Life Factor
TM half-life = 59 months x .5
TM half-life = 29.5 months
Overview of Pressure Relief Devices

A pressure relief device is a device that protects equipment or RBI Components from
pressure buildup. In RBI, you will store information about pressure relief devices in
records belonging to subfamilies of the Criticality Calculator PRD Components family.
Specifically, the RBI module supports the use of the following types of pressure relief
devices:
Pressure relief valves (stored in Criticality Calculator PRD Component - Relief

Valve records)
Rupture disks (stored in Criticality Calculator PRD Component - Rupture Disk
records)
Note: Throughout this documentation, where the distinction between the two subfamilies
is irrelevant to the discussion, you will see the term Criticality Calculator PRD
Components record to refer to a record in either subfamily.
Pressure Relief Device Data Structure

Each Criticality Calculator PRD Components record is linked to other records to further
define that pressure relief device. For example, Criticality Calculator PRD Components
records are linked to Potential Degradation Mechanisms records, which define the ways
in which the pressure relief device can fail. The following image illustrates the records to
which Criticality Calculator PRD Components records are linked.
In this image, you can see that the Equipment box appears twice. In this image, each
Equipment box represents a separate Equipment record. In RBI, you can link a Criticality
Calculator PRD Components record to predecessor Equipment records using the
following relationships for the following purposes:
Has RBI Components: Used to identify the pressure relief device itself. In this
case, the predecessor Equipment record represents the pressure relief device, and
the database would contain two records to represent the same pressure relief
device: the Equipment record and the Criticality Calculator PRD Components
record.
Asset Is Protected By: Used to identify the equipment that is protected by the
pressure relief device. In this case, the predecessor Equipment records represent
pieces of equipment that are protected by the pressure relief device.
You can manage pressure relief devices on the following pages:
RBI Unit View page

RBI Asset View page
When you are viewing a pressure relief device on the RBI Unit View page, the records
that are outlined in red in the following image are displayed.
Note: In addition to the records outlined in red, the RBI Unit View page also displays the
When you are viewing an RBI PRD Analysis on the RBI Asset View page, the records
that are outlined in red in the following image are displayed:
Note: In addition to the records outlined in red, the RBI Asset View page also displays
additional records to which the RBI Criticality Analysis record is linked, such as RBI
Degradation Mechanisms records. These records are not included in the preceding image
because they are not directly linked to the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record.
About Creating Criticality Calculator

PRD Components Records
You can create a Criticality Calculator PRD Components record using the same
workflows that you use for creating Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. When
creating Criticality Calculator PRD Components records, keep the following guidelines
in mind:
When prompted to select an Equipment record, you should select the Equipment
record representing the pressure relief device itself.
When prompted for the Component Family, you should select one of the
following options:
Criticality Calculator PRD Component - Relief Valve
Criticality Calculator PRD Component - Rupture Disk
When prompted for the Component Type, you should select one of the following
options:
Balanced Bellows PRD
Conventional PRD
Pilot-Operated PRD
PRD with Rupture Disk
Rupture Disk Only
An Equipment record cannot be linked to Criticality Calculator RBI Components

records and Criticality Calculator PRD Components records.
About Viewing RBI PRD Analyses

After you have created Criticality Calculator PRD Components records, identified the
equipment or RBI Components that it protects, and created one or more RBI PRD
Analyses for that pressure relief device, the RBI Asset View page displays a tree structure
that contains nodes representing:
The predecessor Equipment record representing the pressure relief device itself.
The Criticality Calculator PRD Components record representing the pressure
relief device itself.
The successor RBI PRD Criticality Analysis records to which the Criticality
Calculator PRD Components record is linked.
The predecessor Equipment or Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to

which the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record is linked, where those
records represent the pieces of equipment or RBI Components that are protected
by the pressure relief device.
Note: Although these Equipment or Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are
predecessors to the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record, they are displayed as
child nodes in the RBI Explorer pane.
For example, consider the following image.
In this image:
The Equipment record representing the pressure relief device itself is represented
by the root node with the
icon.
The Criticality Calculator PRD Components record representing the pressure
relief device itself is represented by the Pilot-Operated PRD PRD0013-074-XX-1
node.
The successor RBI PRD Analysis is represented by the node with the
icon.
The predecessor Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which the

Criticality Calculator PRD Components record is linked is represented by the
D0003-097-CS-1 ~ D0003-097-CS node.
About Identifying Protected Equipment

or RBI Components
After you have created a Criticality Calculator PRD Components record to identify a
pressure relief device, you can identify the equipment or RBI Components that it
protects. Note the following guidelines:
A pressure relief device can protect either equipment or RBI Components, but not
both.
If a pressure relief device protects equipment, it can protect one or many

pieces of equipment.
If a pressure relief device protects RBI Components, it can protect one or
many RBI Components.
A single piece of equipment can be protected by multiple pressure relief devices.
A single RBI Component can be protected by multiple pressure relief devices.
If you identify a new protected equipment or RBI Component for a pressure relief
device for which an RBI PRD Analysis already exists, the existing RBI PRD
Analysis will become invalid, and you will need to create a new RBI PRD
Analysis to account for the new protected equipment or RBI Component.
You can identify protected equipment or RBI Components using the Add Protected
Equipment dialog box.
Accessing the Add Protected Equipment

Dialog Box
The following instructions assume that you have not yet identified any protected
equipment or RBI Components for the current pressure relief device. If you have already
identified protected equipment, when you click the Add Protected Equipment link on the
Component Tasks menu, the Select Protected Equipment screen will appear, where you
can select additional protected equipment. Likewise, if you have already identified
protected RBI Components, when you click the Add Protected Equipment link on the
Component Tasks menu, the Select Protected Equipment screen will appear, where you
can select additional protected RBI Components.
To access the Add Protected Equipment dialog box:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record representing the pressure
relief device for which you want to identify protected equipment or RBI
Components.
On the RBI Asset View page, the datasheet for the selected Criticality Calculator PRD
2. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Add Protected Equipment link.
The Add Protected Equipment dialog box appears.
You can use this dialog box to identify the equipment or RBI Components that are
protected by this pressure relief device.
Identifying Protected Equipment

To identify the pieces of equipment that are protected by a pressure relief device:
1. Access the Add Protected Equipment dialog box for the pressure relief device that
protects equipment.
2. Select the Assets - No Associated Risk Analysis option, and click OK.
The Select Protected Equipment window appears, displaying the Select Protected Assets
query, which is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based
Inspection. Each row in the grid represents a separate Equipment record.
3. In the rows representing the pieces of equipment that are protected by this
pressure relief device, select the check box.
4. Click the Add button.
The window closes, and the RBI Asset View page returns to focus. The RBI Explorer
pane is updated to display nodes representing the selected Equipment records. In the
following image, the protected Equipment nodes begin with the text SB0020.
In addition, the selected Equipment records are linked to the Criticality Calculator PRD
Components record through the Asset Is Protected By relationship.
Identifying Protected RBI Components

To identify the RBI Components that are protected by a pressure relief device:
1. Access the Add Protected Equipment dialog box for the pressure relief device that
protects RBI Components.
2. Accept the default selection, Components - Associated Risk Analysis, and click
OK.
The Select Protected Equipment window appears, displaying the Select Protected
Components query, which is stored in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection.
3. In the Select Asset ID list, select the Equipment ID of the Equipment records that
are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records representing the
RBI Components that are protected by this pressure relief device.
The query is run, and the results appear in the grid. Each row in the grid represents a
separate Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
5. In the rows representing the RBI Components that are protected by this pressure
relief device, select the check box.
6. Click the Add button.
The window closes, and the RBI Asset View page returns to focus. The RBI Explorer
pane is updated to display nodes representing the selected Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records. If any of the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records belong to an active RBI Analysis, the RBI Explorer pane also displays nodes
representing those analyses.
In addition, the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are linked to the
Criticality Calculator PRD Components record through the Component Is Protected By
relationship.
Removing the Association Between a

Pressure Relief Device and a Piece of
Equipment or RBI Component
When an RBI PRD Analysis exists for a pressure relief device and you remove the
association between the pressure relief device and a piece of equipment or RBI
Component, the existing RBI PRD Analysis becomes invalid, and you must create a new
RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record.
To remove the association between a pressure relief device and a piece of equipment or
RBI Component:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record representing the pressure
relief device for which you want to remove protected equipment or RBI
Components.
On the RBI Asset View page, the datasheet for the selected Criticality Calculator PRD
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the Equipment or RBI Component node
representing the item that is no longer protected by the pressure relief device.
3. On the Component Tasks menu, click the Remove Protected Equipment link.
The Equipment or RBI Component node is removed from the RBI Explorer pane, and the
corresponding Equipment or Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is unlinked
from the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record.
About RBI PRD Analyses

An RBI PRD Analysis is an analysis that contains data specific to pressure relief devices.
This documentation contains instructions for creating and opening existing RBI PRD
Analyses and information about fields required to calculate RBI PRD Analyses. All other
RBI Analysis functionality that also applies to RBI PRD Analyses is not documented
separately for RBI Analyses. For these features, where you see the term RBI Analysis in
the documentation, you can substitute RBI PRD Analysis and continue with the
instructions.
Note that the following features that are available for RBI Analyses are not available for
RBI PRD Analyses:
Creating What If Analyses from RBI PRD Analyses.

Creating Future Risk Analyses from RBI PRD Analyses.
Copying RBI PRD Analyses.
Specifying that TM Analysis values at the TML Group level be used to calculate
RBI corrosion rate values.
Creating Inspection Groups.
Creating RBI PRD Analyses

You can create an RBI PRD Analysis for a pressure relief device only if you have
identified at least one piece of equipment or RBI Component that it protects. In other
words, the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record must be linked to at least one
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record (through the Component Is Protected By
relationship) or at least one Equipment record (through the Asset Is Protected By
relationship).
If you are creating an RBI PRD Analysis for a pressure relief device that protects RBI
Components, each of the corresponding Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
must be linked to an RBI Criticality Analysis record that belongs to an active analysis
that has been calculated.
To create an RBI PRD Analysis:
1. Open the Criticality Calculator PRD Components record for which you want to
create an RBI PRD Analysis.
On the RBI Asset View page, the datasheet for the Equipment record that is linked to the
selected Criticality Calculator PRD Components record appears in the datasheet area.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the Criticality Calculator PRD Components
node.
3. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Create Analysis link.
A new RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record is created and set to the Created state. A new
node for the analysis appears in the RBI Explorer pane below the Criticality Calculator
PRD Components node.
In addition, if you created the RBI PRD Analysis for a pressure relief device that protects
more than one RBI Component, only one of those RBI Components will be used
determine the Inspection Priority.
About Driving RBI Components

When you create an RBI PRD Analysis for a pressure relief device that protects more
than one RBI Component, one of those RBI Components becomes the driving RBI
Component, which means it is the most critical to protect because it represents the highest
risk if it fails.
To determine the driving RBI Component, the Meridium APM system looks at all of the
RBI Analyses for the protected RBI Components. The RBI Component that belongs to
the RBI Analysis whose Inspection Priority field contains the most conservative value
(the lowest number) becomes the driving RBI Component.
On the PRD Analysis datasheet, in the Driving Component field, you will see the Record
ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for the driving RBI Component.
When you are required to type a value manually on the PRD Analysis datasheet, if the
field stores information about a protected RBI Component, you will need to enter
information about the driving RBI Component.
Likewise, when fields in the RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record are populated
automatically, if those fields store information about a protected RBI Component (e.g.,
Protected Equipment Type), you can assume that the value you see represents the driving
RBI Component.
After you set an RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record to the Risk Completed state, in the
RBI Explorer pane, the image beside the node representing the driving RBI Component
will change to
. For example, in the image below, you can see that the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record D0003-097-CS-2 ~ D0003-097-CS represents the
driving RBI Component.
Opening RBI PRD Analysis
To open an existing RBI PRD Analysis:

Criticality Calculator PRD Components record whose RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis record you want to view.
2. In the RBI Explorer pane, select the node representing the RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis record that you want to view. The following image shows the RBI PRD
Criticality Analysis node for the RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record RBI0003488629 selected in the RBI Explorer pane.
The RBI PRD Analysis datasheet and the following tabs are displayed in the datasheet
area on the RBI Asset View page:
Consequence Evaluations
Fields Required to Calculate RBI PRD

Analyses
Several fields in RBI families are required in order to calculate RBI PRD Analyses. If
you try to calculate an RBI PRD Analysis and any required fields do not contain values,
the analysis will not be calculated, and the Calculation Status dialog box will appear,
displaying a list of the required fields that do not contain values. The required fields
differ depending upon whether the RBI PRD Analysis contains a Leak Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation record or an Over Pressure Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record.
Analyses Containing a Leak Record
The following lists describe the fields that are required in order to calculate RBI PRD
Analyses that meet the following criteria:
They contain an Over Pressure Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record

(i.e., a record belonging to the Criticality Over Pressure Deg. Mech. Eval. family).
They contain a Leak Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record (i.e., a

record belonging to the Criticality Leak Deg. Mech. Eval. family).
The lists are categorized by the family to which the required fields belong.
PRD Consequence Evaluation
Cost of Fluid
Environmental Cost
Unit Production Margin
Consequence for Protected Assets
Note: The Consequence for Protected Assets field is required only when the pressure
relief device protects equipment.
Date in Service
Service Severity - Leak
RBI PRD Criticality Analysis
Criticality Item Type

Operating Pressure
Note: If the pressure relief device protects RBI Components, the Operating Pressure field
is populated automatically from the Operating Pressure field in the driving Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record. If, however, the pressure relief device protects
equipment, you must type a value in this field manually.
PRD Discharge Location
Service Severity
Driving Component
Note: The Driving Component field must contain a value if the pressure relief device
Damage Factor Class
Note: The Damage Factor Class field must contain a value if the pressure relief device
protects equipment.
PRD Relief Area
Note: The PRD Relief Area field is required and must contain a value greater than zero if
the Multiple PRDs check box is selected.
PRD Total Relief Area
Note: The PRD Total Relief Area field is required and must contain a value greater than
zero if the Multiple PRDs check box is selected.
Criticality PRD Component - Relief Valve
Inlet Size
Set Pressure
Rated Capacity
Analyses That Do not Contain a Leak Record

The following table lists the fields that are required in order to calculate RBI PRD
Analyses that meet the following criteria:
They contain an Over Pressure Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record

(i.e., a record belonging to the Criticality Over Pressure Deg. Mech. Eval. family).
They do not contain a Leak Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record (i.e.,
a record belonging to the Criticality Leak Deg. Mech. Eval. family).
The table is categorized by the family to which the required fields belong.
PRD Consequence Evaluation
Cost of Fluid
Environmental Cost
Unit Production Margin
Days to Repair
Consequence for Protected Assets
Note: The Consequence for Protected Assets field is required only when the pressure
relief device protects equipment.
Date in Service
RBI PRD Criticality Analysis

Operating Pressure
Note: If the pressure relief device protects RBI Components, the Operating Pressure field
is populated automatically from the Operating Pressure field in the driving Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record. If, however, the pressure relief device protects
equipment, you must type a value in this field manually.
Protected Equipment Type
Note: If the pressure relief device protects RBI Components, the Protected Equipment
Type field is populated automatically based upon the value in the Criticality Item Type
field in the driving Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. If, however, the
pressure relief device protects equipment, you must type a value in this field manually.
PRD Discharge Location

Service Severity
Driving Component
Note: The Driving Component field must contain a value if the pressure relief device
Damage Factor Class
Note: The Damage Factor Class field must contain a value if the pressure relief device
protects equipment.
PRD Relief Area
Note: The PRD Relief Area field is required and must contain a value greater than zero if
the Multiple PRDs check box is selected.
PRD Total Relief Area
Note: The PRD Total Relief Area field is required and must contain a value greater than
zero if the Multiple PRDs check box is selected.
MAWP (Maximum Allowable Working Pressure)

Next Inspection Date
Values Mapped to the Protected

Equipment Type Field
When you create an RBI PRD Analysis for a pressure relief device that protects RBI
Components, the Protected Equipment Type field in the RBI PRD Criticality Analysis
record is populated automatically based upon the value in the Criticality Item Type field
in the driving Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The following table lists the values in the Criticality Item Type field and the
corresponding values that are set automatically in the Protected Equipment Type field.
Column-Top
Column-Middle
Process Tower
Column-Bottom
Any value that contains the word Pipe
Heat Exchanger
Piping
Heat Exchangers
Air Cooled Exchanger Header

All other values
Not Process Tower
About Allowable Stress

When you create an RBI Criticality Analysis record, several values in the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record to which it is linked are copied automatically to fields
in the RBI Criticality Analysis record. Along with the following values, these copied
values are used to determine the value that appears by default in the Allowable Stress
field in that RBI Criticality Analysis record:
The value in the Stress Lookup Table field in the associated Criticality Calculator
The values in the reference table that corresponds with the values in the Stress
Lookup Table field in the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record.
Specifically, the entire process for determining the value in the Allowable Stress field is
as follows:
1. You create an RBI Criticality Analysis record, which copies values from the
associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to the RBI Criticality
Analysis record.
2. The Meridium APM system looks for values in the Stress Lookup Table field in
the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
3. Depending upon the values in the Stress Lookup Table field, the Meridium APM
system looks for values in a specific reference table.
4. The Meridium APM system maps various values in the RBI Criticality Analysis
record (which were copied in step 1) to values in the reference table to find the
correct value with which to populate the Allowable Stress field in the RBI
The following table lists the Criticality Calculator RBI Components fields whose values
are copied to RBI Criticality Analysis fields, and the RBI Criticality Analysis fields to
which they are copied.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components field RBI Criticality Analysis field

BM Code
Construction Code
BM Year
Code Year
BM Spec
Material Spec
BM Grade
Material Grade
Design Temperature
Design Temperature
Stress Lookup Table
Stress Lookup Table
The Meridium APM system uses the following reference tables to determine the
appropriate value with which to populate the Allowable Stress field in each RBI
Piping Stress
PV Stress
Tank Stress
Note: After you create an RBI Criticality Analysis record, if you modify any of the values
in the RBI Criticality Analysis fields in the preceding table, the value in the Allowable
Stress field will be updated based upon those changes.
About Exporting and Importing RBI

Data
You can export and import RBI data for the purposes of creating and/or updating multiple
RBI records at one time. Specifically, you can use the RBI Export and Import page to
export RBI data to a Microsoft Excel file, where you can add or modify data that will be
used to create and/or update RBI records when you perform the import procedure.
A Security User who is a member of the MI RBI Administrator or MI RBI Analyst
Security Group may want to perform the export procedure to periodically review RBI
data for multiple pieces of equipment in a system or a unit that you analyze in RBI, make
updates to this data, and then perform the import procedure to create new and/or update
existing RBI records.
For example, suppose that certain changes within a system make it necessary for a new
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record to be linked to ALL Active Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to all Equipment records in a system,
and as a result, new RBI Criticality Analysis records will need to be created for each
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. A Security User who is a member of the
MI RBI Administrator or MI RBI Analyst Security Group could perform the export
procedure, enter data in a Microsoft Excel file, and perform the import procedure as a
way to link the new Potential Degradation Mechanisms records to ALL the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records, and create new RBI Criticality Analysis records for
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
Additionally, if certain individuals in your organization do not have Meridium APM
Security User accounts, but they DO have access to information about inspections or
other work that should be contained in an RBI record, a Security User who is a member
of the MI RBI Administrator or MI RBI Analyst Security Group can perform the export
procedure and distribute the Microsoft Excel file to which the RBI data is exported to
these individuals to record data. After the data is recorded, the Security User who is a
member of the MI RBI Administrator or MI RBI Analyst Security Group can review the
data and perform the import procedure to create new and/or update existing RBI records.
Exporting and Importing RBI Data and

the RBI Data Structure
Not all of the records involved in an RBI Analysis can be created or updated as a result of
performing the export process, modifying data using the Microsoft Excel template, and
then performing the import process. In the following image that shows a modification of
the RBI data model, the boxes outlined in:
Green represent records that can be created as a result of the import process. It is
important to note that these records can be created only when their associated
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked to an Equipment record
(not an RBI System record).
Yellow represent records that can be linked to Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records as a result of the import process. It is important to note that
the import process can be used to link Potential Degradation Mechanisms records
to Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to Equipment
records only (not RBI System records), and only Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records that are delivered in the baseline database can be linked to
these Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
Orange represent records that can be created or updated as a result of the import
process. It is important to note that the import process can be used to update or
create Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to
Equipment records only (not RBI System records).
Exporting RBI Data

You can select Equipment records whose Active Criticality Calculator Components
records and associated RBI data you want to export to a Microsoft Excel file, where you
will make updates that will be used to create new or update existing RBI records when
you perform the import procedure.
To export RBI data:
1. On the RBI Start Page, click the Export and Import RBI Data link.
The RBI Export and Import page is displayed, and the Export tab in the RBI Export and
Import workspace is selected by default.
2. In the Select Asset ID list, select the Equipment records that you want to export.
In the following image, the Equipment records with the Record IDs HXST 38 and
HXST 39 are selected in the Select Asset ID list.

The selected Equipment records and their Active Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records are displayed in the results grid on the Export tab in the RBI Export and Import
workspace.
4. In the File Name text box, specify the name and location of the Microsoft Excel
file to which you want to export the Equipment and associated RBI record data.
The following image shows an example of a Microsoft Excel file specified in the
File Name text box.
5. Click the Export All button.

The Export Status window appears, displaying the status of the export procedure.
You can save a log of the export to an external file by clicking the Save Log button.
The Export Status window closes, and the RBI Export and Import page returns to focus.
7. Open the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported the data, and enter new data
and/or modify existing data that you want to import to the Meridium APM
Framework.
About the Microsoft Excel Template for

Exporting and Importing RBI Data
When you perform the export process, a spreadsheet template is applied automatically to
the Microsoft Excel file to which you are exporting data.
The spreadsheet template contains the following worksheets by default:
Information
RBI_Data_Load_Template
Internal_Corrosion
External_Corrosion
You should not delete any of these worksheets. If you delete any of these worksheets, you
will not be able to import data from the Microsoft Excel file.
The spreadsheet template may contain additional worksheets, depending upon the
Potential Degradation Mechanism records that are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records that are associated with the Equipment records for which you
performed the export procedure.
With the exception of the Information worksheet, which stores summary information
about the export procedure, certain columns that store information to identify the
Equipment records for which you performed the export procedure and their associated
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records are displayed on all worksheets in the
spreadsheet template. The following table lists these column labels, the fields in the
records to which they correspond, and notes about the columns that must contain values
in order for records to be created and/or updated successfully during the import
procedure.
Column label
Field Caption Record
Required?
ENTY_ID
Equipment
Yes
ASSET_ENTY_KEY ENTY_KEY
Equipment
Yes
ENTY_KEY
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Required for existing Criticality

Calculator RBI Components
records.
ASSET_ENTY_ID
ENTY_KEY
Component
Component
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Component
Description
Component
Description
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Required for new Criticality

records that will be created during
the import procedure.
No
One column label, COMP_FMLY_ID, does not correspond with a value in a field. This
column displays the Family ID of the family to which the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record in a given row belongs. This cell must contain a value in rows that
represent new Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that will be created during
the import procedure.
Information Worksheet
The Information worksheet in the spreadsheet template displays summary information
about the export procedure. This worksheet contains the following columns:
MERIDIUM_VERSION: Displays the Meridium APM version number that

corresponds with the version of the Meridium APM Framework installed on the
workstation that performed the export procedure.
EXPORT_DATE: Displays the date and time that the export procedure was
performed.
USER_ID: Displays the User ID of the Security User who performed the export
procedure.
USER_NAME: Displays the first and last name of the Security User who
performed the export procedure.
DATA_SOURCE: Displays the name of the database from which the export
procedure was performed.
RBI Data Load Template Worksheet

One row is displayed on the RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet for each Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to an Equipment record for which you
performed the export procedure. This worksheet displays data that is stored in the
following records that can be linked either directly or indirectly to these Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records:
RBI Criticality Analysis: Displays values if an RBI Criticality Analysis record

exists for the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. If more than one RBI
Criticality Analysis record is linked to a single Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record, the values in the RBI Criticality Analysis record that is in the
Risk Completed state will be displayed on the RBI_Data_Load_Template
worksheet. If NO RBI Criticality Analysis record that is linked to a single
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is in a Risk Completed state, the
values in the RBI Criticality Analysis record whose Date of Analysis field
contains the most recent value will be displayed on the RBI_Data_Load_Template
worksheet.
Criticality Consequence Evaluation: Displays values in the Criticality
Consequence Evaluation records that are linked to the associated RBI Criticality
Analysis records for which values are displayed.
In addition to the columns that are displayed on most worksheets in the spreadsheet
template, additional columns are displayed on the RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet.
The labels of these columns correspond with field captions in the records listed above.
Some of these columns apply only to certain types of records, and while none of these
cells are required to contain values, if they do contain values, they must meet certain
criteria in order for records to be created and/or updated successfully when you perform
the import procedure. The following table lists:
The labels of the additional columns that are displayed on the

RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet.
The family to which the columns correspond.
Notes about columns that apply only to certain types of records and whose cells
must contain certain values in order for records to be created and/or updated
successfully when you perform the import procedure.
Column
label/field
caption
Scenario ID
Family
Notes
RBI Criticality
Analysis
N/A
Circuit From
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
This cell applies only to Criticality RBI Component Piping records.
Circuit To
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Criticality
Component Type Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the

CriticalityItemType field in one of the
EquipmentTypes records delivered in the Meridium
APM baseline database.
Criticality
Component Start
Calculator RBI
Date
Component
N/A
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
Criticality
Design Pressure Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
Design
Temperature
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
Design
InnerDiameter
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
Nominal
Thickness
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
Equipment
Family
This cell must contain one of the following values:

Stress Lookup
Table
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Piping
Pressure Vessel
Tank
BM Code
BM Year
BM Spec
BM Grade
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the Design

Code field in the Meridium APM Reference Table
record that corresponds with the value the Stress
Lookup Table field in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the Code Year

field in the Meridium APM Reference Table record
that corresponds with the value the Stress Lookup
Table field in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the Material

Spec field in the Meridium APM Reference Table
Components record.
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the Material

Grade field in the Meridium APM Reference Table
Components record.
Allowable Stress RBI Criticality

Override
Analysis
Criticality
Allowable Stress Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
N/A

Weld Joint Effy
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.55
0.6
0.65
0.7
0.75
0.8
0.85
0.9
0.95
1.0
N/A
PWHT
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Insulated?
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Insulation Type
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
The value in this cell must be stored in the

InsulationType field in one of the InsulationType
records delivered in the Meridium APM baseline
database.
Injection Point
Circuit
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Piping Circuit
Length
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Operating
Pressure
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Operating
Temperature
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
N/A
N/A
N/A
Process Fluid
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Initial Fluid
Phase
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Toxic Mixture
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Toxic Model
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Percent Toxic
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Inventory
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Isolation Time
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Detection Time
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Consequence
Near Ignition
Source
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
The value in this cell must be stored in the Fluid field

in one of the RepresentativeFluids records delivered in
the Meridium APM baseline database.
The value in this cell must be one of the following
System Codes stored in the FLUID TYPES (Fluid
Types) System Code Table:
Liquid
Gas
N/A

the Meridium APM baseline database whose
FluidType field contains the value Toxic.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Lost Production Criticality
Category
Consequence
Evaluation
Diked?
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Diked Area
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
N/A
N/A
This cell applies only to Criticality Calculator RBI

Components records that are linked to one or more
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records.
Internal
Corrosion Type
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component

System Codes stored in the CORROSION TYPES
(Corrosion Types) System Code Table:
General
Localized
Pitting
Criticality
Expected Internal
Calculator RBI
Corrosion Rate
Component

Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records.
Expected
External
Corrosion Rate
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Component
Area Humidity
RBI Criticality
Analysis

Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records.
Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records.
Low
Medium
High
Operating
Pressure - Shell
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
This field applies only to Criticality Calculator RBI

Component - Exchanger Bundle records.
Operating
Temperature Shell
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components

Process Fluid Shell Side
Initial Fluid
Phase - Shell
Side
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Criticality
Toxic Mixture Calculator RBI
Shell Side
Components

the Meridium APM baseline database.
System Codes stored in the FLUID TYPES System
Code table:
Liquid
Gas

Toxic Fluid Shell Side
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Percent Toxic Shell Side
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
Leak Type
Criticality
Consequence

the Meridium APM baseline database whose
FluidType field contains the value Toxic.
N/A
Evaluation
Criticality
Toxic Leak Type Consequence
Evaluation
N/A
N/A
Inspection
Interval
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Product Unit
Value
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Fill Height
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components

Component - Tank Bottom records.
Bottom
Thickness
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation

Component - Tank Bottom records.
Criticality
Persistent Fluid? Consequence
Evaluation
N/A
N/A

Leak Effect
Criticality
Consequence
Evaluation
Ground
Ground Water
Surface Water

Mechanisms Worksheets
The spreadsheet template contains the following worksheets that display Potential
Degradation Mechanisms data, and in some cases, associated Criticality Degradation
Mech Evaluation data, by default:
Internal_Corrosion
External_Corrosion
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation data is displayed on these worksheets if an RBI

Criticality Analysis record existed for a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
that is linked to a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record at the time that the export
procedure was performed.
One additional worksheet is displayed in the spreadsheet template for each Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record with a unique Degradation Mechanism value that is
linked to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The Internal_Corrosion, External_Corrosion, and additional worksheets display different
columns that are associated with different records, but the Damage Mechanism column is
displayed on ALL of these worksheets and it must contain certain values in order for
records to be created and/or updated successfully during the import procedure.
The value in the Damage Mechanism column corresponds with the value in the
Degradation Mechanism field in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record
represented by that row in the worksheet, and in the case of RBI Criticality Analysis
records that existed for a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record at the time data
was exported, this value also corresponds with the value in the Damage Mechanism field
in the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record that is linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record. The values in these fields match exactly
because Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records are created when an RBI
Criticality Analysis record is created, based upon the corresponding Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
The following table lists the values that cells in the Damage Mechanism column must
contain on the following worksheets.
Worksheet
Damage Mechanism column value
Internal_Corrosion
External_Corrosion
Additional Degradation
Mechanisms worksheets
The value must match exactly the value in the

Degradation Mechanism field in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record represented by the

current row in the worksheet.
Internal Corrosion Worksheet

On the Internal_Corrosion worksheet in the spreadsheet template, one row is displayed
for each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record. Additionally, for each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record for which an RBI Criticality Analysis exists, Criticality Degradation
Mech Evaluation values are displayed on this worksheet. Specifically, this worksheet
displays data that is stored in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records that are
associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to
template, and the Damage Mechanism column, the following columns are displayed on
the Internal_Corrosion worksheet. The column labels correspond with Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. record field captions:
Selected Corrosion Rate

Insp Date
Number of Inspections
Damage Comments
External Corrosion Worksheet

On the External_Corrosion worksheet in the spreadsheet template, one row is displayed
for each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record. Additionally, for each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record for which an RBI Criticality Analysis exists, Criticality Degradation
Mech Evaluation values are displayed on this worksheet. Specifically, this worksheet
displays data that is stored in the Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records that are
associated with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to
template and the Damage Mechanism column, the following columns are displayed on
the External_Corrosion worksheet. The column labels correspond with Criticality Ext.
Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. record field captions. The following table lists the labels of the
additional columns that are displayed on the External_Corrosion worksheet and
information for columns whose cells must contain certain values for records to be created
and/or updated successfully when you perform the import procedure.
Column label/field
caption
Notes
Selected Corrosion
Rate
N/A
Insp Date
N/A
Number of
Inspections
N/A
Inspection Confidence N/A

Near Cooling Tower? NA/
A value in this cell is not required, but if it is populated, it must
Insulation Condition contain one of the following values:
Good
Fair
Poor
A value in this cell is not required, but if it is populated, it must
contain one of the following values:
Coating Quality
Damage Comments
None
Average
Best
N/A
Additional Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Worksheets
One additional worksheet is displayed in the spreadsheet template for each Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record with a unique Degradation Mechanism value that is
linked to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. The labels of these worksheets
correspond with the value in the Degradation Mechanism field in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record. For each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
for which an RBI Criticality Analysis exists, values in the Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record that corresponds with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record
are displayed on these worksheets.
For example, consider an Equipment record whose Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record is linked to Potential Degradation Mechanisms records with the
following Degradation Mechanism values:
Brittle Fracture
Caustic Cracking
When you perform the export procedure for this Equipment record, the spreadsheet
template would contain the following worksheets:
Information
RBI_Data_Load_Template
Internal_Corrosion
External_Corrosion
Brittle_Fracture
Caustic_Cracking
Note that the spreadsheet template would contain the External_Corrosion worksheet
even though none of the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records have a Degradation
Mechanism value of Criticality Calculator External Corrosion, because the spreadsheet
template contains the External_Corrosion worksheet by default.
In addition to the columns that are displayed on most worksheets, additional columns are
displayed on these worksheets depending upon the type of Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation record that corresponds with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
Additionally, if an RBI Criticality Analysis record exists for the associated Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record, the columns that correspond with Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation fields contain values.
If the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record corresponds with a Criticality

Env. Crack Deg. Mech. Eval. record (the DM Methodology value in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record is Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval.), the
columns displayed on these worksheets correspond with fields in Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval. records. The following columns are displayed on these
worksheets:
Damage Mechanism
Initial Potential
Inspection Date
Damaged At Last Inspection
Env_Cracking Higher Levels
Cyanides?
Damage Comments
In order for values in Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval. records to be updated
successfully when you perform the import procedure, values in cells in the Damage
Mechanism column on these worksheets must match the value in the Degradation
Mechanism field in a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record whose DM Methodology
value is Criticality Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval.
If the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record corresponds with a Criticality

Other Damage Mech. Eval. record (the DM Methodology value in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record is Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval.), the
columns displayed on these worksheets correspond with fields in Criticality Other
Damage Mech. Eval. records. The following columns are displayed on these
worksheets:
Damage Mechanism
Damage Comments
In order for values in Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval. records to be update
successfully when you perform the import procedure, values in cells in the Damage
Mechanism column on these worksheets must match the value in the Degradation
Mechanism field in a Potential Degradation Mechanism record whose DM Methodology
value is Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval.
Continuing with the example at the beginning of this topic, the Brittle_Fracture
worksheet in the spreadsheet template would contain the following columns because a
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism value Brittle
Fracture corresponds with a Criticality Other Damage Mech. Eval. record:
Damage Mechanism
Damage Comments
Additionally, the value in the Damage Mechanism cell on this worksheet should be
Brittle Fracture.
Continuing further with the example, the Caustic_Cracking worksheet in the spreadsheet
template would contain the following columns because a Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism value Caustic Cracking
corresponds with a Criticailty Env. Crack. Deg. Mech. Eval. record:
Damage Mechanism
Initial Potential
Inspection Date
Env_Cracking Higher Levels
Cyanides?
Damage Comments
Additionally, the value in the Damage Mechanism cell on this worksheet should be
Caustic Cracking.
Using the Microsoft Excel Template for

Exporting and Importing RBI Data
After you have exported RBI data to a Microsoft Excel file, you can enter and/or modify
data in the file that will be used to do the following when you perform the import
procedure:
Create new or update existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that
are linked to an Equipment record for which you performed the export procedure.
Create new links between Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are
provided in the baseline Meridium APM database to a given Criticality Calculator
Remove existing links between a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record and a

Create new RBI Criticality Analysis records that are linked to a given Criticality
Create new Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records from existing

analysis data.
Create new Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records from new analysis
data.
Create new Criticality Consequence Evaluation records.
It is important to note that beyond the fields that are required to import data to create new
or update existing RBI records, no validation is performed on any other fields in these
records. For this reason, it is important that you populate the Microsoft Excel file that you
will use to import data according to the guidelines defined in this documentation.
Creating New Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Records
In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, on the
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet, one row is displayed for each Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to each Equipment record for which
you performed the export procedure. When you perform the import procedure, new
Criticality Calculator RBI Components records will be created for Equipment records for
which you add one or more rows and specify data on the RBI Data Load Template
worksheet, and RBI Criticality Analysis records will be created and linked to these
To create new a new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
1. In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, on the
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet, in a new row, in the ASSET_ENTY_ID cell,
type the Record ID of the Equipment record to which you want the new Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record to be linked.
2. In the ASSET_ENTY_KEY cell, type the Entity Key of the Equipment record to
which you want the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to be
linked.
3. In the COMP_FMLY_ID cell, type the Family ID of the new Criticality Calculator
4. In the Component cell, type the value that should be populated in the Component
field in the new Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
5. Type any additional values that you want in cells that correspond with Criticality
When you perform the import procedure:
A Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you specified

this information on the RBI Data Load Template worksheet will be created
and linked to the specified Equipment record.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created and linked to the new
Repeat these steps for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want
to create.
Updating Existing Criticality Calculator

you performed the export procedure. If you modify any of the data for an existing
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record on the RBI_Data_Load_Template
worksheet, when you perform the import procedure, these Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records will be updated, and RBI Criticality Analysis records will be created
and linked to Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
While you can update Criticality Calculator RBI Components values for existing records,
you cannot modify data that would link an existing Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record to an Equipment record to which it is not currently linked. In other
words, you cannot modify the value in the ASSET_ENTY_KEY column on the
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet for an existing Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record. If you do this, when you perform the import procedure, the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record will not be updated and it will remain
linked to the Equipment record to which it was linked at the time you performed the
export procedure.
To update an existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet, in the row representing the Criticality
Calculator RBI Component record that you want to modify, modify existing
values or enter new values in the columns that correspond with Criticality
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for which you

modified existing values or entered new values will be updated.
A RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created and linked to the
Repeat these steps for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want
to update.

Mechanisms Records and Criticality
Calculator RBI Components Record
The Internal_Corrosion, External_Corrosion, and additional worksheets that are
displayed in the spreadsheet template store information for each Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
In the case of Criticality Calculator RBI Component records for which RBI Criticality
Analysis records exist, these worksheets also display Criticality Degradation Mech
Evaluation data that corresponds with the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record.
In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, on these worksheets, you can
enter and/or remove data so that links between Potential Degradation Mechanisms
records and Criticality Calculator RBI Components records will be created or removed
when you perform the import procedure.
You will create links between Potential Degradation Mechanisms records and Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records using existing worksheets in the spreadsheet
template or in a new worksheet, depending upon the value in the Degradation Mechanism
field in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that you want to link to a Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record and the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records
that are already linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
For example, consider the following Equipment records and their associated Criticality
Calculator RBI Components and Potential Degradation Mechanisms records:
An Equipment record, Equipment A, is linked to a Criticality RBI Component Cylindrical Shell record, Cylindrical Shell 1. Cylindrical Shell 1 is linked to two
Potential Degradation Mechanisms records containing the following values in the
Degradation Mechanism field:
Brittle Fracture
An Equipment record, Equipment B, is linked to a Criticality RBI Component Cylindrical Shell record, Cylindrical Shell 2. Cylindrical Shell 2 is linked to two
Potential Degradation Mechanisms records containing the following values in the
Degradation Mechanism field:
Caustic Cracking
After you have performed the export procedure for these Equipment records and you are
working in the spreadsheet template, if you want to link a Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism value Brittle Fracture to
Cylindrical Shell 2, you would do so by adding a row to the Brittle_Fracture worksheet
in the spreadsheet template, which exists because of the corresponding Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to Cylindrical Shell 1.
Continuing with the example, if you wanted to link a Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record with the Degradation Mechanism value Carbonate Cracking to Cylindrical Shell 1
or Cylindrical Shell 2, you would need to create an additional worksheet in the
spreadsheet template because this type of Potential Degradation Mechanisms record is
not already linked to either of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, and
therefore the spreadsheet template does not contain a corresponding worksheet.
Continuing further with the example, if you wanted to link a Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism value Criticality Calculator
External Corrosion to Cylindrical Shell 1 or Cylindrical Shell 2, you would do so by
adding a row to the External_Corrosion worksheet, which is always included in the
spreadsheet template.
Regardless of the worksheet that you use to link a Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, when you perform the import
procedure:
An RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created and linked to the associated
A Criticality Degradation Mechanism Evaluation record is created and linked to
the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
An RBI Degradation Mechanisms record is created and linked to the RBI

A Criticality Consequence Evaluation record is created and linked to the RBI

Linking Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records Using an Existing
Worksheet
If you want to link a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to a Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record whose Degradation Mechanism value matches the
Degradation Mechanism value in a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is
already linked to one or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records, you would
use an existing worksheet in the spreadsheet template.
Components record using an existing worksheet in the spreadsheet template:
1. In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, select the worksheet
that corresponds with the Degradation Mechanism value in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record that you want to link to a Criticality Calculator
2. In a new row, in the ASSET_ENTY_ID cell, type the Record ID of the Equipment
record to which the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
which the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
4. In the COMP_FMLY_ID cell, type the Family ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record to which you want to link the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record.
5. If you are linking a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record to:
o
An existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, in the

ENTY_KEY column, type the Entity Key of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Mechanisms record.
A Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that will be created when

you perform the import procedure, in the Component column, type the
value that you typed in the Component cell on the
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet for the new Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record to which you want to link the Potential

6. In the Damage Mechanism cell, type the value that is stored in the Degradation
Mechanism field in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that you want
to link to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
A Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation

Mechanism value that you specified will be linked to the Criticality
Calculator Components record.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created and linked to the

associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
A Criticality Degradation Mechanism Evaluation record is created and

linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis record.

A Criticality Consequence Evaluation record is created and linked to the

Linking Potential Degradation

Mechanisms Records Using a New
Worksheet
You would create a new worksheet in the spreadsheet template if you want to link a
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to a Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record whose Degradation Mechanism value does not match the Degradation Mechanism
value in a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is already linked to one or more
Components record using a new worksheet in the spreadsheet template:
1. In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, create a new
worksheet. You should label the worksheet in a way that it is clear to users of the
Microsoft Excel file that the worksheet corresponds with a Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record with a certain Degradation Mechanism value.
For example, if you are creating a worksheet to link a Potential Degradation Mechanisms
record with a Degradation Mechanism value of Carbonate Cracking to a Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, you might label the worksheet Carbonate_Cracking.
2. Beginning with the first column in the spreadsheet, create the following column
labels in the following order:
o ASSET_ENTY_ID
o
ASSET_ENTY_KEY
COMP_FMLY_ID
ENTY_KEY
Component
Damage Mechanism
3. In the second row, in the ASSET_ENTY_ID cell, type the Entity ID of the
Equipment record to which the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is
linked.
which the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record is linked.
5. In the COMP_FMLY_ID cell, type the Family ID of the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components record to which you want to link the Potential Degradation
Mechanisms record.
6. If you are linking a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record to:
o
An existing Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, in the

ENTY_KEY column, type the Entity Key of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Mechanism record.
A Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that will be created when

you perform the import procedure, in the Component column, type the
value that you typed in the Component cell on the
RBI_Data_Load_Template worksheet for the new Criticality Calculator

RBI Components record to which you want to link the Potential
Degradation Mechanism record.
7. In the Damage Mechanism cell, type the value that is stored in the Degradation
Mechanism field in the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that you want
to link to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
A Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation

Mechanism value that you specified will be linked to the Criticality
Calculator Components record.

associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.



Removing the Link Between a Potential

Degradation Mechanisms Record and a
Record
If you remove certain data on the Internal_Corrosion, External_Corrosion, or additional
worksheets in the spreadsheet template, when you perform the import procedure, the link
between Potential Degradation Mechanisms records and Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records will be removed.
To remove the link between a Potential Degradation Mechanism record and a Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record:
that corresponds with the Degradation Mechanism value in the Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record whose link to a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record you want to remove.
For example, if you want to remove the link between a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record and a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with a Degradation
Mechanism value of Carbonate Cracking, you would select the Carbonate_Cracking
worksheet.
2. In the row associated with the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
whose link to a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record you want to remove,
clear the cell in the Damage Mechanism column.
-orDelete the row associated with the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record whose
link to a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record you want to remove.
The link will be removed between the Potential Degradation Mechanisms

record and the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
Creating New RBI Criticality Analysis

Records
When you perform the import procedure, based upon data that you specified in the
Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, a new RBI Criticality Analysis
record is created and linked to any Criticality Calculator RBI Components record:
That you created or updated.
For which you created or removed a link to one or more Potential Degradation
Mechanisms records.
Additionally, the following records are created and linked to the new RBI Criticality
Analysis records that are created during the import procedure:

Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
Creating a New Criticality Degradation

Mech Evaluation Records from
Existing Analysis Data
In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, on the Internal Corrosion,
External Corrosion, and any additional worksheet that is displayed for an associated
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record, one row is displayed for each Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality Calculator RBI
Component record. Additionally, for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
for which an RBI Criticality Analysis exists, Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
values are displayed on these worksheets. If you modify any of the data for an existing
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record on one of these worksheets, when you
perform the import procedure, a new RBI Criticality Analysis record will be created and
linked to the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record, and a new
Criticality Degradation Mechanism Evaluation record will be created and linked to the
To create a new Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record from existing analysis
data:
for the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is associated with the
existing Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record from which you want to
create a new Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record.
2. In the row containing the Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation data from
which you want to create a new Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record,
modify existing values or enter new values in the columns that correspond with
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation fields.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record is created and linked to the associated



Repeat these steps for each existing Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record that
you want to create from an existing Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record.
Creating New Criticality Degradation

Mech Evaluation Records From New
Analysis Data
In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, on the Internal Corrosion,
External Corrosion, and any additional worksheet that is displayed for an associated
Potential Degradation Mechanisms record, one row is displayed for each Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality Calculator RBI
Component record. Additionally, for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record
for which an RBI Criticality Analysis exists, Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation
values are displayed on these worksheets. When you perform the import procedure,
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation records will be created for any new row that
you create on these worksheets.
To create a Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record from new analysis data:
1. In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, link a new Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record.
2. In the row representing the Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that you
linked to a Criticality Calculator for which you want to create a new Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation record, enter values in the cells in columns that
correspond with Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation fields.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record is created and linked to the associated



Repeat these steps for each existing Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record that
you want to create from scratch.
Creating New Criticality Consequence

Evaluation Records
you performed the export procedure. Some of the columns displayed on this worksheet
correspond with fields in Criticality Consequence Evaluation records that are associated
with Criticality Calculator RBI Components records for which RBI Criticality Analysis
records exist.
When you perform the import procedure, a new Criticality Consequence Evaluation
record will be created and linked to any RBI Criticality Analysis record that is created
during the import procedure.
Additionally, if you want to create a new Criticality Consequence Evaluation record from
an existing Criticality Consequence record, you can modify the data for an existing
Criticality Consequence Evaluation record on the RBI Data Load Template worksheet.
When you do this, as a result of the import procedure, a new RBI Criticality Analysis
record will be created and a new Criticality Consequence Evaluation record will be
created and linked the RBI Criticality Analysis record.
To create a new Criticality Consequence Evaluation record from an existing record:
1. In the Microsoft Excel file to which you exported RBI data, select the
2. In the row containing the Criticality Consequence Evaluation data from which
you want to create a new Criticality Consequence Evaluation record, modify
existing values or enter new values in the cells in columns that correspond with
Criticality Consequence Evaluation fields.
A RBI Criticality Analysis record is created and linked to the associated

Repeat these steps for each existing Criticality Consequence Evaluation record from
which you want to create new Criticality Consequence Evaluation records.
Importing RBI Data

After you have entered new or modified existing RBI data in a Microsoft Excel file to
which you exported RBI data, you can perform the import procedure to import data to the
Meridium APM Framework to create new RBI records and/or update or delete existing
RBI records.
To import RBI data:
1. On the RBI Export and Import page, in the RBI Export and Import workspace,
select the Import tab.
2. In the File Name text box, specify the Microsoft Excel file name and location
from which you want to import RBI data. The following image shows an example
of a Microsoft Excel file specified in the File Name text box.
3. Click the Import button.

The Import Status window appears, displaying the results of the import process.
You can save a log of the import by clicking the Save Log button.
The Import Status window closes, and the RBI Export and Import page returns to focus.
RBI records are created and/or updated based upon the data specified in the selected
Microsoft Excel file.
Interpreting Import Errors

If there are errors associated with the import procedure, they are displayed in the grid on
the Import Status window. The Message column in the grid provides details about the
specific error that occurred. The following table lists the values that can be displayed in
the Message column and what they mean. This list is not comprehensive.
This value in the Message

column:
Component is inactive.
Component skipped.
Component skipped. The existing

component <Criticality Calculator
RBI Components Record ID> is
not linked to the Asset
<Equipment Record ID>
...indicates that:
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for
which you are trying to create or update RBI data is
inactive, and you cannot create or update RBI data for
inactive Criticality Calculator RBI Components records.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record for
which you are trying to update or create RBI data is not
linked to one of the Equipment records for which you are
importing data.
Error reading file.
There is a problem with the Microsoft Excel file from

which you are importing data.
Import Failed : <Error message> The import process was not successful, and provides
additional details on the error(s).
Invalid value for Damage
Mechanism. Worksheet error:
<Worksheet label>
A value in a Damage Mechanism cell on the

Internal_Corrosion, External_Corrosion, or an additional
worksheet contains an invalid value.
Unable to add Potential

<Potential Degradation
Mechanisms Record ID>
Data was entered incorrectly on the Internal_Corrosion,

External_Corrosion, and/or an additional worksheet(s).
Unable to create analysis for RBI

Component <Criticality
Data was entered incorrectly on the
Record ID>:Error message
Unable to find Asset. Asset
skipped.
Unable to create component.
Component skipped.
An Equipment record whose Record ID you specified in

the import file does not exist in your database.
In the import file, on the RBI_Data_Load_Template
worksheet:
A value that you entered in a cell in the

Component column does not correspond with a
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record in
your database.
-or-
A cell in the ENTY_KEY column for a Criticality

Calculator RBI Components record does not
contain a value.
Worksheet <Worksheet label> not

The specific worksheet does not exist in the import file.
found
An Example of the RBI Export and

Import Process
The following example illustrates the process of performing the export procedure,
updating data in the Microsoft Excel file to which data was exported, performing the
import procedure, and the impact of performing these actions on records that are stored in
the database.
A system in your facility includes the following Equipment records with the following
Equipment IDs, for which you want to export RBI data:
HXST 144
HXST 145
HXST 146
On the Export tab on the RBI Export and Import page, you specify that you want to
export the data for these records and their associated RBI records, and you specify a file
to which the data should be exported. The following image shows an example of the RBI
Export and Import page with this information specified.
You perform the export procedure, and the data for the selected records is exported to the
Microsoft Excel file that you specified. The following image shows an example of the
Internal_Corrosion worksheet selected in the Microsoft Excel file to which the data was
exported.
Note that a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanisms
value Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion is linked to all Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records except the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with the
Component value RBIComp-~CRUDE-HVY.ATMOS.GAS POIL~HXST144-EB-861,
which is linked to the Equipment record with Equipment ID HXST 144.
You want this Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to be linked to a Potential
Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanisms value Criticality
Calculator Internal Corrosion, so on the Internal_Corrosion worksheet, you add a row for
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with the Component value RBIComp-
~CRUDE-HVY.ATMOS.GAS POIL~HXST144-EB-861. In the following image, the

new row is selected.
You also want a Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation
Mechanism value Caustic Cracking to be linked to each Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record, so you add one additional worksheet, labeled Caustic_Cracking,
and you create one row for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. The
following image shows an example of the Caustic_Cracking worksheet with this new
data defined.
You save the updates to the Microsoft Excel file, and you specify that this file should be
used to import data. The following image shows an example of the Import tab on the RBI
Export and Import page with this information specified.
When you import the data, based upon the data that you specified in the Microsoft Excel
file:
A Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism

value Caustic Cracking is linked to ALL of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records.
A Potential Degradation Mechanisms record with the Degradation Mechanism

value Criticality Calculator Internal Corrosion is linked to the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record with the Component value RBIComp~CRUDE-HVY.ATMOS.GAS POIL~HXST144-EB-861.
An RBI Criticality Analysis record is created and linked to ALL of the Criticality
A Criticality Degradation Mechanism Evaluation record that corresponds with

each Potential Degradation Mechanisms record that is linked to each Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record is created and linked to each RBI Criticality
Analysis record that was created for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record.
A Criticality Consequence Evaluation record is created and linked to each of the

RBI Criticality Analysis records that were created and linked to each of the
Overview of RBI Calculations

An RBI Analysis includes an RBI Criticality Analysis record and the successor records to
which it is linked that contain risk information about the RBI Component for which the
analysis was created. As you conduct RBI Analyses, calculations and validations are
performed, and the results are stored in various RBI records.
In this section of the documentation, we provide descriptions of the calculations and
validations that are performed within an RBI Analysis. This section of the documentation
does not provide comprehensive information for all of the calculations and validations
performed within an RBI Analysis. The following descriptions are classified according to
the type of record for which the calculation or validation is performed:
Criticality Calculator RBI Components Calculations: Stores summary

information and calculations that are performed using information in Criticality
RBI Degradation Mechanisms Calculations: Stores summary information and
calculations that are performed using information in RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records.
Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation Calculations: Stores summary
information and calculations that are performed using information in Criticality
Degradation Mech Evaluation records.
About Calculated Inventory

In order to calculate an RBI Analysis, you must enter a value manually in the Inventory
field in the RBI Criticality Analysis record. The value that you enter in this field should
match either the value in either the Inventory field or the value in the Calculated
Inventory field in the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. These
values are displayed on the Operating and Process tab of the corresponding datasheet for
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. The following image shows an
example of the Operating and Process tab of the RBI Comp - Exchanger Tube datasheet,
where a red outline has been added to the image to highlight these fields.
The Meridium APM system automatically calculates the value in the Calculated
Inventory field in the following Criticality Calculator RBI Components records:

The formula that is used to determine Calculated Inventory depends upon the value in the
Initial Fluid Phase field in the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
If the value in the Initial Fluid Phase field is Gas, the Calculated Inventory for
gases formula is used.
If the value in the Initial Fluid Phase field is Liquid, the Calculated Inventory for
liquids formula is used.
You can specify that the Calculated Inventory value be used to populate the Inventory
field in the associated Criticality Consequence Evaluation record by setting the Use
Calculated Inventory field in the Criticality Consequence Evaluation to True.
Calculated Inventory for Gases

The Calculated Inventory for gases formula is used to determine Calculated Inventory for
the following Criticality Calculator RBI Components records whose Initial Fluid Phase
field contains the value Gas:

Calculated Inventory for gases is determined using the following formula:
Calculated Inventory for gases = (P x V) / ((R / MolWt) x (T + 459.67))

...where:
P is the value in the Operating Pressure field in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
V is the Volume that is calculated for the gas that is associated with the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components.
MolWt is the MolWt defined by the RepresentativeFluids reference table for the
fluid specified in the Process Fluid field in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
T is the value in the Operating Temperature field in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
R is the value 1,545, a universal gas constant.
The value 459.67 is the temperature constant, 459.67
For example, consider:
A Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with the following values:

Component Type: Heat Exchanger - Shell
Process Fluid: CO
Initial Fluid Phase: Gas
Operating Pressure: 500
Operating Temperature = 100
An associated Criticality Consequence Evaluation record whose Volume field

contains the value 6,785.8401.
MolWt for the Process Fluid CO is 28.
Based upon these values, Calculated Inventory for gases would be calculated like this:
Calculated Inventory for gases = (P x V) / ((R / Mol Wt) x (T + 459.67))
Calculated Inventory for gases = (500 x 6,785.8401) / ((1,545 / 28) x (100 + 459.67))
Calculated Inventory for gases = (3,392,920.05) / (30,881.8071)
Calculated Inventory for gases = 109.8679
Calculated Inventory for Liquids

The Calculated Inventory for liquids formula is used to determine Calculated Inventory
for the following Criticality Calculator RBI Components records whose Initial Fluid
Phase field contains the value Liquid:

Calculated Inventory for liquids is determined using the following formula:

Calculated Inventory for liquids = Density x Volume
...where:
Density is determined for the Process Fluid in the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record according to the RepresentativeFluids reference table.
Volume is the value in the Volume field in the associated Criticality Consequence
Evaluation record.
For example, consider:
A Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with the following values:
Process Fluid: Asphalt
Initial Fluid Phase: Liquid
An associated Criticality Consequence Evaluation record whose Volume field

contains the value 1,336.2677.
Density for the Process Fluid Asphalt is 49.
Based upon these values, Calculated Inventory for liquids would be calculated like this:
Calculated Inventory for liquids = Density x Volume
Calculated Inventory for liquids = 49 x 1,3636.2677
Calculated Inventory for liquids = 65,477.1177
Volume
Volume is calculated in Criticality Consequence Evaluation records using values that are
stored in the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record. Volume is used an
input to the calculations for Calculated Inventory for gases and liquids.
Volume is calculated using one of two calculations, depending upon the value in the
Component Type field in the associated Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The following equation is used to calculate volume for the following Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records that contain a value other than Storage Tanks in the
Component Type field:

Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Head
Volume = x (r / 24)2 x (l / 12)

...where:
r = Diameter InnerDiameter
l = Length
For example, consider a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record with the following
values:
Component Type: Heat Exchanger - Shell

Diameter InnerDiameter: 35
Length: 2400
Volume would be calculated like this:

Volume = x (r / 24)2 x (l / 12)
Volume = x (35/24) 2 x (2400 / 12)
Volume = x (1.4583) 2 x (200)
Volume = x 2.1267 x 200
Volume = 1,336.2677
The following equation is used to determine volume for Criticality Calculator RBI
Component - Tank Bottom records that contain the value Storage Tanks in the
Component Type field:
Volume = x (r / 24)2 x h
...where:
r = Diameter InnerDiameter
h = Fill Height
For example, consider a Criticality Calculator RBI Component - Tank Bottom record
with the following values:
Component Type: Storage Tanks

Diameter InnerDiameter = 48
Fill Height = 195
Volume would be calculated like this:

Volume = x (r / 24)2 x h
Volume = x (48/24)2 x 195
Volume = x (4)2 x 195
Volume = 1,193.8052
Inspection Priority
When you calculate an RBI Analysis, in each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record that is
linked to the RBI Criticality Analysis record, the values in the following fields are
calculated automatically:
Together, the values are used to determine the Inspection Priority, which is stored in the
Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) field in the same RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record.
Specifically, to determine the Inspection Priority, the Probably of Failure and Combined
Consequence are plotted on a matrix that looks like this:
Note: You can view this matrix by viewing the Criticality Analysis datasheet for the RBI
Criticality Analysis family.
For example, suppose the calculated Probability of Failure is 5 and the calculated
Combined Consequence is B. In the matrix, if you were to view the cell at the
intersection of the probability row of 5 and the consequence column of B, you would see
the number 19.
If you were to view the Degradation Mechanisms datasheet for this RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record, you would see these same values, where 19 is the Inspection
Priority, as shown in the following image.
Overview of How Unmitigated Risk is

Calculated
When you calculate an RBI Analysis, the unmitigated risk and unmitigated financial risk
for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record is calculated automatically and stored in
the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record. The calculation is performed using Risk
Translation records.
Note: If the administrative Risk Assessment check box is selected and you have created a
custom calculator (a non-baseline calculator), the Risk Matrix will also be populated with
unmitigated risk values. This documentation does not explain how to create a custom
calculator for this purpose. It assumes that if you want unmitigated risk to be displayed in
the Risk Matrix, you have created your own calculator and that you understand how it
calculates and displays unmitigated risk in the Risk Matrix. This documentation explains
only how unmitigated risk is calculated and stored in RBI Degradation Mechanisms
records using Risk Translation records.
Unmitigated Risk
When you calculate an RBI Analysis, the Meridium APM system locates the Criticality
Consequence Evaluation record to which it is linked. In that Criticality Consequence
Evaluation record, the following fields contain a value, which represents a consequence
on the same Risk Matrix that was used to calculate the Inspection Priority:
Flammable Consequence Category

Toxic Consequence Category
Environmental Consequence Category
Note: The Environmental Consequence Category field will contain a value only if the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record contains the value Storage Tank - Bottom
in the Component Type field.
To determine the unmitigated risk for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms record, the
Meridium APM system plots the following values on the Risk Matrix to determine a
temporary unmitigated risk value:
The highest value from the fields in the previous list.

The calculated Probability of Failure in the RBI Degradation Mechanism record.
The Meridium APM system then locates the Risk Translation record with this temporary
unmitigated risk value in the Source Risk Rank field and the value No (N) in the
Financial? field. The value in the Risk Matrix Rank field in that Risk Translation record
is then displayed on the Risk Details tab of the Degradation Mechanism datasheet, at the
intersection of the Unmitigated Risk row and Strategy Risk Rank column.
For instance, consider the following example, where a Criticality Consequence
Evaluation record contains the following values:
Flammable Consequence Category: B

Toxic Consequence Category: C
Environmental Consequence Category: None
Of the three values, when plotted on the Risk Matrix, B represents the highest
consequence.
In addition, in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record Criticality Calculator External
Corrosion, the Probability of Failure is 5:
The consequence B and the Probability of Failure 5 are then plotted on the Risk Matrix to
determine a temporary unmitigated risk value. Where they two values intersect, the value
19 appears, as shown in the following image.
The value 19 is then compared to the values in the Source Risk Rank field in Risk
Translation records. The Risk Translation record with the value 19 in the Source Risk
Rank field is shown in the following image.
From this image, you can see that the value in the Risk Matrix Rank field is 10.
If you were to view the Degradation Mechanism datasheet for this RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record, you would see the value 10 on the Risk Details tab.
Unmitigated Financial Risk

When you calculate an RBI Analysis, the Meridium APM system locates the Criticality
Consequence Evaluation record to which it is linked. In that Criticality Consequence
Evaluation record, the following fields contain a value, which represents a consequence
on the same Risk Matrix that was used to calculate the Inspection Priority:
Lost Production Category

Product Leak Category
Note: The Product Leak Consequence field will contain a value only if the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record contains the value Heat Exchanger - Bundle in the
Component Type field.
To determine the unmitigated financial risk for each RBI Degradation Mechanisms
record, the Meridium APM system plots the following values on the Risk Matrix to
determine a temporary unmitigated financial risk value:
The highest value from the fields in the previous list.

The calculated Probability of Failure in the RBI Degradation Mechanism record.
The Meridium APM system then locates the Risk Translation record with this temporary
unmitigated risk value in the Source Risk Rank field and the value Yes (Y) in the
Financial? field. The value in the Risk Matrix Rank field in that Risk Translation record
is then displayed on the Risk Details tab of the Degradation Mechanism datasheet, at the
intersection of the Unmitigated Financial Risk row and Strategy Risk Rank column.
For instance, consider the following example, where a Criticality Consequence
Evaluation record contains the following values:
Lost Production Category: C

Product Leak Category: None
Because there is no Product Leak Category value, C represents the highest consequence
when plotted on the Risk Matrix.
In addition, in the RBI Degradation Mechanisms record Criticality Calculator External
Corrosion, the Probability of Failure is 5, as shown in the following image.
The consequence C and the Probability of Failure 5 are then plotted on the Risk Matrix to
determine a temporary unmitigated financial risk value. Where they two values intersect,
the value 22 appears:
The value 22 is then compared to the values in the Source Risk Rank field in Risk
Translation records. The Risk Translation record with the value 22 in the Source Risk
Rank field is shown in the following image.
From this image, you can see that the value in the Risk Matrix Rank field is 5.
If you were to view the Degradation Mechanism datasheet for this RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record, you would see the value 5 on the Risk Details tab.
Equivalent Number of Inspections

The Equivalent Number of Inspections field is available on the baseline datasheets for the
following Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation families:
The value in this field is calculated automatically based upon:
The number of Inspection records that you assigned to the associated degradation
mechanism.
The values that exist in the Inspection Confidence fields in those Inspection
records.
The confidence equivalence factor that applies to those inspection confidence
values.
The confidence equivalence factor (EF) is determined using a standard set of confidence
values and equivalence numbers that are presented in a matrix format. This concept is
best understood through an example.
Example
Consider the scenario where a Criticality Degradation Mech Evaluation record is linked
to six Inspection records, where:
Two of those records contain the value Very High in the Inspection Confidence
field.
Four of those records contain the value Medium in the Inspection Confidence
field.
Hint: The Inspection Confidence field is not shown on the baseline Inspection datasheets.
You can see the value by adding the field to the datasheet or creating a query that
includes it.
To determine the value in the Equivalent Number of Inspections field, the following
equation is used (where EF stands for equivalency factor):
Equivalent Number of Inspections = (Very High EF x # Inspections with Very High
Confidence) + (High EF x # Inspections with High Confidence) + (Medium EF x #
Inspections with Medium Confidence) + (Low EF x # Inspections with Low Confidence)
To simplify the documentation, we will focus on the # Inspections with <Confidence
Value> Confidence part of the equation first.
Using the example with six Inspection records (two Very High and four Medium), the
equation would look like this:
Equivalent Number of Inspections = (Very High EF x 2) + (High EF x 0) + (Medium EF

x 4) + (Low EF x 0)
Because two of the parenthetical components have a multiplication factor of zero (0), we
can eliminate those from the equation, since the result would be zero (0). So, a simpler
version of the equation would look like this:
Equivalent Number of Inspections = (Very High EF x 2) + (Medium EF x 4)
You can see from the equation that the number of inspections with Very High and
Medium confidence (2 and 4) must be multiplied by the Very High and Medium
equivalency factors. The following matrix is used to determine which equivalency factors
to use.
Very High
High
Medium
Low
Confidence
Confidence
Confidence
Confidence
Very High EF
N/A
N/A
N/A
High EF
.333
N/A
N/A
Medium EF
.111
.333
N/A
Low EF
.037
.111
.333
First, the Meridium APM system determines the highest confidence among the Inspection
records that are included in the equation. In our example, since two of the Inspection
records have a Very High confidence and four have a Medium confidence, Very High is
the highest confidence among those records. So, in the matrix, the Meridium APM
system finds the column containing the confidence level Very High. In the table below,
this column is colored orange.
Very High
High
Medium
Low
Confidence
Confidence
Confidence
Confidence
Very High EF
N/A
N/A
N/A
High EF
.333
N/A
N/A
Medium EF
.111
.333
N/A
Low EF
.037
.111
.333
The numbers in this column are then used to determine the equivalency factors to plug
into the equation. So far, the equation looks like this:
...where:
Very High EF is the value at the intersection of the Very High EF row and the
Very High Confidence column.
Medium EF value is the value at the intersection of the Medium EF row and the
Very High Confidence column.
In this case:
Very High EF = 1
Medium EF = .111
You can see these numbers in blue in the table below. Note that because their values are
not used in the equation, the remaining columns have been removed from the table to
simplify the example.
Very High
Confidence
Very High EF
High EF
.333
Medium EF
.111
Low EF
.037
Understanding now how the Very High EF and Medium EF values are derived, we can
now look at the entire equation again.
Equivalent Number of Inspections = (Very High EF x # Inspections with Very High
Confidence) + (Medium EF x # Inspections with Medium Confidence)
Equivalent Number of Inspections = (1 x 2) + (.111 x 4)
Equivalent Number of Inspections = 2 + .444
Equivalent Number of Inspections = 2.444

Because the final number contains a decimal less than 0.5, it is rounded down. So, the
final result is:
Equivalent Number of Inspections = 2
About the RBI Catalog Folder Structure

The following topics contain explanations of the folders that exist in the Catalog
folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection, information about the files
they contain by default, and details on how these files can be used by RBI users. This
information is intended to serve as a quick reference to details that are provided
elsewhere in the specific RBI instructions.
Note: All of the Public folders exist by default. Any item in a Public folder is also
available in the corresponding Baseline folder. Throughout this documentation, however,
we refer to items in the Public folder.
Queries Folder
Mapping Queries Folder
Policy Queries Folder
Strategies Folder
Report Queries
Reports
Queries Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries contains
the queries listed in the following table. In this table, the values listed in the Query
column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the same as the query
names.
IMPORTANT: You should not modify the name of these queries or move them to
another Catalog folder.
Query
Export RBI
Components by
Asset
Behavior and Usage

Used to return results on the RBI Export and Import page. In the
baseline Meridium APM database, the Export RBI Components by
Asset query is configured to return Equipment records that are linked
to Active Criticality Calculator RBI Components records and
Equipment records that are not linked to at least one Criticality
Used to return results on the Find Inspection Groups page. In the

Manage Inspection baseline Meridium APM database, the Manage Inspection Groups
Groups
query is configured to return Asset Group records that are linked to
Functional Location records that represent units.
Manage RBI
Components
Used to return results on the RBI Component List page. In the baseline
Meridium APM database, the Manage RBI Components query is
configured to return Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
that are linked to Equipment records.
Used to return results on the RBI System List page. In the baseline
Meridium APM database, the Manage RBI System query is configured
Manage RBI System to return RBI System records that are linked to Functional Location
records. Specifically, the Process Unit prompt is designed to filter these
Functional Location records to display only units.
Recommendations
by Asset
Used for displaying RBI Recommendation records in Recommendation

Management when you access Recommendation Management from
RBI.
Used to return results on the RBI - Review Analyses page. In the

baseline Meridium APM database, the query is configured to return all
Review Analyses by
RBI Criticality Analysis records not in an Archived state for the
Asset
Equipment or Functional Location record for which you accessed the
RBI Asset View page.
Select Protected
Assets
Used to return Equipment records on the Select Protected Equipment

window, which appears after you select the Assets - No Associated Risk
Analysis option on the Add Protected Equipment dialog box.
Used to return Criticality Calculator RBI Components records on the

Select Protected Equipment window, which appears after you select the
Components - Associated Risk Analysis option on the Add Protected
Select Protected RBI Equipment dialog box. In the baseline Meridium APM database, this
Components
query contains a prompt on the Equipment ID field, which you can use
to filter the results to return only Criticality Calculator RBI
Components records that are linked to the Equipment records with the
selected Equipment IDs.
Used to return results on the Find Existing RBI Components window,
which appears when you assign existing components to an RBI
System. In the baseline Meridium APM database, the query is
configured to return Criticality Calculator RBI Components records
that are:
Select RBI
Components
Linked to Equipment records.
Not linked to an RBI System record.
Used to return results on the Create Inspection Group dialog box. In
the baseline Meridium APM database, this query is configured to return
all Functional Location records that:
Select Unit for

Grouping
View All
Recommendations
Represent a unit.
Are linked to an RBI System record that is associated with RBI

Components.
Used to return results on the Manage Recommendations page. In the

baseline Meridium APM database, the View All Recommendations
query is configured to return Equipment records that are linked to RBI
Mapping Queries Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries\Mapping
Queries contains the queries listed in the following table. In this table, the values listed in
the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the same as
the query names.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Env Cracking Mapping
This query is not currently used by Meridium APM.
External Corrosion Mapping
Flammable Consequence
Mapping
Internal Corrosion Mapping
RBI-CNAFC Query
MI_CCRBICEB
The functionality that this query supports is not currently

documented.
RBI-CNAFC Query
MI_CCRBICOM

documented.
RBI-CNAFC Query
MI_CCRBICPI

documented.
RBI-CNAFC Query
MI_CCRBICTB

documented.
Toxic Consequence Mapping
Policy Queries Folder

The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries\Policy
Queries contains the queries listed in the following table. These queries are used by RBI
Strategy Mapping Groups when you generate RBI Recommendations records
automatically. In this table, the values listed in the Query column refer to the query
names. The baseline query captions are the same as the query names.
IMPORTANT: You should not modify the name of these queries or move them to
another Catalog folder.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Appendix B Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_B will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix D Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_D will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix E Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_E will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix F Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_F will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix G Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_G will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix H Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_H will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
Appendix I Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter Appendix_I will be used to generate RBI Recommendation records
automatically.
PRD Strategies Defines the criticality item types for which the Policy record
Component Type Filter PRD_Strategies will be used to generate RBI Recommendation
records automatically.
Strategies Folder
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Queries\Strategies
is empty by default. This folder is meant to contain queries that you want to use to
generate RBI Recommendation records. If you want to generate RBI Recommendation
records, you must store the associated queries in this folder.
IMPORTANT: You should not modify the name of this folder.
Report Queries
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Report Queries
contains the queries listed in the following table. In this table, the values listed in the
Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the same as the
query names.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Inspection
Group Report
Query
After displaying a prompt for an Entity Key, returns the Asset Group and
Grouping Element records that are linked to the record with the specified
Entity Key. This query supports the report Inspection Group Report that is
stored in the Reports folder.
Inspection
Group Report
Sub Query
After displaying a prompt for an Entity Key, returns the Grouping Element
records that are linked to the record with the specified Entity Key. This
query supports the Inspection Group Report that is stored in the Reports
folder.
Reports
The Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based Inspection\Reports contains
the reports listed in the following table. In this table, the values listed in the Report
column refer to the report names. The baseline report captions are the same as the report
names.
Report
Behavior and Usage
After displaying a prompt for an Entity Key, displays a summary of

Inspection Group
information related to the Grouping Element record with the specified
Excluded Sub Report
Entity Key.
Inspection Group
Report
After displaying a prompt for an Entity Key, displays a summary of

information related to the Asset Group record with the specified
Entity Key.
Inspection Task
In an RBI workflow, Inspection Task records can be created from or linked to RBI
Recommendation records, and they store information about inspections that you will
perform for locations or equipment that you analyze in RBI. The information in the table
reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Instead, this table lists only the fields whose behavior differs from the root Task family
fields because of rules that are defined specifically for Inspection Task records or for
Inspection Task records that are created from or linked to RBI Recommendation records.
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Field
Asset ID
Desired
Interval

Equipment or
Functional Location
Character
record to which the
Inspection Task is
linked.
When you create an Inspection Task record

via an RBI workflow in Recommendation
Management, this field is populated
automatically by the Meridium APM system.
This field must contain a value. When you

Number The interval at which do not enter a value in this field manually,
the inspection should the Meridium APM system populates this
field automatically in Inspection Task
be performed.
records that are created from or linked to
certain RBI Recommendation records
depending upon various factors.
This field contains the value 0 (zero) in

Inspection Task records that are not linked to
at least one RBI Recommendation record.
This field is disabled when either of the

following fields is set to False:
Override Interval
Reoccurring
This is a disabled field that the Meridium
APM system populates automatically with
one of the following values that are stored in
the INSM (Inspection Interval Types)
System Code Table:
Desired
Interval
Basis
Character The source of the

value in the Desired
Interval field.
RBI Recommendation: Indicates that

the value in the Desired Interval field
is the most conservative (i.e., lowest)
Recommended Interval Scope value
in all the RBI Recommendation
records that are linked to the
RBI Half Life: Indicates that the
value in the Desired Interval field is
the most conservative (i.e., lowest)
Estimated Half Life in all the
Equipment record that is associated
with the Inspection Task.
Time-Based Inspection Settings:

Indicates that the value in the Desired
Interval field is the most conservative
(i.e., lowest) Interval value in all the
records whose Task Type value
corresponds to the Task Type value in
the Inspection Task record.
TM Half Life: Indicates that the

value in the Desired Interval field is
the TM half-life of the Equipment
record that is associated with the
Desired
Interval
UOM
Last Date
The unit of measure

associated with the
Character
value in the Desired
Interval field.
Date
The most recent date

on which the task
represented by the
Inspection Task
record was
performed.
Undefined: Indicates that the value in

the Desired Interval field is 0 (zero)
or null.
User Defined: Indicates that the value

in the Desired Interval field was
entered manually.
By default, the value in this field is Months.
This field is disabled when the Reoccurring

check box is cleared (i.e., the Task record
represents a task that will be performed only
once). When this field is enabled, you can
clear the value in this field to define a Next
Date value, indicating that the task has not
been performed in the past but should be
performed at some point in the future.
The value in this field is set to 0 (i.e., zero)

by default when you create an Inspection
The maximum
Task record. When you define a Max
interval at which the Interval value, the Unconstrain Min/Max
Max Interval Number
task should be
Dates field is set automatically to False (i.e.,
completed.
the Unconstrain Min/Max Dates check box is
cleared), and the value that you define is
used to calculate the Max Date value.
The unit of measure
Max Interval
Character that is associated with By default, the value in this field is Months.
UOM
Max Interval value.
The value in this field is set to 0 (i.e., zero)
by default when you create an Inspection
The minimum
Task record. When you define a Min Interval
interval at which the value, the Unconstrain Min/Max Dates field
Min Interval Number
task should be
is set automatically to False (i.e., the
completed.
Unconstrain Min/Max Dates check box is
cleared), and the value that you define is
used to calculate the Min Date value.
Min Interval Character The unit of measure By default, the value in this field is Months.
UOM
that is associated with
Min Interval value.
Next Date
Date
By default, this field is disabled and

populated automatically based on the Last
The next date on
Date and Desired Interval values. You can
which the task should
clear the value in the Last Date field
be performed.
manually in order to modify the value in the
Next Date field.
via an RBI workflow, you will work with
this field via the Create WMI builder.
When the Override Interval field is set to
True:
Override
Interval
The Desired Interval field is enabled

Determines whether
(assuming that the Reoccurring field
or not you can modify
is also set to True).
the value in the
You can enter a value in the Desired
Desired Interval field
Interval field manually.
and whether or not
Logical the Meridium APM
The value in the Desired Interval
system will consider
other values when
Basis field is set to User Defined.
populating the
Desired Interval field When the Override Interval is set to False:
automatically.
The Desired Interval field is disabled.
If the Desired Interval field does not

contain a value, the Desired Interval
Basis field will contain the value
Undefined.
The value in this field is set to True by
Reoccurring Logical Indicates whether or default when you create an Inspection Task
record. If you set the value in this field to
not the task should
False (i.e., clear the Reoccurring check box),
occur on a regular
the following fields in the Inspection Task
schedule.
record will be updated automatically to
indicate that the task should occur only once:
Desired Interval
Desired Interval Basis
Last Date
Next Date
Override Interval
from an RBI Recommendation record or link
an RBI Recommendation record to an
existing Inspection Task record, this field is
populated automatically with the
Recommended Inspection Scope value in the
RBI Recommendation record.
Task Details Text
Task Type
If more than one RBI Recommendation

record is linked to the Inspection Task
record, this field will contain the
Recommended Inspection Scope value from
each RBI Recommendation record that is
linked to the Inspection Task record,
Details about the task
separated by a blank line.
that the Inspection
Task record
represents.
If you remove the link between the

Inspection Task record and an RBI
Recommendation record, the Task Details
value that is associated with that RBI
Recommendation record will be deleted
from this field. This does not apply to a
scenario is which an RBI Recommendation
record is archived. In this case, even though
the link is broken between the RBI
Recommendation record and its associated
Inspection Task records, the Task Details
value that is associated with the archived
RBI Recommendation record will not be
deleted from this field.
The list in this field contains the following
Character The type of task that values, depending upon whether or not the
the Inspection Task Generate Recommendation using Policy
Manager setting is enabled. When this
record represents.
setting is:
Enabled: The list contains all Task
Types records whose Reference field

contains the value Inspection
Strategy
(INSPECTION_STRATEGY).
Disabled: The list contains all Task
Types records whose Reference field
contains the value Inspection
(INSPECTION).
The value in this field is set to True by
default. When you set this value to False
(i.e., clear the Unconstrain Min/Max Dates
check box), the Min Date and Max Date
fields are populated automatically based on
the values in the following fields:
Indicates whether or
not the Min Date and
Unconstrain
Max Date fields will
Min/Max
Logical be populated
Dates
automatically by the
Meridium APM
system.
Last Date (when the Last Date field

is populated with a value).
-or-
Next Date (when the Last Date field

is cleared).
-and-
Min Interval (for the Min Date

calculation).
-or-
Max Interval (for the Max Date

calculation).
Asset Group
Asset Group records store information about the Inspection Groups that you create for
RBI Components that meet certain criteria. The information in the table reflects the
baseline state and behavior of fields that exist in the Asset Group family.
Data
Type
Field
Corrosion
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
When you create an Inspection Group, this

field is populated automatically with the
description of one of the following System
Codes stored in the
The type of
MI_GROUPING_CORR_TYPE (Grouping
corrosion to which
Corrosion Types) System Code Table:
the pieces of
Character
equipment that
CUI (Corrosion Under Insulation)
belong to the group
ICPC (Internal Corrosion)
are susceptible.
This field is always disabled on the Asset
Group datasheet and cannot be modified.
Creation
Date
Date
The date on which

This field is populated automatically when you
the associated
create an Inspection Group. This field is
Inspection Group
always disabled on the Asset Group datasheet.
was created.
Description

A description of the create an Inspection Group. This field is
Character
Inspection Group. enabled only when the Asset Group record is in
the Proposed state.
Grouping
Equipment
Codes stored in the
Type
MI_GROUPING_EQP_TYPE (Grouping
Equipment Types) System Code Table:
The type of
equipment that is
PIPING (Piping)
Character
associated with the
VESSELS (Vessels)
Inspection Group.
Name
Character The name of the

associated
Inspection Group.
TANKS (Tanks)

Group datasheet.
combination of the following Asset Group
record values: <Unit ~ Corrosion Type ~
Grouping Equipment Type ~ Risk Category>.

Note that for Asset Group fields that are
populated by System Code Tables, the System
Code ID is used in the value in the Name field,
while the System Code Description is used as
the value in other Asset Group fields.
For example, consider an Asset Group record
that contains the following values in the
following fields:
Unit: RBIT-UNITB
Corrosion Type: Corrosion Under
Insulation
Grouping Equipment Type: Vessels
Risk Category: High
The Name field in this Asset Group record

would contain the value RBITUNITB~CUI~VESSELS~HIGH.
Risk
Category
The level of risk
that is associated
with the pieces of
Character equipment that
belong to the
associated
Inspection Group.

Group datasheet.
Codes stored in the
MI_RBI_RISK_CATEGORY (RBI Risk
Category) System Code Table:
HIGH (High)
MEDIUM HIGH (Medium High)
MEDIUM (Medium)
LOW (Low)

Group datasheet.
Unit
The Record ID of
the Functional
Location record that
is linked to the
Character
create an Inspection Group. This field is
Asset Group record
always disabled on the Asset Group datasheet.
(i.e., associated with
the Inspection
Group).
Grouping Element
Grouping Element records store information about the RBI Components included in an
Inspection Group. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of
fields that exist in the Grouping Element family. This list is not comprehensive.
Data
Type
Field
Description
Behavior and Usage
Analysis
When you create an Inspection

Group, this field is populated
Identifies the RBI
automatically with the value in the
Criticality Analysis record
Analysis ID field in the RBI
Number that is associated with the
Criticality Analysis record associated
RBI Component included
with the RBI Component. This field
in the Inspection Group.
is always disabled on the Grouping
Element datasheet.
Asset

Identifies the Equipment
record that is associated
Equipment ID field in the Equipment
Number with the RBI Component
record associated with the RBI
included in the Inspection
Component. This field is always
Group.
disabled on the Grouping Element
datasheet.
Component
Number Identifies the RBI

Component (i.e., the


Components record) that
is included in the
Inspection Group.
Design
Pressure
The Design Pressure
associated with the RBI
Number
Component included in
the Inspection Group.
Design
Temperature
Exists In
Higher Risk
Category

Component ID field in the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record
associated with the Inspection Group.
This field is always disabled on the
Grouping Element datasheet.
Design Pressure field in the RBI
Element datasheet.

The Design Temperature automatically with the value in the
associated with the RBI Design Temperature field in the RBI
Number
Component included in Criticality Analysis record associated
Element datasheet.
This field is populated automatically
Logical Indicates whether or not when you create an Inspection Group.
the Equipment record that When this field is set to:
is associated with the RBI
True: Indicates that the
the Inspection Group is
Equipment record is
associated with another
Inspection Group that has
Inspection Group where the
a higher Risk Category.
Risk Category of an RBI
Component belonging to the
piece of equipment is higher
than the RBI Component
included in this Inspection
Group. The RBI Component
for which this Grouping
Element record was created
will not be identified as a
Representative RBI
Component for the Inspection
Group.
False: Indicates that the

Equipment record is not
Inspection Group in which the
Risk Category of an RBI
Component belonging to the
piece of equipment is higher
than the RBI Component
included in this Inspection
Group. In this case, the RBI
Component can be selected as
a Representative RBI
Component.
Excluded from
Group
Indicates whether or not

the RBI Component will
Logical be excluded from the
associated Inspection
Group.
True: Indicates that the RBI

Component has been excluded
from the Inspection Group.
False: Indicates that the RBI
Component has not been
excluded from the Inspection
Group.
This field is enabled only when the

associated Asset Group record is in
the Proposed state.
Initial Wall
Thickness
The Initial Wall Tck
Number
Inspection
Priority
Number The Inspection Priority

(Unmitigated Risk)

Initial Wall Tck field in the RBI
Element datasheet.
Inspection Priority (Unmitigated
Risk) field in the RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record that is related to
the RBI Criticality Analysis record
associated with the RBI Component.

Material Spec
The Material Spec
Character

Material Spec field in the RBI
Element datasheet.
The Operating Pressure

Number

Operating Pressure field in the RBI
Element datasheet.
Operating
Pressure
Operating
Temperature

The Operating
Temperature associated
Operating Temperature field in the
Number with the RBI Component
RBI Criticality Analysis record
included in the Inspection
associated with the RBI Component.
Group.
Representative
Fluid

The Representative Fluid automatically with the value in the
associated with the RBI Representative Fluid field in the RBI
Character
Component included in Criticality Analysis record associated
Element datasheet.
Logical Indicates whether or not
the RBI Component
should be inspected.
associated equipment item
Selected for
Inspection
should not be inspected.

This field is enabled only when the
associated Asset Group record is in
the Proposed state.
System
Selected
Indicates whether an RBI

Component was selected
Logical for inspection by the
Meridium APM system or
a user.

was selected for inspection
automatically by the
was selected for inspection
manually by a user.
This field does not appear on the

Thinning Type
The Thinning Type
Character
Wall Ratio

Thinning Type field in the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record that
is related to the RBI Criticality
Analysis record that is associated
does not appear on the Grouping
Element datasheet.

The Wall Ratio associated automatically with the value in the
with the RBI Component Wall Ratio field in the RBI
Number
included in the Inspection Degradation Mechanism Evaluation
Group.
record associated with the RBI
Component. The field is disabled on
the Grouping Element datasheet.
RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration

RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration records define the Policy records that are used to
generate RBI Recommendation records automatically from RBI Analyses. The
information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of fields that exist in the
RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration family.
Data
Type
Field
Description
Degradation
Mechanism
Behavior and Usage
The value in the Degradation

Mechanism field in the RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record that
Character is linked to the RBI Criticality
Analysis record for which you are
generating RBI Recommendation
records.
This field is populated by

default in each RBI Strategy
Mapping Configuration
record that is delivered to
the baseline Meridium APM
database.
The Record ID of the Policy record

Character that will be used to generate an RBI

record that is delivered to
the baseline Meridium APM
database.
Policy Name
RBI Strategy Mapping Details

RBI Strategy Mapping Details records define the Policy record Input nodes that are used
to generate RBI Recommendation records automatically from RBI Analyses. The
information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of fields that exist in the
RBI Strategy Mapping Details family.
Data
Type
Field
Description
Behavior and Usage
Policy
Input
Node
Name
The ID of the Input node in the Policy

record that is defined by the RBI
Character Strategy Mapping Configuration
record to which the RBI Strategy
Mapping Details record is linked.

Mapping Details record that
is delivered to the baseline
Source
Family

The family of the source record, whose default in each RBI Strategy
Character values are used to determine the output Mapping Details record that
of the Input node.
Source
Field

The field whose source value is used to
Character
Mapping Details record that
determine the output of the Input node.
About Meridium Reference Table

Records Used in RBI
Various Meridium Reference Table records are used in RBI. Inspection Strategy records
are delivered in the baseline database, but the other types of records must be created
manually or imported. The following table lists the Meridium Reference Table records
that are used in RBI, how they are used, and notes about creating or importing these
records. This section of the documentation provides details on each of these records.
Meridium
Reference Table
record
Inspection Strategies
Piping Stress
Use
Notes
Inspection Strategies records are

delivered in the baseline database.
Determine Allowable Stress You must create Piping Stress records
in RBI Criticality Analysis
manually using values from industry
records
standards.
PV Stress
Determine Allowable Stress

Meridium, Inc. provides PV Stress
records that you can import.
records
Tank Stress
Determine Allowable Stress

Meridium, Inc. provides Tank Stress
records that you can import.
records
Piping Stress
Records in the Piping Stress family make up the Piping Stress reference table, which the
Meridium APM system uses to locate the appropriate Allowable Stress value for RBI
Criticality Analysis records that are linked to Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records whose Stress Lookup Table field contains the value Piping.
The following table provides a list and description of the fields that exist in the Piping
Stress family that are used to determine the Allowable Stress value in the RBI Criticality
Analysis record. Three additional fields, Material Type, Minimum Tensile Strength, and
Minimum Tensile Yield exist in the Piping Stress family, but they are not used to
determine the Allowable Stress value. The information in the table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields.
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Field
Allowable
Stress
Number The maximum

amount of pressure
that can safely be
withstood by a
component.
This value in this field, in addition to the

following other Piping Stress fields, is used
to determine the value that is populated in
the Allowable Stress field in the associated
RBI Criticality Analysis record:
Code Year
Construction Code
Design Temperature
Material Grade
Material Spec
Stress Lookup Table

The value in this field is used to populate the
Code Year field in the associated RBI
Code Year
This field must contain a value in order for

The year in which
the Meridium APM system to retrieve:
the design code that
Character corresponds to the
The value in the Allowable Stress
component was
field in the Piping Stress record from
defined.
the Piping Stress reference table.
Values in the Material Spec list in the
Piping Stress record.
Construction Code field in the associated
The design code

Design Code Character associated with the
the Meridium APM system to retrieve the
component.
value in the Allowable Stress field in the
Piping Stress record from the Piping Stress
Reference table.
Material Grade field in the associated RBI
Material
Grade

Reference table.
Material Spec field in the associated RBI
Material
Character The material
Specification
specification of the Criticality Analysis record.
component.
the Meridium APM system to retrieve:
Character
The material grade

of the component.
The value in the Allowable Stress

field in the Piping Stress record from
the Piping Stress reference table.
Values in the Material Grade list in
the Piping Stress record.

Design Temperature field in the associated
The temperature of
Metal
the metal of which This field must contain a value in order for
Number
Temperature
the component is
made.
reference table.
PV Stress
Records in the PV Stress family make up the PV Stress reference table, which the
records whose Stress Lookup Table field contains the value Pressure Vessel.
The following table provides a list and description of the fields that exist in the PV Stress
family that are used to determine Allowable Stress in RBI. Three additional fields,
Material Type, Minimum Tensile Strength, and Minimum Tensile Yield exist in the
Piping Stress family, but they are not used to determine the Allowable Stress value. The
information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields. The
information in the table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields.
Data Type
Description
Field
Allowable
Stress
Behavior and Usage
Corresponding
RBI Criticality
Analysis field
Number
The maximum
amount of
pressure that can
safely be
withstood by a
component.
This value in this field, in addition to

the following other PV Stress fields, is
used to determine the value that is
populated in the Allowable Stress field
in the associated RBI Criticality
Analysis record:
Code Year
Construction Code
Design Temperature
Material Grade
Material Spec
Stress Lookup Table

The value in this field is used to
populate the Code Year field in the
associated RBI Criticality Analysis
record.
Code Year
Character
This field must contain a value in order

The year in which for the Meridium APM system to
the design code retrieve:
that corresponds
The value in the Allowable
to the component
was defined.
Stress field in the PV Stress
record from the PV Stress
reference table.
Values in the Material Spec list
in the PV Stress record.
populate the Construction Code field in
the associated RBI Criticality Analysis
record.
Design Code Character
Material
Grade
Character
The design code

associated with
the component.

for the Meridium APM system to
retrieve the value in the Allowable
Stress field in the PV Stress record
from the PV Stress Reference table.
populate the Material Grade field in the
record.
The material grade

of the component.
from the PV Stress Reference table.

populate the Material Spec field in the
record.
Material
Character
Specification
The material
specification of
the component.

retrieve:

Stress field in the PV Stress
record from the PV Stress
reference table.
Values in the Material Grade

list in the PV Stress record.
populate the Design Temperature field
Analysis record.
Metal
Number
Temperature
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Minimum
Yield
Strength
The temperature
of the metal of
which the
component is
made.

from the PV Stress reference table.
Number
The value in this field is not used by

the PV Stress reference table to
determine the value in the Allowable
Stress field in the PV Stress record.
Number

the PV Stress reference table to
Stress field in the PV Stress record.
Tank Stress
Records in the Tank Stress family make up the Tank Stress reference table, which the
records whose Stress Lookup Table field contains the value Tank.
The following table provides a list and description of the fields that exist in the Tank
Stress family that are used to determine the Allowable Stress value in the RBI Criticality
Analysis record. Three additional fields, Material Type, Minimum Tensile Strength, and
Minimum Tensile Yield exist in the Piping Stress family, but they are not used to
determine the Allowable Stress value. The information in the table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields.
Data Type
Description
Field
Behavior and Usage
Corresponding
RBI Criticality
Analysis field
This value in this field, in addition to
the following other Tank Stress fields,
is used to determine the value that is
populated in the Allowable Stress field
Analysis record:
Allowable
Stress
Number
The maximum
amount of
pressure that can
safely be
withstood by a
component.
Code Year
Construction Code
Design Temperature
Material Grade
Material Spec
Stress Lookup Table

The year in which populate the Code Year field in the
the design code associated RBI Criticality Analysis
that corresponds record.
to the component
was defined.
retrieve:
Code Year
Character

Stress field in the Tank Stress
record from the Tank Stress
reference table.
Values in the Material Spec list

in the Tank Stress record.
populate the Construction Code field in
the associated RBI Criticality Analysis
record.
Design Code Character
Material
Grade
Character
Material
Character
Specification
The design code

associated with
the component.

Stress field in the Tank Stress record
from Tank Stress Reference table.
populate the Material Grade field in the
record.
The material grade

of the component.
from the Tank Stress Reference table.
populate the Material Spec field in the
record.
The material
specification of
the component.

retrieve:

Stress field in the Tank Stress
record from the Tank Stress
reference table.
Values in the Material Grade

list in the Tank Stress record.
populate the Design Temperature field
Analysis record.
Metal
Number
Temperature
The temperature
of the metal of
which the
component is
made.


from the Tank Stress reference table.
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Minimum
Yield
Strength
Number

the Tank Stress reference table to
Stress field in the Tank Stress record.
Number

the Tank Stress reference table to
Stress field in the Tank Stress record.
About RBI Recommendation Reference

Information
This section of the documentation provides information related to the automatic
generation of RBI Recommendation records using Policy and Inspection Strategy
records. Specifically, this section of the documentation provides information on:
The RBI values that are used to select the appropriate Policy record.
The RBI values that are used as inputs to Policy Record logic.
The Inspection Strategy values that are mapped to RBI Recommendation

Records.
This section of the documentation assumes that the following settings are enabled on the
Administrative Tasks page:

Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager
RBI Values Used to Select Policy

Records
When RBI Recommendation Records are Generated
from RBI Analyses
The following table lists the criteria used by RBI Strategy Mapping Groups to determine
the Policy record that the Meridium APM system will use to select the Inspection
Strategy record to populate the RBI Recommendation record. Specifically:
The first column represents values that are stored in source RBI Degradation
Mechanisms records and mapped to RBI Strategy Mapping Configuration
records.
The second column represents values that are stored in source RBI Criticality
Analysis records and satisfy the criteria defined in queries that are stored in the
Catalog location \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based
Inspection\Queries\Policy Queries.
The third column represents values that are stored in RBI Strategy Mapping
Configuration records.
The fourth column represents values that are stored in the specified source records
and whose field and family IDs are mapped to RBI Strategy Mapping Details
records. (See the topic about RBI values that are used as inputs to Policy record
logic for more information.)
Note: The Meridium APM RBI Best Practice assumes that you will use the RBI Strategy
Mapping Configuration records, RBI Strategy Mapping Details records, and policy
queries that Meridium, Inc. provides and that you will not modify them.
...this Policy
record will be
Additional fields that
If the RBI Strategy
used by the
...and the associated
must contain a value
Meridium APM
policy query specifies
for the Policy record to
record specifies this
system (as
this Criticality Item
be used to generate
Degradation
specified in the
Type value:
RBI Recommendation
Mechanism value:
associated RBI
records
Strategy Mapping
Details record):
Any value except:
Internal Corrosion
Air Cooled
ExchangerHeader
Air Cooled
Exchanger-Tbs
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
General
Corrosion field
in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Non-Intrusive
Requirement
Met field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Storage Tank
Bottom
Heat
ExchangerBundle
Any value
associated with
a pipe1
Any value
associated with
a pressure
relief device2
Note: Values
associated with
pressure relief devices
are not excluded by
the associated policy
query. Instead, these
criticality item types
are not valid for an
RBI Analysis whose
degradation
mechanism is
Internal Corrosion.
Appendix_B
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
General
Corrosion field
in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Non-Intrusive
Requirement
Met field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Any of the following

values:
Internal Corrosion
Air Cooled
ExchangerHeader
Appendix_D
Air Cooled
Exchanger-Tbs
Internal Corrosion
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
General
Corrosion field
in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Insulated field
in the
associated RBI
Criticality
Analysis record
Any value associated

Appendix_E
with a pipe1
Any value except:

External Corrosion
Appendix_F
Storage Tank
Bottom
Heat
ExchangerBundle
Insulation
Damage field in
the associated
Criticality Ext.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
Any value
associated with
a pressure
relief device2
Note: Values
associated with
pressure relief devices
are not excluded by
the associated policy
query. Instead, these
criticality item types
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Damage
Mechanism
field in the
associated
Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Damaged At
Last Inspection
field in the
associated
Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Is Entry
Possible field in
the associated
Criticality Env.
are not valid for an

RBI Analysis whose
degradation
mechanism is
External Corrosion.

values:
Any value except:

Appendix_G
Amine Cracking
(ASCC)
Carbonate
Cracking
Caustic
Cracking
Chloride Stress
Corrosion
Cracking (CI
SCC)
Hydrogen Stress
Cracking (HSC)
- Hydrofluoric
Acid
Polythionic Acid
SCC (PTA)
Sulfide Stress
Cracking (SSC)
Wet H2S
(Blistering,
SOHIC, SCC)
Air Cooled
ExchangerHeader
Air Cooled
Exchanger-Tbs
Heat
ExchangerBundle
Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record

values:
PT or MT
Access field in
the associated
Criticality Env.
Crack. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Heat ExchangerBundle
Appendix_H
Amine Cracking
(ASCC)
Carbonate
Cracking
Caustic
Cracking
Chloride Stress
Corrosion
Cracking (CI
SCC)
Hydrogen Stress
Cracking (HSC)
- Hydrofluoric
Acid
Polythionic Acid
SCC (PTA)
Sulfide Stress
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Cracking (SSC)
Wet H2S
(Blistering,
SOHIC, SCC)
Criticality
Calculator
Internal
Corrosion
Criticality
Calculator
External
Corrosion

values:
Estimated Half
Life field in the
associated
Criticality Int.
Corr. Deg.
Mech. Eval.
record
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Storage Tank Bottom Appendix_I
Amine Cracking
(ASCC)
Carbonate
Cracking
Caustic
Cracking
Chloride Stress
Corrosion
Cracking (CI
SCC)
Hydrogen Stress
Cracking (HSC)
- Hydrofluoric
Acid
Polythionic Acid
SCC (PTA)
Sulfide Stress
Cracking (SSC)
Wet H2S
(Blistering,
SOHIC, SCC)
Criticality
Calculator
Internal
Corrosion
Criticality
Calculator
External
Corrosion

values:
Blocked
Discharge
Blocked
Discharge Admin Control
Control Valve
Failure (Fail
Opposite)
Control Valve
Failure (Fail
Safe)
Electrical Power
Failure
Exchanger Tube
Rupture
Fire
Liquid Overfill
Liquid Overfill -
Any value associated PRD_Strategies

with a pressure relief
device2
Inspection
Priority
(Unmitigated
Risk) field in
the associated
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
record
Admin Control
Loss of Cooling
Runaway
Reaction
Thermal Relief
Thermal Relief Admin Control
Tower Pump
Failures
Leak
1.
Any Criticality Item Type value associated with a pipe includes any of the
following values: 1/2" Pipe, 3/4" Pipe, 1" Pipe, 1.25" Pipe, 1.5" Pipe, 2" Pipe, 2.5" Pipe,
3" Pipe, 4" Pipe, 5" Pipe, 6" Pipe, 8" Pipe, 10" Pipe, 12" Pipe, 14" Pipe, 16" Pipe, 18"
Pipe, 42" Pipe, 48" Pipe, 54" Pipe, 56" Pipe, 60" Pipe, 90" Pipe, or102" Pipe.
2.
Any Criticality Item Type value associated with a pressure relief device includes
any of the following values: Conventional PRD, Balanced Bellows PRD, Pilot-Operated
PRD, PRD with Rupture Disk, and Rupture Disk Only.
When RBI Recommendation Records are Generated

from Inspection Groups
The following table lists values that are used to determine the Policy record that the
Meridium APM system will use to select the Inspection Strategy record in the case of
RBI Recommendation records that are created from Inspection Groups. In this case, the
values displayed in the table are not stored outside the source records.
For an Inspection
Group whose
Corrosion Type
is:
...this Policy record

is selected by the
Notes
Meridium APM
system:
Corrosion Under
Insulation
For this Policy record to be selected, the RBI

Component associated with the RBI
CUI Insp Grouping
Recommendation record created from the
Policy
Inspection Group must be defined as a
Represented RBI Component.
For this Policy record to be selected, the RBI

Internal Corrosion Component associated with the RBI
Internal Corrosion Insp Grouping
Recommendation record created from the
Policy
Inspection Group must be defined as a
Represented RBI Component.
RBI Values Used as Inputs to Policy

Record Logic
The following table lists the fields in RBI records that are used as inputs to Policy record
logic that determines the Inspection Strategy record that populates the RBI
Recommendation record. Additionally, the table lists the corresponding Input node for
each field whose value is used in the policy. The values displayed in the table are stored
in RBI Strategy Mapping Details records, which facilitate the mapping of values from
these source locations to the Policy record used to select the Inspection Strategy record.
Family
Corresponding Input
Node
Component Type
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life
Field
Appendix_B
General Corrosion

Mech. Eval.
General Corrosion
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
Non-Intrusive Requirement Met

Mech. Eval.
Non Intrusive Req

met
Component Type
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life
General Corrosion

Mech. Eval.
General Corrosion
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
Non-Intrusive Requirement Met

Mech. Eval.
Non Intrusive Req

met
Component Type
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life
General Corrosion

Mech. Eval.
General Corrosion
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
Component Type
Estimated Half Life
Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg. Half-Life
Appendix_D
Appendix_E
Appendix_F
Mech. Eval.
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
Insulated
Insulated
Insulation Damage
Criticality Ext. Corr. Deg.

Insulation Damage
Mech. Eval.
Appendix_G
Component Type
Criticality Env. Crack.

Deg. Mech. Eval.
Evidence of
Cracking
Damage Mechanism

Deg. Mech. Eval.
Internal Inspection
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life
Inspection Priority (Unmitigated Risk) RBI Degradation

Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
Is Entry Possible

Deg. Mech. Eval.
Is Entry Possible
PT or MT Access

Deg. Mech. Eval.
PT or MT Access
Component Type
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life
Appendix_H

Mechanisms
Appendix_I
Inspection Priority
Component Type
Estimated Half Life

Mech. Eval.
Half-Life

Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
PRD_Strategies
Component Type
Family ID of the Criticality Calculator Criticality Calculator PRD

Rupture Disk
PRD Components family
Components
Mechanisms
Inspection Priority
About Values Mapped to RBI

When you generate RBI Recommendations automatically, various fields in RBI
Recommendation records are populated automatically by the Meridium APM system with
values from:
The RBI Criticality Analysis record to which the RBI Recommendation record is
linked. This can be an RBI Criticality Analysis record or an RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis record. Throughout the documentation, this record is referred to as the
associated RBI Criticality Analysis record.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that is linked to the associated
RBI Criticality Analysis or RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record. Throughout the
documentation, this record is referred to as the associated Criticality Calculator
The Equipment record that is linked to the associated Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
The RBI Degradation Mechanism record that is linked to the associated RBI
The Inspection Strategy record that was used to generate the RBI
Additionally, some RBI Recommendation records may be populated with values

from Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval. records that are linked to the associated RBI
The following table lists the RBI Recommendation fields that are populated
automatically from these sources.
Note: Some of the fields that are listed in the table are not available on any of the
datasheets that are configured for the RBI Recommendation family.
This RBI
Recommendation ...is populated with:
field:
...from this source:
Analysis ID
The value in the Analysis ID field.
The associated RBI

Author Name
The last and first name of the Security

User who created the RBI
The Security User who

initiated the generation of
the RBI Recommendation
record.
The RBI Degradation

Mechanism record that is
The value in the Degradation Mechanism
Damage Mechanism
linked to the associated
field.
record.
Functional Location
The value in the Equipment ID field.
ID
The associated RBI

Originating
Reference
The Record ID
The associated RBI

RBI Component
The value in the Component Description

field.
The associated Criticality

Calculator RBI
Components record
Recommendation
Basis
The value in the Inspection Strategy

Description field.
The Inspection Strategy

record that generated the
RBI Recommendation
record.
The value RBI- <Criticality Calculator

RBI Components Record ID>-<Damage
Mechanism> where:
<Criticality Calculator RBI

Components Record ID> is the
Record ID of the associated
Components record.
<Damage Mechanism> is the value

in the Damage Mechanism field in
the RBI Recommendation record. The associated Criticality
Calculator RBI
For example, given the following values: Components record
Recommendation
Headline

Components Record ID = Storage
Tank
Damage Mechanism = Brittle

Fracture
The Recommendation Headline would be:

RBI- Storage Tank- Brittle Fracture
Recommended
Inspection Scope

The value in the Recommended Inspection record that generated the
Scope field.
RBI Recommendation
record.
One of the following values, depending

upon the following scenarios:
When the Use Calculated Data

field in the Inspection Strategy
record that generated the RBI
Recommendation record is set to:
Recommended
Interval Scope
One of the following

False, the value in the
Recommended Inspection records:
Interval field in the
Inspection
Inspection Strategy record.
Strategy
Criticality Int.
True, the value in the
Corr. Deg. Mech.
Estimated Half Life field in
Eval.
the Criticality Int. Corr.
Deg. Mech. Eval. record
RBI PRD
that is linked to the
Criticality
associated RBI Criticality
Analysis
Analysis record.
For all RBI Recommendation

records associated with RBI PRD
Criticality Analysis records, the
value in the Recommended
Inspection Interval field in the
associated RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis record.
Status
The value Created
The Meridium APM rules
Task Type
The value in the Inspection Task Type

field.

record that generated the
RBI Recommendation
record.
About Inspection Group Criteria

In order for RBI Components to be included in an Inspection Group, in addition to having
the same unit, Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, and Risk Category, the RBI
Components must meet additional criteria that the Meridium APM system uses to
determine which RBI Components will be grouped together in a given Inspection Group.
The set of criteria that the Meridium APM system uses will vary based on how an RBI
Component has been categorized based on its unit, Equipment Type, Corrosion Type, and
Risk Category. For instance, an RBI Component whose Equipment Type is Piping must
meet slightly different criteria than an RBI Component whose Equipment Type is Vessels.
This is true, however, only for Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Internal
Corrosion.
Finally, the Meridium APM system uses another set of criteria to identify Representative
RBI Components.
This section of the documentation provides information on the additional criteria that are
used by the Meridium APM system when generating Inspection Groups and identifying
Representative RBI Components. This content is organized according to Corrosion Type
since it plays the most significant role in determining the additional criteria that the
system uses in these processes.
Specifically, this documentation is organized to describe how the Meridium APM system:
Selects RBI Components for Inspection Groups based on the following Corrosion
Types:
Corrosion Under Insulation
Internal Corrosion
Identifies Representative RBI Components.
Inspection Group Criteria - Corrosion

Under Insulation
The following table lists the fields in certain records that must contain certain values in
order for an RBI Component whose Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation to be
included in an Inspection Group. The records listed in the table are assumed to be related
to the same Criticality Calculator RBI Components record (i.e., they belong to the same
RBI Analysis). When these records meet all the criteria listed in the table, the related RBI
Component is included in an Inspection Group with other RBI Components that meet the
same criteria, and a new Grouping Element record is created to represent the RBI
Component.
Note that the criteria listed in this table are required of all Equipment Types and Risk
Categories (for which Inspection Groups may be created) assuming that the Corrosion
Type associated with the RBI Component is Corrosion Under Insulation.
Record
Field
Required Value Notes
A value that is
greater than or
RBI Criticality Operating
equal to 0 (zero), None
Analysis
Temperature
but less than or
equal to 350
RBI Criticality Risk
Analysis
Category
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms
RBI
Degradation
Mechanism
Evaluation
Any value
A value in this field indicates that the RBI

Analysis has been calculated.
Criticality
Degradation Calculator
Mechanism External
Corrosion
More than one RBI Degradation

Mechanisms record can be associated with
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record being evaluated for an Inspection
Group, but for the RBI Component to be
included in the Inspection Group, the
Record ID of the additional RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record must be
Criticality
Calculator
External
Corrosion
More than one RBI Degradation

Mechanisms record can be associated with
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record being evaluated for an Inspection
Group, but for the RBI Component to be
included in the Inspection Group, the
Record ID of the additional RBI
Degradation Mechanisms record must be
Damage
Mechanism
Inspection Group Criteria - Internal

Corrosion
The following table lists the fields in certain records that must contain certain values in
order for an RBI Component whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion to be included
in an Inspection Group. The records listed in the table are assumed to be related to the
same Criticality Calculator RBI Components record (i.e., they belong to the same RBI
Analysis). When these records meet all the criteria listed in the table (with a few noted
exceptions based on Equipment Type), the related RBI Component is included in an
Inspection Group with other RBI Components that meet the same criteria, and a new
Grouping Element record is created to represent the RBI Component.
Record
Field
Required Value
Criticality
Calculator
Injection Point
No
RBI
Circuit
Components
Notes
This condition applies only to
RBI Components whose
Equipment Type is Piping.
RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Any value, as long as at

least one additional RBI
Material Spec contains the same value and
meets all other criteria to be
included in the same
Inspection Group
RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Operating
Temperature
RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Any value, as long as at

least one additional RBI
Representative
contains the same value and
Fluid
meets all other criteria to be
included in the same
Inspection Group

Equipment Type is Vessels or
Tanks and Tank Bottoms.
RBI
Criticality
Analysis
Risk Category Any value
A value in this field indicates

that the RBI Analysis has been
calculated.
RBI
Degradation
Mechanisms

Equipment Type is Vessels or
Tanks and Tank Bottoms.
A value that is greater than

or equal to 0 (zero), but less None
than or equal to 350
Internal Corrosion
More than one RBI

record can be associated with
the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record being

evaluated for an Inspection
Group, but for the RBI
Component to be included in
the Inspection Group, the
Record ID of the additional
record must be Criticality
Calculator External Corrosion.
RBI
Degradation Damage
Mechanism Mechanism
Evaluation
Internal Corrosion
More than one RBI

record can be associated with
the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record being
evaluated for an Inspection
Group, but for the RBI
Component to be included in
the Inspection Group, the
Record ID of the additional
record must be Criticality
Calculator External Corrosion.
One of the following values,

depending upon the
Equipment Type that is
Component:
RBI
Degradation
Thinning Type
Mechanism
Evaluation
General, if the
Equipment Type is
either Vessels or
Tanks and Tank
Bottoms.
General, Localized,
or Pitting, if the
Equipment Type is
Piping.
None
About Representative RBI Component

Criteria
When an Inspection Group is created, the Meridium APM system selects Representative
and Represented RBI Components automatically by analyzing and comparing certain
values that are associated with the RBI Components that the system selected for the
Inspection Group. In particular, the Meridium APM system analyzes values in the records
listed in the following table when selecting Representative and Represented RBI
Components. These values exist in various records that are associated with the RBI
Components in an Inspection Group, and those records are listed in the left column in the
following table. Because these values are also mapped to an Asset Group or Inspection
Grouping record when an Inspection Group is created, the record to which the associated
value is mapped is shown in the right column in this table.
Source Record
Inspection Group
Record
N/A
Asset Group
Criticality Degradation
Mech Evaluation
Grouping Element
Grouping Element
RBI Degradation
Mechanisms
Grouping Element
Note: Throughout this documentation, we refer to these values as they exist in the Asset
Group or Grouping Element record.
Which values are evaluated, and how they are used, depends primarily on the Corrosion
Type that is associated with the Inspection Group. This section of the documentation,
therefore, describes the criteria that are used in the process of selecting Representative
RBI Components when the Corrosion Type for an Inspection Group is either of the
following types:
Corrosion Under Insulation

Internal Corrosion
The Meridium APM system uses the following workflow to identify Representative RBI
Components for Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation:
1. Set the value in the Selected for Inspection field to True. To do so:
1. Determine the number of selections for inspection (i.e., the number of
Grouping Element records whose Selected for Inspection field will contain
the value True).
2. Rank the Grouping Element records to determine the inspection priority
for each piece of equipment in relationship to the others in the Inspection
Group.
2. Define the Represents Inspections relationship between Grouping Element
records that are identified as Representative RBI Components and those that are
identified as Represented RBI Components.
The Meridium APM system uses the following workflow to identify Representative RBI
Components for Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion:
1. Set the value in the Selected for Inspection field to True. To do so:
1. Determine the subgroup to which each Grouping Element record in the
Inspection Group belongs.
2. Determine the number of selections for inspection (i.e., the number of
Grouping Element records whose Selected for Inspection field will contain
the value True).
3. Rank the Grouping Element records to determine the inspection priority
for each piece of equipment in relationship to the others in the Inspection
Group.
2. Define the Represents Inspections relationship between Grouping Element
records that are identified as Representative RBI Components and those that are
identified as Represented RBI Components.
Note: Specific details are not currently provided in the documentation regarding how the
system selects Represented RBI Components for Representative RBI Components.
About Setting the Selected for

Inspection Value - Corrosion Under
Insulation
For Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation, there are
two main steps in the process of setting the Selected for Inspection value to True:
1. Determining the number of selections for inspection (i.e., the number of Grouping
Element records whose Selected for Inspection field will contain the value True).
2. Ranking the Grouping Element records to determine the inspection priority for
each piece of equipment in relationship to the others in the Inspection Group.
The following table lists the values that are used by the Meridium APM system and the
role that each value plays when setting the Selected for Inspection value to True for
Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation.
This
value...
In this
record...
Is used for this purpose
Risk
Category
Asset
Group
Determines the number of Grouping Element records whose

Selected for Inspection value will be set to True.
Inspection
Priority
Grouping
Element
Along with the value in the Wall Ratio field in the Grouping
Element record, determines the rank (i.e., the priority for
inspection) for each Grouping Element record in an Inspection
Group.
Grouping
Element
Along with the value in the Inspection Priority field in the

Grouping Element record, determines the rank (i.e., the priority
for inspection) for each Grouping Element record in an
Inspection Group.
Wall Ratio
Determining the Number of Selections

for Inspection - Corrosion Under
Insulation
When the Corrosion Type for an Inspection Group is Corrosion Under Insulation, the
Risk Category that is associated with an Inspection Group is used to determine the
number of Grouping Element records in which the Selected for Inspection value will be
set to True. To accomplish this, the Meridium APM system applies a percentage, based on
the Risk Category, to the total number of Grouping Element records in the Inspection
Group. The following table lists the possible Risk Categories for an Inspection Group and
the percentage that the Meridium APM system uses for each Risk Category when
determining the number of selections for inspection.
If the Risk
Category is...
This percentage is used to determine the

number of selections for inspection...
High
50%
Medium High
25%
Medium
10%
Low
None
Notice that when the Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation and the Risk
Category is Low, the Selected for Inspection field will not be set for any Grouping
Element record in the Inspection Group. This type of Inspection Group cannot be
implemented, and no RBI Recommendation records can be generated on its behalf.
For all other Risk Categories, the following calculation is used to determine the number
of selections for inspection:
number of selections for inspection = total Grouping Element records x p
Where:
total Grouping Element records is the number of Grouping Element records in the
Inspection Group.
p is the percentage that the system uses in the calculation based on the Risk
Category of the Inspection Group.
Consider the following example, where:
The number of Grouping Element records in the Inspection Group is 10.
The Risk Category of the Inspection Group is High.
In this case, the calculation would look like this:

number of selections for inspection = 10 x 0.5
number of selections for inspection = 5
The number of Grouping Element records in which the Selected for Inspection value
would be set to True, therefore, is five.
Additionally, if the result of the calculation is anything other than a whole number, the
Meridium APM system rounds automatically to the next whole number. For example, if
the total number of Grouping Element records in an Inspection Group is nine, and the
Risk Category for that Inspection Group is High, the following calculation would be
used:
number of selections for inspection = 9 x 0.5
number of selections for inspection = 4.5
In this case, the Meridium APM system would round 4.5 to the next whole number,
meaning that the Selected for Inspection value would be set to True in five Grouping
Element records in the Inspection Group.
At this point, the Meridium APM system ranks the Grouping Element records in order to
determine the inspection priority of the pieces of equipment in the Inspection Group. The
result of the preceding equation (i.e., number of selections for inspection) is applied to
the ranked records to determine the value in the Selected for Inspection field in all
Inspection Grouping records in the Inspection Group.
Determining the Rank for Grouping

Element Records - Corrosion Under
Insulation
The following values are used to determine the rank of each Grouping Element record in
an Inspection Group with respect to its priority for inspection:
Inspection Priority
Wall Ratio
The Meridium APM system ranks Grouping Element records first based on the value in
the Inspection Priority field and second based on the value in the Wall Ratio field, sorting
them from most conservative (i.e., the lowest value) to least conservative (i.e., the highest
value).
For example, suppose you have an Inspection Group whose Grouping Element records
contain the following Inspection Priority and Wall Ratio values.
Grouping Element Record ID
Inspection Priority
Wall Ratio
RBIComp_1
17
28
RBIComp_2
14
2.211
RBIComp_3
15
15.147
RBIComp_4
15
16.2
RBIComp_5
18
28.4
The Meridium APM system would rank the Grouping Element records as shown in the
following table.
Rank Grouping Element Record ID
Inspection Priority
Wall Ratio
RBIComp_2
14
2.211
RBIComp_3
15
15.147
RBIComp_4
15
16.2
RBIComp_1
17
28
RBIComp_5
18
28.4
Notice that the Grouping Element record with the Record ID RBIComp_3 has the same
Inspection Priority value as the Grouping Element record with the Record ID
RBIComp_4. However, RBIComp_3 has a more conservative Wall Ratio value than
RBIComp_4. Therefore, the Grouping Element record RBIComp_3 is ranked higher,
meaning that the priority for inspecting the piece of equipment that is associated with
RBIComp_3 is higher than the priority for inspecting the piece of equipment that is
associated with RBIComp_4.
Selecting Representative RBI

Components - Corrosion Under
Insulation
Grouping Element records whose Selected for Inspection value is set to True are
identified as Representative RBI Components when the relationship definition
Represents Inspections is defined between the Grouping Element record and other
Grouping Element records in the same Inspection Group.
To perform the final step in selecting Representative RBI Components, the Meridium
APM system considers the value in the Operating Temperature field in each Grouping
Element record in which the Selected for Inspection value has been set to True based on
the criteria for setting this value. If each of the following temperature ranges are
represented among the Grouping Element records that have been selected for inspection,
those Grouping Element records will be identified as Representative RBI Components:
0-75
76-150
151-200
201-300
301-350
For example, suppose that the following Grouping Element records exist in the same
Inspection Group and contain the value True in the Selected for Inspection field.
Grouping Element
Record ID
RBIComp_1
Operating
Temperature
Associated
Temperature Range
110
76-150
RBIComp_2
340
301-350
RBIComp_3
15
0-75
RBIComp_4
290
201-300
RBIComp_5
175
151-200
Since the Operating Temperature values in these Grouping Element records correspond to
the required temperature ranges, and each temperature range has a corresponding
Operating Temperature value, these Grouping Element records will become predecessors
in the Represents Inspections relationship definition with other Grouping Element
records. These Grouping Element records will be identified, therefore, as Representative
RBI Components.
If, however, one or more of the temperature ranges are not represented among the
Grouping Element records whose Selected for Inspection value is True, the Meridium
APM system will select for inspection the next highest ranked Grouping Element record
(based on how all Grouping Element records in the Inspection Group were ranked by the
system) whose Operating Temperature value is within the unrepresented temperature
range. Additionally, this Grouping Element record will be identified as a Representative
RBI Component.
The Meridium APM system repeats this process until all required temperature ranges
correspond to an Operating Temperature value in a Grouping Element record in the
Inspection Group.
About Setting the Selected for

Inspection Value - Internal Corrosion
For Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion, there are three main
steps in the process of setting the Selected for Inspection value to True:
1. Assigning the Grouping Element records to subgroups.
2. Determining the number of selections for inspection (i.e., the number of Grouping
Element records whose Selected for Inspection field will contain the value True).
3. Ranking the Grouping Element records to determine the inspection priority for
each piece of equipment in relationship to the others in the Inspection Group.
Unlike when an Inspection Group's Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation, the
Meridium APM system considers the Inspection Group's Equipment Type when setting
the Selected for Inspection value to True in Grouping Element records whose Corrosion
Type is Internal Corrosion. These Inspection Groups fall into one of two categories:
Those whose Equipment Type is Piping (i.e., the associated Asset Group record
contains the value PIPING (Piping) in the Grouping Equipment Type field).
Those whose Equipment Type is either Vessels (i.e., the associated Asset Group
record contains the value VESSELS (Vessels) in the Grouping Equipment Type
field) or Tanks (i.e., the associated Asset Group record contains the value TANKS
(Tanks) in the Grouping Equipment Type field).
The following table lists the values that are used by the Meridium APM system and the
role that each value plays when setting the Selected for Inspection value to True for
Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion. The cells that are shaded
blue are significant for only one Equipment Type or the other, as indicated in the Is used
for this purpose column.
This value...
In this
record...
Is used for this purpose
For Inspection Groups whose Equipment Type is Piping,

determines the subgroup (i.e., General or Localized/Pitting) to
Grouping
Thinning Type
which the Grouping Element record is assigned in order to be
Element
ranked based on its associated Inspection Priority and Wall
Ratio.
For Inspection Groups whose Equipment Type is either Vessels
or Tanks, determines the subgroup (based on the values in the
Grouping
Material Spec
Representative Fluid and Material Spec fields) to which the
Element
Grouping Element record is assigned in order to be ranked
based on its associated Inspection Priority and Wall Ratio.
For Inspection Groups whose Equipment Type is either Vessels
or Tanks, determines the subgroup (based on the values in the
Representative Grouping
Representative Fluid and Material Spec fields) to which the
Fluid
Element
Grouping Element record is assigned in order to be ranked
based on its associated Inspection Priority and Wall Ratio.
Risk Category
Asset
Group
Determines the number of Grouping Element records whose

Selected for Inspection value will be set to True.
Inspection
Priority
Along with the value in the Wall Ratio field, determines the
Grouping
rank (i.e., the priority for inspection) for each Grouping
Element
Element record in each subgroup in an Inspection Group.
Wall Ratio
Along with the value in the Inspection Priority field, determines

Grouping
the rank (i.e., the priority for inspection) for each Grouping
Element
Element record in each subgroup in an Inspection Group.
Determining the Subgroup to which a

Grouping Element Record is Assigned
When an Inspection Group's Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion, Grouping Element
records are assigned subgroups within an Inspection Group. The subgroups that an
Inspection Group contains depends upon the Equipment Type that is associated with the
Inspection Group.
If the Equipment Type is:
Piping, Grouping Element records are assigned to one of the following subgroups
based on the value in the Thinning Type field in the Grouping Element record:
General: Assigned when the value in the Thinning Type field is General.
Localized/Pitting: Assigned when the value in the Thinning Type field is

either Localized or Pitting.
Vessels or Tanks, Grouping Element records are grouped by the values in the
following fields:
Representative Fluid
Material Spec
In other words, Grouping Element records whose Representative Fluid values match and
whose Material Spec values match will be assigned to the same subgroup. To better
understand this concept, consider the following example.
The following table represents an Inspection Group whose Corrosion Type is Internal
Corrosion and Equipment Type is Vessels. Each row represents a Grouping Element
record within the Inspection Group, and the shading indicates the subgroup to which the
Grouping Element record is assigned.
Grouping Element Record ID Representative Fluid Material Spec

RBIComp_1
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_2
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_3
SA-182
Benzine
RBIComp_4
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_5
SA-182
Benzine
RBIComp_6
SA-182
Benzine
As indicated by the shading, the following Grouping Element records are assigned
to the same subgroup:
o
o
RBIComp_1
RBIComp_2
RBIComp_4
Likewise, the following Grouping Element records are assigned to the same subgroup:
o
o
RBIComp_3
RBIComp_5
RBIComp_6
How subgroups are used

For Inspection Groups whose associated Equipment Type is Piping, subgroups are used
when determining the number of selections for inspection and when ranking the
Grouping Element records. However, this is not true of Inspection Groups whose
associated Equipment Type is Vessels or Tanks. These Inspection Groups are ranked
irrespective of the subgroup in which Grouping Element records reside. Subgroups in
these Inspection Groups are considered, however, in selecting Representative RBI
Components for the Inspection Group.
Determining the Number of Selections

for Inspection - Internal Corrosion
When the Corrosion Type for an Inspection Group is Internal Corrosion, the following
values are used to determine the number of Grouping Element records in which the
Selected for Inspection value will be set to True:
Equipment Type
Risk Category
To accomplish this, the Meridium APM system applies a percentage, based on these
values, to a particular number of Grouping Element records in the Inspection Group.
When the Equipment Type of an Inspection Group is Piping, these percentages are
applied at the subgroup level, meaning that a certain percentage of Grouping Element
records from each subgroup (i.e., General or Localized/Pitting) will be selected for
inspection.
The following table lists the subgroups that are associated with Inspection Groups whose
Equipment Type is Piping, the possible Risk Categories for Inspection Groups, and the
percentage that is used in each scenario to determine the number of selections for
inspection. Shading has been added to the table to make it easier to distinguish between
the percentages applied to the subgroup General and those applied to the subgroup
Localized/Pitting.
If the subgroup
is...
and the Risk

Category is...
This percentage is used to determine the number

of selections for inspection...
General
High
50%
General
Medium High
25%
General
Medium
10%
General
Low
5%
Localized/Pitting
High
None
Localized/Pitting
Medium High
50%
Localized/Pitting
Medium
25%
Localized/Pitting
Low
10%
The following table displays the possible Risk Categories for Inspection Groups and the
percentage that is used in each case when the Equipment Type for an Inspection Group is
Vessels or Tanks. In this case, there is no distinction between the subgroups when
determining the number of selections for inspection. Instead, the subgroups are relevant
only when the system is selecting Representative RBI Components.
If the Risk
Category is...
This percentage is used to determine the

number of selections for inspection...
High
50%
Medium High
25%
Medium
10%
Low
5%
Determining the Rank for Grouping

Element Records - Internal Corrosion
For Inspection Groups whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion, after the Meridium
APM system determines the number of selections for inspection for an Inspection Group,
the following values are used to determine the rank of each Grouping Element record
with respect to its priority for inspection:
Inspection Priority
Wall Ratio
The Meridium APM system ranks Grouping Element records first based on the value in
the Inspection Priority field and second based on the value in the Wall Ratio field, sorting
them from most conservative (i.e., the lowest value) to least conservative (i.e., the highest
value). This process is similar to the one followed for Inspection Groups whose
Corrosion Type is Corrosion Under Insulation with one difference: for Inspection Groups
whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion and Equipment Type is Piping, this ranking
occurs within the subgroups in an Inspection Group.
For example, suppose you have an Inspection Group whose Corrosion Type is Internal
Corrosion, Equipment Type is Piping, and Risk Category is Medium High. The following
table shows the Grouping Element Record ID for each Grouping Element record in this
Inspection Group and the associated Inspection Priority and Wall Ratio values.
Additionally, the Thinning Type value in each Grouping Element record is listed, and the
shading represents the two subgroups that exist within the Inspection Group.
Grouping Element Record Thinning
ID
Type
Inspection
Priority
Wall
Ratio
RBIComp_1
General
17
28
RBIComp_2
Pitting
13
17.8
RBIComp_3
Pitting
14
2.211
RBIComp_4
General
12
15.147
RBIComp_5
Localized
15
16.2
RBIComp_6
General
18
28.4
RBIComp_7
General
10.4
RBIComp_8
Localized
11
18.6
In this example, the following Grouping Element records form the subgroup General:
RBIComp_1
RBIComp_4
RBIComp_6
RBIComp_7
The following Grouping Element records form the subgroup Localized/Pitting:
RBIComp_2
RBIComp_3
RBIComp_5
RBIComp_8
The following table illustrates how the Meridium APM system would rank these
Grouping Element records based on the subgroup in which they exist.
Rank Grouping Element Record ID
Thinning Type Inspection Priority
Wall Ratio
RBIComp_7
General
10.4
RBIComp_4
General
12
15.147
RBIComp_1
General
17
28
RBIComp_6
General
18
28.4
RBIComp_8
Localized
11
18.6
RBIComp_2
Pitting
13
17.8
RBIComp_3
Pitting
14
2.211
RBIComp_5
Localized
15
16.2
Recall that the Risk Category that is associated with this Inspection Group is Medium
High. Therefore, the following percentages will be used to determine the number of
selections for inspection in each subgroup:
25% for the subgroup General.

50% for the subgroup Localized/Pitting.
Using these percentages, the Selected for Inspection value would be set to True in:
RBIComp_7: Represents the top 25% of Grouping Element records in the

subgroup General.
RBIComp_8: Represents one of two Grouping Element records in the top 50% of
records in the subgroup Localized/Pitting.
RBIComp_2: Represents one of two Grouping Element records in the top

50% of records in the subgroup Localized/Pitting.
At this point, the Meridium APM system can identify which Grouping Element records
will be selected as Representative RBI Components.
Selecting Representative RBI

Components - Internal Corrosion
After Grouping Element records have been ranked by the Meridium APM system,
Representative RBI Components are identified for the associated Inspection Group. This
is accomplished by defining the Represents Inspections relationship definition between
Grouping Element records, where certain Grouping Element records are defined as the
predecessors in this relationship, and other Grouping Element records are defined as the
successors in this relationship.
If the Inspection Group's Equipment Type is Piping, there are no additional steps to this
process. In other words, once Grouping Element records in this type of Inspection Group
are ranked, the Meridium APM system will identify the Representative RBI Components
as those records that contain the value True in the Selected for Inspection field.
For Inspection Groups whose Equipment Type is Vessels or Tanks, however, the
Meridium APM system must use additional criteria to identify Representative RBI
Components. The following additional values are considered in this process:
Operating Pressure
The Meridium APM system considers these values in each Grouping Element record in
which the Selected for Inspection value has been set to True based on the criteria for
setting this value. Specifically, these values must meet the following criteria:
The value in the Operating Temperature field must be +/- 50 this same value in
another Grouping Element record in the Inspection Group.
The value in the Operating Pressure field must be +/- 50 this same value in
another Grouping Element record in the Inspection Group.
Additionally, for these Inspection Groups, all subgroups must be represented among the
selected Represented RBI Components. Thus, if no records within a particular subgroup
contain the value True in the Selected for Inspection field after the Meridium APM
system determines the number of selections for the Inspection Group and ranks its
Grouping Element records, the system will select an additional Grouping Element record
for inspection from the unrepresented subgroup at this time. The following example
explains this concept.
Suppose that you have an Inspection Group whose Corrosion Type is Internal Corrosion,
Equipment Type is Vessels, and Risk Category is Medium High. Now, suppose that this
Inspection Group contains the Grouping Element records listed in the following table.
The shading indicates the two subgroups to which these records belong. The Rank
column displays the rank that each record has been assigned based on the criteria for
ranking Inspection Group records.
Grouping Element Record ID
Representative Fluid
Material Spec
Rank
RBIComp_1
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_2
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_3
SA-182
Benzine
RBIComp_4
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_5
SA-182
Benzine
RBIComp_6
SA-182
Benzine
RBIComp_7
SA-106
Amine
RBIComp_8
SA-182
Benzine
Recall that for an Inspection Group of this type, 25% of the Inspection Group's RBI
Components should be selected for inspection. Based on the order in which they are
ranked, the top 25% of RBI Components in this Inspection Group are represented by the
following Grouping Element records:
RBIComp_1
RBIComp_4
Notice that these records contain the same values in the Representative Fluid and
Material Spec fields (i.e., they belong to the same subgroup). Because the other subgroup
(i.e., the group whose Representative Fluid value is SA-182 and Material Spec value is
Benzine) is not represented in those RBI Components selected for inspection, the
Meridium APM system will automatically identify the highest ranked Grouping Element
record in this subgroup as a Representative RBI Component. Thus, in this case, the
Selected for Inspection value would be set to True in the Grouping Element record
RBIComp_5, and that record would be identified as the predecessor in the Represents
Inspections relationship definition with another Grouping Element record in the same
subgroup.
System Code Tables Used by RBI

The following System Code Tables are used by Risk Based Inspection.
Table ID
Table
Description
Function
Damage
Factor Class
The values in this System

Code Table are used when
you calculate an RBI PRD
Analysis.
MI_DAMAGE_FACTOR
Degradation
Mechanism
Types
MI_GROUPING_CORR_TYPE
Grouping
Corrosion
Types
Used to populate the

list in Potential
records.
Used to populated the
Corrosion Type list in Asset
Group records and in the
following locations:
The Create
Inspection Group
dialog box.
list is Asset Group records
MI_GROUPING_EQP_TYPE
Grouping
Equipment
The Find Inspection

Groups page.
and in the following

locations:
The Find Inspection

Groups page.
The Create
Inspection Group
dialog box.
Types
MI_INSPECTION_RESULT
MI_PDM_FILTER
MI_PRD_DISCHARGE_LOCATION
MI_PROTECTED_EQUIP_TYPES
Inspection
Result
Used to populate the Test

Results list in Criticality
Over Pressure Deg.
Mech. Eval. and
Criticality Leak Deg.
MI RBI,
Potential
Degradation
Filter
Used to limit the Potential

records that can be linked
to Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records.
MI PRD
Discharge
Location
Used to populate the PRD

Discharge Location list in
RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis records.
Protected
Equipment
Types

list in RBI PRD Criticality
Analysis records.
RBI Risk
Category
Used to populate the Risk

Category list in Asset
Group records and on the
Find Inspection Groups
page.
MI_RBI_RISK_CATEGORY
MI_SERVICE_SEVERITY

Severity of the Service Severity list in RBI
process fluid PRD Criticality Analysis
records.
Parameters for the Risk Based

Inspection URL
There is one root URL associated with Risk Based Inspection: meridium://RBIClient. A
link constructed from the path alone will open the RBI Start Page. In addition, you can
use the parameters described in the following table to customize the URL for Risk Based
Inspection.
Parameter
Name
Asset_Keys
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Specifies one
or more
records
whose RBI
Criticality
Analysis
The Entity Key of the
records that desired records.
you want to
display on the
RBI - Review
Analyses
page.
Specifies one
or more
records that
you want to
The Entity Key of the
EntityKeys display on the
desired records.
page that is
specified by
the Module
parameter.
True
ExpandMode Specifies
whether you False
want to
expand the
RBI Explorer
pane.
Notes
You must use the Query parameter

in addition to the Asset_Keys
parameter in order to return results
on the RBI - Review Analyses page.
If desired, you can specify multiple
Entity Keys, separating each with a
comma.
You must use the EntityKeys

parameter when the Module
parameter is set to SystemScreen,
ComponentScreen, or
InspectionGroupDetails. If desired,
you can specify multiple Entity
Keys, separating each with a
comma.
This parameter is optional. If you
omit it, the RBI Explorer pane will
not be expanded. If you include it,
the value can be set to either of the
following values:
True: Expands the RBI
Explorer pane.
False: Collapses the RBI

Explorer pane.
In other words, omitting this

parameter has the same effect as
setting it to False.
Note that this parameter works only
when Module=ComponentScreen.
Family
Module
Specifies the
You must use this parameter in
family to
addition to the Module and
which the
EntityKeys parameters if you want
records
to use the Grouping Element (rather
GroupingElement
whose Entity
than the Asset Group) record Entity
Keys you are
Keys to determine which records
using
should be displayed on the
belongs.
Component
Component: Displays the

Specifies the
RBI Component List page.
page that you ComponentScreen
want to view.
ComponentScreen: Displays
ManageRecommendation
the RBI Asset View page, where
the Equipment records that are
ReviewAnalyses
displayed in the RBI Explorer
pane are linked to the
System
Components records whose
Entity Keys you identified with
SystemScreen
the EntityKeys parameter.
ImportExport
ManageRecommendation:
InspectionGroupDetails
Displays the Manage
Recommendations page.
FindInspectionGroups
System: Displays the RBI

System List page.
SystemScreen: Displays the

RBI Unit View page, where the
Functional Location records
that are displayed in the RBI
Explorer pane are linked to the
RBI System records whose

Entity Keys you identified with
the EntityKeys parameter.
Query
ViewMode
Specifies the
query that
you want to
use to return Review Analyses by
results on the Asset
RBI - Review
Analyses
page.
Specifies
whether you
want to see All
all analyses
or only active Active
analyses on
the RBI Asset
View page.
ImportExport: Displays the

RBI Export and Import page.
InspectionGroupDetails:
Displays the Inspection Group
Details page, where the
Inspection Groups contained in
the Inspection Groups list are
associated with the Asset
Group records with the Entity
Keys you identified with the
EntityKeys parameter.
FindInspectionGroups:
Displays the Find Inspection
Groups page.
You must use the Asset_Keys

parameter in addition to the Query
parameter in order to return results
on the RBI - Review Analyses page.
All: Displays all RBI

Analyses on the RBI Asset
View page.
Active: Displays only the

active RBI Analysis on the RBI
Asset View page.
Note that if you omit the

ViewMode parameter, the RBI
Asset View page will display only
the Active analysis.
Examples of the Risk Based Inspection

URL
meridium://RBIClient?Module=System
Displays the RBI System List page.
meridium://RBIClient?Module=Component
Displays the RBI Component List page.
meridium://RBIClient?Module=ComponentScreen&EntityKeys=1234,5678
Displays the RBI Asset View page, where the Equipment records that appear in the RBI
Explorer pane are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records with the
Entity Keys 1234 and 5678.
meridium://RBIClient?
Module=ComponentScreen&EntityKeys=1234,5678&ExpandMode=True
Displays the RBI Asset View page, where the Equipment records that appear in the RBI
Explorer pane are linked to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components records with the
Entity Keys 1234 and 5678. The RBI Explorer pane is expanded by default.
meridium://RBIClient?Module=SystemScreen&EntityKeys=9876,5432
Displays the RBI Unit View page, where the Functional Location records that appear in
the RBI Explorer pane are linked to the RBI System records with the Entity Keys 9876
and 5432.
Module=ComponentScreen&EntityKeys=1234&ViewMode=All
Displays the RBI Asset View page, where ALL analyses are displayed in the RBI
Explorer pane.
Module=ReviewAnalyses&Query=Public\Meridium\Modules\Risk Based
Inspection\Queries\Review Analyses by Asset&ASSET_KEYS=1234
Displays the RBI - Review Analyses page, where the RBI Criticality Analysis records
that are linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record with the Entity Key 1234
are displayed in the grid in the RBI - Review Analyses section.
meridium://RBIClient?Module=InspectionGroupDetails&EntityKeys=1234,5678
Displays the Inspection Group Details page, where the Inspection Groups that appear in
the Inspections Groups list are associated with the Asset Group records with the Entity
Keys 1234 and 5678.
Module=InspectionGroupDetails&EntityKeys=4321,8765&Family=GroupingEle
ment
Displays the Inspection Group Details page, where the Inspection Groups that appear in
the Inspection Groups list are associated with the Grouping Element records with the
Entity Keys 4321 and 8765.
meridium://RBIClient?Module=FindInspectionGroups
Displays the Find Inspection Groups page, where you can search for existing or create
new Inspection Groups.
Active Analysis
An RBI Analysis or RBI PRD Analysis whose analysis record (RBI Criticality Analysis
record or RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record) is set to any of the following states:
Risk Completed
Pending Approval
Approved
Implemented
Re-Evaluating
Archived Inspection Group
An Inspection Group whose Asset Group and related Grouping Element records have
been transitioned to the Archived state. An Inspection Group is transitioned automatically
to this state when another Inspection Group with the same unit, Equipment Type,
Corrosion Type, and Risk Category is set to the Implemented or Not Implemented state.
Corrosion Type
The type of corrosion to which the pieces of equipment that belong to an Inspection
Group are susceptible. Inspection Groups can be created for the following Corrosion
Types only:
CUI (Corrosion Under Insulation)
ICPC (Internal Corrosion)
The Corrosion Type that is associated with an Inspection Group is stored in the Corrosion
Type field in the Asset Group record that belongs to that Inspection Group.

Record
A record that belongs to any of the following baseline families:


Evaluation Record
A record that belongs to any of the following baseline families:


Record
A record that belongs to either of the following baseline families:

Criticality PRD Component - Rupture Disk
Equipment Type
The type of equipment that is associated with all pieces of equipment that belong to an
Inspection Group. Inspection Groups can be created for the following Equipment Types
only:
Piping
Vessels
Tanks
The Equipment Type that is associated with an Inspection Group is stored in the
Grouping Equipment Type field in the Asset Group record that belongs to that Inspection
Group.
Future Risk Analysis

An RBI Analysis that allows you to analyze hypothetical situations to determine the
future risk associated with an RBI Component's failure, where the future risk is
determined based on a specified date in the future. Future Risk Analyses are child
analyses of a main RBI Analysis.
A Future Risk Analysis can be active or inactive.
Implemented Inspection Group

been transitioned to the Implemented state. You can generate RBI Recommendation
records from an Inspection Group that is in this state.
Inspection Group
A collection of equipment and their components that share certain characteristics and for
which inspections that are performed for one component will satisfy the inspection
requirements of other components in the collection. In the Meridium APM system, an
Inspection Group consists of one Asset Group record and its related Grouping Element
records.
Main RBI Analysis

An RBI Analysis that allows you to determine the current risk associated with an RBI
Component's failure due to a specific set of degradation mechanisms. Main RBI Analyses
can have child Future Risk Analyses or What If Analyses.
A main RBI Analysis can be active or inactive.
Pressure Relief Device

A device that protects equipment or RBI Components from pressure buildup. Pressure
relief devices are defined by Criticality Calculator PRD Components records.
Note: The majority of the RBI documentation is focused on RBI Components and their
corresponding RBI Analyses. Unless otherwise noted, the majority of the functionality
that is available for RBI Components and RBI Analyses is also available for pressure
relief devices and RBI PRD Analyses. Some functionality, however, is specific to
pressure relief devices and RBI PRD Analyses, and is documented in a separate section.
Proposed Inspection Group

An Inspection Group whose Asset Group and related Grouping Element records are in the
Proposed state. New Inspection Groups are set to this state by default. You can modify
Inspection Groups only when they are in the Proposed state.
RBI Component
A group of components that share the same degradation mechanisms and belong to the
same equipment. RBI Components are defined by Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records.
RBI PRD Analysis

A combination of an RBI PRD Criticality Analysis record and the successor records to
which it is linked, where those records contain risk information about the pressure relief
device for which the analysis was created.
Note: This documentation contains instructions for creating and opening existing RBI
PRD Analyses and information about fields required to calculate RBI PRD Analyses. All
other RBI Analysis functionality that also applies to RBI PRD Analyses is not documented
separately for RBI PRD Analyses.
RBI System
A collection of RBI Components that are grouped together for the purpose of conducting
an RBI Analysis. RBI Systems are defined by RBI System records.
RBI Analysis
A combination of an RBI Criticality Analysis record and the successor records to which it
is linked, where those records contain risk information about the RBI Component for
which the analysis was created. There are three types of RBI Analyses:
Main RBI Analysis

Future Risk Analysis
What If Analysis
RBI Strategy Mapping Group

Note: This information does not apply to RBI Recommendation records that are
generated automatically from Inspection Groups.
The various components that together define the Policy record logic that is used to
generate an RBI Recommendation record automatically from an RBI Analysis.
Representative RBI Component

An RBI Component whose associated piece of equipment must be inspected. Inspections
performed on this piece of equipment satisfy the inspection requirements of Represented
RBI Components in the same Inspection Group. In the Meridium APM system, a
Representative RBI Component is identified by a Grouping Element record that is the
predecessor in the Represents Inspections relationship definition.
Represented RBI Component

An RBI Component whose associated piece of equipment's inspection requirements are
satisfied by the inspection of a Representative RBI Component's associated piece of
equipment. In the Meridium APM system, a Represented RBI Component is identified by
a Grouping Element record that is the successor in the Represents Inspections
Risk Category
The level of risk that is associated with the pieces of equipment that belong to an
Inspection Group. Inspection Groups can be associated with any of the following Risk
Categories:
High
Medium High
Medium
Low
The Risk Category that is associated with an Inspection Group is stored in the Risk
Category field in the Asset Group record that belongs to that Inspection Group.
Unimplemented Inspection Group

been transitioned to the Not Implemented state. This state indicates that RBI
Recommendation records will not be created from the Inspection Group.
Unit
A Functional Location record that represents a unit. In these records the value in the Is a
Unit? field is set to True.
What If Analysis
An RBI Analysis that allows you to analyze hypothetical situations to determine how
operational and process changes that you could make today would impact the risk
associated with a subcomponent's failure. A What If Analysis is a child analysis of a main
RBI Analysis.
If desired, after you create and calculate a What If Analysis, you can transfer the values in
the What If Analysis to the main RBI Analysis.
What If Analyses cannot be active.
Overview of Inspection Management

Accurate understanding of current equipment and location conditions is critical to
analyzing the reliability and future availability of the equipment and locations. Meridium
APM provides a solution for this requirement through the Inspection Management
module, a tool that you can use to document, manage, and analyze data associated with
the inspections of equipment and locations in your facility. The Inspection Management
functionality is fully integrated with other Meridium APM features to give you access to
other analytical tools, such as Thickness Monitoring. Throughout the documentation, we
refer to the Inspection Management module and its associated functionality simply using
the term Inspection. D
Inspection Management System

Requirements
The Inspection Management license is required to take advantage of Inspection
Management functionality. In addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium
APM system architecture.
After you have installed and configured the basic system architecture, you will need to
perform some configuration tasks specifically for the Inspection Management module.
Inspection Management Data Model

Like all Meridium APM modules, the Meridium APM Inspection Management module
consists of entity families, relationship families, and business rules. When attempting to
understand and make use of Inspection Management functionality, it can be helpful to
visualize the Inspection Management data model.
Because you should already be familiar with the concept of records and viewing records
in the Meridium APM Record Manager, as you attempt to get your bearings in Inspection
Management, it may be useful to remember that the pages in Inspection Management
simply offer a customized view of individual records that belong to families in the data
model. In addition, each step in the Inspection Management workflow allows you to
create, view, or manage those records.
The following diagram illustrates how records are linked to one another within Inspection
Management. The shaded boxes represent entity families, and the arrows represent
relationship families. You can determine the direction of each relationship from the
direction of the arrow head: the box to the left of each arrow head is the predecessor in
that relationship, and the box to the right of each arrow head is the successor in that
relationship. For example, you can see that Inspection records are linked to Inspection
Recommendation records through the Has Recommendations relationship, where the
Inspection family is the predecessor.
While the image shows one box for the Inspection family, Meridium APM provides the
following Inspection families as part of the baseline Inspection Management content:
Bundle Inspection
Bundle Sub-Inspection
API 510 External Checklist
API 510 Internal Exchanger Checklist
API 510 Internal Checklist
External PRD Checklist
Full Inspection
General Inspection
PRD Pop Test Checklist
Pressure Test Inspection
Pressure Test Sub-Inspection
In the image above, the Inspection box is the predecessor to the Checklist Finding box. In
the baseline database, however, only the following Inspection families are related to the
Checklist Finding family:

Note that although both the Equipment and Functional Location families are related to
the Inspection Profile family, this documentation assumes that you will create Inspection
Profiles only for equipment. You will typically not create Inspection Profiles for
locations.
Inspection Management and RBI

Integration
In addition to the families shown in the Inspection Management data model, access to the
following Risk Based Inspection (RBI) entity and relationship families is provided when
the Inspection Management license is active:
Asset Group
Criticality PRD Component - Rupture Disk
Grouping Element
Has Asset Group
Has RBI Components
Has RBI Systems
Is Part of Group
RBI Components
RBI Degradation Mechanism Evaluation
RBI System
Represents Inspections
The MI Inspection Security Group has View privileges to all families in this list. These
families support the following functionality:
Time-based inspection settings, which play a role in populating values in

Inspection Task records that are associated with the equipment that you analyze in
RBI and Inspection. In the baseline Meridium APM database, the entity families
that support this functionality are related to the Equipment family through the Has
RBI Components relationship.
Additionally, when the RBI license is active, the inspection intervals that are associated
with the time-based inspection settings you define are considered by the Meridium APM
system when determining the value that will be populated in the Desired Interval field in
Inspection Task records that you create in RBI.
Inspection Grouping, which allows you to group RBI Components based on

certain criteria and perform inspections for a subset of the equipment in the group
rather than for every piece of equipment in the group. When the RBI license is
active, the Inspection Groups that you create in RBI facilitate the creation of
Represented Inspections in Inspection Management.
Inspection Documents
Inspection Documents contain all of the information associated with a given inspection.
You can think of an Inspection Document as the collection of information stored in any
Inspection record and each record that is linked to that record, which are best viewed
together using the configured explorer that is defined for the Inspection family.
For example, if you view a Full Inspection record in its configured explorer, you will see
a list of records that have been linked to that Full Inspection record. The Inspection
Document is the information in the Full Inspection record and the records that are linked
to it, such as General Finding and Recommendation records. You can also think of an
Inspection Document as all of the information that is included when you print an
inspection report.
Throughout the Inspection Management interface, you will see the term Inspection
Document. When you see this term in the documentation, keep in mind that we are
referring collectively to the information that is stored in an Inspection record and each
record that is linked to it.
Because of how we define an Inspection Document, you will not find specific
instructions for creating an Inspection Document in this documentation. Instead, you will
find instructions for creating individual Inspection records, General Finding records,
Inspection Recommendations records, and so on, which together are used to build the
Inspection Document. Because an Inspection Document is the compilation of various
records, the Inspection workflow does not facilitate the creation of an Inspection
Document directly. An Inspection Document is a concept rather than a specific entity.
Types of Inspections
Using Inspection Management, you can record inspection results for the following types
of inspections:
Shell and tube heat exchanger inspections.

General routine inspections performed against any piece of equipment or location
for compliance purposes.
General routine inspections performed against any piece of equipment or location

by operators versus inspectors (does not necessarily meet compliance standards).
Hydrostatic tests (i.e., the process of filling a pressure vessel with liquid, such as
water, and increasing the internal pressure to test for leaks).
External and internal pressure vessel inspections (following API 510 standards).
Internal exchanger inspections (following API 510 standards).
External piping inspections (following API 570 standards).
External and internal tank inspections (following API 653 standards).
External visual inspections of pressure relief devices (PRDs).
External functional inspections of pressure relief devices (PRDs) (following API

576 standards).
You will record the results of each inspection in an Inspection record and in successor
records to which the Inspection record is linked. The baseline Meridium APM database
contains Inspection families that you can use for recording the results of each type of
inspection. The following table lists the baseline Inspection families and the type of
inspection to which they correspond.
Family
Bundle Inspection
Inspection Type
Bundle SubInspection
Shell and tube heat exchanger inspections.
Full Inspection
General routine inspections performed against any piece of

equipment or location for compliance purposes.
General Inspection
General routine inspections performed against any piece of

equipment or location by operators versus inspectors (does not
necessarily meet compliance standards).
Pressure Test
Inspection
Pressure Test SubInspection
API 510 External
Checklist
Hydrostatic tests.
API 510 Internal

External and internal pressure vessel inspections and internal
Exchanger Checklist
exchanger inspections (following API 510 standards).
API 510 Internal
Checklist
API 570 External

Checklist
API 653 External
Checklist
API 653 Internal
Checklist
External piping inspections (following API 570 standards).
External and internal tank inspections (following API 653

standards).
External PRD
Checklist
External visual inspections of PRDs.
PRD Pop Test

Checklist
External functional inspections of PRDs (following API 576

standards).
Depending upon the type of inspection that you want to conduct, the workflow you will
use in Inspection Management to record the results will be different.
Inspection Profiles
An Inspection Profile is a combination of an Equipment record, Inspection Profile
records, and Inspection Method records that together determine which equipment
subcomponents need to be inspected and the methods that will be used to inspect them.
Specifically:
The Equipment record represents the equipment that needs to be inspected.

Inspection Profile records represent subcomponents of the equipment that need to
be inspected. Each Inspection Profile record is linked directly to the Equipment
record.
Inspection Method records represent how you plan to inspect each subcomponent.
Each Inspection Method record is linked to an Inspection Profile record.
Note: Typically, you will want to configure Inspection Profiles only for equipment and
not for locations. Throughout this documentation, therefore, we refer to creating
Inspection Profiles using Equipment records and not Functional Location records.
For example, suppose you need to inspect a water heater. The water heater represents the
equipment as a whole, but you need to inspect individual parts of that water heater
separately. You might need to inspect the pipes, heating rods, thermostat, and insulation
and then record your findings in separate records. In addition, for each part that needs to
be inspected, there might be multiple ways in which it can be inspected. For example, to
fully inspect the pipes, you might need to look for cracks and heat loss.
You would, therefore, need to create:
A Water Heater record to represent the equipment.

Individual Inspection Profile records to represent each subcomponent of the water
heater. In each Inspection Profile record, you would use the Item Category field to
indicate the part of the water heater that you need to inspect. For example, you
might create the Pipes Inspection Profile record.
Individual Inspection Method records to represent how each subcomponent needs

to be inspected. For example, you might create the following Inspection Method
records, which would be linked to the Pipes Inspection Profile record: Check for
cracks and Evaluate heat loss.
After you define the Inspection Profile for an equipment, when you create an Inspection
Task record to use for inspecting the equipment, you can define the scope of that
individual inspection event by selecting which subcomponents (Inspection Profile
records) and methods (Inspection Method records) you want to include in the inspection.
In other words, after an inspection profile exists for an equipment, you can pick and
choose which parts of the profile you want to include in each future inspection of the
equipment.
If the Event Configuration is set up correctly, when you create an Inspection record that is
linked to an Equipment record, General Finding records will be created automatically
according to the Inspection Scope for the equipment. For example, if the Inspection Task
record that was used to create the Inspection record is linked to five Inspection Profile
records, and each of those records is linked to two Inspection Method records, ten
General Finding records will be created, one per Inspection Method record that was
included in the Inspection Scope. You can then record your findings for each
subcomponent in a separate record. This is useful if parts of the equipment passed the
inspection and other parts failed the inspection. If you had only one record to record your
findings, you would be unable to fully represent the inspection results.
Additionally, if the Application Configuration is set up correctly, Inspection Profile
records will be created automatically for Equipment records that are not yet linked to
Inspection Profile records.
You can create or modify an Inspection Profile record from the Inspection Profile for
<Equipment Record ID> page, where <Equipment Record ID> is the Record ID of the
Equipment record whose inspection profile is defined on the page.
Note: You do not need to define Inspection Profiles if you plan to create records only in
the Inspection families whose caption contains the word Checklist. The process for
recording subcomponent findings for these families does not rely on Inspection Profile or
Inspection Method records.
What is an Inspection Scope?

While each piece of equipment has one Inspection Profile, each time that you identify a
need to inspect a piece of equipment, you will need to define the Inspection Scope for
that individual inspection event. Each Inspection Scope defines for an individual
inspection the equipment parts that need to be inspected and the methods that should be
used to inspect them.
An Inspection Scope consists of the following items:
An Equipment record, which defines the equipment that should be inspected.

An Inspection Task record, which provides details about the inspection event that
should be performed, including information such as the desired inspection date
and any minimum or maximum date ranges for the inspection event. The
Inspection Task record is linked to the Equipment record
One or more Inspection Profile records, which define the subcomponents that
One or more Inspection Method records, which define the methods that should be
used to inspect the individual subcomponents.
For example, suppose that you define an Inspection Profile for a water heater with the
following information.
Inspection Profile Inspection Method
Check for cracks

Pipes
Evaluate heat loss
Heating Rods
Check for proper functioning
Thermostat
Check for proper functioning
Check for heat loss
Insulation
Check for corrosion
Check for heat loss
Check for corrosion
Tank
Check for rust

buildup
This Inspection Profile indicates all possible subcomponents and inspection methods for
those subcomponents.
Suppose that after a week of washing the dishes or showering, you realize that the water
is taking too long to get warm. If you suspect that the water heater is somehow losing too
much heat, you might identify a need to inspect the parts of the water heater that affect its
ability to retain heat: pipes, tank, and insulation.
In this case, the Inspection Scope for this inspection event would include a subset of the
entire Inspection Profile. This inspection scope might contain the following items:
Inspection Task record

Equipment record (which represents the water heater)
Multiple Inspection Profile and Inspection Method records, as shown in the

following image.
Inspection Profile Inspection Method
Pipes
Evaluate heat loss
Insulation
Check for heat loss
Tank
Check for heat loss
To define an Inspection Scope, you will need to create an Inspection Task record or find
an existing Inspection Task record and link it to the Inspection Profile and Inspection
Method records that identify the subcomponents that should be inspected and the
methods that should be used. You can create an Inspection Scope from the Inspection
Management Start Page or the Inspection Profile page. When you create an Inspection
Scope from the Inspection Management Start Page, you will need to select the Equipment
record that represents the equipment that should be inspected. When you create an
Inspection Scope from the Inspection Profile page, however, the Meridium APM system
assumes that you want to define the Inspection Scope for the equipment that is currently
displayed on the Inspection Profile page.
Note: You do not need to define an Inspection Scope if you plan to create records only in
How is an Inspection Scope Used?

Each Inspection Scope consists of an Equipment record, an Inspection Task record that is
linked to the Equipment record, one or more Inspection Profile records, and optionally,
one or more Inspection Method records.
When you create an Inspection record that is linked to that Equipment record, the
Meridium APM system will generate General Finding records (assuming the Event
Configuration that is defined for the Inspection family is configured correctly)
automatically. The number of records that are created automatically is based upon the
Inspection Profile and Inspection Method records that are included in the Inspection
Scope.
Note: You do not need to define an Inspection Scope if you plan to create records only in
You can use the following guidelines to determine how the Meridium APM system will
use the Inspection Scope to generate General Finding records automatically:
If the Inspection Scope contains Inspection Profile records that are not linked to
Inspection Method records, one General Finding record will be generated for each
Inspection Profile record that is included and not linked to an Inspection Method
record.
For example, consider the following Inspection Scope.
In this example, you can see that only the following Inspection Profile records are
included in the scope: BAFFLES and BEARINGS. Neither of these Inspection Profile
records is linked to an Inspection Method record.
In this case, if an Inspection record is generated, the following General Finding records
will be created automatically:
BAFFLES
BEARINGS
If the Inspection Scope contains Inspection Profile records that are linked to
Inspection Method records and one or more of those Inspection Method records
are included in the Inspection Scope, one General Finding record will be
generated for each Inspection Method record that is included.
For example, consider an Inspection Scope where the following are true:
The Inspection Profile record BAFFLES is linked to Inspection Method record

Method A, and Method A is included in the Inspection Scope, as shown in the
following image.
The Inspection Profile record BEARINGS is linked to Inspection Method records

Method B and Method C, and Method B is included in the Inspection Scope, as
shown in the following image.
The Inspection Profile records BODY is linked to Inspection Method record

Method D, and Method D is not included in the Inspection Scope, as shown in the
following image.
In other words, the Inspection Scope includes Inspection Method records Method A,
which is linked to Inspection Profile record BAFFLES, and Method B, which is linked to
Inspection Profile record BEARINGS.
In this case, if an Inspection record is generated, the following General Finding records
will be created automatically:
BAFFLES
BEARINGS
In addition to determining the number of General Finding records that are created, the
Inspection Scope also determines the values that will be used to populate the RBI
Component fields in those General Finding records. If the Inspection Scope includes an
Inspection Profile record with a value in the RBI Component field, when a General
Finding record is created from that Inspection Profile record (or any Inspection Method
record to which it is linked), the value in the RBI Component field will be transferred to
the RBI Component field in the General Finding record.
About Work Packs

A Work Pack is a collection of records that define inspection work that needs to be
performed for a piece of equipment or location in your organization. Work Pack records
store preparation information about the inspection work that needs to be performed. Work
Packs records, in combination with the following records that can be linked to Work Pack
records, are intended to define planned inspection work that can be estimated by outside
resources who might perform the work:
Inspection Task
Inspection
The general process for managing Work Packs is as follows:

1. Create one or more Work Pack records, depending upon what should be inspected
and the type of those inspections.
2. Link the Work Pack records that represent the items that should be inspected to
the Inspection Task records that define the planned inspection work.
3. Generate a report that includes details about the Inspection Task records that are
linked to the Work Pack records.
4. Print the report and distribute it to the appropriate resources so that the cost of
performing the inspection work can be estimated.
5. Based on the estimates, determine which inspections will be performed and which
ones will not.
For example, suppose a Work Pack includes tasks to inspect all pieces of equipment in a
particular system. If you receive an estimate from an inspector that exceeds your budget,
you might need to trim the inspection work and inspect only the pieces of equipment
whose previous inspections revealed defects.
6. Generate an Inspection record from each Inspection Task record that defines work
that is actually planned, based on the final estimates. For each Inspection record
that is created from an Inspection Task record, the Meridium APM system will
also create a General Finding record based on the Inspection Profile and
Inspection Method records that are included in the Inspection Scope containing
that Inspection Task record.
7. Generate a report that includes a list of the General Finding records, and distribute
the report to the individuals responsible for performing the inspection. They can
record their findings on the printed report.
About the Work Pack Hierarchy

You can create a hierarchy of Work Pack records to organize the work that you will
perform during inspections, where:
The lowest level of the hierarchy contains a Work Pack record for the actual item
that will be inspected (i.e., a piece of equipment or location).
The levels above the lowest level contain Work Pack records for the locations
containing the item that will be inspected.
Each Work Pack hierarchy can include up to three levels.

To fully understand this concept, you must understand the concept of a location
hierarchy, where each location at a lower level belongs to a location at a higher level. For
example, you might have a location hierarchy that looks like the following diagram,
where process locations belong to systems, systems belong to units, and so on.
Assuming that your location hierarchy contains at least three levels (where level 1 is
higher than level 2, level 2 is higher than level 3, and so on):
If you are inspecting equipment, the lowest level of the hierarchy should contain
Work Pack records representing the equipment. If you want to include three levels
in the Work Pack hierarchy, the top two levels should represent the locations to
which the equipment belongs. For example, if your location hierarchy looks like
the previous example location hierarchy, you would want to structure the Work
Pack hierarchy like this:
If you are inspection locations, the lowest level of the hierarchy should contain
Work Pack records representing those locations. If you want to include three
levels in the Work Pack hierarchy, the top two levels should represent the higherlevel locations to which those locations belong. For example, if your location
hierarchy looks like the previous example location hierarchy, you would want to
structure the Work Pack hierarchy like this:
These examples illustrate the use of three levels in the Work Pack hierarchy, but you may
want to create fewer than three levels, depending upon your needs.
Regardless of how many levels you create in a Work Pack hierarchy, you should link
Inspection Task and Inspection records directly to the Work Pack record that represents
the item that will be inspected. In other words, in the first example, you would link
Inspection Task and Inspection records directly to the equipment-level Work Pack records
(not the location-level Work Pack records). In the second example, you would link
Inspection Task and Inspection records directly to the process-location-level Work Pack
record (not the system-level or unit-level Work Pack records).
Inspection Team Members

An inspection team member is any person that participates in an inspection. When you
view an inspection report, you will see a section that lists all team members associated
with that inspection.
When you view an Inspection record in the Record Manager or on the Inspection
Finding Checklist page, you can use the record hierarchy to create a new Inspection
Team Member record to link to the Inspection record. Any user that has been assigned the
Inspector role can be selected in the Full Name field of that Inspection Team Member
record. After the Inspection Team Member record has been linked to the Inspection
record, the information in the Team Member record will be displayed in the Inspection
Team Members section of the inspection report.
Roles
Each Human Resource record can be linked to one or more Resource Role records, where
each Resource Role record contains a Role field. The value in the Role field is used to
indicate that user's role within the organization.
After a Human Resource record is linked to a Resource Role record, the value in the Role
field:
Determines certain administrative tasks that a user can perform by controlling

which links the user can see on the Inspection Administration page.
Filters certain lists in Inspection records.
Roles are intended to control the workflow of users who work with Inspection
Management. As they are delivered, each role should be used as described in the
following list. Note, however, that the Inspection Specialist role does not have a predelivered function. This role is provided so that you can customize the associated rules to
fit any responsibility within your company.
Inspector: Gathers data to enter into a new or existing Inspection record. Users
assigned the Inspector role appear in the Inspection Report Owner list on the
Inspection datasheet. The Inspection record would then be assigned to a reviewer,
which would be assigned the Inspection Supervisor role. A user who is assigned
an Inspector role will see only the Manage Inspection Alerts and Manage
Strategies links on the Inspection Administration page.
Inspection Supervisor: Reviews Inspection records that have been created by a
user with an Inspector role. Users assigned this role appear in the Reviewers
Name list on the Inspection datasheet. Users assigned an Inspection Supervisor
role will see only the Manage Inspection Alerts and Manage Strategies links on
the Inspection Administration page.
Inspection Administrator: Performs administrative tasks such as updating Security
User roles and certifications, managing existing Inspection Conditional Alert
records, creating new Inspection Conditional Alert records, creating new
configured explorers for new Inspection families, and defining default inspection
intervals. A user who is assigned an Inspection Administrator role will see the
following links on the Inspection Administration page:
Inspection Configuration
Manage Inspection Resources, Roles and Certifications
Manage Inspection Alerts
Manage Strategies
Manage Time-Based Settings
Inspection Specialist: Performs functions as determined by your unique

implementation of this role.
Certifications
You can indicate a user's certification level by creating a Personnel Certification record to
link to that user's Human Resource record. When that user creates or approves an
Inspection record, the Certification record will serve as documentation that the user is
qualified to perform that task. Because Inspection records are often used as legal
documentation to prove that an inspection took place, recording the responsible party's
qualifications is an important step.
Published Inspections
In an Inspection record, you can select the Published check box. The Published check
box does not restrict access to the document, however. It serves only as a visual indicator
about the status of the inspection. You can access published Inspection records from the
Published Inspection Documents page.
Note that if you have View privileges to an Inspection family, you will be able to see all
published and unpublished Inspection records that belong to that family. By default, the
Everyone group has View privileges to the baseline Inspection families.
You can publish inspections using the Inspection datasheet for any of the following
Inspection families:
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
Event Configurations
By default, each of the baseline Inspection families has its own Event Configuration. The
Event Configuration is created using the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard and
determines:
Whether General Finding records or Observation records will be created

automatically for each subcomponent of the piece of equipment that you
inspected when you created a new Inspection record for that piece of equipment.
The subcomponents are determined by the value that you specify in the Item
Category field in Inspection Profile records that are linked to the Equipment
record (i.e., each Inspection Profile record represents a different subcomponent of
the piece of equipment).
The datasheet that the inspection reviewer (i.e., the user whose name appears in
the Reviewers Name field in the Inspection record) will see.
The configured explorer that will be used to display the Inspection record and all
records to which it is linked.
If you create new Inspection families, you must create an Event Configuration for those
families.
Accessing the Inspection Management

Start Page
The Inspection Management Start Page serves as the starting point for all of the tasks
that you can perform in Inspection Management.
To access the Inspection Management Start Page:
On the Meridium APM main menu, click Go To, point to Mechanical Integrity,
and then click Inspection Management.
The Inspection Management Start Page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Management

Start Page
The Inspection Management Start Page displays links that let you access the features in
Inspection Management.
Note: The content of the Inspection Management Start Page is determined by your
assigned role. Depending on your assigned role, some of these links may not be available
to you. For example, only Super Users and Security Users who have been assigned a role
will see the Inspection Administration link. All users will be able to see the Published
Documents and Most Recent Documents links, but if you are a non-Super User with no
assigned roles, you will see only these two links.
The Inspection Management Start Page contains the following links:
Inspection Administration: Displays the Inspection Administration page, which

displays links to administrative tasks.
Manage Equipment Inspection Profiles: Displays the Inspection Manage Profiles

page, which displays a list of searches and queries that have been set up to
retrieve inspection profiles. By executing a search or query, you can create and
modify Inspection Profiles.
Manage Inspection Scope: Displays the Task Builder, where you can select the
Equipment record and Task record that belong to the Inspection Scope that you
want to manage.
Manage Work Packs: Displays the Manage Work Packs page, which displays a
list of existing Work Pack records.
Build an Inspection Document: Displays the Event Builder, which walks you
through the process of creating an Inspection record.
Manage Inspection Documents: Displays the Inspection Manage Documents

page, which displays a list of queries and searches that have been set up to
retrieve Inspection Event records.
Manage Tasks: Displays the Inspection Manage Tasks page, which displays a list
of searches and queries that have been set up to return Equipment or Functional
Location records that can be linked to Inspection Task records. After you run a
search or query to retrieve these Equipment or Functional Location records, you
can then manage the Task records to which they are linked from the Task List
page in Task Management.
Review and Approve Documents: Displays the Review and Approve Inspection
Documents page, which displays a list of saved searches and queries that have
been created to facilitate the review and approval process. You can run a search or
query to locate Inspection Event records that have been submitted for approval
and retrieve Inspection Event records based on the reviewer's name and the
document state.
Inspection Reports: Displays the Inspection Reports page, which displays a list of
saved searches and queries that have been created for the purpose of retrieving
inspection reports.
Published Documents: Displays the Published Inspection Documents page, which

displays a list of Inspection records that have been flagged as published.
Most Recent Documents: Displays in the Record Manager the Inspection record
associated with the link that you click. The list displays your four most recently
accessed Inspection records.

Deploying and configuring Inspection Management for the first time includes completing
multiple steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the
documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure
Inspection Management on top of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Whether a step is required or optional is indicated in the Required/Optional cell. Steps
are marked as Required if you must perform the step to take advantage of Inspection
Management functionality.
The person responsible for completing each task will vary within your organization. We
Step Task
Review the Inspection

Management data model to
determine which relationship
definitions you will need to
modify to include your
custom equipment and
Optional
location families. Modify
any relationship definitions
as needed via the
Configuration Manager
application.
This task is necessary only if you

store equipment and location
information in families other than
the baseline Equipment and
Functional Location families.
Assign Security Users to one

or more of the Inspection
Management Security
Required
Groups via the
Configuration Manager
application.
Security Users will need

permissions to the Inspection
Management families before they
can use the Inspection Management
features.
Set the Asset Query Path

Required
setting to the baseline Asset
Query via the Meridium
APM Framework
application.
In the baseline database, this setting

is not defined. The documentation
assumes that you are using the
product according to the Meridium
APM Best Practice. As such, we
assume that you will set the Asset

Query Path setting to the baseline
Asset Query.
Set the Associated

Relationship Family setting
to Functional Location Has
Equipment. You can
Required
accomplish this task using
the Meridium APM
Framework application.
Modify baseline Application

Configuration settings via
Optional
the Meridium APM
In the baseline database, this setting

is not defined. The documentation
assumes that you are using the
product according to the Meridium
APM Inspection Best Practice. As
such, we assume that you will set
the Associated Relationship Family
setting to Functional Location Has
Equipment.
The following Application
Configurations are defined in the
baseline database:
Published Query Path

Summary Query Path
Alerts Query Path
Asset Is Successor
Profile Configuration
Method Configuration
Strategy Rule Configuration
You can modify these Application

Configurations if you want.
Assign roles to users who

should be able to complete
tasks in Inspection
Management. You can
accomplish this task using
the Meridium APM
Required
Define the Inspection Profile Required

for each piece of equipment
that you will inspect. You
can accomplish this task
None
This step is required only if you

plan to create Inspection records in
baseline families other than the
Checklists subfamilies.
using the Meridium APM

Modify the baseline Asset

query via the Meridium
APM Framework
application.
Optional

want Inspection records to be linked
to records in a family other than the
Equipment family.
Define Event Configurations

for any new Inspection
families that you have
created. You can accomplish Optional
this task using the Meridium
APM Framework
application.

have created custom Inspection
families that you want to use within
Inspection Management.
10
Assign certifications to users

via the Meridium APM
Optional
None
11
Configure Meridium APM

to send email messages
about inspection data to the
appropriate recipients. You Optional
can accomplish this task
None
12
Group inspection work into

Work Packs. You can
accomplish this task using Optional
the Meridium APM
None
13
Define time-based
inspection settings. You can
accomplish this task using Optional
the Meridium APM
None
Upgrade Workflow
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading Inspection Management

from V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0
The Inspection Management module will be upgraded from V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0
automatically when you upgrade the components in the basic Meridium APM system
architecture. No additional steps are required.

from V3.5.0 SP1 LP to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the step that is required to upgrade and configure Inspection
Management for V3.6.0.0.0. This step assumes that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
1
Define time-based inspection settings. You can accomplish Optional
None
this task using the Meridium APM Framework application.

from V3.5.0 to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the step that is required to upgrade and configure Inspection
Management for V3.6.0.0.0. This step assumes that you have completed the steps for
Step Task
1
Define time-based inspection settings. You can accomplish

Optional
this task using the Meridium APM Framework application.
None

from V3.4.5 to V3.6.0.0.0
The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure Inspection
Management for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
Step Task
1
If you have added System Codes to Optional

the MI_INSPECTION_TYPE
System Code Table, create Task
Types records representing those
task types, and set the value in the
Reference field to
Inspection_Strategy. You can do so
via the Configuration Manager
This step is necessary only if

you have added System
Codes to the
MI_INSPECTION_TYPE
System Code table.
application.
Define time-based inspection
settings. You can accomplish this
task using the Meridium APM
Optional
None
Inspection Management Security

Groups
The baseline Inspection Management module contains one Security Group, MI
Inspection. The following table lists the default privileges that members of the MI
Inspection Security Group have to the Inspection entity and relationship families.
Family
Privileges
Entity Families
Alert
View, Insert, Update, Delete
Certification
Checklist Finding
Conditional Alerts
Corrosion
Equipment
Event
Finding
Human Resource
View
Inspection Method
Inspection Profile
Inspection Team Member
Potential Degradation Mechanisms
View
View
Recommendation
Reference Document
Resource Role
SAP System
View
Security User
View
Strategy
View, Update
Task
Taxonomy References
View
Work Pack
Relationship Families
Belongs to a Unit
Checklist Has Finding
Has Certifications
Has Degradation Mechanisms
View
Has Findings
Has Inspection Method
Has Inspection Profile
Has Inspections
Has Potential Degradation Mechanisms
View
Has Recommendations
Has Reference Documents
Has Roles
Has Sub-Inspections
Has Tasks
Has Task History
Insert
Has Task Revision
View, Insert
Has Team Member
Has Taxonomy Hierarchy Element
View
Has Taxonomy Mapping
View
Has Work Pack
Is a User
View
Is Planned By
Is Executed By
Note that:
The family-level privileges granted to the following families are also spread to all
of their subfamilies:
Event
Taxonomy References
The Has Task History relationship family is inactive in the baseline Meridium
APM database.
In addition to the families listed in the preceding table, members of the MI

Inspection Security Group have View privileges to additional families to facilitate
integration with the Risk Based Inspection module. Since these families are not
used elsewhere in Inspection Management, they are not listed in this table.
Note: As part of implementing Inspection Management, you will decide whether you
want to link Inspection records to Equipment records, Functional Location records, or
both. If you want to link Inspection records to Functional Location records, you will need
to grant members of the MI Inspection Security Group at least View privileges to the
Functional Location family and the Functional Location Has Equipment relationship
family.
About Inspection Configuration Pages

This section of the documentation provides information on the following pages that are
used to perform configuration tasks for first-time deployments of the Inspection
Management module:
Inspection Administration page

Inspection Configuration page
Inspection Manage Resources page
Time-Based Inspection Settings page
Inspection Manage Profiles page
Inspection Profile page
Accessing the Inspection Administration

Page
The Inspection Administration page serves as the starting point for performing
administrative tasks. The following instructions provide details on accessing the
Inspection Administration page.
To access the Inspection Administration page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Inspection Management Start Page,

click the Inspection Administration link.
The Inspection Administration page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection

Administration Page
The Inspection Administration page serves as the starting point for performing
administrative tasks and contains the following links:
Inspection Configuration: Displays the Inspection Configuration page, where you

can manage configuration settings and provide information about your Inspection
Management data model.
Manage Inspection Resources, Roles, and Certifications: Displays the Inspection
Manage Resources page, where you can manage the personnel involved in
inspections, along with their roles and certifications.
Manage Inspection Alerts: Displays the Inspection Alerts page, where you can
manage high-priority information, such as overdue inspections. You can create
and modify alerts and generate email messages based on certain alert conditions.
Manage Strategies: Displays the Strategy List page, where you can locate and
manage strategy rules for a selected family.
Manage Time-Based Settings: Displays the Time-Based Inspection Settings page,

where you can define time-based inspection settings.
Note that some links may not appear, depending on your assigned role.
Accessing the Inspection Configuration

Page
To access the Inspection Configuration page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Inspection Administration page, click

the Inspection Configuration link.
The Inspection Configuration page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Configuration

Page
The Inspection Configuration page contains the following grids:
Application Configurations: Displays one row for each Application Configuration

setting that must be configured before beginning work in the Inspection module.
Event Configurations: Displays one row for each Inspection family for which an
Event Configuration has been defined.
The Inspection Configuration page contains the following task menus: Common Tasks,
Application Tasks, and Event Tasks.
Application Configuration Grid

The Application Configurations grid displays one row for each Application Configuration
setting that must be defined before users can being using the Inspection Management
module. Some Application Configuration settings are defined in the baseline database,
and others must be defined manually. We recommend that you accept the baseline setting
for each setting that is configured by default. The following image shows what the
Application Configurations grid looks like in the baseline database.
The following columns are displayed in the Application Configurations grid:
Name: The name of the Application Configuration setting. Throughout the

documentation, each setting is referred to using the value that is displayed in this
column. For example, the Asset Query Path setting corresponds with the row
containing the value Asset Query Path in the Name column.
Value: The value or selection defined for the setting.
The following table lists the Application Configuration settings that are displayed in the
grid, a description of each setting, and whether or not the setting is defined in the baseline
database.
Application
Configuration Description
Setting
Defined
in the
baseline Notes
database?
(Yes/No)
Asset Query Specifies the

No
Path
query that is used
to identify records
that store
information about
pieces of
equipment for
which you
The documentation assumes that you will set

the Asset Query Path setting to the baseline
Asset Query.
perform
inspections.
Published
Query Path
Specifies the
query that is used
to display results
Yes
on the Published
Inspection
Documents page.
Summary
Query Path
Specifies the
query that is used
to load all
Inspection records
that are linked to a Yes
specific
Equipment or
Functional
Location record.
Specifies the
query that is used
Alerts Query to populate the
Yes
Path
results displayed
on the Inspection
Alerts page.
Specifies the
relationship that
Associated
you use to relate
Relationship Functional
No
Family
Location records
to Equipment
records.
Asset Is
Successor
Specifies whether Yes

the Equipment
family is the
predecessor or the
successor in the
relationship that
you defined in the
In the baseline database, the Published

Documents query in the following Catalog
location is specified for this setting:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config
Queries.
In the baseline database, the Inspection

History Summary query in the following
Catalog location is specified for this setting:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Config Queries.
In the baseline database, the All Inspection

Alerts query in the following Catalog location
is specified for this setting:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Conditional Alert
Queries
The documentation assumes that you will set

the Associated Relationship Family setting to
Functional Location Has Equipment.
In the baseline database, this setting is set to

True, meaning that the Equipment family is
the successor in the Functional Location Has
Equipment relationship.
Associated
Relationship
Family setting.
Determines the:
Profile
Configuration
Value that
is used to
populate
the Item
Category
field in
Inspection
Profile
records
that are
created
automatica
lly.
Yes
List of
values
available
in the Item
Category
field in
Inspection
Profile
records
that are
created
manually.
In the baseline database, the

MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY
System Code Table is specified for this setting.
Determines which
of the following
items will be used
to populate the
Item Category
field in Inspection
Profile records
that are created
automatically (for
Equipment
records that are
not already linked
to Inspection
Profile records):
Method
Configuration
System
Codes in a
System
Code Table
Results
Yes
from a
query
Field
values in
the
Equipment
record to
which the
Inspection
Profile
records
will be
linked.

MI_INSPECTION_METHOD_CATEGORY
System Code Table is specified for this setting.
Determines the
strategy rule that
will be executed
Strategy Rule when you select
Yes
Configuration the Inspection
Task Complete
check box in an
Inspection record.

MI_InspectionTasksUpdate strategy rule is
specified for this setting.
The strategy rule MI_InspectionTasksUpdate
updates the values in the Last Date and Next
Date fields in all Inspection Task records that
are linked to Inspection records that have a
value in the Completion Date field.
About Event Configurations

The Event Configurations grid displays one row for each Inspection family for which an
Event Configuration has been defined.
In the baseline database, an Event Configuration is defined for each baseline Inspection
family. As a result, one row is displayed in the grid for each baseline Inspection family.
The following columns are displayed in the Event Configurations grid:
Family: Displays the family caption.

Auto Generate: Displays one of the following values:
Auto generate findings: Indicates that General Finding records will be

created automatically when you create an Inspection record in this family.
Auto generate observations: Indicates that Observations records will be

created automatically when you create an Inspection record in this family.
None: Indicates that neither General Finding nor Observation records will
be created automatically when you create an Inspection record in this
family.
Reviewer's Datasheet: Displays the datasheet caption that was specified when the
Event Configuration was defined for the family, (i.e., the datasheet that was
selected in the Reviewer's Datasheet list on the Select Reviewer's Datasheet
screen in the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard).
Explorer Path: Displays the Catalog location of the configured explorer that
was created when the Event Configuration was defined for the family, (i.e.,
the value that was specified in the Customized Explorer text box on the
Configure Explorer screen in the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard).
This Catalog location will be used to display records in the Inspection family.
You can select rows in this grid to modify or delete an existing Event Configuration.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Configuration page contains the following
link:
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Configuration
page.
Application Tasks
The Application Tasks menu on the Inspection Configuration page contains the following
link:
Edit Selected: Opens a dialog box specific to your selection in the Application
Configurations grid. You can use the dialog box to specify the following
settings:
Asset Query Path
Summary Query Path
Alerts Query Path
Associated Relationship Family
Asset Is Successor
Profile Configuration
Method Configuration
Event Tasks
The Event Tasks menu on the Inspection Configuration page contains the following links:
Add New: Displays the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard, which you can
use to create a new Event Configuration for an Inspection family.
Edit Selected: Displays the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard, which you
can use to edit the Event Configuration that has been created for the Inspection
family that is selected in the Event Configurations grid.
Delete Selected: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the Event
Configuration for the specified family and then lets you choose whether or not to
delete the configured explorer for the specified family.
Accessing the Inspection Manage

Resources Page
You can use the Inspection Manage Resources page to view the following types of
records in your database:
All Human Resource records.

All Human Resource records that are linked to a Personnel Certification record.
All Human Resource records that have been assigned a role.
To access the Inspection Manage Resources page:

the Manage Inspection Resources, Roles, and Certifications link.
The Inspection Manage Resources page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Manage

Resources Page
The Inspection Manage Resources page contains a grid that displays rows that
correspond with the queries that are stored in the Catalog location
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Resource Queries. You can access the results of
these queries via the Inspection Manage Resources page in order to assign a new role to a
user or modify a user's existing role.
The grid on the Inspection Manage Resources page contains the following columns:
Caption: Displays the hyperlinked captions of the following queries:
All Human Resources: Displays the Saved Search: All Human Resources
page, which displays a list of all Human Resource records.
Human Resources with certification: Displays the Saved Search: Human

Resources with certification page, which displays a list of all Human
Resource records that are linked to a Personnel Certification record.
Human resources with roles: Displays the Saved Search: Human

Resources with roles page, which displays a list of all Human
Resource records that have been assigned a role.
Note: In the Meridium APM baseline database, each page described in the preceding list
displays in the page title the catalog item caption for the query with which it is
associated. This documentation assumes that you have not modified these query captions.
Description: Displays the description of each Catalog item.
The Inspection Manage Resources page contains one task menu, Common Tasks.
Common Tasks Menu

The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Manage Resources page contains the
following links:
Print: This link is always disabled.

Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Manage
Resources page.
Accessing the Time-Based Inspection

Settings Page
You can use the Time-Based Inspection Settings page to define time-based inspection
settings.
To access the Time-Based Inspection Settings page:

the Manage Time-Based Settings link.
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page appears.
Aspects of the Time-Based Inspection

Settings Page
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page is used to define time-based inspection settings.
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page contains the Manage Time-Based Inspection
Settings workspace. This workspace contains the following items:
The Unit/Component Family Settings tab: Contains a grid that displays one row
for each Functional Location record and/or Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family for which time-based inspection settings have been defined.
The grid contains the following columns:
o Unit: Displays the Record ID of the Functional Location record associated
with the time-based inspection setting.
Component Family: Displays the family caption of the Criticality

Calculator RBI Components family associated with the time-based
inspection setting.
The Equipment Settings tab: Contains a grid that displays one row for each
Equipment record for which time-based inspection settings have been defined.
o
Unit: Displays the Record ID of the Functional Location record

representing a Unit that is linked to the Equipment record associated with
the time-based inspection setting.
Equipment ID: Displays the Record ID of the Equipment record associated

with the time-based inspection setting.
The Task Types for <number> Selected Settings pane: Contains a grid that
displays one row for each Task Types record in the database whose Reference
field contains one of the following values, where <number> is the number of
rows selected in the grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings or Equipment
tab:
o
INSPECTION_STRATEGY (Inspection Strategy), if the following

conditions are met:
The Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license is active.
-and
The Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager setting is

enabled on the Administrative Tasks page in RBI.
-or
o
The RBI license is not active.
INSPECTION (Inspection), if the following conditions are met:
The RBI license is active.
-but
The Generate Recommendations using Policy Manager setting on

the Administrative Tasks page in RBI is disabled.
Throughout this documentation, the Task Types for <number> Selected Settings pane is
referred to simply as the Task Types pane. The grid in this pane contains the following
columns:
Task Type: Displays the value stored in the Task Type Description field in
the Task Types record.
Interval (Months): Displays the user-specific inspection interval. The
value that you type in this cell is stored in the Interval field in the
associated Time Based Inspection Interval record.
o
o
Description: Displays the user-specific description for the inspection

interval. The value that you type in this cell is stored in the Description
field in the associated Time Based Inspection Interval record. The cells in
this column contain the

button, which displays the Description dialog
box that can be used to specify the description.
The legend: Displays the icons listed in the following table. One icon is displayed
for each row in the grids on the Unit/Component Family Settings and Equipment
Settings tabs and indicates whether or not the associated time-based inspection
setting is valid:
Icon Description
Indicates that at least one valid inspection interval has been defined for the record or
family. You can save time-based inspection settings only when at least one valid
inspection interval is defined.
Indicates one of the following, depending upon the tab that is selected in the Manage
Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace. When the:
Unit/Component Family Settings tab is selected, indicates that one of the

following has not been defined:
A Unit or Criticality Calculator RBI Components family.
At least one inspection interval.
Equipment Settings tab is selected, indicates that at least one inspection

interval has not been defined.
Indicates that one or more invalid inspection intervals (e.g., a text value) are defined
for the record or family.
Indicates that time-based inspection settings for the record or family already exist.
The legend is hidden by default. To show the legend, click the Show Legend link on
the Setting Tasks menu.
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page contains the following task menus: Setting
Tasks and Common Tasks.
Setting Tasks
The Setting Tasks menu on the Time-Based Inspection Settings page contains the
following links:
Add Setting: Results in the following behavior, depending upon which tab is
selected in the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace. When the:
Unit/Component Family Settings tab is selected, a new row is added to the

grid on the tab that you can use to define new time-based inspection
settings for a Functional Location record or a Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family.
Equipment Settings tab is selected, the Find Items window is displayed,
where you can perform a search for the Equipment record for which you
want to define new time-based inspection settings.
Revert Changes: After displaying a confirmation message, reverses any

modifications that you have made on the page since you last saved your changes.
Save: Saves the time-based inspection settings that you have defined.
Delete Setting: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the time-based

inspection settings associated with the record or family that is selected on the
Unit/Component Family Settings or Equipment Settings tab.
Show Legend: Displays the legend at the bottom of the Manage Time-Based
Inspection Settings workspace. When you click the Show Legend link, the label of
this link changes to Hide Legend. When you click the Hide Legend link, the
legend will be hidden.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Time-Based Inspection Settings page contains the
following links:
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the current page.
Accessing the Inspection Manage

Profiles Page
You can use the Inspection Manage Profiles page to access the Inspection Profile page
for an Equipment record.
To access the Inspection Manage Profiles page:
On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Equipment

Inspection Profiles link.
The Inspection Manage Profiles page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Manage

Profiles Page
The Inspection Manage Profiles page contains a grid with one row.
Caption: Displays the hyperlinked text All Equipment that can have an Inspection
Profiles, which displays the results of the All Equipment that can have an
Inspection Profiles query on the Saved Search: All Equipment that can have an
Inspection Profiles page. On this page, you can select the Equipment record to
which you want to link an Inspection Profile record.
Note: In the Meridium APM baseline database, the page described here displays in the
page title the catalog item caption for the query with which it is associated. This
documentation assumes that you have not modified this query caption.
Description: Displays the Catalog description of the All Equipment that can have
Inspection Profiles query.
The Inspection Manage Profiles page contains the following task menu: Common Tasks.
Common Tasks Menu

The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Manage Profiles page contains the following
links:
Print: This link is always disabled.

Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Manager
Profiles page.
Accessing the Inspection Profile Page

You can use the Inspection Profile page to create or modify the Inspection Profile for a
piece of equipment that you will inspect.
To access the Inspection Profile page:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Inspection Management Start Page,
click the Manage Equipment Inspection Profiles link.
The Inspection Manage Profiles page appears, displaying a list the queries that are stored
the Profile Queries folder in the Catalog. The following image shows an example of what
this page looks like by default.
2. In the grid, click the All Equipment that can have an Inspection Profiles link.
The Saved Search: All Equipment that can have an Inspection Profiles page appears,
displaying a list of all Equipment records that can be linked to an Inspection Profile
record.
3. In the row containing the Equipment record whose Inspection Profile you want to
view on the Inspection Profile page, click the Manage Profiles link.
If the Equipment record for which you are accessing the Inspection Profile is:
Already linked to at least one Inspection Profile record, the Inspection

Profile page appears
Not linked to any Inspection Profile records, the Confirm Generation
dialog box appears.
If you click the:
Yes button, the Inspection Profile page appears, and Inspection

Profile records will be created automatically for the Equipment
record, according to your profile configuration setting.
No button, the Inspection Profile page appears, and Inspection
Profile records will not be created automatically for the Equipment
record, according to your profile configuration setting.
Aspects of the Inspection Profile Page

The Inspection Profile - <Equipment Record ID> page, where <Equipment Record ID>
is the Record ID of the Equipment record that is linked to the Inspection Profile record
displays details for a specific Inspection Profile record and any associated Inspection
Method records. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the Inspection Profile <Equipment Record ID> page simply as the Inspection Profile page.
The Inspection Profile page contains the following items:
Inspection Profile tab: Displays a grid containing the Inspection Profile records
that are linked to the Equipment record.
Inspection Method tab: Displays a grid containing the Inspection Method records
that are linked to the Inspection Profile record that is selected in the Inspection
Profile section.
Task menus: Menus that provide specific functionality. The following menus are
available: Common Tasks and Associated Pages.
Inspection Profile Tab

The Inspection Profile tab on the Inspection Profile page contains a grid that contains a
row for each Inspection Profile record that is linked to the Equipment record identified by
the Record ID that appears below the Site Map.
The following columns of information are displayed on the Inspection Profile tab:
Item Category
Item ID
Item Description
Sequence
RBI Component
Note: The cells in the RBI Component column are enabled only if the Risk Based
Inspection (RBI) module is active.
RBI Component Family
Above the grid, the following items are displayed:
Reference Documents link: Displays the Reference Documents dialog box, where
you can manage the Reference Document records that are linked to the Equipment
record.
button: Saves any changes that you have made on the Inspection Profiles tab.
button: After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected Inspection Profile
record and any Inspection Method records to which it is linked.
button: Displays the Reference Documents dialog box, when you can manage
the Reference Document records that are linked to the Equipment record.
Below the grid, buttons are displayed that you can use to navigate between the rows in
the grid.
Inspection Method Tab

The Inspection Method tab on the Inspection Profile page contains a grid that contains a
row for each Inspection Method record that is linked to the Inspection Profile record that
is selected on the Inspection Profile tab.
The following columns are displayed on the Inspection Method tab:
Category
ID
Description
RBI Degradation Mechanism
Note: The cells in the RBI Degradation Mechanism column are enabled only if the Risk
Based Inspection (RBI) module is active.
Above the grid, the following buttons are displayed.
Button Function
Saves any changes that you have made on the Inspection Method tab.
After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected Inspection Method record.
Displays the Reference Documents dialog box, where you can manage the
Reference Document records that are linked to the selected Inspection Method
record.
Below the grid, buttons are displayed that you can use to navigate between the rows in
the grid.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Profile page contains the following links:
Add Existing Item: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for an
Equipment record whose Inspection Profile you want to use to create new
Inspection Profile and Inspection Method records that are linked to the current
Equipment record.
Manage Inspection Scope: Displays the Task Builder, where you can choose to
define a new Inspection Scope or view an existing Inspection Scope for the
current equipment.
Sequence Profile: Displays the Sequencing page, where you can apply a sequence
value to the Inspection Profile records that are displayed on the Inspection Profile
page.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made in either the Inspection Profile
section or the Inspection Method section.
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows you a preview of the
Inspection Profile page as it will appear on the printed page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Profile page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Inspection Profile page displays Associated Pages
that have been configured for the family of the record that is linked to the Inspection
Profile records that are displayed on the page.
About Required Tasks

This section of the documentation provides details on the following tasks that must be
completed prior to beginning work in Inspection Management in order to take advantage
of Inspection Management functionality:
Defining the Asset Query Path setting

Defining the Associated Relationship Family setting
Assigning roles to users who should be able to complete tasks in Inspection
Defining Inspection Profiles
Defining the Asset Query Path Setting

The Asset Query Path Setting defines the query that identifies the record in which you
store information for pieces of equipment for which you perform inspections.
To define the Asset Query Path setting:
1. in the Meridium APM Framework, access the Inspection Configuration page.
2. In the Application Configurations grid, select the row containing the value Asset
Query Path in the Name column, as shown in the following image.
3. On the Application Tasks menu, click the Edit Selected link.

The Save As window appears.
4. Navigate to the following Catalog location and select the Asset Query:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config Queries.
5. Click the Open button.
The Save As window closes, and the Catalog location is populated in the Value column in
the Application Configurations grid.
Defining the Associated Relationship

Family Setting
The Associated Relationship Family setting specifies the relationship that relates
Functional Location records to Equipment records. When you create Inspection records
using the Event Builder, certain fields in the Inspection record will be populated with
values from both the Equipment and Functional Location record based upon this setting.
IMPORTANT: The following instructions assume that you are conducting a baseline
deployment of the Inspection module. (i.e., Equipment records will be linked to
Functional Location records through the Functional Location Has Equipment relationship
family). If you are conducting a custom deployment of the Inspection module, this setting
should specify the relationship family that is used to link the records in which you store
equipment data to the records in which you store location data).
To define the Associated Relationship Family setting:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Inspection Configuration page.
2. In the Application Configurations grid, select the row containing the value
Associated Relationship Family in the Name column, as shown in the following
image.
The Meridium Inspection dialog box appears.
4. In the Associated Relationship Family list, select Functional Location Has

Equipment, and click OK.
The Meridium Inspection dialog box closes, and the Value column in the grid is populated
with the relationship family that you specified.
Assigning a Role
To assign a role to a Security User, you will need to link a Resource Role record to the
Human Resource record for that Security User. The Resource Role record contains the
Role field, which should contain a value that indicates the role assigned to that user. For
example, if John Smith is responsible for reviewing Inspection records, you would create
a Human Resource record for John Smith and link it to a Resource Role record. That
Resource Role record would contain the value Inspection Supervisor in the Role field.
To assign a role to an Inspection Management user:
1. On the Inspection Administration page, click the Manage Inspection Resources,
Roles, and Certifications link.
The Inspection Manage Resources page appears, displaying a list of all queries and
searches in the Resource Queries folder in the Catalog.
2. Click the All Human Resources link.
The Saved Search: All Human Resources page appears, displaying a list of all Human
Resource records that exist in the database.
3. In the row containing the user to whom you want to assign a role, click the
Manage Resource Roles link.
The Record Manager appears, displaying the Human Resource record in the master/detail
datasheet.
4. In the Resource Role section:

a. In the Category list, select Inspection.
b. In the Role list, select the role you want to assign the Security User.
Note: If you assign a user the Inspector role, that user's name will appear in the
Inspection Report Owner field when you create an Inspection record. If you assign a user
the Inspection Supervisor role, that user's name will appear in the Reviewers Name field
when you create an Inspection record.
5. If desired, assign a second role to the user by selecting on a new row the
Inspection category and a different value in the Role field.
The Human Resource record and the linked Resource Role record(s) are saved.
Modifying a User's Role

To modify a user's role:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Inspection Administration page.
2. Click the Manage Inspection Resources, Roles, and Certifications link.
searches in the Resource Queries folder in the Catalog.
3. Click the Human Resources with roles link.
The Saved Search: Human Resources with Roles page appears, displaying a list of all
users that have been assigned a role.
4. In the row containing the user whose role you want to modify, click the hyperlink
in the Last Name column.
datasheet.
5. In the detail grid, modify the roles as desired.
6. Save the record.
Creating an Inspection Profile Record

To create an Inspection Profile record:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Inspection Profile page.
The Inspection Profile page appears, displaying on the Inspection Profile tab the
Inspection Profile records that are that is linked to the Equipment record identified by the
Record ID that appears below the Site Map. A red outline has been added to the following
image to highlight the Inspection Profile tab.
2. On the Inspection Profile tab, in the first blank row at the bottom of the grid, in
the Item Category list, click inside the cell and then click the
button, and
select the subcomponent that needs to be inspected. The list of values is generated
based on the Profile Configuration setting on the Inspection Configuration page.
The Item ID cell is populated automatically with the value that you selected in the
Category cell. You can modify the ID if desired.
3. In the Item Description cell, type a description for the subcomponent.
4. In the Sequence cell, type a number indicating the order in which the
subcomponent should be inspected, relative to the other subcomponents in the
grid.
5. In the RBI Component list, select the subcomponent type. The list contains the
Record ID of all Criticality Calculator RBI Components records that are linked to
the Equipment record.
6. In the RBI Component Family list, select the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family associated with the Inspection Profile record.
Note: This step is required only if you define time-based inspection settings at the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components level and perform inspections by defining
Inspection Scope.

The Inspection Profile record is saved and linked to the Equipment record.
Copying an Inspection Profile from One

Piece of Equipment to Another Piece of
Equipment
If you define an Inspection Profile for a piece of equipment and another similar piece of
equipment already has an Inspection Profile, you can create all or part of the Inspection
Profile for the current piece of equipment using the Inspection Profile that is already
defined for the similar piece of equipment. When you do so, Meridium APM will use the
Inspection Profile records that are already linked to the similar piece of Equipment as the
basis for creating new Inspection Profile records that will be linked to the Equipment
record that you are working with. In addition, any Inspection Method records in the
source Inspection Profile will be used to create new Inspection Method records in the
new Inspection Profile.
In other words, when you are finished with the process, the two Equipment records will
be linked to different Inspection Profile records that have the same values in the Category,
ID, and Description fields. The Inspection Method records from the source Inspection
Profile will also be different records from the Inspection Method records in the new
Inspection Profile.
To copy an Inspection Profile from one piece of equipment to another piece of
equipment:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Inspection Profile for the
Equipment record to which you want to copy an existing Inspection Profile.
2. On the Inspection Profile page, on the Common Tasks menu, click the Add
Existing Item link.
The Find Items window appears, displaying the Simple Search workspace. The Search In
list is populated automatically with the Equipment family.
3. In the Linked To list, select Inspection Profile.
4. If desired, add additional search criteria. You can do so using the Look For text
box on the Simple Search workspace or the additional advanced search options on
the Advanced Search workspace, which you can access by clicking the Advanced
Search link on the Search Type menu.
The search results appear, displaying all Equipment records that are linked to an existing
Inspection Profile record and meet the additional search criteria that you defined.
6. In the search results, select the row containing the Equipment record that is linked
to the Inspection Profile records that you want to use to create new Inspection
Profile records that will be linked to the Equipment record that you are working
with on the Inspection Profile page, and click the Select button.
New Inspection Profile records appear in the grid in the Inspection Profile section, where
the Category, ID, and Description values are the same as the values in the Inspection
Profile records that are linked to the similar Equipment record. If any of the source
Inspection Profile records are linked to Inspection Method records, new Inspection
Method records also appear in the grid in the Inspection Method section.
Creating an Inspection Method Record

To identify the ways in which you could inspect equipment subcomponents, you will
need to create Inspection Method records and link them to the Inspection Profile records
that represent those subcomponents.
To create an Inspection Method record and link it to an Inspection Profile record:
The Inspection Profile page appears, displaying on the Inspection Method tab each
Inspection Method record that is linked to the Inspection Profile record that is selected on
the Inspection Profile tab. A red outline has been added to the following image to
highlight the Inspection Method tab.
2. On the Inspection Profile tab, select the row containing the Inspection Profile
record that you want to link to a new Inspection Method record.
3. On the Inspection Method tab, in the first blank row at the bottom of the grid, in
the Category list, click the
button, and select the method that should be used
to inspect the subcomponent. The list of values is generated based on the Profile
Configuration setting on the Inspection Configuration page.
The ID cell is populated automatically with the value that you selected in the Category
cell. You can modify the ID if desired.
4. In the Description cell, type a description of the inspection method.
5. In the RBI Degradation Mechanism list, select the RBI degradation mechanism
with which the inspection method is associated. The list is filtered automatically
to display only the Potential Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked to
the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that appears in the RBI
Component cell for the currently selected Inspection Profile record.
The Inspection Method record is saved and linked to the Inspection Profile record.
Applying a Sequence Value to Inspection

Profile Records
To apply a sequence value to Inspection Profile records:
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Sequence Profile link.
The Sequencing page appears, displaying the Inspection Profile records that were
displayed on the Inspection Profile page.
3. Use the Sequencing page to apply a sequence value to the Inspection Profile
records.
About Optional Tasks

This section of the documentation provides details on optional configuration tasks that
you may complete when deploying the Inspection Management module.
Modify the baseline Asset Query

Modify Query Path settings
Modify the Profile Configuration setting
Modify the Method Configuration setting
Modify the Strategy Rule Configuration setting
Define additional Event Configurations
Modify email alerts
Create work packs
Define time-based inspection settings
Modifying the Baseline Asset Query

Meridium APM provides the Asset Query in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config Queries. This query is configured to return
Equipment records by default, and it is used to identify records that store information
about pieces of equipment for which you perform inspections.
Note that the Asset Query searches the Equipment family and returns the result of a
single Count expression and prompt for the Equipment Entity Key.
To modify the baseline Asset Query:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, navigate to the Catalog, and open the Asset
Query in the folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config Queries.
The Enter parameter values dialog box appears.
2. Click Cancel.
Blank query results appear.
3. On the Query Tasks menu, click the SQL View link.

The query SQL code appears.
4. Replace the text MI_EQUIP000 with the ID of the family whose records store
information about the pieces of equipment for which you perform inspections.
5. Save the query.
Your modification is saved.
Modifying Query Path Settings

The following instructions provide details on defining the following Application
Configuration settings:

Summary Query Path
Alerts Query Path
To modify a query path:

2. In the Application Configurations grid, select the row containing the query path
that you want to specify.

4. In the Catalog, select the query that you want to use, and click the Open button.
The Save As dialog box closes, and Value column in the grid is populated with the
Catalog location of the query that you selected.
How is the Profile Configuration Setting

Used?
The Profile Configuration setting is used to determine the:
Inspection Profile records that will be created automatically when you access the
Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record that is not linked to Inspection
Profile records. Specifically, the Profile Configuration setting determines which
value will be used to populate the Item Category field in Inspection Profile
records that are created automatically.
List of values that is available in the Item Category field in Inspection Profile
records that are created manually.
By default, the product is configured to use the

MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System Code Table to populate the Item
Category field (in records created automatically) and list (in records created manually).
You can modify this setting to specify that one of the following options be used to
populate the Item Category field and list:
IDs of active System Codes in a specific System Code Table.

Results from a query.
Field values in the Equipment record to which the Inspection Profile records will
be linked.
Using a System Code Table to Populate

the Item Category Field Automatically
When Inspection Profile records are created automatically, the Item Category field in
those records can be populated automatically with the Description and ID of active
System Codes in a specific System Code table. Consider the following example.
Suppose that when you access the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record, you
want the Meridium APM system to create two Inspection Profile records with the
following values in the Item Category field:
Baffles (BAFFLES)
Bearings (BEARINGS)
In this case, an administrative user could define the references outlined in red in the
following MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System Code Table (via the
Configuration Manager).
Notice how the referenced System Codes use the ID MI_EQUIP000, which is the family
ID of the Equipment family.
Based on these System Codes, if you accepted this default profile configuration setting:
...when you accessed the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record, the following
Inspection Profile records would be created automatically.
Using a System Code Table to Populate

the Item Category List Manually
When you create an Inspection Profile record manually, the Item Category field contains
a list of available values. If you configure the profile configuration setting accordingly,
this list can contain the IDs of active System Codes in a specific System Code Table.
Consider the following example.
Suppose that for Inspection Profile records that are linked to Equipment records, you
want the list in the Item Category field to contain the following values:
BAFFLES
BEARINGS
In this case, an administrative user could define the references outlined in red in the
following MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System Code Table (via the
Configuration Manager).
Notice how the referenced System Codes use the ID MI_EQUIP000, which is the family
ID of the Equipment family.
Based on these System Codes, if you accepted this default profile configuration setting:
...when you accessed the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record, the Item
Category list in any Inspection Profile records that you created manually would contain
the values BAFFLES and BEARINGS, as shown in the following image.
Using a Query to Populate the Item

Category Field/List Automatically
When Inspection Profile records are created automatically, the Item Category field in
those records can be populated with a value that is determined by the results from a
query. This option exists only to support custom solutions, which are beyond the scope of
the Meridium APM documentation.
Likewise, when Inspection Profile records are created manually, the Item Category list
can contain a list of values that is determined by the results from a query. This option
exists only to support custom solutions, which are beyond the scope of the Meridium
APM documentation.
Using Equipment Record Values to

Populate the Item Category Field
Automatically
When Inspection Profile records are created automatically, if you or someone else in your
organization has completed the steps to classify your equipment, the Item Category field
in those records can be populated with field values in the Equipment record to which the
Inspection Profile records will be linked. Consider the following example.
Suppose that when you access the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record
containing the following field values, you want the Meridium APM system to create two
Inspection Profile records, one with the Item Category value Baffles (BAFFLES) and one
with the Item Category value Bearings (BEARINGS):
Taxonomy Category: FIX

Taxonomy Class: HEA
Taxonomy Type: SHE
In this case, if you defined this configuration setting:
...when you accessed the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record whose
Taxonomy Category, Taxonomy Class, and Taxonomy Type fields contain the values
listed above, the following Inspection Profile records would be created automatically.
Using Equipment Record Values to

Populate the Item Category List
Automatically
When you configure the profile configuration setting to populate the Item Category field
in automatically created Inspection Profile records using values in the Equipment records
to which the Inspection Profile records are linked, when you create Inspection Profile
records manually, the Item Category list will contain the Description and IDs of all the
active System Codes in the MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System Code
Table.
For example, if you defined this profile configuration setting:
...when you accessed the Inspection Profile page for an Equipment record to create an
Inspection Profile record manually, the Item Category list would contain the Descriptions
and IDs of all the active System Codes in the MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY
System Code Table, as shown in the following image.
Aspects of the Meridium Inspection

Window
You can use the Meridium Inspection window to define the Profile Configuration setting,
which identifies the method that will be used to populate the:
Item Category field in Inspection Profile records that are created automatically.
List of values in the Item Category field in Inspection Profile records that are
created manually.
The Meridium Inspection window displays the Pick a source for your inspection profile
item list, which contains the following values:
System Code
Query
Taxonomy
Your selection in the list determines which additional items will be displayed on the
Meridium Inspection window. If you select:
System Code, the Pick a system code table for generating profile items list is
displayed. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight the
Pick a system code table for generating profile items list.
The Pick a system code table for generating profile items list contains the IDs of all the
System Code Tables in the baseline Meridium APM database. The value
MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY is selected by default.
Query, the following items are displayed:
Path to profile query: A text box that identifies the path to the query that
you want to use to populate the Item Category field in Inspection Profile
records that are created automatically and the list of values in the Item
Category field in Inspection Profile records that are created manually. You
cannot type a value in this text box. Instead it will be populated
automatically after you select a query using the Browse for query
hyperlink.
Browse for query: A hyperlink that displays the Open Catalog Item dialog
box, which you can use to browse for the query that you want to use.
A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight the Path to profile query
text box and Browse for query link.
Taxonomy, the following sections are displayed:
Taxonomy: Displays a grid containing the Category, Class, and Type

columns. The cells in each column contain a list of values that are stored
in Taxonomy Mapping records:
o
o
Category: A list of the unique values that are stored in the

Taxonomy Category field in all Taxonomy Mapping records.
Class: A list of the unique values that are stored in the Taxonomy
Class field in all Taxonomy Mapping records whose Taxonomy
Category field contains the value that is selected in the Category
list.
Type: A list of the unique values that are stored in the Taxonomy
Type field in all Taxonomy Mapping records whose Taxonomy
Category and Taxonomy Class fields contain the values that are
selected in the Category and Class lists, respectively.
You can populate multiple rows in the grid, where each row contains a unique set of
Equipment field values for which you will select values in the list in the Inspection
Profile section.
Inspection Profile: Displays the IDs of all the active System Codes that
are stored in the MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System
Code Table. The value that you select in this list will be used to populate
Item Category field in the Inspection Profile records that are created
automatically for Equipment records with the selected classification
values.
A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight the Taxonomy and
Inspection Profile sections.
The following buttons are displayed at the bottom of the Meridium Inspection window:
OK: Saves any selections that you have made and closes the Meridium Inspection
window.
Cancel: Closes the Meridium Inspection window and does not retain your
selections.
Modifying the Profile Configuration

Setting
The Profile Configuration setting determines how the Item Category field (in Inspection
Profile records created automatically) and list (in Inspection Profile records created
manually) is populated. By default, this setting is configured to use the
MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY System Code Table.
To modify the Profile Configuration setting:
1. On the Inspection Configuration page, in the grid in the Application
Configurations section, select the row containing Profile Configuration in the
Name column.
The Meridium Inspection window appears.
3. In the Pick a source for your Inspection Profile items list, select the desired source
for the Profile Configuration setting.
4. Depending upon your selection in the Pick a source for your Inspection Profile
items list, make selections in the additional fields that are displayed on the
Meridium Inspection window.
If you selected System Code, in the Pick a system code table for
generating profile items list, select the desired System Code Table.
If you selected Query, click the Browse for query hyperlink to browse for
and select the desired query.
If you selected Taxonomy, in the Taxonomy and Inspection Profile

sections, select the desired values.
5. Click OK.
6. The Profile Configuration setting is saved, the Meridium Inspection window
closes, and the Inspection Configuration page returns to focus.
Defining the Method Configuration

The Method Configuration setting determines the list of values that will be populated in
the Category field in Inspection Method records that you create. By default, this setting is
configured to use the MI_INSPECTION_METHOD_CATEGORY System Code Table.
To modify the Method Configuration setting:
2. In the Application Configurations list, select the Method Configuration row.
4. In the Pick a source for your inspection method items list, select the desired
source for the values in the Category field.
5. If you selected System Code in the previous list, in the Pick a system code table
for generating method items list, select the desired System Code Table.
-or-
If you selected Query in the previous list, click the Browse for query link, locate the
desired query in the Catalog, select it, and click the Open button. The name of the query
that you selected will be displayed in the text box.
6. Click OK.
Your selection is saved.
About Managing Strategy Rules

Inspection Management uses the following strategy rules, which are provided as part of
the baseline Inspection Management content:
MI_ProcessConditionalAlerts
MI_InspectionTasksUpdate
The strategy rule MI_InspectionTasksUpdate is executed automatically when you update

an Inspection record. When this strategy rule is executed, the Last Date and Next Date
fields are updated in all Inspection Task records that are linked to Inspection records that:
Have a value in the Completion Date field are updated.
Whose Inspection Task Complete field is set to True.
For example, if the Inspection record that is linked to Pump 14 is completed on May 1,
2006, and the Inspection Task record that is linked to Pump 14 has a Last Date of April 1,
2006 and a Next Date of May 1, 2006, when you execute the strategy rule, the Last Date
will be updated to May 1, 2006 (the date the inspection was completed), and the Next
Date will be updated according to the desired interval in the Inspection Task record.
The strategy rule MI_ProcessConditionalAlerts searches for all records in the Conditional
Alerts family, and when it is executed, generates an email message based on the
conditions in all Conditional Alerts records that it finds. This strategy rule must be
executed manually.
You can use Inspection Management to access the Strategy List page, where you can
select the strategy rule that you want to execute.
Modifying the Strategy Rule

Configuration Setting
In the baseline Meridium APM database, the Strategy Rule Configuration setting is set to
MI_InspectionTasksUpdate. As a result, when the MI_InspectionTasksUpdate strategy
rule is executed, the Last Date and Next Date fields are updated in all Inspection Task
records that are linked to Inspection records whose:
Completion Date field contains a value.
Inspection Task Complete field is set to True.
You can modify the Strategy Rule Configuration setting if you want.
To modify the Strategy Rule Configuration setting:
2. In the Application Configurations list, select the Strategy Rule Configuration row.
4. In the Strategy Rule list, select the desired strategy rule.

5. Click OK.
Your selection is saved.
Accessing the Strategy List Page Via

You can access the Strategy List page via the Inspection module in order to locate the
strategy rule that you want to execute.
To access the Strategy List page via the Inspection module:

the Manage Strategies link.
The Strategy List page appears.
Defining Event Configurations for

Custom Families
An Event Configuration is defined for each baseline Inspection family. If you store
information about inspections in non-baseline records, you must define Event
Configurations for these families.
To define a new Event Configuration:

2. On the Event Tasks menu, click the Add New link.
The Inspection Event Configuration Wizard appears, displaying the Select Inspection
Family screen.
3. In the Inspection Family list, select the family for which you want to define an
Event Configuration.
The Select Auto Generate Options screen appears.
If selected, the option that appears on this screen will automatically create a General
Finding or Observation record for each component of the piece of equipment that you
inspected.
If the family that you selected on the previous screen is related only to the
Observation family, the check box is labeled Auto generate observations. If it is
selected, Observation records will be created automatically when you create this
type of record.
If the family that you selected on the previous screen is related only to the
General Finding family, the check box is labeled Auto generate findings. If it is
selected, General Finding records will be created automatically when you create
this type of record.
If the family that you selected on the previous screen is related to both the
Observation and General Finding family, the check box is labeled Auto generate
observations. If it is selected, only Observation records will be created
automatically when you create this type of record.
If the family that you selected on the previous screen is not related to either the
Observation family or the General Finding family, a disabled label that reads
There are no auto generate options available is displayed. In this case, neither
Observation nor General Finding records will be created automatically when you
create this type of record.
5. If you want to generate General Finding or Observation records automatically

when you create new records in this Inspection Event family, select the check
box.
The Select Reviewer's Datasheet screen appears.
7. In the Reviewer's Datasheet list, select the datasheet that you want reviewers to
see. The reviewer is the user whose name appears in the Reviewer's Name field in
the Inspection record. Datasheets will be available in this list only if they have
been created for the family that you selected in step 3.
The Configure Explorer screen appears.
9. Click the Create a new explorer link.

The Definable Explorer Wizard appears, displaying the Welcome screen.
10. Proceed through the Definable Explorer Wizard, and click the Finish button when
you have saved the new configured explorer.
The Configure Explorer screen of the Inspection Event Configuration Wizard appears
again, displaying the Catalog path in the Customized Explorer text box.
The Event Configuration Summary screen appears.
12. Review the information, and click the Finish button to save the Event
Configuration.
The Event Configuration is saved to the database, and a new row is added to the Event
Configurations grid on the Inspection Configuration page.
Modifying an Existing Event

Configuration
To modify an existing Event Configuration:
2. In the list in the Event Configurations section, select the Event Configuration that
you want to modify.
3. On the Event Tasks menu, click the Edit Selected link.
The Inspection Event Configuration Wizard appears, displaying the Select Auto Generate
Options screen.
4. Proceed through the builder, and modify selections as desired. The builder
provides the same options that were presented when you originally created the
Event Configuration.
Deleting an Event Configuration

To delete an Event Configuration:
2. In the Event Configurations list, select the Event Configuration that you want to
delete.
3. On the Event Tasks menu, click the Delete Selected link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the
selected Event Configuration for the specified family.
4. Click the Yes button to delete the Event Configuration.
If there is a configured explorer associated with the Event Configuration, a message will
be displayed, asking if you also want to delete the configured explorer associated with the
Event Configuration. Note that the configured explorer is created during one step of the
event configuration creation process. You can delete an Event Configuration for a family
and still retain the configured explorer that was set up during the Event Configuration
process.
If you click the Yes button, the configured explorer will be deleted from the Catalog. If
you click the No button, the configured explorer will not be deleted, but the Event
Configuration will still be deleted.
Recording a User's Certification
To record a user's certification:

searches in the Profile Queries folder in the Catalog.
3. Click the All Human Resources link.
The Saved Search: All Human Resources page appears, displaying a list of all Human
Resource records in the database.
4. In the row containing the user for which you want to record certifications, click
the Manage Resource Certifications link.
The Human Resource record appears in the Record Manager in the master/detail
datasheet. The Human Resource record is the master record, and any Personnel
Certification records you create will be the detail records.
5. In the detail grid, create the desired Personnel Certification records.
The Personnel Certification records are saved and linked to the Human Resource record.
Modifying a User's Certification

To modify a user's certification:
searches in the Profile Queries folder in the Catalog.
3. Click the Human Resources with certification link.
The Saved Search: Human Resources with certification page appears, displaying a list of
all Human Resources records that are linked to a Personnel Certification record.
4. In the row containing the user whose certification that you want to modify, click
the hyperlink in the Last Name column.
datasheet.
5. In the detail grid, modify the certifications as desired.
Accessing the Inspection Alerts Page

You can use the Inspection Alerts page to view all of the Conditional Alerts records in
your database, create a new Conditional Alerts record, or modify an existing Conditional
Alerts record.
To access the Inspection Alerts page:

the Manage Inspection Alerts link.
The Inspection Alerts page appears.

The following image shows an example of the Inspection Alerts page.
Aspects of the Inspection Alerts Page

The Inspection Alerts page contains a grid that displays the results of the All Inspection
Alerts query that is stored in the following Catalog location:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Conditional Alert Queries.
One row is displayed in the grid for each Conditional Alerts record in your database. With
the exception of the Action column, which displays a hyperlink that you can use to view
the Conditional Alerts record in Record Manager, the following columns that correspond
with the following Conditional Alerts field are displayed in the grid.
Column label
Conditional Alerts
field
Alert Description Description

Last Date
Processed
Last Date
Processed
Interval
Interval
Active?
Active?
The Inspection Alerts page contains the following task menus: Common Tasks and Alert
Tasks.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Alerts page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows you a preview of the results of
the Inspection Alerts Query page as it will appear on the printed page.
Send To: This link is always disabled.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Alerts page.
Alert Tasks
The Alert Tasks menu on the Inspection Alerts page contains the following link:
New Alert: Displays the datasheet for a new Conditional Alerts record in Record
Manager.
About Email Alerts

After you create a Conditional Alerts record, you must execute the Meridium APMprovided strategy rule MI_ProcessConditionalAlerts, which will search for all records in
the Conditional Alerts family and generate an email message for each record it finds
based on the conditions specified in those records. You can create Conditional Alerts
records for any reason and at any time.
For example, suppose you configure a query that returns a list of all Inspection Task
records that contain a Next Date that falls within the next month. You might want to send
an email message to the users who are responsible for performing those inspections to
remind them that the inspections are due. To do so, you would need to:
1. Create and save the query.
2. Create a Conditional Alerts record that points to the saved query and is assigned
to the responsible users.
3. Execute the strategy rule MI_ProcessConditionalAlerts, which will find the
Conditional Alerts record and send an email message to the users that are
specified in the Conditional Alerts record.
Creating a Conditional Alerts Record
To create a new Conditional Alerts record:

2. Click the Manage Inspection Alerts link.
The Inspection Alerts page appears. If any Conditional Alerts records contain the value
Inspection in the Alert Source field, they will appear on this page. Otherwise, you will see
a message indicating that no Conditional Alerts records were found.
3. On the Alert Tasks menu, click the New Alert link.
The Record Manager appears, displaying the Conditional Alert datasheet.
4. Complete the datasheet as desired.
Note: An email message containing the results of the specified query will not be sent until
you execute the MI_ProcessConditionalAlerts strategy rule.
Modifying a Conditional Alerts Record

To modify a Conditional Alerts record:
2. Click the Manage Inspection Alerts link.
The Inspection Alerts page appears. If any Conditional Alerts records contain the value
Inspection in the Alert Source field, they will appear on this page.
3. In the row containing the Conditional Alerts record that you want to modify, click
the Open Alert Definition link.
The Conditional Alerts record appears in the Record Manager.
4. Modify the record as desired, and then on the Common Tasks menu, click Save
link to save your changes.
Accessing the Manage Work Packs Page

You can access the Manage Work Packs page to view and manage all of the Work Pack
records that exist in the database.
To access the Manage Work Packs page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Inspection Start Page, click the
Manage Work Packs link.
The Manage Work Packs page appears.
Aspects of the Manage Work Packs Page

You can use the Manage Work Packs page to view and manage all of the Work Pack
records that exist in the database.
The Manage Work Packs page contains the following items:
Manage Work Packs workspace: Contains a grid that displays all of the Work
Pack records that exist in the database.
Common Tasks menu: Contains links that let you perform actions related to Work
Pack records.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the Manage Work Packs page contains the following links:
New Work Pack: Displays the Inspection Work Pack page, where you can create a
new Work Pack record.
Open: Opens the selected Work Pack record on the Inspection Work Pack page.
Delete: After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected Work Pack record.
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows you a preview of the Manage
Work Packs page as it will appear on the printed page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Manage Work Packs page.
Creating a Work Pack Hierarchy

Depending upon the number of levels that you want to create in your Work Pack
hierarchy, you will use one of two pages:
Manage Work Packs: You can use this page to create a new Work Pack record that
will appear at the root level in your Work Pack hierarchy.
Inspection Work Pack: You can use this page to:
Create a new Work Pack record that will appear below the root level in
your Work Pack hierarchy.
Link a Work Pack record in your hierarchy to an existing Work Pack
record.
Creating a Work Pack Record Using the

Manage Work Packs Page
You can use the Manage Work Packs page to create a Work Pack record that will appear
at the root level in your Work Pack hierarchy. You must use the Inspection Work Pack
page to create a Work Pack record that will appear below the root level in your Work
Pack hierarchy.
To create a Work Pack record that will appear at the root level in your Work Pack
hierarchy:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Manage Work Packs page.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the New Work Pack link.
The Inspection Work Pack page is displayed.
A blank Work Pack datasheet is displayed in the datasheet area, and a blank Work Pack
node is displayed at the root level in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
3. On the Work Pack datasheet, specify values in the Work Pack record.
The Work Pack record is saved. You can now:
Link it to an existing Inspection Task record.
Link it to an existing Work Pack record to build a Work Pack hierarchy.
Create additional Work Pack records to build a Work Pack hierarchy.
Opening an Existing Work Pack

To open an existing Work Pack:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Manage Work Packs page.
2. In the grid in the Manage Work Packs workspace, select the row containing the
Work Pack record that you want to open.
In the following image, the row containing the Work Pack record with Work Pack ID
System A is selected is selected in the grid.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Open link.

The Inspection Work Pack page appears for the selected Work Pack record.
Accessing the Inspection Work Pack

Page
You can use the Inspection Work Pack page to view an existing Work Pack record, create
Work Pack records in your Work Pack hierarchy, and perform other tasks to manage your
Work Packs. The Work Pack record for which you access the Inspection Work Pack page
will appear at the root level in the Work Pack Explorer.
To access the Inspection Work Pack page:
On the Manage Work Packs page, in the grid in the Manage Work Packs
workspace, in the Work Pack ID column, click the hyperlink for the Work Pack
record that you want to work with on the Inspection Work Pack page.
The Inspection Work Pack page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Work Pack

Page
The Inspection Work Pack - <Work Pack ID> page, where <Work Pack ID> is the Work
Pack ID in the Work Pack record for which you accessed the page, displays the details of
the Work Pack record and its associated Inspection Task and Inspection records.
Throughout this documentation, we refer to the Inspection Work Pack - <Work Pack ID>
page as the Inspection Work Pack page.
The Inspection Work Pack page contains the following items:
Work Pack Explorer pane: Displays a hierarchy of Work Pack records and the
Inspection Task and Inspection records to which they are linked.
Datasheet Area: Displays the datasheet for the record that is selected in the Work
Pack Explorer pane.
Task menu pane: Contains menus that provide access to functions that allow you
to manage Work Packs. The following menus are available:
Work Pack Tasks
Inspection Tasks
Navigation Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Work Pack Explorer Pane

The Work Pack Explorer pane on the Inspection Work Pack page displays a hierarchical
view of Work Pack records and the Inspection Task and Inspection records to which they
are linked. When you select a node in the Work Pack Explorer pane, the datasheet for the
corresponding record is displayed in the datasheet area to the right of the Work Pack
Explorer pane. The following types of nodes are displayed in the Work Pack Explorer
pane. The names of the nodes correspond with the records that the nodes represent.
Work Pack: Displayed at the root level, and up to two levels below the root level,
in the hierarchy. Depending upon what you will inspect and the type of
inspections work that you will perform, the number of Work Pack nodes displayed
and the level in your location hierarchy that they represent will vary.
Inspection: Displayed below the lowest-level Work Pack node. Inspection Task
nodes are also displayed at this level.
Inspection Task: Displayed below the lowest-level Work Pack node. Inspection
nodes are also displayed at this level.
The following image shows an example of the Work Pack Explorer pane.
The following table lists the types of nodes displayed in the image shown above, and the
Record IDs of the records that they represent.
Node type
Corresponding Record ID
Work Pack
System A
Work Pack
Process Location 1
Work Pack
Equipment A
Work Pack
Process Location 2
Work Pack
Equipment B
Inspection Task ET-2

Inspection
INSP-15
Datasheet Area
The datasheet area on the Inspection Work Pack page displays the datasheet for the record
that is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
In the following image, the Inspection Task datasheet for the Inspection Task record
API510-E-Inspection Task is displayed in the datasheet area.
Above the datasheet, the following buttons are displayed.
Button
image
Button functionality
Saves any changes that you have made on the Inspection Work Pack page.
After asking for confirmation, deletes the currently selected record.
Displays the Select Report to Print dialog box where you can choose the report
that you want to generate.
Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage Reference
Document records for the currently selected record.
Displays the Field Change History dialog box if revision history exists for any
fields in the currently selected record.
Work Pack Tasks

The Work Pack Tasks menu on the Inspection Work Pack page contains the following
links:
Create Sub-Work Pack: Displays a blank Work Pack datasheet in a new window,
which you can use create a Work Pack record that will be displayed one level
below the Work Pack record that is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane. This
link is enabled only when the selected Work Pack record is displayed at the root
level or one level below the root level.
Link to Existing Work Pack: Displays the Link Existing Work Pack window,
which you can use to search for Work Pack records to link to the Work Pack
record that is currently selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane. This link is
enabled only when the selected Work Pack record is:
Displayed at the root level or one level below the root level.
Not already linked to a Work Pack record.
-and-
Unlink Sub-Work Pack: After displaying a confirmation message, removes the

link between the selected Work Pack record and all Work Pack records displayed
above it in the Work Pack Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when one or
more levels of Work Pack records are displayed above the Work Pack record that
is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
Inspection Tasks
The Inspection Tasks menu on the Inspection Work Pack page contains the following
links:
Link to Existing Tasks: Displays the Inspection Task Search Options dialog box,
where you can search for an existing Inspection Task record to link to the Work
Pack record. This link is enabled only when a Work Pack record is selected in the
Work Pack Explorer pane.
Unlink Task: After displaying a confirmation message, removes the link between
the selected Inspection Task record and the Work Pack record to which it is
linked. This link is enabled only when an Inspection Task record is selected in the
Work Pack Explorer pane.
Generate All Inspection Documents: After displaying a confirmation message,

creates Inspection records from all Inspection Task records that are displayed in
the Work Pack Explorer pane. This link is enabled only if a Work Pack record is
selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane, and that Work Pack record is linked to
one or more Inspection Task records.
Generate Inspection Document: After displaying a confirmation message, creates

an Inspection record from the Inspection Task record that is selected in the Work
Pack Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when an Inspection Task record is
selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
Unlink Inspection Document: After displaying a confirmation message, removes

the link between the selected Inspection record and the Work Pack record to
which it is linked. This link is enabled only when an Inspection record is selected
in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
Navigation Tasks
The Navigation Tasks menu on the Inspection Work Pack page contains the following
links:
Parent Work Pack: Displays the Inspection Work Pack page for the Work Pack
record that appears one level above the current Work Pack record in your Work
Pack hierarchy. This link is enabled only when you are viewing the Inspection
Work Pack page for a Work Pack record that exists at the second or third level in
your Work Pack hierarchy.
Inspection Explorer: Opens the selected Inspection record in the Record Manager.
This link is enabled only when an Inspection record is selected in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Note: When you view an Inspection record in Record Manager, the content of the record
hierarchy will differ from what is displayed on the Inspection Work Pack page because
the content is controlled by the configured explorer that is defined for the Inspection
family (e.g., Full Inspection).
Inspection Scope: Displays the Inspection Scope page, which displays the
Inspection Scope that includes the selected Inspection Task record. This link is
enabled only when an Inspection Task record is selected in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Work Pack page contains the following links:
New Work Pack: Displays a blank Work Pack datasheet in the datasheet area, and
a blank root level Work Pack node in the Work Pack Explorer pane on the
Inspection Work Pack page.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the Inspection Work Pack page.
Delete: After asking for confirmation, deletes the selected record.
Print: Displays the Select Report to Print dialog box, where you can choose the
report that you want to generate.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Work Pack
page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Inspection Work Pack page displays Associated Pages
that have been configured for the family of the record that is selected in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Creating a Work Pack Record Using the

Inspection Work Pack Page
A Work Pack record is one of three records used to define the inspection work that needs
to be completed for equipment and/or locations. You can use the Inspection Work Pack
page to create a Work Pack record below the root level in your Work Pack hierarchy. You
must use the Manage Work Packs page to create a root level Work Pack record in your
Work Pack hierarchy.
To create a Work Pack record below the root level in your Work Pack hierarchy:
1. On the Inspection Work Pack page, in the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the
Work Pack record for which you want to create a second or third level Work Pack
record. In the following image, the Work Pack record Process Location 1 is
selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Work Pack Tasks menu, click the Create Sub-Work Pack link.
A blank Work Pack datasheet is displayed in a new window.
3. On the Work Pack datasheet, specify values in the Work Pack record.
4. Click OK.
The window closes, and the Inspection Work Pack page returns to focus.
A new Work Pack record is created, and a new Work Pack node is displayed in the Work
Pack Explorer pane. In the preceding image, the node for the new Work Pack record
Equipment A is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane, and the details of the Work
Pack record are displayed in the datasheet area.
Linking a Work Pack Record to an

Existing Work Pack Record
You can create levels in your Work Pack hierarchy below the root level by linking a Work
Pack record in your hierarchy to an existing Work Pack record. The following
instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection Work Pack page for the Work
Pack record that you want to link to an existing Work Pack record.
To link a Work Pack record to an existing Work Pack record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Work Pack record to which you want
to link an existing Work Pack record. In the following image, the Work Pack
record Process Location 2 is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Link to Existing Work Pack link.
The Link Existing Work Pack window is displayed.
Work Pack is selected in the Search In list. You cannot modify this selection.
3. Perform a search, and in the search results, select the row containing the Work
Pack record that you want to link to the currently selected Work Pack record. In
the following image, the row containing the Work Pack record Equipment B is
selected in the search results.
4. Click the Link Selected button.

The Link Existing Work Pack window closes, and the Inspection Work Pack page returns
to focus.
A new node is displayed in the Work Pack Explorer pane for the Work Pack record that
you selected on the Link Existing Work Pack window. In the preceding image, the node
representing the Work Pack record Equipment B is selected in the Work Pack Explorer
pane, and the datasheet for the record is displayed in the datasheet area.
About Linking Inspection Task Records

to Work Pack Records
Inspection Task records store information about the work that you need to perform for
equipment and/or locations. You should link Inspection Task records directly to the Work
Pack records that represent the level in the location hierarchy at which you will perform
inspections. An Inspection Task record can be linked to only one Work Pack record at a
time. You can search for existing Inspection Task records to link to a Work Pack records
using:
A search
A query
-or-
Linking Inspection Task Records to

Work Pack Records Using a Search
You can use a search to find existing Inspection Task records that you want to link to a
Work Pack record. The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection
Work Pack page for the Work Pack record to which you want to link an Inspection Task
record.
To use a search to find an existing Inspection Task record and link it to a Work Pack
record:
to link an Inspection Task record.
In the following image, the Work Pack record Process Location 2 is selected in the Work
Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Link to Existing Tasks link.
The Inspection Task Search Options dialog box appears.
The Search option is selected by default.

3. Accept the default selection, and click OK.
The Link Existing Inspection Task window appears.
The value in the Search In list is Inspection Task. You cannot modify this selection.
4. If desired, define additional search criteria.
The search results appear.
6. In the search results, select the rows containing the Inspection Task records that
you want to link to the selected Work Pack record. In the preceding image, the
row containing the Inspection Task record with Record ID API510-E-Inspection
Task is selected in the search results.
7. Click the Link Selected button.
The Link Existing Inspection Task window closes, and the Inspection Work Pack page
returns to focus.
The Inspection Task record that you selected is linked inked to the selected Work Pack
record, and a new Inspection Task node is displayed in the Work Pack Explorer pane. In
the preceding image, the Inspection Task node for the Inspection Task record API510-EInspection Task is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
Linking Inspection Task Records to

Work Pack Records Using a Query
You can use a query to search for existing Inspection Task records that you want to link to
Work Pack record. The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection
Work Pack page for the Work Pack record to which you want to link an Inspection Task
record.
To use a query to search for an existing Inspection Task record and link it to a Work Pack
record:
to link an Inspection Task record.
In the following image, the Work Pack record Process Location 2 is selected in the Work
Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Link to Existing Tasks link.
The Inspection Task Search Options dialog box appears.
The Search option is selected by default.

3. Select the Existing Query option, and click OK.
The Select Inspection Task Using Stored Query window appears.
4. Below the Path to query text box, click the Browse for query link.
5. Navigate to the Catalog location containing the query that you want to use, select
the query, and click the Open button.
The Path to query text box is populated with the Catalog location of the query that you
selected, and the results of the query are populated in the grid. In the following image, the
Path to query text box is populated with the Catalog location
Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Task Queries\Bob's Inspection Tasks, and the
results of this query are displayed in the grid.
6. In the grid containing the query results, select the rows containing the Inspection
Task records that you want to link to the Work Pack record, and click OK.
The Select Inspection Task Using Stored Query window closes and the Inspection Work
Pack page returns to focus.
The Inspection Task record that you selected is linked inked to the selected Work Pack
record, and a new Inspection Task node is displayed in the Work Pack Explorer pane. In
the preceding image, the Inspection Task node for the Inspection Task record API510-EInspection Task is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
Removing the Link Between an

Inspection Task Record and a Work
Pack Record
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection Work Pack page
for the Work Pack record whose link to an Inspection Task record you want to remove.
To remove the link between an Inspection Task record and a Work Pack record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Inspection Task record whose link to a
Work Pack record you want to remove. In the following image, the Inspection
Task record API510-3-Inspection Task is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Unlink Task link.

A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to remove the link
between the records.

The link between the Inspection Task record and the Work Pack record is removed, and
the associated Inspection Task node is no longer displayed in the Work Pack Explorer
pane.
Generating a Report Containing

Inspection Task Details
You can generate a report that summarizes the details of all Inspection Task records that
are linked to a given Work Pack record for distribution to the appropriate resources to
estimate the cost of performing the inspection work.
The following instructions assume that:
The report Workpack Inspection Scope Summary Report has been associated with
the Work Pack family via the Configuration Manager.
You are viewing the Inspection Work Pack page for the Work Pack record for
whose associated Inspection Tasks you want to generate a report.
To generate a report containing details about the Inspection Task records that are linked to
a Work Pack record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Work Pack record for whose
associated Inspection Tasks you want to generate a report. In the following image,
the Work Pack record Process Location 2 is selected in the Work Pack Explorer
pane.
2. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Print link.

The Select Report to Print dialog box appears.
The Print a report option is selected by default.

3. In the Print a report list, select Workpack Inspection Scope Summary Report, and
click OK.
The report appears on the Report Viewer page.
You can print the report and distribute it to the appropriate resources so that they can
estimate the cost of performing the work associated with the Inspection Tasks.
About Generating Inspection Records

from Inspection Task Records
After the cost of the work associated with all Inspection Task records for a given Work
Pack record has been estimated, you can determine which inspections you will perform
and which you will not. Then, you can create Inspection records to represent the work
that you will perform.
For example, suppose a Work Pack includes tasks to inspect all pieces of equipment in a
particular system. If you receive an estimate from an inspector that exceeds your budget,
you might need to trim the inspection work and inspect only the pieces of equipment
whose previous inspections revealed defects.
On the Inspection Work Pack page, you can generate Inspection records for the from
Inspection Task records by:
Generating an Inspection record from a single Inspection Task record.

Generating Inspection records from all Inspection Task records that are linked to
the Work Pack record.
Generating an Inspection Record from a

Single Inspection Task Record
The following instructions assume that you want to generate an Inspection record from a
single Inspection Task record that is linked to a Work Pack record for which you are
viewing the Inspection Work Pack page. You can also generate Inspection records from
all the Inspection Task records that are linked to a Work Pack record.
To generate an Inspection record from a single Inspection Task record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Inspection Task record from which you
want to generate an Inspection record. In the following image, the Inspection Task
record INSPTSK-D0003-097-1 is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Work Pack Tasks menu, click the Generate Inspection Document link.
The Event Builder appears. Depending upon whether or not the selected Inspection Task
record contains a value in the Inspection Document type field, one of the following
screens is displayed:
1.
o
If the Inspection Task record contains a value in the Inspection Document

Type field, the Event Record screen is displayed. The Event Record screen
displays datasheet for the new Inspection record. The following image
shows an example of what the Event Record screen looks like. In this case,
skip to step 5 of these instructions.
1.
o
If the Inspection Task record does not contain a value in the Inspection
Document Type field, the Event Record screen is displayed. The following
image shows an example of what the Event screen looks like. In this case,
proceed with step 3 of these instructions.
3. In the Event Families list, select the family to which the new Inspection record
should belong.
The Event Record screen appears, displaying the datasheet for the new Inspection record.
5. On the datasheet, specify values in the Inspection record.
The Event Builder closes, and the Inspection Work Pack page returns to focus.
An Inspection record is created and linked to the selected Work Pack record. The link
between the Work Pack record and the Inspection Task record from which the Inspection
record was created is removed. A new Inspection node is displayed in the Work Pack
Explorer pane, and the Inspection Task node that represented the Inspection Task record
that was used to create the Inspection record is no longer displayed in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Generating Inspection Records from All

Inspection Task Records
Before you can generate Inspection records from all Inspection Task records that are
linked to a Work Pack record, those Inspection Task records must contain a value in the
Inspection Document Type field. The value in this field will be used to create the
corresponding Inspection record in the appropriate family.
The following instructions assume that you want to generate Inspection records from
ALL Inspection Task records that are linked to a Work Pack record for which you are
viewing the Inspection Work Pack page. You can also generate an Inspection record from
a single Inspection Task record that is linked to a Work Pack record.
To generate Inspection records from ALL Inspection Task records that are linked to a
Work Pack record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Work Pack record from whose
associated Inspection Task records you want to generate Inspection records. In the
following image, the Work Pack record Equipment B is selected in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Generate All Inspection Documents link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to generate the
Inspection records.
The Generate Inspection Documents window appears, displaying the status of the
process.
4. When the process is complete, click the Close button.

The Generate Inspection Documents window closes and the Inspection Work Pack Page
returns to focus.
The Inspection records are created and linked to the selected Work Pack record. The links
between the Work Pack record and the Inspection Task records from which the Inspection
records were created are removed. New Inspection nodes are displayed in the Work Pack
Explorer pane, and the Inspection Task nodes that represented the Inspection Task records
that were used to create the Inspection records are no longer displayed in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Generating a Report that Includes a List

of General Finding Records
For each Inspection record that is created from an Inspection Task record, the Meridium
APM system will also create a General Finding record based on the Inspection Profile
and Inspection Method records that are included in the Inspection Scope containing that
Inspection Task record. You can generate a report that include a list of these General
Finding records, and distribute it to the individuals responsible for performing the
inspections so they can record their findings on the printed report.
The following instructions assume that:
The report Workpack Inspection Findings Summary Report is associated with the
Work Pack family via the Configuration Manager.
You are viewing the Inspection Work Pack page for the Work Pack record for
whose associated General Findings records you want to generate a report.
To generate a report that contains a list of General Finding records:

1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Work Pack record for whose
associated General Findings records you want to generate a report.
The Select Report to Print dialog box appears.
The Print a report option is selected by default.

3. In the Print a report list, select Workpack Inspection Findings Summary Report,
and click OK.
You can print the report and distribute it to the appropriate resources to record their
findings on the printed report.
Removing the Link Between an

Inspection Record and a Work Pack
Record
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection Work Pack page
for the Work Pack record whose link to an Inspection record you want to remove.
To remove the link between an Inspection record and a Work Pack record:
1. In the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Inspection record whose link to a
Work Pack record you want to remove. In the following image, the Inspection
record INSP-17 is selected in the Work Pack Explorer pane.
2. On the Inspection Tasks menu, click the Unlink Inspection Document link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to remove the link
between the records.
The link between the Inspection record and the Work Pack record is removed, and the
node for the associated Inspection record is no longer displayed in the Work Pack
Explorer pane.
Deleting a Work Pack Record

The following instructions explain how to delete a Work Pack record from the Manage
Work Packs page or the Inspection Work Pack page.
To delete a Work Pack record:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Manage Work Packs page or the
Inspection Work Pack page.
2. On the Manage Work Packs page, in the list of Work Pack records, select the row
containing the record that you want to delete.
-orOn the Inspection Work Pack page, in the Work Pack Explorer pane, select the Work Pack
record that you want to delete.
3. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Delete link.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the Work
Pack record.
The Work Pack record is deleted.
About Time-Based Inspection Settings

Time-based inspection settings specify the intervals at which inspections should occur for
various pieces of equipment. Time-based inspection settings are used in one of the
following ways, depending upon whether or not the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license
is active in conjunction with the Inspection Management license. When the RBI license
is:
Active, the inspection intervals associated with the time-based inspection settings
will be considered by the Meridium APM System when populating the Desired
Interval field in Inspection Task records created in RBI.
Not active, the inspection intervals associated with the time-based inspection
settings will be used to determine the value that is populated in the Desired
Interval field in Inspection Task records created in Inspection.
Note: The Meridium APM Inspection Best Practice assumes that the RBI license is active
and that you will create Inspection Task records for the equipment that you analyze in
RBI and Inspection via the RBI module.
A time-based inspection setting consists of the following records:
One Time Based Inspection Setting record that identifies the family or record for
which you will define inspection intervals.
One or more Time Based Inspection Interval records that identify the various
inspection intervals that should be used when inspecting the equipment identified
by the Time Based Inspection Setting record. The number of Time Based
Inspection Interval records that are created will vary, depending on the number of
inspection intervals that you define.
You can define time-based inspection settings at the following levels:
Unit: Settings defined at this level are applied to all Equipment records that are
linked to a particular Functional Location record representing a Unit.
For example, consider Unit A, a Functional Location record that represents a Unit that is
linked to the following Equipment records:
Equipment 1
Equipment 2
The time-based inspection settings that you define for Unit A will be applied to
Equipment 1 and Equipment 2. In other words, when an Inspection Task record that is
linked to Equipment 1 or Equipment 2 has a Task Type value that corresponds with a
time-based inspection setting that you defined for Unit A, that setting will be used to
populate values in the Inspection Task record that is linked to Equipment 1 and
Equipment 2.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components family: Settings defined at this level are
applied to all Equipment records that are linked to a particular type of Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, regardless of the Unit in which they reside.
For example, suppose that you defined time-based inspection settings for the Criticality
RBI Component - Exchanger Bundle family. Now, consider that the Functional Location
and Equipment records listed in the following table are linked to the following Criticality
The Functional Location

record that represents:
...is linked to the

Equipment record:
Unit A
Equipment 1
Unit A
Equipment 2
...that is linked to these types of

records:
Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger
Bundle
Header
Bundle
Unit B
Equipment 3
The time-based inspection settings that you defined for the Criticality RBI
Component - Exchanger Bundle family will be applied to Equipment 1 and
Equipment 3. In other words, when an Inspection Task record that is linked to
Equipment 1 or Equipment 3 has a Task Type value that corresponds with a timebased inspection setting that you defined for the Criticality RBI Component Exchanger Bundle family, that setting will be used to populate values in the
Inspection Task record that is linked to Equipment 1 and Equipment 3.
Unit and Criticality Calculator RBI Components family: Settings defined at

this level are applied to all Equipment records that reside in a particular Unit
and that are linked to a particular type of Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record.
For example, using the same data shown in the preceding table, the time-based inspection
settings that you define for the Functional Location record Unit A and the Criticality RBI
Component - Piping family will be applied to Equipment 2 because Equipment 2 is linked
to both Unit A and a record in the Criticality RBI Component - Piping family. In other
words, when an Inspection Task record that is linked to Equipment 2 has a Task Type
value that corresponds with a time-based inspection setting that you defined for Unit A
and the Criticality RBI Component - Piping family, that setting will be used to populate
values in the Inspection Task record that is linked to Equipment 2.
Equipment: Settings defined at this level are applied to a single Equipment record.
For example, if you defined time-based inspection settings for Equipment 1, the settings
will be applied to that record only. In other words, when an Inspection Task record that is
linked to Equipment 1 has a Task Type value that corresponds with a time-based
inspection setting that you defined for Equipment 1, that setting will be used to populate
values in the Inspection Task record that is linked to Equipment 1.
About Inspection Intervals

An inspection interval identifies the interval of time at which inspections should occur on
equipment in your facility. Various factors will impact the inspection intervals that you
will define at various levels in your location hierarchy.
For example, jurisdictional regulations might dictate that a particular inspection must be
conducted on a particular piece of equipment every two months. Your organizational
policy, however, might dictate that this particular inspection must be conducted on a
particular piece of equipment every 30 days. In this case, you would define an inspection
interval of 30 days.
An inspection interval is stored in the Interval field in a Time Based Inspection Interval
record, and this value is considered by the Meridium APM system when populating the
value in the Desired Interval field in Inspection Task records.
Default inspection intervals are represented by the time-based inspection settings that you
define via the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
Creating Time-Based Inspection

Settings at the Unit Level
When you create time-based inspection settings at the Unit level, you are defining the
frequency at which certain inspections will be performed on a piece of equipment that
resides in a given Unit.
You can also modify existing time-based inspection settings.
To create time-based inspection settings at the Unit level:

1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Time-Based Inspection Settings
page.
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page appears. The Unit/Component Family Settings
tab is selected by default in the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace. A red
outline has been added to the following image to highlight this tab.
2. On the Setting Tasks menu, click the Add Setting link.

A new row is added to the grid that is displayed on the Unit/Component Family Settings
tab.
3. In the Unit cell, select the Unit for which you want to create time-based
inspection settings. For example, in the following image, the Unit MRD-ROAREFN-RF097-ZL0003-097 is selected in the list.
4. In the Task Types pane, in the row for each task type for which you want to
specify an inspection interval, type an inspection interval in the Interval (Months)
cell. For example, in the following image, an interval of 12 months has been
defined for the Task Type External inspection as defined in API 510 associated
with the Unit MRD-ROA-REFN-RF097-ZL0003-097.
5. In the Description cell in the row for each task type for which you have specified
an inspection interval, type a description if you want to add comments.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each Unit for which you want to define time-based
7. On the Setting Tasks menu, click the Save link.
The Saving Settings dialog box is displayed, indicating the progress of the save
operation. The dialog box closes automatically, and the following records are created and
saved to the database:
One Time Based Inspection Setting record for each Unit defined in the
grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings tab.
One Time Based Inspection Interval record for each inspection interval
defined in the grid in the Task Types pane.
Continuing with the example used in these instructions, the records in the families listed
in the following table would be created.
Family
Record ID

Setting
MRD-ROA-REFN-RF097-ZL0003-097 - <Select A Component

Family> -

Interval
External inspection as defined in API 510 - 12

Settings at the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components Family Level
When you create time-based inspection settings at the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family level, you are defining the frequency at which certain inspections
will be performed on a piece of equipment that is associated with certain RBI
Components (i.e., linked to a record in a particular Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family).
To create time-based inspection settings at the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
family level:
page.

tab.
3. In the Component Family cell, select in the list the family for which you want to
create time-based inspection settings. For example, in the following image, the
Criticality RBI Component - Piping family has been selected in the list in the
Component Family cell.
with the Criticality RBI Component - Piping family.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each Criticality Calculator RBI Components family
for which you want to define time-based inspection settings.
One Time Based Inspection Setting record for each Criticality Calculator
RBI Components family defined in the grid on the Unit/Component
Family Settings tab.
Family
Record ID
Time Based Inspection Setting <Unit Undefined> - Criticality RBI Component - Piping Time Based Inspection Interval External inspection as defined in API 510 - 12

Settings at the Unit and Criticality
Calculator RBI Components Family
Level
When you create time-based inspection settings at the Unit and Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family level, you are defining the frequency at which certain inspections
will be performed on a piece of equipment that resides in a given Unit and is associated
with certain RBI Components.
To create time-based inspection settings at the Unit and Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family level:
page.

tab.
3. In the Unit and Component Family cells, select the Unit and Criticality Calculator
RBI Components family for which you want to create time-based inspection
settings. For example, in the following image, the Unit MRD-ROA-REFN-RF097ZL0003-097 has been selected in the Unit cell, and the Criticality RBI Component
- Piping family has been selected in the Component Family cell.
with the Unit MRD-ROA-REFN-RF097-ZL0003-097 and the Criticality RBI
Component - Piping family.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each Unit and Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family for which you want to define time-based inspection settings.
One Time Based Inspection Setting record for each Unit and Criticality
Calculator RBI Components family defined in the grid on the
Unit/Component Family Settings tab.
Family
Record ID

Setting
MRD-ROA-REFN-RF097-ZL0003-097 - Criticality RBI

Component - Piping -

Interval
External inspection as defined in API 510 - 12

Settings at the Equipment Level
When you create time-based inspection settings at the equipment level, you are defining
the frequency at which certain inspection tasks will be performed on a particular piece of
equipment. You can also modify existing time-based inspection settings at the equipment
level.
To create time-based inspection settings at the equipment level:
page.
2. In the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace, select the Equipment

Settings tab. A red outline has been added to the following image to highlight this
tab.
The Find Items window appears.
Equipment is selected in the Search In list by default. You can modify this selection.
In the search results, one row is displayed in the grid for each Equipment record in your
database.
5. Select the rows containing the Equipment records for which you want to create
time-based inspection settings, and click the Select button. For example, in the
following image, the Equipment records with the Record IDs ~ PURGE GAS
EXCHANGER ~ HXST 102 and ~ PURGE GAS EXCHANGER ~ HXST 62 are
selected.
The Find Items window closes, and the Time-Based Inspection Settings page returns to
focus. One row is added to the grid displayed on the Equipment Settings tab for each
Equipment record that you selected.
6. On the Equipment Settings tab, select the row(s) in the grid associated with the
Equipment record for which you want to define settings. For example, in the
following image, the rows associated with Equipment records HSXT 102 and
HXST 62 are selected on the Equipment Settings tab.
defined for the Task Type Corrosion Under-Insulation inspection for the
Equipment records HXST 102 and HXST 62.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each Equipment record for which you want to define
time-based inspection settings.
One Time Based Inspection Setting record for each Equipment record
defined in the grid on the Equipment Settings tab.
Continuing with the example used in these instructions, the records listed in the following
table would be created.
Family
Record ID
- - HXST 102
- - HXST 62
Corrosion Under-Insulation inspection - 12
Corrosion Under-Insulation inspection - 12
About Modifying Existing Time-Based

Inspection Settings
You can modify the:
Level at which an existing time-based inspection setting is defined.
-or
Inspection interval defined for an existing time-based inspection setting.
Modifying the Level at Which Existing

Time-Based Inspection Settings are
Defined
You can modify the level at which a time-based inspection setting is defined when the
time-based inspection setting is defined at any of the following levels:
Unit
Criticality Calculator RBI Components family
Unit and Criticality Calculator RBI Components family
For example, suppose that you have defined time-based inspection settings for Unit A
and the Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Bundle family, but your facility recently
moved the equipment associated with the Criticality RBI Component - Exchanger Bundle
family to Unit B. In this case, you might want to change the level with which these timebased inspection settings are associated to account for this change in location.
To modify the level at which existing time-based inspection settings are defined:
1. Access the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
In the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace, the Unit/Component Family
Settings tab is selected by default, as shown in the following image.
2. In the grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings tab, select the row that
contains the time-based inspection setting whose level you want to modify.
For example, in the following image, the time-based inspection setting associated with
Unit MRD-ROA-REFN-RF104-E0010-104 and the Criticality RBI Component - Piping
family is selected in the grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings tab.
3. Depending upon the level you want to modify, select a value in the list in the cell
that corresponds with the level that you are modifying. The following tables lists
the levels, their corresponding cells, and the values that you can select in their
corresponding lists.
Level
Unit
Cell
Acceptable values
Unit
A different Unit or the value <Unit Undefined> if you do

not want a Unit to be associated with the time-based
inspection setting.
A different Criticality Calculator RBI Components family

Component or the value <Select A Component Family> if you do not
Family
want a Criticality Calculator RBI Components family to be
associated with the time-based inspection setting.
Criticality
Calculator RBI
Components
operation. The dialog box closes automatically, and the associated Time Based Inspection
Setting record is updated.
Modifying the Inspection Interval

Defined for Existing Time-Based
Inspection Settings
You can modify the inspection interval defined for any existing time-based inspection
setting. For example, suppose that you defined an inspection interval for a particular type
of inspection based upon an organizational policy, and that policy has changed. You could
modify the existing time-based inspection setting to reflect the interval that is now
defined by the organizational policy. The following instructions assume that you are
viewing the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
To modify inspection intervals defined for existing time-based inspection settings:
1. In the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace, select one of the
following tabs, depending upon the level at which the existing time-based
inspection setting is defined:
Unit/Component Family Settings: Select this tab if you want to modify the
inspection interval for a time-based inspection setting at the Unit and/or
Criticality Calculator RBI Components family level.
Equipment Settings: Select this tab if you want to modify the inspection
interval for a time-based inspection setting at the equipment level.
For example, in the following image, the Unit/Component Family Settings tab is selected.
2. In the grid on the selected tab, select the row for the record and/or family whose
associated inspection interval you want to modify.
For example, in the following image, the time-based inspection setting associated with
the Unit MRD-ROA-REFN-RF104-E0010-104 and the Criticality RBI Component Piping family is selected in the grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings tab.
3. In the Task Types pane, in the row for the inspection type whose inspection
interval you want to modify, type the inspection interval that you want to use in
the Interval (Months) cell.
For example, in the preceding image, the inspection interval for the task type External
inspection as defined in API 510 is 4 months. Suppose your new organizational policy
recommends that this type of inspection be completed every 2 months. In this case, you
would type the value 2 in the Interval (Months) cell. A red outline has been added to the
following image to highlight this task type and its associated inspection interval.

The Saving Settings dialog box is displayed, indicating the progress of the save operation.
The dialog box closes automatically, and the associated Time Based Inspection Interval
record is updated.
Deleting Time-Based Inspection Settings

The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Time-Based Inspection
Settings page.
To delete time-based inspection settings:
1. In the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace, select one of the
following tabs, depending upon the level at which the time-based inspection
setting you want to delete is defined:
Unit/Component Family Settings: Select this tab if you want to delete a

time-based inspection setting at the Unit and/or Criticality Calculator RBI
Components family level.
Equipment Settings: Select this tab if you want to delete a time-based
inspection setting at the equipment level.
For example, in the following image, the Unit/Component Family Settings tab is selected
in the Manage Time-Based Inspection Settings workspace.
2. In the grid on the selected tab, select the row for the record and/or family whose
time-based inspection setting you want to delete. For example, in the following
image, the time-based inspection setting associated with Unit MRD-ROA-REFNRF104-E0010-104 and the Criticality RBI Component - Piping family is selected
in the grid on the Unit/Component Family Settings tab.
3. On the Setting Tasks menu, click the Delete Setting link.

A confirmation message appears, asking if you are sure that you want to delete the
selected time-based inspection setting.
The Time-Based Inspection Settings page returns to focus. The associated row is removed
from the grid, and the associated Time Based Inspection Setting record and its associated
Time Based Inspection Interval records are deleted from the database.
Inspection Management Workflow

After various administrative tasks have been completed, you are ready to start recording
inspection data and making recommendations for future actions. The steps in the
following table suggest one possible workflow for doing so. You are not required to
follow these steps in this order, but they provide a general idea of the tasks you can
accomplish using Inspection Management.
Note: If you are performing an inspection using one of the Inspection families whose
captions contains the word Checklist, you can skip steps 2 and 3 of the following
workflow.
Step Task
Notes
Identify the equipment or location that

None
needs to be inspected, and make sure that
a record exists to identify the equipment
or location.
If you are going to inspect a piece of

equipment, make sure that an
administrative user has created an
Inspection Profile for the equipment to
determine which parts of the equipment
(i.e., subcomponents) can be inspected
and the methods that should be used to
inspect them.
If you are inspecting a piece of
equipment, define the scope of work for
the inspection. To do so, you will create
an Inspection Task record and link it to
the Inspection Profile records and
Inspection Method records that represent
the parts of the equipment that should be
inspected and how. Note that you are not
required to define an Inspection Scope if
Typically, you will want to configure

Inspection Profiles only for equipment and
not for locations.
If you do not define the Inspection Scope,

you can still create an Inspection Task
record for the equipment or location and
generate the Inspection record from the
Inspection Task record. This
documentation, however, explains how to
define the Inspection Scope each time that
you need to perform an inspection.
you want to inspect all subcomponents

using all inspection methods that are
defined by the Inspection Profile for the
equipment.
Also, if you are inspecting a location,
because you will not have created an
Inspection Profile for it, you will not be
able to define the scope of work.
4
Create an Inspection record from the Task If the Task record is linked to a Work Pack
record that belongs to the inspection
record, you can generate the Inspection
scope that you defined in step 3.
record directly from the Inspection Task
record while viewing the Work Pack
record.
Inspect the equipment or location

according to the details laid out in the
Task record from which the Inspection
record was generated.
Record your findings from the inspection.
None
To do so, you can:
Write the findings on a printed

document that was generated from
an inspection report in Meridium
APM. If you choose this option,
we recommend that you transfer
the written findings to Meridium
APM records (i.e., the Inspection
record, Checklist Finding records,
and General Finding records) so
that users can retrieve information
about completed inspections.
-or-
Record the findings in Meridium

APM records. For example, you
can record general inspection
information in the Inspection
record, such as the type of
inspection that was performed, the
inspector's name, date of
inspection, and reason for
inspection. You can also record
specific findings in General
Finding records, Observation

records, or Checklist Finding
Inspection record.
7
Assign users to the inspection team to

None
indicate the people who are involved with
the inspection.
Create Inspection Recommendation

records to capture any recommended
follow-up procedures.
None
Lock the Inspection record to prevent

other users from modifying it.
None
10
Set the Inspection record to Pending

Approval.
None
11
Review the Inspection record, any linked None

General Finding records, and any linked
Inspection Recommendation records.
12
When you are satisfied with the findings, None

set the Inspection record to Approved.
You can also change the Inspection
Recommendation records from their
current status (e.g., Created) to the
appropriate status (e.g., Reviewed).
13
Publish the Inspection record for all users None

to see.
Note that these steps could be performed by the same person or by different people,
depending on how you assign inspection roles and family-level permissions. This
documentation does not assume that you have assigned inspection roles in any specific
way. It describes only the steps that can be completed using Inspection Management.
When a task must be completed by a specific user (i.e., only the Inspection Supervisor
can set an Inspection record to Approved), we note the requirement.
Viewing Inspection Tasks

To view Inspection Task records:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Tasks link.
The Inspection Manage Tasks page appears, displaying a list of all queries and searches
in the Task Queries folder in the Catalog.
2. Click the All Equipment That Can Have Tasks link.

The Saved Search: All Equipment That Can Have Tasks page appears, displaying a list of
all records that can be linked to a Task record through the Has Tasks relationship.
Note: In the Meridium APM baseline database, this page displays in the page title the
catalog item caption for the query with which it is associated. This documentation
assumes that you have not modified this query caption.
3. In the row containing the record whose related Task records you want to view,
click the Manage Tasks link.
The Task List page appears, displaying all Task records that are linked to the record that
you selected on the Manage Tasks page.
About Creating and Modifying an

Inspection Scope
Note: You do not need to define Inspection Profiles if you plan to create records only in
You can create a new Inspection Scope or modify an existing Inspection Scope using the
Inspection Scope Builder.
When you use the Inspection Scope Builder to modify an existing Inspection Scope, after
you select the equipment and the existing Inspection Task record that belong to the
Inspection Scope that you want to modify, you will then be directed to the Inspection
Scope page for the selected equipment.
When you use the Inspection Scope Builder to create a new Inspection Scope, you will
need to:
Select the equipment for which you want to create a new Inspection Scope.
Select the subcomponents (i.e., Inspection Profile records that you want to
inspect.)
Select the inspection methods that you want to use for the selected
subcomponents.
Create a new Inspection Task record that you want to include in the new
Inspection Scope.
After you complete these steps, you will be directed to the Inspection Scope page for the
selected equipment.
When you create or modify Inspection Scope, if the value that you select in the Task Type
list on the Inspection Task datasheet corresponds with a Task Types record that is
associated with time-based inspection settings, the value in the Desired Interval field in
the Inspection Task record to which the Inspection Scope record is linked will be
populated automatically with the value in the Interval field in the associated Time Based
Inspection Interval record.
Note that in order for time-based inspection settings defined at the Criticality Calculator
RBI Components family level to be considered by the Meridium APM system when you
create or modify an Inspection Scope, the value populated in the RBI Component Family
field in the associated Inspection Profile record must match the family for which the
time-based inspection settings have been defined. You can select the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components family with which an Inspection Profile record is associated
in the RBI Component Family list in the Inspection Profile grid:
On the Select Inspection Scope screen in the Inspection Scope Builder.
On the Inspection Profile page.
-or-
If more than one inspection interval is defined for a particular task type, the Desired
Interval field will be populated with the most conservative (i.e., lowest), non-zero
inspection interval among those that have been defined. For example, suppose that you
define an Inspection Scope that includes the inspection task type CUI, which is associated
with the following Meridium APM records and families:
The Functional Location record that represents Unit A.
Criticality Calculator RBI Components families Criticality RBI

Component - Exchanger Bundle and Criticality RBI Component Exchanger Header.
The Equipment record with the Record ID HXST 55.
Now, suppose that the time-based inspection settings listed in the following table have
been created:
Time-Based
Inspection Setting
Unit Component Family
Equipment
Criticality RBI Component

N/A
- Exchanger Bundle
Task
Type
Inspection
Interval
CUI
48
N/A
Unit
N/A
A
N/A
CUI
36
Unit Criticality RBI Component

N/A
A
- Exchanger Bundle
CUI
24
Unit Criticality RBI Component

N/A
A
- Exchanger Header
CUI
10
Unit
N/A
A
HXST 55 CUI
12
In this case, the Desired Interval field in the associated Inspection Task record will be
populated automatically with the value 10 (i.e., the most conservative inspection
interval).
Note: If you do not define inspection intervals (i.e., create time-based inspection settings)
for any inspection task types that are included in an Inspection Scope, the Desired
Interval field in the associated Inspection Task record will be populated with the value
zero (0), by default.
Creating a New Inspection Scope

The following instructions assume that you want to create a new Inspection Scope from
the Inspection Management Start Page. When you do so, the Inspection Scope Builder is
displayed.
You can also create a new Inspection Scope from the Inspection Profile page. When you
do so, the Inspection Scope Builder is displayed, but the Select Equipment screen is
bypassed. The Meridium APM system assumes that you want to define the Inspection
Scope for the equipment that you are currently working with on the Inspection Profile
page. If you are initiating the process from the Inspection Profile page, you can skip steps
1 through 6, and begin with step 7.
To create a new Inspection Scope:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Inspection Scope
link.
The Inspection Scope Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.

The Select Equipment screen appears.
3. In the Search In list, select the Equipment family. You can define additional
search criteria if you want.
The search results appear, displaying all Equipment records that meet the specified search
criteria.
5. In the search results, select the row containing the Equipment record that
represents the equipment that needs to be inspected, and click the Next button.
The Select New or Existing Task screen appears.
6. Select the Create a new task option, and click the Next button.
The Select Inspection Scope screen appears, displaying the Inspection Profile and
Inspection Methods grids.
In the Inspection Profile grid, the cells in the Selected column are disabled for Inspection
Profile records that are linked to one or more Inspection Method records. In this image,
the cells in Selected column are disabled to indicate that Inspection Method records are
linked to the Inspection Profile records with the Item ID BUNDLE and COUPLINGS.
7. In the Inspection Profile grid, make the selections that you want, according to the
following guidelines:
o For Inspection Profile records that are not linked to Inspection Method
records, select the check boxes in the Selected column in the rows
containing the Inspection Profile records that you want to include in the
Inspection Scope.
o
For Inspection Profile records that are linked to at least one Inspection
Method record, select the check boxes in the Selected column in the rows
containing the Inspection Profile records that you want to include in the
Inspection Scope.
The Inspection Method records that are linked to the selected Inspection Profile records
appear in the Inspection Method section.
8. In the Inspection Method grid, select the check boxes in the Selected column in
the rows containing the Inspection Method records that you want to include in the
Inspection Scope.
9. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to select all of the Inspection Profile records and Inspection
Method records that you want to include in the Inspection Scope.
The Create a New Task screen appears, displaying the Inspection Task datasheet.
11. Complete the available fields.

Note: If you select in the Task Types list an inspection task type that is associated with a
time-based inspection setting (i.e., a Time Based Inspection Interval record exists whose
Task Type value matches the Task Type value in the Inspection Task record), values are
populated automatically in the Desired Interval and Desired Interval Basis fields in the
The Inspection Scope page appears, displaying the datasheet that was viewed when the
Inspection Task record was last accessed and the Inspection Profile and Inspection
Method records that you selected in the Inspection Scope Builder. You can modify any of
the available fields.
Modifying an Existing Inspection Scope

When you modify an existing Inspection Scope, you can change:
Which Inspection Profile records are included in the Inspection Scope.
Which Inspection Method records are included in the Inspection Scope.
You cannot, however, change which Equipment record or Task record is included in the
Inspection Scope.
If you choose to create a new Task record when defining an Inspection Scope, doing so
will create a new Inspection Scope.
The following instructions assume that you want to modify an existing Inspection Scope
from the Inspection Management Start Page. When you do so, the Inspection Scope
Builder is displayed, where you can select the existing Equipment record and Task record
that belongs to the existing Inspection Scope that you want to modify.
You can also view an existing Inspection Scope from the Inspection Profile page. When
you do so, the Inspection Scope Builder is displayed, but the Select Equipment screen is
bypassed. The Meridium APM system assumes that you want to view the Inspection
Scope for the equipment that you are currently working with on the Inspection Profile
page. If you are initiating the process from the Inspection Profile page, you can skip steps
1 through 6, and begin with step 7.
To modify an existing Inspection Scope:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Inspection Scope
link.
The Inspection Scope Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.

The Select Equipment screen appears.
3. In the Search In list, select the Equipment family.

4. If desired, define additional criteria.
The search results appear, displaying all Equipment records that meet the specified search
criteria.
6. In the search results, select the row containing the Equipment record that is part of
the Inspection Scope that you want to modify, and click the Next button.
The Select New or Existing Task screen appears.
7. Select the Select an existing task option, and select the Task record that belongs to
the Inspection Scope that you want to modify.
The Inspection Scope page appears, displaying the datasheet that was viewed when the
Task record was last accessed and the Inspection Profile and Inspection Methods grids.
You can modify the Inspection Scope by including or excluding the desired Inspection
Profile and Inspection Method records.
Aspects of the Inspection Scope Page

You can access the Inspection Scope - <Equipment Record ID> page, where <Equipment
Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment record that is linked to the Inspection
Task record that appears on the page, by creating a new Inspection Scope or viewing an
existing Inspection Scope. Throughout the Inspection Management documentation, this
page is referred to as the Inspection Scope page.
The Inspection Scope page contains the following items:
Inspection Scope for <Equipment Record ID>: A label that displays the Record
ID of the Equipment record that is linked to the Inspection Task record that
appears on the page.
Reference Documents link: A link that displays the Reference Documents dialog
box, where you can manage the Reference Document records that are linked to
Task Record ID: A label that displays the Record ID of the Task record that is
displayed on the page.
Task datasheet: The section that displays the datasheet for the Inspection Task
record that belongs to the Inspection Scope.
Inspection Profile section: The section that displays a grid containing the
Inspection Profile records that are linked to the Equipment record.
Inspection Methods section: The section that displays a grid containing the
Inspection Method records that are linked to the Inspection Profile record that is
selected in the Inspection Profile section.
Task menus: Menus that provide specific functionality. The following menus are
available: Common Tasks menu and Associated Pages menu.
Inspection Profile Section
The Inspection Profile section on the Inspection Scope page contains a grid, which
contains a row for each Inspection Profile record that is linked to the Equipment record
identified by the Inspection Scope for <Equipment Record ID> label that appears below
the Site Map.
The following columns of information are displayed in the Inspection Profile section:
Selected: Contains a check box, which you can select to indicate that the
Inspection Profile record is included in the Inspection Scope. Note, however, that
if the Inspection Profile record is linked to one or more Inspection Method
records, you can select only the Selected check box for the individual Inspection
Method records. The Selected check box for the Inspection Profile record will be
selected automatically when one or more Inspection Method records are selected.
Item Description: Displays the value in the Item Description field in the
Inspection Profile record.
Item Category: Displays the value in the Item Category field in the Inspection
Profile record.
Item ID: Displays the value in the Item ID field in the Inspection Profile record.
Sequence: Displays the value in the Sequence field in the Inspection Profile
record.
RBI Component: Displays the value in the RBI Component field in the Inspection
Profile record.
RBI Component Family: Displays the value in the RBI Component Family field in
the Inspection Profile record.
Below the grid are buttons that you can use to navigate between the rows in the grid.
Inspection Methods Section

The Inspection Methods section on the Inspection Scope page contains a grid, which
contains a row for each Inspection Method record that is linked to the Inspection Profile
record that is selected in the Inspection Profile section.
The following columns of information are displayed in the Inspection Methods section:
Selected: Contains a check box, which you can select to indicate that the
Inspection Method record is included in the Inspection Scope.
Category: Displays the value in the Category field in the Inspection Method
record.
ID: Displays the value in the ID field in the Inspection Method record.
Description: Displays the value in the Description field in the Inspection Method
record.
RBI Degradation Mechanism: Displays the value in the RBI Degradation

Mechanism field in the Inspection Method record.
Below the grid are buttons that you can use to navigate between the rows in the grid.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Scope page contains the following links:
Inspection Profile: Displays the Inspection Profile page, which displays

Inspection Profile records that are linked to the Equipment record that is displayed
on the Inspection Scope page.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made in either the Inspection Profile
section or the Inspection Methods section.
Print: Displays the Preview window, which shows you a preview of the
Inspection Scope page as it will appear on the printed page.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Scope page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Inspection Scope Page displays Associated Pages that
are configured for the family of the record that is linked to the Inspection Task record that
appears on the page.
Adding an Inspection Profile Record to

an Inspection Scope
You can add Inspection Profile records to an Inspection Scope in one of two ways:
If the Inspection Profile record is not linked to any Inspection Method records,
you can add the Inspection Profile record directly.
If the Inspection Profile record is linked to one or more Inspection Method

records, you must add the Inspection Method records, which will add the
corresponding Inspection Profile record automatically.
The following instructions explain how to add an Inspection Profile record directly.
To add an Inspection Profile record to an Inspection Scope:
1. Access the Inspection Scope page by viewing an existing Inspection Scope or by
creating a new Inspection Scope.
2. In the Inspection Profile section, in the row containing the Inspection Profile
record that you want to add to the Inspection Scope, select the Selected check box.
The Inspection Profile record is added to the Inspection Scope.
Adding an Inspection Method Record to

an Inspection Scope
The following instructions explain how to add an Inspection Method record to an
Inspection Scope. Note that if an Inspection Method record is linked to an Inspection
Profile record, adding the Inspection Method record to the Inspection Scope will add the
corresponding Inspection Profile record automatically.
To add an Inspection Method record to an inspection scope:
2. In the Inspection Methods section, in the row containing the Inspection Method
record that you want to add to the Inspection Scope, select the Selected check box.
The Inspection Method record and the Inspection Profile record to which it is linked are
added to the Inspection Scope.
Removing an Inspection Profile or

Inspection Method Record from an
Inspection Scope
To remove an Inspection Profile or Inspection Method record from an Inspection Scope:
2. If you want to remove an Inspection Profile record from the Inspection Scope, in
the Inspection Profile section, in the row containing the Inspection Profile record
that you want to remove, clear the Selected check box. Note that if the Inspection
Profile record is linked to one or more Inspection Method records, you will need
to remove all Inspection Method records to which it is linked in order to remove
the Inspection Profile record completely.
3. If you want to remove an Inspection Method record, in the Inspection Methods
section, in the row containing the Inspection Method record that you want to
remove from the Inspection Scope, clear the Selected check box.
The Inspection Profile records and Inspection Method records are removed from the
Inspection Scope.
Creating Inspection Records

To create an Inspection record:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Build an Inspection
Document link.
The Event Builder appears, displaying the Welcome screen.
The Equipment Selection screen appears.
3. In the Search In list, select the family that represents the item that you inspected
(i.e., Equipment or Functional Location), and click the Find Now button.
The results of the search are displayed.
4. Select the row containing the equipment or location that you inspected, and click
the Next button.
The Event Selection screen appears.
5. In the Event Families list, select the family representing the type of inspection that
you performed.
The Task(s) Selection screen appears.

Since the Inspection Management workflow assumes that you performed an inspection
because a Task record(s) indicated that the inspection was due, this screen will list the
Task record to which your inspection responded.
7. Select the Existing option.
Hint: If your list of existing tasks is long enough such that you cannot easily locate the
desired record, you can click the Filter Tasks link to perform an Advanced Search or open
an existing search to locate the desired task(s). In the search results, you can select the
record(s) that you want to appear in the list of existing tasks and then click the Open
button. When you do so, the existing tasks list will include only the record(s) that you
selected. If you no longer want to view the limited list of tasks, you can click the Remove
Filter link to view the complete list.
8. Select the check box next to the Task record(s) to which you responded.
The Event Datasheet screen appears, displaying the Inspection datasheet.
If you created an Inspection record in a family whose caption contains the word Checklist
(e.g., API 510 External Checklist), the Inspection record appears on the Inspection
Finding Checklist page. In addition, Checklist Finding records are created automatically
and linked to the Inspection record. Each Checklist Finding record is displayed as a
separate row in the Inspection Finding Checklist workspace.
-orIf you created an Inspection record in a family whose caption does not contain the word
Checklist (i.e., Bundle Inspection), the Inspection record appears in the Record Manager.
Also, if the Event Configuration for the current Inspection family is configured to display
General Finding or Observation records, in the tree, you will see a General Finding or
Observation record for each subcomponent of the piece of equipment that you selected.
Either way, if a configured explorer has been configured for the Inspection family, you
will see the configured explorer.
Aspects of the Inspection Finding

Checklist Page
The Inspection Finding Checklist page appears when you select in the Event Builder one
of the Inspection families whose caption contains the word Checklist (e.g., API 510
External Checklist).
The Inspection Finding Checklist page contains the following items:
Record hierarchy: Contains nodes representing the Inspection record and the
successor records to which it is linked. The record hierarchy contents are
controlled by the configured explorer that is defined for the root Inspection
family. The pane is labeled according to the configured explorer that is driving the
contents of the pane.
Note: If you select a node other than the root Inspection node, the datasheet for the
corresponding record will be displayed in place of the Inspection Finding Checklist
workspace.
Inspection Finding Checklist workspace: Contains the following items:

o A gray header area that displays fields in the Inspection record.
o
Various sections containing rows where you can record findings for
subcomponents of the piece of equipment that you inspected. Each row
represents a Checklist Finding record. Throughout this documentation,
these sections are referred to as finding sections.
Task menu pane: Contains the following task menus:

o
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Header Area
The items in the header area in the Inspection Finding Checklist workspace on the
Inspection Finding Checklist page will vary based upon the type of Inspection record for
which you access the page (i.e., the record that is represented by the root node in the
tree). Certain items will appear for every Inspection record type that you can view on the
Inspection Finding Checklist page. Additional items will be displayed for:
PRD Pop Test Checklist records.

Checklists records that do not belong to the PRD Pop Test Checklist or External
PRD Checklist subfamily.
The following items will appear for any Inspection record that you can open on the
Inspection Finding Checklist page:
Actual Work Time (Hours) text box

Asset ID text box
Completion Date text box
Degradation Mechanism list
Extent list
Inspection Report Owner list
Reviewers Name list
Save & Close Inspection/Reopen Inspection button
Tasks Addressed list
Type of Inspection list
The following additional items will appear only when you are viewing a PRD Pop Test
Checklist record on the Inspection Finding Checklist page:
As Found Pop Pressure (Pounds/Sq Inch Gage) text box

As Left Pop Pressure (Pounds/Sq Inch Gage) text box
Design Set Pressure (Pounds/Sq Inch Gage) text box
Leak Category list
Leak Test Results list
Over Pressure Test Results list
The following image shows an example of what the header area in the Inspection Finding
Checklist workspace will look like when you open a PRD Pop Test Checklist record on
the Inspection Finding Checklist page.
When you open any Inspection record except an External PRD Checklist or PRD Pop
Test Checklist record on the Inspection Finding Checklist page, the header area will
contain the Generate Represented Inspections check box in addition to the items that
appear for all Inspection records that you can open on this page. The following image
shows an example of what the header area in the Inspection Finding Checklist workspace
will look like in this case.
The items that are displayed on the Inspection Finding Checklist page are associated with
fields that are defined for the family of the Inspection record that is represented by the
root node in the tree.
The Meridium APM system is hard-coded to display only these fields in the header area.
If you add fields to the Inspection family of the root Inspection record, those fields will
not appear in the header area. In addition, the header area displays the field captions, not
the datasheet captions.
About Finding Sections

On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, the finding sections appear below the gray
header area. Each finding section contains rows representing individual Checklist Finding
records. In the following image, the General finding section is outlined in red.
In each finding section, the rows are labeled according to the subcomponents that belong
to the equipment or location that you inspected. The sections and rows that are displayed
for an Inspection record are based on System Code Tables and referenced System Codes
that are configured for each Checklists family in the Meridium APM baseline database.
This concept is best understood through an example.
To the right of each row label, you will see the following columns:
Value: Contains a list from which you can select the finding value for that
subcomponent. In the baseline database, each list contains the following values:
Yes, No, N/A. The content of the list is controlled by the System Codes that
belong to the System Code Table MI_CHECKLIST_FINDING_TYPES. In other
words, each value in the list is the description of a separate System Code
belonging to this System Code Table. The list is populated automatically with the
description of the default System Code. If no System Codes are set as the default
System Code, the list is empty by default.
Note: The label of this column (Value in the baseline database) is the field caption of the
field with the ID MI_FIND_CHECK_VALUE_C, which belongs to the Checklist Finding
family.
Finding Summary: Contains a text box where you can type additional comments
about your findings for that subcomponent. To the left of each Finding Summary
text box, you will see the
button, which you can click to create a new
Inspection Recommendation record, which will be linked to the Inspection record
automatically. Several values will be mapped automatically to the Inspection
Note: The label of this column (Finding Summary in the baseline database) is the field
caption of the field with the ID MI_FIND_001_SUMMARY_T, which belongs to the
Finding family.
How are the Sections and Rows Created

on the Inspection Checklist Page?
The sections and rows on the Inspection Finding Checklist page are built from System
Code Tables and referenced System Codes. Consider an example using an API 653
External Checklist Finding record.
The baseline Meridium APM database contains the following corresponding System
Code Table:
ID: MI_API_653_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
Description: API 653 External Checklist Finding Section
This System Code Table contains the following System Codes:
General
Connections
Supports
The following image illustrates this System Code Table and its System Codes.
Each of the System Codes that belongs to this System Code Table contains referenced
System Codes. For example, the System Code Supports contains the following referenced
System Codes:
Anchor Bolts
Dike/Retaining Wall
Foundation
Other
The following image illustrates this System Code and its referenced System Codes.
Together, the System Code Tables, System Codes, and referenced System Codes
determine which sections and rows you will see on the Inspection Finding Checklist
page. Using this example:
Each System Code belonging to the System Code Table

MI_API_653_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS becomes a
finding section on the Inspection Finding Checklist page.
In each finding section, each referenced System Code becomes a separate row
(representing a Checklist Finding record).
You can see in the image below that the System Code Supports corresponds to a section,
and the referenced System Code Anchor Bolts corresponds to a row in the Supports
section.
Note: The sequence value of the System Codes determines the order in which the
corresponding sections appear on the Inspection Checklist Finding page. In addition, only
active System Codes are displayed on the page.
About Baseline Sections and Rows

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an Inspection record whose
caption includes the word Checklist, the finding sections and rows displayed in the
Inspection Finding Checklist workspace represent subcomponents belonging to the item
that you are inspecting. Since the subcomponents that you will need to inspect will differ
based upon the type of inspection you are performing, the items that appear in the
Inspection Finding Checklist workspace will differ based upon the Inspection subfamily
to which the record you are viewing belongs. In this section of the documentation, you
will find lists of the items that appear by default for each of the following baseline

Each of these families is hard-coded to use a particular System Code Table to create the
finding sections and rows that appear on the Inspection Finding Checklist page. If you
create custom Checklists subfamilies, however, you must add the Checklist System Code
Table ID field (i.e., a field in the Checklists family) to the custom family, type in this field
the System Code Table ID for the System Code Table that stores the finding items that are
associated with the family, and modify the family rules so that the code can identify the
System Code Table that will be used to build the finding sections and rows when you
open a record belonging to the custom Checklists family.
Because this documentation assumes that you follow the Meridium APM Best Practice
(i.e., you use the entity and relationship families that are delivered to the baseline
Meridium APM database), no further details are provided for using the Checklist System
Code Table ID field or creating custom Checklists subfamilies.

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an API 510 External Checklist
record, the finding sections and rows that are displayed in the Inspection Finding
Checklist workspace look like this:
The following list provides the name of each section (e.g., Connections) and its
corresponding rows (e.g., Bolting) that appear by default when you access the Inspection
Finding Checklist page for an API 510 External Checklist record:
Connections
Bolting
Flanges
Leak Clamps
Manways
Nozzles
Other
Reinforcing Pads
Small Branches
General
Coating/Painting
Corrosion
Distortion
Electrical Groud
Exp Joint or Bellows
Gauge/Sight Glass
Guy Wires
Insulation
Ladder/Stairway
Leaks
Other
Platform
Vibration
Weld Defect
Relief Devices
Leaks
Manual Operation Lever
Other
Restricted Inlet/Outlet
Supports
Anchor Bolts
Davit
Fireproofing
Foundation
Other
Saddle/Skirt
Each section corresponds with a System Code in the System Code Table
MI_API_510_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS. Each System Code
references additional System Codes that make up the rows in each section. If you want to
display additional items in this workspace, you can add System Codes manually to the
System Code Table MI_API_510_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS.

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an API 510 Internal Checklist
The following list provides the name of each section (e.g., Head) and its corresponding
rows (e.g., Blistering) that appear by default when you access the Inspection Finding
Checklist page for an API 510 Internal Checklist record:
Head
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Internals
Attachment Welds Cracked
Baffle/Weir Corrosion
Distributor Damaged
Distributor Fouling
Impingement Plates Damaged
Impingement Plates Missing
Mixer/Agitator Components
Mixer/Agitator Distortion
Other
Thermowells Bent/Broken
Tray Corrosion
Tray Damaged Components
Tray Fouling
Linings
Cladding Bulged
Cladding Cracked
Cladding Damaged
Coating Bulged
Coating Damaged
Liner Bulged
Liner Cracked
Liner Damaged
Other
Nozzles
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Flange Face Damaged
Fouling
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Shell
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS. Each System Code
System Code Table MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS.

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an API 510 Internal Exchanger
Checklist record, the finding sections and rows that are displayed in the Inspection
Finding Checklist workspace look like this:
The following list provides the name of each section (e.g., Channel/Bundle) and its
corresponding rows (e.g., Blistering) that appear by default when you access the
Inspection Finding Checklist page for an API 510 Internal Exchanger Checklist record:
Channel/Bundle
Blistering
Channel Cover
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Tube Corrosion
Tube Cracking
Tube Distortion
Tube Erosion
Tube Fouling
Tube to Tubesheet Joint Cracked
Tubesheet Damaged
Weld Defect
Head
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Internals
Attachment Welds Cracked
Distributor Damaged
Distributor Fouling
Impingement Plates Damaged
Impingement Plates Missing
Mixer/Agitator Components
Mixer/Agitator Distortion
Other
Tray Corrosion
Tray Damaged Components
Tray Fouling
Linings
Cladding Bulged
Cladding Cracked
Cladding Damaged
Coating Bulged
Coating Damaged
Liner Bulged
Liner Cracked
Liner Damaged
Other
Nozzles
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Flange Face Damaged
Fouling
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Shell
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_EXCHANGER_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SE. Each System
Code references additional System Codes that make up the rows in each section. If you
want to display additional items in this workspace, you can add System Codes manually
to the System Code Table
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_EXCHANGER_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SE.

corresponding rows (e.g., Bolting) that appear by default when you access the Inspection
Connections
Bolting
Expansion Joints
Flanges
Leak Clamps
Other
Small Branches
Socket Welds
Threaded Connections
Valves
General
Coating/Painting
Corrosion
Leaks
Misalignment
Other
Soil-Air Interface
Vibration
Insulation
Banding
Damage
Jacket
Other
Penetrations
Seals/Joints/Caulking
Supports
General
Other
Pipe Hangers
Support Shoes

corresponding rows (e.g., Flanges) that appear by default when you access the Inspection
Connections
Flanges
Inadequate Thread Engagement
Manways/Hatches
Nozzles
Other
Pipe Manifolds
Reinforcing Pads
Small Branches
Swing Lines
General
Agitator/Mixer
Bottom
Cathodic Protection
Coating/Painting
Corrosion
Dissimilar Flange Rating
Electrical Ground
Ladder/Stairway
Leaks
Level Gauge
Other
Painted Inactive Corrosion
Platform
Roof
Secondary Containment
Shell
Supports
Anchor Bolts
Dike/Retaining Wall
Foundation
Other

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an API 653 Internal Checklist
The following list provides the name of each section (e.g., Bottom) and its corresponding
rows (e.g., Corrosion) that appear by default when you access the Inspection Finding
Checklist page for an API 653 Internal Checklist record:
Bottom
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Vacuum Box Testing
Weld Defect
Internals
Distributor Damaged
Level Gauge Operable
Other
Pontoon Corrosion
Roof Support Corrosion
Sump Corrosion
Swing Line Damage
Vacuum Breaker Operable
Linings
Cladding Bulged
Cladding Cracked
Cladding Damaged
Coating Bulged
Coating Damaged
Liner Bulged
Liner Cracked
Liner Damaged
Other
Nozzles
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Flange Face Damaged
Fouling
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Roof
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
Shell
Blistering
Corrosion
Distortion
Erosion
Other
Surface Cracking
Surface Deposits
Weld Defect
MI_API_653_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS. Each System Code
System Code Table MI_API_653_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS.

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page an External PRD Checklist
corresponding rows (e.g., Bellows Vent) that appear by default when you access the
Inspection Finding Checklist page for an External PRD Checklist record:
Connections
Bellows Vent
Bolting
Drain Open
Flanges
Gauges
Inadequate Thread Engagement
Manual Operating Lever
Other
Threaded Connections
Vent Piping
General
Block Valves Sealed Open
Corrosion
Device Leaked Through
Leaks
Misalignment
Other
Piping Obstruction
Rupture Disc Orientation Corrected
Spring Tamper Seal Intact
Supported
Vibration
MI_EXTERNAL_PRD_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS. Each System Code
System Code Table MI_EXTERNAL_PRD_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS.

When you open on the Inspection Finding Checklist page a PRD Pop Test Checklist
The following list provides the name of each section (e.g., As Found) and its
corresponding rows (e.g., Inlet Nozzle/Piping Fouled) that appear by default when you
access the Inspection Finding Checklist page for a PRD Pop Test Checklist record:
As Found
Inlet Nozzle/Piping Fouled
Other
Outlet Nozzle/Piping Fouled
Pre-Pop OK
Stem/Guide/Bellows
Corrosion
Bellows
External Surface
Flanges
Guide
Inlet Nozzle
Other
Outlet Nozzle
Seat
Spring
Stem
Valve Rework
Flange Face Damaged
Lapping
Other
Seat
Spring
MI_PRD_PT_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS. Each System Code references
additional System Codes that make up the rows in each section. If you want to display
additional items in this workspace, you can add System Codes manually to the System
Code Table MI_PRD_PT_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Finding Checklist page contains the
following links:
New: Displays the Event Builder, where you can create a new Inspection record.
Save: Saves the Inspection record and all Checklist Finding records to which it is
linked.
Save and New: After saving the Inspection record and all Checklist Finding
records to which it is linked, displays the Event Builder, where you can create a
new Inspection record.
Delete: After asking for confirmation, deletes the Inspection record.
Note: You can delete the Inspection record only if it not linked to a Recommendation
record.
Print: Displays the Select Report to Print dialog box, which you can use to
generate a Checklist Inspection report.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can view,
edit, and add reference documents for the current record.
Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Finding
Checklist page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Inspection Finding Checklist page displays links
defined by the Associated Pages that are configured for the record that is currently
selected in the record hierarchy.
Workflow for Recording Inspection

Results
After you have completed an inspection, you can use the Inspection Management module
to record your results. The workflow that you will use to record your results will be
different depending upon the type of inspection that you performed. In each workflow,
the first step is the same: create an Inspection record. The second step differs, however,
in the records you will use to record specific subcomponent findings.
The following workflow applies to the following types of inspections:
Bundle inspections
Full inspections
General inspections
Pressure test inspections
Step Task
Notes
The family in which you create the Inspection
record should correspond to the type of inspection
you performed.
The Inspection record will be linked automatically
to the Equipment or Functional Location record
representing the equipment or location that you
inspected.
Create an Inspection record to

store general information about
the inspection, such as the start You can create this type of Inspection record from
and completion date, the type of either of the following locations:
inspection, and a summary of
The Inspection Management Start Page.
your findings.
The Inspection Work Pack page. To create

an Inspection record from the Inspection
Work Pack page, you will need to generate
the Inspection record from an Inspection
Task record.
If the Event Configuration is set up correctly, when
you create an Inspection record that is linked to an
Equipment record, General Finding records will be
created automatically according to the Inspection
Scope for the equipment.
For example, if the Inspection Task record that was

used to create the Inspection record is linked to five
Inspection Profile records and each of those records
Record specific subcomponent
is linked to two Inspection Method records, ten
findings in General Finding and
General Finding records will be created
Observation records.
automatically, one per Inspection Method record
that was included in the Inspection Scope. You can
then record your findings for each subcomponent in
a separate record. This is useful if parts of the
equipment passed the inspection and other parts
failed the inspection. If you had only one record to
record your findings, you would be unable to fully
represent the inspection results.
The following workflow applies to the following types of inspections:
External and internal pressure vessel inspections (following API 510 standards)
Internal exchanger inspections (following API 510 standards)
External piping inspections (following API 570 standards)
External and internal tank inspections (following API 653 standards)
External visual and functional inspections of pressure relief device (PRDs)
Step Task
Notes
The family in which you create the Inspection
record should correspond to the type of
inspection you performed. The Inspection record
will be linked automatically to the Equipment or
Functional Location record representing the
equipment or location that you inspected.
Create an Inspection record to

You can create this type of Inspection record
store general information about
from any of the following locations:
the inspection, such as the start
and completion date, the type of
The Inspection Management Start Page.
inspection, and a summary of your
The Inspection Work Pack page. To create
findings.
an Inspection record from the Inspection
Work Pack page, you will need to
generate the Inspection record from an
Record specific subcomponent

findings in Checklist Finding
records.
The Inspection Finding Checklist page.
None
Recording Findings in General Finding

and Observation Records
In some cases, you might inspect an equipment or location as a whole. In other cases,
however, you might inspect parts of the equipment or location separately. When you
inspect parts of the equipment or location, you might have different results for different
parts of that equipment or location.
For example, if you need to inspect a tank, you might want to inspect the internal surfaces
separately from the external surfaces. On a more granular level, you might want to
inspect the top separately from the bottom. The findings of each inspection might be very
different, whereas if you inspected the automobile as a whole, you would have only one
finding.
You can record the findings for each subcomponent in a separate General Finding or
Observation record.
To record findings for subcomponents:
1. Access the Inspection record that corresponds to the inspection for which you
want to record more detailed findings about the subcomponents that you
inspected.
2. In the record hierarchy, expand the General Finding or Observation family to
view the records that were created automatically when you created the Inspection
record.
3. Select each General Finding or Observation record, and record the findings for
that subcomponent.
Note that in the Type field in a Finding record, you can choose from the following
options:
1.
o
Observation: The inspector did not notice any significant, negative

conditions.
Degradation: The inspector noticed deterioration beyond what is expected

for the subcomponent, considering normal as-designed use.
Potential Failure: The inspector noticed conditions that may lead to the
subcomponent's failure.
1.
o
Failure: The subcomponent is no longer performing its designed function.
Not Inspected: The subcomponent was not inspected.
Recording Findings in Checklist Finding

Records
The following instructions assume that you are viewing the Inspection Finding Checklist
page for the Inspection record representing the inspection for which you want to record
subcomponent findings. You can access this page by creating the Inspection record or by
opening an existing Inspection record.
To record findings in Checklist Finding records:
1. On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, in the row containing the
subcomponent for which you want to record a finding, in the Finding Value list,
select the value representing your finding.
2. In the same row, in the Comments text box, type any comments describing your
findings.
Opening Existing Inspection Documents

To open an existing Inspection Document:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Inspection
Documents link.
The Inspection Manage Documents page appears, displaying a list of all queries and
searches that are stored in the Document Queries folder in the Catalog. Each row
represents a different query or search you can run to retrieve a list of Inspection
Documents associated with the criteria in that query.
2. Click one of the following links:

o
All Equipment That Can Have <Inspection Type> Inspections: This link
will display a page showing a list of all Equipment or Functional Location
records for which you can create Inspection records represented by the
<Inspection Type> value (based upon the relationship definitions that are
configured via the Configuration Manager). For example, if you click the
All Equipment That Can Have Full Inspections link, the page that appears
will display a list of all Equipment or Functional Location records for

which you can create a Full Inspection record. You can click the Existing
Documents link in any row in the results grid on this page to display
existing Inspection records that are associated with the Equipment or
Functional Location record whose ID appears in that row.
Note: The PRD Pop Test Checklist family does not have a corresponding query that you
can use to display Equipment and Functional Location records for which you can create
an Inspection record of this type. If you want to open an existing PRD Pop Test Checklist
record, you can use the All Inspection Records or All Inspection Records for selected
equipment link.
o
All Inspection Records: This link will display a page listing all Inspection
records that exist in the database, regardless of inspection type, equipment,
or location.
All Inspection Records for selected equipment: This link will display a
page with a prompt for the equipment or location whose existing
Inspection Documents you want to view.
A new page appears, displaying results that correspond to the link that you clicked on the
previous page. If you see the Enter Parameter Values dialog box, you can specify the
equipment or location whose existing Inspection Document you want to open. In this
case:
If you want to open an Inspection Document for a location, in the first

prompt field, type the Location ID of the desired Functional Location
record.
-or4.
o
If you want to open an Inspection Document for a piece of equipment, in

the first prompt field, type the Equipment ID of the desired Equipment
record.
Note: Each Saved Search page that you can access via one of the links listed above is
configured to display in the page title the catalog item caption for the query with which
the query results are associated. This documentation assumes that you have not modified
these query captions.
3. On the page that appears, click the Load Inspection link in any row to view the
results of that Inspection Document.
Note: If you also see a New Documents or New <Inspection Type> link, you can click it
to create a new Inspection record.
Assigning a User to the Inspection Team

To assign a user to the inspection team:
1. Open the Inspection record to which you want to assign team members.
2. In the record hierarchy, right click the Inspection Team Member family, and click
Create a new Inspection Team Member to link to [root record], where [root
record] is the Inspection Event record.
The <empty> (new Inspection Team Member) window appears.
3. In the Full Name list, select the desired user. The list displays all users who have
been assigned the Inspector role.
4. Complete the remaining fields as desired.
5. Click OK.
The Inspection Team Member record is saved and linked to the Inspection record. When
you view the inspection report, information about the team member will appear in the
Inspection Team Members section.
Generating Represented Inspections

Inspection Groups that you create using the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module allow
you to group RBI Components based upon certain criteria and perform inspections for a
subset of the equipment in the group rather than for every piece of equipment in the
group. Grouping Element records that represent the RBI Components that are included in
an Inspection Group are designated as one of the following types based upon evaluation
by the Meridium APM system when Inspection Groups are generated:
Representative RBI Component: RBI Components for which you must perform an
inspection on the associated piece of equipment in order to meet the inspection
requirements that are defined by American Petroleum Institute specifications.
Grouping Element records that are classified as Representative RBI Components
meet the following criteria:
o
the value True.
o
The Grouping Element record is linked to at least one other Grouping

Element record and is the predecessor in the Represents Inspections
Represented RBI Component: RBI Components whose inspection requirements

(defined by American Petroleum Institute specifications) will be satisfied by the
inspection of the piece of equipment that is associated with a Representative RBI
Component in the Inspection Group. Grouping Element records that are classified
as Represented RBI Components meet the following criteria:
o
the value False.
The Grouping Element record is linked to one other Grouping Element

record and is the successor in the Represents Inspections relationship
definition.
The distinction between these categories is important because when you create an
Inspection Task record from an RBI Recommendation record that was generated from an
Inspection Group and then build an Inspection Document that includes that Inspection
Task record, you will have the option to generate Inspection records automatically for the
Equipment records that are associated with Represented RBI Components. Throughout
this documentation, we refer to these Inspection records as Represented Inspections.
Note the following details about Represented Inspections:
These Inspection records will always belong to the General Inspection family.
In these Inspection records, the value in the Is a Represented Inspection field is
set to True.
The Inspection Confidence value in these Inspection records will be set

automatically to the next most conservative value than the one in the Inspection
record that you created. For example, if the value in the Inspection Confidence
field is set to High in the Inspection record that you created (associated with a
Representative RBI Component), the value in this field in Represented
Inspections that are generated automatically will be set to Medium.
Additionally, when you generate Represented Inspections, the value in the Represented
Inspections Generated field in the Inspection record that you created (i.e., the one that is
associated with the Represented RBI Component) is set to True.
To generate Represented Inspections:
On the datasheet configured for the Inspection record with which you have
associated an Inspection Task record generated from an RBI Recommendation
record that was created from an Inspection Group, select the Generate
Represented Inspections check box.
-orIf the Inspection record belongs to a family that contains Checklist in its caption (e.g.,
API 510 External Checklist), on the Inspection Finding Checklist page, in the header
area, select the Generate Represented Inspections check box.
Note: You can generate Represented Inspections only while the Inspection record is new
(i.e., you have not saved the Inspection record yet).
Values Mapped to Represented

Inspections
Represented Inspections represent Inspection records that are associated with equipment
items whose inspection requirements are satisfied by the inspection of the piece of
equipment associated with a Representative RBI Component in an Inspection Group. The
following table lists the fields and values that are mapped to these Inspection records.
This
Inspection
field:
...is populated with:
...from this source:
Asset
The value in the Asset field.
The associated Grouping

Element record.
Inspection
Confidence
The Inspection Confidence value that is the

next most conservative value than the source
record Inspection Confidence value.
The Inspection record that is

associated with the piece of
equipment for which
For example, if the Inspection Confidence

value in the source record is Medium, the
Inspection Confidence value in the associated
Represented Inspection will be High.
One of the following values, depending upon
the value in the Inspection Headline field in
the source Inspection record:
inspections will occur (i.e.,

the Inspection record from
which you generated the
Represented Inspections).
Actual inspection performed on Asset

<Record ID>, where <Record ID> is
the Record ID of the Equipment record
stored in the Asset ID field in the
source Inspection record. This value is
populated in the Inspection Headline
field in the Represented Inspection
when the Inspection Headline field in
the source Inspection record does not
equipment for which
contain a value.
-orwhich you generated the
Actual inspection performed on Asset
<Inspection Headline>, where
<Inspection Headline> is the value that
is stored in the Inspection Headline
field in the source Inspection record.
This value is populated in the
Inspection Headline field in the
Represented Inspection when the
Inspection Headline field in the source
Inspection record does contain a value.
Inspection
Headline
1
Type of
Inspection
The value in the Type of Inspection field.
Degradation
Mechanism
The value in the Degradation Mechanism

field.

equipment for which
equipment for which

1. If the Represented Inspection was generated from an Inspection record whose family
caption includes the word Checklist, no Inspection Headline value will be copied from
the source Inspection record.
About Inspection Task and

Based on the results of an inspection, you might need to suggest that further action be
taken. For example, if you inspect an area of a warehouse and notice that the roof is
leaking, you may want to suggest that the ceiling tiles be replaced.
You can create a new Inspection Task record that indicates that the ceiling tiles need to be
replaced, or you could create an Inspection Recommendation record to record the
recommendation to replace the ceiling tiles. Your business processes will dictate whether
you should create an Inspection Task record or a Recommendation record. For example,
inspectors may need to report all recommendations to a supervisor for approval. The
supervisor might then be responsible for approving the recommendation, creating an
associated Inspection Task record, and assigning that Inspection Task record to the
appropriate inspector.
Additionally, if the Thickness Monitoring license is active and TM Analyses exist for the
Equipment records that you analyze in Inspection Management, you can specify that
Inspection Task records be updated based upon Thickness Measurement records that you
create in TM. Specifically, the value in the Last Date field in the Inspection Task record
will be populated with the value in the Measurement Taken Date field in the Thickness
Measurement records that you create via the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
This documentation does not assume which method you are going to use but explains
how to create Inspection Task records and how to create Inspection Recommendation
records.
Creating an Inspection Task Record

To create an Inspection Task record:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Manage Tasks link.
The Inspection Manage Tasks page appears, displaying a list of all queries and searches
in the Task Queries folder in the Catalog.
2. Click the All Equipment That Can Have Tasks link.

The Saved Search: All Equipment That Can Have Tasks page appears, displaying all
records that can be linked to an Inspection Task record.
Note: In the Meridium APM baseline database, this page displays in the page title the
catalog item caption for the query with which it is associated. This documentation
assumes that you have not modified this query caption.
3. In the row containing the equipment or location for which you want to create a
new Inspection Task record, click the Manage Tasks link.
If the Equipment or Functional Location record is already linked to a Task record, the
Task List page appears, displaying all existing Task records that are linked to the selected
Equipment or Functional Location record.
-orIf the Equipment or Functional Location record is not linked to any Task records, a
message appears, asking if you want to continue to the Task List page, which will display
a list of all Task records.
The Task List page appears, displaying all existing Task records.
You can use the Task List page to create a new Inspection Task record for the selected
equipment or location.
Creating an Inspection
Recommendation Record
To create an Inspection Recommendation record:
1. Open the Inspection record for which you want to create a recommendation.
2. In the record hierarchy, right-click the Inspection Recommendation family, and
select Create a new Inspection Recommendation to link to [root record], where
[root record] is the name of the record you opened from the search results.
-orIf you are viewing the Inspection Finding Checklist page, in the row representing the
finding that is prompting you to recommend further action, click the
button.
The new Inspection Recommendation window appears.

4. Click OK.
The Inspection Recommendation record is saved. In addition, if the root Inspection
record is linked to an Equipment record, the Asset ID field is populated with the ID of
that Equipment record. If the root Inspection record is linked to a Functional Location
record, the Functional Location ID field is populated with the ID of the Functional
Location record. Note that these values are also visible on the Inspection datasheet in the
Asset ID and Functional Location ID cells.
Values Mapped from Checklist Finding

Records to Inspection Recommendation
Records
If you create an Inspection Recommendation record from the Inspection Finding

Checklist page, the following fields in the Inspection Recommendation record are
populated automatically with values in the Checklist Finding record from which it was
created:
Recommendation Headline: Populated with a concatenation of the following

values:
The label of the section containing the Checklist Finding record.
The label of the row containing the Checklist Finding record.
For example, suppose an Inspection Recommendation record was created from the
Checklist Finding record represented by the row in the following image.
You can see that the section label is General, and the row label is Corrosion.
Using this example, the value in the Recommendation Headline field in the Inspection
Recommendation record would be General Corrosion, as shown in the following image.
Recommendation Description: Populated with the value in the Finding Summary

field in the Checklist Finding record.
Locking an Inspection
After you complete an Inspection record and want to flag it for approval, you should lock
it so that others cannot modify it. Locking the Inspection record ensures that the
information that you supplied does not get deleted or modified. After you lock an
Inspection record, you cannot unlock it. You can lock Inspection records defined for any
of the following families:
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
To lock an Inspection record:

1. Open the Inspection record that you want to lock.
2. Select the Inspection Lock check box.
Note: You can select the Inspection Lock check box only if your name is stored in the
Inspection Report Owner field.
All fields except for the following become disabled:
Inspection Document Status
Inspection Lock
Reviewers Name
Reviewers Comments
Final Inspection Lock
Published
In addition, the record hierarchy shortcut menu options that allow you to link new or
existing Recommendation records to the Inspection record are disabled.
After the Inspection record is locked, you can flag it for approval.
Flagging an Inspection for Approval

When an Inspection record is ready to be approved, you should flag it for approval.
Doing so will make the record appear on the Review and Approve Inspections page.
To flag an Inspection for approval:
1. Open the Inspection record that you want to flag for approval.
2. If one is not already selected, select a reviewer in the Reviewers Name list.
3. In the Inspection Document Status field, select Pending Approval.

Approving an Inspection
After an Inspection record has been set to Pending Approval, you can review and approve
it, indicating that you accept the findings and are satisfied with the information provided
by the inspector.
To approve inspection results:
1. On the Inspection Start Page, click the Review and Approve Documents link.
The Review and Approve Inspection Documents page appears.
This page displays a list of all queries and searches in the Review Queries folder in the
Catalog. Each row represents a different query you can run to return Inspection records
that need to be reviewed. For each Inspection family, you can select a query that returns:
1.
Records that contain a specific value in the Inspection Document Status

field and the Reviewers Name field.
Records that contain a specific value in the Inspection Document Status

field and are assigned to the user who is currently logged in to Meridium
APM.
Records that contain any value in the Inspection Document Status field
and are assigned to the user who is currently logged in to Meridium APM.
2. To run a query, in the row containing the query that you want to run, click the
hyperlinked query caption.
3. If you selected a query that returns only records with specific values in the
Inspection Document Status field and the Reviewers Name field, a prompt
appears. The prompt may contain a field for the reviewer's name and document
status or just the document status.
4. In the prompt, select the values that correspond to the type of Inspection records
that you want to review.
The Review and Approve Inspections page appears, displaying a list of all Inspection
records that meet the criteria that you selected on the previous page.
5. If you want to approve the inspection without reviewing any findings or
recommendations, in the row containing the Inspection record that you want to
approve:
a.
In the Inspection Document Status list, select Approved.
b.
Type any desired comments in the Reviewers Comments field.
c.
Select the Final Inspection Lock check box, which disables all fields except the
Final Inspection Lock field.
-orIf you want to review any findings or recommendation associated with the inspection
before approving the inspection:
1.
1. In the row containing the inspection whose findings and recommendations
you want to review, click the Open Inspection link.
The Inspection record appears in the Record Manager.
1.
2. Use the tree to expand any findings and recommendations.
3. When you are satisfied with the inspection, including any associated
findings and recommendations, in the Inspection Document Status list,
select Approved.
4. Select the Final Inspection Lock check box, which disables all fields
except the Final Inspection Lock field.
Note: You can also modify the status of the Inspection Recommendation, if desired (e.g.,
change the value in the Status field to Approved).
6. Save the Inspection record.
At this point, if the Inspection record was created based on the information in a Task
record, you might want to update that Task record so it contains an appropriate Last Date
and Next Date. You can do so by executing the strategy rule MI_InspectionTasksUpdate.
Publishing an Inspection
You can publish inspections using the Inspection datasheet for any of the following
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
To publish an Inspection record:

1. Open the Inspection record that you want to publish.
2. Select the Published check box.
Viewing Published Inspections

To view published inspections:
1. On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Published Documents link.
The Published Inspection Documents page appears.
2. In the row containing the record that you want to view, click the Load Inspection
link.
The Inspection record appears in the Record Manager.
About Inspection Reports

The baseline Inspection Management module includes reports that can be used to view
information about an inspection. When you view an inspection report, you are viewing a
main report and various subreports that exist in the Catalog. These reports are based upon
supporting queries that gather information from the Inspection record and records to
which it is linked. The results are displayed on the Report Viewer page.
The following table lists the main reports that correspond with each Inspection subfamily,
the query and subreports that are associated with each main report, and the sections that
are included in each main report. Note that the subreports are not meant to be run
independently of the associated main report.
Inspection Query Behind

subfamily Main Report
Bundle
Inspection
Main
Contributing Reports
Report(s)
Asset
MI_INSPBUND Bundle
Corrosion
Inspection
Analysis
Report
Report
Finding
Report
Sections Included in Main

Report
Bundle Inspection
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Reference
Document
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Findings
Pressure Test Sub
Inspections
Recommendations
Inspection Team
Members
Reference Documents
Report
Asset
Corrosion
Analysis
Report
Bundle Sub
Inspection
Report
Checklists
Checklist
Report Query
Checklist
Inspection
Report
Checklist
Finding
Report
Finding
Report
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Pressure Test
Sub
Inspection
Report
Reference
Document
Report
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Bundle SubInspections
Checklist Findings
Findings
Recommendations
Inspection Team
Members
Pressure Test Sub

Inspections
Reference Documents
Checklists
Checklist
Report Query
Blank
Checklist
Inspection
Report
Asset
Corrosion
Analysis
Report
Bundle Sub
Inspection
Report
Full
Inspection
Full
MI_INSPFULL Inspection
Report
Checklist
Finding
Report
Finding
Report
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Full Inspection
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Findings
Recommendations
Pressure Test Sub
Inspections
Inspection Team
Members
Pressure Test
Sub
Inspection
Report
Reference
Document
Report
Checklist Findings
Reference Documents
General
Inspection
General
MI_INSP_GEN Inspection
Report
Finding
Report
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Pressure
Test
Inspection
Pressure
Test
MI_INSPPTST
Inspection
Report
Asset
Corrosion
Analysis
Report
Press Test
Sub
Inspection
Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Reference
Document
Report
Asset
Corrosion
Analysis
Report
Finding
Report
Reference
Document
Report
Findings
Recommendations
Pressure Test Sub
Inspections
Inspection Team
Members
Reference Documents
Pressure Test
Inspection
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
General Inspection
Findings
Recommendations
Inspection Team
Members
Reference Documents
About Running Inspection Reports

You can run inspection reports from of the following locations:
From the Inspection Reports page.
From the Record Manager.
From the Inspection Finding Checklist page.
-or-
-or-
The location that you choose will depend upon your workflow and the type of inspection
report you want to view.
Note: When you run a report from the Inspection Finding Checklist page, you can
generate a report for the Inspection record for which you accessed the page or generate a
blank report for the Checklists family to which the Inspection record belongs.
Accessing the Inspection Reports Page

To access the Inspection Reports page:
On the Inspection Management Start Page, click the Inspection Reports link.
The Inspection Reports page appears.
Aspects of the Inspection Reports Page

The Inspection Reports page appears when you click the Inspection Reports link on the
Inspection Management Start Page.
The Inspection Reports page contains the Inspection Reports grid that displays one row
for each query that is stored in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Manage Report Queries. The Inspection Reports
grid contains the following columns:
Caption: Displays the hyperlinked query caption.

Description: Displays the query description.
You can click any hyperlinked caption to run the associated query. If you click the
hyperlinked caption for a baseline query, you will be directed to another page from which
you can run the desired report.
By default, for each Inspection subfamily, the grid displays two queries:
One query that returns a list of all Inspection records in that family, regardless of
the record to which they are linked. After you run this query, from the list of
Inspection records that appears, you can run the report for the desired Inspection
record.
One query that returns a list of all Inspection records in that family, where the
Inspection records are linked to a specific record that you specify. After you run
this query, you will need to specify the desired record. Then, from the list of
Inspection records that are linked to that record, you can run the report for the
desired Inspection record.
For example, for the Full Inspection family, the grid displays the following queries:
One query that returns a list of all Full Inspection records that exist in the
database. From this list, you can run the report for the desired Full Inspection
record.
One query that returns a list of all Full Inspection records that are linked to a
specific Equipment or Functional Location record. After you run this query, you
will need to select the desired Equipment or Functional Location record. Then,
from the list of Full Inspection records that are returned, you can run the report for
the desired Full Inspection record.
The Inspection Reports page also contains one task menu: Common Tasks.
Common Tasks Menu
The Common Tasks menu on the Inspection Reports page contains the following links:
Print: This button is always disabled on the Inspection Reports page.

Page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Inspection Reports page.
Running Inspection Reports From the

Inspection Reports Page
To run an inspection report from the Inspection Reports page:
1. In the Inspection Reports grid on the Inspection Reports page, in the row
containing the query that you want to run, click the hyperlinked query caption.
A new page appears, displaying a list of Inspection records whose associated report you
can run.
If you selected a query from the Inspection Reports page that returns
Inspection records that are linked to a specific Equipment or Functional
Location record, prompts appear for you to specify the desired Equipment
or Functional Location record. In this case, proceed to step 2 of these
instructions.
-or2.
o
If you selected a query from the Inspection Reports page that returns all
Inspection records belonging to a certain family, prompts do not appear. In
this case, proceed to step 4 of these instructions.
2. If you want to run a report that is associated with an Inspection record that is
linked to a Functional Location record, in the Location ID text box, type the value
that is stored in the Functional Location ID field in the desired Functional
Location record.
-or
If you want to run a report that is associated with an Inspection record that is linked to an
Equipment record, in the or Asset ID text box, type the value that is stored in the Asset ID
field in the desired Equipment record.
The results appear below the query prompts, displaying a list of all Inspection records
that are linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record that you specified in the
prompt.
4. In the row representing the inspection whose report you want to run, click the
View Report link.

Record Manager
The following instructions assume that you want to run one of the following inspection
reports:
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
Although you can run a Checklist Inspection report via the Select Report to Print dialog
box in the Record Manager, this documentation assumes you will run Checklist
Inspection reports from the Inspection Finding Checklist page or from the Inspection
Reports page.
To run an inspection report from the Record Manager:
1. In Record Manager, open the Inspection record whose report you want to run.
2. On the Associated Pages menu, click Inspection, and then on the submenu, click
View Printable Report.
Note: The report is accessible only if it has been associated with the corresponding family
via the Configuration Manager.

Inspection Finding Checklist Page
These instructions provide details about running Checklist Inspection reports. To run
other types of inspection reports (e.g., Full Inspection), see the instructions on running
reports from the Inspection Reports page or from the Record Manager.
Checklist Inspection reports are configured in the baseline Meridium APM database for
each of the following families:

In addition to running reports for existing Checklists records, you can also generate blank
Checklist Inspection reports to print and distribute to the appropriate resources so they
can record their findings on the printed report. The following instructions may be used to
generate a blank Checklist Inspection report or a Checklist Inspection report for an
existing Checklists record.
To run a report from the Inspection Finding Checklist page:
1. On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, open:
o
The Inspection record whose report you want to run.
An Inspection record belonging to the Checklists sub-family for which

you want to generate a blank report.
-or-

The Select Report to Print dialog box appears. The Print a report option is selected by
default.
3. In the Print a report list:

o
Accept the default selection, Checklist Inspection Report, if you want to

run a report for an existing Checklists record.
Select the value Blank Checklist Inspection Report if you want to generate
a blank report for the Checklists family to which the current Inspection
-or-
record (i.e., the Inspection record displayed as the root node in the
explorer) belongs.
4. Click OK.
5. The report appears on the Report Viewer page. From this page, you can print the
report to distribute it or to keep it as a record.
About Interpreting the Inspection

Reports
In the baseline database, one report is provided for each of the following Inspection
families:
Checklists
Note: The Checklist Inspection report is configured for each Checklists sub-family (e.g.,
API 510 External Checklist).
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
While each family has its own report, many of the sections in the reports are common to
all of the reports. This section of the documentation describes the sections that are
included in the baseline reports and indicates whether or not the section is common to all
reports.
Note: Documentation for the Asset Corrosion Analysis section is not provided.
Bundle Inspection Section

The Bundle Inspection section appears only if you are viewing a report for a Bundle
Inspection record. This section displays information that is stored in the Bundle
Inspection record. An example of the Bundle Inspection section is shown in the following
image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Bundle Inspection section and
their corresponding Bundle Inspection fields. Note that the table displays field captions,
which may differ from datasheet captions.
Report item
Asset ID
Bundle Inspection field

Asset ID
Bundle Inspection Summary Inspection Summary

Functional Location ID
Inspection Finish Date
Completion Date
Inspection Headline
Inspection Headline
Inspection Reference
Inspection Start Date
Commencement Date
Inspection Summary
Inspection Summary
Inspection Report Owner
Percentage Heat Transfer

Area Loss
Percentage Heat Transfer Area

Loss
Reason for Inspection
Reviewer Comments
Reviewers Comments
Reviewer Name
Reviewers Name
Total Number of Tubes in

Bundle

Bundle
Total Number of Tubes

Replaced

Replaced at Inspection End
Tubes (Previously Plugged)

Replaced
Tubes (Plugged At Start)

Replaced
Tubes Plugged at Inspection

End

Plugged at Inspection End

Start

Start
Tubes Replaced Not

Previously Plugged
Tubes (Not Previously

Plugged) Replaced
Type of Inspection
Type of Inspection
Bundle Sub Inspections Section

The Bundle Sub Inspections section appears if you are viewing a report for one of the
following records:
Checklists (unless you are viewing a blank Checklist Inspection report)

Full Inspection
This section displays information that is stored in the Bundle Sub-Inspection records that
are linked to the Full Inspection or Checklists record. An example of the Bundle Sub
Inspections section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Bundle Sub Inspections section
and their corresponding Bundle Sub-Inspection fields. Note that the table displays field
captions, which may differ from datasheet captions.
Report item
Bundle Sub-inspection field
Bundle Inspection Summary Inspection Summary

Bundle Tag
Asset ID
Percentage Heat Transfer

Area Loss
Percentage Heat Transfer Area Loss

Bundle
Total Number of Tubes in Bundle

Replaced
Total Number of Tubes Plugged at

Inspection End
Tubes (Previously Plugged)

Replaced
Tubes (Plugged At Start) Replaced
Tubes Plugged at Inspection Total Number of Tubes Plugged at

End
Inspection End
Tubes Plugged at Inspection Start
Start
Tubes Replaced Not
Previously Plugged
Tubes (Not Previously Plugged)

Replaced
Checklist Findings Section

The Checklist Findings section appears only if you are viewing a Checklist Inspection
report. The items that appear in this section depend upon the finding sections that are
associated with the Inspection family for which you ran the report and will vary based on
what type of Checklist Inspection report you are viewing. If you are viewing a Checklist
Inspection report that is:
Associated with a particular Inspection record, this section displays values that are
stored in the Checklist Finding records that are linked to the Inspection record.
A blank Checklist Inspection report, the finding sections associated with the
Inspection family for which you ran the report will appear, but the cells in the
Value and Finding Summary columns will be empty.
The following image shows an example of the Checklist Findings section that is
displayed when you run a Checklist Inspection Report for a particular Inspection record.
Findings Section
The Findings section appears in all reports except blank Checklist Inspection reports and
displays information that is stored in the General Finding records that are linked to the
Inspection record. An example of the Findings section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Findings section and their
corresponding General Finding fields. Note that the table displays field captions, which
may differ from datasheet captions.
Report item
General Finding field
Action Taken Code
Action Taken Code
Action Taken Description
Action Taken Description
Deterioration Mechanism
Deterioration Mechanism
Deterioration Mode
Deterioration Mode
Headline
Headline
Location Details
Location Details
Predictable
Predictable
Predicted
Predicted
Profile Item
Inspection Profile Item
Summary
Finding Summary
Type
Type
Full Inspection Section

The Full Inspection section appears only if you are viewing a report for a Full Inspection
record. This section displays information that is stored in the Full Inspection record. An
example of a Full Inspection section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Full Inspection section and
their corresponding Full Inspection fields. Note that the table displays field captions,
Report item
Full Inspection field
Asset ID
Asset ID
Completion Date
Inspection Headline
Inspection Headline
Commencement Date
Inspection Summary
Inspection Summary
Reason For Inspection
Reason of Inspection
Reviewer Comments
Reviewers Comments
Reviewer Name
Reviewers Name
Type of Inspection
Type of Inspection
General Inspection Section

The General Inspection section appears only if you are viewing a report for a General
Inspection record. This section displays information that is stored in the General
Inspection record. An example of a General Inspection section is shown in the following
image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the General Inspection section and
their corresponding General Inspection fields. Note that the table displays field captions,
Report item
General Inspection field
Asset ID
Asset ID
Completion Date
Inspection Headline
Inspection Headline
Commencement Date
Inspection Summary
Inspection Summary
Reason For Inspection
Reason of Inspection
Reviewer Comments
Reviewers Comments
Reviewer Name
Reviewers Name
Type of Inspection
Type of Inspection
Inspection Team Members Section

The Inspection Team Members section appears in all reports except blank Checklist
Inspection reports and displays information that is stored in the Inspection Team Member
records that are linked to the Inspection record. An example of the Inspection Team
Members section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Inspection Team Members
section and their corresponding Inspection Team Member fields. Note that the table
displays field captions, which may differ from datasheet captions.
Report item
Inspection Team Member

field
Applicable Certification
Applicable Certification
Certification ID
Certification ID
Certification Expiry Date
Certification Expiry Date
Full Name
Full Name
Pressure Test Inspection Section

The Pressure Test Inspection section appears only if you are viewing a report for a
Pressure Test Inspection record. This section displays information that is stored in the
Pressure Test Inspection record. An example of the Pressure Test Inspection section is
The following table lists the items that are included in the Pressure Test Inspection
section and their corresponding Pressure Test Inspection fields. Note that the table
Report item
Pressure Test Inspection field
# of Gauges Used
No. of Gauges Used (Shell)
# of Gauges Used
No. of Gauges Used (Tube)
Asset ID
Asset ID
Functional Location
ID
Inspection Finish
Date
Completion Date
Inspection Headline Inspection Headline

Inspection Reference Inspection Reference
Inspection Start Date Commencement Date
Inspection Summary Inspection Summary
Inspection Report
Owner
Reason for
Inspection
Reviewer Comments Reviewers Comments

Reviewer Name
Reviewers Name
SRV Set Pressure
SRV Set Pressure (Shell)
SRV Set Pressure
SRV Set Pressure (Tube)
Test Comments
Test Comments (Shell)
Test Comments
Test Comments (Tube)
Test Duration
Test Duration (Shell)
Test Duration
Test Duration (Tube)
Test Media
Test Media (Shell)
Test Media
Test Media (Tube)
Test Media Temp.
Test Media Temperature

(Shell)
Test Media Temp.
Test Media Temperature

(Tube)
Test Pressure
Test Pressure (Shell)
Test Pressure
Test Pressure (Tube)
Type of Inspection
Type of Inspection
Witnessed By
Witnessed By (Shell)
Witnessed By
Witnessed By (Tube)
Pressure Test Sub Inspections Section

The Pressure Test Sub Inspections section appears if you are viewing a report for one of
Bundle Inspection
Checklists (except blank Checklist Inspection reports)
Full Inspection
General Inspection
This section displays information that is stored in the Pressure Test Sub-Inspection
records that are linked to the Inspection record. An example of the Pressure Test Sub
Inspections section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Pressure Test Sub Inspection
section and their corresponding Pressure Test Sub-Inspection fields. Note that the table
Report item
Pressure Test SubInspection field
#of Gauges Used
No. of Gauges Used

(Shell)
#of Gauges Used
No. of Gauges Used

(Tube)
SRV Set Pressure
SRV Set Pressure (Shell)
SRV Set Pressure
SRV Set Pressure (Tube)
Test Comments
Test Comments (Shell)
Test Comments
Test Comments (Tube)
Test Duration
Test Duration (Shell)
Test Duration
Test Duration (Tube)
Test Media
Test Media (Shell)
Test Media
Test Media (Tube)
Test Media Temp. Test Media Temperature

(Shell)
Test Media Temp. Test Media Temperature
(Tube)
Test Pressure
Test Pressure (Shell)
Test Pressure
Test Pressure (Tube)
Witnessed By
Witnessed By (Shell)
Witnessed By
Witnessed By (Tube)
Recommendations Section
The Recommendations section is included in all reports except blank Checklist Inspection
reports and displays information that is stored in the Inspection Recommendation records
that are linked to the Inspection record. An example of the Recommendations section is
The following table lists the items that are included in the Recommendations section and
their corresponding Inspection Recommendation fields. Note that the table displays field
Report item
Inspection Recommendation
field
Author Name
Author Name
Basis
Recommendation Basis
Description
Recommendation Description
Headline
Recommendation Headline
Profile Item
Inspection Profile Item
Recommendation ID
Inspection Recommendation
ID
Reference Documents Section

The Reference Documents section is included in all reports except blank Checklist
Inspection reports and displays information that is stored in the Reference Document
records that are linked to the Inspection record. An example of the Reference Documents
section is shown in the following image.
The following table lists the items that are included in the Reference Documents section
and their corresponding Reference Document fields. Note that the table displays field
Report item
Reference Document field
Description
Description
Document Path
Document Path
Reference Document ID
ID
Inspection Management Associated

Pages
The following table lists the Associated Pages that are configured by default for the
following baseline Inspection families:
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection
These links are available only when one record is selected.

Note: To see the underlying URL for each Associated Page, you can use the URL
Caption
View Printable
Report
View Asset
Inspection
History
Description
Launches the Report Viewer, which displays the Inspection record data
in a preformatted report.
This Associated Page appears on the Inspection submenu.
Displays the Inspection History Summary Query page, which displays
all Inspection records that are linked to the same Equipment record to
which the current Inspection record is linked.

Displays the Inspection History Summary Query page, which displays
all Inspection records that are linked to the same Functional Location
View Function
record to which the current Inspection record is linked.
Inspection
History
Displays the Inspection Profile record for the selected Equipment record.
Manage
Profiles
Displays the Corrosion Analysis page in Thickness Monitoring, which
displays any existing corrosion history for the current Equipment or
Corrosion
Analysis
The Meridium APM system assumes that either Equipment records or
Functional Location records have been set up to have analyses. If both
Equipment and Functional Location records have been configured to
have analyses, this link will still work, but other parts of the application
may produce unexpected results.
Displays the Task List page, which displays a list of all the Task records
that are linked to the Equipment or Functional Location record to which
the Inspection record is linked.
This Associated Page should be used only by customers whose
Inspection records are linked to either an Equipment record or a
Manage Tasks
Functional Location record. It should not be used by customers whose
Inspection records are linked to both an Equipment record and a
Manage
Location Tasks

that are linked to the Functional Location record to which the Inspection
Event record is linked.
that are linked to the Equipment record to which the Inspection record is
linked.
Manage
Equipment
Tasks
Open
Inspection
Explorer
Open Work
Pack
This Associated Page should be used only by customers whose

Inspection records are linked to both an Equipment record and a
Loads the Inspection record in its configured explorer if one has been set
up for the Inspection family.
Opens the Work Pack record to which the Inspection Event record is
linked.
Public Folders
Inspection Management looks for files in specific places in the Meridium APM Catalog
to display information, including lists of saved queries and searches. For Inspection
Management to work properly, you must store files in these specific locations. The
following table provides a list of these Public folders, information about the files they
contain by default, and details on how these files are used by Inspection Management.
This list is intended to serve as a quick reference to details that are provided elsewhere in
this documentation.
Note: All of the Public folders listed in the table exist by default. Any item in a Public
folder is also available in the Baseline folder. Throughout this documentation, however,
we refer to items in the Public folder.
This folder:
...Stores these files: ...Which are used

to:
Queries and searches

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Conditional that retrieve
Alert Queries
Inspection
Conditional Alerts.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config
Queries
Generate the list

that appears on
the Inspection
Alerts page.
Application
configuration
queries, including:
Asset Query, Base Set up required
Summary Query,
application
Inspection History configurations.
Summary Query, and
Published
Documents Query.
Generate the list

Queries and searches that appears on
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Document
that retrieve
the Inspection
Queries
Inspection records. Manage
Documents page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Explorers
Configured
explorers.
Control the
display of
Inspection
Documents in the
Record Manager
and on the
Inspection
Finding
Checklist page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Manage
Report Queries
Generate the list

that retrieve
the Inspection
Inspection reports. Manage Reports
page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Profile
Queries
Generate the list

that appears on
used to retrieve
the Inspection
Inspection Profile
Manage Profiles
records.
page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Report
Queries
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Reports
Underlying support
queries.
Reports that provide
various information
related to
inspections. This
Catalog folder
contains the
following reports:
Asset
Corrosion
Analysis
Report
Blank
Checklist
Finding
Report
Blank
Checklist
Inspection
Report
Bundle
Inspection
Report
Bundle Sub
Inspection
Report
Checklist
Produce reports.
Display
inspection
reports in the
Report Viewer.
Finding
Report
Checklist
Inspection
Report
Finding
Report
Full
Inspection
Report
General
Inspection
Report
Inspection
Recommenda
tion Report
Inspection
Team
Member
Report
Pressure Test
Inspection
Report
Pressure Test
Sub
Inspection
Report
Reference
Document
Report
Workpack
Inspection
Findings
Summary
Report
Workpack
Inspection
Scope
Summary
Report
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Resource
Queries

used to retrieve
Human Resources
involved in the
inspection process.
Generate the list

that appears on
the Inspection
Manage
Resources page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Review
Queries
Generate the list

used to retrieve
the Review and
Inspection Event
Approve
records for review. Inspection
Documents page.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\SSRS
This folder contains

reports that were
used in a previous
release.
This Catalog
folder and its
contents are not
used by the
Meridium APM
product.
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Task
Queries

used to retrieve
Equipment or
Functional Location
records that can be
linked to Inspection
Task records.
Generate the list

that appears on
the Inspection
Manage Tasks
page.
Personal Folders
In addition to Public folders, Inspection Management can also use queries and searches
stored in Personal folders. The queries and searches must be stored in the exact folder
structure expected by Inspection Management. For details, refer to the following table.
When you follow the Inspection Management workflow, personal queries and searches
will be displayed along with public queries and searches.
The Personal folders do not exist by default and must be created manually if you want to
use them to store queries and searches that are used by Inspection Management. Items in
Personal folders will appear only to the user of the folder in which they are stored,
regardless of the permissions defined for the user who is logged in.
The following table provides a list of these Personal folders, information about the files
they should contain, and details on how these files are used by Inspection Management.
This folder:
...Should store these

files:
...Which are used to:
\\Personal\Inspection\Document
Queries

used to retrieve
Inspection records that Generate the list that appears
are of interest to the
on the Inspection Manage
current user (e.g.,
Documents page.
Inspections assigned to
the current user).
\\Personal\Inspection\Profile
Queries

used to retrieve
Inspection Profiles
Generate the list that appears

on the Inspection Manage
Profiles page.
About the Baseline Inspection Queries

The Inspection Management interface is configured to display results of queries that
Meridium APM provides as part of the baseline Inspection Management content. The
instructions in this documentation assume that you are using the baseline queries and that
you have not modified them. If you modify these queries, the instructions will not apply
to your implementation.
Conditional Alert Queries Folder

The query listed in the following table is provided by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Conditional Alert Queries. In this table, the value
displayed in the Query column refers to the query name. The baseline query caption is the
same as the query name.
Query
All
Inspection
Alerts
Behavior and Usage

Returns all Conditional Alert records where the value in the Alert Source
field is Inspection. This query contains an Open Alert Definition link, which
opens the selected Conditional Alerts record in the Record Manager.
The results of this query are displayed on the Inspection Alerts page.
Config Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are provided by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config Queries. In this table, the values listed in
the query names.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Asset Query
This query is used to identify the records that store information

about pieces of equipment for which you perform inspections. In
the baseline database, this query returns a count of all Equipment
records with the Entity Key specified in the query prompt (i.e., one
or zero).
Base Summary Query
Used by the Inspection History Summary Query. The results of

this query are not visible when you follow the Inspection
Management workflow; this query exists simply to support a
workflow facilitated by the Inspection History Summary Query.
Inspection History
Summary Query
Returns a list of all Inspection records that are linked to a certain

Equipment or Functional Location record. This query uses the
Base Summary Query to determine the Entity Key of the
Equipment or Functional Location record. The results of this query

are displayed on the Inspection History Summary Query page.
Published Documents
Returns a list of all Inspection records whose Published field is set

to true. This query contains a Load Inspection hyperlink that lets
you open Inspection records in the Record Manager. The results of
this query are displayed on the Published Inspection Documents
page when it is accessed via the Inspection Management Start
Page or a link on a Home Page.
Published Documents by This query returns the same results as the Published Documents
Asset
query, however, this query contains a prompt on the Asset Key
field in the Inspection record. The results of this query are
displayed on the Published Inspection Documents page when it is
accessed from the navigation bar that is displayed on various
pages throughout Mechanical Integrity modules.
Returns the Entity Key of each Security User record and the Entity
User_Key_for_HR_Key Key of each Human Resource record to which that Security User
record is linked. The results of this query are not visible when you
follow the Inspection workflow; this query exists simply to
support the workflow facilitated by the following queries, which
exist in the Review Queries folder:
Bundle Inspections for Review for Current User Choose State
Bundle Inspections Pending Approval for Current

User
Full Inspections for Review for Current User Choose State
Full Inspections Pending Approval for Current User
General Inspections for Review for Current User Choose State
General Inspections Pending Approval for Current

User
Pressure Inspections Pending Approval for Current

User
Pressure Test Inspections for Review for Current

User - Choose State
Document Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are provided in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Document Queries. In this table, the values listed
in the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the same
as the query names.
Note: These queries are accessible from the Inspection Manage Documents page.
Query
Behavior and Usage
All Equipment That

Can Have API 510
External Checklist
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to an API 510 External Checklist
Inspection record. This query contains an Existing Documents link,
which displays on the Inspection History Summary Query page a list
of existing API 510 External Checklist Inspection records that are
linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID in the query.
All Equipment That

Can Have API 510
Internal Checklist
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to an API 510 Internal Checklist
of existing API 510 Internal Checklist Inspection records that are
All Equipment That

Can Have API 510
Internal Exchanger
Checklist Inspections
of existing API 510 Internal Exchanger Checklist Inspection records
that are linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID in the
query.
All Equipment That

Can Have API 570
External Checklist
Inspections
All Equipment That

Can Have API 653
External Checklist
Inspections
All Equipment That

Can Have API 653
Internal Checklist
Inspections
of existing API 653 Internal Checklist Inspection records that are
All Equipment That

Can Have Bundle
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to a Bundle Inspection record.

This query contains a Create New Bundle Inspection Document link,
which opens in the Record Manager a new Bundle Inspection record
that is linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID column in
the query. The query also contains an Existing Documents link,
of existing Bundle Inspection records that are linked to the record
indicated by the Equipment ID in the query.
All Equipment That

Can Have External
PRD Checklist
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to an External PRD Checklist

of existing External PRD Checklist Inspection records that are
All Equipment That

Can Have Full
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to a Full Inspection record. This
query contains a Create New Full Inspection Document link, which
opens in the Record Manager a new Full Inspection record that is
linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID column in the
query. The query also contains an Existing Documents link, which
displays on the Inspection History Summary Query page a list of
existing Full Inspection records that are linked to the record
indicated by the Equipment ID in the query.
All Equipment That

Can Have General
Inspections
Returns all records that are linked to a General Inspection record.

This query contains a Create New General Inspection Document
link, which opens in the Record Manager a new General Inspection
record that is linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID
column in the query. The query also contains an Existing Documents
link, which displays on the Inspection History Summary Query page
a list of existing General Inspection records that are linked to the
record indicated by the Equipment ID in the query.
All Equipment That

Returns all records that are linked to an Inspection record. This
Can Have Inspections query contains a New Documents link, which displays the Select
Family dialog box, where you can select the family of the new
Inspection record you want to create. After selecting a family, the
Record Manager displays a new record that is linked to the record
indicated by the Equipment ID column in the query. The query also
contains an Existing Documents link, which displays on the
Inspection History Summary Query page a list of existing Inspection
records that are linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID
in the query.
All Equipment That
Returns all records that are linked to a Pressure Test Inspection
Can Have Pressure Test record. This query contains a Create New Pressure Test Document
Inspections
link, which opens in the Record Manager a new Pressure Test
Inspection record that is linked to the record indicated by the
Equipment ID column in the query. The query also contains an
Existing Documents link, which displays on the Inspection History
Summary Query page a list of existing Pressure Test Inspection
records that are linked to the record indicated by the Equipment ID
in the query.
All Inspection Records Returns all Inspection records. This query contains a Load
inspection link, which opens in Record Manager a new General
Inspection record that is linked to the record indicated by the
Inspection Reference in the query.
All Inspection Records Prompts you for the Location ID and Asset ID, and then returns all
For Selected
Inspection Records that are linked to the record that meets the
Equipment
specified criteria.
Manage Report Queries Folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Manage Report Queries. In this table, the values
listed in the Query column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the
same as the query names.
Note: These queries are available from the Inspection Reports page.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Bundle Inspection Formatted Reports for All

Equipment
Returns all Bundle Inspection records. This query contains a

View Report link, which opens in the Report Viewer the
Inspection Document indicated by the Inspection Reference in
the query.
Bundle Inspection Formatted Reports with

Prompt for Equipment
Prompts you for a Location ID and Asset ID so you can specify

the equipment or location for which you want to view a Bundle
Inspection report.
Checklist Inspections Formatted Reports for All

Equipment
Returns all Checklists records. This query contains a View

Report link, which opens in the Report Viewer the Inspection
Document indicated by the Inspection Reference in the query.
Checklist Inspections Formatted Reports with


the equipment or location for which you want to view a
Checklist Inspection Report.
Full Inspection - Formatted Returns all Full Inspection records. This query contains a View
Reports for All Equipment Report link, which opens in the Report Viewer the Inspection
Document indicated by the Inspection Reference in the query.
Full Inspection - Formatted Prompts you for a Location ID and Asset ID so you can specify
Reports with Prompt for
the equipment or location for which you want to view a Full
Equipment
Inspection report.
General Inspection Formatted Reports for All
Equipment
Returns all General Inspection records. This query contains a

View Report link, which opens in the Report Viewer the
Inspection Document indicated by the Inspection Reference in
the query.
General Inspection Reports - Prompts you for a Location ID and Asset ID so you can specify
Formatted Reports with
General Inspection report.
Pressure Test Inspection Formatted Reports for All
Equipment
Returns all Pressure Test Inspection records. This query

contains a View Report link, which opens in the Report Viewer
the Inspection Document indicated by the Inspection Reference
in the query.
Pressure Test Inspection Formatted Reports with


Pressure Test Inspection report.
Profile Queries Folder

The query listed in the following table is provided by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Profile Queries. In this table, the value displayed
in the Query column refers to the query name. The baseline query caption is the same as
the query name.
Query
Behavior and Usage

Returns all Equipment records in your database. This query contains
a Manage Profiles link, which opens on the Manage Equipment
Profile page the Inspection Profile records that are linked to the
record associated with the item indicated by the Equipment ID in the
All Equipment That
query.
Can Have An
Inspection Profiles
The results of the All Equipment That Can Have An Inspection
Profiles query are available on the Saved Search: All Equipment that
can have an Inspection Profiles page.
Report Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table are provided by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Report Queries. In this table, the values listed in
the query names.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Checklist Report Query Generates the report for an Inspection Document associated with a
Checklists record.
MI Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Generates information in the Asset Corrosion Analysis section of

each main report.
MI Reference Document Generates information in the Reference Documents section of each

main report.
MI_FIND_CHECK
Generates information in the Checklist Findings section of a

Checklist Inspection report.
MI_FIND_GEN
Generates information in the Findings section of each main report.
MI_INSP_GEN
Generates the report for a General Inspection Document.
MI_INSPBSUB
Generates information in the Bundle Sub Inspections section of a

Full Inspection report.
MI_INSPBUND
Generates the report for a Bundle Inspection Document.
MI_INSPFULL
Generates the report for a Full Inspection Document.
MI_INSPPSUB
Generates the information in the Pressure Test Sub Inspections

section of a Full and General Inspection report.
MI_INSPPTST
Generates the report for a Pressure Test Inspection Document.
MI_RECINSP
Generates the information in the Recommendations section of each

main report.
MI_TEAMINSP
Generates the information in the Inspection Team Members section

of each main report.
Resource Queries Folder

The queries listed in the following table exist by default in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Resource Queries. Each query in the this folder
includes one or more URLs, which provide specific functionality when the query is run.
The following table lists the baseline queries, the functionality of the associated URLs,
and the behavior of the associated hyperlinks. In this table, the values listed in the Query
column refer to the query names. The baseline query captions are the same as the query
names.
Note: You can access these queries from the Inspection Manage Resources page.
Query
All Human
Resources
Behavior and Usage

Returns a list of all the Human Resource records in the database.
This query contains the following URL Fields:
Manage Resource Roles (Field Alias: Manage Roles): Displays the

Human Resource record in the master/detail datasheet. The detail
grid lets you view and create Resource Role records that are linked
to the Human Resource record.
Manage Resource Certifications (Field Alias: Manage

Certifications): Displays the Human Resource record in the
master/detail datasheet. The detail grid lets you view and create
Personnel Certification records that are linked to the Human
Resource record.
Returns a list of Human Resource records that are linked to a Personnel
Certification record.
Human
Resources with
Certification
This query contains the following URL Field:

Last Name: Displays the Human Resource Record in the
Personnel Certification records that are linked to the Human
Resource record.
Returns a list of Human Resource records that are linked to a Resource
Role record.
Human
Resources with
Roles
This query contains the following URL Field:
Last Name: Displays the Human Resource Record in the

Resource Role records that are linked to the Human Resource
record.
Review Queries Folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Review Queries. In this table, the values listed in
the query names.
Note: These queries are available on the Review and Approve Inspection Documents
page.
Query
Behavior and Usage
Bundle Inspections for Review - After prompting you to select a reviewer and state, returns
Choose State and Reviewer
a list of all Bundle Inspection records with the selected
state and reviewer.
Bundle Inspections for Review After prompting you to select a state, returns a list of all
for Current User - Choose State Bundle Inspection records for the currently logged-in user
with the selected state.
Bundle Inspections Pending
Approval for Current User
Returns a list of all Bundle Inspection records pending

approval for the currently logged-in user.
Full Inspections for Review Choose State and Reviewer
After prompting you for a state and reviewer, returns a list

of all Full Inspection records with the selected state and
reviewer.
Full Inspections for Review for After prompting you for a state, returns a list of all Full
Current User - Choose State
Inspection records for the currently logged-in user with the
selected state.
Full Inspections Pending
Returns a list of all Full Inspection records pending

General Inspections for Review - After prompting you for a state and reviewer, returns a list
Choose State and Review
of all General Inspection records with the selected state and
reviewer.
General Inspections for Review After prompting you for a state, returns a list of all General
for Current User - Choose State Inspection records for the currently logged-in user with the
selected state.
General Inspections Pending
Returns a list of all General Inspection records pending

Pressure Test Inspections for

Review - Choose State and
Reviewer
After prompting you for a state and reviewer, returns a list

of all Pressure Test Inspection records with the selected
state and reviewer.
Pressure Test Inspections for

Review for Current User -
After prompting you for a state, returns a list of all Pressure

Test Inspection records for the currently logged-in user
Choose State
with the selected state.
Pressure Test Inspections

Pending Approval for Current
User
Returns a list of all Pressure Test Inspection records

pending approval for the currently logged-in user.
Task Queries Folder

The query listed in the following table is provided in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Task Queries. In this table, the value listed in the
Query column refers to the query name. The baseline query caption is the same as the
query name.
Query
All Equipment
That Can Have
Tasks
Behavior and Usage

Returns all records that can be linked to a Task record through the Has
Tasks relationship. This query contains a Manage Tasks link, which
opens on the Task List page a list of all Task records that are linked to the
record associated with the item indicated by the Equipment ID in the
query.
This query is available on the Inspection Manage Tasks page.
Inspection
Inspection records store information about inspections that you perform on equipment
and locations. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the
fields that exist in the Inspection family. The information in the table reflects the baseline
state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Note: You can find information about fields unique to the Bundle Sub-Inspection and
PRD Pop Test Checklist families in additional topics in this section of the documentation.
Field
Actual Work
Time
Data
Type
Description
The number
of hours it
Number took to
complete the
inspection.
Behavior and Usage

This field appears on datasheets configured for
Inspection families whose caption contains the
word Checklist and on SAP Integration datasheets
configured for the following families:
Bundle Inspection
Full Inspection
General Inspection

This field is populated with the Record ID of the
Equipment record with which the Inspection record
is associated.
Asset ID
Asset ID Link
The Record
ID of the
Equipment
record to
Character
which the
Inspection
record is
linked.
A hyperlink
to the
Equipment
record to
Character
which the
Inspection
record is
linked.
Commencement
Date
Date
The date on
which the
inspection
started.
If you selected an Equipment record on the

Equipment screen in the Event Builder
when you created the Inspection record,
this field will be populated with the Record
ID of that Equipment record.
If you selected a Functional Location

record on the Equipment screen in the
Event Builder when you created the
Inspection record, this field will be
populated with the Record ID of the
Equipment record that is linked to that
When you click this hyperlink, the Equipment

record will be opened in Record Manager.
By default, this value is set to the date on which the

Inspection record is created. You can modify this
date to reflect the actual start date, as needed.
This field is available only on the datasheets that
are defined for the families whose caption does not
contain the word Checklist.

If you modify the value in the Completion Date
field in a record belonging to a family whose
caption contains the word Checklist, the value in
the Commencement Date field will be updated
automatically to match the value in the Completion
Date field. In other words, the commencement date
and completion date are always the same.
By default, this value is set to the date on which the
Inspection record is created. You can modify this
date to reflect the actual completion date, as
needed.
Completion
Date
Degradation
Mechanism
Date
The date on
which the
inspection
was
completed.
Character The
degradation
mechanism
that the
inspection is
meant to
prevent.
If the value in the Inspection Task Complete field

is set to True, when the Inspection record is saved,
the value in the Completion Date field will be used
to populate the Last Date field in the Task records
whose Record IDs appear in the Tasks Addressed
field.
When the value in the Completion Date field is
changed in a record belonging to a family whose
caption contains the word Checklist, the value in
the Commencement Date field will be updated
automatically to match the value in the Completion
Date field. In other words, the commencement date
and completion date are always the same.
The Degradation Mechanism field contains a list of
values, where that list is populated differently
depending upon the value that is stored in the Tasks
Addressed field, and in some cases, the subfamily
to which the Inspection record belongs.
Regardless of the Inspection subfamily to which

the Inspection record belongs, when the value in
the Tasks Addressed field identifies a Task record
that is linked to a Recommendation record that is
linked to an RBI Degradation Mechanisms record,
the Degradation Mechanism list displays a list of
RBI Degradation Mechanisms records that are
included in the RBI Analysis containing that RBI
Recommendation record. The Degradation
Mechanism list contains the values in the

Degradation Mechanism field in those RBI
Additionally, the Degradation Mechanism field is
populated by default using the RBI Degradation
Mechanisms record that is linked to the associated
If the value in the Tasks Addressed field is empty

or contains a value that identifies a Task record that
is not linked to a Recommendation record, the
Inspection record subfamily is used to determine
the System Code Table that will be used to supply
values to the Degradation Mechanism list.
If the record belongs to any Inspection

subfamily except the PRD Pop Test
Checklist subfamily, the Degradation
Mechanism field displays a list of values
that are stored in the System Code Table
MI_DEGRADATION_MECHANISM_TY
PES (Degradation Mechanism Types).
If the record belongs to the PRD Pop Test

Checklist subfamily, the Degradation
Mechanism field displays a list of values
that are stored in the System Code Table
MI_PDM_FILTER (MI RBI, Potential
Degradation Filter).
In this case, the Degradation Mechanism field is

not populated automatically.
The value that you select in this field is used in

RBI when you assign Inspection records to RBI
Degradation Mechanism Evaluation records.
Equipment
Character The state of
Operating State
the
equipment
This field displays a list of the IDs and

Descriptions of the System Codes that are stored in
the MI_EQUIP_OP_STATE (MI Inspection,
that is being
Equipment Operating State) System Code Table.
inspected.
This field displays a list of values based upon the
value that you selected in the Type of Inspection
field and the values that exist in the Inspection
Extent field in Inspection Strategy records.
Extent
The extent to
which the
Character inspection
was
performed.
Specifically, the Extent field displays a list of

values that exist in the Inspection Extent field in all
Inspection Strategy records whose Inspection Task
Type field contains the value that you selected in
the Type of Inspection field.
For example, if you selected CUI in the Type of
Inspection field, the Extent list would display the
values that are stored in the Inspection Extent field
in all Inspection Strategy records whose Inspection
Task Type field contains the value CUI.
Indicates
whether or
not the
Final Inspection
Logical Inspection
Lock
record has
reached a
final state.
Typically, the person who is reviewing the

Inspection Document (i.e., the person whose name
appears in the Reviewers Name field) will set this
field to True when the review is complete.
This field is populated with the Record ID of the
Functional Location record with which the
Inspection record is associated.
Functional
Location ID
Functional
The Record
ID of the
Functional
Location
Character record to
which the
Inspection
record is
linked.
Character A hyperlink
If you selected a Functional Location

record on the Equipment screen in the
Event Builder when you created the
Inspection record, this field will be
populated with the Record ID of that
If you selected an Equipment record on the

Equipment screen in the Event Builder
when you created the Inspection record,
this field will be populated with the Record
ID of the Functional Location record to
which that Equipment record is linked.
When you click this hyperlink, the Functional
Location ID
Link
Generate
Represented
Inspections
Inspection
Confidence
to the
Functional
Location
record to
which the
Inspection
record is
linked.
Location record will be opened in Record Manager.
Indicates
whether or When the value in this field is set to True,
Represented Inspections may be created.
not
Inspection
records will This field is enabled only when the Inspection
record is associated with an Equipment record that
be created
automatically is also associated with an Inspection Group and an
for equipment Inspection Task record was created from an RBI
Recommendation record that was created from that
that is
Inspection Group.
Logical associated
with
Inspection
This field is not available on datasheets that are
Groups that delivered for the External PRD Checklist and PRD
you create
Pop Test Checklist subfamilies and will not appear
using the
on the Inspection Finding Checklist page when you
Risk Based open an Inspection record belonging to one of
Inspection
these subfamilies.
(RBI)
module.
This field is populated automatically based upon
Character A value that the value that you selected in the Type of
indicates how Inspection field, the value that you selected in the
Extent field, and the values that exist in the
effective
Inspection Confidence field in Inspection Strategy
prior
inspections records.
were at
identifying Specifically, the Inspection Confidence field is
the
populated with the value that exists in the
degradation Inspection Confidence field in the Inspection
mechanism Strategy record whose:
and the rate
of
Inspection Task Type field contains the
degradation.
value that you selected in the Type of
Inspection field.
Inspection Extent field contains the value
that you selected in the Extent field.

Inspection field and RT or Strip 25% of the
Locations by Category in the Extent field, the
Inspection Confidence field would display the
value that is stored in the Inspection Confidence
field in the Inspection Strategy record whose
Inspection Task Type and Inspection Extent fields
contain those values.
This field is not available on the baseline
Inspection datasheets.
The value that you select in this field is used in
RBI when you assign Inspection records to RBI
Degradation Mechanism Evaluation records.
Descriptions of the System Codes that are stored in
the MI_STATUS (Status Codes - CORE) System
Code table.
Inspection
Document
Status
The status of
When an Inspection record is created, the value is
Character the Inspection
set to Draft (DRAFT) by default. You can change it
Document.
to Pending Approval when you are ready for the
reviewer to review it. Likewise, the reviewer can
change it to Approved (APPROVED) after they
have reviewed it.
A short
description of This field does not contain a value by default. You
Character
the
can type a value in this field manually.
inspection.
After you lock and Inspection record, you cannot
unlock it.
Inspection Lock Logical Indicates
whether or
not the
When an Inspection record is locked, all fields
Inspection
except for the following fields will be disabled:
record is
locked. When
Inspection Document Status
this field is
Inspection Lock
set to False,
the Inspection
Reviewers Name
record is
unlocked.
Reviewers Comments
When this
Inspection
Headline
Final Inspection Lock
Published
After the Inspection record is locked, you can flag

it for approval using the Inspection Document
field is set to
Status field. In addition, the record hierarchy
True, the
shortcut menu options that allow you to link new
Inspection
or existing Recommendation records to the
record is
Inspection Event record are disabled.
locked.
You can lock an Inspection record only if the
Inspection Report Owner field contains the first
and last name associated with your Security User
account.
Inspection
Reference
A value used
to identify the This value is generated automatically by the
Character
Inspection
Meridium APM System.
record.
The first and

last name of
This field contains a list of Security Users who
the Meridium
have been assigned the Inspector role. When you
Inspection
APM
Character
create the Inspection record, you will need to select
Report Owner
Security User
the name of the Meridium APM Security User who
who
performed the inspection.
performed the
inspection.
Inspection
Summary
Text
A summary
of the
inspection.
This field does not contain a value by default. You

can type in this field manually.
This field appears on datasheets configured for

Inspection families whose caption does not contain
Inspection Task Logical Indicates
Complete
whether or the word Checklist (e.g., General Inspection). For
Inspection families whose caption does contain the
not the
word Checklist, the value in this field is modified
Inspection
using a button on the Inspection Finding Checklist
record is
page, which is labeled Save & Close Inspection
closed and
the associated or Reopen Inspection depending upon the value
Task records that is populated in this field.
have been
updated.
When you close an Inspection record:
When this
field is set to
The value in the Completion Date field will
True, the
Inspection
record is
closed.
be used to populate the Last Date field in

the Task record whose Record ID appears
in the Tasks Addressed field.
If your database has been configured
correctly, a Task Execution record will be
created automatically and linked to the
Inspection and Inspection Task records
whose Record IDs appear in the Tasks
Addressed field. The value in the Date
Executed field in the Task Execution record
will be set automatically to the date on
which the Inspection record was closed.
Additionally, when you close an Inspection record

via the Inspection Finding Checklist page:
The fields that are displayed in the

Inspection Finding Checklist workspace
become disabled.
The Inspection Lock field in the Inspection
record is set automatically to True.
In order to close an Inspection record via the

Inspection Finding Checklist page, the Inspection
Report Owner field must contain a value and that
value must match the first and last name associated
with your Security User account.
Is a
Represented
Inspection
Logical Indicates
whether or
not the
Inspection
record is
associated
with a piece
of equipment
whose
inspection
requirements
are satisfied
by the
physical
inspection of
another piece
of equipment
This field is available only in the General

Inspection family (a subfamily of the Inspection
family). When the value in this field is set to True,
the Inspection record is considered a Represented
Inspection (i.e., its inspection requirements are
satisfied by the physical inspection of another
piece of equipment).
based on
Inspection
Group data.
Published
Indicates
whether or
not the
Inspection
Document is
published.
When an Inspection Document has been published,
Logical When this
it can be accessed from the Published Inspection
field is set to Documents page.
True, the
Inspection
Document is
considered
published.
Reason for
Inspection
Indicates why This field displays a list of the IDs and

the inspection Descriptions of the System Codes that are stored in
Character
was
the MI_EVENT_REASON (CORE, Reason for
performed. Event) System Code Table.
Represented
Inspections
Generated
Reviewers
Comments
Indicates
whether or
not additional
Inspection
records have
been created
automatically When the value in this field is set to True, the
for equipment Inspection record is associated with a
Logical that is
Representative RBI Component for which
associated
Represented Inspections exist for the related
with
Equipment records.
Represented
RBI
Components
based on
Inspection
Group data.
Text
The
reviewer's
comments
about the

can type a value in this field if desired.
Inspection
Document.
Reviewers
Name
The first and

last name of
the Meridium
This field contains a list of Security Users who
APM
have been assigned the Inspection Supervisor role.
Security User
Character
When you create the Inspection record, you should
that is
specify in this field the Security User who will be
responsible
responsible for reviewing the Inspection record.
for reviewing
the Inspection
Document.
This field displays a value based upon the value
that you selected in the Type of Inspection field,
the value that you selected in the Extent field, and
the values that exist in the Recommended
Inspection Scope field in Inspection Strategy
records.
Specifically, the Scope field displays the value that
exists in the Recommended Inspection Scope field
in all Inspection Strategy records whose:
Scope
Tasks
Addressed
Text
The
recommended
scope for this
type of
inspection.
Inspection Task Type field contains the

value that you selected in the Type of
Inspection field.
Inspection Extent field contains the value
that you selected in the Extent field.

Inspection field and RT or Strip 25% of the
Locations by Category in the Extent field, the
Scope field would display the value that is stored
in the Recommended Inspection Scope field in the
Inspection Strategy record whose Inspection Task
Type and Inspection Extent fields contain those
values.
You can select Task records associated with the
Character The tasks that Inspection record from the list of Task Record IDs:
are addressed
by the
When you create an Inspection record using
inspection.
the Event Builder, on the Task(s) Selection
screen.
When you open an existing Inspection
record:
o
Defined for a family whose caption

includes the word Checklist, on the
Inspection Finding Checklist page,
in the Tasks Addressed list.
Defined for a family whose caption

does not include the word Checklist,
in Record Manager, in the Tasks
Addressed list in the Inspection
datasheet.
This field displays a list of values that are stored in
the Task Type ID field in Task Types records whose
Reference field contains the value
INSPECTION_STRATEGY.
o
The values that appear in this list depend upon the

type of Inspection record that you are viewing. For
Inspection records belonging to:
Type of
Inspection
The PRD Pop Test Checklist subfamily, the

values in this list are populated using the
System Code Table
MI_PRD_INSPECTION_TYPE_FILTER
(PRD Inspection Type Filter).
Any Inspection subfamily except the PRD

Pop Test Checklist subfamily, this list is
populated with the Task Type ID value in
each Task Types record that does not
correspond with a value in the System Code
Table
(PRD Inspection Type Filter).
The type of
inspection
Character
that was
performed.
Bundle Sub-Inspection records store information about inspections that you perform on
tube bundle equipment. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description
of the fields that exist in the Bundle Sub-Inspection family. The information in the table
reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Action This
Inspection

Descriptions of the System Codes that are
The action that was
stored in the MI_BUNDLE_ACTION
performed on the
Character
(Inspection; Inspection/Maintenance Actions
tube bundle during
taken on an exchanger bundle) System Code
the inspection.
Table. The value No Action (NO ACTION) is
selected in the list by default.
Asset ID
The Record ID of
the Equipment
record to which the The Bundle Sub-Inspection datasheet caption
Character
Bundle Subfor this field is Bundle Tag.
Inspection record is
linked.
Bundle Type
This field is populated with a list of the IDs

and Descriptions of the System Codes that are
The type of the tube
Character
stored in the MI_BUNDLE_TYPE
bundle equipment.
(Inspection; Bundle Types) System Code
Table.
Bundle
Inspection
Summary
You can use this field to record any additional

A summary of the information about the inspection that is not
Text
inspection.
stored in another field in the Bundle SubInspection record.
This value is calculated using the following
Percentage
The percentage of formula:
Heat Transfer
the area of the tube
Area Loss
bundle that will
Percentage Heat Transfer Area Loss =
Number
experience heat
(Total Number of Tubes Plugged At
transfer loss due to Inspection End / Total Number of Tubes In
plugged tubes.
Bundle) x 100
This value is used to calculate the value in the
Percentage Heat Transfer Area Loss field.
Total
Number The number of
This field contains the value 0 (zero) by
Number Of
tubes in the tube
Tubes In
bundle.
default.
Bundle
If you enter a value in this field, save the
record, and then modify the value, the
following fields will be populated with the
value 0 (zero), because if you modify
the value in the Total Number Of
Tubes In Bundle field after saving the
record, you should re-enter values in
these fields:
Tubes Plugged At Inspection Start

Tubes Plugged During This Inspection
Tubes (Not Previously Plugged)

Replaced
Total Number of Tubes Replaced at

Inspection End
The value in this field must be greater than or

equal to the:
Value in the Tubes Plugged At

Inspection Start field.
Value in the Tubes Plugged During
This Inspection field.
Sum of the values in the Tubes

Plugged At Inspection Start and Tubes
Plugged During This Inspection fields.
This field is populated based upon the
following values:
Total
Number of
Tubes
Plugged At
Inspection
End

tubes in the tube
bundle that were
plugged at the end
of the inspection.
Tubes Plugged At Inspection Start

Tubes Plugged During Inspection
Depending upon which of these fields contain

values, this field is populated as follows:
If only the Tubes Plugged At

Inspection Start field contains a value,
the Total Number of Tubes Plugged At

Inspection End field is populated with
that value.
If the Tubes Plugged At Inspection
Start and Tubes Plugged During
Inspection fields contain values, the
Total Number of Tubes Plugged At
the sum of these values.
If all three fields contain values, the
Total Number of Tubes Plugged At
the sum of the values in the Tubes
Plugged At Inspection Start and Tubes
Plugged During Inspection minus the
value in the Tubes (Plugged At Start)
Replaced field.
This field is disabled when the Action This

Inspection field contains a value.
Total
Number The total number of default.
Number of
tubes in the tube
Tubes
bundle that have
This field is disabled when the Action This
Replaced at
been replaced at the Inspection field contains a value. When the
Inspection
end of a given
Action This Inspection field contains the
End
inspection.
value:
Partial Retube (PARTIAL RETUBE),

this field is populated with the sum of
the values in the Tubes (Plugged At
Start) Replaced and Tubes (Not
Previously Plugged) Replaced fields.
If only one of these fields contains a
value, the Total Number of Tubes
Replaced at Inspection End field is
populated with that value.
Bundle Replaced (BUNDLE
REPLACED) or Total Retube (TOTAL
RETUBE), this field is populated with
the value in the Total Number of Tubes
In Bundle field.
Tubes Plugged (TUBES PLUGGED)
or No Action (NO ACTION), this field

is populated with the value 0 (zero).
default.
Tubes
Plugged At
Inspection
Start
The value in this field must be:

The number of
tubes in the tube
Number bundle that were
plugged before the
inspection started.
Greater than or equal to the value in

the Tubes (Plugged At Start) Replaced
field.
Less than or equal to the value in the
Total Number Of Tubes In Bundle
field.
This value is used to calculate the value in the

Percentage Heat Transfer Area Loss field.
Tubes
(Plugged At
Start)
Replaced
Tubes
Plugged
During This
Inspection
Tubes (Not
Previously
Plugged)
Replaced
The number of
tubes in the tube
bundle that were
plugged before the
Number
inspection started
but were replaced
during the
inspection.
This field is enabled only when the value in

the Action This Inspection field is Partial
Retube (PARTIAL RETUBE). This value
must be less than or equal to the value in the
Tubes Plugged At Inspection Start field. This
field contains the value 0 (zero) by default.
This field is enabled only when the Action
This Inspection field contains a value other
than No Action (NO ACTION). This field
contains the value 0 (zero) by default.
The number of
The value in this field must be less than or
tubes in the tube
equal to the value in the Total Number Of
Number bundle that were
Tubes In Bundle field.
plugged during the
inspection.
When the value in the Action This Inspection
field is Bundle Replaced (BUNDLE
REPLACED), this field is populated with the
value 0 (zero).
tubes in the tube
bundle that were
not plugged before
the inspection
started but were
This field is enabled only when the value in

the Action This Inspection field is Partial
Retube (PARTIAL RETUBE). This field
contains the value 0 (zero) by default.
replaced during the

inspection.

PRD Pop Test Checklist records store information about the external functional
inspections that you perform on pressure relief devices (PRDs). The following table
provides an alphabetical list of the fields that are unique to this type of Inspection record.
All of the fields listed in this table appear on the datasheet that is delivered for the PRD
Pop Test Checklist family. For information about fields that are common to all Inspection
records, see the Inspection family field description topic.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
The pressure at
As Found
which the PRD This field accepts non-negative, numeric values only
Pop
Number
opens at the time (e.g., 10).
Pressure
of the inspection.
The pressure at
which the PRD
As Left
opens after
This field accepts non-negative, numeric values only
Pop
Number maintenance has
(e.g., 10).
Pressure
been performed
on the PRD (e.g.,
cleaning).
The pressure at
Design
which the PRD This field accepts non-negative, numeric values only
Set
Number
was designed to (e.g., 10).
Pressure
open.
On the datasheet, this field appears as list that
Leak
Character The type of leak contains the following values:
Category
that is associated
with the PRD.
Minor
Moderate
Stuck Open
This list is populated with the descriptions of the

MI_INSPECTION_LEAK_CATEGORY
(Inspection Leak Category) System Code Table.
This field is enabled and can retain a value only
when the Leak Test Results field contains the value
Leak.
On the datasheet, this field appears as a list that
contains the following values:
No Leak
Indicates whether
Leak
or not there was
Leak Test
a leak detected
Character
Results
on the PRD
This list is populated with the descriptions of
during the
referenced System Codes for the
inspection.
MI_INSP_RESULTS_LEAK System Code that is
stored in the System Code Table with the ID
MI_RBI_REFERENCES.
contains the following values:
Indicates whether
Pass
or not the PRD
Fail
Over
passed the
Pressure
Character pressure test that
Test
This list is populated with the descriptions of
you performed
Results
referenced System Codes for the
during the
MI_INSP_RESULTS_OVER_PRESSURE System
inspection.
Code that is stored in the System Code Table with
the ID MI_RBI_REFERENCES.
General Finding
General Finding records store information about the results of an inspection at the
subcomponent level. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of
the fields that exist in the General Finding family. The information in the table reflects
the baseline state and behavior of these fields. This list is not comprehensive.
Field
Action Taken
Code
Data
Type
Behavior and Usage
The action
taken to address Descriptions of the System Codes that are stored
Character
the finding of in the MI_Action (CORE, Actions Taken) System
an inspection. Code Table.
Action Taken
Description
Text
Deterioration
Mechanism
Description
A description of
the action taken You can use this field to record any additional
to address the information about the action that is not stored in
finding of an
another field in the General Finding record.
inspection.
The
Degradation
Mechanism that
Character
was observed
during the
inspection.

Descriptions of the System Codes that are stored
in the MI_DAMAGE_MECHANISM
(Inspection, Damage Mechanism) System Code
Table. The datasheet caption for this field is As
Found Degradation Mechanism.
Deterioration
Mode
How the
Degradation
Character Mechanism was
in the MI_DAMAGE_MODE (Inspection,
observed during
Damage Mode) System Code Table.
the inspection.
This field contains the value that is stored in the
RBI Degradation Mechanism field in the
Expected
Inspection Method record that corresponds with
RBI
the selection in the Inspection Method Item field.
Degradation
The Potential
Mechanism
Degradation
If the Inspection Method record that corresponds
Mechanism
with the selection in the Inspection Method Item
Character
associated with
field does not contain a value in the RBI
the Inspection
Degradation Mechanism field, this field does not
Method Item.
contain a value.
This field is always disabled.
Finding
Summary
Text
A summary of You can use this field to record any additional

the findings of information about the findings that are not stored
the inspection. in another field in the General Finding record.
Headline
Character A short
description of
the findings of can type a value in this field if desired.
the inspection.
Inspection
Method Item
The Inspection
Method that
corresponds
with the
Character Inspection
Profile for
which findings
are being
recorded.
Inspection
Profile Item
The Inspection
Profile that
represents the This field is populated with a list of the Inspection
Character subcomponent Profiles that you have defined for the particular
for which
Inspection Scope.
findings are
being recorded.
Predictable
Indicates
whether or not
past events
Character could have
predicted the
findings of the
inspection.

in the MI_YES_NO (MI Core, Yes-No) System
Code Table.
Predicted
Indicates
whether or not
Character the findings
were predicted
by a past event.

in the MI_YES_NO (MI Core, Yes-No) System
Code Table.
RBI
Component
Character The RBI

Component that
is associated
with the
Inspection
Profile Item.

in the
(Inspection Method Category) System Code
Table. This field is enabled only when the
Inspection Profile Item field contains a value.
This field contains the value that is stored in the

RBI Component field in the Inspection Profile
record that corresponds with the selection in the
Inspection Profile Item field.
If the Inspection Profile record that corresponds
with the selection in the Inspection Profile Item
field does not contain a value in the RBI
Component field, this field does not contain a
value.
This field is always disabled.
Type
The type of
inspection
This field displays a list of the IDs of the System
findings for
Codes that are stored in the MI_FINDING_TYPE
Character which you are
(MI Inspection, Provides categories for an
creating a
inspection finding) System Code Table.
General Finding
record.
Checklist Finding
Checklist Finding records store information about the results of an inspection at the
subcomponent level. These records are used on the Inspection Finding Checklist page,
which appears when you create or open an Inspection record belonging to an Inspection
family whose caption contains the word Checklist.
The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist in
the Checklist Finding family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, each section corresponds to a cate

Category Character The category is labeled with the description of a System Code that belongs to one of the fo
into which the System Code Tables:
subcomponent
can be
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (A
grouped (e.g.,
Internal Checklist Finding Section)
Linings).
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_EXCHANGER_CHECKLIST_FINDING
(API 510 Internal Exchanger Checklist Finding Section)
MI_API_570_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (
External Checklist Finding Section)
MI_API_653_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (
External Checklist Finding Section)
MI_API_653_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (A
Internal Checklist Finding Section)
MI_EXTERNAL_PRD_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (Exte
PRD Checklist Finding Section)
MI_PRD_PT_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (PRD Pop Test

Checklist Finding Sections)
The specific sections that are displayed on the page are based upon the famil
which the Inspection record belongs.
Name
For example, if the Inspection record belongs to the API 510 Internal Check
family, the sections that are displayed are labeled with the descriptions of the
Codes that belong to the
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (API 510
Checklist Finding Section) System Code Table.
On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, in each finding section, the first c
displays a subset of values that are stored in the
MI_CHECKLIST_FINDING_ITEMS (Checklist Finding Items) System Co
The specific values that are displayed in each finding section are based upon
family to which the Inspection record belongs, the System Codes that belong
A short
corresponding System Code Table, and the System Codes that those System
description of
reference.
the item you
were
For example, suppose you are viewing an Inspection record belonging to the
inspecting or
Internal Checklist family. This family corresponds to the
Character
the condition
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS (API 510
for which you
Checklist Finding Section) System Code Table, which contains various Syst
were looking
Codes, such as Head. Each of the System Codes belonging to this System Co
(e.g., Anchor
references another System Code, such as Blistering.
Bolts, Leaks).
Using this example, on the Inspection Finding Checklist page, you would se
Head section, which would contain a row with the value Blistering in the fir
column.
Value
The specific
On the Inspection Finding Checklist page, in each finding section, the Findin
finding for the
column displays a list of values that are stored in the
Character inspected item
MI_CHECKLIST_FINDING_TYPES (Checklist Finding Types) System Co
or condition
Table.
(e.g., Yes).
Work Pack
Work Pack records store preparation information about inspection work that needs to be
performed for equipment and/or locations. The following table provides an alphabetical
list and description of the fields that exist in the Work Pack family. The information in the
table reflects the baseline state and behavior of these fields.
Data
Type
Description
Work Pack
Description
Character
This is a required field. You must enter

A description of the Work
a value in this field before you can save
Pack record
a Work Pack record.
Work Pack
ID
Character

Work Pack record
Field
Preparation
Details
Text
Behavior and Usage
This is a required field. You must enter

a value in this field before you can save
a Work Pack record.
You should enter any preparation details
about the inspections in this field.
Preparation information
For example, if a unit needs to be shut
about the inspection work
down for an inspection associated with
associated with the Work
a Work Pack record, you might type the
Pack record
value Unit A shut down required in this
field.

Time Based Inspection Interval records store information about the inspection intervals
that you define when you create time-based inspection settings. The following table
provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Time Based
Inspection Interval family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state and
behavior of these fields. All fields in the family appear on the Time Based Inspection
Interval datasheet by default.
Field
Data
Description
Behavior and Usage
Type
Description
Text
Interval
Task Type
Details about the

inspection interval.
This field is populated with the value that

you type in the Description cell on the
Time-Based Inspection Settings page when
you create or modify time-based inspection
settings.
The interval by which

the associated piece of
Number
equipment should be
inspected, in months.

you type in the Interval (Months) cell on
the Time-Based Inspection Settings page
when you create or modify time-based
The type of inspection

that should be performed
on the piece of
Character
equipment at the interval
indicated in the Interval
field.

is stored in the Task Type ID field in the
Task Types record associated with the
time-based inspection setting (i.e., the task
type for which an inspection interval is
defined on the Time-Based Inspection
Settings page).

Time Based Inspection Setting records store information about the Equipment record,
Functional Location record, and/or Criticality Calculator RBI Components family that is
associated with the time-based inspection settings that you have defined. The following
table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that exist for the Time
Based Inspection Setting family. The information in the table reflects the baseline state
and behavior of these fields. All fields in the family appear on the Time Based Inspection
Setting datasheet by default.
Field
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
Component Character The caption of the Criticality This field is populated with the value
Family
Calculator RBI Components defined in the Component Family
family that is associated with cell on the Time-Based Inspection
the Time Based Inspection

Setting record.
Settings page when you create or

modify time-based inspection
settings.
Equipment
ID

Number associated with the Time
Based Inspection Setting
record.
This field is populated with the value

defined in the Equipment ID cell on
the Time-Based Inspection Settings
page when you create or modify
time-based inspection settings.
Unit

Functional Location record
Number that is associated with the
Setting record.
This field is populated with the value

defined in the Unit cell on the TimeBased Inspection Settings page when
you create or modify time-based
Inspection Profile
Inspection Profile records represent subcomponents of a piece of equipment on which
inspections are performed. The following table provides an alphabetical list and
description of the fields that exist in the Inspection Profile family. All fields in the
Inspection Profile family, with the exception of those noted in the table, appear on the
Inspection Profile datasheet (displayed on the Inspection Profile tab on the Inspection
Profile page), by default.
Field
Item
Category
Data
Type
Description
The type of
subcomponent
(e.g., pipes) that
exists on the
Character
piece of
equipment
needing
inspection.
Behavior and Usage

contains the System Code IDs and Descriptions in
the MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY
(Inspection, Profile Category) System Code Table.
The Profile Configuration setting determines how
this field will be populated. You can modify the
value in this field using the datasheet.
Item
Character A description of You can specify a value for this field using the
Description
the
datasheet.
subcomponent.
Item ID
Character
The ID of the
subcomponent.

the value in the Item Category field. You can
modify the value in the Item ID field using the
datasheet.
The Entity Key

of the Equipment
By default, this field is not displayed on the
Predecessor
record to which
Number
datasheet and is populated automatically when you
Entity Key
the Inspection
create a new Inspection Profile record.
Profile record is
linked.
The Record ID of
contains the Record IDs of all Criticality
the Criticality
Calculator RBI Components records that are
Calculator RBI
linked to the associated Equipment record. This
RBI
Components
field is null, by default.
Character
Component
record that is
associated with
This field is enabled only when the Risk Based
the Inspection
Inspection license is active.
Profile record.
The Criticality
Calculator RBI
RBI
Components
Component Character subfamily that is
Family
associated with
the Inspection
Profile record.
Sequence

contains the captions of all Criticality Calculator
RBI Components subfamilies that exist in the
baseline Meridium APM database. This field is
populated automatically when you select a value
in the RBI Component list. You can modify the
selection in this list using the datasheet.
The order in
which the
subcomponent
should be
You can specify a value for this field using the
Number inspected,
datasheet.
relative to other
subcomponents
on the piece of
equipment.
Inspection Method
Inspection Method records represent the method that will be used to inspect a
subcomponent of a piece of equipment that is represented by a linked Inspection Profile
record. The following table provides an alphabetical list and description of the fields that
exist in the Inspection Method family. All fields in the Inspection Method family, with the
exception of those noted in the table, appear on the Inspection Method datasheet
(displayed on the Inspection Method tab on the Inspection Profile page), by default.
Field
Category
Data
Type
Description
Behavior and Usage
The method that

should be used
to inspect the
subcomponent
contains the System Code IDs and Descriptions in
that is
the MI_INSPECTION_METHOD_CATEGORY
represented by
Character
(Inspection Method Category) System Code Table.
an Inspection
The Method Configuration setting determines how
Profile record to
this field will be populated. You can modify the
which the
value in this field using the datasheet.
Inspection
Method record is
linked.
A description of
You can specify a value for this field using the
Description Character the Inspection
datasheet.
Method.
ID
The ID of the
Character inspection
method.

the value in the Category field. You can modify
the value in the ID field using the datasheet.
The Entity Key

of the
Equipment
record that is
Predecessor
linked to the
By default, this field does not appear on the
Asset Entity Number Inspection
datasheet and is populated automatically when
Key
Profile record to you create an Inspection Method record.
which the
Inspection
Method record is
linked.
The Entity Key

of the Inspection
Predecessor
Profile record to By default, this field does not appear on the
Profile
Number which the
datasheet and is populated automatically when
Entity Key
Inspection
you create an Inspection Method record.
Method record is
linked.
contains the Record IDs of all Potential
Degradation Mechanisms records that are linked
The Potential
to the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
Degradation
record that is associated with the Inspection
RBI
Mechanisms
Profile record to which the Inspection Method
Degradation Character record that is
Mechanism
associated with record is linked.
the Inspection
Method record. You can specify a value for this field using the
datasheet.
System Code Tables Used by Inspection

Management
The following table provides a list of the System Code Tables that are used by Inspection
Management.
Table ID
INSM
INST
Table Description
Inspection Interval Types
Inspection Status Code
MI_ACTION
CORE, Actions Taken
MI_API_510_EXTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
API 510 External Checklist Finding

API 510 Internal Checklist Finding
MI_API_510_INTERNAL_EXCHANGER_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SE API 510 Internal Exchanger Checkl

Finding Section
MI_API_653_INTERNAL_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
MI_BUNDLE_ACTION
MI_BUNDLE_TYPE
MI_BUSINESS_IMPACT

API 653 Internal Checklist Finding
Inspection; Inspection / Maintenanc

taken on a exchanger bundle
Inspection; Bundle Types
CORE, Impact to company's produc

carrying out equipment work
MI_CHECKLIST_FINDING_ITEMS
Checklist Finding Items
MI_CHECKLIST_FINDING_TYPES
Checklist Finding Types
MI_COMPLIANCE_STANDARD
CORE, Compliance Standard
MI_CORE_REFERENCES
CORE, Used to limit values by com

components
MI_DAMAGE_MECHANISM
Inspection, Damage Mechanisms
MI_DAMAGE_MODE
Inspection, Damage Mode
Degradation Mechanism Types
MI_EQUIP_OP_STATE
MI Inspection, Equipment Operatin
MI_EVENT_REASON
CORE, Reason for Event
MI_EXTERNAL_PRD_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
External PRD Checklist Finding Sec
MI_FINDING_TYPE
MI Inspection, Provides categories f

inspection finding
MI_FREQUENCIES
CORE, Frequencies
MI_INSPECTION_METHOD_REFERENCE
MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_CATEGORY
MI_INSPECTION_METHOD_CAT
MI Inspection, Stores system codes
represent Inspection Methods
Inspection, Profile Category
MI_INSPECTION_PROFILE_REFERENCE
MI Inspection, Stores the equipmen

ID's in order to limit the Profile Cat
shown for a piece of equipment. Bu
implementation when equipment mo
known
MI_INSPECTION_REFERENCES
MI Inspection, Inspection Reference

Inspection - Used to limit values in
Code Tables to values used in the in
solution
MI_INSPECTION_STRATEGY
MI Inspection Strategy
MI_PDM_FILTER
MI RBI, Potential Degradation Filt
MI_PRD_PT_CHECKLIST_FINDING_SECTIONS
PRD Inspection Type Filter
PRD Pop Test Checklist Finding Se
MI_PRIORITY
CORE, baseline priority types
MI_RECOMMENDATION_TYPE
CORE, Recommendation Type
MI_RESOURCE_ROLE
List of user roles
MI_STATUS
Status Codes - CORE
MI_TASK_TYPE_REFERENCE
CORE, Reference values to limit tas

lists when creating ta
MI_TEST_MEDIA
Fluids used for testing
MI_YES_NO
MI Core, Yes-No
URL Paths for Inspection Management

The following table lists and describes the paths for the Inspection Management module.
Note that to construct a valid URL, you must prepend meridium:// to the path. In some
cases, you must define parameters following the path.
Feature
URL Path
Description
Inspection Start
Inspection
Page
Displays the Inspection Start Page. This

path does not accept parameters.
Inspection
Administration
Page
Displays the Inspection Administration

page. This path accepts parameters.
Inspection/Administration
Inspection Alerts
Inspection/Alerts
Page
Executes the All Inspection Alerts query

and displays the results on the
Inspection Alerts page. This path does
not accept parameters.
Event Builder
Displays the Event Builder, where you

can create a new Inspection record. This
path accepts the same parameters as the
Event Builder URL. Note that when you
use the Inspection/Builder path, the list
of families on the Event screen is limited
to only Inspection families that are
related to the selected Equipment or
Inspection/Builder
Inspection
Finding Checklist Inspection/ChecklistFinding
Page
Serves as the root address for accessing

the Inspection Finding Checklist page.
This path requires parameters.
Inspection
Configuration
Page
Inspection/Configuration
Displays the Inspection Configuration

page, where you can configure
administrative settings for Inspection.
This path does not accept parameters.
Search Page
Inspection/Finder
Displays the Search page. This path

accepts the same parameters as search
URLs.
Displays the Inspection Scope Builder,

where you can select the Task record,
Equipment record, Inspection Profile
Inspection Scope Inspection/InspectionScoping records, and Inspection Method records
that are included in the Inspection Scope
that you want to define. This path
accepts parameters.
Manage Work
Inspection/ManageWorkPacks Displays the Manage Work Packs page,
Packs Page
where you can select the Work Pack

record that you want to open. This path
does not accept parameters.
Work Pack Page Inspection/EditWorkPack
Serves as the path for URLs that provide

access to specific Work Pack records.
Inspection
Management
Inspection/Manage

access to managing Inspection
components. This path requires
parameters.
Inspection/ProposedTasks

access to managing Inspection Task
records. This path requires parameters.
Inspection Task
Records
Published
Inspection
Inspection/Published
Documents Page
Runs the Published Documents query

and displays the results on the Published
Inspection Documents page. Note that
while this URL does not require that you
define parameters, if the Published
Documents query contains one or more
prompts, you can pass in values for the
prompts via this URL.
Inspection
Queries
Inspection/Query
Runs the specified query and displays

the results in Inspection Management.
Inspection/Report

access to Inspection reports. This path
requires parameters.
Inspection
Reports
Human Resource
Inspection/Resources
Records

access to Inspection resources. This path
Review and
Approve
Inspection/Review
Inspection
Documents Page
Displays the Review and Approve

Inspection Documents page, where you
can access Inspection records that are
ready to be reviewed and approved.
Inspection
Displays the Inspection Manage
Inspection/Search
Manage
Documents Page
Documents page, where you can manage

Inspection Documents.
Inspection
History
Inspection/Summary
Summary Query
Page
Runs the Inspection History Summary

query and displays the results on the
Inspection History Summary Query
page.
TM Analysis
Page
Serves as the path for accessing the TM

Analysis page for a specified Equipment
Inspection/ThicknessAnalysis
or Functional Location record. This path
Parameters for the Manage Inspection

URL
The path meridium://Inspection/Manage serves as the starting point for constructing a
URL that will create a new Inspection Document, display the inspection history, or
provide access to Inspection Profiles. The following table lists and describes the
parameters that are accepted by the path. Note that a link constructed from the path with
no parameters will be nonfunctional.
Parameter Name
EquipmentKey
Description
Accepted Value(s) Notes
Specifies the
Equipment or
Functional
Location
record whose
inspections
you want to
manage.
The Entity Key of

the desired
Equipment or
This parameter is required.
Functional
Location record.
The Family Key

InspectionFamilyKey Specifies the of the desired
family of the family.
type of
Inspection
record that
When Mode=CreateDocument,
you can optionally use this
parameter to create a specific type
of Inspection record. If you do not
specify the InspectionFamilyKey
you want to
create.
InspectionKey
Mode
parameter when using the

CreateDocument value, you will
be prompted to select a valid
Inspection Event family before
proceeding to create the
Inspection record.
Specifies the
Inspection
The Entity Key of
record that
the desired
you want to Inspection record.
None
view.
CreateDocument:
Generates a new Inspection
record that is linked to the
record with the Entity Key
that is specified by the
EquipmentKey parameter.
EditDocuments: Passes the

specified EquipmentKey to
the Summary Query
configured on the Inspection
Configuration page and
displays the results of the
Summary Query for the
specified Equipment or
Functional Location record on
the Inspection History
Summary Query page.
Profiles: Displays the

Manage Equipment Profiles
page, where you can manage
the Inspection Profile of the
Equipment record with the
Entity Key that is specified by
the EquipmentKey parameter.
Specifies the
CreateDocument
type of
operation
which should EditDocuments
occur.
Profiles
Examples of the Manage Inspection

URL
meridium://Inspection/Manage?
EquipmentKey=1234567&Mode=CreateDocument
Creates a new Inspection record that is linked to the Equipment record with the Entity
Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/Manage?
EquipmentKey=1234567&Mode=CreateDocument&InspectionFamilyKey=1234
5
Creates a new Inspection record in the family with the Family Key 12345. The Inspection
record will be linked to the Equipment record with the Entity Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/Manage?EquipmentKey=1234567&Mode=EditDocuments
Allows you to edit an Inspection record that is linked to the Equipment record with the
Entity Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/Manage?EquipmentKey=1234567&Mode=Profiles
Displays the Inspection Profile for the Equipment record with the Entity Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/Manage?InspectionKey=1234567
Displays the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567.
Parameters for the Inspection

Administration Page URL
There is one root URL associated with the Inspection Administration page:
meridium://Inspection/Administration. A link constructed from the path alone will display
the Inspection Administration page. The following table lists the parameter accepted by
the path.
Parameter
Name
Description
Specifies that the Time-Based Inspection Settings

page should be displayed.
View
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
TimeBased
None
Examples of the Inspection

Administration Page URL
meridium://Inspection/Administration?View=TimeBased
Displays the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
Parameters for the Inspection Finding

Checklist Page URL
There is one root URL associated with the Inspection Finding Checklist page:
meridium://Inspection/ChecklistFinding. The following table lists and describes the
parameters that are accepted by the path. Note that a link constructed from the path with
no parameters will be nonfunctional.
Parameter Name
Description
Specifies the Entity Key of the

Inspection record that you want
ChecklistFamilyEntityKey
to view on the Inspection
Finding Checklist page.
ExplorerPath
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
The Entity Key

This
of the desired
parameter is
Inspection
required.
record.
Specifies the Catalog path to the The Catalog
None
configured explorer that is

defined for the family of the
Inspection record that you want
to view on the Inspection
Finding Checklist page.
path to the
desired
configured
explorer.
Examples of the Inspection Finding

Checklist Page URL
meridium://Inspection/ChecklistFinding?ChecklistFamilyEntityKey=123456
Displays on the Inspection Finding Checklist page the Inspection record with the Entity
Key 123456.
meridium://Inspection/ChecklistFinding?
ChecklistFamilyEntityKey=123456&ExplorerPath=Public\Meridium\Modules\In
spection\Explorers\Inspection Explorer
Displays on the Inspection Finding Checklist page the Inspection record with the Entity
Key 123456. The contents of the record hierarchy are controlled by the configured
explorer with the name Inspection Explorer.
Parameters for the Inspection Scope

URL
There is one root URL associated with an Inspection Scope:
meridium://Inspection/InspectionScoping. A link constructed from the path alone will
open the Inspection Scope Builder, where you can select the Task record, Equipment
record, Inspection Profile records, and Inspection Method records that are included in the
Inspection Scope that you want to define. The following table lists and describes the
parameters that are accepted by the path.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted Value(s) Notes
Specifies the Equipment

record that you want to
EquipmentKey
include in the Inspection
Scope.
The Entity Key of

the desired
None
Equipment
record.
If you use the TaskEntityKEy
parameter, you must also use
Specifies the Task record The Entity Key of
the EquipmentKey parameter.
TaskEntityKey that you want to include the desired Task
in the Inspection Scope. record.
Examples of the Inspection Scope URL
meridium://Inspection/InspectionScoping
Displays the Welcome screen of the Inspection Scope Builder. You can use the Inspection
Scope Builder to select the Equipment record, Task record, Inspection Profile records,
and Inspection Method records that you want to include in the Inspection Scope.
meridium://Inspection/InspectionScoping?EquipmentKey=1234567
Displays the Select New or Existing Task screen of the Inspection Scope Builder, where
you can select the Task record that you want to include in the Inspection Scope. The
Equpiment record with the Entity Key 1234567 will be included in the Inspection Scope
automatically.
meridium://Inspection/InspectionScoping?
EquipmentKey=1234567&TaskEntityKey=7654321
Displays the Inspection Scope page, where you can define the Inspection Scope that
includes the Equipment record with the Entity Key 1234567 and the Task record that
includes the Entity Key 7654321.
Manage Work Packs Page URL

There is one root URL associated with the Manage Work Packs page:
meridium://Inspection/ManageWorkPacks. A link constructed from the path alone will
open the Manage Work Packs page, where you can select the Work Pack record that you
want to open. This URL does not accept any parameters.
Inspection Work Pack Page URL

There is one root URL associated with the Inspection Work Pack page:
meridium://Inspection/EditWorkPack. This URL requires the parameter WorkPackKey,
which specifies the Entity Key of the Work Pack record that you want to view. A link
constructed from the path alone will be nonfunctional.
Parameters for the Proposed Tasks URL

The path meridium://Inspection/ProposedTasks serves as the starting point for
constructing a URL that will access Inspection Task records. The following table lists and
describes the parameters that are accepted by the path. Note that a link constructed from
the path with NO parameters will be nonfunctional.
Parameter Name
EquipmentKey
EquipmentTasks
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
Use this parameter if you

Specifies the Equipment The Entity Key
want to view all the Task
or Functional Location of the desired
records that are linked to a
record that is linked to Equipment or
specific Equipment or
the Task records that
Functional
Functional Location
you want to manage.
Location record.
record.
TRUE
This parameter must be
used in conjunction with
Specifies that you want
the InpsectionKey
parameter.
to view the Task records

Equipment record to
which the specified
Inspection record is
linked.
You should use this

parameter if the specified
Inspection record is linked
to both an Equipment
record and a Functional
Location record.
If the specified Inspection
record is linked to either
an Equipment record or a
Functional Location but
not both, you can omit this
parameter.
This parameter also
accepts the value False,
but specifying False has
the same effect as
omitting the parameter.
This parameter must be
used in conjunction with
the InpsectionKey
parameter.
LocationTasks
Specifies that you want

to view the Task records
Functional Location
TRUE
record to which the
specified Inspection
record is linked.
You should use this

parameter if the specified
Inspection record is linked
to both an Equipment
record and a Functional
Location record.
If the specified Inspection
record is linked to either
an Equipment record or a
Functional Location but
not both, you can omit this
parameter.
This parameter also
accepts the value False,
but specifying False has
the same effect as
omitting the parameter.
Specifies whether all

strategy rules should be
executed for the
ExecuteAllStrategies
equipment or location
before redirecting to the
Task List page.
Specifies the Inspection
record whose associated
Task records you want
to manage.
InspectionKey
TRUE
The Entity Key

of the desired
Inspection
record.
If you omit this parameter,

strategy rules will not be
executed.
None
Examples of the Proposed Tasks URL
meridium://Inspection/ProposedTasks?EquipmentKey=1234567
Opens the Task List page, displaying the Task records that are linked to the Equipment
record with the Entity Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/ProposedTasks?InspectionKey=1234567
Opens the Task List page, displaying Task records that are linked to the Equipment
records that are linked to the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567.
meridium://Inspection/ProposedTasks?
InspectionKey=1234567&EquipmentTasks=TRUE
Opens the Task List page, displaying Task records that are linked to the Equipment record
that is linked to the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567.
InspectionKey=1234567&LocationTasks=TRUE
Opens the Task List page, displaying Task records that are linked to the Functional
Location record that is linked to the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567.
InspectionKey=1234567&ExecuteAllStrategies=TRUE
If the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567 is linked to an Equipment or
Functional Location record that is linked to one or more Task records, executes all
strategy rules associated with the Equipment or Functional Location record and
then displays the associated Task records on the Task List page.
If the Inspection record with the Entity Key 1234567 is not linked to an
Equipment or Functional Location record that is linked to one or more Task
records, displays a message indicating that Tasks cannot be accessed because
none are associated with the associated Equipment or Functional Location record.
EquipmentKey=1234567&ExecuteAllStrategies=TRUE
If the Equipment record with the Entity Key 1234567 is linked to one or more
Task records, executes all strategy rules associated with the Equipment record and
then displays the associated Task records on the Task List page.
If the Equipment record with the Entity Key 1234567 is not linked to one or more
Task records, executes all strategy rules associated with the Equipment record and
then displays all Task records in the database on the Task List page.
Parameters for the Inspection Query

URL
A link constructed from the address meridium://Inspection/Query will run the query
specified by the Path parameter and display the results in Inspection Management.
Parameter
Name
Path
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Specifies the query that The Catalog path and file

you want to run.
name of the desired query.
Notes
This parameter is
required.
Note: In addition to the Path parameter, you can include any prompt IDs and values as
parameters for the specified query.
Examples of the Inspection Query URL
meridium://Inspection/Query?
Path=Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\InspectionQuery
Runs the query InspectionQuery, which is stored in the Catalog folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection.
Parameters for the Inspection Search

URL
The path meridium://Inspection/Search lets you construct links that will display a list of
queries that you can run. In most cases, the queries will come from the public Inspection
folder or from a user's personal Inspection folder. The following table lists and describes
the parameters that are accepted by this path.
Parameter Description Accepted Value(s) Notes

Name
Mode
Mode
Specifies
the list of
queries that EditDocuments
you want to
display.
If Mode=EditDocuments, the link will

display the Inspection Manage Documents
page, where you will see a list of queries that
exist in the Catalog folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection
Management\Document Queries and in the
current user's personal
\\Inspection\Document Queries folder.
Specifies
Profiles
the list of
queries that
you want to
If Mode=Profiles, the link will display the

Inspection Manage Profiles page, where you
will see a list of queries that exist in the
Catalog folder
display.
Management\Profile Queries and in the
current user's personal \\Inspection\Profile
Queries folder.
Mode
If Mode=ReviewDocuments, the link will

display the Inspection Manage Documents
Specifies
page, where you will see a list of queries that
the list of
exist in the Catalog folder
queries that ReviewDocuments
you want to
Management\Document Queries and in the
display.
current user's personal
\\Inspection\Document Queries folder.
Mode
Specifies
the list of
queries that Resources
you want to
display.
If Mode=Resources, the link will display the

Inspection Manage Resources page, where
you will see a list of queries that exist in the
Catalog folder
Management\Resource Queries and in the
current user's personal \\Inspection\Resource
Queries folder.
Mode
Specifies
the list of
queries that Tasks
you want to
display.
If Mode=Tasks, the link will display the

Inspection Manage Tasks page, where you
will see a list of queries that exist in the
Catalog folder
Management\Task Queries and in the current
user's personal Inspection\Task Queries
folder.
Mode
Specifies
Reports
the list of
queries that
you want to
display.
If Mode=Reports, the link will display the

Inspection Reports page, where you will see
a list of queries that exist in the Catalog
folder
Management\Reports.
Examples of the Inspection Search URL
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=EditDocuments
Displays the Inspection Manage Documents page, which displays searches and queries
that exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection
Management\Document Queries and the current user's personal \\Inspection\Document
Queries folder.
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=Profiles
Displays the Inspection Manage Profiles page, which displays searches and queries that
exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection Management\Profile
Queries and the current user's personal \\Inspection\Profile Queries folder.
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=ReviewDocuments
Displays the Inspection Manage Documents page, which displays searches and queries
that exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection
Management\Document Queries and the current user's personal \\Inspection\Document
Queries folder.
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=Resources
Displays the Inspection Manage Resource page, which displays searches and queries that
exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection Management\Resource
Queries and the current user's personal \\Inspection\Resource Queries folder.
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=Tasks
Displays the Inspection Manage Tasks page, which displays searches and queries that
exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection Management\Task
Queries and the current user's personal \\Inspection\Task Queries folder.
meridium://Inspection/Search?Mode=Reports
Displays the Inspection Manage Reports page, which displays searches and queries that
exist in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection Management\Reports.
Parameters for the Inspection Reports

URL
The URL for accessing Inspection reports is meridium://Inspection/Report. This path

accepts one parameter that lets you specify the Inspection Event record for which you
want to open a report.
Parameter
Name
Accepted
Value(s)
Description
Specifies the Inspection record for which you want to

open an Inspection report. The Meridium APM sytem
InspectionKey will open the default report for the Inspection family
of the specified entity, as defined in the Configuration
The Entity Key

of the desired
Inspection
record.
Examples of the Inspection Reports

URL
meridium://Inspection/Report?InspectionKey=12233454
Opens the default Inspection report for the Inspection record with the Entity Key
12233454.
Parameters for the Inspection Resources

URL
The URL for accessing Inspection resources, meridium://Inspection/Resources, accepts
parameters that let you specify additional information regarding the Human Resource
records that you want to access. We list and describe these parameters in the following
table.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
EntityKey
Mode
The specified Human Resource record

will appear, and the Human Resource
with Role Details datasheet or the
Specifies the
The Entity Key of
Human Resource with Cert Details
Human Resource the desired
datasheet will be displayed, depending
records that you Human Resource
on the Mode parameter.
want to access. record.
Specifies the
datasheet that
you want to
view.
Roles: Causes Meridium APM to

load the Human Resource with Role
Details datasheet.
Certifications: Causes Meridium

APM to load the Human Resource
with Cert Details datasheet.
Roles
Certifications
Examples of the Inspection Resources

URL
meridium://Inspection/Resources?Mode=Roles&EntityKey=12345
Opens the Human Resource record with the Entity Key 12345. The Human Resource
with Role Details datasheet is displayed.
meridium://inspection/Resources?Mode=Certifications&EntityKey=12345
Opens the Human Resource record with the Entity Key 12345. The Human Resource
with Cert Details datasheet is displayed.
Parameters for the Inspection Review

URL
A link constructed from the address meridium://Inspection/Review will run the query
specified by the Path parameter and display the results on the Review and Approve
Inspection Documents page in Inspection Management. The specified query must return
records from only one Inspection family. It can be in Formatted or Unformatted mode.
Parameter
Name
Path
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Notes
Specifies the query whose results will The Catalog path and This
be displayed on the Review and
file name of the
parameter is
Approve Inspection Documents page. desired query.
required.
Note: In addition to the Path parameter, you can include any prompt IDs and values as
parameters for the specified query.
Examples of the Inspection Review URL
meridium://Inspection/Review?Path=Public\folder1\folder2\Full Inspections
Displays the results of the Full Inspections query, which is stored in the Catalog folder
\\Public\folder1\folder2.
Parameters for the Inspection Summary

URL
The URL for creating a URL to access the Inspection Summary Query,
meridium://Inspection/Summary, will run the Inspection History Summary Query, which
is stored in the Catalog folder \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Inspection\Config Queries.
The path accepts one parameter, which lets you pass an Entity Key to the query.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted Value(s)
Specifies the Equipment or Functional The Entity Key of the desired

EquipmentKey Location record whose linked Inspection Equipment or Functional
records you want to view.
Location record.
Note: In addition to the EquipmentKey parameter, you can include any prompt IDs and
values as parameters for the specified query.
Examples of the Inspection Summary

URL
meridium://Inspection/Summary?EquipmentKey=12345
Executes the configured Inspection History Summary Query and returns the list of
Inspection records that are linked to the Equipment record with the Entity Key 12345.
Parameters for the Inspection Thickness

Analysis URL
The path of the Inspection Thickness Analysis URL,
meridium://Inspection/ThicknessAnalysis, accepts an Entity Key and then opens the TM
Analysis page for the record that has been specified. Note that a URL constructed from
this path with NO parameters will not be functional.
Parameter
Name
Description
Accepted
Value(s)
Notes
AssetKey
Specifies the
equipment for which
you want to access
the TM Analysis
page.
The Entity Key

of the desired
Equipment
record.
ServiceKey
Specifies the
location for which
you want to access
the TM Analysis
page.
If you specify the ServiceKey

The Entity Key parameter, you do not need to
of the desired
specify the AssetKey parameter. If
Functional
both parameters are specified, The
Location record. Meridium APM sytem will use the
AssetKey.
If you specify the AssetKey

parameter, you do not need to
specify the ServiceKey parameter.
Examples of the Inspection Thickness

Analysis URL
meridium://Inspection/ThicknessAnalysis?AssetKey=12345
Opens the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record with the Entity Key 12345.
meridium://Inspection/ThicknessAnalysis?
AssetKey=12345&ServiceKey=123445455
Opens the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record with the Entity Key 12345.
meridium://Inspection/ThicknessAnalysis?ServiceKey=123456567
Opens the TM Analysis page for the Functional Location record with the Entity Key
1234567.
Inspection Document
The collection of information stored in any Inspection record and each record that is
linked to that record, which are best viewed together using the configured explorer that is
defined for the Inspection family.
Inspection Interval
The interval of time at which a particular inspection should occur on a given piece of
equipment. You can define inspection intervals for each type of inspection that you will
perform. This value is stored in a Time Based Inspection Interval record that you can
create using the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
Time-Based Inspection Settings

Defines the inspection intervals that will be used for particular pieces of equipment.
Time-based inspection settings are the combination of a Time Based Inspection Setting
record and its associated Time Based Inspection Interval records, both of which you can
create using the Time-Based Inspection Settings page.
Unit
A Functional Location record that represents a unit in the location hierarchy. In these
records, the Is a Unit? field is set to True.
Introduction to Thickness Monitoring

Certain types of equipment in your plant may be particularly prone to corrosion. For
example, a pipe that transports corrosive liquid or a tank that stores corrosive material
may break down over time from exposure to the corrosive substances. As this equipment
deteriorates over time, the risk for a corrosion failure increases. Because corrosion
failures can be expensive and dangerous, you will want to inspect these pieces of
equipment regularly so that you can monitor the corrosion rate and repair or replace the
equipment before a failure occurs.
Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring (TM) is a tool that allows you to document,
manage, and analyze corrosion data for equipment. It provides the tools that you need to
monitor the corrosion of equipment in your plant, and take preventive actions that will
help you avoid the economic, environmental, and human costs of corrosion failures.
Conducting a corrosion analysis on equipment involves the following general procedure:
1. Determine which types of equipment in your plant need to be monitored. You will
want to select types of equipment that are likely to corrode over time.
2. For each type of equipment that will be monitored, identify one or more thickness
measurement locations (TMLs). A TML is a location on the piece of equipment
where you will periodically measure the thickness. In Meridium APM, the
information for each unique TML is stored in a Thickness Measurement Location
record.
3. After you have identified the TMLs, record thickness measurements for each
TML. The number of measurements that you record will depend upon the
inspection frequency and the life of the piece of equipment. Each piece of
equipment will have a base, or first, measurement, which can be taken physically
or might be determined based on a published standard, such as the manufacturer's
design specification for a new piece of equipment. In Meridium APM,
measurements are stored in Thickness Measurement records.
After you begin recording measurements for the TMLs, the Meridium APM system can
begin performing calculations based upon those measurements. Using the measurement
data, Meridium APM can calculate the corrosion rate for the equipment and additional
values. The calculations can help you decide when to repair or replace the equipment.
In addition to facilitating the basic analysis workflow described above, Meridium APM
Thickness Monitoring also provides other tools and features that help you manage your
corrosion data and monitor your equipment, including:
The Minimum Thickness (T-Min) Calculator, which is designed to calculate the

minimum thickness for certain types of components. The T-Min value is used to
determine the components corrosion rate, remaining life, and next inspection
date. The T-Min Calculator is available for piping, pressure vessels, and tanks and
is compliant with ANSI B31 (for piping), API 653 (for tanks), and ASME Section
VIII DIV 1 and NBIC NB23, API 510 (for pressure vessels).
An interface for handheld data recorders manufactured by Krautkramer Branson
and Panametrics. This allows measurement readings that have been recorded in
the field to be uploaded automatically to Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring.
In addition, data stored in Meridium APM can be downloaded to handheld
devices. D
IMPORTANT: With the exception of the section of the documentation on configuring

Thickness Monitoring, this documentation assumes that you are following the Thickness
Monitoring Best Practice.
TM System Requirements
The Thickness Monitoring license is required to take advantage of TM functionality. In
addition, your system must contain the basic Meridium APM system architecture and the
files that support certain devices that you may use to collect and transfer data to the
After you have installed and configured the basic architecture, you will need to perform
some configuration tasks specifically for the TM feature.
TM Data Model
The following diagram illustrates how families are related to one another within the TM
data model. In the following image, boxes represent entity families, and arrows represent
relationship families that are configured in the baseline database.
About Equipment and Locations in TM

The Thickness Monitoring Best Practice specifies that you will create TM Analyses for
equipment only. You will not create TM Analyses for locations. If you are following the
Meridium APM Best Practice, your equipment information will be stored in Equipment
records, which will serve as the root records for your TM Analyses.
Additionally, the TM Best Practice specifies that you can organize your equipment at a
level below the equipment to define components of the equipment. TML Group records
should be used to organize your equipment at this level. If you choose to include TML
Group records in your TM Analyses, it is important to understand what TML Group
records can represent.
What Is a TM Analysis?
As described in the Thickness Monitoring overview, to conduct a corrosion analysis on a
piece of equipment you must:
1. Identify a piece of equipment to analyze.
2. Establish TMLs on the piece of equipment.
3. Collect measurement data for those TMLs.
In the Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring module, you will complete these tasks by
creating records, populating them with the desired information, and linking them together
to establish relationships between them. As you complete these tasks, other records will
be created by the Meridium APM system automatically to store calculations based upon
the records that you created. Throughout this documentation, we refer to all these records
and links collectively as a TM Analysis.
The following topics provide illustrations of the two possible structures for a TM
Analysis:
TM Analyses That Include TML Group Records

TM Analyses That Exclude TML Group Records
TM Analyses That Include TML Group

Records
The following diagram illustrates the structure of TM Analyses that include TML Group
records. Specifically, this diagram illustrates the records and links that would exist if a
TM Analysis included one Equipment record, which is linked to three TML Group
records. The boxes in the diagram are labeled according to the records that they represent,
and the lines connecting the boxes represent the links between these records in a TM
Analysis.
The following table provides information on how the records that are illustrated in the
diagram are created manually or automatically.
Record
Notes
Manually for Equipment records.
Corrosion Analysis
Settings
-andAutomatically for TML Group records
that you create and link to those
Equipment records.
Asset Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically for Equipment and TML

Group records, but at different points in
the TM Analysis workflow.
Equipment
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Manually.
Thickness
Automatically (when a Corrosion
Monitoring Task
Analysis Settings record is created).
TML Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically (when a Thickness

Measurement Location record is saved).
TM Analyses That Exclude TML Group

Records
The following diagram illustrates the structure of TM Analyses that do not include TML
Group records. The boxes in the diagram are labeled according to the records that they
represent, and the lines connecting the boxes represent links between these records in a
TM Analysis.
The following table provides information on how the records illustrated in the diagram
are created manually or automatically.
Record
Notes
Corrosion Analysis Manually.

Settings
Asset Corrosion
Analysis

Analysis Settings record is created for
an Equipment record).
Equipment
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Manually.
Thickness
Measurement
Location
Manually.
Thickness
Monitoring Task

Analysis Settings record is created).
TML Corrosion
Analysis
Automatically (when a Thickness

Measurement Location record is saved).
Equipment and TML Groups

Each TM Analysis begins with a piece of equipment whose corrosion you want to
monitor. The pieces of equipment that you want to analyze may be standalone pieces of
equipment or pieces of equipment that are made up of components.
Before you can conduct a TM Analysis on a piece of equipment, an Equipment record
must exist in the Meridium APM database to represent the piece of equipment on which
you want to perform the corrosion analysis. The types of records that you create in your
TM Analyses will depend upon what your Equipment records represent.
Consider, for example, a piping circuit that contains three piping lines. You might want:
One Equipment record to store all of the information for the piping circuit and the
three piping lines.
One Equipment record to store information for the piping circuit and three TML
Group records to store information for the individual piping lines (one TML
Group record for each piping line). These TML Group records would be linked
directly to the Equipment record that stores information for the piping circuit.
-or-
To support these two options for organizing your equipment, the Thickness Monitoring
Best Practice provides two options for creating your TM Analyses:
All of your TM Analyses can contain TML Group records. You should use this
option if any of the equipment that you will analyze in TM contains components
or you want to analyze corrosion data for certain groups of TMLs on a piece of
equipment or component. What the TML Group records that you create represent
will depend upon whether the associated Equipment record represents a
standalone piece of equipment or a piece of equipment that contains components.
If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:
You must configure preferences for the Equipment family.

Each TML Group record that you create will be linked to an Equipment
record through the Has TML Group relationship.
All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

linked directly to a TML Group record. Thickness Measurement Location
records should never be linked directly to an Equipment record in your
TM Analyses.
One Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created and linked to the
Equipment record, and one Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be
created and linked to each TML Group record that is linked to that
Equipment record.
One Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to the
Equipment record, and one Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be
created and linked to each TML Group record that is linked to that
Equipment record.
-or
None of your TM Analyses can contain TML Group records. You should use this
option if none of the equipment that you will analyze in TM contains components
or you do not want to analyze corrosion data for certain groups of TMLs on a
piece of equipment.
If you set your TM Analyses up in this way:

o
o
All Thickness Measurement Location records that you create should be

linked directly to an Equipment record.
One Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created and linked to each
Equipment record in your TM Analyses.
One Asset Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to each
Equipment record in your TM Analyses.
You must create the necessary Equipment or TML Group records before you can begin
conducting corrosion analyses. Equipment records can be created manually via the
Meridium APM Record Manager, or they might be loaded into Meridium APM from
another data source (e.g., SAP). TML Group records can created in TM via the TM
TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: This documentation assumes that you will not use the Record Manager to create or
manage TML Group records.
Although this documentation assumes that you follow the Thickness Monitoring Best
Practice, and that you set up your TM Analyses in one of the two ways described above,
the section of the documentation that provides details on configuring Thickness
Monitoring provides information on configuring Thickness Monitoring using nonbaseline families that store equipment data and/or component data.
Overview of TML Groups

A TML Group is a group of TMLs that exist on a piece of equipment. TML Group records
are used to store information about groups of TMLs. If your TM Analyses are set up to
include TML Group records, it is important to understand the options for organizing
TMLs within TML Group records.
The following explanation provides information about the options for organizing TMLs
within TML Group records. The examples within the explanation assume that you have a
piece of equipment, Piping Circuit 101, which contains three components, Line A, Line B,
and Line C. On those components, there are multiple TMLs. The following image
illustrates this example, where the components are represented by blue, green, and orange
shaded regions, and the TMLs are represented by blue, green, and orange stars.
For a given piece of equipment, a TML Group record can represent:
All TMLs that exist on that piece of equipment. You would create a TML Group
record to represent all TMLs that exist on an entire piece of equipment if the piece
of equipment is a standalone piece of equipment. Using the previous Piping
Circuit 101 example, you would create one TML Group record to represent all of
the blue, green, and orange stars.
A subset of TMLs that exist on one or more components that belong to the piece
of equipment. Using this option, you could create:
o One TML Group record per component, where the TML Group record
represents all TMLs that exist on that component. In other words, if the
piece of equipment contains three components, you would create three

corresponding TML Group records. Using the previous Piping Circuit 101
example, you would create three TML Group records, where one
represents the blue stars, one represents the green stars, and one represents
the orange stars.
-oro
One TML Group record for multiple components, where the TML Group
record represents all TMLs that exist on those components. Using the
previous Piping Circuit 101 example, you could create two TML Group
records, where one represents the blue and green stars and one represents
the orange stars.
Additionally, throughout the course of your TM Analysis, you might identify one or more
groups of TMLs on one or more components that you want to analyze separately from
other TMLs. In this case, you can create additional TML Group records to represent any
subdivision of a group of TMLs.
For example, suppose that an Equipment record that you are analyzing in TM represents a
shell and tube heat exchanger. The shell and tube heat exchanger has two components,
the shell side and the tube side, each with its own process flow. Since the corrosion
environments of these components will differ, you might create the following TML
Group records:
TML Group - Shell Side
TML Group - Tube Side
When you first begin analysis on the shell and tube heat exchanger, you are not
sure what the TM corrosion data will show, (i.e., whether TML Group - Shell Side
or TML Group - Tube Side will have more aggressive corrosion). After you
completed some analysis on the shell and tube heat exchanger, you noticed that a
subset of TMLs on the shell side near the nozzle have very high corrosion rates. At
this point, you create a third TML Group record, TML Group - Shell Nozzle to
represent this component, and you move the Thickness Measurement Location
records associated with this component from TML Group - Shell Side to TML
Group - Shell Nozzle.
Regardless of what they represent, all TML Group records in a TM Analysis will be
linked directly to a single Equipment record. All Thickness Measurement Location
records in your TM Analyses should be linked directly to TML Group records (rather
than the Equipment record to which the TML Group record is linked).
You can create and manage TML Group records via the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
About Managing TML Group Records

If you include TML Group records in your TM Analyses, you should create and manage
those TML Group records using the TM module rather than the Record Manager. After
you have created TML Group records, you can perform the following tasks:
Modify TML Group records.

Delete TML Group records.
Specify a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to which you want to link
a TML Group record.
Note: To perform this task, the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license must also be active.
Thickness Measurement Locations

A thickness measurement location (TML) is a specific place on a piece of equipment or
component where thickness measurement readings will be taken and for which various
calculations, including minimum thickness, can be performed. In Meridium APM, each
thickness measurement location is recorded in a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Depending upon how you set up your TM Analyses, you will link Thickness
Measurement Location records to Equipment or TML Group records through the Has
Datapoints relationship. Each Equipment or TML Group record can have multiple
Thickness Measurement Location records associated with it.
Each Thickness Measurement Location record will store identifying information for a
given TML. Each Thickness Measurement Location record can, in turn, be linked to one
or more Thickness Measurement records, which record measurements taken at that

location.
Overview of Thickness Measurements

An Equipment or TML Group record can be linked to one or more Thickness
Measurement Location records, which identify the locations on the piece of equipment
where thickness measurements will be taken. A thickness measurement is a value that
quantifies the thickness in inches of a given TML at a specific point in time. Thickness
measurements and the properties associated with them are stored in Thickness
Measurement records.
Each TML will have various types of thickness measurements, including:
Base Measurement: The first measurement taken for a TML.

Near Measurement: The second-most-recently-recorded measurement for a TML.
Last Measurement: The most-recently-recorded measurement for a TML.
These measurement designations are not recorded in the Thickness Measurement records
themselves but rather are determined for the TML Corrosion Analysis by evaluating how
many Thickness Measurement records exist and when they were created. After you create
a new Thickness Measurement Location record, you will want to record the base
measurement, which represents the first thickness reading recorded for that TML.
Additional Thickness Measurement records will be created later, as measurement
readings are taken throughout the life of the equipment.
Three primary interfaces are available in the Meridium APM Framework for working
with Thickness Measurement records:
TM TMLs/Measurements page: Lets you view all the Thickness Measurement

Location records that are linked to an Equipment or TML Group record, along
with any Thickness Measurement records that are linked to those Thickness
Measurement Location records.
TM Measurement Data Entry page: Lets you create new Thickness Measurement
records for all the TMLs associated with a selected Equipment or TML Group
record.
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page: Lets you record new Thickness
Measurement records for any Thickness Measurement Location records that are
not yet linked to a Thickness Measurement record.
In addition, you may want to use the Datalogger to upload readings that were collected
using a handheld data recorder.
IMPORTANT: Thickness Measurement records should be created and modified using
only the interfaces in the preceding list. New Thickness Measurement records cannot be
created via the Record Manager. Existing Thickness Measurement records should be
managed with Thickness Monitoring to ensure data integrity.
How Measurement Values are

Determined from Readings
The value associated with a specific thickness measurement is stored in the Measurement
Value field of a given Thickness Measurement record. Values are not, however, entered
directly into the Measurement Value field itself. Instead, values will be entered into the
Readings field.
To obtain the measurement value for a Thickness Measurement record, one or more
readings will be collected at a given thickness measurement location. A reading is a
single, numeric value that is obtained by measuring the thickness of a TML. To account
for the margin of error associated with user error, equipment malfunction, or
environmental conditions, you may wish to collect multiple readings for each thickness
measurement. The number of readings that you take for a measurement will depend upon
various factors, including your company's policies, the attributes of the TML, and the
method that you are using to collect the readings. The number of readings that you must
take for each measurement is determined by the value in the Number of Readings field in
Thickness Measurement Location records to which the Thickness Measurement record is
linked.
After you have determined how many readings you must take for a specific measurement
and you have collected those readings, you will create a Thickness Measurement record
and log the reading values in the Readings field. A calculation will be performed against
the values in the Readings field, based upon the settings that you have defined for
measurement readings. Then, the Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with
the result of that calculation. Finally, the Measurement Value field will be populated with
the value in the Uncorrected Measurement field. The Measurement Value field will then
contain a value representing the final, corrected thickness measurement value.
Note: The Uncorrected Measurement field is meant to serve as an intermediate storage
location between the Readings and Measurement Value fields. In the baseline TM
product, the Measurement Value field is simply populated with the value in the
Uncorrected Measurement field. If desired, however, you can create custom rules for the
Measurement Value field so that the Uncorrected Measurement value is adjusted based
upon additional factors and the result of that calculation becomes the value in the
Measurement Value field.
Nominal Versus Actual Thickness

Measurements
Each thickness measurement can be classified as either nominal or actual via the
Nominal field in Thickness Measurement records.
A nominal measurement represents a reading that is not taken physically but is

recorded from some other source, such as a design specification. For nominal
measurements, the Nominal field in the Thickness Measurement record is set to
True.
An actual measurement represents a reading that is taken manually at the physical

thickness measurement location on the equipment. For actual measurements, the
Nominal field in the Thickness Measurement record is set to False.
Actual measurements are typically more accurate and result in calculations that are more
representative of the actual piece of equipment. Nominal measurements may not be as
accurate but provide an efficient mechanism for recording initial measurement data when
you are setting up a new TM Analysis.
Any Thickness Measurement record can be designated as a nominal measurement via the
Nominal field. Typically, however, nominal measurements are used only for the base
measurement (i.e., the first measurement). As such, nominal measurement for new or
newly renewed Thickness Measurement Location records should be created using the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page. Actual measurements can also be created via the
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page, but the way in which they are created is
different. On the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page:
Measurement data will be populated automatically for Thickness Measurement

records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records configured for
nominal base measurements.
Measurement data must be entered manually for Thickness Measurement records
that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records that are not
configured for nominal base measurements.
Note: If you create Thickness Measurement records via any interface other than the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page, the Readings field will not be populated
automatically with the Thickness Measurement Location record's Nominal Thickness
value, even if one exists. Instead, the Readings field will be populated with whatever
value you specify manually at creation time, and the Nominal field will be set to False by
default. You can specify any Thickness Measurement record created in this way as a
nominal measurement by manually setting the Nominal field to True.
The Meridium APM system will use all active thickness measurements for performing
TML Corrosion Analysis calculations; no distinction is made between nominal and actual
measurements. Nominal measurements, however, will become inactive measurement
automatically after two, subsequent actual measurements have been recorded. In other
words, if the Measurement Taken Date of any two actual measurements is after the
Measurement Taken Date of a nominal measurement, the nominal measurement will
become an inactive measurement.
TML Corrosion Analyses

A TML Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to a Thickness
Measurement Location record when the Thickness Measurement Location record is first
created. Each TML Corrosion Analysis record stores summary information and
calculations that are determined using the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Equipment or TML Group records will be linked indirectly to one or more TML
Corrosion Analysis records, one for each Thickness Measurement Location record that is
linked to the Equipment or TML Group record. Together, the TML Corrosion Analysis
records provide the information that is represented in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record, which serves as an overview or summary of the corrosion information that has
been gathered for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
While the Asset Corrosion Analysis record provides a useful summary of the corrosion
status of a given piece of equipment, you will want to examine the individual TML
Corrosion Analysis records to get a more detailed perspective of the corrosion of the
equipment. In addition, because values in the Asset Corrosion Analysis are determined
directly using values stored in individual TML Corrosion Analysis records, you may need
to review the TML Corrosion Analyses in order to understand what you are seeing in the
Equipment record's Corrosion Analysis Summary.
About Asset Analysis Settings

Analysis settings let you choose certain options that will control how various values will
be calculated in Asset Corrosion Analysis and TML Corrosion Analysis records. You will
need to configure the analysis settings based upon your organization's preferences and to
ensure that the analysis yields results that are useful and meaningful to you and your
organization.
In a TM Analysis that includes both Equipment and TML Group records, analysis settings
must be defined for each Equipment and TML Group record and will be used for the
Asset Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the Equipment and TML Group
records.
Analysis settings are stored in Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked the
Equipment and TML Group records in a TM Analysis. Different settings can be defined
for each TML Analysis Type and will be used for the Asset Corrosion Analysis records
that are associated with the appropriate type. This means that when you create or access
the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record, you will need to choose the
TML Analysis Type for which you want to configure settings. You will first create
Corrosion Analysis Settings records manually for Equipment records. The analysis
settings that you create at the Equipment level can then be spread to the TML Group level
(i.e., a Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked automatically to the TML
Group record) in the following scenarios:
When you create a new TML Group record for an Equipment record.
When you create for an Equipment record analysis settings of a TML Analysis
Type of which analysis settings do not yet exist for a TML Group record that is
linked to that Equipment record.
Asset Analysis Settings for TML Group records can be modified on an as-needed basis.
The analysis settings that are defined in a Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be used
to calculate fields in Asset Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the same
Equipment or TML Group record. They are also used to populate fields in Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record
and to determine values in the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to those
Thickness Measurement Location records. Values that apply at the TML level can be
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level and customized at the TML level.
IMPORTANT: Analysis settings must be defined for each Equipment and TML Group
record before you can begin creating Thickness Measurement Location records of a given
TML Analysis Type and linking them to TML Group records.
About TML Analysis Settings

TML Analysis Settings let you choose options that will control how various values will
be calculated in the TML Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to a Thickness
Measurement Location record. TML Analysis Settings are stored in Corrosion Analysis
Settings records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location records.
When you create a Thickness Measurement Location record, a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record is created automatically and linked to that Thickness Measurement
Location record. The Corrosion Analysis Settings record for a TML is created using the
analysis settings defined for the Equipment or TML Group record to which that
Thickness Measurement Location record is linked.
Most analysis settings are defined at the Equipment or TML Group level. A few settings,
however, can be defined at the TML level and apply to the specific Thickness
Measurement Location record for which they are defined. After a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record exists for a TML, you can modify the TML-specific analysis settings via
the TML Analysis Settings window.
Overview of Asset Corrosion Analyses

An Asset Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to an Equipment
record when you create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for that Equipment record.
In a TM Analysis that includes TML Group records, an Asset Corrosion Analysis record
will be created automatically and linked to any TML Group record that is included in the
TM Analysis. An Asset Corrosion Analysis record represents a summary of the
calculations that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record for each Thickness
Measurement Location that is linked to that Equipment or TML Group record. By
viewing an Asset Corrosion Analysis record, you can analyze the overall corrosion of a
piece of equipment and make decisions about the actions that should be taken based upon
the analysis results.
An Asset Corrosion Analysis record represents:
An Equipment or TML Group record.

All the Thickness Measurement Location records of a given TML Analysis Type
(UT, RT, or TML) that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record.
All the Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the Thickness
All the calculations that are performed based upon the values in the Thickness
Measurement Location records and the Thickness Measurement records.
Because the baseline Thickness Monitoring module supports the use of three TML
Analysis Types (UT, RT, and TML), each Equipment or TML Group record can have up
to three Asset Corrosion Analyses linked to it. The TML Analysis Types UT and RT are
provided for customers who want to classify TMLs according to measurement-collection
method (ultrasonic thickness or radiographic thickness) and then perform calculations on
each set of Thickness Measurement Location records. The TML Analysis Type TML is
provided for customers who do not want to classify Thickness Measurement Location
records according to measurement-collection method and instead prefer to analyze all
Thickness Measurement Location records together. Typically, you will use both UT and
RT or only TML; most customers will not use all three. Therefore, most Equipment or
TML Group records will have either one or two Asset Corrosion Analyses linked to them.
While you can view Asset Corrosion Analysis records in the Record Manager just like
you view any other record, Thickness Monitoring offers a customized view of analysis
records: the TM Analysis page. This page is designed to provide a summary of the
analysis and to provide access to other features associated with the analysis, such as plots.
We recommend that you use the Thickness Monitoring workflow to view and manage all
the records in a TM Analysis.
How Equipment-Level Analysis

Information Is Derived
In most cases, the values stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record represent
calculations that are performed for Thickness Measurement Location records (values that
are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record) that have been summarized for the
Equipment or TML Group record based upon settings defined for the analysis. For
example, you can specify in the Asset Analysis Settings whether you want the Asset
Controlling Corrosion Rate to be the maximum corrosion rate for all Thickness
Measurement Location records or an average of the corrosion rates that have been
calculated for the Thickness Measurement Location records.
In other words, Asset Corrosion Analysis values are typically not unique to the Asset
Corrosion Analysis itself but, rather, are representative of the calculations that have been
performed for the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to that
Equipment or TML Group record.
In corrosion analyses that include both Equipment and TML Group records, the Asset
Corrosion Analysis record will contain information that is derived from the information
stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis records for the Equipment records and the TML
Group record.
Consider, for example, a piping circuit that contains three piping lines where the
information for the piping circuit is stored in four records:
Equipment A - Piping Circuit

TML Group 1 - Piping Line 1
Additionally, assume that Thickness Measurement Location records exist for each TML
Group record, where each of those Thickness Measurement Location records has its own
TML Corrosion Analysis record. Each TML Group will have its own Asset Corrosion
Analysis record that stores summary information about the calculations stored in the
corresponding TML Corrosion Analysis records. In addition, the Equipment record will
also be linked to its own Asset Corrosion Analysis record that stores summary
information that is derived by evaluating the information in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
records that are linked to each TML Group record.
Accessing Thickness Monitoring

To access Thickness Monitoring:
Integrity, and then click Thickness Monitoring.
The Thickness Monitoring Functions page appears.
Aspects of the Thickness Monitoring

Functions Page
The Thickness Monitoring Functions page serves as the starting point for the tasks that
you can perform in Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring. You can access each task via a
link on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page. Note that the links on this page do not
suggest a recommended workflow but allow you to access certain features that you will
need to use as part of conducting a TM Analysis.
The following links are available on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page:
Corrosion Analysis Summary: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
perform a search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and
view TM Analysis summary information on the TM Analysis page.
TMLs/Measurements: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a
search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and view the
related Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records on
the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Measurement Data Entry: Displays the Find Items window, where you can
perform a search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and
view the associated TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Bulk Analyze: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a search
to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records for which you want to
perform a bulk analysis.
Datalogger: Displays the Select a Device and Properties dialog box, from which
you can send TM data to a device or receive TM data from a device.
Quick View: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a search to
locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and open them on the TM
Quick View page.
T-min Calculator: Displays the Find Items window, where you can perform a
search to locate one or more Equipment or TML Group records and then open
them on the T-Min Calculations page.
Administrative Tasks: Displays the TM Administrative Tasks page, where you can
configure Thickness Monitoring preferences.

Deploying and configuring the TM module for the first time includes completing multiple
steps, which are outlined in the table in this topic. The steps in this section of the
documentation provide all the information that you need to deploy and configure TM on
top of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Whether a step is required or optional is indicated in the Required/Optional cell. Steps
are marked as Required if you must perform the step to take advantage of TM
functionality.
The person responsible for completing each task may vary within your organization. We
Step Task
Install the supporting files for the
following devices on all of the
1
Meridium APM Framework
machines that will connect to these
devices:
Optional
This step is necessary only

if you will use these
devices to collect data that
you transfer to the
Krautkramer Branson DMS

Instrument
Krautkramer Branson DMS2
Instrument
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
Optional

if you want to use the GE
DMS Go/DMS Go+ device
to collect data that you
transfer to the Meridium
APM system.
For more information, see
the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.
Review the TM data model to

determine which relationship
definitions you will need to modify
to include your custom equipment
families. Modify any relationship
Optional
definitions as needed. Modify any
relationship definitions as needed via
the Configuration Manager
application.
This task is necessary only

if you store equipment
information in families
other than the baseline
Equipment and TML Group
families.
Assign the desired Security Users to

one or more TM Security Groups via
Required
the Configuration Manager
application.
User must have

permissions to the TM
families in order to use the
TM functionality.
Configure settings for the Equipment

and TML Group families via the
Required
application.
This task is necessary

regardless of whether or not
you follow the TM Best
Practice. If you do not
follow the TM Best
Practice, you must
configure settings for the
families that will be used to
store equipment data in
Thickness Monitoring.
10
Optional
Default reading preferences

and Nominal T-Min
preferences exist in the
baseline Meridium APM
database. These will be
used if you do not define
your own. You can also
define additional, optional
global preferences that are
not defined in the baseline
Configure the system to use custom

TML Types via the Configuration
Optional
Default TML Types exist in

the baseline Meridium
APM database. You can
define additional TML
Types to use in your TM
Analyses.
Grant the TM Technician role to

individuals responsible for taking
readings. You can accomplish this
task using the Meridium APM
Optional
You can grant the TM

Technical role to
individuals for which
Human Resource records
exist but Security User
records do not exists if you
want to specify their names
in the Measurement Taken
By field in Thickness
Optional
Default color-coding
settings exist in the baseline
These settings will be used
if you do not define your
own.
Manage Thickness Monitoring Rules

Lookup records via the Meridium
Optional
You can complete this task

if you want to view or
modify Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup
records whose values are
used to perform certain TM
calculations.
Configure global settings via the

application.
Modify the default color-coding

settings via the Meridium APM
11
Define additional fields that will be

displayed in the header section of the
TM Measurement Data Entry and
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry Optional
pages. You can accomplish this task
Default Thickness
Measurement fields are
displayed in the header
section of these pages in the
baseline Meridium APM
database. You can specify
that additional fields be
displayed in the header
section of these pages.
12
Disable the Auto Manage Tasks

setting via the Meridium APM
Optional

if are using both the RBI
and the TM modules.
13
Assign additional fields to improve

bulk data measurement entry. You
can accomplish this task using the
application.
Optional
None
Optional
You can import the PV

Stress and Tank Stress
records that Meridium, Inc.
provides, or you can create
your own PV Stress and
Tank Stress records.
Import PV Stress and Tank Stress

records using the Configuration
14
Upgrade Workflow
are upgrading:
V3.5.1
V3.5.0 SP1 LP
V3.5.0
V3.4.5
Upgrading TM from V3.5.1 to V3.6.0.0.0

The following table lists the steps that are required to upgrade and configure Thickness
Monitoring for V3.6.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Apply
V3.6.0.4.0.
This step is necessary only if you want to use the
GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect data that
you transfer to the Meridium APM system.
Optional
For more information, see the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.
Upgrading TM from V3.5.0 SP1 LP to

V3.6.0.0.0
Monitoring for V3.6.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components of the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Apply
V3.6.0.4.0.
This step is necessary only if you want to use the
GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect data that
you transfer to the Meridium APM system.
Optional
For more information, see the V3.6.0.4.0 Release
Notes.

The following table lists the step that is required to upgrade and configure Thickness
Monitoring for V3.6.0.0.0. This step assumes that you have completed the steps for
Step Task
Manually update TM Analyses for which you used
custom corrosion rates. To do so:
1
Optional
In previous
versions of
1. Locate the records that you will need to
Meridium
update by running the following query:
APM, if you
used custom
corrosion
SELECT [MI_EQUIP000].
rates in your
[MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C] "Equipment ID",
TM Analyses,
[MI_TMLGROUP].[MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C]
certain fields
"TML Group ID", [MI Thickness Measurement
in the
Location].[MI_DP_ASSET_ID_CHR] "TML Asset
associated
ID", [MI Thickness Measurement Location].
TML
[MI_DP_ID_CHR] "TML ID", [MI TML
Corrosion
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N]
Analysis
"Custom Calculation A Corros", [MI TML
records were
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N]
populated
"Custom Calculation B Corros" FROM
with values
[MI_EQUIP000] JOIN_SUCC [MI_TMLGROUP]
using the unit
JOIN_SUCC [MI Thickness Measurement
of measure
Location] JOIN_SUCC [MI TML Corrosion
(UOM)
Analysis] ON {MI Has Corrosion Analyses} ON
inches per
{MI Has Datapoints} ON {MIR_HSTMLGP}
day instead of
WHERE ([MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
IN/YR (TM)
[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] > 0 AND [MI TML
(i.e., inches
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] >
per year),
0)
which is the
UOM that is
specified in
the properties
2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update TM
of the fields.
Analyses associated with the Equipment
In order to
and TML Group records returned by this
correct this
query.
issue in
existing
Note that these instructions assume that you are
records, you
using the baseline Equipment and TML Group
must perform
families. If you use custom equipment families,
you must replace the following values before

running the query in order to identify the records
requiring update:
this step to
manually
update TM
Analyses. For
more
information
about this
issue, see the
V3.5.1
Release
Notes.
MI_EQUIP000 and MI_TMLGROUP with

your custom family IDs.
MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C and
MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C with the field IDs
used to identify these custom equipment
records.
Then, run the Bulk Analyze tool using your custom

records.
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
Optional
This step is
necessary
only if you
want to use
the GE DMS
Go/DMS
Go+ device to
collect data
that you
transfer to the
Meridium
APM system.
For more
information,
see the
V3.6.0.4.0
Release
Notes.

Monitoring for V3.6.0.0.0. These steps assume that you have completed the steps for
upgrading the components in the basic Meridium APM system architecture.
Step Task
Update certain TM Analyses to correct TML

Corrosion Analysis records for which you
performed measurement variance evaluation prior
to V3.5.1. To do so:
update by creating a query that returns
TML Corrosion Analysis records whose:
Short Term Corrosion Rate field contains

the value 0 (zero).
Optional
Allowable Measurement Variance Applied

2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update the

TM Analysis that is associated with every
TML Corrosion Analysis record returned
by the query you created in step 1.
Manually update TM Analyses for which you

used custom corrosion rates. To do so:
update by running the following query:
SELECT [MI_EQUIP000].
[MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C] "Equipment ID",
[MI_TMLGROUP].[MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C]
Optional
In previous
versions of
Meridium
APM, in
certain
circumstances,
TML
Corrosion
Analysis
records for
which you
performed
measurement
variance
evaluation
contained
incorrect
values in the
Short Term
Corrosion Rate
and Allowable
Measurement
Variance
Applied fields.
In order to
correct this
issue in
existing
records, you
must perform
this step to
manually
update TM
Analyses.
In previous
versions of
Meridium
APM, if you
used custom
corrosion rates
in your TM
Analyses,
"TML Group ID", [MI Thickness Measurement

Location].[MI_DP_ASSET_ID_CHR] "TML
Asset ID", [MI Thickness Measurement
Location].[MI_DP_ID_CHR] "TML ID", [MI
TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] "Custom Calculation A
Corros", [MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] "Custom Calculation B
Corros" FROM [MI_EQUIP000] JOIN_SUCC
[MI_TMLGROUP] JOIN_SUCC [MI Thickness
Measurement Location] JOIN_SUCC [MI TML
Corrosion Analysis] ON {MI Has Corrosion
Analyses} ON {MI Has Datapoints} ON
{MIR_HSTMLGP} WHERE ([MI TML
Corrosion Analysis].[MI_TML_CA_A_CR_N] >
0 AND [MI TML Corrosion Analysis].
[MI_TML_CA_B_CR_N] > 0)
certain fields
in the
associated
TML
Corrosion
Analysis
records were
populated with
values using
the unit of
measure
(UOM) inches
per day instead
of IN/YR
(TM) (i.e.,
inches per
year), which is
the UOM that
is specified in
the properties
of the fields. In
order to
correct this
issue in
existing
records, you
must perform
this step to
manually
update TM
Analyses. For
more
information
about this
issue, see the
V3.5.1 Release
Notes.
2. Use the Bulk Analyze tool to update TM

Analyses associated with the Equipment
and TML Group records returned by this
query.
Note that these instructions assume that you are
using the baseline Equipment and TML Group
families. If you use custom equipment families,
you must replace the following values before
running the query in order to identify the records
requiring update:
MI_EQUIP000 and MI_TMLGROUP

with your custom family IDs.
MI_EQUIP000_EQUIP_ID_C and
MI_TMLGROUP_ID_C with the field
IDs used to identify these custom
equipment records.
Then, run the Bulk Analyze tool using your

custom records.
3
Apply V3.6.0.4.0.
Optional
This step is
necessary only
if you want to
use the GE
DMS Go/DMS
Go+ device to
collect data
that you
transfer to the
Meridium
APM system.
For more
information,
see the
V3.6.0.4.0
Release Notes.
Applying V3.6.0.4.0
Note: These steps assume that you have already applied V3.6.0.4.0 to the basic Meridium
APM system architecture.
Step Task
This step is necessary only if you want to use
the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device to collect
data that you transfer to the Meridium APM
system.
Install the
supporting files
for the GE DMS Optional
Go/DMS Go+
device.
If you are using a Citrix platform, to use the

devices listed, you must first install drivers for
the devices on your Citrix platform.
If you are deploying V3.6.0 for the first time,
you may have already completed this step.
Upgrade the
supporting
firmware for the
Required
GE DMS
Go/DMS Go+
device.
You can download the firmware update from

GE here:
http://www.gemcs.com/en/ultrasound/thickness-gauges/dmsgo.html
About Thickness Monitoring Security

Groups
Meridium APM provides the following baseline Security Groups for use with Thickness
Monitoring and provides baseline family-level privileges for these groups:
MI Thickness Monitoring Administrator

MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector
MI Thickness Monitoring User
Access to certain functions in the Meridium APM Framework application is determined

by membership in these Security Groups. Note that in addition to the baseline familylevel privileges that exist for these Security Groups, users will also need at least View
privileges for all customer-defined predecessor or successor families that participate in
the Thickness Monitoring relationships. Keep in mind that:
Users who will need to create new records in TM will need Insert privileges to
these families.
Users who will need to modify records will need Update privileges to these
families.
Any user who should be allowed to delete TM records will need Delete privileges
to these families.
The following table summarizes the functional privileges associated with each group.
Function
Can be done by
Can be done by
members of the MI
members of the MI
Thickness
Monitoring
Administrator Group?
Inspector Group?
Can be done by
members of the MI
Thickness
Monitoring User
Group?
Configure
Global
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Configure
Family
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Use the T-Min

Calculator
No
Yes
No
Archive
Corrosion Rates
No
Yes
No
Reset the
Maximum
Historical
Corrosion Rate
Yes
No
No
Exclude TMLs
No
Yes
No
Renew TMLs
No
Yes
No
Reset User
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Set ColorCoding
Preferences
Yes
No
No
Note: If the Risk Based Inspection license is active and you use TM Analysis values to
calculate corrosion rate values used in RBI, RBI users who are responsible for
completing the steps necessary to use TM Analysis values to calculate RBI corrosion
rates or who should be able to navigate to the TM module via the RBI module must be a
member of at least one TM Security Group.
Thickness Monitoring Security Groups

The baseline Meridium APM database contains three Security Groups specifically for
Thickness Monitoring:
MI Thickness Monitoring Administrator

MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector
MI Thickness Monitoring User
The following table lists the baseline family-level privileges that exist for these Security
Groups.
MI Thickness
Monitoring
Administrator
MI Thickness
Monitoring
Inspector
MI Thickness
Monitoring User
Corrosion
View, Update, Insert
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Datapoint
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Datapoint Measurement

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert
Equipment
View
View
View
Human Resource

Delete
View
View
Inspection Task
None
View, Update
None
Materials of Construction None
None
View
Meridium Reference
Tables

Delete
View
View
Resource Role

Delete
View
View
Security Group
View
View
View
Security User
View
View
View
Settings
View, Update,
Insert
View
Task Execution
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Thickness Monitoring Task

Delete
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
TML Group
View, Update,
View
Family
Entity Family
Delete
Insert, Delete

Delete
View, Update,
Insert
View, Update,
Insert
Equipment Has Equipment View
View
View
Group Assignment
View
View
View
Has Archived Corrosion

Analyses

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived Corrosion

Analysis Settings

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived
Subcomponent Analysis
Settings

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Archived
Subcomponent Corrosion
Analyses

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Corrosion Analyses

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Corrosion Analysis

Settings

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Datapoints

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Measurements

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
Has Roles

Delete
View
View
Has Task Execution
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Has Task Revision
View, Insert
View, Insert
None
Relationship Family
Belongs to a Unit
Has Tasks
View, Insert
View, Insert
View, Insert
Has TML Group

Delete
View, Update,
Insert, Delete
View
Is a User
View
View
View
User Assignment
View
View
View
About Importing PV Stress Records

The Thickness Monitoring (TM) module uses values in PV Stress records when you
create Thickness Measurement Location records and define the Allowable Stress value.
The baseline database does not, however, contain any PV Stress records. If desired, you
can import them using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided in a
set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server machine.
You are not required to import the PV Stress records that Meridium, Inc. provides. If you
are upgrading from a previous version of Meridium APM in which you created PV Stress
records manually, you might choose not to import the records that are distributed by
Meridium, Inc. so that you can maintain your existing records and their values.
If you choose to import the PV Stress records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and
your database already contains PV Stress records, the import procedure will update
existing records if they contain the same values as the Meridium APM records in the
following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Material Grade
Metal Temperature
For example, suppose that your database contains a PV Stress record with the following
field values:
Code Year: 1998
Material Grade: 38W
One of the XML files contains a PV Stress record with the following field values, where
the values in blue match those in your existing record:

Code Year: 1998
Material Grade: 38W
In this case, although the value in the Minimum Tensile Strength field in your PV Stress
record does not match the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record, this record
would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated PV Stress record would contain the value 45 instead of 40 in the
Minimum Tensile Strength field.
If any of your existing PV Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing Thickness Measurement Location records will not be updated. If needed, you can
update them manually.
If you have existing PV Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM PV
exist in the PV Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Note: The values in the Meridium APM PV Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks), ASME Section II Part D tables 1A and 1B
(pressure vessels), and the ASME B31.3 (piping circuits) specifications.
About Importing Tank Stress Records

The Thickness Monitoring (TM) module uses values in Tank Stress records when you
create Thickness Measurement Location records and define the Allowable Stress value.
The baseline database does not, however, contain any Tank Stress records. If desired, you
can import them using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided in a
set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server machine.
You are not required to import the Tank Stress records that Meridium, Inc. provides. If
you are upgrading from a previous version of Meridium APM in which you created Tank
Stress records manually, you might choose not to import the records that are distributed
by Meridium, Inc. so that you can maintain your existing records and their values.
If you choose to import the Tank Stress records that are provided by Meridium, Inc. and
your database already contains Tank Stress records, the import procedure will update
existing records if they contain the same values as the Meridium APM records in the
following fields:
Design Code
Code Year
Allowable Stress
Minimum Tensile Strength
Minimum Yield Strength
For example, suppose that your database contains a Tank Stress record with the following
field values:
Material Grade: C
Code Year: 2008
The XML file contains a Tank Stress record with the following field values, where the
values in blue match those in your existing record:
Material Grade: None. This value is not populated in the imported Tank Stress
records.
Code Year: 2008
In this case, although the value in the Material Grade field in your Tank Stress record is
different than the value in the Meridium APM PV Stress record (which is null), this
record would be updated during the import procedure. So, after the import procedure is
complete, the updated Tank Stress record would not contain a value in the Material Grade
field.
If any of your existing Tank Stress records are updated during the import procedure,
existing Thickness Measurement Location records will not be updated. If needed, you can
update them manually.
If you have existing Tank Stress records, the decision to import the Meridium APM Tank
exist in the Tank Stress records that will be imported. You may need to work with your
Note: The values in the Meridium APM Tank Stress records adhere to the American
Petroleum Institute API-650 (storage tanks) specifications.
Performing the Import Procedure
The baseline database does not contain any PV Stress or Tank Stress records. You can
import them, however, using the Import/Export Metadata Tool. The records are provided
in a set of XML files, which are available on the Meridium APM Application Server
machine. The following instructions for importing these files assume that you have
already installed the Meridium APM Application Server software.
To import PV Stress and Tank Stress records:
1. Using the Import/Export Metadata window, navigate to the following location on
the Meridium APM Application Server machine:
C:\Meridium\DbUpg\Versions\<database version>\_IEU_ManualImports\Stress
Records, where <database version> is the database version that is currently
installed.
2. Import the XML files, one at a time. You can import them in any order.
The files are imported, and the appropriate PV Stress and Tank Stress records are created.
Using Custom TML Analysis Types

The baseline Meridium APM database includes the Thickness Measurement Location
family, which contains the TML Analysis Type field. This field is used to classify TMLs
based upon the collection method that will be used for recording Thickness
Measurements at that location.
The TML Analysis Type field contains a list of values that is populated with the
Corrosion Inspection Type values from all Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are
associated with the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record is linked.
The values that are used to populate the Corrosion Inspection Type field in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings family are stored in the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion
Inspection Type). In the baseline Meridium APM database, this table contains three
System Codes: UT, RT, and TML. You can only create Thickness Measurement Location
records with a given TML Analysis Type value if an associated Corrosion Analysis
Settings record contains the same value in the Corrosion Inspection Type field.
Using the baseline functionality, you can separate TM Analysis calculations into groups
based upon TML Analysis Type. If you want to use this functionality, you will want to
classify your TMLs as UT (measurements collected using ultrasonic thickness) or RT
(measurements collected using radiographic thickness). This separation will be desirable

for some implementations. Other implementations will prefer not to separate TMLs
according to collection method and instead perform calculations on the entire group of
TMLs that exists for a piece of equipment. For these implementations, you will want to
classify all TMLs using the TML Analysis Type TML.
Depending upon your preferred implementation, you may choose to make one or more of
the following changes to the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type):
Add System Codes if you want to classify TMLs using methods in addition to UT
and RT.
Delete System Codes that you do not want to use.
Modify the IDs and descriptions of the System Codes so that the classification
options are more intuitive to your users.
If you make changes to this System Code Table, keep in mind that the analysis types that
are stored in the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type) will be used when
you create Corrosion Analysis Settings records, and therefore, will determine the analysis
types for which you can create Thickness Measurement Location records.
Additionally, in Thickness Measurement Location records, the TML Analysis Type field
has a baseline Default Value rule that is coded to present UT as the default value when
you have defined the UT TML Analysis Type in your TM Analysis (i.e., you have created
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record with a Corrosion Inspection Type of UT). You could
modify this rule if, for example, you wanted RT to be presented as the default value when
you have defined the RT TML Analysis Type in your TM Analysis (i.e., you have created
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record with a Corrosion Inspection Type of RT). To do this,
you would modify the MI_TML_TYPE_CHR class as follows:
<MetadataField("MI_TML_TYPE_CHR")> _
Public Class MI_TML_TYPE_CHR
Inherits Baseline.MI_Thickness_Measurement_Location.MI_TML_TYPE_CHR
Public Sub New(ByVal record As Meridium.Core.DataManager.DataRecord, ByVal field
As Meridium.Core.DataManager.DataField)
MyBase.New(record, field)
End Sub
Public Overrides Function GetDefaultInitialValue() As Object
Return CStr("RT")
End Function
End Class
For more information on customizing baseline rules, click here.
Accessing the TM Administrative Tasks

Page
The TM Administrative Tasks page displays links to pages where you can perform certain
administrative tasks for Thickness Monitoring.
Note: To perform administrative tasks, you must be a Super User or a member of the MI
Thickness Monitoring Administrator Security Group.
To access the TM Administrative Tasks page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the Thickness Monitoring Functions page,

click the Administrative Tasks link.
The TM Administrative Tasks page appears.
Aspects of the TM Administrative Tasks

Page
The TM Administrative Tasks page displays links to pages where you can perform
administrative tasks for Thickness Monitoring.
The following links are displayed on the TM Administrative Tasks page:
Family Preferences: Displays the Asset Family Selection dialog box, where you
can select the Equipment, TML Group, or other families that you use to store
equipment or component data, and then configure settings for that family on the
Asset Family Preferences page.
Global Preferences: Displays the Global Preferences page, where you can
configure settings that apply throughout Thickness Monitoring.
Reset User Preferences: Displays the Reset User Preferences page, where you can
reset grid preferences for one or more Security Users.
Color-Coding Preferences: Displays the TM Color-Coding Preferences page,

where you can change the color-coding settings for Thickness Monitoring.
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup: Displays the Bulk Data Form page, where
you can view and manage all the Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records
that exist in the database.
Common Measurement Data Field Mappings: Displays the Common

Measurement Data Field Mappings page, where you can define which Thickness
Measurement fields will appear in the Common Measurement section of the TM
Initial Measurement Data Entry page and the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
About Asset Settings

You will use the Asset Family Preferences page to define settings for families that are
used in Thickness Monitoring.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, you can define settings for the Equipment or TML
Group families via this page. If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, you can define
settings for families that store equipment or component data. Regardless of whether or
not you follow the TM Best Practice, these settings must be configured at the level where
records will actually be stored.
The settings that you define on the Asset Family Preferences page will define the field in
the following records that will be used to populate the following fields in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Monitoring Task records in your TM Analysis.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, these settings will determine the field in the
Equipment or TML Group record that should be used to:
Populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to Equipment or TML Group records.
Populate the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are
created automatically and linked to Equipment or TML Group records.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, these settings will determine field in
the record stores equipment or component data that should be used to:
Populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to records that store equipment or component data.
Populate the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are
created automatically and linked to records that store equipment or
component data.
Additionally, if your TM Analyses will contain TML Group records or other records that
store component data, you will also need to define the relationship between certain
families via the Asset Family Preferences page.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, you should define the relationship between
the Equipment family and the TML Group family via this page.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, you should define the relationship
between the family that stores equipment data and the family that stores
component data via this page.
Accessing the Asset Family Preferences

Page
The Asset Family Preferences page lets you configure settings for the Equipment or TML
Group families, or any other family that you use to store equipment or component data.
To access the Asset Family Preferences page, you will need to select the family for which
you want to configure settings. Each instance of the Asset Family Preferences page is
specific to one family and allows you to configure settings for that specific family. You
will need to access the Asset Family Preferences page multiple times if you want to
configure settings for more than one family.
Note: To configure Asset settings, you must be a Super User or a member of the MI
Thickness Monitoring Administrator Security Group.
To access the Asset Family Preferences page:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the TM Administrative Tasks page.
2. Click the Family Preferences link.
The Asset Family Selection dialog box appears.
3. In the list, select the family whose settings you want to configure.
4. Click OK.
The Asset Family Preferences page appears. The following image shows the Asset
Family Preferences page when assessed for the Equipment family.
Overview of the Asset Family

Preferences Page
On the Asset Family Preferences page, you can change the settings that apply to the
Equipment or TML Group families, or any other family that you use to store equipment
or component data.
The Asset Family Preferences page contains the following items:
Subcomponent Relationship area: Contains options that allow you to specify the
relationship definition that is used to link families that are used in Thickness
Monitoring. If you follow the TM Best Practice, in the Subcomponent
Relationship area, you should specify the Has TML Group relationship definition
that is used to link Equipment and TML Group records. If you do not follow the
TM Best Practice, in the Subcomponent Relationship area, you should specify the
relationship definitions that link records that store equipment data and records that
store component data.
In the Subcomponent Relationship area, you can define the:
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship
Subcomponent to Asset Relationship
Component ID Field area: Contains the Component ID Field list, where you can
define the fields in records that are used to populate fields in Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Monitoring Task records in your TM
Analysis.
Task menu pane: Contains task menus that provide you with quick access to
functions that are available on the Asset Family Preferences page. The following
task menus are available on the Asset Family Preferences page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Asset Family Preferences page contains the following
links:
Pick Another Family: Displays the Asset Family Selection dialog box, where you
can select a family for which to configure settings.
Reload: Populates the cells on the Asset Family Preferences page with the settings
that were last saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset Family
Preferences page.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the Asset Family Preferences
page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Asset Family Preferences page contains the following
links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Asset Family Preferences page.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Asset Family Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Asset Family Preferences
page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Asset Family Preferences page does not display any
links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on the
Asset Family Preferences page.
About Subcomponent Relationship

Settings
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records or other records that store component
data, you will need to define Subcomponent Relationship settings for certain families.
These settings determine which records the Meridium APM system will include in a TM
Analysis and which families will be included in the configured explorers that are used
throughout Thickness Monitoring.
Note: The TM Best Practice assumes that your TM Analyses include TML Group
records.
For example, if your TM Analysis contains TML Group records, and you are analyzing a
piping circuit that contains three piping lines, you would store information for the piping
circuit in the following four records:
Equipment (piping circuit)

TML Group (piping line 1)
In this case, the TML Group records would be linked to the Equipment record through the
Has TML Group relationship that is defined for the purpose of linking TML Group
records to Equipment records.
Continuing with the example, if you do not use TML Group records (i.e., you do not
follow the TM Best Practice), but your TM Analysis contains records that store
component data, and you are analyzing the same piping circuit, you would store
information in four records, one that stores equipment data and three that store
component data. In this case, you would need to specify the relationship that links the
records that store equipment data to the records that store component data.
The Subcomponent Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page contains
the following lists that allow you to define these settings.
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship: Specifies the relationship family that

links certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether or not you
follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies
how Equipment records will be linked to TML Group records. You should
select Has TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list
specifies how records that store equipment data will be linked to records
that store component data.
The following image shows an example of the Subcomponent Relationship setting

defined for the Equipment family, according to the TM Best Practice.
If a component represented by a TML Group record or another record that stores

component data can contain additional components in a multi-tier record hierarchy, this
setting should also be defined for TML Group family or the family that stores component
data.
Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship: Specifies the relationship family that links

certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether or not you follow
the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies
how TML Group records will be linked to Equipment records. You should
select Has TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list
specifies how records that store component data will be linked to records
that store equipment data.
The following image shows an example of the Subcomponent Relationship setting

defined for the TML Group family, according to the TM Best Practice.
Defining the Asset-to-Subcomponent

Relationship
Your selection in the Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship list in the Subcomponent
Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page specifies the relationship
family that is used to link certain records in your TM Analyses, depending upon whether
or not you follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
Equipment records will be linked to TML Group records. You should select Has
TML Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
records that store equipment data will be linked to records that store component
data.
To define the Asset-to-Subcomponent relationship:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Asset Family Preferences page for
the family for which you want to specify the Asset-to-Subcomponent relationship.
2. In the Subcomponent Relationship section, in the Asset-to-Subcomponent
Relationship list, select the relationship definition that should be used to link the
given families. The following image shows an example of this setting for the
Equipment family, according to the TM Best Practice.
3. On the Preferences Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The relationship family setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Family Preferences page.
Defining the Subcomponent to Asset

Relationship
Your selection in the Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship list in the Subcomponent
Relationship section on the Asset Family Preferences page specifies the relationship
family that is used to link certain records used in a TM Analysis, depending upon whether
or not you follow the TM Best Practice.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how TML
Group records will be linked to Equipment records. You should select Has TML
Group in this list.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, your selection in this list specifies how
records that store component data will be linked to records that store equipment
data.
To define the Subcomponent-to-Asset relationship:

the family for which you want to specify the Subcomonent-to-Asset Relationship.
2. In the Subcomponent Relationship section, in the Subcomponent-to-Asset
Relationship list, select the relationship definition that should be used to link the
given families. The following image shows an example of this setting for the
TML Group family, according to the TM Best Practice.

The relationship family setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Defining the Component ID Field

Setting
When you create a Thickness Measurement Location record, the Meridium APM system
executes a rule to populate the TML Asset ID field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record. For this rule to work properly, the Meridium APM system must know
which field in which record to use. The field in the record that is used depends upon the
Component ID Field setting.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, the TML Asset ID field is populated with the
value specified by the Component ID Field setting in the Equipment or TML
Group record to which the Thickness Measurement Location record is directly
linked.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice, the TML Asset ID field is populated
with the value specified by the Component ID Field setting in the record that
stores equipment or component data to which the Thickness Measurement
Location is directly linked.
In addition, if you specify via the Global Preferences page that you want the Meridium
APM system to create and update Thickness Monitoring Task records automatically, the
Task ID of those Thickness Monitoring Task records will be populated with the value
<Task Type> - <Component ID>, where <Task Type> is the Task Type in the Thickness
Monitoring Task record and <Component ID> is the value in the Component ID Field
setting.
Whether or not you follow the TM Best Practice, and whether or not your TM Analyses
contain TML Group records or other records that store component data will determine the
families for which you should configure the Component ID Field setting.
If you follow the TM Best Practice, and your TM Analyses:
Include TML Group records, you should define these settings for the
Equipment and TML Group families. The following table lists the fields in
the Equipment and TML Group families that you should specify when
defining this setting, and the fields in the records that will be populated
with these values.
For this
family:
...you should select this

field in Component ID
...the following fields in
Field list. The value in
this field will be used to
populate the value in...
Equipment Equipment ID
TML
Group
TML Group ID
The Task ID field in

Task records that are
linked directly to
Equipment records.
The Task ID field in
Task records that are
linked directly to TML
Group records.
The TML Asset ID field
in Thickness
Measurement Location
records that are linked to
TML Group records.
Do not include TML Group records, you should define these settings for
the Equipment family only. Specifically, you should select Equipment ID
in the Component ID Field list. With this configuration, the value in the
Equipment ID field in Equipment records will be used to populate the
value in the TML Asset ID field in associated Thickness Measurement
Location records, and the Task ID field in associated Thickness
Monitoring Task records.
If you do not follow the TM Best Practice and your TM Analyses:
Contain records that store component data, you should configure the
Component ID Field setting for the family that stores equipment data and
the family that stores component data. With this configuration:
o
o
The Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that are

linked directly to records that store equipment data will be
populated with the value in the field specified by the Component
ID Field setting for the family whose records store equipment data.
The Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records, and the
TML Asset ID field in Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked directly to records that store component data will be
populated with the value in the field specified by the Component
ID Field setting for the family whose records store component
data.
Do not contain records that store component data, you should configure
the Component ID Field setting for the family that stores equipment data
only. With this configuration, the TML Asset ID field in associated
Thickness Measurement Location records, and the Task ID field in
associated Thickness Monitoring Task records will be populated with the
value in the specified field in the record that stores equipment data.
Note that:
The Component ID Field setting must be defined before you can create Thickness
Measurement Location or define Asset Corrosion Analysis Settings for Equipment
or TML Group records, or the records that store equipment or component data. If
this setting is not defined for these families, when you try to create a Thickness
Measurement Location record or a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for one of
these records, a message appears, indicating that the Component ID Field setting
has not been configured.
The Component ID setting must also be defined before Meridium APM can create
Thickness Monitoring Task records automatically for Thickness Measurement
Location records.
To define the Component ID Field setting:

the family whose Component ID Field setting you want to define.
2. In the Component ID Field area, in the Component ID Field list, select the field
that will be used to populate the TML Asset ID field in Thickness Measurement
Location records and the Task ID field in Thickness Monitoring Task records that
are linked directly to the record in the family for which you accessed the Asset
Family Preferences page. The list contains all the fields defined for the current
family. In the following image, the Asset Family Preferences page has been
accessed for the Equipment family, and Equipment ID has been selected in the
Component ID Field list.
3. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The Component ID Field setting is saved for the family for which you accessed the Asset
Reloading Family Preferences

After you have made changes to the settings on the Asset Family Preferences page, you
can reload the settings to restore the most recently saved values.
To reload family preferences:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Asset Family Preferences page.
2. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Reload link.
The family settings revert back to their most recently saved values.
Accessing the Global Preferences Page

You can use the Global Preferences page to configure settings that will be used
throughout Thickness Monitoring.
To access the Global Preferences page:

2. Click the Global Preferences link.
The Global Preferences page appears.
Overview of the Global Preferences

Page
The Global Preferences page lets you configure settings that apply throughout Thickness
Monitoring. The Global Preferences page consists of the following items:
T-Min Calculator Preferences section: Contains the Use Interpolation for Stress
Reference Tables check box, where you can choose whether or not to use
interpolation for Stress Reference Tables.
Tasks Setting section: Contains the Auto Manage Tasks check box, where you can
define the auto manage tasks setting.
Custom Corrosion Rate Options section: Contains options that let you define
settings for using custom corrosion rate calculations.
Readings Preferences section: Contains options that let you determine how the
Meridium APM system will handle values that are entered into the Readings field
in Thickness Measurement records.
Nominal T-Min Preferences section: Contains a list of fields that exist in the
Piping Nominal T-Min family that you can specify to be used for retrieving the
Nominal T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records that are
linked to Equipment or TML Group records that represent pipes, or records that
store equipment or component data for pipes.
Measurement Preferences section: Contains the following check boxes:

o Allow Measurements to be Skipped: You can select this check box if you
want to create Measurement Not Taken records and use them in your TM
Analyses.
o
Allow Consecutive Skipped Measurements: If you selected the Allow

Measurements to be Skipped check box, you can optionally select this
check box to create back-to-back Measurement Not Taken records.
The Meridium APM recommended best practice for Thickness Monitoring is to not create
and use Measurement Not Taken records in your TM Analyses. These check boxes are
cleared by default.
functions that are available on the Global Preferences page. The following task
menus are available on the Global Preferences page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Global Preferences page contains the following links:
Pick Another Family: This link is always disabled on the Global Preferences
page.
Reload: Updates the settings on the Global Preferences page with the values that
were last saved.
Save: Saves any changes that you have made on the Global Preferences page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Global Preferences page contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Global Preferences page.

Page.
Documents: This link is disabled on the Global Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Global Preferences page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Global Preferences page does not display any links. It
is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on the Global
Preferences page.
Choosing Whether to Use Interpolation

for Allowable Stress
Meridium APM uses reference tables to look up the Allowable Stress values for
performing T-Min calculations and for calculating Maximum Allowable Working
Pressure. You have two choices regarding how the stress reference tables will be used to
determine Allowable Stress when an exact match cannot be found:
You can specify that the lowest temperature in the established range should be
used.
You can specify that Meridium APM should use linear interpolation to determine
the Allowable Stress.
To specify whether or not you want to use interpolation for retrieving Allowable Stress
values:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Global Preferences page.
2. In the T-Min Calculator Preferences section, select the Use Interpolation for
Stress Reference Tables check box if you want to enable the use of interpolation.
Hint: You can clear the check box if you want to disable the use of interpolation.
The interpolation setting is saved, along with any other changes you have made to the
preferences on the Global Preferences page.
About the Auto Manage Tasks Setting

Thickness Monitoring Task records will be created automatically when you create a
Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment or TML Group record, or a record
that stores equipment or component data in a TM Analysis. The Meridium APM system
provides an option that allows Thickness Monitoring Task records to be updated
automatically when you make changes to a Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Auto Manage Tasks setting is disabled by default. If the Risk Based Inspection
license is active, you should accept the default setting because you will use the Task
records generated from RBI, rather than TM, to determine your inspection intervals. If
the Risk Based Inspection license is not active, you should enable the Auto Manage Tasks
setting.
Note: The Meridium APM system will create and update Thickness Monitoring Task
records automatically only if the Component ID setting is defined for family to which the
Thickness Measurement Location record is directly linked. If this setting is not defined,
an error message will appear when the Meridium APM system attempts to create the
Thickness Monitoring Task record.
Defining the Auto Manage Tasks Setting

To specify that you want the Meridium APM system to manage Thickness Monitoring
Task records automatically:
2. In the Tasks Setting section, select the Auto Manage Tasks check box.
Hint: You can clear the check box if you want to disable this functionality.
The setting is saved along with any other changes you have made to the settings on the
Global Preferences page.
Thickness Monitoring Task Fields

Updated Automatically by the Auto
Manage Tasks Setting
When the Auto Manage Tasks setting is enabled, the following fields in Thickness
Monitoring Task records will be updated when you make changes to a Thickness
Measurement Location record. The following list is not comprehensive.
Last Date: The value in the Last Date field is populated with the most recent
measurement date that is associated with the first Thickness Measurement
Location record referenced in the NID TMLs field in the associated Asset
Corrosion Analysis record.
For example, if the NID TMLs field contained the Entity Keys of the following
Thickness Measurement Location records in the following order, the most recent
measurement date (value in the Measurement Taken Date field in the linked Thickness
Measurement records) associated with TML 03 would be used to populate the Last Date
field in the Thickness Monitoring Task record:
TML 03
TML 14
TML 01
Desired Interval: The value in the Desired Interval field is populated with the
difference, in days, between the values in the Next Date and Last Date fields in
the Thickness Monitoring Task record.
For example, if the value in the Next Date field is 9/5/2038 and the value in the Last Date
field is 3/6/2012, the Desired Interval field would be populated with the value 9,679.
About Custom TML Corrosion Rates

The baseline Thickness Monitoring product includes several baseline TML-level
corrosion rates that you can choose to calculate for TML Corrosion Analyses. In addition
to using these baseline corrosion rates, you can optionally define custom corrosion rate
calculations to use within Thickness Monitoring. Using the options on the Global
Preferences page, you can define up to two custom calculations.
Before you can enable the use of custom corrosion rates, you must first create rules that
define those corrosion rates. Rules can be defined in the Rules Library in the
Configuration Manager application. This documentation assumes that the necessary rules
have already been defined.
When custom TML corrosion rate settings have been defined, you will see various
changes throughout Thickness Monitoring with respect to the baseline product where
custom corrosion rates are not enabled.
What Happens When Custom Corrosion

Rate Calculations Are in Use?
When custom TML corrosion rates are in place, you will see various changes throughout
Thickness Monitoring with respect to the baseline TM product.
Analysis Settings
When custom corrosion rate calculations are defined, they will appear in the Corrosion
Rate Options section of the Asset Analysis Settings window. For example, in the
following image, the calculations Custom Corrosion Rate A and Custom Corrosion Rate
B have been defined. The labels that you define for the custom calculations via the TM
global preferences will be displayed on the Asset Analysis Settings window.
Custom corrosion rate options will also appear on the TML Analysis Settings window.
These options are disabled on the TML Analysis Settings window because these options
are not defined at the TML-level.
TML Corrosion Analysis Record

When custom corrosion rate calculations have been defined, and the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record specifies that they should be calculated, the following fields will
be populated in all TML Corrosion Analysis records that are associated with that
Equipment or TML Group record, or the record that stores equipment or component data:
Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate

Custom Calculation A Loss
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate
Custom Calculation B Loss
These fields always exist in TML Corrosion Analysis records and are included by default
on the TML Analysis datasheet.
You can remove these fields from the datasheet via the Configuration Manager
application if you do not plan to use custom corrosion rate calculations. If you do plan to
use custom calculations, you can modify the baseline field and datasheet captions to
correspond to the labels that you have defined in the global preferences. The labels that
you define via the global preferences will not be applied to the family field and datasheet
captions automatically.
TML Analysis Plots

When custom corrosion rate calculations have been defined, and the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record specify that they should be calculated, the custom corrosion
rates will be displayed on the TML Analysis Plot page, except when:
The values in the Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate and Custom Calculation
B Corrosion Rate fields are set to 0, and the value in the Minimum Corrosion Rate
field in the TML Analysis Settings record is set to 0. In this case, no corrosion rate
line will be displayed.
The value in one Custom Calculation Corrosion Rate field is set to 0, the other
Custom Calculation Corrosion Rate field is set to a value greater than 0, and the
value in the Minimum Corrosion Rate field in the TML Analysis Settings record
is set to 0. In this case, only the corrosion rate line corresponding to the Custom
Calculation Corrosion Rate with a non-zero value will be plotted. For example, if
you set the value in the Custom Calculation A Corrosion Rate field to 0 and the
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate field to any value greater than 0, and
assuming the Minimum Corrosion Rate field in the linked TML Analysis Settings
record is set to 0, then only one corrosion rate line, corresponding to the value in
Custom Calculation B Corrosion Rate, will be plotted.
Points corresponding to measurements will be plotted regardless of whether any

corrosion rate line is displayed.
In the following example, in the following image, Custom Corrosion Rate A and Custom
Corrosion Rate B are displayed. The custom corrosion rates will be identified in the
legend using the labels that were defined in the TM global preferences.
Defining Custom Corrosion Rate

Settings
To define settings for custom corrosion rates:
2. In the Custom Corrosion Rate Options section, under the Custom Corrosion Rate
A heading, in the Label text box, type the label that you want to use for this
custom corrosion rate. You can click the
button to the right of the text box if
you want manage translations for that string.
3. To the right of the Calculation Rule text box, click the
button.
The Select Corrosion Rate Rule window appears.
4. In the left section of the window, navigate to and select the Rules Library folder
containing the project in which the desired rule is defined.
The middle section of the window is populated with a list of projects that exist in the
folder that you selected.
5. In the list of projects, select the project that containing the method that you want
to use for the corrosion rate rule.
The right section of the window is populated with a list of valid methods.
6. In the list of methods, select the one that contains the desired rule.
7. Click OK.
The Select Corrosion Rate Rule window closes.
8. If you want to define a second custom corrosion rate calculation, under the
Custom Corrosion Rate B heading, repeat the steps that you completed to define
custom corrosion rate A.
The custom corrosion rate settings are saved along with any other changes you have
made to the settings on the Global Preferences page.
About Settings for Measurement

Readings
The settings in the Readings Preferences section on the Global Preferences page allow
you to determine how the Meridium APM system will handle values entered into the
Readings field in Thickness Measurement records.
The Readings Preferences section contains the following settings:
Reading Tolerance: Determines how much variation is allowed between values in

the Readings field. When values are entered in the Readings field, they are
averaged. Then, the Reading Tolerance value is used to determine which values
fall within an acceptable range of the average value. If any of the values fall
outside of the acceptable range, the value in the Readings Pass/Fail field will be
set to Fail.
Note: The baseline TM product uses inches as the unit of measure for this setting. If you
are using a UOM Conversion Set that converts inches to another unit of measure, that
conversion will be applied to this setting.
Reading Calculation Method: Determines how values in the Readings field will
be used to populate the Thickness Measurement field. You can choose one of the
following calculation methods:
Average: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

calculated average value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Minimum: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

minimum value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Maximum: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

maximum value of all the values that exist in the Readings field.
Custom: The Uncorrected Measurement field will be populated with the

value that is calculated according to the calculation defined by the Custom
Rule for Readings Calculation setting.
Note: The value in the Uncorrected Measurement field is used to populate the Thickness
Measurement field.
Custom Rule for Readings Calculations: Specifies the rule that will be used to
calculate the Thickness Measurement value when the Reading Calculation
Method setting is set to Custom. To use a custom readings calculation, you must
first create a rule that defines the calculation that will be applied. Rules can be
defined in the Rules Library in the Configuration Manager application. This
documentation assumes that the necessary rules have already been defined.
Defining Settings for Measurement

Readings
To define settings for measurement readings:
2. In the Readings Preferences section, in the Reading Tolerance text box, type the
value that defines the range within which readings must fall in order to pass
evaluation.
3. In the Readings Calculation Method list, select the value that indicates how you
want Thickness Measurement values to be calculated based upon the values in the
Readings field. You can choose Average, Minimum, Maximum, or Custom.
4. If you selected Custom in the Readings Calculation Method list, to the right of the
Custom Rule for Readings Calculation text box, click the
button.
The Select Readings Calculation rule window appears.
5. In the left section of the window, navigate to and select the Rules Library folder
containing the project in which the desired rule is defined.
The middle section of the window is populated with a list of projects that exist in the
folder that you selected.
6. In the list of projects, select the project that containing the method that you want
to use for the corrosion rate rule.
The right section of the window is populated with a list of valid methods.
7. In the list of methods, select the one that contains the desired rule.
8. Click OK.
The Select Readings Calculation rule window closes.

The custom corrosion rate settings are saved along with any other changes you have
made to the settings on the Global Preferences page.
Configuring Nominal T-Min Lookup

Nominal T-Min is a value that represents the minimum thickness of a pipe based upon
accepted industry standards. The Nominal T-Min value takes into account various design
specifications and determines the minimum thickness associated with that criteria. The
Nominal T-Min value is retrieved using values from Thickness Measurement Location
records and records in the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table. Via the Nominal T-Min
Lookup settings, you can configure which fields you want to use for retrieving the
Nominal T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to
Equipment or TML Group records that represent pipes, or records that store equipment or
component data for pipes.
On the Global Preferences page, the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list contains a list
of all these fields that exist in the Piping Nominal T-Min family.
Each field in the Piping Nominal T-Min family corresponds to a field in the Thickness
Measurement Location family. By selecting a field in the Fields for Nominal T-Min
Lookup list, you are indicating that you want to use that field for looking up Nominal TMin values. This means that values in the associated fields in Thickness Measurement
Location records will be compared to values in the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table
and that a Nominal T-Min value will be returned only if a match is found. Any field that
is not selected in the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list will not be used for looking
up the Nominal T-Min value. In other words, values in those fields of Thickness
Measurement Location records are not required to match values in corresponding field in
the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table.
Note: If no fields are selected in the Fields for Nominal T-Min Lookup list, the Nominal
T-Min lookup feature will be disabled. In other words, a Nominal T-Min value will never
be retrieved automatically for any Thickness Measurement Location record.
To define Nominal T-Min Lookup settings:

2. In the Nominal T-Min Preferences section, in the Fields for Nominal T-Min
Lookup list, select the fields that you want to use for retrieving Nominal T-Min
values.

The Nominal T-Min settings are saved along with any other changes you have made to
the settings on the Global Preferences page.
Reloading Global Settings

After you have made changes to the settings on the Global Preferences page, you can
reload the settings to restore the most recently saved values.
To reload global settings:
2. On the Preferences Tasks menu, click the Reload link.
The global settings revert back to the most recently saved values.
Accessing the TM Color-Coding

Preferences Page
On various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring, Thickness Measurement records and
Thickness Measurement Location records will be color-coded if they meet certain
criteria. If desired, via the TM Color-Coding Preferences page, you can change the colors
that will be applied.
To access the TM Color-Coding Preferences page:

2. Click the Color-Coding Preferences link.
The TM Color-Coding Preferences page appears.
Aspects of the TM Color-Coding

Preferences Page
The TM Color-Coding Preferences page displays four color-coding settings:
Below T-Min: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records with a
Measurement Value that is below the Minimum Thickness value.
Overview Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Determines the color that will be
used to identify Thickness Measurement Location records in which the Next
Inspection Date or Retirement Date is past due.
High Loss: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records that meet
High Loss criteria and the loss percentage that defines High Loss criteria.
Growth: Determines the color that will be used to identify Thickness

Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records that meet
Growth criteria.
For each of these settings, two columns are displayed:
TML Color: Displays a colored square representing the color that will be used to
identify Thickness Measurement Location records that meet the color-coding
criteria.
Measurement Color: Displays a colored square representing the color that will be
used to identify Thickness Measurement records that meet the color-coding
criteria.
Note: The text N/A is displayed in the Measurement Color column for the Overdue
Inspection Date or Retirement Date setting since this condition does not apply to
Thickness Measurement records.
Color-Coding Tasks
The Color-Coding Tasks menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page contains the
following links:
Save: Save the current color-coding settings.

Reset Color Code: Resets the color-coding settings to the default colors.
Reload Color Code: Resets the color-coding settings to the most recently saved
values.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page contains the
following links:
Print: Displays the Print preview window, where you can print a table displaying
the color code.
Page.
Documents: This link is disabled on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM Color-Coding

Preferences page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page does not contain
any links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to display links on
the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Changing Color-Codes
To change the color-coding settings for Thickness Monitoring:
1. In the Meridium, APM Framework, access the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page.
2. In the TML Color or Measurement Color column, click the colored square for the
color that you want to modify.
The Color window appears.
3. In the Basic colors area, click the color that you want to use.
-orClick the Define Custom Colors button to define a custom color.
4. Click OK.
The color that you selected is now displayed on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page
for the entity family and condition that you selected. This color will be used for all
records that meet that condition. In the following image, the color for identifying growth
for Thickness Measurement Location records has been changed from blue to black.
5. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Save link.

The color-coding preferences that you have defined are saved, along with any other
changes to preferences that you have made on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Changing the High Loss Value
To change the high loss value:

1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page.
2. In the High Loss text box, type a numeric value that represents the percentage of
loss from one measurement to the next that constitutes high loss. In the following
image, the high loss value has been set to 45%.

The new high loss value is saved, along with any other changes to preferences that you
have made on the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Resetting Color-Coding Settings to

Default Values
On the TM Color-Coding Preferences page, you can reset the color-coding settings to
their default values, which are:
Below T-Min: Red.

Overdue Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Yellow.
High Loss: Magenta and 30%.
Growth: Blue.
To reset the color-coding settings:

page.
2. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Reset Color Code link.
The color-coding settings are reset to their default value as shown in the following image.

The color-coding settings are saved.
Reloading the Most Recent ColorCoding Settings

After you have made changes to the preferences on the TM Color-Coding Preferences
page, you can reload the most recently saved settings.
To reload the most recently saved color-coding settings:
page.
2. On the Color-Coding Tasks menu, click the Reset Color Code link.
The color-coding settings are reset to the most recently saved values.
The color-coding settings are saved.
Managing Thickness Monitoring Rules

Lookup Records
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records create a reference table of values that are
used by Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring for performing certain calculations. Like
all reference table records, Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records can be viewed
most easily in the Bulk Data Form or through a query. For your convenience, the TM
Administrative Tasks page contains a link that allows you to open Thickness Monitoring
Rules Lookup records in the Bulk Data Form, where you can view and modify the
reference table values as needed.
To open Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records in the Bulk Data Form:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the TM Administrative Tasks page, click the
Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup link.
The Bulk Data Form page appears, displaying all the records that exist in the Thickness
Monitoring Rules Lookup family.
Granting the TM Technician Role

When you record measurements in Thickness Measurement records, in the Measurement
Taken By list, you will need to select the name of the person who took the measurement.
Only people who have been granted the TM Technician role will appear in the
Measurement Taken By list.
To grant the TM Technician role to someone, you will need to:
Make sure that a Human Resource record exists to store that person's name.
-and
Link the Human Resource record to a Resource Role record that contains the
following values in the following fields.
Field
Value
Category Inspection
Role
TM Technician
Note: You can link Resource Role records to Human Resource records using the baseline
Human Resource with Role Details datasheet, which is defined for the Human Resource
family.
Keep in mind that Human Resource records can store information about people who are
not Meridium APM users and, therefore, do not have an associated Security User record
in the Meridium APM database. In some cases, the people who take measurements in the
field are not Meridium APM users. As long as those people have an associated Human
Resource record that meets the preceding criteria, they can still be selected in the
Measurement Taken By list as the person who took the measurement.
Note: When you create a Thickness Measurement record, if you have been granted the
TM Technician role, the value is set by default to your name. You can change the value
by selecting another name in the list.
Consider an example where John Smith takes measurements in the field but is not a
Meridium APM user. Therefore, no Security User record exists in the Meridium APM
database to store information about John Smith. A Human Resource record exists,
however, to record information about John Smith, including the fact that he takes
measurements in the field. The Human Resource record:
Contains the value John in the First Name field and the value Smith in the Last
Name field.
Is linked to a Resource Role record with the value Inspection in the Category field
and the value TM Technician in the Role field.
Using this example, the Human Resource and Resource Role records would look like
this:
Note: The Role list displays the System Codes that belong to the
MI_RESOURCE_ROLE System Code Table. The values are displayed using the ID and
the Description of the System Codes. Only the ID of the selected System Code, however,
is stored in the field.
Because these records exist, the TM Technician role has been granted successfully to
John Smith, and the Measurement Taken By list would contain the following value.
Note: Duncan, Amy appears by default because it is the name of the Security User who is
currently logged in to the Meridium APM system.
About Defining Fields for Measurement

Data Entry
By default, on the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page and TM Measurement Data
Entry pages, the Common Measurement Data section displays the following fields:
Measurement Taken Date

Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Measurement Taken By
When you enter values in these fields, the corresponding fields will be populated
automatically with those values in all new Thickness Measurement records that are
created on these pages.
Via the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page, you can add up to three
additional fields to the Common Measurement Data section of both these pages. In the
same way that values entered into the standard fields will be used to populate fields in
new Thickness Measurement records, the values that you enter in to any additional fields
will also be used to populate fields in the new records. Therefore, you will want to add
fields that store data that is common to all Thickness Measurement records. A red outline
has been added to the following image to highlight three fields that have been added to
the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Note: The Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages cannot be configured independently of one
another, meaning that whatever fields you select on the Common Measurement Data
Field Mappings page will appear in the Common Measurement Data section of both
pages.
With a few exceptions, you can add to the Common Measurement Data section any
baseline or custom Thickness Measurement field of the following type:
Character
Date
Logical
Numeric
Text
The following baseline fields cannot be added to the Common Measurement Data
section, as their baseline behavior makes them inappropriate for use as common data
fields: Historical Sequence Number, Corroded Area Measurement Values, Measurement
ID, and Measurement Value.
Accessing the Common Measurement

Data Field Mappings Measurement
Page
To access the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings Measurements page:
In the Meridium APM Framework, on the TM Administrative Tasks page, click

the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings link.
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page appears.
Overview of the Common Measurement

Data Field Mappings Page
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page allows you to define which fields
will appear in the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement
Data Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages.
The Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page consists of the following items:
Common Measurement Data Field Mappings workspace: Contains of three lists

of fields that belong to the Thickness Measurement family and can be added to
the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry pages.
Common Measurement Data Field lists: Contain Thickness Measurement fields

that you can select to add to the Common Measurement Data section. Each list
contains all character, date, text, and numeric fields that exist in the Thickness
Measurement family and have not already been added to the Common
Measurement Data section.
For example, if you select the fields as shown in the following image.
When you access either the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement
Data Entry page, the Common Measurement Data section of that page will look like the
following image. Red numbers have been added to the image to show the relationship
between the Common Measurement Data Field lists and the Common Measurement Data
section.
functions that are available on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings
page. The following task menus are available on the Common Measurement Data
Field Mappings page:
Preference Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Preference Tasks
The Preferences Tasks menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
contains the following links:
Pick Another Family: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement
Data Field Mappings page.
Reload: Reloads the field mapping configuration that was last saved.
Save: Saves the field mapping settings so that the selected fields will appear the
next time you access either the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry or TM
Measurement Data Entry page.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement Data Field
Mappings page.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Common Measurement Data

Field Mappings page.
Help: This link is not functional.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page
does not display any links. It is not possible to configure the Associated Pages menu to
display links on the Common Measurement Data Field Mappings page.
Adding Fields to the Common

Measurement Data Section
The following instructions provide details on adding fields to the Common Measurement
Data section of the TM Measurement Data Entry and TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
pages.
To add fields to the Common Measurement Data section:
1. In the Meridium APM Framework, access the Common Measurement Data Field
Mappings page.
2. In the Common Measurement Data Field lists that correspond to the locations in
which you want to add a field, select the names of the fields that you want to add
to the Common Measurement Data section.
You can select a value in any or all of the three lists. The following image shows a field
selected in each of the three Common Measurement Data Field lists.
Note: For any list where you do not select a value, the corresponding location will be
empty on the Common Measurement Data section.
The field mapping settings are saved.
Removing Fields from the Common

The following instruction provide details on removing a field that has previously been
added to the Common Measurement Data section of the TM Initial Measurement Data
Entry and TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Note: The Common Measurement Data section automatically includes the Measurement
Taken Date, Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit), and Measurement Taken By fields. These
fields cannot be removed. Only fields that have been added via the Common
Measurement Data Field Mappings page can be removed.
To delete fields from the Common Measurement Data section:
Mappings page.
2. In the Common Measurement Data Field list that corresponds to the location from
which you want to remove a field, select the blank value.
For example, the following image shows the blank value selected in the Common
Measurement Data Field 1 list.
3. Select blank values in additional lists, if desired.

4. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save button.
The field mapping settings are saved. The next time you access the TM Initial
Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement Data Entry page, the fields you removed
will no longer be displayed.
Modifying the Fields on the Common

Note: The Common Measurement Data section automatically includes the Measurement
Taken Date, Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit), and Measurement Taken By fields. These
fields cannot be modified. Only fields that have been added via the Common
Measurement Data Field Mappings page can be modified.
To modify the fields that appear in the Common Measurement Data section:
Mappings page.
2. In any Common Measurement Field Mapping list where a value is already
selected, select the name of the field that you want to appear instead.
3. On the Preference Tasks menu, click the Save button.
The field mapping configuration is saved. The next time you access the TM Initial
Measurement Data Entry or TM Measurement Data Entry page, the updated field
mapping will be used.
Installing Supporting Files for Devices

on Meridium APM Framework
Machines
If you will use one of the following supported devices to collect data that you will
transfer to the Meridium APM system, you must first install the supporting files on the
Meridium APM Framework machines that will connect to these devices:
Krautkramer Branson DMS Instrument

Krautkramer Branson DMS2 Instrument
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
You can install the supporting files using the Meridium APM Drivers installer.
To install the supporting files for supported devices on a Meridium APM Framework
machine:
1. On the Meridium APM Framework machine that will connect to the device, insert
the 3rd party DVD, and navigate to the folder \\Third Party Drivers for
APM\Meridium APM Drivers.
2. Double-click the file setup.exe.
A message appears, asking if you want to allow the installer to make changes to your
machine.
The Meridium APM Drivers dialog box appears, which contains a progress bar.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the Meridium APM Drivers installer appears,
displaying the Welcome screen.

The License Agreement screen appears.
5. Read the entire license agreement, and then select one of the following options:
o I accept the terms of the license agreement, if you agree to the terms of the
license agreement and want to continue. These instructions assume that
you want to continue.
o
I do not accept the terms of the license agreement, if you do not agree
to the terms of the license agreement and do not want to continue.
This option is selected by default. If you want to accept this selection,
click the Cancel button to exit the installer.
The Next button becomes enabled.

The Ready to Install the Program screen appears.
7. Click the Install button.

The Installing Meridium APM Drivers screen appears, displaying a progress bar that
indicates the status of the installation process.
After the progress bar reaches the end, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen
appears.

The Meridium APM Drivers installer closes. The supporting files for the following
devices are now installed on the Meridium APM Framework machine:
o
o

GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
The Navigation Menu

The Navigation menu appears throughout Thickness Monitoring and provides access to
features that are available in the Thickness Monitoring module.
When you are viewing an equipment-specific page in Thickness Monitoring, the

Navigation menu offers quick access to other features within the context of the
Equipment or TML Group records that you are currently viewing. For example, if you
access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record with the Record ID
Pump A39-5, you can click the Analysis Summary link on the Navigation menu to view
the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record with the Record ID Pump A39-5.
If you access a page in Thickness Monitoring for more than one Equipment record to
which TML Group records are linked (i.e., multiple Equipment nodes are displayed in the
TM Explorer pane), when you select an Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane and
then use the Navigation menu to go to a different page, that Equipment node will be
selected in the TM Explorer pane when the new page appears. If, however, the TM
Explorer pane includes multiple Equipment and TML Group nodes, and you select a
TML Group node and click a link on the Navigation menu, the node for the Equipment
record to which the TML Group record is linked will be selected in the TM Explorer pane
when the new page appears.
Note: The link for the page that you are currently viewing will always be disabled on the
Navigation menu. For example, when you are on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, the
TMLs and Measurements link will be disabled.
The Navigation menu in Thickness Monitoring contains the following links:
TM Start Page: Displays the Thickness Monitoring Functions page.

Analysis Summary: Displays the TM Analysis page, where you can view TM
Analysis summary information for the Equipment or TML Group records whose
nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
TMLs and Measurements: Displays the TM TMLs/Measurements page, where

you can manage all the Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records
whose nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
Measurement Data Entry: Displays the TM Measurement Data Entry page, where
you can record measurements for the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records whose nodes appear in
the TM Explorer pane.
Initial Measurement Data Entry: Displays the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
page, where you can quickly enter base measurements for the Thickness
Measurement Location records that:
o
Are linked to the Equipment or TML Group records whose nodes appear
in the TM Explorer pane.
-butAre not yet linked to a Thickness Measurement record.

DataLogger: Displays the Select a Device and Properties dialog box, from which
you can send data to or receive data from that device.
o
Quick View: Displays the TM Quick View page. This link is disabled if no
Thickness Measurement Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML
Group records whose nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
T-Min Calculator: After displaying a disclaimer explaining that the calculator is

not intended to be a comprehensive tool for calculating the T-Min value, displays
the T-Min Calculations page for the Equipment or TML Group records whose
nodes appear in the TM Explorer pane.
TM Explorers
The TM Explorer pane appears on various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring and
displays nodes in a tree that represent a hierarchy of the records that are linked to the
Equipment or TML Group records for which you accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane is displayed using a configured explorer that displays nodes
representing the following records:
The Equipment and/or TML Group record for which you accessed the page.
If the Equipment record for which you accessed the page is linked to TML
Group records, the TM Explorer pane will also display nodes for any TML
Group records that are linked to that Equipment record.
If you accessed the page for a TML Group record, the TM Explorer pane
will also display a node for the Equipment record to which the TML
Group record is linked.
The Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or
TML Group records.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to those Thickness

Note the following information about the TM Explorer pane:
Thickness Measurement nodes are displayed in the TM Explorer pane on the TM

TMLs/Measurements page only.
The TM Explorer pane on all pages in TM displays a maximum 20 levels of TML
Group nodes for a single Equipment node.
The configured explorers that are used to determine the content of the TM Explorer pane
are stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM Catalog:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers. These configured explorers
are created automatically when:
A user accesses any page in Thickness Monitoring and the configured explorers
do not already exist.
A user updates the Family Preferences for the Equipment or TML Group family.
If any of the configured explorers already exist, they will be overwritten with an
updated copy.
The following table provides a list of the configured explorers that are created and
updated automatically and identifies the page where each one is used.
This configured explorer:
...Is used on this page:
Archived Corrosion Analysis
TM Archived Analysis
TM Measurement Data Entry

Measurement Data Entry
TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
Quick View
TM Quick View
Summary Analysis
TM Analysis
T-Min Calculator
T-Min Calculations
TMLs and Measurements
TM TMLs/Measurements
All TM users should be granted create permissions to the folder

\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers so that the TM Explorer
pane can be created and updated as needed as your users navigate throughout the TM
product. TM users also need View/Execute permissions on the folder
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring and all its subfolders.
Because the TM configured explorers are created and updated automatically, you should
not modify them manually. Any changes that you make to the configured explorers will
be overwritten each time they are updated. In addition, you should not delete the
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers folder. If you do so, error
messages will appear when you try to access any page on which the configured explorers
are used.
About the Task Menu Pane in Thickness

Monitoring
The task menu pane in Thickness Monitoring differs from the task menu pane that is used
throughout the rest of the Meridium APM Framework application by offering options that
are not available in the rest of the product. In Thickness Monitoring, you can:
Hide the task menu pane.

View the task menus while the task menu pane is hidden.
Display the task menu pane after it has been hidden.
Change the width of the task menu pane.
Hiding the Task Menu Pane

In Thickness Monitoring, you can hide the task menu pane, providing a larger workspace.
This is especially useful on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, where the TMLs pane and
the Measurements pane contain many fields spread horizontally across the page.
To hide the task menu pane:
Click the button in the upper-right side of the task menu pane.
In the following image, the button is outlined in red.
The task menu pane collapses to the left side of the screen, and the
displayed. In the following image, the
button is
button is outlined in red.
Note that after you have hidden the task menu pane, you can view its contents by pausing
on the
button. In addition, you can choose to display the task menu pane again.
Viewing the Task Menus While the Task

Menu Pane is Hidden
While the task menu pane is hidden, if you need to access a function that is available on
one of the task menus, you can view the task menus.
To view the task menus while the task menu pane is hidden:
Click the
button on the left side of the page.
The task menu pane expands over the contents of the page that you are currently viewing.
When you click a link on a task menu that displays another page or dialog box or click
outside the task menu pane itself, the task menu pane will return automatically to the
hidden position.
Displaying the Task Menu Pane After it

Has Been Hidden
After the task menu pane has been hidden, you can return it to its original position on the
left side of the page.
To re-display the hidden task menu pane:
1. Click the
button on the left of the page.
The task menu pane will expand over the current screen contents on the left side of the
page.
2. Click the
button.
The task menu pane returns to its default position on the page.
Changing the Width of the Task Menu

Pane
Throughout the Meridium APM Framework application, a default width is used to
determine the amount of space in which the task menu pane is displayed. In Thickness
Monitoring, you can change the width of the task menu pane to make it larger or smaller
than the default width. Expanding the task menu pane can be useful on pages where the
labels for one or more task menu links exceed the default display width.
Note that you can specify how wide the task menu pane should be when it appears in the
default position, and you can specify how wide the task menu pane should be when a user
displays it briefly while it is in the hidden position.
To change the width of the displayed task menu pane:
With the task menu pane is in the default display position, click the divider on the
right side of the task menu pane that separates it from the rest of the page, and
drag it until the task menu pane is the desired width.
To change the width of the hidden task menu pane:

1. With the task menu pane hidden, click the
display the task menu pane.
button on the left side of the page to
The task menu pane appears.
2. Click the divider on the right side of the task menu pane, and drag it until the task
menu pane is the desired width.
The width that you select will be used when the task menu pane is visible from the
hidden position.
How is Color-Coding Applied?

Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records can be
color-coded for the conditions described in the following list, each of with has a default
color that can be modified via the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
Below T-Min: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is less than or equal to
the Minimum Thickness value for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The default color for this condition is red and can be applied to both Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records.
Note: Any Measurement Value that is less than or equal to the Minimum Thickness value
will be colored, including those taken prior to the Last Measurement. The TML ID for the
Thickness Measurement Location record, however, will be colored only if the Last
Measurement Value is less than or equal to the Minimum Thickness value.
Overdue Inspection Date or Retirement Date: Indicates that the Thickness

Measurement Location has a past-due Scheduled Next Inspection Date or
Retirement Date. The default color for this condition is yellow and applies only to
Thickness Measurement Location records.
High Loss: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is at least 30% less than the
Near Measurement Value. The default color for this condition is magenta and
applies to both Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness
Growth: Indicates that the Last Measurement Value is greater than the Near
Measurement Value. The default color for this condition is blue and applies to
both Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement
records.
Note: The criteria are listed in order of priority, red being the highest. If a record meets
the criteria for more than one color, the color with the highest priority will be applied.
Where is Color-Coding Applied?

On various pages throughout Thickness Monitoring, records will be color-coded if they
meet certain conditions. Color-coding lets you see at a glance whether certain conditions
exist for a given Thickness Measurement Location record or Thickness Measurement

record.
Color Coding will be applied to TML IDs and Measurement IDs on the TM
Color Coding will be applied to TML IDs and Measurement Values on the
following pages:
The TM Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
The TM Quick View page.
For example, the following image shows color-coded TML IDs and Measurement Values
on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: Typically, color coding will be applied when you enter or modify a value and then
move to another field. This allows you to see if the value you are entering meets any of
the color-coding criteria. The color-coding will not be made permanent or applied to the
Thickness Measurement record or the Thickness Measurement Location record until you
save your changes.
Creating a TM Analysis
The Meridium APM Thickness Monitoring module does not include a specific interface
for creating new corrosion analyses. Because a corrosion analysis consists of many
records, the process of creating a TM Analysis involves completing various steps
throughout the TM product. In this area of the documentation, we provide an overview of
the analysis-creation process and basic step-by-step instructions for completing each step
in the process. Additional details on completing each step are available in other areas of
this documentation.
To create a TM Analysis:
1. Identify the piece of equipment that needs to be analyzed. If an Equipment record

does not yet exist for this piece of equipment, create one.
2. Access the TM Analysis page for the Equipment record.
The TM Analysis page appears, displaying the Equipment record for which you accessed
the page as the root node in the TM Explorer pane.
3. Create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the Equipment record.

A Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked to the Equipment record.
Additionally, an Asset Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to
4. On the Navigation menu, click the TMLs and Measurements link to access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears.
5. If you are using TML Group records throughout your TM Analyses, create the
TML Group records that you want to associate with the root level Equipment
record.
Note: When you create a TML Group record, one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings
records may be created automatically and populated with values that are stored in the
Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to the Equipment record to which the
TML Group record is linked. When the Equipment record is linked to more than one
Corrosion Analysis Settings record (i.e., it is associated with more than one TML
Analysis Type), you will choose the TML Analysis Types for which you want to create
the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that will be linked to the TML Group record that
you create. Additionally, you can modify the values in this record, if desired.
6.
Create a Thickness Measurement Location record for the:

o
Equipment record if your TM Analysis does not contain TML Group

records.
-or5.
TML Group records, if your TM Analysis contains TML Group records.
7. On the Common Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
The Meridium APM system saves the Thickness Measurement Location

record and links it to the Equipment or TML Group record.
A TML Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to

the Thickness Measurement Location record.
A Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created automatically and linked

to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
If you created TML Group records for this TM Analysis, one Asset
Corrosion Analysis record is created and linked to each TML Group
record you created.
Create additional Thickness Measurement Location records, as needed. To create

a comprehensive analysis, you will probably create multiple Thickness
Measurement Location records for each Equipment or TML Group record.
Hint: You do not need to click the Save and Analyze link until you have created all the
desired records. When you save your changes on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, all
the necessary records will be created automatically for any new Thickness Measurement
Location record that you have added.
9. Create a Thickness Measurement record for the Thickness Measurement Location
records that you have created.
Recording Thickness Measurements is an ongoing task that will be performed throughout
the life of the equipment. When you first create an analysis, however, you should at least
record the base measurement for each Thickness Measurement Location record, if
possible. The base measurement is the first measurement recorded for the Thickness
Measurement Location record and becomes the starting point from which all other
measurements are compared. The base reading can be measured manually (actual) or may
be recorded from a standard (nominal), such as the design specification provided by the
equipment manufacturer. The Initial Measurement Data Entry page in Thickness
Monitoring is designed specifically for recording base measurements.
When you create subsequent Thickness Measurement records for a Thickness
Measurement Location record, the Meridium APM system can compare the new readings
to the base reading to determine the corrosion rates for that Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Depending upon your situation and the available data, when you are creating a new
analysis, you may need to record measurements in addition to the base measurement. For
example, you might create both the base measurement and the next measurement if you
are setting up an analysis for a piece of equipment that has existed in your plant for a year
and you are recording the base measurement from the design code and the next
measurement using an actual reading taken one year after installation.
After you have completed the preceding steps, all the basic components of a TM Analysis
will exist. Keep in mind, however, that a TM Analysis is a living document that will be
updated regularly. As time passes, you will create additional Thickness Measurement
records for each Thickness Measurement Location record, and the Meridium APM
system will recalculate various values in the Asset Corrosion Analysis and TML
Corrosion Analysis records based upon the new data. Instructions for managing the TM
Analysis throughout the life of the equipment are provided throughout this
documentation. You can use the following links for details on performing analysis tasks:
Modifying the Asset Analysis settings and TML Analysis settings.

Creating new TMLs.
Creating new Thickness Measurements.
Performing T-Min Calculations.
Excluding TMLs from an analysis.
Archiving an analysis.
Renewing TMLs.
Accessing the TM Analysis Page

The TM Analysis page displays the results of the TM Analysis for the record that is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. The TM Analysis page offers a customized view of
analysis records. This page is designed to provide a summary of the analysis and to
provide access to other features associated with the analysis, such as plots. We
recommend that you use the Thickness Monitoring workflow to view and manage
corrosion analyses.
You can open the TM Analysis page for multiple Equipment or TML Group records. For
TM Analyses that include both Equipment and TML Group records, if you access the TM
Analysis page for the Equipment record, you will be able to access summary information
for the TML Group and Thickness Measurement Location records by expanding the tree
To open an existing TM Analysis:

1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the Corrosion Analysis
Summary link.
2. Select the Equipment or TML Group family from the Search In list.
The Search results appear, displaying all the Record IDs that meet the specified criteria.
In the following image, all of the Record IDs for the Equipment family are displayed.
5. In the search results, select the record you want to open, and click the Open
button.
The TM Analysis page appears. The Equipment or TML Group record that you selected is
displayed as a node and is selected in the TM Explorer pane, and summary information
from the Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the selected Equipment or
TML Group record is displayed in the Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace.
Note: If a Corrosion Analysis Settings record is not linked to an Equipment or TML

Group record for which you accessed the TM Analysis page, a message will appear,
indicating that you must define Corrosion Analysis Settings before an analysis can be
performed.
Overview of the TM Analysis Page

The TM Analysis page contains the:
TM Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent the

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the TM Analysis
page and the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to those
Equipment or TML Group records.
Workspace:
If an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane,

the Corrosion Analysis Summary for <Asset ID> workspace, where
<Asset ID> is the Record ID of the selected Equipment or TML Group
record, is displayed. This workspace displays summary information from
each Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the selected
Equipment or TML Group record. Up to three Asset Corrosion Analysis
records may exist (UT, RT, and TML), depending upon the types of
Thickness Measurement Location records that are included in the TM
Analysis. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the Corrosion
Analysis Summary for <Asset ID> workspace as the Corrosion Analysis
Summary workspace.
If a Thickness Measurement Location node is selected in the TM Explorer

pane, the TML Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace,
where <TML ID> is the Record ID of the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record, is displayed. This workspace displays
summary analysis information for the selected Thickness Measurement
Location record. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace as the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details workspace.
Task menu pane: Displays task menus that provide you with quick access to
functions that are available on the TM Analysis page. The following task menus
are available:
Analysis Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Analysis page displays nodes in a tree, where each
node represents one of the following items:
An Equipment or TML Group record for which you accessed the page.
A record that is linked to an Equipment or TML Group record for which you
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Analysis page is displayed using the Summary Analysis
configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the Meridium APM
Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers.
The selected node determines what is displayed in the workspace on the TM Analysis
page:
When you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane, the
Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace will be displayed.
When you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer
pane, the TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace will be displayed.
Corrosion Analysis Summary

Workspace
When an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the
workspace on the TM Analysis page is titled Corrosion Analysis Summary for <Record
ID>, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected. In this case, the workspace displays information from the Asset
Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record. The
analysis summary contains a separate Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section for
each Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record. The heading in each area indicates the TML Analysis Type of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that were used to calculate the data in that section.
For example, if the selected Equipment or TML Group record has Thickness
Measurement Location records with RT and UT TML Analysis Types, the Corrosion
Analysis Summary workspace would contain a UT Analysis, Last Calculated on <date>
section and an RT Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section, as shown in the
following image.
The following table lists each Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section item and its
corresponding Asset Corrosion Analysis value.
Analysis, Last Calculated on Asset Corrosion

<date> section item
Analysis value
Controlling Corrosion Rate
(<Method>)
Controlling Corrosion
Rate
Scheduled Next Inspection

Date
Asset Controlling Next

Insp Date
Projected T-Min Date
Asset Controlling
Retire Date
Maximum Historical Corrosion Maximum Historical

Rate
Corrosion Rate
Note: The value that appears in parentheses below Controlling Corrosion Rate indicates
the method used to determine the corrosion rate and does not correspond to a field in the
Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
Two items that are displayed in the Analysis, Last Calculated on <date> section do not
correspond with values that are stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record:
Estimated Remaining Life From Today: Displays a value that is calculated for
viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
TMLs Below T-Min: Displays a list of the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to a Thickness Measurement record with a Measurement
Value that is below the Minimum Thickness value in the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Note: To the right of the values that are based on values in Thickness Measurement
Location records, you will see the text Based on: followed by a hyperlink to the TML
Corrosion Analysis for the Thickness Measurement Location on which the value is based.
TML Corrosion Analysis Details

Workspace
When a Thickness Measurement Location node is selected in the TM Explorer pane on
the TM Analysis page, the workspace is labeled TML Corrosion Analysis Details for
<TML ID>, where <TML ID> is the Record ID of the Thickness Measurement Location
record whose node is currently selected. Throughout the documentation, we refer to the
TML Corrosion Analysis Details for <TML ID> workspace as the TML Corrosion
Analysis Details workspace.
The Corrosion Data section of the TML Corrosion Analysis Details workspace displays
values that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the
Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer
pane:
Note: Below Controlling Corrosion Rate, the corrosion rate that was used as the
Controlling Corrosion Rate will be displayed: Short Term Corrosion Rate, Long
Term Corrosion Rate, Least Squares, or Minimum Corrosion Rate.
Long Term Corrosion Rate

Short Term Corrosion Rate
Least Squares Corrosion Rate
Scheduled Next Inspection Date
Interval Next Inspection Date
Factor Remaining Life Date
Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate
Allowable Measurement Variance Applied
Two items that are displayed in the Corrosion Data section do not correspond with values
that are stored in the TML Corrosion Analysis record:
T-Min Value: Displays the value that is stored in the Minimum Thickness field in
the associated Thickness Measurement Location record.
Estimated Remaining Life from Today: Displays a value that is calculated for
viewing purposes only and is not stored in the database.
An additional section, the Adjusted Corrosion Data section, is displayed in the TML
Corrosion Analysis Details workspace when, in the Asset Analysis Settings:
It is specified that the Average Corrosion Rate or Formula Corrosion Rate should
be calculated.
-and
The Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box is selected.
The following image shows an example of what the Adjusted Corrosion Data section
looks like:
The Adjusted Corrosion Data section displays values that are stored in the TML
Corrosion Analysis record. The following table lists each Adjusted Corrosion Data
section item and the corresponding TML Corrosion Analysis field.
Adjusted Corrosion Data

section item
Adjusted Corrosion Rate
TML Corrosion Analysis field

Asset Average Corrosion Rate
Adj Scheduled Next Inspection Asset Average Corrosion Rate

Date
Next Inspection
Adj Projected T-Min Date
Asset Average Corrosion Rate

Retirement Date
Adj Estimated Remaining Life Asset Average Corrosion Rate

from Today
Remaining Life
Analysis Tasks
The Analysis Tasks menu on the TM Analysis page contains the following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for
one or more different Equipment or TML Group records and display them on the
TM Analysis page. This link is enabled only when an Equipment or TML Group
node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Analysis Settings: Displays one of the following items, depending upon the type
of node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane. If:
An Equipment or TML Group node (representing a record for which

analysis settings are already defined) is selected, the Select Analysis Type
dialog box is displayed, where you can select the TML Analysis Type (UT,
RT, or TML) for which you want to view the associated analysis settings.
A Thickness Measurement Location node is selected, the TML Analysis

Settings window is displayed, where you can view and modify values that
are stored in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is associated with
the record whose node is selected.
Display Parent Asset: Refreshes the TM Explorer pane and the Corrosion
Analysis Summary workspace so that the Equipment record whose associated
TML Group record is currently represented by the root node in the TM Explorer
pane becomes the root node. This link is enabled when a TML Group record is the
root node in the TM Explorer pane.
Archive Corrosion Analysis: Lets you archive the current TM Analysis. This link
is enabled only if you are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness
Monitoring Inspector Security Group and an Equipment or TML Group node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Review Archived Analyses: Displays the TM Analysis Archive page, which

displays any archived analyses that exist for the Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only if an
Equipment or TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Exclude TMLs: Displays the Exclude TMLs dialog box, where you can choose
Thickness Measurement Location records to exclude from the TM Analysis. This
link is enabled only if you are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness
Monitoring Inspector Security Group and if an Equipment or TML Group node is
Statistical Details: Displays the TML Statistical Details dialog box, where you can
view various statistics that have been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis.
This link is enabled only when a Thickness Measurement Location node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane and if the Asset Analysis Settings specify that
the Least Squares Corrosion Rate should be calculated.
Plots: Displays the Asset Analysis Plot page, which shows a graph of the current
analysis. This link is enabled only if the TM Analysis contains active Thickness
View Tasks: Displays the Task List page in Task Management, where you can
view the Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to an Equipment or
TML Group record in the TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if one or more
Thickness Monitoring Task records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Reset MHCR: After displaying a confirmation message, resets the Maximum

Historical Corrosion Rate for the Asset Corrosion Analysis record or TML
Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the Equipment, TML Group, or
Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is selected in the TM
Explorer pane. This link is enabled only if:
You are a Super User or a member of the MI Thickness Monitoring

-and
o
The selected node represents an Equipment, TML Group, or Thickness

Measurement Location record that is linked to an Asset Corrosion
Analysis or TML Corrosion Analysis record whose Maximum Historical
Corrosion Rate field contains a value.
Formulas: Displays the Formulas dialog box, which displays the formulas that
are used to calculate the values displayed on the TM Analysis page.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Analysis page displays links to various Thickness
Monitoring features. This menu is common to most pages in Thickness Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Analysis page contains the following links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the TM Analysis page.

Page.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can

manage Reference Document records for the record represented by the node
that is selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when you
select a node in the TM Explorer pane that represents a record that is related
to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship. In the baseline Meridium APM database, this link is enabled
only when an Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM Analysis page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Analysis page displays links only if Associated
Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family,
the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
About Archiving Corrosion Analyses

When you archive an Asset Corrosion Analysis, you create a copy of the current, active
Asset Corrosion Analysis record and store it in a new Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
Archived Asset Corrosion Analysis records have the following characteristics:
They are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record that was selected when
you clicked the Archive Corrosion Analysis link through the Has Archived
Corrosion Analyses relationship.
They are not linked to Thickness Measurement Location records or Thickness
Measurement records. Thickness Measurement Location and Thickness
Measurement records remain linked only to the active Asset Corrosion Analysis.
They are linked to an Asset Analysis Settings record through the Has Archived
Corrosion Analysis Settings relationship. The Asset Analysis Settings record
stores a copy of the Asset Analysis Settings that existed at the time the analysis
was archived. This copy is created automatically when the Asset Corrosion
Analysis record is archived.
The value in the Analysis State field is set to Archived.
Archived Asset Corrosion Analysis records are meant to serve as a historical record of the
conditions that existed in the analysis at the time it was archived. Archiving an Asset
Corrosion Analysis can be useful if you want to:
Create a snapshot of the Asset Corrosion Analysis based on certain Asset Analysis
Settings, then modify the settings to see how they affect the analysis calculations.
Create a copy of the existing Asset Corrosion Analysis before making changes to
the related Thickness Measurement Location or Thickness Measurement records,
such as adding or excluding Thickness Measurement Location records.
Each Asset Corrosion Analysis can have one or more archived analyses. This means that
you can archive the current, active analysis as many times as you like to create as many
snapshots as you need.
Note: If you archive an Asset Corrosion Analysis for an Equipment record that is linked
to TML Group records, any Asset Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to the TML
Group records will also be automatically archived.
Archiving a Corrosion Analysis

To archive a TM Analysis:
1. On the TM Analysis page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Archive
Corrosion Analysis link.
A confirmation message appears, explaining that the Meridium APM system will archive
the analysis associated with the selected Equipment or TML Group record.
Meridium APM creates a copy of the Asset Corrosion Analysis record and stores it in a
new Asset Corrosion Analysis record, where the Analysis State is set to Archived. The
current page continues to display the active Asset Corrosion Analysis record. To view the
archived TM Analysis, you can click the Review Archived Analyses link on the Analysis
Tasks or TML/Measurement Tasks menu.
Accessing the TM Archived Analysis

Page
To view archived analyses for an Asset:
On the TM Analysis page, on the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Review Archived
Analyses link.
The TM Archived Analysis page appears.
Aspects of the TM Archived Analysis

Page
The TM Archived Analysis page displays a summary of the archived Asset Corrosion
Analyses that are linked to the currently selected Equipment or TML Group record. The
TM Archived Analysis Page contains the following main sections:
TM Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent the

Equipment and/or TML Group records for which you accessed the TM Archived
Analysis page and the records that are linked to those Equipment or TML Group
records. The TM Explorer pane on the TM Archived Analysis page is displayed
using the Archived Corrosion Analysis configured explorer, which is stored in the
following folder in the Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness
Monitoring\Explorers.
The node that you select in the TM Explorer pane will determine what page is displayed
in the workspace on the right side of the page. If you accessed the TM Archived Analysis
page for an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records, you can select any
TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane to view summary information for the archived
analysis associated with the TML Group record that the node represents.
Archived Corrosion Analysis Summary workspace: Displays the Archived

Corrosion Analyses that are linked to the selected Equipment or TML Group
record. The information for each archived analysis is divided into two sections:
Analysis Last Calculated on [date]: Displays information about the

archived analysis, including:
o
o
Scheduled Next Inspection Date
Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate
Settings: Displays information about the settings that were used to perform
the calculations that are displayed in the Analysis Last Calculated on
[date] section. The settings are stored in a copy of the Corrosion Analysis
Settings record that was created at the same time as the archived Asset
Corrosion Analysis record.
functions that are available on the TM Analysis Archive page. The following task
menus are available:
Archive Tasks
Navigation Tasks
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Archive Tasks
The Archive Tasks menu on the TM Archived Analysis page contains the following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for a
different Equipment or TML Group record and display it on the TM Archived
Analysis page.
are used to calculate the values displayed on the TM Archived Analysis page.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM Archived Analysis page displays links to various
Thickness Monitoring features. This menu is common to most pages in Thickness
Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM Archived Analysis page contains the following
links:
Print: This link is always disabled on the TM Archived Analysis page.

Page.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can

manage Reference Document records for the record represented by the node
that is selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when you
select a node in the TM Explorer pane that represents a record that is related
to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship. In the baseline Meridium APM database, this link is enabled
only when an Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the help topic for the TM Archived Analysis page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the TM Archived Analysis page displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the
entity family, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Excluding TMLs
Thickness Monitoring provides a feature that lets you exclude Thickness Measurement
Location records so that they will not be included in the TM Analysis. In other words,
excluded Thickness Measurement Location records will not be used in any calculations.
Only Super Users and members of the MI Thickness Monitoring Inspector Security
Group can exclude Thickness Measurement Location records from an analysis.
To exclude one or more Thickness Measurement Location record from an analysis:
1. On the TM Analysis page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing
the Equipment or TML Group record whose Thickness Measurement Location
record you want to exclude. The following image shows an Equipment node
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Exclude TMLs link.

The Exclude TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records that exist for the selected Equipment or TML Group record. If you
selected an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records, the list will include
any Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked either to the Equipment record
or TML Group records.
3. In the Exclude From Analysis column, select the check box for any Thickness
Measurement Location record that you want to exclude from the TM Analysis.
For example, in the following image, TML_0STCR UT Active has been selected
for exclusion from the analysis.
Hint: You can clear this check box for any previously excluded Thickness Measurement
Location records that you now want to include.
Your changes are saved, and a message appears, indicating that the Thickness
Measurement Location records were updated successfully.
After the Exclude TMLs dialog box closes, you can access TM TMLs/Measurements
page and scroll to the right in the TMLs grid to see that the Exclude From Analysis check
box is now selected for any Thickness Measurement Location record that you excluded.
In the following image, the Exclude From Analysis check boxes are outlined in red.
Resetting the Maximum Historical

Corrosion Rate
On the TM Analysis page, you can reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value in
an Asset Corrosion Analysis record (if an Equipment or TML Group node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane) or a TML Corrosion Analysis record (if a Thickness Measurement
Location node is selected in the TM Explorer pane). When you reset the Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rate for:
An Asset Corrosion Analysis record, the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate

field is populated with the Maximum Corrosion Rate value in the associated
A Thickness Measurement Location record, the Maximum Historical Corrosion

Rate field is populated with the TML controlling corrosion rate.
To reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate:

the Equipment, TML Group, or Thickness Measurement Location record whose
Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate you want to reset. The following image
displays a Thickness Measurement Location node selected in the TM Explorer
pane.
The workspace of the TM Analysis page is updated to display the information that is
associated with the node selected in the TM Explorer pane. The following image displays
the TML Corrosion Analysis Details for TML011 UT Active workspace. Note that the
current Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value is 10.001 Mils/year. This value has
been outlined in red.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Reset MHCR link.

The Confirm Reset MHCR dialog box appears, displaying a message that asks if you want
to reset the Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate.
The Maximum Historical Corrosion Rate value is reset in the Asset Corrosion Analysis
record or TML Corrosion Analysis record and the updated value is displayed in the
workspace of the TM Analysis page.
The following image shows an example of the TML Corrosion Analysis Details
workspace for the Thickness Measurement Location record with the Record ID TML011
UT Active. A red outline has been added to the image to highlight the updated Maximum
Historical Corrosion Rate value of 9.403 Mils/year.
About Creating Asset Analysis Settings

Before you can create Thickness Measurement Location records or view the analysis
summary for an Equipment or TML Group record, a Corrosion Analysis Settings record
that defines the analysis settings for that Equipment or TML Group record must exist.
You will first create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record manually for an Equipment
record for which you want to perform TM Analysis. Then, if your TM Analyses include
TML Group records, one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings records can be created
automatically using values from the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to
the Equipment record to which the TML Group record is linked. The number of
Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are created for a TML Group record depends
upon the number of Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are linked to the associated
Equipment record and the TML Analysis Types that you want to associate with your
TML Group records.
If more than one Corrosion Analysis Settings record exists for an Equipment record (i.e.,
more than one TML Analysis Type is associated with the Equipment record) for which
you create a TML Group record, you will select only the TML Analysis Types for which
you want to create Corrosion Analysis Settings records to link to the new TML Group
record. If the parent Equipment record is linked to only one Corrosion Analysis Settings
record, the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is created and linked automatically to
the TML Group record will inherit automatically the TML Analysis Type that is
associated with that Equipment record.
When you create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment record, an Asset
Corrosion Analysis record is created automatically and linked to that Equipment record.
Additionally, Asset Corrosion Analysis records are created automatically for any TML
Group records that you include in your TM Analyses.
Corrosion Analysis Settings records determine the TML Analysis Types in your TM
Analysis, and therefore, the types of Thickness Measurement Location records that you
can create for a given Equipment or TML Group record. When you create a new
Thickness Measurement Location record, the TML Analysis Type list on the New TML
dialog box will display only the TML Analysis Types that have been defined for the
selected Equipment or TML Group record.
You can modify the analysis settings for each Equipment and TML Group record as
desired.
The Corrosion Analysis Settings record that exists for an Equipment or TML Group
record will be used to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for any Thickness
Measurement Location record that is linked to that Equipment or TML Group record. If
desired, you can modify settings at the TML level after a Thickness Measurement
Location record has been created.
Creating Corrosion Analysis Settings

Records
You can use the following instructions to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record
manually for an Equipment record. This documentation assumes that all Corrosion
Analysis Settings records that are linked directly to TML Group records are created
automatically.
To create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment record:
the Equipment record for which you want to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings
record. The following image shows an Equipment node selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Analysis Settings link.

The Select Analysis Type dialog box appears, displaying one option for each of the
following baseline TML Analysis Types: UT, RT, and TML. The UT option is selected by
default.
3. Select the option that is associated with the TML Analysis Type for which you
want to create analysis settings, and click OK.
The Asset Analysis Settings window appears.
4. On the Asset Analysis Settings window, define the settings as desired.

Note: Fields on the Asset Analysis Settings window may contain values based upon
default rules that exist for the Corrosion Analysis Settings family. You can accept the
default values or specify values of your own.
5. Click the Create Settings button.
o If you are creating a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment
record that is not linked to at least one TML Group record, a message
appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment record
have been updated successfully. In this case, you have completed all the
necessary steps, and the Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and
linked to the Equipment record.
o
If you are creating a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for an Equipment

record that is linked to TML Group records, and one or more of those
TML Group records are not currently associated with analysis settings for
the TML Analysis Type that you selected on the Select Analysis Type
dialog box, the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion
Analysis Settings dialog box appears, displaying the TML Group records
to which you can spread the analysis settings (i.e., create a Corrosion
Analysis Settings record automatically). All of the check boxes are
selected by default. In this case, proceed to the next step of these

instructions.
6. On the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings

dialog box:
o Accept the default selection, and click OK.
-oro
Clear the check box to the left of any TML Group record to which you do
not want to spread the analysis settings that you are creating for the
associated Equipment record, and click OK.
Note: You can also use the Select All and Clear All buttons to select and clear check
boxes on the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings
dialog box.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment record have
been updated successfully. Additionally, one Corrosion Analysis Settings record is
created for the Equipment record, and one Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created
for each TML Group record that you selected on the Select Spreading of <TML Analysis
Type> Corrosion Analysis Settings dialog box.
Accessing Existing Asset Analysis

Settings
To access the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record:
the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis settings you want to view.
The following image displays a node representing an Equipment record selected
The Select Analysis Type dialog box appears, displaying options for TML Analysis
Types. The options that appear on the Select Analysis Type dialog box will differ,
depending upon the type of node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane:
o
If an Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Select

Analysis Type dialog box displays one option for each of the following
baseline TML Analysis Types: UT, RT, and TML. The UT option is
If a TML Group node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Select

Analysis Type dialog box displays one option for each TML Analysis Type
for which analysis settings currently exist for the TML Group record
represented by the selected node. The following image shows the Select
Analysis Type dialog box when the selected node represents a TML Group
record for which analysis settings for the following TML Analysis Types
exist: TML and UT.
3. Select the option that is associated with the TML Analysis Type for which you
want to access analysis settings, and click OK.
The Asset Analysis Settings window appears, displaying the analysis settings for the
selected Equipment or TML Group record. From this dialog box, you can modify the
current settings if desired.
Modifying Asset Analysis Settings

If needed, you can modify the analysis settings for an Equipment or TML Group record
after the Corrosion Analysis Settings record exists. If you modify the analysis settings for
an Equipment record that is linked to TML Group records or Thickness Measurement
Location records, you will have the option of applying the modified settings to those
records as well.
To modify the Asset analysis settings:

1. Access the Asset Analysis Settings window for the Equipment or TML Group
record whose settings you want to modify.
2. Make the desired changes.
3. Click the Update Settings button.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record have been updated successfully.
o
If a selected Equipment record is not linked to TML Group or Thickness

Measurement Location records, the Asset Analysis Settings window
closes, and the TM Analysis is updated using the new settings.
If a selected Equipment or TML Group record is linked to Thickness

Measurement Location records for which analysis settings are already
defined, the Select Dependencies For Update builder appears and displays
those Thickness Measurement Location records. If this occurs, skip to step
6.
If a selected Equipment record is linked to TML Group records for which

analysis settings of the same TML Analysis Type are already defined, the
Select Dependencies For Update builder appears. The following
instructions assume that this has occurred.
4. In the grid that appears on the Select Dependencies For Update builder, in the
Process column, select the TML Group records whose analysis settings you want
to update. Above the grid, you can select or clear the All check box to select or
clear every check box in the Process column. In the following image, the TML
Group records with Record IDs AQA-10TMLS-01 and AQA-10TMLS-03 are
selected.
Note: The Meridium APM system will update only the specific fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that were changed for the Equipment record in step 2.
The next screen on the Select Dependencies For Update builder appears.
6. In the Process column, select the check box for each Thickness Measurement
Location record whose settings you want to update with the updated settings.
Above the grid, you can select or clear the All check box to select or clear every
check box in the Process column.
Note: The Meridium APM system will update only the specific fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that were changed for the Equipment record in step 2.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record and all selected dependent settings have been updated successfully, and the TM
Analysis is updated according to the new settings.
Details of the Asset Analysis Settings

The Asset Analysis Settings window displays the analysis settings that are currently
configured for the selected Equipment or TML Group record, and provides a custom view
of fields that exist in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to a given
The Asset Analysis Settings window is divided into two sections:
Asset Corrosion Rate

TML Corrosion Rate
Asset Corrosion Rate Section
The Asset Corrosion Rate section on the Asset Analysis Settings window displays settings
that you let you specify how corrosion rates will be calculated.
The Asset Corrosion Rate section displays the following items:
Controlling Corrosion Rate (CCR) area: Displays one option for each type of
corrosion rate that can be used as the Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Asset
Corrosion Analysis. The following options are displayed:
Average: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be calculated as the average of the Controlling
Corrosion Rates from linked Thickness Measurement Location records.
Formula: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be determined using the statistical method.
Maximum: The Controlling Corrosion Rate for the Equipment or TML

Group record will be set to the highest Controlling Corrosion Rate for
linked Thickness Measurement Location records.
Comments text box: Displays information that is related to the settings defined in
the Asset Corrosion Rate section. The information that you type in this text box is
for informational purposes only and is not used by the Meridium APM system.
Apply CCR to TML Rem Life Next Insp Date Calc check box: A setting that
specifies whether or not the Asset Controlling Corrosion Rate will be used to
calculate the Asset Average Corrosion Rate, Asset Average Corrosion Rate
Remaining Life, Asset Average Corrosion Rate Retirement Date, and Asset
Average Corrosion Rate Next Inspection Date, in which case those averages will
be rolled up to the "controlling" values on the Asset Corrosion Analysis. This
option applies only when you are using the Average or Formula method for
calculating the Controlling Corrosion Rate.
Average Calculation Options area: Displays text boxes for options that apply
when you select Average as the method for calculating the Controlling Corrosion
Rate for the Equipment or TML Group record. The following text boxes are
displayed:
Safety Factor: Displays the value by which the standard average corrosion
rate will be multiplied to determine the Average Corrosion Rate for the
Minimum Number of TMLs: Displays the minimum number of Thickness

Measurement Location records that should be used for calculating the
Average Corrosion Rate when some Thickness Measurement Location
records are eliminated by the Percentile setting.
Percentile: Displays a value representing the percentage of Thickness

Measurement Location records that will be used to calculate the average
corrosion rate. For example, if you type the value 80 in this text box, only
the 80% of Thickness Measurement Location records with the highest
corrosion rates will be used for calculating the Average Corrosion Rate.
The following items appear below the Asset Corrosion Rate section:
Std Deviation factor text box: Displays a value that determines where the upper
limit and lower limit will be drawn on the Asset Analysis Plot. For example, if
you type a value of 2 in the Std Deviation Factor text box, the upper limit and
lower limit lines will be drawn to represent a standard deviation of 2. This value
can help you see at a glance by looking at the Asset Analysis Plot whether or not
all of the corrosion rates fall within a desired range. This value is also used for
determining outliers when the Statistical Corrosion Rate method is used.
Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs text box: Displays the number of
Thickness Measurement Location records to use when calculating the Asset
Calculated Remaining Life. If you type the value 1 in this text box, the most
conservative (i.e., shortest) Remaining Life value from the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record will be used. If you specify a value greater than 1, that number of the most
conservative Remaining Life values will be averaged from the Thickness
record. The Remaining Life Critical Number of TMLs is 1 by default.
TML Corrosion Rate Section

The TML Corrosion Rate section on the Asset Analysis Settings window displays settings
that you let you specify how corrosion rates will be calculated for Thickness
The TML Corrosion Rate section displays the following items:
Corrosion Rate Options area: Displays one check box for each corrosion rate type
that can be calculated for Thickness Measurement Location records. Select the
check box for each corrosion rate that you want to be calculated for Thickness
record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Settings window. If you do not
select a given check box, that corrosion rate will not be calculated. If you do not
select any corrosion rate options, the corrosion rate will not be calculated. The
following check boxes are displayed:
Least Squares: A calculation based upon the least squares estimation

method.
Long Term: A corrosion rate calculated using the Base Measurement and
the Last Measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Short Term: A corrosion rate calculated using the Near Measurement and
the Last Measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: If none of the check boxes in the Corrosion Rate Options area are selected, the
Minimum Corrosion Rate will be used by default in the TM Analysis.
Default Inspection Interval text box: Displays the value that will be used for
calculating the Interval Next Inspection Date for a Thickness Measurement
Location record. While you define a default value for the inspection interval at the
Asset Analysis level, you can modify the inspection interval for individual
Thickness Measurement Location records via the TML Analysis Settings. To the
right of the Default Inspection Interval text box, the Unit of Measure associated
with the Default Inspection Interval is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
depending upon the UOM Conversion Set associated with your Security User
account.
Inspection Interval Options area: Displays one check box for each option that you
can select to determine which inspection dates should be calculated for Thickness
Measurement Location records, and therefore, how the Scheduled Next Inspection
Date will be determined. The following text boxes are displayed:
Factor Remaining Life: The Factor Remaining Life Date will be

calculated using the Remaining Life Factor.
Inspection Interval: The Interval Next Inspection Date will be calculated

using the Default Inspection Interval.
Default T-Min text box: Displays the value that will be used as the Default T-Min
value on the T-Min Calculations page. If a corrosion analysis is performed on a
Thickness Measurement Location record with no value in the Minimum

Thickness field, the Meridium APM system will populate the Minimum
Thickness field with this value and use this value as the minimum thickness value
for the TM Analysis. This value is 0 (zero) by default. To the right of the Default
T-Min text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Default T-Min is
displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion
Set associated with your Security User account.
Minimum Corrosion Rate text box: Displays a default value is provided for new
Thickness Measurement Locations. This rate will be used as the Controlling
Corrosion Rate for the Thickness Measurement Location record whenever a
corrosion rate based on the data cannot be calculated. The Minimum Corrosion
rate is 5 Mils/year by default. To the right of the Minimum Corrosion Rate text
box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Minimum Corrosion Rate is
Use Minimum Corrosion Rate check box: A setting that specifies whether or not
you want to use the Minimum Corrosion Rate when the calculated corrosion rate
for a Thickness Measurement Location record is less than the specified Minimum
Corrosion Rate. If this check box is selected, when the Meridium APM system
calculates a corrosion rate for a Thickness Measurement Location record that is
less than the Minimum Corrosion Rate, the Minimum Corrosion Rate will be
used in place of the calculated value as the Thickness Measurement Location
record's Controlling Corrosion Rate.
Note: If the Use Minimum Corrosion Rate check box is cleared and only one Thickness
Measurement record is linked to a Thickness Measurement Location record, the
Minimum Corrosion Rate will still be used as the Controlling Corrosion Rate. The
Minimum Corrosion Rate will not be used if there are no Thickness Measurement records
linked to a Thickness Measurement Location record.
Remaining Life Factor text box: Displays a value that will be used in calculating
the Factor Remaining Life Date. The value in this text box should be the number
by which you want to multiply the Remaining Life in order to determine the
Scheduled Next Inspection Date. The value must be greater than 0 (zero) and less
than or equal to 1.
Allowable Measurement Variance text box: Displays a value that characterizes
how much difference is allowed between the values in the Measurement Value
fields of the two most recent Thickness Measurement records. Allowable
Measurement Variance will not be considered when thickness measurements are
evaluated if the value in this text box is 0 (zero). To the right of the Allowable
Measurement Variance text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the
Allowable Measurement Variance is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
account.
Corrosion Rate Variance text box: Displays a value that represents the amount of
variation that is allowed between the Short Term Corrosion Rate for a given
Thickness Measurement Location record and the Minimum Corrosion Rate
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings. If this value is 0 (zero), Corrosion Rate
Variance validation will not be performed.
Accessing Existing TML Analysis

Settings
TML analysis settings define certain values and parameters that will be used by the TML
Corrosion Analysis. TML analysis settings, in addition to the settings defined in the
associated Corrosion Analysis Settings and Asset Corrosion Analysis records are used to
define all the settings that will be used in a given TM Analysis. Most analysis settings are
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level. A few, however, can be defined at the
TML level and apply to the specific Thickness Measurement Location record for which
they are defined.
To access the TML analysis settings for a Thickness Measurement Location record:
On the TM Analysis page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing
the Thickness Measurement Location record whose settings you want to modify. The
following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement Location record

The TML Analysis Settings window appears.
Modifying TML Analysis Settings

To modify the TML analysis settings:
1. Access the TML Analysis Settings window for the Thickness Measurement
Location record whose settings you want to modify.
2. Make the desired changes.
3. Click the Update Settings button.
A message appears, indicating that the settings for the selected Thickness Measurement
Location record have been updated successfully.
Details of the TML Analysis Settings

You can use the TML Analysis settings window to define values and parameters that will
be used by the TML Corrosion Analysis.
The following items are enabled on the TML Analysis Settings window and can be
defined for an individual Thickness Measurement Location record. Additional, disabled
items are displayed on the TML Analysis Settings window. These disabled items apply to
the Asset Corrosion Analysis and cannot be modified at the TML level; they must be
defined at the Equipment or TML Group level.
Std Deviation Factor text box: Displays a value that determines where the upper
limit and lower limit will be drawn on the Asset Analysis Plot. For example, if
you type a value of 2 in the Std Deviation Factor text box, the upper limit and
lower limit lines will be drawn to represent a standard deviation of 2. This value
can help you see at a glance by looking at the Asset Analysis Plot whether or not
all of the TML corrosion rates fall within a desired range. This value is also used
for determining outliers when the Statistical Corrosion Rate method is used.
Default Inspection Interval text box: Displays the value that will be used as the
Default Inspection Interval. To the right of the Default Inspection Interval text
box, the Unit of Measure associated with the Default Inspection Interval is
Minimum Corrosion Rate text box: Displays a value that represents the default
corrosion rate that will be used if the Thickness Measurement Location record
does not have enough measurement data for the Meridium APM system to
calculate a corrosion rate or if criteria dictate that the corrosion rate should not be
calculated. Note that:
In the Asset Analysis Settings, you can select or clear the Use Minimum
Corrosion Rate check box. When this check box is selected, the Minimum
Corrosion Rate will be used as the Thickness Measurement Location
record's Controlling Corrosion Rate whenever the calculated corrosion
rate for a Thickness Measurement Location record is less than the
specified Minimum Corrosion Rate.
Whenever the Minimum Corrosion Rate is used instead of a calculated

corrosion rate, the Minimum Corrosion Rate Used check box will be
selected in the TML Corrosion Analysis record.
To the right of the Minimum Corrosion Rate text box, the Unit of Measure
associated with the Minimum Corrosion Rate is displayed. The Unit of Measure
may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion Set associated with your
Security User account.
Allowable Measurement Variance text box: Displays a value that characterizes
how much difference is allowed between the values in the Measurement Value
fields of the two most recent Thickness Measurement records. Allowable
Measurement Variance will not be considered when thickness measurements are
evaluated if the value in this text box is 0 (zero). To the right of the Allowable
Measurement Variance text box, the Unit of Measure associated with the
Allowable Measurement Variance is displayed. The Unit of Measure may vary,
account.
Corrosion Rate Variance text box: Displays a value that represents the amount of
variation that is allowed between the Short Term Corrosion Rate for a given
Thickness Measurement Location record and the Minimum Corrosion Rate
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings. If this value is 0 (zero), Corrosion Rate
Variance validation will not be performed.
Accessing the Asset Corrosion Analysis

Plot
To access the plot for an Asset Corrosion Analysis:
the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis plot you want to view. The
following image shows the node representing an Equipment record selected in the
TM Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Plots link.

If the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to only one active Asset Corrosion
Analysis record, the Asset Analysis Plot page appears.
-orIf the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to more than one active Asset Corrosion
Analysis record (meaning that the Equipment or TML Group record is linked to
Thickness Measurement Location records of more than one TML Analysis Type), the
Select Analysis Type dialog box appears.
3. Select the type of Asset Corrosion Analysis whose plot you want to view, and
click OK.
The Asset Analysis Plot page appears.
Aspects of the Asset Analysis Plot

The Asset Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to an Equipment or TML Group record.
The Controlling Corrosion Rate for each Thickness Measurement Location record is
plotted as a bar on the graph.
The Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following items:
Asset Analysis Plot workspace: Displays a bar graph that displays the controlling
corrosion rate for each TML Group record or Thickness Measurement Location
record that is linked to the Equipment record for which you accessed the Asset
Analysis Plot page.
functions that are available on the Asset Analysis Plot page. The following task
menus are available on the Asset Analysis Plot page:
Plot Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Asset Analysis Plot Graph

The main workspace of the Asset Analysis Plot page displays a bar graph that shows the
controlling corrosion rate of each Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked
to the Equipment or TML Group record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page.
If your TM Analysis:
Includes TML Group records and you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot page for an
Equipment record that is linked to one or more TML Group records, the graph
will show the controlling corrosion rate associated with each TML Group record
that is linked to the Equipment record. If you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page for a TML Group record, the graph will show the controlling corrosion rate
associated with each Thickness Measurement Location record that is linked to the
TML Group record.
Does not include TML Group records, the graph will show the controlling
corrosion rate associated with each Thickness Measurement Location record that
is linked to the Equipment record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot
page.
Three lines may also be drawn on the graph: Upper Limit, Average, and Lower Limit. The
Average line represents the average corrosion rate for all TML Group or Thickness
Measurement Location records. Note that this average is always based upon ALL
Thickness Measurement Location records linked to a given Equipment or TML Group
record, even if some Thickness Measurement Location records are excluded from
calculating the average Asset Controlling Corrosion Rate.
The Upper Limit and Lower Limit lines are drawn using the Standard Deviation Factor
defined in the Asset Analysis Settings.
Note: You can right-click any bar on the graph and then click Drill-down to access the
TML Analysis Plot for the selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
Plot Tasks
The Plot Tasks menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Copy Plot: Creates a copy of the plot so that you can paste it into another
application.
Plot Print Preview: Displays the Print Preview window, where you can define
print settings and print the plot.
Select Bad Actors: Displays the Filter Criteria dialog box, where you can select
the percentage of Thickness Measurement Location records or TML Group
records to include in the plot. This link is enabled only if:
The Equipment or TML Group record is linked to more than ten Thickness
-or
o
The Equipment record is linked to more than ten TML Group records.
Remove Filter: Removes any filters that you specified on the Filter Criteria
dialog box. This link is enabled only if you specified a filter on the Filter Criteria
dialog box.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Print dialog box, where you can specify how you want to print
the plot.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the Asset Analysis Plot page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the Asset Analysis Plot page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages menu on the Asset Analysis Plot page displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the family of the Equipment or TML Group
record for which you accessed the Asset Analysis Plot page. Otherwise, the Associated
Pages menu will be empty.
Accessing the TML Analysis Plot Page

The TML Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the measurement data
and corrosion rates that exist for a given Thickness Measurement Location record.
To access the TML Analysis Plot page:
the Thickness Measurement Location record whose plots you want to access. The
following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement Location
record in the TM Explorer pane.
2. On the Analysis Tasks menu, click the Plots link.

The TML Analysis Plot page appears.
Aspects of the TML Analysis Plot Page

The TML Analysis Plot page provides a visual representation of the Thickness
Measurement records that have been recorded and the corrosion rates that have been
calculated for each Thickness Measurement Location record. The plot will display one
line for each corrosion rate that has been calculated, including Long Term, Short Term,
Least Squares, and any custom corrosion rate that has been defined.
Note: The analysis settings defined for the Equipment or TML Group record determine
which corrosion rates will be calculated for each Thickness Measurement Location record
that is involved in a corrosion analysis.
In addition to the lines representing corrosion rates, the Minimum Thickness line also
appears. By locating the intersection of each corrosion rate line with the Minimum
Thickness line, you can see the date on which the TML will reach the minimum
thickness, based upon projection for that corrosion rate.
The TML Analysis Plot page contains of the following items:
TML Analysis Plot workspace: Displays the plot for the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record.
functions that are available on the TML Analysis Plot page. The following task
menus are available on the TML Analysis Plot page:
Plot Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
Plot Tasks
The Plot Tasks menu on the TML Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Copy Plot: Creates a copy of the plot so that you can paste it into another
application.
Plot Print Preview: Displays the Print Preview window, where you can define
print settings and print the plot.
Statistical Details: Displays the TML Analysis Details dialog box, where you can
view the statistical details of the TML Corrosion Analysis.
Note: The Statistical Details link will be enabled only if the Least Squares Corrosion
Rate has been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis, as determined by the Asset
Analysis Settings.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TML Analysis Plot page displays links to various Thickness
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TML Analysis Plot page contains the following links:
Print: Displays the Print dialog box, where you can specify how you want to print
the plot.
Page.
Documents: This link is always disabled on the TML Analysis Plot page.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TML Analysis Plot page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages on the TML Analysis Plot page menu displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the Thickness Measurement Location family.
Otherwise, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Viewing the Statistical Details

If the Least Squares Corrosion Rate has been calculated for the TML Corrosion Analysis,
you can access statistical details from the TML Analysis Plot page. The following
instructions provide details on accessing this statistical information from the TML
Analysis Plot page. You can also access these details from the TM Analysis page by
clicking the Statistical Details link on the Analysis Tasks menu.
To view the statistical details of a TML analysis plot:
On the TML Analysis Plot page, on the Plot Tasks menu, click the Statistical
Details link.
The TML Analysis Details dialog box appears.
Aspects of the Statistical Details

The TML Analysis Details dialog box displays the following statistical information about
the TML:
Descriptive Statistics
Minimum: The lowest Thickness Measurement value recorded for the TML. In a
typical TML Corrosion Analysis, this will be the Last Measurement Value, or the
Thickness Measurement that was recorded most recently.
Maximum: The highest Thickness Measurement value recorded for the TML. In a
typical TML Corrosion Analysis, this will be the Base Measurement Value, or the
Thickness Measurement that was recorded first chronologically.
Range: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value (i.e.,
Maximum - Minimum). This value represents the total amount of corrosion that
has occurred at the TML.
Mean Abs. Deviation: A value that represents the average difference (i.e.,
deviation) of the Thickness Measurements from the mean measurement value.
This value is calculated by summing the difference between all measurement
values and the mean measurement value and dividing that value by the number of
measurements.
Mean: The average thickness of the TML, calculated by dividing the sum of all
Thickness Measurements by the number of measurements that have been recorded
for the TML.
Variance: A value that helps you determine how spread out the Thickness
Measurement values are.
Standard Deviation: A value that helps you determine how spread out the
Thickness Measurement values are. This value is calculated as the square root of
the Variance.
Skewness: A value that represents how symmetrical the Thickness Measurement

values are with respect to the center point. A negative number indicates that the
values are skewed to the left. A positive number indicates that the values are
skewed to the right.
Kurtosis: A value that indicates the peakedness of a distribution of Thickness

Measurements for the TML.
Linear Regression (Least Squares)
Valid: An indicator of whether or not the linear regression is valid (i.e., whether or
not the Least Squares Corrosion Rate is a reliable indicator of the TML corrosion
rate). A value of True means that it is valid; False indicates that it is invalid.
Meridium APM makes this determination by evaluating the statistical values that
have been calculated for the TML.
R2: A value that indicates how close the least squares regression line comes to the
actual, plotted Thickness Measurement values. A value of 1 (one) indicates a
perfect fit. As this value approaches zero, the fit becomes worse.
Chi-Squared: A value that indicates the quality of the fit of measurements with
respect to the least squares linear regression.
Min. Bound: The minimum X value used for plotting the least squares linear
regression. In this case, the Minimum Bound is 0, as the first plotted value is
recorded at the Base Measurement Date, or zero days.
Max. Bound: The maximum X value used for plotting the least squares linear
regression. In this case, the Maximum Bound is equal to the difference in days
between the Last Measurement Date and the Minimum Bound.
About the TM TMLs/Measurements

Page
You can use the TM TMLs/Measurements page to view and manage the Thickness
Measurement Location and Thickness Measurement records in a TM Analysis. If your
TM Analyses include TML Group records, you can also view and manage those records
using this page.
On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, you can:
View and manage all the Thickness Measurement Location records and Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to a given Equipment or TML Group record.
Access more information about any Thickness Measurement Location record or
Thickness Measurement record.
Perform various tasks related to Thickness Measurement Location records and
Thickness Measurement records, such as:
Create Thickness Measurement Location records.
Modify Thickness Measurement Location records.
Delete Thickness Measurement Location records.
Create Thickness Measurement records.
Modify Thickness Measurement records.
Delete Thickness Measurement records.
Perform various tasks related to TML Group records, such as:
Create TML Group records.
Modify TML Group records.
Link TML Group records to RBI Components.
Delete TML Group records.
Accessing the TM TMLs/Measurements

Page
The following instructions provide steps for accessing the TM TMLs/Measurements page
via the Thickness Monitoring Functions page. You can also access the TM
TMLs/Measurements page via the Navigation menu that appears throughout the TM
module.
To access the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
1. On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the TMLs/Measurements link.
2. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group records whose Thickness
Measurement Location records and Thickness Measurement records you want to
manage.
3. In the results list, select the Equipment or TML Group records for which you want
to access the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and then click the Open button.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears, displaying the Thickness Measurement
Location records and Thickness Measurement records for the selected Equipment or
TML Group records.
Overview of the TM
TMLs/Measurements Page
The TM TMLs/Measurements page displays all the Thickness Measurement Location
records and Thickness Measurement records that are included in a TM Analysis. The
page contains the following areas:
TM Explorer Pane: Contains a tree, which displays nodes to represent the records
in the TM Analysis.
Asset Pane: Displays the datasheet for the Equipment or TML Group record:
o
Whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
To which the Thickness Measurement Location record whose node is

currently selected in the TM Explorer pane is linked.
That is associated with the Thickness Measurement record whose node is

currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
-or-
-or-
TMLs Pane: Displays the Thickness Measurement Location records that are
currently linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane. This pane also displays various properties of each
Thickness Measurement Location record.
Measurements Pane: Displays the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record that is selected in the TMLs pane
along with various properties of each Thickness Measurement record.
Task Menus: Appear on the task menu pane to the left side of the page and
provide you with quick access to functions that are available on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. The following task menus are available on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page:
TM Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages
TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page displays nodes in a tree,
where each node represents one of the following items:
An Equipment or TML Group record for which you accessed the page.
A record that is linked to an Equipment or TML Group record for which you
accessed the page.
The TM Explorer pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page is displayed using the TMLs
and Measurements configured explorer, which is stored in the following folder in the
Meridium APM Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Explorers.
The selected node determines what is displayed on the right side of the TM
When you select an Equipment or TML Group node in the TM Explorer pane:
o The Asset pane will display the details of the Equipment or TML Group
record whose node is selected.
o
The TMLs pane will display the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to that Equipment or TML Group record.
When you select a Thickness Measurement Location node in the TM Explorer

pane:
o
The Asset pane will display the details of the Equipment or TML Group
record to which the associated Thickness Measurement Location record is
linked.
The TMLs pane will display the Thickness Measurement Location records
that are linked to that Equipment or TML Group record, and the row that
corresponds to your selection in the TM Explorer pane will be selected in
the TMLs pane.
The Measurements pane will display the Thickness Measurement records

that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record whose node
is selected.
When you select a Thickness Measurement node in the TM Explorer pane:

o
The Measurements pane will display all the Thickness Measurement

records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record to
which the Thickness Measurement record whose node is selected is linked.
The Thickness Measurement record whose node is selected in the TM

Explorer will be selected in the Measurements pane, and the Thickness
Measurement Location record to which that Thickness Measurement
record is linked will be selected in the TMLs pane.
The Asset pane will display the details of the associated Equipment or
TML Group record.
Asset Pane
The Asset pane displays the details of the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is selected in the TM Explorer pane. If a Thickness Measurement Location node or a
Thickness Measurement node is selected in the TM Explorer pane, the Asset pane will
display the details of the Equipment or TML Group record that is associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location or Thickness Measurement record whose node is
selected. The general features and behavior of the Asset pane are the same as that of
datasheets in the Record Manager. The Asset pane will display the datasheet that is
defined via the Configuration Manager as the default datasheet for the Equipment or
TML Group family. The following image displays the Asset pane for the TML Group
record with the Record ID D003-097-1.
Above the datasheet in the Asset pane, the Mapped to RBI Component label is displayed
when:
The Risk Based Inspection license is active.
-and
Via the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module, in the reference Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, you have specified that the TML Corrosion
rates associated with the current Equipment or TML Group record be used to
calculate RBI corrosion rates.
To the right of this label, the Record ID of the Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record for which you specified that TM Analysis values be used to calculate RBI
corrosion rate values is displayed. This value appears as a hyperlink. When you click this
hyperlink, the RBI Asset View page (in the RBI module) for the associated Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record is displayed.
You can collapse the Asset pane by clicking the button in the upper-right corner of the
Asset pane. You can expand the Asset pane by clicking the button when the Asset pane
is collapsed. Meridium APM will save the collapsed or expanded view of the Asset pane
so that each time you log in to the Meridium APM Framework application, the Asset pane
will be in the same position that it was the last time you used the TM
You can change the height of the Asset pane by pointing to the border at the bottom of the
Asset pane and dragging it to the desired location. The pointer will change to indicate that
the bottom of the Asset pane can be moved.
TMLs Pane
The TMLs pane displays all the Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked
to the Equipment or TML Group record whose details are displayed in the Asset pane.
The TMLs pane contains a grid that is separated into rows and columns, where each row
represents a single Thickness Measurement Location record, and each column represents
a field in a Thickness Measurement Location record or the TML Corrosion Analysis
record that is linked to that Thickness Measurement Location record. The intersection of
each row and column forms a cell, which displays the current value for a given field in a
given record. A horizontal scroll bar is available to let you view the entire contents of
each row.
By default, the grid in the TMLs pane is sorted by the TML ID column so that the
Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in ascending order by their TML
IDs. The TML ID column is locked into place and cannot be moved or removed. It will
remain in view on the far-left side of the grid when you use the scroll bar to view fields in
columns on the right side of the grid. The TML ID field for Thickness Measurement
Location records may be colored based on certain conditions.
You can customize the display of the grid, including the sort order, column display, and
filters using standard grid customization options. Any changes that you make to the grid
will be saved and used in place of the default grid settings the next time you access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can also use the Edit Filter button at the bottom-right
of the grid to create custom filters. The five most recent custom filters that you used will
be saved.
Note: The type-ahead feature that you can use elsewhere in the product does not work in
the grid in the TMLs pane.
At the top of the TMLs pane, the TML Analysis Type list is displayed and contains the
following options:
The TML Analysis Types that are associated with the TM Analysis: Displays one
or more of the following values, depending upon the analysis types that are
associated with the Equipment or TML Group record that is displayed as the root
node in the TM Explorer pane: UT, RT, and TML.
The value ALL: When you select the value ALL in this list, the grid will display
all Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected
Equipment or TML Group record. This option is selected by default.
To the right of the TML Analysis Type list, the Active TMLs only check box is displayed.
Each time you access the TM TMLs/Measurements page, this check box is selected so
that only active Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the grid. If you
want to see inactive Thickness Measurement Location records, clear the Active TMLs
only check box.
A toolbar is also displayed at the top of the TMLs pane and allows you to perform
functions specific to Thickness Measurement Location records. The toolbar offers the
options described in the following table.
Button Description
Displays the New TML dialog box, where you can supply information for required
fields and create a new Thickness Measurement Location record for the selected
Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected Thickness
Displays the TML ID dialog box, where you can specify the TML ID of the new
Thickness Measurement Location record, which will be a copy of the selected
Displays the Create Multiple Copies of TML dialog box, where you can specify
the number of copies of the selected Thickness Measurement Location record to
create.
Displays a drop-down menu, where you can choose to view the details of the
selected Thickness Measurement Location record or the details of the TML
Corrosion Analysis record that is linked to that Thickness Measurement Location
record.
Displays the Preview window, where you can view and print a copy of the
information that is displayed in the grid.
Measurements Pane
The Measurements pane displays all the Thickness Measurement records that are linked
to the Thickness Measurement Location record that is selected in the grid in the TMLs
pane. For example, in the following image, the Measurements pane displays the
Thickness Measurement records that are linked to Thickness Measurement Location
record D0003-097-1-A.
The Measurements pane contains a grid that is separated into rows and columns, where
each row represents a single Thickness Measurement record. Each column represents a
field in a Thickness Measurement record. The intersection of each row and column forms
a cell, which displays the current value for a given field in a given record. A horizontal
scroll bar is available to let you view the entire contents of each row.
By default, the grid in the Measurements pane is sorted by the Measurement Taken Date
column so that the Thickness Measurement records are displayed in the order in which
they were recorded. The Measurement ID column is appears on the far left of the grid and
is locked into place so that it cannot be moved or removed. It will remain in view on the
far-left side of the Measurements grid when you use the scroll bar to view fields in
columns on the right side of the Measurements grid. The Measurement ID field for
Thickness Measurement records will be colored based on certain conditions.
You can customize the display of the grid, including the sort order, column display, and
filters using standard grid customization options. Any changes that you make to the grid
will be saved and used in place of the default grid settings the next time you access the
TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can also use the Edit Filter button at the bottom-right
of the grid to create custom filters. The five most recent custom filters that you used will
be saved.
Note: The type-ahead feature that you can use elsewhere in list fields does not work in
the grid in the Measurements pane.
At the top of the Measurements pane, the Active Measurements only check box is
displayed. Each time you visit the TM TMLs/Measurements page, this check box is
selected so that only active Thickness Measurements records are displayed in the grid. If
you want to see inactive Thickness Measurement records, clear the Active Measurements
only check box.
A toolbar is also displayed at the top of the Measurements pane and allows you to
perform functions specific to Thickness Measurement records. The toolbar offers the
options described in the following table.
Button Description
Displays the New Measurement dialog box, where you can supply information for
required fields and create a new Thickness Measurement record for the Thickness
Measurement Location record that is selected in the TMLs pane.
Displays a confirmation message and then deletes the selected Thickness
Measurement record.
Displays a drop-down menu from which you can access details about the
Thickness Measurement record that is currently selected in the grid.
information that is displayed in the grid.
TM Tasks
The TM Tasks menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page contains the following links:
Pick Another Asset: Displays the Find Items window, where you can search for
one or more different Equipment or TML Group records and display them on the
TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Save and Analyze: Saves any changes that you have made on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page and updates calculations in the TM Analysis. This link
is enabled only if the analysis settings necessary for updating the TM Analysis
exist and you have modified the TM Analysis since you accessed the TM
Renew TMLs: Displays the Renew TMLs dialog box, where you can renew
selected Thickness Measurement Location records. This link is enabled only if
one or more Thickness Measurement Location records are linked to the
Equipment or TML Group record whose node is currently selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
Audit Information: Displays the Audit Information dialog box, which shows when
the most recently updated record in the TM Analysis was last updated and who
updated it. This link is enabled only if one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
View Tasks: Displays the Task List page in Task Management, where you can view
the Thickness Monitoring Task records that are linked to an Equipment or TML
Group record in the TM Analysis. This link is enabled only if one or more
Thickness Monitoring Task records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group
record whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Analysis Settings: Displays the TM Analysis Settings dialog box, where you can
view the settings that are defined in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record selected in the grid in the
TMLs pane. This link is enabled only if one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records are linked to the Equipment or TML Group record whose node
is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
are used to calculate certain values displayed on the TM TMLs/Measurements
page.
Move TMLs: Displays one of the following items, depending upon the type of
node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane:
If a TML Group node is selected, and that node is not the root node in the
TM Explorer pane, the Move TMLs to <Record ID> builder is displayed,
where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the TML Group record whose
node is selected in the TM Explorer pane and to which you want to move
Thickness Measurement Location records that are currently associated
with a different record in the same TM Analysis.
If any node other than a TML Group node is selected or the selected node
represents a TML Group record and is the root node in the TM Explorer
pane, the Move TMLs builder is displayed, which you can use to move
Thickness Measurement Location records associated with the current TM
Analysis to a different TM Analysis.
Create TML Group: Creates a new TML Group record and an associated
Corrosion Analysis Settings record using values in the Corrosion Analysis
Settings record that is linked to the Equipment record whose node appears at the
root level in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled and functions as expected
when all of the following conditions are met:
The Equipment record whose node appears at the root level in the TM
Explorer pane:
Is selected.
Is not linked as a predecessor to another Equipment record.
Is linked to a Corrosion Analysis Settings record.
You have defined the following Subcomponent Relationship settings:
Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship, where the Equipment family

is linked to the TML Group family via the Has TML Group
Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship, where the TML Group

family is linked to the Equipment family via the Has TML Group
Delete TML Group: After displaying a confirmation message, deletes the selected
TML Group record and the Thickness Measurement Location, Corrosion Analysis
Settings, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Asset Corrosion Analysis records to which
it is linked.
Link to RBI Component: Displays the Link to RBI Component dialog box, where
you can select the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you want to
link to the TML Group record whose node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
This link is enabled when all of the following conditions are met:
The root node in the TM Explorer pane represents an Equipment record

that is linked to one or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components
records.
One or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the

Equipment record is linked contains in the Calculated Corrosion Rate
Source field the value Component.
Navigation
The Navigation menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page displays links to various

Thickness Monitoring features. This menu is common to most pages in Thickness
Monitoring.
Common Tasks
The Common Tasks menu on the TM TMLs/Measurements page contains the following
links:
Print: Displays the Preview window, from which you can print the information
displayed in the Asset pane.
Page.
Documents: Displays the Reference Documents window, where you can manage
Reference Document records for the record represented by the node that is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. This link is enabled only when you select a
node in the TM Explorer pane that represents a record that is related to the
Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents relationship.
In the baseline Meridium APM database, this link is enabled only when an
Equipment node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the context-sensitive Help topic for the TM TMLs/Measurements

page.
Associated Pages
The Associated Pages on the TM TMLs/Measurements page menu displays links only if
Associated Pages have been configured for the entity family of the record whose node is
selected in the TM Explorer pane. If no Associated Pages have been configured for the
entity family, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
Creating TML Group Records

If your TM Analyses include TML Group records, you can create TML Group records
using the following instructions. These instructions assume that the following settings are
defined:
Analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you want to link a new TML
Group record.
The Asset-to-Subcomponent Relationship, where the Equipment family is linked
to the TML Group family via the Has TML Group relationship definition.
The Subcomponent-to-Asset Relationship, where the TML Group family is linked
to the Equipment family via the Has TML Group relationship definition.
To create a new TML Group record:

1. Access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record to which you
want to link a new TML Group record.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears. In the TM Explorer pane, the root
Equipment node is selected by default.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Create TML Group link.

o If the analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you are linking
the TML Group record is associated with only one TML Analysis Type
(e.g., UT), the TML Group record is created, and a new node representing
the TML Group record appears in the TM Explorer pane.
In addition, a new Corrosion Analysis Settings record is created and linked to the TML
Group record. Values that are stored in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record to which
the parent Equipment record is linked are used to populate the fields in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that is linked directly to the TML Group record.
o
If the analysis settings for the Equipment record to which you are linking
the TML Group record is associated with more than one TML Analysis
Type (e.g., TML and UT), the Select Analysis Types dialog box appears,
displaying the TML Analysis Types for which analysis settings can be
created for the new TML Group record. All options are selected by default.
The following image shows an example of what this dialog box would
look like if analysis settings for the TML Analysis Types TML and UT
existed for the Equipment record for which you were creating a TML
Group record.
In this case, proceed to the next step in these instructions.

3. On the Select Analysis Types dialog box:
o Accept the default selection, and click OK.
-oro
Clear the check box that is associated with any TML Analysis Type for
which you do not want to create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for
the new TML Group record, and click OK.
The Select Analysis Types dialog box closes, the TML Group record is created, and a new
node representing the TML Group record appears in the TM Explorer pane. Additionally,
one or more Corrosion Analysis Settings records are created automatically and linked
directly to the TML Group record. Using the preceding example, if you accepted the
default selection, two Corrosion Analysis Settings records would be created automatically
for the new TML Group record: One Corrosion Analysis Settings record containing the
value TML in the Corrosion Inspection Type field and one Corrosion Analysis Settings
record containing the value UT in the Corrosion Inspection Type field.
Modifying Equipment and TML Group

Records
You can modify the properties of Equipment and TML Group records on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page using the datasheet that is displayed in the Asset pane. The
general features and behavior of the datasheet are the same as that of the Record
Manager.
To modify an Equipment or TML Group record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
1. In the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing the Equipment or TML
Group record that you want to modify. In the following image, the Equipment
node 039-0001 Overheard Line (Piping Circuit) is selected.
The Asset pane is updated to display the information that is stored in the associated
Equipment or TML Group record. The following image displays the Asset pane for
the Equipment record with Asset ID 039-0001.
2. In the Asset pane, modify the value of one or more fields in the datasheet. The
following image displays the Asset pane. Note that the Asset Status field has been
populated with the value Functional.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.

The changes made to the Equipment or TML Group record and any other changes that
you make on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the corrosion analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
About Linking TML Group Records to

RBI Components
When the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) license is active, you can use TML Corrosion
Analysis values to determine corrosion rate values in RBI. When you do so, you must
perform most steps in this workflow within the RBI module. If you want to specify that
TM values at the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values,
however, you can perform this step using TM rather than RBI.
To do this, you will link a TML Group record to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record that is linked to the Equipment record with which the TML Group record is
associated. When you link a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record to a TML
Group record, RBI corrosion rate values for the RBI Analysis that you create from that
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record will be based upon the average of the
following values in the TML Corrosion Analysis records that are linked to the TML
Group record:
Long Term Corrosion Rate
Short Term Corrosion Rate
In other words, the values in the preceding list will determine the following values in the
Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval record that is associated with the RBI Analysis that
is created from the Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you linked to the
TML Group record:
Short Term Ave. Corr. Rate

Linking a TML Group Record to an

RBI Component
You can use the Link to RBI Component dialog box to specify that TM Analysis values at
the TML Group level be used to calculate RBI corrosion rate values. When you do this,
TML Corrosion Analysis values that are associated with the TML Group record will be
used to determine RBI corrosion rates for the RBI Analysis that is associated with the
Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you select. You can also accomplish
this task via the Risk Based Inspection (RBI) module using the Link to TML Groups
dialog box. The method that you use will be determined by various factors, but you
should use the method that makes the most sense for the workflow you are currently
executing.
Note: When you use the TM module to select TML Group records to link to a Criticality
Calculator RBI Components record, you will do so for only one TML Group record at a
time. Alternatively, via the RBI module, you can select more than one TML Group record
at a time to link to a Criticality Calculator RBI Components record.
The following instructions assume that the following criteria are met:
-and
You have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements page for a TM Analysis that

contains:
o An Equipment record that is linked to one or more Criticality Calculator
RBI Components records.
o
One or more TML Group records.
-and
One or more Criticality Calculator RBI Components records to which the

Equipment record is linked contain in the Calculated Corrosion Rate Source field
the value Component.
To link a TML Group record to an RBI Component:

1. In the TM Explorer pane, select the TML Group node representing the TML
Group record whose TML Corrosion Analysis values you want to use to calculate
RBI corrosion rates. In the following image, the TML Group node TMLGRP64252384924 is highlighted in the TM Explorer pane.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Link to RBI Component link.

The Link to RBI Component dialog box appears, displaying the Select RBI Component to
Link to TML Group <Record ID> screen, where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the
TML Group record that is associated with the node that is selected in the TM Explorer
pane.
3. In the grid on the Select RBI Component to Link to TML Group <Record ID>
screen, select the check box to the left of the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record for which you want to use TM Analysis values to calculate
RBI corrosion rates. In the following image, the Criticality Calculator RBI
Components record with the Record ID Cylindrical Shell ~ HXST 141 is selected.
4. Click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the TM TMLs/Measurements page returns to focus.
The Criticality Calculator RBI Components record that you selected on the Link to RBI
Component dialog box is linked to the TML Group record for which you accessed the
dialog box through the Mapped to RBI Component relationship, where the TML Group
family is the predecessor.
When you create an RBI Analysis for the selected Criticality Calculator RBI Components
record, the values in the following fields in the Criticality Int. Corr. Deg. Mech. Eval
record that is created automatically are calculated based upon the TML Corrosion
Analysis values that are associated with the TML Group record.
o
o

Printing the Details of Equipment and

TML Group Records
On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, you can print the details of an Equipment or TML
Group record.
To print the details of an Equipment or TML Group record:
1. In the TM Explorer pane, select the node representing the Equipment or TML
Group record whose details you want to print. In the following image, the
Equipment node 039-0001 Overheard Line (Piping Circuit) is selected.

The Preview window appears.
3. Click the
button to open the Print window, where you can change the print
settings and then print the details of the Equipment or TML Group record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the Equipment or TML Group record with
your default print settings.
The details of the Equipment or TML Group record are sent to your selected printer.
Deleting TML Group Records

To delete a TML Group record:
1. Access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the Equipment record that is linked
to the TML Group that you want to delete.
The TM TMLs/Measurements page appears. In the TM Explorer pane, the root
Equipment node is selected by default.
2. In the TM Explorer pane, select the TML Group node representing the TML
Group record that you want to delete.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Delete TML Group link.
A confirmation message is displayed, identifying the records that will be deleted in
addition to the TML Group record and asking if you are sure you want to continue.
The TML Group record and the Thickness Measurement Location, Thickness
Measurement, Corrosion Analysis Settings, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Asset
Corrosion Analysis records to which it is linked are deleted from the database, the TM
TMLs/Measurements page returns to focus, and the TML Group node representing the
deleted TML Group record is removed from the TM Explorer pane.
About Creating New Thickness

Measurement Location Records
After you have identified a location on a piece of equipment where you want to record
thickness measurements, you will need to create a Thickness Measurement Location
record for that location and save it to the database. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page,
you have the following options for creating new Thickness Measurement Location
records:
You can create a new Thickness Measurement Location record from scratch.
You can copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record and use it as a
template for creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record. This option
is useful if you need to create a Thickness Measurement Location record with
properties that are similar to the properties of an existing Thickness Measurement
Location record.
You can create multiple copies of an existing Thickness Measurement Location

record at once. This option is useful if you need to create several Thickness
Measurement Location records with similar properties.
When you create a new Thickness Measurement Location record via the TM
It will be linked automatically to the Equipment or TML Group record whose

node is selected in the TM Explorer pane.
A Corrosion Analysis Settings record will be created automatically using the
analysis settings that are specified for the selected Equipment or TML Group
record and linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
A TML Corrosion Analysis record will be created and linked to the Thickness
After you have created a new Thickness Measurement Location record and saved it to the
database, you can view and modify the details of that record on the TML Datasheet. You
can view the details of the associated TML Corrosion Analysis record on the TML
Corrosion Analysis Datasheet.
Note: You cannot create Thickness Measurement Location records for an Equipment or
TML Group record until analysis settings have been defined for that Equipment or TML
Group record. Additionally, before Thickness Measurement Location records can be
created for an Equipment or TML Group record, the Component ID Field setting must be
defined for the Equipment or TML Group family.
Creating a New Thickness Measurement

Location Record from Scratch
To create a new Thickness Measurement Location record:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, in the TM Explorer pane, select the node
representing the Equipment or TML Group record for which to create a new
Thickness Measurement Location record. In the following image, the Equipment
node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
2. On the toolbar at the top of TMLs pane, click the
button.
The New TML dialog box appears.
3. In the TML ID text box, type an ID for the Thickness Measurement Location
record. Note that the TML ID must be unique with respect to the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are already linked to the current Equipment or
TML Group record. In this example, New TML 101 has been typed in the TML
ID text box.
4. In the TML Analysis Type list, select the desired TML Analysis Type. The TML
Analysis Type list will include any TML Analysis Type for which analysis
settings exist.
Note: The New TML dialog box displays all the fields that are required in a Thickness
Measurement Location record. In the baseline Thickness Monitoring module, only TML
ID and TML Analysis Type are required. If your implementation has been customized to
require additional fields, they will be displayed on the New TML dialog box. You will
need to supply a value for each required field before you can save the Thickness
5. Click OK.
A row containing the new Thickness Measurement Location record is added to the grid in
the TMLs pane. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location record
with TML ID TML09 is outlined in red.
6. Define the TML properties as desired. You can use the scroll bar at the bottom of
the grid to view all the available fields.
The new Thickness Measurement Location record is saved to the database along with any
other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the
TM Analysis is updated. After you have created one or more Thickness Measurement
Location records, you can create new Thickness Measurements for those Thickness
Copyright 1993-2005 Meridium APM, Inc.
Copying an Existing Thickness

Measurement Location Record
If you need to create a Thickness Measurement Location record with properties that are
similar to the properties of an existing Thickness Measurement Location record, you can
copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record and use it as a template for
creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record.
To copy an existing Thickness Measurement Location record:

representing the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record you want to copy is linked. In the following image,
the Equipment node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
2. In the grid in the TMLs pane, select the Thickness Measurement Location record
that you want to use as a template for creating a new Thickness Measurement
Location record. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement Location
record with the TML ID TML01 is selected.
3. On the toolbar at the top of the TMLs pane, click the
button.
The TML ID dialog box appears.
4. In the Enter new TML ID text box, type a unique ID for the Thickness
Measurement Location record. Note that the TML ID must be unique with respect
to the Thickness Measurement Location records that are already linked to the
selected Equipment or TML Group record. In the following image, the TML ID
TML01-1 has been entered.
5. Click OK.
A row containing the new Thickness Measurement Location record is added to the grid in
the TMLs pane. The row contains the information for the Thickness Measurement
Location record that you selected to use as a template and the new TML ID that you
specified on the TML ID dialog box. All fields in the new Thickness Measurement
Location record will contain the information from the Thickness Measurement Location
record that you used as a template except for the Status Changed By, Status Changed
Date, and Exclude from Analysis fields. In the following image, a row containing the
Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML01-1 is outlined in red.
6. If desired, edit any of the existing TML properties, or define the desired additional
properties.
The new Thickness Measurement Location record is saved to the database along with any
other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the
TM Analysis is updated. After you have created the Thickness Measurement Location
record, you can begin recording Thickness Measurements for the TML.
Creating Multiple Copies of an Existing

Thickness Measurement Location
Record
If you need to create several Thickness Measurement Location records with similar
properties, you can create multiple copies of a Thickness Measurement Location record
and use it as a template for creating multiple, new Thickness Measurement Location
records.
To create multiple copies of an existing Thickness Measurement Location record:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record for which you want to create
multiple, new Thickness Measurement Location records. In the following image,
the Equipment node ~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
that you want to use as a template for creating a new Thickness Measurement
Location records, as shown in the following image.

The Create Multiple Copies of TML dialog box appears.
button.
4. In the Number of copies text box, type the number of copies you want to create.
The number you specify must be between 1 and 100. In this example, we have
chosen to create three copies of the Thickness Measurement Location record with
TML IDTML01.
5. Click OK.
6. A new row is added to the grid in the TMLs pane for each copy that was created.
If the copy operation was successful, a message will appear on the Create
Multiple Copies of TML dialog box, indicating that the process was completed
successfully. All fields in the new Thickness Measurement Location records will
contain the information from the Thickness Measurement Location record that
you used as a template for the new copies except for the Status Changed By,
Status Changed Date, and Exclude from Analysis fields. In the following image,
the rows containing the three new Thickness Measurement Location records that
were created as copies of the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML
ID TML01 are outlined in red.

8. If desired, edit any of the existing TML properties, or define the desired additional
properties.
The new Thickness Measurement Location records are saved to the database along with
any other unsaved changes that you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page,
and the is updated. After you have copied the Thickness Measurement Location records,
you can begin recording Thickness Measurements for the TMLs.
Accessing the TML Datasheet

The details of Thickness Measurement Location records are displayed in the TMLs pane
on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. You can scroll to the right in the grid to view all of
the columns of information displayed for each Thickness Measurement Location record.
Additionally, you can view the details of a single Thickness Measurement Location
record using the TML datasheet.
To view the details of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the TML
datasheet:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to
view the details. In the following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
whose details you want to view. In the following image, the Thickness
Measurement Location Record with the TML ID TML01 is selected.

TML Datasheet.
button, and then click
The Thickness Measurement Location window appears, displaying the details of the
selected Thickness Measurement Location record.
Aspects of the TML Datasheet

The Thickness Measurement Location window displays the details of the Thickness
Measurement Location record that you selected on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
The General Information tab is selected by default.
A toolbar is also displayed above the datasheet and contains the following options:
Displays the Preview window, where you can view and print the information that
is displayed on the Thickness Measurement Location window.
Document records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: This button is enabled only if the Thickness Measurement Location family is
related to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship.
Displays the historical values for the selected field.
Accessing the TML Corrosion Analysis

Datasheet
You can view the details of a TML Corrosion Analysis in the TMLs pane on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. You can also view the corrosion analysis details on the TML
Corrosion Analysis datasheet.
To access the TML Corrosion Analysis datasheet:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record that is linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record for which you want to view the details. In the
following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
whose analysis details you want to view. The following image shows the
Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML051 selected in the
TMLs pane.

TML Corrosion Analysis Datasheet.
The TML Analysis Datasheet window for the selected Thickness Measurement Location
record appears. The TML Analysis Datasheet window displays the fields associated with
the TML Corrosion Analysis.
Aspects of the TML Corrosion Analysis

Datasheet
The TML Analysis Datasheet window displays the details of the TML Corrosion Analysis
that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record that you selected on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. The Datasheet list is displayed above the datasheet area and
displays a list of the datasheets that have been configured for the TML Corrosion
Analysis family.
A toolbar is also displayed above the datasheet and contains the following options:
Displays the Preview window, where you can view and print the information that
is displayed on the TML Analysis Datasheet window.
Document records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Note: This button is enabled only if the Thickness Measurement Location family is
related to the Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents
relationship.
About Renewing Thickness

Renewing Thickness Measurement Location records provides a mechanism for recording
a new base measurement for a Thickness Measurement Location record and setting all
existing Thickness Measurement records to Inactive. Additionally, the value that was the
Thickness Measurement Location record's Controlling Corrosion Rate prior to the
renewal will become the Minimum Corrosion Rate value in the associated Corrosion
Analysis Settings record after the renewal. You have two options for renewing Thickness
Measurement Location records. You can:
Renew Thickness Measurement Location records and add new measurements.

Renew Thickness Measurement Location records without adding new
measurements.
Generally, you will want to renew Thickness Measurement Location records when you
replace a piece of equipment. For example, if an Equipment record representing a tank is
linked to one or more Thickness Measurement Location records for which Thickness
Measurement records have been created, when you replace the tank, you can renew the
Thickness Measurement Location records to retain the measurement data recorded for the
old tank while creating a new base measurement for the new tank. When you do this, you
can begin performing corrosion analyses for the new tank.
When you renew a Thickness Measurement Location record:
The Measurement Status Indicator field for any Thickness Measurement record
whose Measurement Status Indicator field was set to Active prior to the renewal
will be set to Inactive.
The value in the Historical Sequence Number field in the associated Thickness
Measurement records that were used during that life cycle will be incremented.
For example, if the Historical Sequence Number field previously contained no
value, indicating that the associated Thickness Measurement Location had never
been renewed, it will now be 1 (one), indicating that the associated Thickness
Measurement Location record has been renewed one time.
The value in the Renew Historical Sequence Number field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record will be populated with the largest Historical
Sequence Number in the associated Thickness Measurement records that were
used during that life cycle. For example, if there are two associated Thickness
Measurement records that were used during that life cycle and one's Historical
Sequence Number is 1 and the other's is 2, the Renew Historical Sequence
Number field in the Thickness Measurement Location record would be populated
with the value 2. This will keep track of the life cycle for that Thickness
The value in the Status Changed By field will be changed to the User ID for the
Security User who renewed the Thickness Measurement Location record.
The value in the Status Changed Date field will change to the current date.
Renewing Thickness Measurement

Location Records and Adding New
Measurements
You can renew Thickness Measurement Location records and immediately add the new
base measurement for each renewed Thickness Measurement Location record. The
Meridium APM system will make the necessary updates to the Thickness Measurement
Location records and navigate to the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry page.
To renew TMLs and add new measurements:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record whose Thickness Measurement
Location records you want to renew, as shown in the following image.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Renew TMLs link.

The Renew TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records, depending upon the node that you selected in the TM Explorer pane
and whether or not your TM Analysis includes TML Group records.
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you selected:
An Equipment node, all the Thickness Measurement Location records that

are linked to all the associated TML Group records are displayed in the
list.
A TML Group node, all the Thickness Measurement Location records that
are linked to that TML Group record are displayed in the list.
If your TM Analysis does not include TML Group records, all the Thickness
Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected Equipment record
are displayed in the list.
3. In the Renew TML column, select the check box for any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you want to renew. The Renew and Renew and Add New
Measurements buttons will remain disabled until you select the check box for one
or more Thickness Measurement Location records to renew.
4. Click the Renew and Add New Measurements button.

Your changes are saved along with any other unsaved changes that you have made on the
TM TMLs/Measurements page, the TM Analysis is updated, and a message appears
indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were renewed successfully.
After the Renew TMLs dialog box closes, the TM Initial Measurement Data Entry
page appears, displaying the Thickness Measurement Locations records that you just
renewed. The date in the Measurement Taken Date field is automatically set to the current
date and time. If desired, you can change this value.
5. Update the Thickness Measurement Location records with the new measurement
data.
6. On the Measurement Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
New Thickness Measurement records are created using the Measurement Taken Dates
and Measurement Values that you provided, and the TM Analysis is updated. A message
appears indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were updated
successfully. If you view the Thickness Measurement Location record, you will see that:
A new Thickness Measurement record has been created and linked to the
The Measurement Value is the value that you specified on the TM Initial
The value in the Measurement Status Indicator field is set to Active.
Renewing Thickness Measurement

Location Records Without Adding New
Measurements
You can renew Thickness Measurement Location records without having to add new
thickness measurements at the same time. The Meridium APM system will save the
changes to the Thickness Measurement Location records and update the TM Analysis.
To renew TMLs and add new measurements:
Location records you want to renew, as shown in the following image.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Renew TMLs link.

The Renew TMLs dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness Measurement
Location records, depending upon the node that you selected in the TM Explorer pane
and whether or not your TM Analysis includes TML Group records.
If your TM Analysis includes TML Group records and you selected:
An Equipment node, all the Thickness Measurement Location

records that are linked to all the associated TML Group records are
displayed in the list.
A TML Group node, all the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to that TML Group record are displayed in
the list.
If your TM Analysis does not include TML Group records, all the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are linked to the selected
Equipment record are displayed in the list.
3. In the Renew TML column, select the check box for any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you want to renew. The Renew and Renew and Add New
Measurements buttons will remain disabled until you select the check box for one
or more Thickness Measurement Location records to renew.
4. Click the Renew button.

Your changes are saved, along with any other unsaved changes that you have made on the
TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the TM Analysis is updated. A message appears
indicating that the Thickness Measurement Location records were renewed successfully,
and the TM TMLs/Measurements page refreshes to display the changes.
Modifying a Record Using the Thickness

Measurement Location Datasheet
You can modify the properties of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the
Thickness Measurement Location datasheet, which provides you with a concise view of a
single Thickness Measurement Location record. This option may be useful if you need to
modify multiple fields, related fields, or fields that are not displayed by default in the grid
in the TMLs pane.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement Location record using the Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to
modify. In the following image, TML01 UT Active is selected.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location record is displayed and selected in the
grid in the TMLs pane.

TML Datasheet.
3. Modify the TML properties as desired. The general features and behavior of the
datasheet are the same as that of the Record Manager.
4. When you have finished making changes, click OK.
The changes made to the Thickness Measurement Location record and any other changes
that you made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the TM Analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
Modifying a Record in the TMLs Pane

You can modify the properties of a Thickness Measurement Location record using the
grid in the TMLs pane. This option provides you with a broader view of multiple
Thickness Measurement Location records in the grid.
Note: Properties of the TML Corrosion Analysis can also be displayed in the TMLs pane
but cannot be modified. Fields TML Corrosion Analysis records are disabled and will be
updated automatically based upon changes that you make to the TM Analysis.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement Location record in the TMLs pane:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record you want to modify.
The following image shows a node representing a Thickness Measurement
Location record selected in the TM Explorer pane.
grid in the TMLs pane. Note that the value in the Minimum Thickness (Inches) field for
the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML IDTML01 is 0.12.
2. Enter or modify data in any of the fields displayed in the grid. The following
image displays the selected Thickness Measurement Location record in the TMLs
pane. Note that the value in the Minimum Thickness (Inches) for the Thickness
Measurement Location Record with TML IDTML01 has been changed from 0.12
to 0.15.
3. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze Link.

The changes made to the Thickness Measurement Location record and any other changes
that you make on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
would require the to be updated, the necessary updates are made.
About Allowable Stress

The Allowable Stress field in Thickness Measurement Location records stores a value
that is used as one of the inputs for determining the Calculated T-Min value for certain
Thickness Measurement Location records. It is also used for calculating Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure for Thickness Measurement Location records associated
with Equipment records that represent pipes. Using the baseline formulas:
An Allowable Stress value must be defined in all Thickness Measurement

Location records associated with Equipment records that represent pipes. The
value that exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record will be used for determining the Calculated T-Min value and the
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure.
An Allowable Stress value must be defined in all Thickness Measurement
Location records associated with Equipment records that represent pressure
vessels. The value that exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness
Measurement Location record will be used for determining the Calculated T-Min
value.
For Thickness Measurement Location records associated with Equipment records

that represent tanks:
If the Tank Type field contains the value Floor Plate, an Allowable Stress
value is not required and will not be used if it exists in the Thickness
If the Tank Type field contains the value Riveted Shell, an Allowable
Stress value of 21000 will be used for calculating the T-Min value. If a
different value exists in the Allowable Stress field of the Thickness
Measurement Location record, it will be ignored.
If the Tank Type field contains the value Annular Ring, the Allowable
Stress value will be calculated using a formula that is specific to Annular
Ring tanks. If a value exists in the Allowable Stress field of the Thickness
Measurement Location record, it will be ignored.
If the Tank Type field contains the value Welded Shell, the Allowable
Stress value will be calculated using the Minimum Tensile Strength and
Minimum Yield Strength that are retrieved from the Tank Stress reference
table. This calculated value will become the Lookup Value, which can be
overridden by a user-defined value.
In most cases, the Meridium APM system can populate the value in the Allowable Stress
field for each Thickness Measurement Location record using the Piping Stress, PV Stress,
and Tank Stress reference tables, or you can define the Allowable Stress value manually.
Regardless of whether you define this value manually or have the Meridium APM system
populate this value automatically, the Allowable Stress value must be defined via the
Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box.
Accessing the Allowable Stress Lookup

Dialog Box
You can access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box from the Allowable Stress field in
Thickness Measurement Location records, either on the Thickness Measurement
Location datasheet or in the grid in the TMLs pane on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
Note: The Allowable Stress field is not included by default in the TMLs grid on the TM
TMLs/Measurements page. If desired, you can add this field to the grid. By default, the
Allowable Stress field appears on the Design General tab of the baseline Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet.
To access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box:
In the Allowable Stress field of the desired Thickness Measurement Location

record, click the button.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box appears.
When you access the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, Meridium APM attempts to
retrieve an Allowable Stress value using the information that exists in the Thickness
Measurement Location record. The status of the retrieval and the value that was retrieved,
if any, will be displayed on the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box.
Aspects of the Allowable Stress Lookup

Dialog Box
On the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, you can define the Allowable Stress value
for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box contains the following features:
Current Value: A read-only text box that displays the value that currently exists in
the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Lookup Value: A read-only text box that displays the value that was retrieved
from the Piping Stress reference table, the PV Stress reference table, or the Tank
Stress reference table, depending upon the values that exist in the Thickness
Measurement Location record. When you access the Allowable Stress Lookup
dialog box, Meridium APM attempts to retrieve an Allowable Stress value using
the information that exists in the Thickness Measurement Location record.
User Defined Value: A text box in which you can type a value to use in place of
the value that appears in the Current Value or Lookup Value text box.
Value to use: A list that contains three options, which let you choose the value that
will be used to populate the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record: Current Value, Lookup Value, or User Defined Value.
Status: A read-only field that displays the status of the reference table lookup
operation. This field will display the text:
Succeeded if Meridium APM was able to retrieve an Allowable Stress

value from a reference table. If the status is Succeeded, the Lookup Value
text box will be populated with the value that was retrieved.
Failed if Meridium APM was not able to retrieve an Allowable Stress

value from a reference table. If the status is Failed, the Lookup Value text
box will not contain a value.
Below these items, the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box contains a display area that
shows the values that were used to retrieve the value displayed in the Lookup Value text
box. At the bottom of the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box, the following buttons
appear:
OK: Populates the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement Location
record with the value identified by the Value to use setting.
Reset: Closes the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box and clears the value that
currently exists in the Allowable Stress field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
Cancel: Closes the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box without making any
changes to the Allowable Stress value in the Thickness Measurement Location
record.
Defining the Allowable Stress Value

To define the Allowable Stress value for a Thickness Measurement Location record:
1. In the desired Thickness Measurement Location record, access the Allowable

Stress Lookup dialog box.
The Current Value and Lookup Value text boxes will be populated, as appropriate.
2. If desired, in the User Defined Value text box, type a value that you want to use as
the Allowable Stress value. This step is necessary only if you do not want to use
the value in either the Current Value or the Lookup Value text box.
3. In the Value to use list, select the value that you want to use for populating the
Allowable Stress value in the Thickness Measurement Location record. You can
choose:
Current value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in the
Current Value text box.
Lookup value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in the
Lookup Value text box.
User defined value to populate the Allowable Stress field with the value in
the User Defined Value text box.
Click OK.
The Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box closes, and the Allowable Stress field in the
Thickness Measurement Location record is populated with the value that you selected.
Note: If you accessed the Allowable Stress Lookup dialog box from the Thickness
Measurement Location datasheet, you must navigate out of the Allowable Stress field to
see the updated value.
5. Save the Thickness Measurement Location record.
About Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records
Under some circumstances, it may be necessary to move Thickness Measurement

Location records from one Equipment or TML Group record to another. There are two
scenarios in which you might perform this task:
You may want to move Thickness Measurement Location records from one TM
Analysis to another.
For example, you may determine that a Thickness Measurement Location record that was
originally linked to one Equipment or TML Group record actually belongs to a different
Equipment or TML Group record that is included in a different TM Analysis. In this case,
rather than creating a new Thickness Measurement Location record for the correct
Equipment or TML Group record, you can move the Thickness Measurement Location
record from the original Equipment or TML Group record to the correct one.
In this case, you will use the Move TMLs builder to select the Thickness Measurement
Location records that you want to move and the target Equipment or TML Group record
to which you will move the Thickness Measurement Location records.
-or
You may want to move to a TML Group record Thickness Measurement Location
records that currently belong to another record in the same TM Analysis.
For example, you may determine that a particular subset of existing Thickness
Measurement Location records actually belong in their own TML Group. If so, you
would create a TML Group record to include in the existing TM Analysis and then move
the Thickness Measurement Location records from the TML Group record with which
they are currently associated to the new TML Group record created specifically for those
TMLs.
In this case, the TML Group record for the node that is selected in the TM Explorer pane
is assumed to be the target record to which you want to move Thickness Measurement
Location records. To move the records, you will use the Move TMLs to <Record ID>,
where <Record ID> is the Record ID of the target TML Group record.
The steps that you take for each of these tasks will differ slightly. In either case, when
you move a Thickness Measurement Location record from one Equipment or TML Group
record to another:
The Thickness Measurement Location records that you move will be unlinked
from the current Equipment or TML Group record and linked to the target
Equipment or TML Group record that you select via the Has Datapoints
relationship.
The target Equipment or TML Group record must not already be linked to a
Thickness Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML ID field
that matches the value in the TML ID field of any of the Thickness Measurement
Location records that you want to move.
The value in the TML Asset ID field of any moved Thickness Measurement
Location record will be updated to reflect the target Equipment or TML Group
record.
Any Thickness Measurement, TML Corrosion Analysis, and Corrosion Analysis

Settings records that are linked to the moved Thickness Measurement Location
records will remain linked to those Thickness Measurement Location records after
the Thickness Measurement Location records are moved.
The values in all of the fields in the Corrosion Analysis Settings records that are
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location records that you are moving will
inherit the values in all of the fields in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that
is linked to the target Equipment or TML Group record with the exception of the
following fields:
Allowable Measured Variance
Corrosion Rate Variance
Default Inspection Interval
Minimum CR
You can select Thickness Measurement Location records from multiple source
Equipment or TML Group records for a single move operation, but you can select
only a single target Equipment or TML Group record. If you want to move
Thickness Measurement Location records to more than one target Equipment or
TML Group record, you will need to perform the move operation multiple times.
All calculations for the TM Analysis that is associated with the source and the
target Equipment or TML Group records will be updated automatically after the
Thickness Measurement Location records are moved.
Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records from one TM
Analysis to Another
You can use the following instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location records
from an Equipment or TML Group record in one TM Analysis to an Equipment or TML
Group record in a different TM Analysis. The following instructions assume that you
have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements page where the root node represents the
Equipment record associated with the TM Analysis from which you want to move
Thickness Measurement Location records.
You can also use a different set of instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location
records to a different TML Group record in the same TM Analysis.
To move Thickness Measurement Location records from one TM Analysis to another:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the TM Analysis associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location records you want to move, in the TM Explorer
pane, select any node except a TML Group node.
Note: If the root node in the TM Explorer pane is a TML Group node, you can select that
node and follow the instructions listed here. When the root node is associated with an
Equipment record, however, and you select a node that is associated with a TML Group
record, the Meridium APM system assumes that the selected TML Group record is the
target record to which you want to move Thickness Measurement Location records from
within the same TM Analysis.
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Move TMLs link.
The Move TMLs builder appears, displaying the List of Available TMLs screen.
The List of Available TMLs screen shows all the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to any Equipment or TML Group record that is currently displayed
in the TM Explorer pane. The list is grouped by Equipment or TML Group record.
3. On the List of Available TMLs screen, select the check box to the left of any
Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to move.
Hint: You can select the All check box at the top of the screen to select all the Thickness
Measurement Location records in the list.

The Find Target Asset screen appears.
5. Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group record to which you want
to move the Thickness Measurement Location records.
6. In the results list, select the desired Equipment or TML Group record, and click
the Next button.
The Review the TMLs to Be Moved to the Target Asset screen appears.
The Review the TMLs to Be Moved to the Target Asset screen provides a summary of the
actions that will be performed when you complete the operation. Within the grid:
1.
o
The Selected TMLs column displays the Thickness Measurement Location

records you have chosen to move. The records are grouped according to
the record from which they will be moved (i.e., the source record).
The Target Asset column displays the Record ID of the Equipment or TML
Group record to which the selected Thickness Measurement Location
records will be linked. The target Equipment or TML Group record is the
same for all the Thickness Measurement Location records you have
selected to move.
7. After you have reviewed the information on the Review the TMLs to Be Moved to
the Target Asset screen and are satisfied with your selections, click the Finish
button.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location records are unlinked from the source
Equipment or TML Group record(s) and linked to the target Equipment or TML Group
record.
1.
o
If the target Equipment or TML Group record is already linked to a

Thickness Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML
ID field that matches the value in the TML ID field of any Thickness
Measurement Location record that you selected to move, an error message
will be displayed, and the Thickness Measurement Location records
containing matching TML IDs will not be moved.
If the target Equipment or TML Group record is not linked to a Corrosion

Analysis Settings record with the same inspection type as any of the
Thickness Measurement Location records that you tried to move, the
Settings Missing dialog box appears, displaying a list of Thickness
Measurement Location records that could not be moved.
Hint: You can create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the target Equipment or
TML Group that has the same inspection type as the Thicknesses Measurement Location
records that you are trying to move via the TM Analysis page.
Moving Thickness Measurement

Location Records to a TML Group
Record in the Same TM Analysis
You can use the following instructions to move to a TML Group record Thickness
Measurement Location records that belong to another record in the same TM Analysis.
The following instructions assume that you have accessed the TM TMLs/Measurements
page where the root node represents the Equipment record that is linked to the TML
Groups records to which and from which you are moving the Thickness Measurement
Location records.
You can also use a different set of instructions to move Thickness Measurement Location
records from one TM Analysis to another.
To move to a TML Group record Thickness Measurement Location records that belong to
another record in the same TM Analysis:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page for the TM Analysis associated with the
Thickness Measurement Location records that you want to move, in the TM
Explorer pane, select the TML Group node to which you want to move Thickness
2. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Move TMLs link.
3. The Move TMLs to <Record ID> appears, where <Record ID> is the Record ID
of the TML Group record that is associated with the selected node and to which
you want to move the Thickness Measurement Location records. The Select TMLs
to be Moved to Target TML Group screen is displayed and shows all the
Thickness Measurement Location records that are associated with the current TM
Analysis except for those linked to the TML Group record to which you are
moving Thickness Measurement Location records (i.e., the target TML Group
record).
4. On the Select TMLs to be Moved to Target TML Group screen, select the check
box to the left of any Thickness Measurement Location record that you want to
move to the target TML Group record. In the following image, the Thickness
Measurement Location record with the Record ID TML4 is selected.
Hint: You can select the All check box at the top of the screen to select all the Thickness
Measurement Location records in the list.

The Review the TMLs to be Moved to the Target TML Group screen appears, displaying a
grid that summarizes the actions that will be performed when you complete the operation.
Within the grid:
o
The Selected TMLs column displays the Record IDs of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that you have chosen to move to the target
TML Group record. The records are grouped according to the record from
which they will be moved (i.e., the source record).
The Target TML Group column displays the Record ID of the TML Group
record to which the Thickness Measurement Location records will be
moved. The target TML Group record will be the same for all Thickness
Measurement Location records you have selected to move.
6. After you have reviewed the information on the Review the TMLs to be Moved to
the Target TML Group screen and are satisfied with your selections, click the
Finish button.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location records are unlinked from the source
record(s) and linked to the target TML Group record.
o
If the target TML Group record is already linked to a Thickness

Measurement Location record containing a value in the TML ID field that
matches the value in the TML ID field of any Thickness Measurement
Location record that you selected to move, an error message will be
displayed, and the Thickness Measurement Location records containing

matching TML IDs will not be moved.
If the target TML Group record is not linked to a Corrosion Analysis
Settings record with the same inspection type as any of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that you tried to move, the Settings
Missing dialog box appears, displaying a list of the Thickness
Measurement Location records that could not be moved. If you are
following the TM Best Practice to create your TM Analyses, however, the
TML Group records in a given TM Analysis should be linked to Corrosion
Analysis Settings records of the same inspection type as the Equipment
record to which the TML Group records are linked.
Hint: If necessary, you can create a Corrosion Analysis Settings record for the target TML
Group record that has the same inspection type as the Thickness Measurement Location
records that you are trying to move via the TM Analysis page.
What Happens If an Equipment or

TML Group Record Has TMLs and No
Settings?
If you access the TM TMLs/Measurements page for an Equipment or TML Group record
that is linked to one or more Thickness Measurement Location records but is not linked to
a Corrosion Analysis Settings record that has the same inspection type as those Thickness
Measurement Location records, the Missing Settings window will appear.
The Missing Settings window contains a grid that displays the following columns of
information:
Asset: The Record ID of the Equipment or TML Group record for which the
correct inspection type has not been defined.
Missing Settings: The inspection type that must be defined in the Corrosion
Analysis Settings record that is linked to the Equipment or TML Group record.
This is based upon the inspection type defined in the Thickness Measurement
Location record. The value in this column appears as a hyperlink, which you can
click to define the correct inspection type.
Reason: A brief explanation of why the inspection type must be changed.
Each entry in the list represents a unique combination of the three values. For example, a
single Equipment or TML Group record may be listed multiple times if the Corrosion
Analysis Settings records linked to the Equipment or TML Group record do not have the
correct inspection type for more than one Thickness Measurement Location record.
Whenever this window appears, you should click each hyperlinked value in the Missing
Settings column and define the inspection type that is needed. You will not be able to
update the TM Analysis until all the required inspection types are defined.
Printing the Grid in the TMLs Pane

To print the information displayed in the grid in the TMLs pane:
representing the Equipment or TML Group record to which the Thickness
Measurement Location record(s) information you want to print are linked. In the
following image, the node representing the Equipment record with the Record ID
~ ~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
button.
3. Click the
settings and then print the contents of the grid in the TMLs pane.
-orClick the
button to print the contents of the grid in the TMLs pane with your default
print settings.
The contents of the grid in the TMLs pane are sent to your selected printer.
Printing the Details of Thickness

To print the details of a Thickness Measurement Location record:

representing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose details you want
to print. In the following image, the TML01 UT Active node is selected.

TML Datasheet.
3. On the toolbar at the top of the Thickness Measurement Location window, click
the button.
Note: If there is a report that is associated with the Thickness Measurement Location
family, the Select Report to Print dialog box will appear before the Preview window
appears. On the Select Report to Print dialog box, you can choose to print the datasheet
for the Thickness Measurement Location record, or the report.
4. Click the
settings and then print the details of the Thickness Measurement Location record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the Thickness Measurement Location record
with your default print settings.
The details of the Thickness Measurement Location record are sent to your selected
printer.
Deleting Thickness Measurement

Location Records
To delete a Thickness Measurement Location record via the TM
Location record you want to delete. In the following image, the Equipment node ~
~ AQA Test TML Plot is selected.
that you want to delete. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement
Location record with TML ID TML01 is selected in the TMLs pane.
button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the selected
If one or more Thickness Measurement records have been linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record, a second confirmation message appears, indicating that
deleting the Thickness Measurement Location record will also delete records associated
with the Thickness Measurement Location record and asking if you want to proceed with
the deletion.
The selected Thickness Measurement Location record and all the Thickness
Measurement records that are linked to that Thickness Measurement Location record are
deleted, any unsaved changes you have made on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are
saved to the database. If you made changes that would require the to be updated, the
necessary updates are made.
Creating a New Thickness Measurement

The following instructions provide details on creating a new Thickness Measurement
record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page. Note that you can also create new Thickness
Measurement records on the TM Measurement Data Entry page and the TM Initial
To create new Thickness Measurement record:
1. On the TM TMLs/Measurements page, in the grid in the TMLs pane, select the
Thickness Measurement Location record to which you want to link the new
Thickness Measurement record. In the following image, the row containing TML
ID TML01 is selected.
2. On the toolbar at the top of the Measurements pane, click the
button.
The New Measurement dialog box appears.
3. To the right of the Readings text box, click the
button.
The Readings for [TML] window appears, where [TML] is the TML ID of the Thickness
Measurement Location record for which you are creating the new Thickness
Measurement record.
4. In the Value column of each row, type the desired reading value.
Note: The number of rows that appear in the grid on the Readings for [TML] window
corresponds to the value in the Number of Readings field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record for which you are creating a the Thickness Measurement record.
5. After you have populated all rows on the Readings for [TML] window, click OK.
The Readings for [TML] window closes, and the readings that you supplied appear in the
Readings text box on the New Measurement dialog box. If you supplied multiple values,
they will be separated by semicolons.
Hint: If you prefer not to use the Readings for [TML] window, you can type values
directly into the Readings text box, separating each one with a colon.
6. On the New Measurement dialog box, in the Measurement Taken Date box, type
or select a date. The value in the Measurement Taken Date box is set by default to
the current date.
Note: The New Measurement dialog box displays all the fields that are required in a
Thickness Measurement record. In the baseline Thickness Monitoring module, only the
Measurement Value and Measurement Taken Date fields are required. If your
implementation has been customized to require additional fields, they will be displayed
on the New Measurement dialog box. You will need to supply a value for each required
field before you can save the Thickness Measurement record.
7. Click OK.
A new row is added to the grid in the Measurements pane and contains the information
that you supplied on the New Measurement dialog box. In the following image, the new
row is selected.
Note: The Measurement ID field will be empty until you save the Thickness
Measurement record, when it will be populated automatically with the Record ID that is
created for the Thickness Measurement record based upon the ID Template that is defined
for the Thickness Measurement family.
8. Edit the measurement properties as desired. You can use the scroll bar at the
bottom of the grid to view all the available fields.
The new Thickness Measurement record is saved to the database along with any other
unsaved changes that exist on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and the corrosion
analysis is updated.
Creating a Corroded Area Measurement

The following instructions provide details on recording corroded area measurements for
an Equipment or TML Group record via the TM TMLs/Measurements page, and
instructions for setting up a Corroded Area Values grid for Thickness Measurement
Location records. Note that if a Corroded Area Values grid has been configured for a
Thickness Measurement Location record, the Corroded Area Values grid the will also be
available on the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
To record corroded area measurements in the Corroded Area Values grid:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record for which you want to
record corroded area measurements. The following image shows the node TML01
UT Active selected.

TML Datasheet.
3. On the TML datasheet, click the Corroded Area tab, as shown in the following
image.
4. Select the Is Corroded Area check box, as shown in the following image.
Selecting this check box enables the use of the Corroded Area Values grid. You can select
this check box only if the value in the Number of Readings field is 1 (one). If the value in
the Number of Readings field is greater than one, an error message will appear when you
attempt to select this check box.
Note: After a Corroded Area Values grid has been configured for a Thickness
Measurement Location record, you will need to record all measurements for that
Thickness Measurement Location record using the Corroded Area Values grid.
5. In the Corroded Area Length field, type a value that represents the overall length
of the corroded area.
6. In the Corroded Area Width field, type a value that represents the overall width of
the corroded area.
Note: The Corroded Area Length and Corroded Area Width fields are optional and are
meant for informational purposes only. The values in these fields have no effect on the
corroded area measurement. The value in these fields must be numeric but have no unit
of measure associated with them.
7. In the Corroded Area Rows field, type a value representing the number of rows
that you want to include in the Corroded Area Values grid.
8. In the Corroded Area Columns field, type a value representing the number of
columns that you want to include in the Corroded Area Values grid.
Note: Together, the number of rows and columns you specify will determine the number
of cells in the Corroded Area Values grid (one cell at the intersection of each row and
column). The number of cells corresponds to the number of measurements that will be
recorded for the corroded area. For example, two columns and two rows will create a
Corroded Area Values grid with four cells, which means that four measurements will be
recorded for the corroded area.
9. Click OK.
The New Measurement dialog box appears.
button.
11. Click the
button to the right of the Measurement Value text box.
The Corroded Area Values window appears.
12. Type the corroded area measurements into the cells in the Corroded Area Values
grid, and click OK.
13. The calculated average of the measurements that you entered appears in the
Measurement Value text box in the New Measurement dialog box.
14. Click OK.

15. The calculated average of the measurements you entered in the Corroded Area
Values grid is populated in the Readings, Uncorrected Measurement, and
Thickness Measurement fields of a new row in the grid in the Measurements pane.
The following image shows the new row selected in the Measurements pane.
The changes made to the Thickness Measurement record and any other unsaved changes
that exist on the TM TMLs/Measurements page are saved. If you made changes that
Accessing the Thickness Measurements

Datasheet
To view the details of a Thickness Measurement record on the TM TMLs/Measurements
page:

representing the Thickness Measurement Location record whose Thickness
Measurement record you want to view. In the following image, the node TML01
UT Active is selected.
2. In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the row containing the Thickness
Measurement record whose details you want to view. In the following image, the
row containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID
0.23-9/30/2005 is selected.

click Thickness Measurement Datasheet.
button, and then
The Thickness Measurement widow appears, displaying the details of the selected
Aspects of the Thickness Measurements

Datasheet
The Thickness Measurements window displays the details of the Thickness Measurement
record that you selected on the TM TMLs/Measurements page.
A toolbar is displayed above the datasheet that contains the following options:
Thickness Measurement Datasheet.
Document records for the Thickness Measurement record. By default, reference
documents cannot be configured for Thickness Measurement records, and this
option is disabled.
Note: Thickness Measurement records are not defined as a predecessor in the MI Has
Reference Documented relationship family in the default implementation, and this button
will be disabled. If your implementation has been customized, you may be able to
manage reference documents for Thickness Measurement records, and this button will be
enabled.
About Modifying Thickness

Measurement Records
After a Thickness Measurement record has been created and linked to an Thickness
Measurement Location record, its properties can be modified if needed. You have two
options for modifying a Thickness Measurement record. You can:
Modify a Thickness Measurement record Using the Thickness Measurement

datasheet.
Modify a Thickness Measurement record in the Measurements pane.
Note: If a required field is left blank in the Thickness Measurement record, when you try
to save the TM TMLs/Measurements page, a message appears, indicating that the
required field is blank and must contain a value. The Thickness Measurement record with
the missing information will not be saved, but any other Thickness Measurement records
that do have complete information will be saved to the database.
Modifying Thickness Measurement

Records Using the Thickness
Measurements Datasheet
You can modify a Thickness Measurement record using the Thickness Measurements
datasheet, which provides you with a concise view of a single Thickness Measurement
record. This option may be useful if you need to modify multiple fields, related fields, or
fields that are not displayed by default in the grid in the Measurements pane.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement record using the Thickness Measurements
datasheet:
Measurement record that you want to modify. In the following image, the node
TML01 UT Active is selected.
Measurement record you want to modify. In the following image, the row
containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.239/30/2005 is selected.

button, and then
The Thickness Measurements window appears, displaying the details of the selected
4. Modify the Thickness Measurement properties as desired. The general features

and behavior of the datasheet are the same as that of the Record Manager.
5. When you have finished making changes, click OK.
Modifying Thickness Measurement

Records in the Measurements Pane
You can modify a Thickness Measurement record using the grid in the Measurements
pane. This option provides you with an overview of multiple Thickness Measurement
records in the grid.
To modify an existing Thickness Measurement record in the Measurements pane:
whose Thickness Measurement record you want to modify. In the following
image, the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML
ID TML01 is selected.
2. In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the Thickness Measurement record
you want to modify. In the following image, the Thickness Measurement with
Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 is selected. Note that the value in the
Measurement Taken Date cell is 9/30/2005.
3. Enter or modify data in any of the fields displayed in the grid. In the following
image, the value in the Measurement Taken Date cell for the Thickness
Measurement record with Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 has been changed
from 9/30/2005 to 9/30/2000.
4. On the TM Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze Link.

would require the TM Analysis to be updated, the necessary updates are made
Printing the Grid in the Measurements

Pane
To print the information displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane:
representing the Thickness Measurement Location record to which the Thickness
Measurement record(s) that you want to print are linked. In the following image,
the node TML01 UT Active is selected.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record are displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane.
button.
3. Click the
settings and then print the contents of the grid in the Measurements pane.
-orClick the
button to print the contents of the grid in the Measurements pane with your
default print settings.
The contents of the grid in the Measurements pane are sent to your selected printer.
Printing the Details of Thickness

Measurement Records
To print the details of a Thickness Measurement record:
Measurement record you want to print. In the following image, the node TML01
UT Active is selected.
The Thickness Measurement records that are linked to the selected Thickness
Measurement Location record are displayed in the grid in the Measurements pane.
Measurement record that you want to print. In the following image, the row
containing the Thickness Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.239/30/2005 is selected.

button, and then
The Thickness Measurements window appears, displaying the details of the selected
4. On the toolbar at the top of the Thickness Measurements window, click the
button.
Note: If there is a report that is associated with the Thickness Measurement family, the
Select Report to Print dialog box will appear before the Preview window appears. On the
Select Report to Print dialog box, you can choose to print the datasheet for the Thickness
Measurement record or the report.
5. Click the
settings and then print the details of the selected Thickness Measurement record.
-orClick the
button to print the details of the selected Thickness Measurement record
with your default print settings.
The details of the Thickness Measurement record are sent to your selected printer.
Deleting Thickness Measurement

Records
To delete a Thickness Measurement record on the TM TMLs/Measurements page:
whose Thickness Measurement record you want to delete. In the following image,
the Thickness Measurement Location record with TML ID TML01 is selected.
In the grid in the Measurements pane, select the Thickness Measurement

record that you want to delete. In the following image, the Thickness
Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 is selected.
On the toolbar at the top of the Measurements pane, click the

button.
A confirmation message appears, asking if you really want to delete the
selected Thickness Measurement record.
Click the Yes button.
The selected Thickness Measurement record is deleted, and the is
updated. In the following image, you can see that the Thickness
Measurement record with the Measurement ID 0.23-9/30/2005 has
been deleted.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights

reserved.
Accessing the TM
Measurement Data Entry Page
You can use the TM Measurement Data Entry page to enter
thickness measurements for all the Thickness Measurement
Location records that are linked to a given Equipment or TML
Group record.
To access the TM Measurement Data Entry page:
On the Thickness Monitoring Functions page, click the
Measurement Data Entry link.
Perform a search to find the Equipment or TML Group

records for which you want to enter thickness
measurements.
In the search results, select the Equipment or
TML Group records, and click the Open button.
The TM Measurement Data Entry page appears.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc.

All rights reserved.
Overview of the TM
Measurement Data
Entry Page
The TM Measurement Data Entry page contains the
following items:
TM Explorer pane: Contains a tree, which
displays nodes to represent the Equipment and/or
TML Group records for which you accessed the
page and the Thickness Measurement Location
records that are linked to those Equipment or TML
Group records.
Common Measurement Data for <Family>
section: Displays options that let you define default
values that will be used to populate fields in new
Thickness Measurement records.
Task section: Displays a list of the Inspection
Task records that are linked to the Equipment record
that is represented by the root node in the TM
Explorer pane. You can select an Inspection Task
record in this list to specify that it should be updated
based upon Thickness Measurement records that
you create via the TM Measurement Data Entry
page. This section is displayed only when one or

more Inspection Task records are linked to the
Equipment record whose node appears at the root
level in the TM Explorer pane.
Data Entry Grid: Displays a grid that you can
use to create new Thickness Measurement records
for the selected Equipment or TML Group record.
Task Menu pane: Displays task menus that
provide you with quick access to functions that are
available on the TM Measurement Data Entry page.
The following task menus are available on the TM
Measurement Data Entry page:
Measurement Tasks
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pages

TM Explorer
The TM Explorer pane on the TM Measurement
Data Entry page displays nodes in a tree, where
each node represents one of the following items:
An Equipment or TML Group record for
which you accessed the page.
A record that is linked to an Equipment
or TML Group record for which you
accessed the page.
The contents of the TM Explorer pane are

displayed using the Measurement Data
Entry configured explorer, which is stored in
the following folder in the Meridium APM
Catalog:
\\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness
Monitoring\Explorers.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
Common
Measurement Data
Section
The Common Measurement Data for
<Family> section, where <Family> is the
family name of the Equipment or TML
Group record whose node is currently
selected in the TM Explorer pane, displays
fields where you can specify values that will
be populated by default in the Thickness
Measurement records that you create via the
TM Measurement Data Entry page.
Throughout the documentation, we refer to
this section as the Common Measurement
Data section.
The following fields are displayed in the

Common Measurement Data section:
Measurement Taken Date: The date that
you want to record in the Measurement
Taken Date field in the new Thickness
Measurement records. By default, this field
displays the last date that you selected the
last time you viewed this page for any
Equipment or TML Group record. If you
have never accessed this page before, this

field is set to the current date by default. You
can select a different date if needed (e.g., if
you are recording measurements that were
taken on a different date).
Measurement Taken By: The name of the
Security User that you want to be populated
in the Measurement Taken By field in the
new Thickness Measurement records. This
list contains the first and last name of
Security Users who have been granted the
TM Technician role. If the Security User
who is logged in currently has been granted
the TM Technician role, that Security User
will be selected by default. Otherwise, no
Security User will be selected in this list by
default.
Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit): The
value that you want to record in the
Temperature field in the new Thickness
Measurement records. By default, no value
appears in this field.
When you enter values in the fields in the
Common Measurement Data section, the
corresponding fields in the new Thickness
Measurement records will be populated
automatically. For example, consider that
you have entered the values shown in the
following image in the Common
Measurement Data section.
When you enter a value in the Readings

field in the data entry grid, the Common
Measurement Data section values will be
used to populate the corresponding fields in
the new Thickness Measurement records, as
Note: The default behavior described

reflects the behavior of the baseline TM
product. If default rules have been defined
for the Measurement Taken Date,
Measurement Taken By, or Temperature
fields in the Thickness Measurement family,
those behaviors will be reflected in the fields
in the Common Measurement Data section.
While the Common Measurement Data
section values will be used as the default
values in the new Thickness Measurement
records that you create, within any record,
you can modify the default value by
changing the value in the data entry grid.
Note that if you modify the values in the
Common Measurement Data section, your
changes will not be applied to any rows in
the data entry grid that already contain data.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

Task Section
The Task section displays a list of the
Inspection Task records that are linked to the
Equipment record whose node appears at the
root level in the TM Explorer pane.
The Task section is displayed only when:

The node that appears at the root level in
the TM Explorer pane represents an
Equipment record that is linked to at least
one Inspection Task record.
-and-
An Equipment or Thickness
Measurement Location node is selected in
the TM Explorer pane.
Note: The sections to the right of the TM
Explorer pane are refreshed only when you
select an Equipment or TML Group node in
the TM Explorer pane. Meaning, if you
select a TML Group node (the Task section
is not displayed), and then you select a
Thickness Measurement Location node, the
Task section will not be re-displayed. You
must select an Equipment node in order for
the Task section to be re-displayed. Then, if
you select a Thickness Measurement
Location node, the Task section will remain
displayed.
When you select an Inspection Task record
in this list, it will be updated based upon
Thickness Measurement records that you
create via the TM Measurement Data Entry
page. When an Inspection Task record is
selected in the list, to the right of the list, the
text View Task appears as a hyperlink. You
can click this hyperlink to access the
selected Inspection Task record. By default,
no value is selected in this list.
The value that is displayed in the list
depends upon whether or not the given
Inspection Task record is linked to an RBI
If the Inspection Task record is linked to
an RBI Recommendation record, the value
displayed in the list is a combination of the
value in the Task ID field in the Inspection
Task record and the value RBI, separated by
a hyphen. For example, consider an
Inspection Task record that is linked to an
RBI Recommendation record and whose
Task ID field contains the value Insp-1. The
value Insp-1 - RBI would be displayed in
the list for this Inspection Task record.
If the Inspection Task record is not

linked to an RBI Recommendation record,
the value displayed in this list is a
combination of the values in the Task ID and
Source Type fields in the Inspection Task
record, separated by a hyphen. In the image
shown at the beginning of this topic, the
Inspection Task record with the following
values is selected in the list:
Task ID: Insp-1-33
Source Type: Manual
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

Data Entry
Grid
The data entry grid displays one row
for each Thickness Measurement
Location record that is linked to the
Equipment or TML Group record
whose node is selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
Note: While each row represents a

single Thickness Measurement
Location record, the columns display
values from both that Thickness
Measurement Location record and
the Thickness Measurement records
that are linked to that Thickness
Measurement Location record. Fields
from Thickness Measurement
Location records are read-only.
By default, the grid is sorted in

ascending order according to the
value in the TML ID column. The
TML ID column is locked into place
and cannot be moved. It will remain
in view on the left side of the grid
when you use the scroll bar to view
fields in columns on the right side of
the grid.
Above the grid on the TM
Measurement Data Entry page, the
following items are displayed:
The
button: Deletes the
unsaved value in the Readings cell
for the selected Thickness
The
button: Displays a dropdown menu, which you can use to
access the Thickness Measurement
Location datasheet for the selected
record.
The TML Analysis Type list: The
selection in this list determines the
records that are displayed in the grid.
The TML Analysis Type list contains
ALL: Displays
Thickness Measurement
Location records of all TML
Analysis Types. This option
is selected by default.
UT: Displays Thickness
records whose TML Analysis
Type is UT.
RT: Displays Thickness

Type is RT.
TML: Displays Thickness
Type is TML.
The Active TMLs only
check box: When this check
box is selected, only Active
Thickness Measurement
Location records are
displayed in the grid. This
check box is selected by
deafult. When this check box
is cleared, Inactive and
Active Thickness
records are displayed in the
grid.
Below the grid, the [Status
Indicator] filter is displayed
when a filter is applied to the
grid. You can use the Edit
Filter button to the right of
the [Status Indicator] filter to
create other custom filters.
Note that the following grid
customizations will be saved
so that the next time you log
in, you will see them:
The width of the
columns.
The order of the columns
Any sorting that you have
applied to the grid.
Any grouping that you

have applied to the grid.
Your selection in the
Active TMLs only check box.
The last five custom
filters that you have used.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright
1993-2014 Meridium, Inc.
Measureme
nt Tasks
The Measurement Tasks

menu on the TM
Measurement Data Entry
page contains the following
links:
Pick Another
Asset: Displays the
Find Items window,
where you can
search for different
Equipment or TML
Group records and
open them on the
TM Measurement
Data Entry page.
Save and Analyze:

Saves any changes
that you have made
on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page and
updates calculations
in the TM Analysis.
This link is enabled
only if the analysis
settings necessary for
updating the TM
Analysis exist and if
you have modified the
TM Analysis since
you accessed the TM
TMLs/Measurements
page.
Clear All Data:
Clears all the unsaved
information that has
been recorded in the
grid on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page.
Note: Links on the
Measurement Tasks
menu are enabled
only when an
Equipment or TML
Group node is
selected in the TM
Explorer pane.
V3.6.0.0.0 Copyright 19932014 Meridium, Inc.

Navigati
on
The Navigation menu

on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page displays
links to various
features. This menu is
common to most
pages in Thickness
Monitoring.

Commo
n Tasks
The Common Tasks

menu on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page contains
the following links:
Print: This link is
disabled on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page.
Send To: Displays
a submenu with
options that let you
provide a link to the
current page on your
desktop (create
shortcut), in an email
message, or on a
Home Page.
Documents:
Displays the
Reference Documents
window, where you
can manage
Reference Document
records for the record
represented by the
node that is selected
in the TM Explorer
pane. This link is
enabled only when
you select a node in
the TM Explorer pane
that represents a
record that is related
to the Reference
Document family
through the Has
Reference Documents
relationship. In the
baseline Meridium
APM database, this
link is enabled only
when an Equipment
node is selected in the
TM Explorer pane.
Help: Displays the
context-sensitive Help
topic for the current
page.
Note: Links on the
Common Tasks menu
are enabled only when
an Equipment or TML
Group node is
selected in the TM
Explorer pane.

Associat
ed Pages
The Associated Pages
menu on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page displays
links only if
Associated Pages
have been configured
for the entity family
of the record whose
node is selected in the

TM Explorer pane. If
no Associated Pages
have been configured
for the entity family,
the Associated Pages
menu will be empty.

Entering
Thickness
Measure
ments on
the TM
Measure
ment Data
Entry
Page
You can use the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page to create
Thickness
Measurement records
for all the Thickness
Measurement
Location records that
are linked to an
Equipment or TML
Group record.
To create Thickness
Measurement records
on the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page:
On the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page, in the TM
Explorer pane, select
the node representing
the Equipment or
TML Group record
that is linked to the
Thickness
Measurement
Location record for
which you want to
create Thickness
In the
Common
Measurement
Data section:
In the
Measurement
Taken Date
box, type or
select the date
and time when
the readings
were taken.
I
n
t
h
e
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
(
D
e
g
r
e
e
s
F
a
h
r
e
n
h
e
i
t
)
t
e
x
t
b
o
x
,
t
y
p
e
a
v
a
l
u
e
i
n
d
i
c
a
t
i
n
g
t
h
e
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
a
t
w
h
i
c
h
t
h
e
r
e
a
d
i
n
g
s
w
e
r
e
t
a
k
e
n
.
In the
Measurement
Taken By list,
select the name
of the person
who took the
readings.
In the Readings
column of the data
entry grid, enter
reading values for t
desired Thickness
Measurement
Location records. T
enter readings:
You can type

values directly in th
Readings cells.
Hint: If you use thi

option, be sure to
separate each value
with a semicolon.
-or-
You can clic
the
button in th
cell to access the
Readings for [TML
window, where you
can enter a value in
the Value cell of ea
available row.
Note: The number o

readings that you
specify for each
Thickness
Measurement recor
should correspond
the value in the
Number of Reading
field in the Thickne
Measurement
Location record for
which you are creat
a Thickness
Measurement recor
The Measurement
Value cell will be
populated
automatically based
upon the readings t
you entered. The
Measurement Taken
Date, Measurement
Taken By, and
Temperature cells w
be populated
automatically using
the values in the

Common
Measurement Data
section. In the
following image, th
Thickness
Measurement
Location record wi
TML ID TML01 is
selected in the grid
the TM Measureme
Data Entry page. N
that the values ente
into the Common
Measurement Data
section have been
populated into the
corresponding field
of the data entry gr
On the Measure
Tasks menu, click t
and Analyze link.
Note: If you do not

value in the Readin
all of Thickness Me
Location records di
the grid, a confirma
message will appea
indicating that one
measurement value
populated, and wou
to continue saving.
The Thickness Mea

records are saved to
database, the TM A
updated, and the gr
refreshed to display
updated by the TM
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
1993-2014 Meridiu
rights reserved.
Deleting
Unsaved
on the TM
Measurem
Data Ent
Page
When you enter dat

grid on the TM Mea
Data Entry page, u
click the Save and A
link on the Measure
Tasks menu, the dat
saved, and Thickne
Measurement recor
exist for this unsave
You can use the

above the grid on th
Measurement Data
page to delete the u
value in the Readin
the selected Thickn
Measurement Loca
record. Additionally
delete ALL unsaved
that you have typed
cells in the grid for
Thickness Measure
Location records.
To delete all unsave

from the grid on the
Measurement Data
page:
On the Measure
click the Clear All
A confirmation mes
all unsaved values t
all cells in the grid
Measurement Loca
deleted.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Meridium, Inc. All
Updatin
Inspectio
Records B
Upon Thi
Measurem
Records C
on the TM
Measurem
Data Ent
If an Inspection Tas
to an Equipment re
you are creating Th
Measurement recor
Measurement Data
can specify that the
record be updated b
Thickness Measure
When you do this, t
Last Date field in th
record will be popu
most recent value in
Measurement Take
Thickness Measure
you create via the T
Data Entry page.
The following instr

that you are viewin
Measurement Data
that Equipment rec
Inspection Task rec
update appears at th
TM Explorer pane.
To specify that an I
record be updated b
Thickness Measure
created using the T
Data Entry page:
In the TM Explo
the node representi
or TML Group reco
the Thickness Meas
records for which y
Thickness Measure
In the following im
representing the Eq
~#1 DEROP. O.H.
112 is selected in th
pane.
Specify values
Common Measurem
In the list in the

Inspection Task rec
based upon the Thi
you will create.
In the following im
selected in the list i
Create Thickne
entry grid.
The following imag

records that were cr
Location records w
TML01
TML02
TML03
TML04
TML05
On the Measure
link.
The Thickness Mea

TM Analysis is upd
values updated by t
field in the selected
most recent value in
Thickness Measure
been added to the f
on the Inspection T
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
reserved.
Viewing
Inspectio
You can view any I

in the Task section
following instructio
Measurement Data
related Inspection T
To view an Inspecti
In the list in the

that you want to vie
In the following im
the Task section.
To the right of t
The selected record
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Accessin
The grid on the TM

Thickness Measure
record. If desired, y
Measurement Loca
To view the datashe

TM Measurement D
On the TM Mea
select the node repr
for which you want

TML01 UT Active
In the grid, sele

datasheet you want
Location Record w
Above the grid,
The Thickness Mea

selected Thickness
Note: When access

read-only. If you w
so using the TM TM
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Aspects
The Thickness Mea

Measurement Loca
The Datasheet list i
datasheets that have
A toolbar is also dis
Displays the Pr
on the Thickness M
Displays the Re
records that are link
Displays the his
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
About t
Entry Pa
The TM Initial Mea

multiple Thickness
Monitoring that fac
The features of the

Measurement Data
The TM Initial
Location records th
The default colu

slightly from that o
Entry page, only co
The TM Initial
dialog box, which a
appears automatica
or more Thickness
field. This feature i
Date field, which ty
Note that you can s

measurements ente
Inspection Task rec
Measurement Data
The TM Initial Mea

measurements.
Measurement d
selected Equipment
that contains a valu
and Measurement V
after you select the
You will need to

Readings field.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Accessin
Entry Pa
You can access the
Asset Analysis
T-Min Calculat
TM Analysis
TM Measureme
TM Quick View
TM TMLs/Mea
To access the TM I
On the Navigat
The TM Initial Mea
If the Equipment or
to a Thickness Mea
Nominal Measurem
If you access the TM

Group records, the
by default. The TM
Equipment or TML
Location record wh
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Enterin
Measurem
The TM Initial Mea

measurements. The
Equipment or TML
Thickness Meas
measurements.
-and-
Thickness Meas
Note: If you access

Group record that i
of base measureme
To enter base meas
Access the TM
with TMLs that are
The Nominal Meas
Select the date t
The Nominal Meas

section of the TM I
contains the date th
Location that is con
following values:
The Measur
Measurement Date
The Measureme
Measurement Data
The Measureme
the value in the No
The check box
Record values f
In the Measurem
In the Temp
In the Meas
Enter values
In the data entry
On the Measure
The new base meas

are now removed fr
Note: If you do not

measurement value
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
About t
The Bulk Analyze t

records.
Using the Thickne
Perform the TM
Save a log of th
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Accessin
To access the Bulk
On the Thickne
The Bulk Analyze F
Perform a searc
In the search re
Click the Select
The Thickness Mon

records that you sel
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Perform
When you perform
The Asset Corro

will be created for a
The TML Corro

exist with be update
To perform a TM A
Access the Bulk
On the Thickne
The Meridium APM

change to display th
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Saving a
After you have perf

Monitoring - Bulk A
To save the bulk an

Perform a bulk
On the Thickne
Navigate to the
If desired, in th
On the Save Bu
The log is saved to
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Accessin
The TM Quick View

is to provide an ove
To access the TM Q
On the Thickne
The Find Items win
Perform a searc
In the search re
The TM Quick View
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Overvie
The TM Quick View
A list of the Thi

- and -
Various informa
The page contains t
TM Explorer pa
Grid: Displays
Task menu pane

Quick View
Navigation
Common Tasks
Associated Pag
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
TM Exp
The TM Explorer p
An Equipment o
A record that is
The TM Explorer p
The selected node d
If you select an
If you select a T
The grid display
The Thickness M
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
TM Qu
To the right of the T
The grid on the TM
ML Group record whose node is currently selected in the TM Explorer pane.
e Reference Document family through the Has Reference Documents relationship. In the baseline Meridium
orrosion rate, next inspection date, and projected T-Min date calculations. Minimum Thickness values are an
s TML Group records and you select an Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane, the Thickness
s includes TML Group records and you select an Equipment node in the TM Explorer pane, the Thickness
Location record whose node is selected is linked.
he preceding image displays the workspace for the record Piping Circuit 0512, which belongs to the family
Location record, and the following columns of information are displayed for each record:
ormed, cells in this column will display one of the following symbols:
ch row in which this check box is selected. When you first access the T-Min Calculations page, this check
OM Conversion set associated with your Security User account.
e TM TMLs/Measurements page, the value in the Current Source cell would be User Defined.
Min cell will be populated with the most conservative, or largest, T-Min value by default. The <UOM>
rent value from the list in the Proposed Source cell, the value in the Proposed T-Min cell will be updated
ary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security User account.
y, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security User account.
ciated with the T-Min value and may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your
-Min value and may vary, depending upon the UOM Conversion set associated with your Security User
ord ID> workspace.
e you accessed the T-Min Calculations page.
M Explorer pane that represents a record that is related to the Reference Document family through
amily, the Associated Pages menu will be empty.
ng product or a custom formula that has been defined for your implementation. If desired, you can access the
e on the on the T-Min Calculations page, the Meridium APM system compares certain values from that
ving the T-Min formula, you can view the formula on the Formulas dialog box.
h the calculations are being performed. Without the necessary inputs, Meridium APM will not be able to
ords in your database.
ng to equipment type, which is derived using the value in the Design Code fields and other fields in each the
eld:
Code field:
sign Code field:
the Design Code field:
ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Conical Head in the Vessel Type field, and Inside in the PV
value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Conical Head in the Vessel Type field, and Outside in the
with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Cylindrical Shell in the Vessel Type field, and
ecords with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Cylindrical Shell in the Vessel Type field,
cation records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Ellipsoidal Head in the Vessel Type
ment Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Ellipsoidal Head in the
easurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Hemispherical
ness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field,
or Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code field, Pipe
value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design Code
T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the Design
culated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1 in the
the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII DIV 1
termine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value ASME VIII
e PV Formula field:
M to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value
ld, and Outside in the PV Formula field:
um APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the
, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with
Type field, and Inside in the PV Formula field:
alue for Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location
he Tank Type field:
te the Allowable Stress value for these Thickness Measurement Location record. The calculated value is
Annular Ring reference table.
d.
tain a value for Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement
Floor Plate in the Tank Type field:
lue (i.e., Yes or No). The Calculated T-Min value can be determined even if the check boxes in these fields
eserved.
must contain a value for Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement
ld and Riveted Shell in the Tank Type field:
d for determining the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness Measurement Location records with the value
he Tank Type field. If a value other than 21000 exists in the Allowable Stress field of these records, that value
rights reserved.
the value API 653 in the Design Code field. However, no baseline formulas are provided to calculate the Twith the value Roof Plate in the Tank Type field.
rights reserved.
fields must contain a value for Meridium APM to determine the Calculated T-Min value for Thickness
n the Design Code field and Welded Shell in the Tank Type field:
rights reserved.
imum thickness of a pipe based upon accepted industry standards. The Nominal T-Min value takes into
e minimum thickness associated with that criteria. The Nominal T-Min value is located using values from
n the Piping Nominal T-Min reference table. For the Nominal T-Min value to be retrieved for a given
ust contain values in the fields that are required for the lookup to occur, as determined by the Nominal T-Min
ng equipment. When you calculate the T-Min values via the T-Min Calculations page, a Nominal T-Min
Location records with a Design Code that corresponds to the piping equipment type, based upon the
Code Table.
rights reserved.
is displayed in the Default T-Min cell for each Thickness Measurement Location record in the grid in the TMin Calculations page. When a T-Min calculation is performed, the Meridium APM system retrieves the
the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location record.
rights reserved.
e that is displayed in the User T-Min cell for each Thickness Measurement Location record in the grid in the
ns page.
User Defined T-Min, in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace, the User T-Min cell will be populated
ecord. If the Minimum Thickness Type is anything other than User Defined, the User T-Min cell will be
egardless of whether the User T-Min cell contains a value when you access the T-Min Calculations page, you
esired value in this cell.
rights reserved.
Calculation is Performed?
lculate link on the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu or click the button above the grid in the T-Min
forms the following operations for each Thickness Measurement Location record for which the Process
displayed in the Calculated T-Min cell in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
yed in the Nominal T-Min cell in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
ed in the Default T-Min cell in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace.
in, Nominal T-Min, Default T-Min, and User T-Min (if one exists) and determines the most conservative
n cell in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace with the most conservative value determined in step 2.
ser T-Min cell after performing a calculation, the value in the Proposed T-Min cell will be updated with the
n cell, regardless of whether it is the most conservative value.
o be populated with one of the four values that identifies the type of T-Min value that was selected in this
lt, or User Defined. The following image shows the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace on T-Min
ion has been performed.
014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.
alculation Process
ge, you can perform calculations to determine the Minimum Thickness value for each Thickness
date Thickness Measurement Location records:
s page for the Equipment or TML Group records that are linked to the Thickness Measurement Location
s you want to calculate.
lations workspace, select the check box in the Process T-Min column for the Thickness Measurement
want to calculate the minimum thickness, as shown in the following image.
a User Defined T-Min value that will be compared to the calculated values, type the desired value in the
sired Thickness Measurement Location records.
Measurement Location record in which the Minimum Thickness Type is set to User Defined, when you
ions page, the User T-Min cell will be populated with the value in the Minimum Thickness field of that
e existing value as desired.
Calculator Tasks menu, click the Calculate link.
atus dialog box appears, displaying the information for the T-Min calculation for each Thickness
ation record for which a T-Min calculation was performed.
lculations are complete, you can save the information displayed in the Calculation Status dialog box by
Save Log button, if desired.
he Close button.
of the calculations are displayed in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace. For each Thickness
ent Location record for which the calculation was successful, the Proposed T-Min cell will be populated with
onservative T-Min value from all Thickness Measurement Location records that were included in the
. The source of this value will be populated in the Proposed Source field: Calculated, Nominal, Default, or
ed.
If you want the T-Min value in a Thickness Measurement Location record to be determined by a different
rce:
In the row containing the desired Thickness Measurement Location record, in the Proposed Source cell,
k the
button, and select the calculation type that you want to use as the source for the T-Min value for
Thickness Measurement Location record: Calculated, Nominal, Default, or User Defined.
In the row containing the desired Thickness Measurement Location record, type the desired value in the
r T-Min cell.
value in the Proposed T-Min cell is updated as appropriate. If you modified the value in the User T-Min
, the value in the Proposed Source cell will be updated to User Defined. In the following image, the User
ined calculation type has been selected from the list in the Proposed Source cell, and the value in both the
posed T-Min and User T-Min cells is 0.012.
On the T-Min Calculator Tasks menu, click the Save and Analyze link.
For each Thickness Measurement Location in the grid:
The Current T-Min cell is updated with the value in the Proposed T-Min cell, which is
also saved as the value in the Minimum Thickness field in the Thickness Measurement Location
record.
The Current Source cell is updated with the value in the Proposed Source cell, which is also
saved as the value for the Minimum Thickness Type field in the Thickness Measurement
Location record.
All cells that contain T-Min values or T-Min value sources are cleared, with the exception of the
Current T-Min and Current Source columns.
About the Calculation Details

When you perform a T-Min calculation, the Calculation Status dialog box appears, which shows
the progress of the calculations as they are being performed. After the calculations are complete,
you can use this dialog box to interpret the calculation progress. If desired, you can save the
results that are displayed in the dialog box to an external file.
After you close the Calculation Status dialog box, you can access it again for individual
Thickness Measurement Location records from the toolbar above grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace on the T-Min Calculations page.
Interpreting the Calculation Details

The Calculation Status dialog box displays information about the T-Min calculations that you
perform. The information that appears in the dialog box is separated into sections representing
each Thickness Measurement Location record whose T-Min value was calculated, as determined
by the selection of the Process T-Min check box in the grid in the T-Min Calculations workspace
on the T-Min Calculations page.
Each section contain specific information about that Thickness Measurement Location record
and the calculation that was performed against it.
Note: If a calculation was not successful, some sections will not contain data, or they will contain
information indicating the problem that the Meridium APM system encountered when trying to
complete the calculation.
The following image shows an example of the Calculation Status dialog box. In this image, only
one Thickness Measurement Location record was included in the calculation.
Note: The Calculation Status dialog box displays converted values rather than base, or stored,
values. Although units of measure are not displayed on the Calculation Status dialog box, the
UOM Conversion Set that is associated with your Security User account is applied to the values
displayed in the Calculation Status dialog box.
The Calculation Status dialog box is divided into the following sections for each Thickness
Measurement Location record:
TML : <TML ID>, where <TML ID> is the TML ID of the Thickness Measurement Location
whose calculation details you are viewing. This section displays the following information:
Minimum Thickness Value: The current Minimum Thickness value.
Minimum Thickness Source: The source of the current Minimum Thickness value.
By User: The User ID of the Security User who saved the current Minimum Thickness
value.
On Date: The date on which the current Minimum Thickness value was last saved.
Calculated T-Min: This section displays the following information:
Value: The Calculated T-Min value.
Formula Used: The location in the Rules Library where the formula that was used to
calculate the Calculated T-Min value is stored.
Note: Below the formula that was used, the Calculated T-Min section displays the fields that
were used in the calculations and the values that those fields contained at the time of the
calculation.
Nominal T-Min value: This section displays the following information:
Nominal T-Min value: The Nominal T-Min value that was retrieved using the Piping
Nominal T-Min reference table.
Values used for the lookup: The fields in the Thickness Measurement Location record that
were used to retrieve the Nominal T-Min value.
Note: The Nominal T-Min value section appears only for calculations that have been performed
for Thickness Measurement Location records with a Design Code that corresponds to the Piping
Asset Type.
Default T-Min value: This section displays the value that is stored in the Default T-Min field
in the Corrosion Analysis Settings record that is linked to the Thickness Measurement Location
record.
User Defined T-Min value: This section displays the value in the User T-Min field in the
Saving the Calculation Details

You can save the calculation log while viewing the Calculation Status dialog box after the
calculations have been performed or for one Thickness Measurement Location record while
viewing the Details dialog box for that Thickness Measurement Location record.
To save the calculation log as a text file:
On the Calculation Status dialog box or the Details dialog box, click the Save Log button.
Navigate to the location where you want to save the calculation log.
In the File name text box, enter the name that you want to give the saved calculation
log file.
Click the Save button.
The calculation log is saved as a text (.TXT) file.
About TML Calculation Details

Calculation details are logged for each Thickness Measurement Location record each
time you perform a T-Min calculation for it. You can view these details on the:
Current Calculation Results Details dialog box: Displays the details of the calculation
that was most recently performed for a given Thickness Measurement Location record.
Calculation Results History dialog box: Displays the details of ALL the calculations
that were attempted for a given Thickness Measurement Location record. The details
included on this dialog box are the same as the details displayed on the Current
Calculation Results Details dialog box, but on the Calculation Results History dialog box,
the details are repeated once for each time a calculation was performed.
The information displayed on each of these dialog boxes is similar to the data displayed
on the Calculation Results dialog box, which appears when T-Min calculations are
performed. Additionally, like the Calculation Results dialog box, the Current Calculation
Results Details and Calculation Results History dialog boxes offer an option that lets you
save the details to a file.
Viewing the Details for the Most Recent

Calculation
To view the calculation details for a single Thickness Measurement Location record:
On the T-Min Calculations page, in the grid in the T-Min Calculations
workspace, in the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location record
whose T-Min calculation details you want to view, click the button in the
Calculation Status cell.
The Current Calculation Results Details dialog box appears, displaying the
calculation details for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
Viewing the History of All

Calculations
To view the calculation details of all calculations attempted for a given Thickness
Measurement Location record:
On the T-Min Calculations page, in the grid in T-Min Calculations
workspace, in the row containing the Thickness Measurement Location
record whose T-Min calculation details you want to view, locate the
Calculation History cell in the grid, and click the
button.
The Calculation Results History dialog box appears, displaying the details
of all T-Min calculations that have been performed for the Thickness
Resetting User Grid Preferences

Various grids are displayed throughout Thickness Monitoring. For
example, on the TM TMLs/Measurements page, Thickness Measurement
Location records are displayed in a grid in the TMLs pane.
The grids within Thickness Monitoring have a set of default settings that
control the appearance of the grids when users view them the first time,
including the columns that are displayed, the column order, the sort order,
and so on. If a Security User modifies the settings for a grid, those changes
will be saved for that Security User so that the next time that user views
the same grid, rather than displaying the default grid settings, the
Meridium APM system will display the user-specific settings.
The TM Administrative Tasks page offers an option that you can use to
reset a Security User's saved grid preferences so that the next time that
user views the grid, the default grid preferences will be used. Grid
preferences can be reset for each Thickness Monitoring Security User and
for various pages in Thickness Monitoring.
To reset a Security User's grid preferences:
In the Meridium APM Framework, access the TM Administrative
Tasks page.
Click the Reset User Preferences link.
The Reset User Preferences page appears.
In the Reset User Preferences for the following forms list, select
the page for which you want to reset a Security User's grid
preferences.
In the Select Users list, select the check box to the left
of the User ID of the Security User whose grid preferences
you want to reset. You can clear the check box to the left of
the User ID of any Security User whose grid preferences
you do not want to reset. Note that:
The User ID associated with the Security User who
is currently logged in to Meridium APM will be selected by
default. Be sure to clear this check box if you do not want
to reset the grid preferences for this user.
The list of Security Users is sorted alphabetically by
Last Name. The sort order cannot be changed.
At the bottom right of the Select Users list, click

the Reset button.
Note: The Reset button will be enabled only if at
least one Security User is selected in the Select
Users list.
A message appears, indicating that the grid
preferences were reset successfully.

About Devices in
The Meridium APM Devices functionality (referred
to as Datalogger in the Thickness Monitoring
module) allows for the collection and transfer of
data between a Meridium APM database and a
device, which can be a physical piece of hardware,
such as a handheld data-collection tool, or a file,
such as a spreadsheet or text file. The Meridium
APM Devices interface enables direct
communication between supported data-collection
devices, the Meridium APM Framework machine,
and the Meridium APM database. This is done by
defining a device and associating with it a mapping,
which defines the data that is to be sent to and
received from the data-collection device.
In Thickness Monitoring, devices are used to collect
readings that will be uploaded to Meridium APM to
create Thickness Measurement records. More
specifically:
You will send to a device the TMLs for which
you want to collect measurement data.
After the readings have been collected and

reside on the device, you will upload them to a
Meridium APM database via a receive operation.
The readings that are uploaded will be used to
create new Thickness Measurement records that are
linked to the Thickness Measurement Location
records that you sent to the device.
The following devices are supported by Meridium
APM Thickness Monitoring:
Access Database
Microsoft Excel 5.0/Excel 95
Microsoft Excel 2000
Microsoft Excel 97
GE DMS Go
GE DMS Go+
ODBC
Panametrics 37DL Plus Ultrasonic Thickness
Gage
Panametrics 38DL Plus Ultrasonic Thickness
Gage
Text
Note the following details about sending data to
specific devices:
The following devices do not accept Asset IDs
containing lowercase characters:
Panametrics 37DL Plus Ultrasonic
Thickness Gage
Panametrics 38DL Plus Ultrasonic

Thickness Gage
The Krautkramer Branson DMS2
Instrument and the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+
device will only use the first 32 characters of
any item you send. This means that if an
Asset ID is longer than 32 characters, it can
be sent to the devices, but the file created on
the devices will only contain the first 32
characters of the name. If you send items
longer than 32 characters, you will receive a
message indicating the original item name
and the truncated item name.
Note also that if multiple items are sent to
this device, and the first 32 characters of the
items are identical, a single file will be
created on the device using those 32
characters. All items that were sent will
appear in that file.
For a more expedient transfer of TM data
when using a GE DMS Go/DMS Go+
device, you can remove the memory card
from the GE DMS Go/DMS Go+ device and
plug the card directly into a card reader
attached to your local machine.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

Accessing Devices
in Thickness
Monitoring
To access the Devices interface from the
Thickness Monitoring Functions page:
On the Thickness Monitoring Functions

page, click the Datalogger link.
The Select a Device and Properties dialog
box appears.
From the Select a Device and Properties

dialog box, you can:
Add a new device.
Edit an existing device.
Delete a device.
Access the Manage Device Mappings
dialog box, where you can manage the
mappings for a given device.
Initiate a send operation.
Initiate a receive operation.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

How Devices
Handle Multiple
Readings
When you send TM data to a device, you
download to the device information about
the Thickness Measurement Location
records for which you want to collect
readings. While the Meridium APM system
supports multiple readings per measurement,
devices support only one reading per TML.
Therefore, when you send data to a device:
The Meridium APM system will evaluate

the value in the Number of Readings field in
each Thickness Measurement Location
record that you send to the device.
On the device, one entry will be created
for each reading that needs to be collected.
If multiple readings need to be collected for
a given TML, multiple entries will be
created on the device for that Thickness
Measurement Location record. Each entry
on the device will be identified by the value
[TML ID][x]*, where TML ID is the value
in the TML ID field and x is a letter of the
alphabet.
When you receive readings that have
been collected on the device, the Meridium
APM system will combine all the entries for
a given TML and use them to create a single
Thickness Measurement record to store ALL
the collected reading values.
Consider, for example, a Thickness
Measurement Location record with the TML
ID TML1 that contains the value 3 in the
Number of Readings field. When this TML
is sent to the device, three entries will be
created on the device:
TML1a*
TML1b*
TML1c*
Now, assume that you record the following
readings for the entries.
Entry
Reading
TML1a*
0.31
TML1b*
0.315
TML1c*
0.311
When you receive the data from the device,

ONE Thickness Measurement record will be
created. It will be linked to the Thickness
Measurement Location record TML1 and
will contain the following values in the
Readings field:
0.31
0.315
0.311
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

About TM Device
Mappings
To use devices in TM, you must create
mappings that determine what information
will be transferred to and from the device.
Two types of mappings are needed:
Send Mappings: Identify the data
that will be transferred from the
Meridium APM database to a device
and what fields on the device should
be populated with that data.
Receive Mappings: Identify the
data that will be transferred from a
device to the Meridium APM
database and what fields in
Meridium APM records should be
populated with that data.
The documentation provides a list of

fields that are required for send and
receive mappings and the
corresponding Meridium APM field.
However, the documentation does
not provide detailed instructions on
creating these mappings and instead
assumes that you have a general
understanding of the mapping
creation process and how devices are
used in TM. Keep in mind that each
mapping, however, has requirements
that are specific to TM and the
device for which the mapping is
being created.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

Fields Required
for Send and
Receive
Mappings
The following tables list the fields
that must exist in TM send and
receive mappings to ensure
successful send and receive
operations for TM data. For some
devices, additional fields are
supported and can also be included in
the send and receive mappings. Any
field not listed in this topic, however,
is not necessary for ensuring the
success of send and receive
operations. If you choose to map
additional device fields, you will
need to associate them with a
corresponding Meridium APM field.
Note: The following mappings are

supported for ALL TM devices
except where otherwise noted.
Fields Required for

Send Mappings
Meridium APM Field
Device Fiel
TML Asset ID (Thickness Measurement

Location)
Asset ID
TML ID (Thickness Measurement Location) Datapoint I

Unit of Measure (MI Unit of Measure)
Datapoint U
Number of Readings (Thickness

Measurement Location)
Number of
Fields Required for

Receive Mappings
Meridium APM Field
Device Fiel
TML Asset ID (Thickness Measurement

Location)
Asset ID
TML ID (Thickness Measurement Location) Datapoint I

Unit of Measure (MI Unit of Measure)
Datapoint U
Readings (Thickness Measurement)
Reading Va
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014

About Skipping
Measurements in
TM
The Meridium APM Thickness
Monitoring module provides the
option to skip measurements,
meaning that you want to record an
inspection date for a particular TML
to satisfy inspection requirements,
but not actually take a measurement
at the TML. When you skip a
measurement, instead of creating a
Thickness Measurement record
containing measurement values
associated with that TML for a
particular inspection, you will create
a Measurement Not Taken record to
store the inspection data.
Some reasons that you may want to
skip measurements include:
The physical location of
certain TMLs on a piece of
equipment or component may
be difficult to reach or require
a shutdown in order to take a
measurement.
Your organization may
have a strategy in place that
dictates that if measurements
are taken for a certain
percentage of TMLs on a
piece of equipment or
component, then it is
acceptable not to take
measurements for the
remaining TMLs.
Resource limitations may
make it difficult or
impossible to take
measurements at all TMLs on
all pieces of equipment or
components.
In order to skip
measurements in Thickness
Monitoring, you first must
enable this option in your
global preferences. Then you
will need to create
Measurement Not Taken
records to represent any
measurement that was
skipped. After you have
enabled this option and
created Measurement Not
Taken records, TM Analyses
containing skipped
measurements will be
updated to take those
Measurement Not Taken
records into account.
IMPORTANT: The
Meridium APM Thickness
Monitoring Best Practice is to
record actual readings for all
inspections and not skip
measurements. This section
of the documentation
provides information on
using this functionality if you
decide to deviate from the
Thickness Monitoring Best
Practice. All TM
documentation outside of this
section assumes that the skip
measurements feature is
disabled.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright
1993-2014 Meridium, Inc.
Enabling
the Option to
Skip
Measurement
s
In order to skip
measurements in TM, you
must enable this option in the
global preferences. When you
have enabled this option, the
button is displayed on
the toolbar above the grid:
In the
Measurements pane
on the TM
TMLs/Measurements
page.
On the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page.
If you enable this
option and create
Measurement Not
Taken records and
then later disable this
option, any
Measurement Not
Taken records that
you created will be
ignored in the TM
Analysis (i.e., all
calculations will be
performed as if the
Measurement Not
Taken records did not
exist).
To enable the option
to skip measurements:
Access the Global
Preferences page.
In the
Measurement
Preferences section,
select the Allow
Measurements to be
Skipped check box.
The Allow
Consecutive Skipped
Measurements check
box becomes enabled,
as shown in the
following image.
If you
want to also
enable the
option to skip
measurements
consecutively,
select the
Allow
Consecutive
Skipped
Measurements
check box.
On the
Global
Preferences
task menu,
click the Save
link.
Your
selections are
saved.
V3.6.0.0.0 Copyright
1993-2014
Meridium, Inc.
All rights
reserved.
Abou
t
Skippi
ng
Measu
remen
ts
Conse
cutivel
y
If you enable
the option to
skip
measurements
in TM, you
will also have
the option to
enable a
feature that
allows you to
skip
measurements
consecutively.
When you do
this, you will
be able to
create back-toback
Measurement
Not Taken
records. This
concept is best
understood
through an
example.
Suppose that
the TML
TML01 is
difficult to
reach. As a
result, your
organizational
policy dictates
that while
readings for all
other TMLs on
the associated
piece of
equipment
must be taken
every six
months, a
reading for
TML01 must
be taken only
once per year,
as illustrated
in the
following
table.
TML
Scheduled readings
June 1, 2014
TML01
June 1, 2015
June 1, 2014
TML02
December 1, 2014
June 1, 2015
December 1, 2015
June 1, 2014
TML03
December 1, 2014
June 1, 2015
December 1, 2015
Continuing
with this
example,
suppose that
you create a
Measurement
Not Taken
record when a
reading is
skipped for
TML01 on
December 1,
2014. Next,
suppose that
due to budget
constraints at
your facility,
the scaffolding
necessary to
gain access to
TML01 is
unable to be
built on June
1, 2015 (the
date on which
an actual
thickness
measurement
reading is
scheduled to
be taken for
this TML). In
this case, you
may want to
create another
Measurement
Not Taken
record for
TML01,
assuming that
an actual
measurement
will be taken
when possible.
V3.6.0.0.0 Copyright
1993-2014
Meridium, Inc.
All rights
reserved.
Enab
ling
the
Option
to Skip
Measu
remen
ts
Conse
cutivel
y
To enable the
option to skip
measurements
consecutively:
Access the
Global
Preferences
page.
In the
Measurement
Preferences
section, with
the Allow
Measurements
to be Skipped
check box
selected, select
the Allow
Consecutive
Skipped
Measurements
check box.
On
the
Global
Prefere
nces
task
menu,
click
the
Save
link.
Your
selectio
ns are
saved.
V3.6.0.
0.0 Copyri
ght
19932014
Meridi
um,
Inc. All
rights
reserve
d.
R
ule
s
for
Cr
eat
ing
Me
asu
re
me
nt
No
t
Ta
ke
n
Re
cor
ds
When
you
enable
the
option
to skip
measur
ements
in TM,
it is
import
ant to
keep in
mind
the
followi
ng
rules:
You
can
create
a
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record
only
for
Thickn
ess
Measur
ement
Locatio
n
records
for
which
at least
one of
the
followi
ng
items
exists:
An
active,
actual
thickne
ss
measur
ement.
-or An
active,
nomina
l
thickne
ss
measur
ement.
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
records
are not
conside
red
actual
measur
ements
with
respect
to
determi
ning
when
nomina
l
measur
ements
are
made
inactiv
e
measur
ements
.
V3.6.0.
0.0 Copyri
ght
19932014
Meridi
um,
Inc. All
rights
reserve
d.
A
bo
ut
Cr
eat
ing
Me
asu
re
me
nt
No
t
Ta
ke
n
Re
cor
ds
You
can
create
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
records
and
link
them to
Thickn
ess
Measur
ement
Locatio
n
records
to
represe
nt
measur
ements
that
you
skippe
d
during
an
inspect
ion.
You
can
create:
A
s
i
n
g
l
e
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
T
M
T
M
L
s
/
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
s
o
r
T
M
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
a
t
a
E
n
t
r
y
p
a
g
e
.
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
s
a
t
o
n
e
t
i
m
e
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
T
M
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
a
t
a
E
n
t
r
y
p
a
g
e
.
I
n
o
r
d
e
r
t
o
c
r
e
a
t
e
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
s
,
t
h
e
o
p
t
i
o
n
t
o
s
k
i
p
m
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
s
m
u
s
t
b
e
e
n
a
b
l
e
d
o
n
t
h
e
G
l
o
b
a
l
P
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s
p
a
g
e
.
V
3
.
6
.
0
.
0
.
0
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

1
9
9
3
2
0
1
4
M
e
r
i
d
i
u
m
,
I
n
c
.
A
l
l
r
i
g
h
t
s
r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
C
r
e
a
t
i
n
g
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
R
e
c
o
r
d
s
U
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
T
M
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
a
t
a
E
n
t
r
y
P
a
g
e
I
f
y
o
u
a
r
e
e
n
t
e
r
i
n
g
t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
m
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
s
f
o
r
A
L
L
t
h
e
T
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
s
t
h
a
t
a
r
e
l
i
n
k
e
d
t
o
a
g
i
v
e
n
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
o
r
T
M
L
G
r
o
u
p
r
e
c
o
r
d
a
n
d
y
o
u
w
a
n
t
t
o
c
r
e
a
t
e
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
s
,
y
o
u
c
a
n
u
s
e
t
h
e
T
M
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
a
t
a
E
n
t
r
y
p
a
g
e
.
T
o
c
r
e
a
t
e
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
N
o
t
T
a
k
e
n
r
e
c
o
r
d
s
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
T
M
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
a
t
a
E
n
t
r
y
p
a
g
e
:
In
the
grid,
select
the row
represe
nting
the
TML
for
which
you
want to
create a
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record.
On
the
toolbar
above
the
grid,
click
the
bu
tton.
A
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record
is
created
and
linked
to the
associa
ted
Thickn
ess
Measur
ement
Locatio
n
record.
The
followi
ng cells
in the
selecte
d row
in the
grid are
populat
ed with
values:
Readin
gs:
Display
s the
value
<Not
Taken>
.
Measur
ement
Taken
Date:
Display
s the
date on
which
the
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record
was
created
.
V3.6.0.
0.0 Copyri
ght
19932014
Meridi
um,
Inc. All
rights
reserve
d.
C
rea
tin
g
Me
asu
re
me
nt
Not
Ta
ken
Re
cor
ds
Usi
ng
the
T
M
T
M
Ls/
Me
asu
re
me
nts
Pa
ge
To
create a
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record
using
the TM
TMLs/
Measur
ements
page:
In
the grid
in the
TMLs
pane,
select
the row
represe
nting
the
TML
for
which
you
want to
create a
Measur
ement
Not
Taken
record.
In the
followi
ng
image,
the row
contain
ing the
Thickn
ess
Measur
ement
Locatio
n
record
with
TML
ID
TML01
is
selecte
d.
On the
toolbar above
the grid in the
Measurements
pane, click the
button.
The New
Measurement
dialog box
appears.
In the
Measurement Take
Date box, type or
select a date that
corresponds with th
inspection during
which you skipped
measurement for th
TML. Today's date
displayed in this bo
by default.
Click OK.
A Measurement No
Taken record is
created and linked t
the Thickness
Measurement
Location record. A
new row containing
details of the
Measurement Not
Taken record is
displayed in the gri
in the Measuremen
pane. The Readings
cell is populated wi
the value <Not
Taken>, and the oth
cells are populated
with values stored i
the Measurement N
Taken record. A red
outline has been
added to the follow
image to highlight t
new row that is
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
1993-2014
Meridium, Inc. All
rights reserved.
Creatin
Multiple
Measurem
ent Not
Taken
Records
Using the
TM
Measurem
ent Data
Entry
Page
If you want to creat

Thickness
Measurement recor
and Measurement N
Taken records for th
Thickness
Measurement
Location records th
are linked to an
Equipment or TML
Group record, you
create multiple
Measurement Not
Taken records at on
time using the Crea
Skipped
Measurements
window. The
following instructio
assume that you are
viewing the TM
Measurement Dat
Entry page for the
Equipment or TML
Group record whos
Thickness
Measurement
Location records fo
which you want to
create Thickness
Measurement recor
and Measurement N
Taken records.
To create multiple
Measurement Not
Taken records at on
time via the TM
Measurement Data
Entry page:
In the grid, for

each Thickness
Measurement
Location record for
which you want to
create Thickness
Measurement recor
type a value in the
Readings cell.
In the following
image, the Reading
cell for the Thickne
Measurement
Location records w
TML IDs TML01 a
TML02 contains a
value.
On the Measure
Tasks menu, click t
and Analyze link.
The Create Skipped

Measurements wind
appears.
The check boxes fo

Thickness Measure
Location records fo
you did not enter a
the Readings cell an
associated Equipme
TML Group record
If you want to c
Measurement Not T
All of the Thick

Location records fo
a value in the Read
default selections.
Some of the Th
Location records fo
a value in the Read
boxes for the Thick
Location records fo
to create Measurem
In the following im
Thickness Measure
with TML ID TML
Click OK.
A confirmation mes
measurements have
cell in grid for Thic
records for which y
Taken records is po
Taken>. The follow
this confirmation m
Taken> displayed i
the Thickness Meas
TML ID TML04.
Click OK.
The TM Measurem
displaying a blank g
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
rights reserved.
Viewing
Measurem
Record
The details of Meas

TMLs/Measuremen
grid to view all of t
each Measurement
view the details of
using the Measurem
To view the details
On the TM TML
Explorer pane, sele
Measurement Loca
Taken record you w
In the Measurem
Measurement Not T
On the toolbar a
then click Thicknes
The Measurement N
Not Taken datashee
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Interpre
Analyses
Measurem
IMPORTANT: So
documentation are
documentation. Co
information.
When active measu

TM Analysis, all ca
Inspection Date, are
not included in you
for Short Term Cor
using the Short Ter
Short Term Corro

...where:
Short Term Loss =
...and:
Short Term Interval
Continuing with the
Short Term Loss =
Short Term Loss =
Short Term Interv
Short Term Interv
Short Term Corro
Short Term Corro
Note that the Short

Measurement Value
record that is assoc
There is no value a
Measurement Not T
all TM calculations
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Interval
When Measuremen
Interval Next Inspe
Interval Next Inspe

Inspection Interval
Where Last Measur

Measurement Take
and active Measure
Measurement Loca
For example, consi

years) and a Thickn
records with the fol
In this case, the Inte
Interval Next Inspe
Interval Next Inspe
You will know whe

calculate the Interv
Location record bas
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Skipped
Corrosion
When a TML's mos

Measurement Not T
rate is less than the
fields in the TML C
Asset Average C
Asset Average C
Asset Average C
Asset Average C
This differs from w

not include skipped
In the preceding sce

populated with the
a TM Analysis with
An asset contro
A TML with a c
measurement date i
In this case, the Ass

MILS/year.
This Asset Average

that is specified to d
(Maximum, Averag
does not include sk
include skipped me
populated only whe
the result only of an
determine the asset
Asset Average Corr

are used to populate
calculations are per
TM Analysis does n
same calculations i
versus a TM Analy
however, may diffe
Asset Average Corr
These values are di

TML Corrosion An
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Skipped
TM Anal
When the Measurem

record is used to ca
arrow is displayed t
Details workspace
to the following im
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Skipped
TML Ana
You cannot view th

Location record for
Only one active

-and-
One or more M
When you try to ac

Measurement Loca
displayed.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Measur
Records
Measurement Not T
you have enabled th
lists the fields in M
description, and usa
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Overvie
A TM Analysis incl
specific records tha
various calculations
stored in various re
In this section of th
calculations and va
These descriptions
the calculation or v
Asset Corrosion
are performed using
Location and Thick
TML Corrosio
performed using th
Thickness Measure
Thickness Meas
The values calculat
values in the associ
The Meridium APM

methods to arrive a
understand the info
understand how the
Hint: In addition to
formulas on the Fo
link on the TM Task
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Change
Rates and
TML and equipmen

Calculations. As a r
component, or piec
Additionally, calcu
impacted.
The following table

corrosion rate is dir
controlling corrosio
that is determined d
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
About A
Calculati
The calculations in
Thickness Measure
TM Analysis. The r
Analysis record, an
Summary workspac
A red outline has be

Corrosion Analysis
workspace.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Types o
The following corro

record:
Controlling Cor
Average Corros
Statistical Corro
Maximum Corr
Maximum Histo
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Control
Three options on th
Controlling Corrosi
associated with an E
Average: When
Asset Corrosion An
calculated for the p
Formula: When
Asset Corrosion An
calculated for the p
Maximum: Wh
in the Asset Corros
Rate calculated for

window to highligh
Additionally, the op
Summary workspac
Group record. A red
your selection for th
workspace. The fol
Asset Analysis Sett
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Average
The Average Corro

the following equat
Average Corrosion
For example, consi

following controllin
14.98 Mils/year
13.91 Mils/year
14.5 Mils/year
If the Safety Factor

following equation:
Average Corrosion
Average Corrosion
The Asset Analysis

of the Average Corr
Safety Factor
Minimum Num
Percentile
By default, these op
Measurement Loca
Factor of 1. In othe
described here, you
adjusted, click one
calculation can be m

window to highligh
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Safety F
The Safety Factor i

represents the value
determine the Avera
Average Corrosion
applied using the fo
Average Corrosion
For example, if the

Average Corrosion
Average Corrosion
Average Corrosion
Note that the actual

that is calculated us
determined after ap
records. A Safety F
you want to use the
modify the default
to indicate that the
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Percent
The standard avera

divides it by the nu
average corrosion r
value, you can elim
Percentile option in
The Percentile opti

Thickness Measure
example, assume th
The percentile rank

include that control
factored in as:
(# of TMLs x Perc
For example, if you

(5 x 80)/100 = 4
In this case, the Ave

The default value fo

Average Corrosion
Location records in
Measurement Loca
to modify this settin
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Minimu
The Minimum Num

It ensures that the n
calculating the Ave
For example, consi
An Equipment o
records.
The Percentile s
The Minimum N
Using the Percentil

Location records to
(50 x 20)/100 = 10
Because the Minim

system will use the
of using only the 10
By default, the Min

system will calcula
recommend that yo
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Statistic
The Statistical Corr

the remaining TML
Rate.
First, the mean corr

Mean CR = All T
Then, the standard

following equation:
Next, the following
Upper Outlier Limi
Lower Outlier Lim
The Standard Devia

Group record (via t
Any TML controlli

lower the outlier lim
Rate calculation.
Finally, the Statistic

Measurement Loca
Statistical Corrosio
Consider, for exam

10.001 Mils/yea
9.921 Mils/year
8.999 Mils/year
8.001 Mils/year
6.999 Mils/year
For this analysis, th
Mean CR = (10.001
Mean CR = 8.7842
The TML CR SD is
TML CR SD = 1.28
Next, the calculated

calculate the upper
Deviation Factor of
Upper Outlier Limi
Upper Outlier L
Upper Outlier L
Lower Outlier Lim
Lower Outlier L
Lower Outlier L
Remember that a T
calculated upper ou
10.001 > 9.9421
10.001 > -7.6268
9.921 < 9.9421
9.921 > -7.6268
8.999 < 9.9421
8.999 > -7.6268
8.001 < 9.9421
8.001 > -7.6268
6.999 < 9.9421
6.999 > -7.6268
You can see from th

than the upper outli
than the lower outli
excluded from the S
be calculated as:
Statistical Corrosi
Statistical Corrosi
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Maximu
The Maximum Cor

evaluating the cont
Maximum Corrosio
fastest) corrosion ra
For example, consi

12.3 Mils/year
11.2 Mils/year
11 Mils/year
In this case, the Ma
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Maximu
The Maximum His

Corrosion Rates tha
Maximum Historic
TMLs.
For example, consi

Measurement Loca
12.3 MILS/year
11.2 MILS/year
11 MILS/year

set to 12.3 MILS/ye
12.3 MILS/year
14 MILS/year
13.5 MILS/year
Then the Maximum

14 MILS/year. As T
Corrosion Rate in t
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Controlli

Calc Adjusted Next
TML Group record
If the Apply CC
Insp Date will be se
If the Apply CC
Next Insp Date will

Apply CCR to TML
Note: The field labe

Next Insp Date. Th
Measurement Loca
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calculate

been calculated for
to the most conserv
For example, if a pi
Inspection Dates:
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calculate
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calc Adj

Dates that have bee
conservative (i.e., s
For example, consi

Corrosion Rate Nex
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calc Adj
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
Asset Controlling R
depending upon ho
Asset Analysis Sett
If the Apply CC
the Asset Calc Adju
If the Apply CC
set to the Asset Cal

Life Next Insp Date
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Estimat
Estimated Remaini
This value is calcul

calculated by determ
is being viewed). E
displayed in years.
Estimated Remaini
For example, consi
Asset Controllin
Current Date =
In this case:
Estimated Remaini
Estimated Remaini

Summary workspac
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calculate
If the Remainin
conservative (i.e., s
If Remaining L
conservative TML
system will find the
Remaining Life wil
Note that the Asset

page. In addition, th
Calculated Remain
any other calculatio
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calc Adj

calculated for all A
the Asset Average C
For example, if an E
Analysis records ha
5 months
12 months
14 months
The Asset Calc Adj
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Controlli

settings have been c
If the Apply CC
Date.
If the Apply CC
Date.

box.
The Projected T-Mi

Asset Corrosion An
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calculate

The Asset Calculate
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calculate
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset C
The Asset Calc Adj

included in the TM
these TMLs.
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Asset Calc Adj
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Projecte
The equipment or c
TM Analysis. The P
1/1/2008
1/1/2010
1/1/2007
The Projected T-Mi
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
About T
The calculations in
these calculations a
workspace on the T
The following imag
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Types o
The following corro
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C
Maximum Histo
Asset Average C
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
TML C
The TML controllin

For example, consi
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C
In this case, the TM
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C
The TML controllin
If a corrosion rate c
If all of the calculat

corrosion rate will b
Note: The Minimum

individual Thicknes
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Long Te
Long Term Corrosi

Rate will be calcula
The Long Term Co
Long Term Corrosi

...where:
Long Term Loss =
...and:
Long Term Interval
For example, consi
In this case:
Long Term Corrosi
Note: The Meridium
Because the Long T

calculated. If two o
be calculated but th
The following diag
Note: The Long Ter
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Short T
Short Term Corrosi

Location record on
Measurement Loca
The Short Term Co
Short Term Corrosi

...where:
Short Term Loss =
...and:
Short Term Interval
For example, consi
In this case:
Short Term Corrosi
Short Term Corrosi
Note: The Meridiu
Because the Short T

Thickness Measure
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Least Sq
The Least Squares

the squares of the o
Represented graphi
The line on the plot

using the standard l
y = -0.0113x + 0.18
Solving for y, the s
Note: The Least Sq

should be used.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Maximu
The Maximum His

Maximum Historic
For example, consi
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C

calculated as:
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C
Then the Maximum
Short Term Cor
Long Term Cor
Least Squares C
Then the Maximum
Note: The Maximu

that have ever been
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset Av
The Asset Average

or TML Group reco
It is specified th
-and-
The Apply CCR
These specification
specifications.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Types o
The following Nex
Interval Next In
Factor Remaini
Scheduled Next
Asset Average C
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Interval
The Interval Next I
The Interval Next I

Settings window.
Using the Default I
Interval Next Inspe
For example, if the
Interval Next Inspe
Interval Next Inspe
Note: The Interval
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Factor R
The Factor Remain

Equipment or TML
If a TML is below t
Location record), th
Factor Remaining L
If the Remaining L
Factor Remaining L
For example, assum

next inspection in 1
updated. To do this
Remaining Life
Remaining Life
Current Date =
Using these values,
Factor Remaining L
Factor Remaining L
Note: The Factor R
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Schedul
The Scheduled Nex
If the analysis s
Interval Nex
Factor Remaini
If the analysis s
If the analysis s
If the analysis s
Date.
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset Av
The Asset Average
It is specified th
-and-
The Apply CCR
The Asset Average

values in the calcul
The specifications l
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Remain
Remaining Life rep

TML Corrosion An
Remaining Life = (
For example, consi
Last Measurem
T-Min = .18 inc
TML controllin
Given these values,
Remaining Life
Remaining Life
Remaining Life
Note that the Rema
Note: If a T-Min va
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Estimat
Estimated Remaini
This value is calcul
Estimated Remaini
in service.
Estimated Remaini
For example, consi
Last Measurem
Remaining Life
Current Date =
In this case:
Estimated Remaini
Estimated Remaini
Estimated Remaini
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset Av
The Asset Average
It is specified th
-and-
The Apply CCR

The Asset Average
Asset Average Cor
The Asset Average
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Retirem
The Retirement Da
Remaining Life. In
Retirement Date =
For example, consi
Last Measurem
Remaining Life
In this case:
Retirement Date =
Retirement Date =
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Asset Av
The Asset Average
It is specified th
-and-
The Apply CCR

The Asset Average
Asset Average Cor

The Asset Average
V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyri
Projecte
The Projected T-Mi
Projected T-Min Da
For example, consi
wable Working Pressure formula that is used by default for ALL piping TMLs. If desired, you can define
ing that value by the number of measurements.
lue. If any of the values fall outside of the acceptable range, the value in the Readings Pass/Fail field will be
n within individual Thickness Measurement records and setting the Readings Pass/Fail field in those records.
esired, however, you can create custom rules to perform additional adjustment or correction calculations.
within a given amount of time, you can use measurement variance as a means for validating measurement
red but not saved, that data will be used as the previous Measurement Value instead of the stored Last
means for validating measurement data with corrosion rate is not consistent with the expected rate. In
of the acceptable range will be flagged via the Verify Measurement field as requiring manual validation.
t is created for a Thickness Measurement Location record.
d will be populated with a value based upon the validation that has been performed on the newly entered
n rate variance allow you to evaluate the measurement data that has been entered to ensure that it falls within
hat exists for the purposes of the measurement variance evaluation. This value will not exist in the TML
The TM Analysis page displays only some of the fields that are stored in the Asset Corrosion Analysis record.
tions are stored in a TML Corrosion Analysis record, which is created and linked to each Thickness
ed or calculated automatically based upon other values in the Thickness Measurement Location record and
rement Location records, and some fields may not behave exactly as described in the table. Note that fields
hen the Thickness Measurement Location record is created but can be modified after the Thickness
reated, if necessary.
Stress field. Meridium APM provides an interface that allows you to look up the Allowable Stress value for
d based upon other values that are stored in the same record.
kness Measurement Location record and its associated Thickness Measurement records and analysis settings
er this field is set to True, the Meridium APM system knows that an analysis must be performed and
ement Location datasheet.
p) field is populated with a list of values that come from the Piping Stress, PV Stress, or Tank Stress
ue selected in the Design Code field. This value is used for looking up the Allowable Stress value for the
populated with a list of years that exist in Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records and correspond to the
ckness Measurement Location record. The value in the Code Year (T-Min Formula) field is used for
or calculating the T-Min and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure values.
grid, as determined by the number of rows and columns, determines how many measurement values will be
the Corroded Area Width represent the overall size of the corroded area.
grid, as determined by the number of rows and columns, determines how many measurement values will be
the Corroded Area Width represent the overall size of the corroded area.
surement Location records that are linked to Equipment or TML Group records that represent tanks or
System Codes that exist in the DSCD System Code Table. The value in the Design Code field is used to
Thickness Measurement Location record. The MI_ASSET_TYPE System Code Table contains references to
e Table. Meridium APM is able to use these references to derive the equipment type associated with each
Measurement Location record and displays the value that is defined via the Exclude TMLs feature.
itoring Inspector Security Group can exclude Thickness Measurement Location records from an analysis.
pection workflows and is not used in any calculations.
equipment is insulated. Note that this field serves as a visual indicator only; it does not control or affect any
es in the Corroded Area Columns and Corroded Area Rows fields will create a corroded area "grid" that you
escription of the TMLs location on the piece of equipment or component. When creating a new Thickness
d type a description that will help you and others locate this TML on the piece of equipment or component.
manually by typing the desired value in this field, or it can be calculated on the T-Min Calculations page. If
e of 0 (zero) will be used in any calculations that use the T-Min value.
T-Min value for the Thickness Measurement Location record has been saved.
s field in a Thickness Measurement Location record that is not linked to any Thickness Measurement
Measurement Data Entry page, the Measurement Value cell for that Thickness Measurement Location record
meric values between 1 (one) and 26.
lue if the Thickness Measurement Location record has never been renewed.
utomatically whenever the Status Indicator is changed. When a Thickness Measurement Location record is
he name of the Security User who created the Thickness Measurement Location record.
utomatically whenever the Status Indicator is changed. When a Thickness Measurement Location record is
of values from the MI_STATUS_INDICATOR System Code Table. In the baseline Meridium APM
us Changed By and Status Changed Date will be updated automatically.
Inactive, values will be deleted from the following fields in the associated TML Corrosion
asurement Location records that are linked to Equipment or TML Group records that represent tanks or
, T-Min cannot be calculated for the Thickness Measurement Location record.
list of values that are stored in the Corrosion Inspection Type field in all Corrosion Analysis Settings
pment or TML Group record to which the Thickness Measurement Location record is linked. In the baseline
m Codes in the System Code Table CITP (Corrosion Inspection Type). By default, this System Code Table
diographic thickness) are provided for customers who want to classify Thickness Measurement Location
then perform calculations on each set of Thickness Measurement Location records.
do not wish to classify Thickness Measurement Location record according to inspection type and instead
System Code Table if you want to use custom TML Analysis Types.
r the Thickness Measurement Location record is first saved based upon the Component ID Field setting for
is field is disabled throughout TM so that this value cannot be modified.
al information that is necessary to record about the TML. This field is used for informational purposes only.
n a Thickness Measurement Location record is created. Note that the TML ID field will be color-coded if
s certain conditions.
be populated automatically based upon other values in the Thickness Measurement and Thickness
ment records, and some fields may not behave exactly as described in the table. Note that fields are listed in
entered using the corroded area grid only. You should not add or modify values in this field by
ent Location record has three Active Thickness Measurement records, when the Thickness Measurement
, the Historical Sequence Number of those three Thickness Measurements will be set to 1 (one). If the
rd is renewed again, the Historical Sequence Number of any Thickness Measurement records that are Active
onal information about the measurement. This field is used for informational purposes only.
copied to the Measurement ID field when the Thickness Measurement record is saved. Note that if you
ess Measurement family and update existing Record IDs, values in the Measurement ID field will not be
ment records until those records are saved.
s of individual(s) who have been granted the TM Technician role.
ment record, if you have been granted the TM Technician role, the value is set by default to your name. You
her name in the list.
Taken By field specifies that the list is restricted, meaning that you cannot type your own value in the list. If
make the list unrestricted, you will be able to type a value in this field, and save it with the Thickness
s Measurement record was created, or it may be a different date, particularly if the Thickness Measurement
measurement was physically recorded.
ue in the Measurement Status Indicator field is changed, either manually or automatically (e.g., when the
record is renewed).
re flagged as Inactive are not used for performing TML Corrosion Analysis calculations.
ng that was taken physically or that was recorded based upon a design code or specification. In the baseline
eld is populated automatically with the value in the Uncorrected Measurement field.
stem Codes in the MI_YES System Code Table.
will be set automatically to Inactive after two, subsequent Actual Thickness Measurement records have been
ds that are marked as Inactive will not be used for performing TML Corrosion Analysis calculations. This
hickness Measurements exist, Nominal Thickness Measurements will no longer be used in calculations.
be ID on the default Thickness Measurement datasheet, which you can access on the TM
ID field on the datasheet should not be confused with the Instrument Probe field, which identifies the actual
rded in the Readings field corresponds to the value in the Number of Readings field in the Thickness
h the Thickness Measurement record is linked.
stem Codes in the MI_PASS_FAIL_ONLY System Code Table.
enever the value in the Status Indicator field changes.
t, stores the value entered by the user. This field is provided so that custom rules can be developed, if
will adjust the measurement value based upon the temperature at which the reading was taken.
meant to serve as an intermediate storage location between the Readings and Measurement Value fields. If
r the Measurement Value field so that the Uncorrected Measurement value is adjusted based upon additional
n becomes the value in the Measurement Value field.
stem Codes in the MI_YES_NO System Code Table.
ment or TML Group record in a TM Analysis. If you select the Auto Manage Tasks check box on the Global
ased Inspection license is not active, you should enable the Auto Manage Tasks setting.
ks check box.
roup record that is included in the analysis.
Meridium APM Catalog: \\Public\Meridium\Modules\Thickness Monitoring\Queries.
can click any hyperlinked Task ID to open the Task record in the Record Manager.
the Meridium Reference Table records that are used in Thickness Monitoring, how they are used, and notes
u can use the baseline records as they are delivered, or you can modify them to suit your specific needs. Like
llowing Thickness Monitoring Rules Lookup records.
ne custom calculations by:
in values. Since the baseline Meridium APM product does not include any records in the Piping Nominal Talues in the corresponding fields in Piping Nominal T-Min records to find the associated Nominal T-Min
apping with be used only if that field is selected to be used for Nominal T-Min retrieval according to the
hat corresponds with the value Piping in the Asset Type field.
APM will map values from fields in the Thickness Measurement Location records to values in the
th the value Pressure Vessel in the Asset Type field.
um, Inc. provides, when you look up Allowable Stress values, the Meridium APM system will map values
Welded Shell in the Tank Type field.
idium, Inc. provides, when you look up Allowable Stress values, the Meridium APM system will map values
e Material Specification, Material Grade, and Design Code match exactly the values in the Thickness
Grade, and Design Code, Meridium APM then evaluates Design Temperature.
kness Measurement Location record that contains the following values:
d T-Min.
on whether or not the Global Preferences specify that interpolation should be used.
nd stress values that make up a range that includes the TML Design Temperature.
tress at 150 degrees can be calculated using the following formula:
ture value in the temperature range that includes the TML Design Temperature.
Meridium APM will use the record that contains the most conservative, or lowest, Allowable Stress value.
653 in the Design Code field and Annular Ring in the Tank Type field.
ds. After these records exist, when you calculate T-Min values, Meridium APM will use these records to
ur implementation.
e parameters following the path.
Thickness Monitoring Functions page. This path does not accept any parameters.
TM Administrative Tasks page. This path does not accept any parameters.
Find Items window, where you can perform a search to locate the Equipment or TML Group
cord you want to open on the TM Analysis page. In addition, this path accepts parameters that let you access
e TM analysis for a specific entity.
cord for which to open the associated archived analysis. In addition, this path accepts parameters that let you
cess the archived analyses for a specific entity.
erves as the path for accessing analysis plots. This path accepts parameters that let you customize the URL.
cord for which to perform a bulk analysis. This path accepts parameters that let you customize the URL.
Select a Device and Properties dialog box.
erves as the path for accessing the TM TMLs/ Measurements page. This path accepts parameters that let you
ustomize the URL.
Find Items window, where you can find an Equipment or TML Group record for which to
Exclude TMLs dialog box. In addition, this path accepts parameters that let you access the Exclude
dialog box for a specific piece of equipment.
cord that you want to open on the TM Measurement Data Entry page. The path accepts parameters to let you
ustomize the URL.
erves as the path for accessing pages where you can set TM preferences. This path accepts parameters that let
ou customize the URL.
cord you want to open on the TM Quick View page. This path accepts parameters that let you access the TM
page for a specific Equipment or TML Group record.
erves as the path for accessing the T-Min Calculator. The path accepts parameters that let you customize the
ou can perform a search to locate the Equipment or TML Group record whose analysis summary you want to
and must be used only if you want to access the TM analysis for one or more specific Equipment or TML
FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more than one Equipment or TML Group record. For every FamilyKey
esponding EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For example,
ey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
ey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
only if you specify more than one value for the EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
mine the Family Key automatically.
The Summary Analysis configured explorer will be used even if this parameter is omitted.
and is needed only when more than one root Equipment record is displayed in the TM Explorer pane. If
ecords are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment record will be selected.
used to determine the selection of TML Group records.
le FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more than one Equipment or TML Group record. For every FamilyKey
corresponding EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For
1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
yKey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
red only if you specify more than one value for the EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
termine the Family Key automatically.
le FamilyKey/EntyKey pairs to open more than one Equipment or TML Group record. For every FamilyKey
corresponding EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For
1,2,3&EntyKey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
yKey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
nal and is needed only when more than one root Equipment record is displayed in the TM Explorer pane. If
nt records are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment or TML Group record will be
lso use the other. In other words, the URL should contain no parameters or both parameters listed in the
g to the family specified by the FamilyKey parameter.
ed only if you specify more than one value for the EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
ermine the Family Key automatically.
2, and 3, respectively) or FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family,
equired when View=EquipmentFamily.
y: Displays the Asset Family Preferences
splays the Common Data Field Mappings
he Global Preferences page.

the Reset User Preferences page.
the TM Color-Coding Preferences page.
. Note that the parameter value is case sensitive and must be used exactly as shown: MasterDetail.
. This parameter is optional. The TMLs and Measurements configured explorer will be used even if this
. If you define this parameter, however, you must also define the FamilyKey parameter.
only if you specify more than one value for the EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
mine the Family Key automatically.
and is needed only when more than one root Equipment record is displayed in the TM Explorer pane. If
ecords are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment record will be selected.
used to determine the selection of TML Group records.
ou specify should be for the family to which the specified entity belongs.
milies, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or FamilyKey=1,1,1&EntyKey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same
d. Note that the parameter value is case sensitive and must be used exactly as shown: DataEntry.
al. If you define this parameter, however, you must also define the FamilyKey parameter.
rresponding EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For example,
Key=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
Key=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
d only if you specify more than one value for the EntyKey parameter. If you specify a single Entity Key,
rmine the Family Key automatically.
rresponding EntyKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records. For example,
Key=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
Key=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
al. The Measurement Data Entry configured explorer will be used even if this parameter is omitted.
al and is needed only when more than one root Equipment record is displayed in the TM Explorer pane. If
records are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment or TML Group record will be
e used to determine the selection of TML Group records.
le FamilyKey/EntityKey pairs to open more than one Equipment or TML Group record. For every
e must be a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records.
ey=1,2,3&EntityKey=1,2,3 (records 1,2, and 3 belong to different families, 1,2, and 3, respectively) or
ityKey=1,2,3 (entities 1,2, and 3 belong to the same family, 1).
termine the Family Key automatically.
e must be a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records.
nal. The Quick View configured explorer will be used even if this parameter is omitted.
nt records are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment record will be selected.
be used to determine the selection of TML Group records.
must be a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records.
ermine the Family Key automatically.
must be a corresponding EntityKey value, and vice versa, even if the FamilyKey is the same for all records.
nal. The T-Min Calculator configured explorer will be used even if this parameter is omitted.
nt records are displayed and this parameter is omitted, the first Equipment record will be selected.
be used to determine the selection of TML Group records.
he term TML controlling corrosion rate is used.
uipment, the term equipment controlling corrosion rate is used.
ents.

MIWP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MIWP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

About the Mechanical Integrity Work

Allows you to gather the data that is required to perform a

Allows you to identify and quantify the types and locations of

Allows you to calculate risk for equipment and their

Execute the strategy. Allows you to perform recommended inspection or test

Allows you to evaluate existing data to obtain better

Risk Based Inspection (RBI)

Thickness Monitoring (TM)

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Mechanical Integrity System

Risk Based Inspection (RBI)

Thickness Monitoring (TM)

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

First-Time Deployment Workflow

Configure the Risk Based Inspection

Configure the Inspection Management

Configure the Thickness Monitoring

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Risk Based Inspection

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Mechanical Integrity User Instructions

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Navigating Mechanical Integrity

The navigation bar displays the following levels:

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Displays the text Undefined System if the value Undefined Unit is

Directly to the Functional Location record selected in the Unit list

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Work Process Level

button that is displayed to the left of each option using the

Corresponding step(s) in the

Collect Asset Data

Collect or Update Asset Data

Define DMs and Perform

Perform Risk Analysis

Define Mitigation Strategy

Evaluate and Communicate Results

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

Pages that Display the Navigation Bar

RBI Asset View

RBI Component List

RBI Export and Import

RBI System List

RBI Unit View

Inspection History Summary Query

Inspection Manage Documents

Inspection Manage Tasks

Manage Work Packs

Published Inspection Documents

Review and Approve Inspection

TM Initial Measurement Data Entry Yes

TM Measurement Data Entry

V3.6.0.0.0 - Copyright 1993-2014 Meridium, Inc. All rights reserved.

About Navigation Bar Submenus

Entity family permissions

Collect Asset Data

Defined DMs and Perform Risk Analysis

RBI Asset View page

View permissions to the

Define Mitigation Strategy

Manage Work Packs View permissions to the

Task List page

View permissions to the

View permissions to the